Intecont Plus

INTECONT® PLUS Operating Instructions

DE GB FR IT ES NL SE RU CS HU CZ BG

BV-H2007AA

Bedienungshinweise Operating instructions Instructions de service Istruzioni per l’uso Instrucciones de uso Bedieningsinstructie Manöverhänvisningar Óêàçàíè ïî ïîë¾çâàíèþ Vaga za traku Kezelési útmutató Návod k obsluze Óêàçàíèÿ çà ðàáîòà

Bandwaage Belt Weigher Bascule Intégratice Bilancia per nastro Báscula de cinta Bandweger Bandvåg Kîíâåéåðíûå Âåñû Uputstva za upravljanje Szállítószalag-mérleg Pásová váha Ëåíòîâà âåçíà

Service

Service

Qualität und Zuverlässigkeit sind die Grundlagen der Schenck Process Unternehmensphilosophie, weltweit. Deshalb bieten wir Ihnen ein umfangreiches Service-Konzept, von der strengen Qualitätskontrolle über die Montage und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur lückenlosen Betreuung an. Wir sind jederzeit für Sie da!

Quality and reliability form the basis for Schenck Process corporate philosophy all over the world. That’s why we offer you an extensive service strategy starting with our stringent quality control through assembly and commissioning right down to all-round support. We’re always there for you.

Helpdesk - kostenfrei

Free Helpdesk

(Mo. - Fr., mindestens 8.00 – 17.00 Uhr MEZ)

(Monday through Friday from at least 8 o’clock to 5 p.m. CET)

Während unserer normalen Bürozeiten stehen Ihnen in jedem Geschäftsbereich Service-Spezialisten zur Problemfall- / Störfallanalyse zur Verfügung.

Service specialists are available to you in every department during our normal office hours for analying problems and malfunctions.

Heavy Industry

Vibrating & Screening Technology

Building materials, mining, foundry, steel and cement T +49 61 51 - 32 31 38 F +49 61 51 - 32 32 70 [email protected]

T +49 61 51 - 1531 35 25 F +49 61 51 - 1531 30 96 [email protected]

Light Industry

Spare Parts & Components

Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and pharmaceuticals T +49 61 51 - 1531 25 72 F +49 61 51 - 1531-26 68 [email protected]

T +49 61 51 - 1531 17 58 F +49 61 51 - 1531 36 32 [email protected] [email protected]

Transport Automation All industries with logistics processes and trains T +49 61 51 - 1531 24 48 F +49 61 51 - 1531 13 69 [email protected]

Individuelles Telefon Consulting – kostenpflichtig

Individual phone consulting (fee required)


(Monday through Friday from at least 8 o’clock to 5 p.m. CET)

Sie wünschen eine Inbetriebnahme mit telefonischer Unterstützung eines Service-Spezialisten oder eine Online-Diagnose / Optimierung Ihres Systems? Wir sind für Sie da. Planen Sie mit uns Ihren Wunschtermin.

Do you want one of our service specialists to give you phone support in commissioning your system or on-line diagnosis / system optimisation? We’re there for you. Schedule an appointment with us whenever you need it.

Kundenservice 24h Notfall-Hotline – kostenfrei

Free 24 h Customer Service Hotline

Sie haben einen Stör- / Problemfall außerhalb unserer normalen Arbeitszeiten. Kein Problem, Sie können auch außerhalb unserer Bürozeiten jederzeit einen Schenck-Servicemitarbeiter zur Problem- / Störfallannahme, Service-Disposition und ‚Ersten Hilfe’ erreichen.

You have a malfunction or problem outside of our normal business hours. No problem. You can reach a Schenck service technician at any time outside of our office hours for recording problems or malfunctions, service scheduling and ‘first aid’.

24h Notfall-Hotline:

24h Emergency-Hotline :

+49 172 – 650 17 00 Transport Automation und statische WägetechnikTransport +49 171 – 225 11 95 Heavy Industry, Light Industry ohne statische Wägetechnik

+49 172 – 650 17 00 Automation and Static Weighing Equipment +49 171 – 225 11 95 Heavy Industry, Light Industry excluding Static Weighing Equipment

Copyright 2007 Schenck Process GmbH Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany www.schenckprocess.com Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Jegliche Vervielfältigung dieser Dokumentation, gleich nach welchem Verfahren, ist ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Schenck Process GmbH, auch auszugsweise, untersagt.

All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation, regardless of method, without prior permission by Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.

Änderungen ohne vorherige Ankündigung bleiben vorbehalten.

Subject to change without prior notice.

Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung

Note: Translation of the original instructions

Contents

VBW

Contents DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 FRANÇAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ESPAÑOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SVENSKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PÓÑÑÊÈÉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ÈESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ÁÚËÃÀÐÑÊÈ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 © Schenck Process

I

VBW

Contents

- Reserved for user’s notes -

II

BV-H2007AA / 0502

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions © Schenck Process

VBW

DEUTSCH H2

LAUFMELDUNG, BETRIEBSSTATUS EREIGNISMELDUNGEN Z1 = FOERDERMENGE I = FOERDERSTAERKE

kg/m

L2

QUITTIEREN BETRIEBSBEREIT

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

FUNKTION ABBRECHEN

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM

C1 L4

kg/h

M

MIN MAX

EINGABE VORBEREITEN

AUS EIN

H1 L1

FUNKTION STARTEN

S2

ZAEHLER LOESCHEN

EREIGNISMELDUNGEN

UNTERE ANZEIGE VORWAEHLEN

FUNKTIONSVERTEILER

gB U T

START/STOP Ein- bzw. Ausschalten

wenn vorgewählt

SCROLL

Untere Anzeige und Funktionen vorwählen 1. Zähler Z2, Z3 4. Bandbeladung Q 2. Förderstärke I 5. Bandgeschwindigkeit v 3. Förderstärke Ir in %

i

RESET

Zähler löschen 1. Nr. des gewünschten Zählers eingeben (1 oder 2 ) 2. Mit Taste ENTER Eingabe bestätigen 3. oder mit Taste ESCAPE Eingabe abbrechen 4. oder mit Taste DELETE falsche Eingabe löschen

G

FUNCTION

Funktionsverteiler und Ereignismeldungen aufrufen 1. Mit Tasten SCROLL gewünschte Funktion wählen. Liegt ein Ereignis vor, ist schon die Funktion “Ereignisse zeigen” vorgewählt. 2. Mit ENTER Funktion aktivieren. 3. Mit den Tasten SCROLL können nacheinander alle vorliegenden Ereignismeldungen eingesehen werden. 4. Rücksprung zu den Normalanzeigen mit ESCAPE.

O N f

DELETE

Ereignismeldungen quittieren, Eingaben löschen.

ESCAPE

Funktion abbrechen und Rücksprung zu den Normalanzeigen.

ENTER

Eingabe bestätigen Funktionen starten, z.B. Ereignisse anzeigen (siehe bei FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Eingabe vorbereiten, z.B. Parameter


1

VBW

Reserved for user’s notes

2

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

ENGLISH RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS

H2

EVENT MESSAGES Z1 = FEED AMOUNT I

kg/m

= FEED RATE

L2

ACKNOWLEDGE READY

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

ABORT FUNCTION

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM MIN STOP

PREPARE ENTRY

START

L1 kg/h

M

MAX

H1

C1 L4

START FUNCTION

S2

RESET COUNTER

PRESELECT LOWER DISPLAY

EVENT MESSAGES

FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

gB U T

START/STOP if preselected SCROLL

Select lower display line and functions (1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q (2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v (3) Feed rate Ir in %

i

RESET

Reset counter(s) (1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2). (2) Use ENTER key to acknowledge (3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input (4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits

G

FUNCTION

Call function distributor and event messages (1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function If an event is available, “Display Event” function is preselected (2) ENTER key lets you activate function (3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other (4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays

O N f

DELETE

Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs

ESCAPE

Abort function and return to normal displays

ENTER

Acknowledge input start functions, e.g. Display Events (see “FUNCTION”)

P

DATA

Prepare input, e.g. parameters


3

VBW


4

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

FRANÇAIS SIGNALISATION DE MARCHE, ETAT DE FONCTIONNEMENT

H2

SIGNALISATION D'EVENEMENT Z1 = QUANTITE TOLALISEE I = DEBIT

kg/m

L2

ACOUITTER PRET AU SERVICE

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

H3 L3

ROMPRE FONCTION

ALARM MIN ARRET

MARCHE M.A.Z. COMPTEUR MENU DE FONCTION

PREPARER L'ENTREE

L1 kg/h

M

MAX

H1

C1 L4

LANCER FONCTION

S2 PRESELECTIONNER AFFICHAGE INFERIEUR

SIGNALISATION D' EVENEMENTS

gB U T

START/STOP Marche ou Arrêt

si prédéterminé

SCROLL

Sélectionner l’affichage inférieur et fonctions 1. Compteur Z2, Z3 4. Charge sur la bande Q 2. Débit I 5. Vitesse de la bande v 3. Débit Ir en %

i

RESET

Effacement compteur 1. Sélectionner compteur désiré N°. 1 ou 2 2. Avec la touche ENTER confirmer l’entrée 3. ou avec la touche ESCAPE interrompre l’entrée 4. ou avec la touche DELETE effacer les mauvaises entrées

G

FONCTION

Sélectionner le menu des fonctions et annonces événements 1. Avec les touches SCROLL choisir la fonction souhaitée Si un événement se présente, la fonction “indiquer évén.” est déjà sélectionnée 2. Valider la fonction avec ENTER 3. Avec les touches SCROLL on peut consulter les annonces d’événements existantes les unes après les autres 4. Retour aux affichages normaux avec ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Acquittement des annonces d’événements, effacement entrée

ESCAPE

Arrêter la fonction et retour aux affichages normaux

ENTER

Valider l’entrée Démarrer les fonctions, par ex. indiquer les événements (voir sous FONCTION)

P

DATA

Préparer une entrée, par ex. Paramètre


5

VBW


6

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

ITALIANO H2

OPERAZ. IN CORSO. STATO FUNZ. MESS. DI EVENTO Z1 = QAT`TOTALIZZ.

kg/m

I = PORTATA

L2 CONFERMA

PRONTO AL. FUNZ.

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

INTERR. FUNZIONI

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALLARME MIN MAX

INTROD. VAL. IMP.

ON AZZER. TOTALIZZ.

L1 kg/h

M OFF

H1

C1 L4

AVVIO FUNZIONI

S2 PREFISS. INDICAZ. IMP.

MESSAGGI EVENTO

MENU INDIR. FUNZIONI

gB T

START/STOP Inserire o disinserire SCROLL

Selezionare display inferiore e funzioni 1. Totalizzatori Z2, Z3 4. Caricamento del nastro Q 2. Portata I 5. Velocità del nastro v 3. Portata Ir in %

i

RESET

Azzerare totalizzatore 1. Introdurre n° del totalizzatore desiderato (1 o 2 ) 2. Con il tasto ENTER confermare l’introduzione 3. oppure con il tasto ESCAPE interrompere l’introduzione 4. oppure con il tasto DELETE cancellare l’introduzione errata

G

FUNCTION

Richiamare il menu di indirizzamento funzioni e i messaggi di evento 1. Con i tasti SCROLL scegliere la funzione desiderata In presenza di un evento è già prefissata la funzione “Indicare eventi” 2. Con ENTER attivare la funzione 3. Con i tasto SCROLL è possibile fare visualizzare in successione tutti i messaggi di evento presenti 4. Ritorno alle indicazioni normali con ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Confermare i messaggi di evento, cancellare le introduzioni

ESCAPE

Interrompere la funzione e ritornare alle indicazioni normali

ENTER

Confermare l’introduzion Avviare le funzioni, ad es. visualizzare gli eventi (cf. sotto FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Preparare l’introduzione, ad es. parametri

se selezionata


7

VBW


8

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

ESPAÑOL H2

MENSAJE DE FUNCIONAMIENTO, ESTADO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO, AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS Z1 = CANTIDAD TRASNPORTADA I = RENDIMIENTO

kg/m

L2

CONFIRMAR LISTO PARA OPERACIÓN

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

CANCELAR FUNCIÓN

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM MIN MAX

PREPARAR ENTRADA

ON

BORRAR CONTADOR

L1 kg/h

M OFF

H1

C1 L4

INICIAR FUNCIÓN

S2 PRESELECCIONAR INDICACIÓN ANTERIOR

AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS

DISTRIBUIDOR DE FUNCIONES

gB U T

START/STOP Conexión o desconexión

si se ha preseleccionado

SCROLL

Preseleccionar la indicación inferior y las funciones 1. Contadores Z2, Z3 4. Carga de la cinta Q 2. Rendimiento I 5. Velocidad de cinta v 3. Rendimiento Ir en %

i

RESET

Borrar contador 1. Introducir Nº del contador deseado (1 o 2 ) 2. Con la tecla ENTER confirmar la introducción 3. o con la tecla ESCAPE cancelar la introducción 4. o con la tecla DELETE borrar la introducción errónea

G

FUNCTION

Activar el distribuidor de funciones y los avisos de acontecimientos 1. Seleccionar la función deseada con las teclas SCROLL Si hay un acontecimiento, ya está preseleccionada la función “INDIC. ACONTECIM.” 2. Activar la función con ENTER 3. Con las teclas SCROLL pueden examinarse uno tras otro todos los avisos de acontecimientos existentes 4. Regreso a las indicaciones normales con ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Confirmar los avisos de acontecimientos, borrar las introducciones

ESCAPE

Cancelar la función y regresar a las indicaciones normales

ENTER

Confirmar la introducción Iniciar las funciones, p. ej. “INDIC. ACONTECIM.” (véase en FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Preparar la entrada, p. ej. parámetro


9

VBW


10

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

NEDERLANDS Lopende melding, Bedrijfstoestand

H2

Melding van gebeurtenissen Z1 = transporthoeveelheid

kg/m

I = transportsterkte

L2

Kwiteren Bedrijfsklaar

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

Functie stoppen

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM MIN

C1 L4

kg/h

M

MAX

Ingave voorbereiden

Uit In

H1 L1

Functie starten

S2 Teller op nul

Onderste stand kiezen

Storingsmelder

Functieverdeler

0 1 U T

START/STOP In-uitschakelen

wanneer gekozen

SCROLL

Onderste stand en functies kiezen 1. teller Z2,Z3 4. bandbelading Q 2. transportsterkte I 5. bandsnelheid v 3. transportsterkte in %

i

RESET

Teller op nul (wissen) 1. nummer van de gewenste teller ingeven (1 of 2) 2. met toets ENTER ingave bevestigen 3. of met toets ESCAPE ingaves stoppen 4. of met toets DELET foutieve ingave wissen

G

FUNCTION

Functieverdeler en storingsmelder oproepen 1. met de toets SCROLL de gewenste functie kiezen. Bij bepaalde gebeurtenissen storingen), is de functie “gebeurtenis tonen” reeds gekozen 2. met ENTER functie activeren 3. met de SCROLL toets kunnen één na één alle meldingen van gebeurtenissen geraadpleegd worden 4. terug naar hoofdmenu met ESCAPE

O N f P

DELETE

gebeurtenissen kwiteren, input wissen

ESCAPE

Functie stoppen en terug naar hoofdmenu

ENTER

Inputbevestigen, functie starten, bvb storingen tonen

DATA

Data input voorbereiden, bvb parameter


11

VBW


12

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

SVENSKA H2

DRIFTSMEDDELANDE, DRIFTSSTATUS HÄNDELSEMEDDELANDEN Z1 = MATNINGSMÄNGD I = MATNINGSTJOCKLEK

kg/m

L2

KVITTERA DRIFTSKLAR

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

AVBRYTA FUNKTION

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

LARM

FÖRBERED INMATNING

FRÅN TILL RÄKNARE RADERA

L1 kg/h

M

MIN MAX

H1

C1 L4

STARTA FUNKTION

S2 HÄNDELSEMEDDELANDEN

VÄLJ UNDRE INDIKERING

FUNKTIONSFÖRDELARE

gB U T

START/STOPP Till-resp. Frånkoppling

om förutvalt

SCROLL

Förval av undre indikering och funktioner 1. Räknare Z2, Z3 4. Bandlast Q 2. Matningstjocklek I 5. Bandhastighet v 3. Matningstjocklek Ir i %

i

RESET

Radera räknare 1. Mata in nr. för önskad räknare (1 eller 2 ) 2. Med tangent ENTER bekräfta inmatning 3. eller med tangent ESCAPE avbryt inmatning 4. eller med tangent DELETE radera felaktig inmatning

G

FUNCTION

Ropa upp funktionsfördelare och händelsemeddelanden 1. Välj önskad funktion med tangenterna SCROLL Föreligger en händelse, är redan funktionen “visa händelser” vald 2. Aktivera funktionen med ENTER 3. Med tangenterna SCROLL kan alla föreliggande händelsmeddelanden läsas efter varandra. 4. Återhopp till normalindikeringarna med ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Kvittera händelsemeddelanden. radera inmatningar

ESCAPE

Avbrott av funktionen och återhopp till normalindikeringarna

ENTER

Bekräfta inmatningen starta funktioner, t.ex. indikera händelser (se under FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Förbered inmatning, t.ex. parameter


13

VBW


14

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

PÓÑÑÊÈÉ СООБЩЕНИЕ О ТЕ КУЩЕМ РОЦЕССЕ, СОСТОЯНИЕ ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ СООБЩЕНИЯ О СОБЫТИЯХ

H2

Z1 = КОЛИЧЕСТВО ПОДАВАЕМОГО МАТЕРИАЛА I = ПРОИЗВОДИТЕЛЬНОСТЬ

кг/м

L2

КВИТИРОВАТЬ ГОТОВНОСТЬ К ОПЕРАЦИИ

ON { POWER CPU OK

м/сек

H3 L3

ПРЕРВАТЬ ФУНКЦИЮ

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ТРЕВОГА

H1

C1 L4

L1 кгч

M

МИН. МАКС.

ВЫКЛ.

ВКЛ

СБРОСИЬ СЧЕТЧИК

ПОДГОТОВИТЬ ВВОД

ПУСТИТЬ ФУНКЦИЮ

S2

ПРЕДВЫБРАТЬ НИЖНЮЮ ИНДИКАЦИЮ

СООБЩЕНИЯ О СОБЫТИЯХ

РАСПРЕДЕЛИТЕЛЬ ФУНКЦИЙ

gB U T

START/STOP Âêëþ÷åíèå èëè âûêëþ÷åíèå

ïî ïðåäâûáîðó

SCROLL

Ïðåäâûáðàòü íèæíþþ èíäèêàöèþ è ôóíêöèè 1. Ñ÷åò÷èê Z2, Z3 4. Çàãðóçêà ëåíòû Q 2. Ïðîèçâîäèòåëüíîñòü I 5. Ñêîðîñòü ëåíòû v 3. Ïðîèçâîäèòåëüíîñòü Ir â %

i

RESET

Ñáðîñ ñ÷åò÷èêà 1. Ââåñòè ¹ òðåáóåìîãî ñ÷åò÷èêà 1 èëè 2 2. Ïîäòâåðäèòü ââîä ñ ïîìîùüþ êëàâèøè ENTER 3. Èëè ïðåðâàòü ââîä ïîñðåäñòâîì êëàâèøè ESCAPE 4. Èëè ñòåðåòü íåïðàâèëüíî ââåäåííûå äàííûå ñ ïîìîùüþ êëàâèøè DELETE

G

FUNCTION

Âûçâàòü ðàñïðåäåëèòåëü ôóíêöèé è ñîîáùåíèÿ î ñîáûòèÿõ 1. Âûáðàòü òðåáóåìóþ ôóíêöèþ ñ ïîìîùüþ êëàâèøè SCROLL (ïðîêðóòêà). Ïðè íàëè÷èè ñîáûòèÿ, óæå ïðåäâûáðàíà ôóíêöèÿ “Ïîêàçàòü ñîáûòèÿ” . 2. Àêòèâèçèðîâàòü ôóíêöèþ ñ ïîìîùüþ êëàâèøè ENTER. 3. Êëàâèøè SCROLL ïîçâîëÿþò ïîñëåäîâàòåëüíûé ïðîñìîòð âñåõ èìåþùèõñÿ ñîîáùåíèé î ñîáûòèÿõ. 4. Âîçâðàò ê íîðìàëüíûì èíäèêàöèÿì ñ ïîìîùüþ êëàâèøè ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Êâèòèðîâàòü ñîîáùåíèÿ î ñîáûòèÿõ, ñòåðåòü ââåäåííûå äàííûå

ESCAPE

Ïðåðâàòü ôóíêöèþ è âîçâðàò ê íîðìàëüíûì èíäèêàöèÿì

ENTER

Ïîäòâåðäèòü ââåäåííûå äàííûå Ïóñòèòü ôóíêöèè, íàïðèìåð, ôóíêöèþ ïîêàçàíèÿ ñîáûòèé (ñì. òàêæå FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Ïîäãîòîâèòü ââîä, íàïðèìåð, ïàðàìåòðîâ


15

VBW


16

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

SRPSKI H2

PRIJAVA KRETANJA, STATUS POGONA PRIJAVE DOGAÐAJA Z1 = KOLIČINA KOJA SE TRANSPORTUJE I = INTENZITET TRANSPORTA

SPREMAN ZA POGON

kg/m

L2

KVITIRAT I

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

FUNKCIJU PREKINUTI

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM

MAX ISKLJUČITI UKLJUČITI OBRISATI PODATKE BROJAČA RASPODELJIVAČ FUNKCIJA

gh U T

PRIPREMITI DAVANJE PODATAKA

L1 kg/h

M

MIN

H1

C1 L4

FUNKCIJU STARTOVATI

DONJI POKAZIVAČ PRETHODNO IZABRATI

S2 PRIJAVE DOGAÐAJA

START/STOP Ukljuèiti odn. iskljuèiti ako je prethodno izabrano SCROLL

Donji pokazivaè i funkcije prethodno izabrati Donji pokazivaè i funkcije prethodno izabrati 1. Brojaè Z2, Z3 4. Optereæenje trake Q 2. Intenzitet transporta I 5. Brzina trake v 3. Intenzitet transporta Ir u %

i

RESET

Obrisati podatke brojaèa 1. Dati podatke eljenog brojaèa (1 ili 2) 2. Dirkom ENTER potvrditi davanje podataka 3. ili dirkom ESCAPE prekinuti davanje podataka 4. ili dirkom DELETE obrisati pogrešno date podatake

G

FUNCTION

Raspodeljivaèe funkcija i prijave dogaðaja pozvati 1. Dirkom SCROLL izabrati eljenu funkciju. Ako postoji neki dogaðaj funkcija “Ereignisse zeigen” je veæ prethodno izabrana 2. ENTER-om aktivirati funkciju 3. Dirkama SCROLL mogu se pogledati uzastopce sve postojeæa prijave dogaðaja 4. Povratni skok ESCAPE-om ka normalnim pokazivaèima

O N f

DELETE

Prijave dogaðaja kvitirati, date podatke obrisati

ESCAPE

Funkciju prekinuti i povratni skok u normalne pokazivaèef

ENTER

Davanje podataka potvrditi Funkcije startovati, n.p. pokazati dogaðaje (vidi kod FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Davanje podataka pripremiti, n.p. parametre

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 © SCHENCK PROCESS

17

VBW


18

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

MAGYAR

H2

FUTÁSJEL, ÜZEMÁLLAPOT ESEMÉNYÜZENETEK Z1 = SZÁLLÍTOTT MENNYISÉG I = SZÁLLÍTÓTELJESÍTMÉNY

L2

NYUGTÁZÁS ÜZEMKÉSZ

ON { POWER CPU OK

H3 L3

FUNKCIÓ MEGSZAKÍTÁSA

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

RIASZTÁS MIN MAX

C1 L4

H1 L1

M KI

BEVITEL ELŐKÉSZÍTÉSE

BE

FUNKCIÓ INDÍTÁSA

S2

SZÁMLÁLÓ TÖRLÉS

ALSÓ KIJELZŐ KIVÁLASZTÁSA

ESEMÉNYÜZENETEK

FUNKCIÓINTÉZŐ

gB U T

START/STOP Be- ill. kikapcsolás

ha ki van választva

SCROLL

Alsó kijelzõ és funkciók kiválasztása 1. Számláló Z2, Z3 4. Szalagterhelés Q 2. Szállítóteljesítmény I 5. Szalagsebesség v 3. Szállítóteljesítmény Ir %-ban

i

RESET

Számláló törlés 1. A kívánt számláló számának beírása (1 vagy 2) 2. ENTER gombbal bevitel megerõsítése 3. vagy az ESCAPE gombbal bevitel megszakítása 4. vagy a DELETE gombbal hibás bevitel törlése

G

FUNCTION

Funkcióintézõ és eseményüzenetek felhívása 1. A SCROLL gombokkal kiválasztjuk a kívánt funkciót Ha van esemény, az “Eseményeket mutat” funkció már ki van választva 2. Az ENTER gombbal aktívra váltjuk a funkciót 3. A SCROLL gombokkal egymás után megtekinthetjük az összes aktuális eseményüzenetet 4. Visszatérés a normál kijelzésekre az ESCAPE billentyûvel

O N f

DELETE

Eseményüzenetek nyugtázása, bevitel törlése

ESCAPE

Funkció megszakítása és visszatérés a normál kijelzésekhez

ENTER

Bevitel megerõsítése Funkciók indítása, pl. Eseményeket mutat (lásd a FUNCTION gombnál)

P

DATA

Bevitel elõkészítése, pl. paraméter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 © SCHENCK PROCESS

19

VBW


20

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

ÈESKY

gB U T i

START/STOP Zapnutí popø. Vypnutí (je-li pøedvoleno) SCROLL

Pøedvolba spodního displeje a funkcí 1. Poèítadlo Z2, Z3 4. Zatíení pásu Q 2. Dopravní síla I 5. Rychlost pásu v 3. Dopravní síla Ir v %

RESET

Vymazání poèítadla 1. Zadejte è. poadovaného poèítadla (1 nebo 2 ) 2. Vloený údaj potvrïte pomocí klávesy ENTER 3. nebo zrušte pomocí klávesy ESCAPE 4. nebo vymate pomocí klávesy DELETE

G

FUNCTION

Spuštìní funkèního pøepínaèe a hlášení událostí 1. Pomocí klávesy SCROLL zvolte poadovanou funkci V pøípadì existující události je funkce “Zobrazení události” pøedvolena 2. Pomocí ENTER aktivujte funkci 3. Pomocí klávesy SCROLL je moné prohlédnout si všechna hlášení po sobì 4. Zpìt k standardnímu zobrazení pomocí klávesy ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Potvzení hlášení událostí, vymazání dat

ESCAPE

Pøerušení funkce a návrat ke standardnímu zobrazení

ENTER

Potvrzení vloených dat Spuštìní funkcí, napø. zobrazení událostí (viz. FUNCTION)

P

DATA

Pøíprava vloení dat, napø. parametry


21

VBW


22

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

ÁÚËÃÀÐÑÊÈ

gB U T

START/STOP Âêë. ðåñï. èçêë. SCROLL

Èçáèðàíå íà äîëíîòî ïîêàçàíèå è ôóíêöèè 1. Áðîÿ÷è Z2, Z3 4. Íàòîâàðâàíå íà ëåíòàòà Q 2. Ïðîèçâîäèòåëíîñò I 5. Ñêîðîñò íà ëåíòàòà v 3. Ïðîèçâîäèòåëíîñò Ir â %

i

RESET

Èçòðèâàíå íà áðîÿ÷è 1. Âúâåæäàíå Nr. íà æåëàíèÿ áðîÿ÷ (1 èëè 2 ) 2. Ïîòâúðæäàâàíå íà âúâåæäàíåòî ñ êëàâèøà ENTER 3. Èëè ïðåêúñâàíå íà âúâåæäàíåòî ñ êëàâèøà ESCAPE 4. Èëè èçòðèâàíå íà ïîãðåøíî âúâåäåíè äàííè ñ êëàâèøà DELETE

G

FUNCTION

Èçâèêâàò ñå ðàçïðåäåëèòåëÿ íà ôóíêöèèòå è ñúîáùåíèÿòà çà ñúáèòèÿ 1. Æåëàíàòà ôóíêöèÿ ñå èçáèðà ñ êëàâèøèòå SCROLL àêî èìà íàëèöå íÿêàêâî ñúáèòèå, ôóíêöèÿòà “Ereignisse zeigen” (Ïîêàçâàíå íà ñúáèòèÿ) âå÷å å ïðåäâàðèòåëíî èçáðàíà 2. Ôóíêöèÿòà ñå àêòèâèðà ñ ENTER 3. Ñ êëàâèøèòå SCROLL ìîãàò äà áúäàò âèäÿíè åäèí ñëåä äðóã âñè÷êè íàëè÷íè ñúîáùåíèÿ çà ñúáèòèÿ . 4. Âðúùàíå îáðàòíî êúì íîðìàëíèòå ïîêàçàíèÿ.ñ ESCAPE

O N f

DELETE

Êâèòèðàíå íà ñúîáùåíèÿ çà ñúáèòèÿ, èçòðèâàíå íà âúâåæäàíèÿ

ESCAPE

Ïðåêúñâàíå íà ôóíêöèÿ è âðúùàíå îáðàòíî êúì íîðìàëíèòå ïîêàçàíèÿ

ENTER

Ïîòâúðæäàâàíå íà âúâåæäàíåòî Ñòàðòèðàíå íà ôóíêöèÿòà, íàïð. ïîêàçâàíå íà ñúáèòèÿ (âèæ ïðè FUNCTION (ÔÓÍÊÖÈÈ)

DATA

Ïîòãîòâÿíå íà âúâåæäàíèÿ, íàïð. ïàðàìåòðè

P

àêî å èçáðàíî ïðåäâàðèòåëíî


23

VBW


24

BV-H2007AA / 0502


VBW

Index ÁÚËÃÀÐÑÊÈ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ÈESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ESPAÑOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 FRANÇAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PÓÑÑÊÈÉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


25

VBW


26

BV-H2007AA / 0502


INTECONT® PLUS Belt Weigher Operating Manual

BV-H2214GB

PASS - Service you can rely on. Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire product life cycle. With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever – you need us. It doesn’t matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service. During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures. Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location. Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 171 2 251195

Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment

J +49 172 6 501700

Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

© by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008 Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany J +49 61 51-15 31 0 www.schenckprocess.com All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change. Note: Translation of the original instructions

INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Contents 1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Power ON · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 Signal Lamps· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 Normal Displays · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5 Control In Normal Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5 Event Messages · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6 Function Distributor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 Display Test and Version Number · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 Batching Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9 Visual Make-up · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 11 Keyboard Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 11 Activate/Deactivate EasyServe · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Prefeeder· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Printing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Zero Setting· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 16 Read Parameters · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 17 3 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4

Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

5. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 6. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 7

Setting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Function Distributor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 33 Calibrating Functions· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 34 Belt Circuit LB · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 34 Tare TW· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 35 Weight Check CW · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 36 Set Time · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 38 Simulation Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 38

8 Service Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 9.

Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Preselect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Parameters Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

10 Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 System Messages S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Electrics E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Calibration C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Maximum H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Minimum L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 0837

11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of this documentation are not permitted. Schenck Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership and copyrights.

Technische Redaktion PDE-RD

CONTENTS BV-H2214 GB I - 1

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

How To Operate Your INTECONT· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 85 Mechanical Prerequisites · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 86 Electrical Prerequisites · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 86 Enter Parameters · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 87 Functional Check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 88 Calibration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 89 Check Using Check Weight · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 89 Check Belt Speed · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 90 Check Using Material · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 90 Automatic Zero Setting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 91 Belt Run Monitoring · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 91 Belt Influence Compensation BIC · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 92 Control for Point of Discharge CPD· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 92 Cosine Pendulum · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 93 Test Plug · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 93 12 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Start / Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Batching Without Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Batching With Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Data Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Base Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Weighing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 1. Effective Platform Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 2. Check Weight QPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3. Conveyor Belt Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Printer Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 13 Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP —> INTECONT PLUS VEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

This manual applies to software version:

Edition

VBW 20600-08

: 0837

0837

CONTENTS BV-H2214 GB

I-2



INTECONT PLUS 1

VBW

Overview

What Is The INTECONT:

Display:

INTECONT PLUS is designed as measuring and evaluation system for

5 x 7 - dot matrix with 6 mm character height

Belt Weighers Solids Flow Meters Mass Flow Meters Mass Flow Feeders Weighfeeders Loss-in-weight Feeders

Upper display left : running message right : delivery rate in kg or t Lower display left : event messages right : selectable feed rate, belt speed etc.

Three system versions are available:

Display can be changed over to American units.

1. Without option card (standard)

LEDs:

2. With option card VFE 610V for additional input/outputs and printer

2 green and 3 red LEDs Green LEDs : Ready Red LEDs : Error or limit value messages

3. With option card for fieldbus VSS021V : Modbus/S5 VPB 020V: Profibus VCB020V: DeviceNet VET020V: MODBUS/TCP VET022V: ETHERNET/IP This manual applies to belt weighers using the fully equipped INTECONT variant.

For Further Reading: Fieldbus manual BVH2220 SS-RK512 (3964R) FH 458 Modbus (Comp) FH 525

O E1

Keyboard: Flexible membranes with tactile touch

gB TU i G FUNC O DEL

Start/stop measurement Preselect lower display Select functions Reset counter Call function distributor and event texts Acknowledge event messages Delete input

Z1 = 1 2 0 0 0 kg I = 1 0 0 0 kg/h

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of ownership and copyrights.


Overview BV-H2214 GB 1

VBW

INTECONT PLUS The basic diagram shows all inputs and outputs.

N ESC f ENT P DAT B9 KL

Abort function Start function Acknowledge input Prepare input Enter parameters Enter sign and decimal point

Some Definitions: I

= Feed rate in kg/hr or t/hr Material amount discharged from belt per unit time

Z

= Delivery rate in kg or t Material amount fed out = feed rate x feed time

V

= Belt speed

O

Z1 = 1500 kg I= 100 kg/h

L/C

=

Load cell for acquisition of belt load Q

D

=

Speed transducer

S

=

Belt circuit sensor for automatic belt influence compensation BIC (non-standard)

24 V

=

Power supply

V

=

Speed transducer

Q

=

Load cell

in m/s

Q = Belt load in kg/m Material weight on one belt meter Measuring Principle: Belt load Q and speed V are continuously measured and multiplied. The result is feed rate I used to determine delivery rate. I Q V

in kg/hr in kg/m in m/s

Measurement techniques: n

Precision AC voltage amplifier with continuous correction of zero point and range

n

Highly resolving analog-to-digital converter The integrated method is designed to efficiently suppress line voltage interferences.

n

16-bit microcontroller

n

Unlimited storage of counter configuration and calibration data.

readings,

ANALOG=

Analog output selectable for feed rate, belt load, belt speed

SERIAL =

Serial interfaces for printer and host computer

MIN

Relay output for limit value monitoring Open = MIN value exceeded down

=

0837

Overview BV-H2214 GB

2



INTECONT PLUS MAX

=

Relay output for limit value monitoring Open = MAX value exceeded up Feed rate, belt load, or belt speed, can be monitoring separately for excess of MIN and MAX values.

FAULT

=

Relay output for alarms Open = Alarm

FULL

=

Relay output for full feed in batching mode Closed = full feed

DRIBBLE =

Relay output for dribble feed Closed = dribble feed

MOTOR =

Control output for belt drive Closed = ON

PREF.

Control output for prefeeder Closed = On

=

RELEASE =

Release signal for totalization H = Release

ON/OFF =

Start scale and totalization. High = ON

OFF

Stop Low = STOP

=

VBW

COUNTER= Pulse output for connection of external totalizing counter

For simple measuring tasks, with constant belt speed, speed transducer D can be omitted.

0837



Overview BV-H2214 GB 3

VBW 2

INTECONT PLUS

Control Power ON

Signal Lamps

During power failure Counter readings Counter pulses not yet output Preselected normal displays Service values, e.g. ON-time E1

remain stored for an endless period of time. The internal clock continues running for approx. 5 days. After power-on, display and lamps are automatically tested before version number of system is displayed for some seconds to be then replaced by the normal displays.

E1

Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg I = 0 kg/h

a b

Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg I = 0 kg/h

(green) POWER OK lights if all power supplies are OK. (green) CPU OK lights if microprocessor is ready to operate.

X

(red)

ALARM flashes if an Alarm event is available. In addition, an event code appears in lower display line.

MIN

(red)

MIN LIMIT VALUE lights if feed rate limit value is exceeded down.

MAX

(red)

MAX LIMIT VALUE lights if feed rate limit value is exceeded up.

Message E1 reports power failure and can be defined as ALARM or WARNING. ALARM:

X

and message E1 are Red lamp flashing. To start scale, first acknowledge message. WARNING: Signal lamp

X

remains dark,

message E1 does not flash. Start/stop scale automatically or in manual. No acknowledgement is required.

O

READY: The two green signal lamps must be lit, and no Alarm message available.

Lets you acknowledge event message. 0837

Control BV-H2214 GB

4



INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Normal Displays

Control In Normal Mode

Upper Display Left

g

Start totalization Prerequisite : External release signal available (selectable) START source (B06) set to OP or Keyboard Mode active. Feature : Rotating point in left field of upper display

B

Stop totalization Feature : Point stands still Belt load and belt speed continue being measured.

i

Reset totalizing counters. This function has to be activated with parameters A10 or A11.

Rotating point as running message. Scale has started, totalized amount and feed rate are acquired. In stop state of scale (point stands still) only belt load and belt speed are measured. Totalizing counter Z1

Right Lower Display Left

Event message, alphanumerically coded, e.g. E1 for power failure. Selectable display

Right

TU

Select display

1 O

Z1 = 50 000 kg Z2 = 60 0 kg/h

Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2). Counter no. : _ Counter 3 cannot be reset. In case of overflow, counting resumes from 0.

Counter Z2 Counter Z3 Feed rate Feed rate Belt load Belt load Belt speed Batching displays

Z2 = 6000 Z3 = 1000 I = 1000 Ir = 50.00 Q = 10.000 Qr = 50.0% V = 0.0500 Zb, ZI, Zd, Nb

kg kg kg/hr % 1) kg/m 2) m/s 3)

f N TU O G N

Acknowledge input. Correct faulty input or accidental use of DELETE key. Select lower display (see “Normal Display”). Acknowledge event messages. Call further functions, e.g. display event messages, calibration. Exit function distributor.

1) related to nominal feed rate 2) related to nominal belt load 3) see “Batching Mode”.

Display formats and units of counters Z1, Z2, Z3 and I can be selected separately. 0837



Control BV-H2214 GB 5

VBW

INTECONT PLUS Event Messages

n

WARNING 2

Display permanent, not underscored Acknowledgement: None

Definitions All important scale functions are internally monitored, and faults are reported by event message. For troubleshooting details, see “ Event Messages” item.

E1

n

IGNORE

No event monitoring, save MIN/MAX messages via contact outputs and signal lamps.

If several events occur at the same time, the most significant event is displayed first. Priority: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2

Z1 = 2500 kg I = 0 kg/h

Operation

O Message E1

Power Failure

Group code (e.g. E) and number (e.g. 1) appear in left field of lower display. In addition, an explanatory text can be called up. The events are organized into 4 classes. The assignment between event and class can be selected using relevant parameter. n

ALARM

Display is underscored and flashes. Red signal lamp

X flashes.

Acknowledge events of ALARM and WARNING 1 classes after elimination of fault. If several events are available, acknowledge one after the other.

Display event texts:

G TU f

Call function distributor. Scroll “Show Event” function into lower display field. Select function.

Totalization stops, scale is inoperable. Start: If cause of Alarm has been removed and error message acknowledged. Acknowledgement: If cause of Alarm has not been removed, flashing stops but message is still on display. n

WARNING 1

Control BV-H2214 GB

Display permanent and underscored Totalization goes on. Acknowledgement: If cause of fault is still present, underscores are faded out.

6


0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW H3 v > MAX H4 L/C Input > MAX

1. Event S 2 = O 0 7 No Release

Display shows event name event code and a note

e.g. No Release e.g. S2 e.g. Parameter O07.

The note informs the operator of relevant parameter.

TU N

0837

Minimum L

L1 I < MIN L2 Load < MIN L3 v < MIN L4 L/C Input < MIN

I

=

Feed Rate

V

=

Belt Speed

L/C

=

Load Cell

* Fault on device or cabling

Let you view various events. Return to normal displays.

List of Events

Contact Outputs General Alarm

The events are listed in accordance with display priority.

MIN/MAX Outputs

System messages

S1 S2 S3 S4

Memory Error No Release* Scale Maintenance ON Maintenance Interval Electrics S7 Simulation active S9 Host Communication

Electrics

E1 E2 E3 E6

Material flow

B1 Out of Tolerance B4 BATCH Actual Value MAX

Calibration C

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C7 C8 C9

Maximum H

H1 I > MAX H2 Load > MAX


available until acknowledged independent of event class, active also in IGNORE class. Limit values are reported as long as event is available and only with active scale.

Power Failure Namur Error Tacho* Namur Error Sensor* Error Ext. Event

L/C Input * Tacho Input * Belt Skew Belt Drift Tare Correction > MAX ZERO Time Slip Error Tare Diff > MAX



VBW

INTECONT PLUS Function Distributor

B

= If batching mode is selected, you can access additional functions in main distributor. Abort Batch Deselect Batch Batch Number Print Batch Make-up Next = Belt Empty

The function distributor lets you call further functions, or dialogs.

G

Call function distributor. If no event is available, display shows function selected last.

f N

Start function. Return to normal display and/or abort function.

Function Display Events

S

= Calibrating functions protected by password. Prompt is output after call of function.

E

= If an event is available

Z

= Iif activated via parameter

Moving through function distributor has no effect on weighing functions.

Display Test and Version Number

TU Scroll through function distributor Lets you check displays and signal lamps. Display Events E Test Display START/STOP Prefeeder Z Service Values Batch Number B Print Counter Readings >0< Zero Set START/STOP Keyboard Mode Activate/Deactivate EasyServe Programming Calibrating Functions S Read Parameters Enter Parameters S Load Default Parameters S Print Parameters Status Report Tare S START/STOP Simulation Check Weight S Imp/Belt Circuit S Set Time S

G TU f

Call display test. 1. Display elements flash rhythmically. 2. Version number is displayed for apr. 3 s. Test terminates automatically.

INTECONT PLUS VBW 20600-00 2482

Example: VBW 20600-00

: Belt Weigher : Version number

Programming and calibrating functions lead to further menus you can move through using cursor keys.

Control BV-H2214 GB

8


0837


INTECONT PLUS Batching Mode

Select Batching Mode Selection of batching mode enables batching, however, no batch is started yet. Condition: scale OFF and function activated via parameter A07.

Additional Displays

O

VBW

Call function distributor.

G TU f

Z1 = 2500 kg ZI = 400 kg

Scroll “Select Batch” into display field. Select function.

Upper display :

If batching mode is selected, a totals sign is displayed left of running message.

System prompts for input of batch setpoint. If batch is selected from external PC, setpoint input is omitted.

Lower display :

Use cursor keys to scroll 4 additional values into display field.

Enter Setpoint

U

1. Zb = Batch setpoint 2. ZI = Batch actual value Amount already discharged 3. Zd = Batch residual value Amount not yet discharged Zd = Zb - ZI

Setpoint prompt is output automatically upon selection or can be started in manual when batch is complete (scale OFF). If batching mode is deselected or a batch is running, no input is possible. When presetting batch setpoint via fieldbus (Parameter I09 Batch Source = FB), no input is possible either. This also applies to the input of batch number and make-up setpoint. Prepare setpoint input.

P 19

Enter setpoint in kg or t Max. 9 digits including decimal point. The unit is that of counter 1.

4. Nb = Consecutive batch number Use “Batch Number” function to set initial value. .

Before a batch starts, ZI and Zd indicate the amounts fed out during previous batch. If you deselect batching mode (Deselect Batch function), displays are disabled but enabled again upon next selection. The display format corresponds to the format of counter 1.

f N O

Setpoint Batch Zb = . . . . . . kg

Acknowledge input. Abort input, old setpoint remains stored. Delete faulty digits.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Start and Abort

g

Make-up Start batch, process starts. Display ZI moves from 0 towards setpoint Display Zd moves from setpoint towards 0.

B

Lets you add a selected amount of material to a batch aborted or complete. Prerequisites : Running batch complete, scale OFF. No batch printout. Display ZI

:

Batch actual setpoint resumes from achieved value.

Abort batch.

Display Zd

:

Batching continues upon next start command.

Batch residual value remains unchanged.

Display Zbn

:

Make-up setpoint

Display Zdn

:

Batch residual value of make-up amount Zdn = Zbn - make-up amount already fed.

Deselect Batch Lets you deselect batching mode, i.e. mode is removed from active functions available. Totals sign disappears from upper display, batching values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb are no longer available, but remain stored. Prerequisites :

Batch complete, or aborted using “Abort Batch” function; scale OFF.

GT f

Call function distributor, select “Deselect Batch” function, and acknowledge.

Use “Select Batch” function to reactivate batching mode. Old values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb can be viewed again.

You can scroll all displays into lower display field using cursor keys. Zdn and Zbn are available only until start of next batch.

GT f

Call function distributor and select “Make-up” function.

P

Until start of make-up, setpoint Zbn can be changed.

gB

Start or abort make-up

Acknowledge. System prompts for input of make-up setpoint Zbn in kg or t. The units is that of Counter 1.

Abort Batch This function lets you abort a running batch, i.e. batching immediately stops. Batching mode remains selected. New batch starts upon next start command, old batch is not resumed. Use “Make-up” function to complete old batch.

GT f

Call function distributor and select “Abort Batch” function.

If make-up batch is complete, normal batch starts upon next start command. For new make-up, call function again. “Abort Batch” function also aborts make-up operations.

Acknowledge.

You can also abort batch using the P02 contact. 0837

Control BV-H2214 GB

10



INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Batch Number Nb

Visual Make-up

Select a number incrementing by 1 after start of every new batch. The consecutive number is printed in batch report and indicated in lower display line. Belonging to previous batch, make-up operations are not counted.

GT f f N

Call function distributor and select “Batch Number” function. Acknowledge. Prompt Nb = —-

is output.

Acquire input. Abort input. Old number remains stored.

Current number can be changed also while a batch is running.

A batch report can be printed only if batch is complete (setpoint reached). If an unspecified amount is to be batched using the START/STOP keys, the results can be printed using a little trick: 1. Call “Select Batch” function. 2. Enter very high batch setpoint, e.g. 999999999 kg. 3. Scroll batch actual value ZI into lower display field. 4. Start scale. 5. If desired amount ZI is reached, stop scale. 6. Call “Abort Batch” function. 7. Start printing (see “Print Batch”). Make-up can be performed only before print command. To start next batch, resume from item 4.

Next = Belt Empty One-off changeover to clearance mode. Next batch is controlled via prefeeder. When batch is complete, conveyor belt still performs approx. 1/2 belt circuit. Prerequisites

: Scale OFF, batch complete, prefeeder control present and active. Batching mode without clearance.

GT

Call function distributor and select “Next - Belt Empty” function.

f g

Acknowledge.

Keyboard Mode This function lets you place the selected control source for Start/Stop, Batch setpoint on the INTECONT keyboard. If you deselect Keyboard Mode, the old source is active again. When changing over from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, the Start/Stop status remains stored; vice versa, the external signal is active.

GT

Call function distributor and select “Start Keyboard Mode” or “Stop Keyboard Mode” functions.

Start batch. Display feature: You will know Keyboard Mode by the rectangle in the upper left display field. Condition :

This function has to be activated with the parameter A06.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Activate/Deactivate EasyServe This function lets you control your INTECONT using the “EasyServe” PC service tool.

GT

Call function distributor and select “Activate EasyServe” function.

Enter communication parameters using Block R. Condition:

Note:

This function has to be activated with the parameter A09.

Upon power failure, the current status is stored, i.e. the “Activate EasyServe” function needs not be reselected.

Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485). See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.

Printing The printing functions are available only if the option card is present. Print Batch The batch report can be printed: 1. using “Print Batch” function 2. automatically after each complete batch (Parameter J02 = YES). Start of printing disables the “Make-up” function for the current batch. Prerequisites : Batch complete, scale OFF. Print format : Order of sequence, line and column divisions can be selected at will (Parameter Block J).

GT

Call function distributor and select “Print Batch” function. Start function.

N

Abort printing.

The “Start/Stop Prefeeder” function lets you activate or deactivate prefeeder. Select “Start”, and INTECONT will control your prefeeder. In Stop state, material flow is interrupted and scale can be tared.

Batch Nummer 40 20.11.02 Batch Setpoint Batch Actual Val. Totalizer 1 Totalizer 2 Zero Set beforer

Prerequisites :

External prefeeder present and controlled by INTECONT. Activate function using parameter N 01.

Events E1 Power Failure O01

GT

Call function distributor and select “Start Prefeeder” or “Stop Prefeeder” function.

f

Start control signal.

Prefeeder

16:49:41 0.150 t 0.150 t 0.806t 806.47 kg 19 min.

Batch Number: Consecutive number of batch 20.11.02: Date and time Batch Setpoint: Preset batch amount Batch Actual Val.: Amount batched (actual value) Totalizer 1: Totalizing counter 1 Totalizer 2: Totalizing counter 2 Zero Set before: Feeder run time after last taring or zeroing operation (see Service Values) Events : available during printing

Control BV-H2214 GB

12



0837

INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Print Counter Readings (FMZ), Quantity Report

Print Events

This report is identical with the batch report, however, the numerical values are identified as sub-totals by the # symbol.

Parameter J03 lets you select/deselect printout of event messages. There are 3 options:

If no batching mode is selected, batch number, batch setpoint and batch actual value are not printed. This type of report figures as “Quantity Report”.

1. No printout (NO) 2. Print events (error)

Batch actual value etc.

[kg]

# 998 # 3. Print events and counter readings (YES) (see “Printer Counter Readings”)

Call: 1) Use “Print Counter Readings” function. Unlike the “Print Batch” function, printing is possible during running batch.

20.11.02 11:45:21 L2 W1 20.11.02 11:59:01 L2 W1

Load > MAX Load < MIN

2) Printed automatically upon every event printout (Parameter J03 = YES) L2 W1

Print Parameters Print complete parameter list with current values. Inputs differing from default values are identified by *. The list is complete with all possible event messages and the current hardware assignment.

PARAMETER PRINTOUT INTECONT PLUS VBW 20600-01 2482 20.11.02

16:59:51

BLOCK A 01 Language 02 Units

Dialog Behaviour ENGLISH SI

: : : :

Event code Error class, e.g. WARNING 1 Event has occurred Cause removed, event acknowledged, if required. Load
Event is displayed on INTECONT as long as available. For more information, see “Event Messages” item.

BLOCK B Rated Data 01 Feed Rate Unit ——— kg/h 02 Nominal Feed Rate * 1,000 t/h etc.

0837

GT f N

Call function distributor and select “Print Parameters” function. Start function. Abort printing at any time.




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Print Zero Setting Results The result of the automatic zero setting function can be printed automatically after every belt circuit. Prerequisite:Parameter H 01 = YES (Auto Zero Active) Parameter H09 = YES Tare correction is the total of all zero point changes; total tare additionally includes the basic tare. Values correspond to same-name parameters D 03/05.

Print Zero Setting Results Total Tare [kg/m]

50,23

Tare Correction T [kg/m] 1,56

STATUS REPORT INTECONT PLUS 25.11.02 13:37:12 Software : VBW 20600-01 2482 Hardware version :1 Option card version :1 Station address :1 ------------------------------Latest Report of: 25.11.02 12:13:13 ------------ ------------------SPC values: Zero Set before Voltage ON-time Feeder ON-time Latest password entry of Latest matkor change

: 4086 min : 68 h : 68 h : 22.11.02 17:02:12 : 15.11.02 15:02:34

K05 SPC Time K06 SPC Filter Feed rate Mean value Imitt Variance Belt load Q MAX Time Q MIN Totalizer 3 Belt skew Belt Drift

:1h : 1.00 h

Latest taring results (max. 5) T 22.11.02 16:04:05 21.11.02 16:11:22 21.11.02 16:10:53 22.11.02 16:05:22 22.11.02 16:04:43

Status Report The status report can be printed at any time. Reported are previous events, calibration results, and SPC measurement values, e.g. feed rate variance. SPC = Statistic Process Control

: 0.15 % : 0.09 % :0% :0% : 510 t : 0.00 % : 0.00 cm in % of Qnenn : 12.99 % : 30.75 % : 33.40 % : 12.99 % : 12.99 %

Test weight check of 16.06.03 16:23:17 25.11.02 09:06:28 Set/Act 0.9643 N05 BIC Active NO Events since power on 1 * 1 * 1 *

H03 v> MAX C07 Set Time To Zero E01 Power Failure

For individual data, see “Service Values” item.

GT

Call function distributor and select “Status Report” function.

f N

Start function. Abort printing at any time.

Zero Set before: Zero point corrected by taring manual/automatic zero setting.

program

or

Voltage ON-time: Total voltage ON-time. Feeder ON-time: Total ON-time of conveyor belt and INTECONT. Last password entry on: Date of last password input for start of a service function or parameter change. Latest matkor change: The matkor parameter lets you change feed rate and totalization range. SPC time: Measuring time for SPC values “Qmax” and “TQ < MIN”.

Control BV-H2214 GB

14



0837

INTECONT PLUS

VBW

SPC filter: Filter time for SPC values “mean value” and “variance” Mean value Imitt: Feed rate mean value exponentially filtered using the SPC filter time related to nominal feed rate.

Feed Rate Diagram Printed automatically after status report, the feed rate diagram shows the current feed rate value in percent of nominal feed rate. The report period is determined by Parameter K 05 “SPC Time” .

Variance: Feed rate variance related to the square of nominal feed rate. Belt load QMAX: Maximum belt load during last few hours limited by SPC time related to nominal belt load. Time Q < MIN: Total time during which belt load was below Qmin (Parameter F 05), evaluated over the past few hours (SPC time). Last taring results (max. 5): Results (total tare) of last 5 zero point or tare corrections, related to nominal belt load. Test weight check on : Date and time of last check using check weight, performed using “Weight Check CW” setting program. BIC active: indicates whether automatic compensation is active, or not.

belt

Feed Rate in Percent Pnenn 0

- 6h - 5h - 4h

20

40

60

80

100 120

*

5,000 t/h 10,000 t/h 20,000 t/h

* *

- 3h - 2h - 1h - 0h

140 %

* * *

> 40,000 t/h 50,000 t/h 50,000 t/h

The actual diagram resolution is higher than shown in sample. Feed rate 50 dots for nominal feed rate Time : 32 dots for time K 05 Units : t/h, h Initialisation : upon power-up and change of Parameter K 05. Symbol “>” : Feed rate exceeds 140 %

influence

Events report: lists number and type of events occurred after last printout. If no report has been printed yet, counting starts from time of power-up. Counter 3: Totalizing counter 3 Belt skew: indicates change in belt length in % of total belt length (Parameter D06). Belt drift: indicates belt drift in cm.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Zero Setting

The zero setting program is designed to acquire the belt weigher’s zero point error over one or multiple integer belt circuits. In normal mode, value is used to correct current measuring result. If no automatic mode is selected, use program in regular intervals. During zero setting, totalizing counters stop counting. Prerequisite:1. Conveyor belt totally unloaded. If necessary, abort program. User “Start Prefeeder” function, if available. 2. Belt running, indicated automatically. 3. No batch active; batching mode can remain active. 4. This function has to be activated with the parameter A08.

Program complete: 0.

Dev. Tarkor

Upper display:

Lower display:

70.2 % 1.12 %

Deviation of zero point from previous zero setting operation in % of nominal belt load. Dev = + : error increased Dev = - : error decreased. Deviation of zero point from basic tare in % of nominal belt load. Taring program corrects basic tare during calibration.

Acquire result, or view for information and reject.

f N

Acquire result. Scale zero point is corrected. Abort program. Result is rejected.

Call:

G TU f

Call Zero Setting function and start.

Restart prefeeder.

If belt is not running, program aborts and requests START.

Event messages: 1- C7

Deselect message, if not desired.

Program running:

0.

Zero setting time elapsed.

>0< Tarkor

Upper display: Lower display:

N Control BV-H2214 GB

2- Value

3.

70.2 % 1.12 %

Residual run time in % of total run time. Zero point error in %, related to nominal belt load.

Excessive Zeroing range exceeded; clean scale and retare, if necessary. Note: The function setting to zero can also be started via the digital input P05. The program is started by a positive flank of the contact. The result is automatically accepted if it is within the admissible zero setting limit (5% of the nominal belt load). An ackowledgement of the result is not necessary. The calibration program can only be aborted in its active phase.

Abort program at any time.

16


0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Read Parameters Parameters are defined as variable characteristics or data used to match INTECONT to the particular application. Parameter input is protected by password (see “Enter Parameters”). The “Read Parameters” function lets you view all parameters without jeopardizing the operating reliability. The parameters are organized into function blocks A , B,... and consecutively numbered within a block.

GTf Tf

Scroll Programming function into display field and acknowledge. Select Read Parameters sub-function.

Display shows title of first parameter block.

Dialog Behaviour Block: A

TU fT

Scroll through parameter blocks A, B,... Scroll through parameters within a block.

Nominal Feed Rate B02 1000.0 kg/h

N N

Return to blocks. Return to normal displays.

For more information, see “Enter Parameters”. 0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Control BV-H2214 GB

18



INTECONT PLUS 3

VBW

Control Overview

RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS

H2

EVENT MESSAGES Z1 = FEED AMOUNT I

kg/m

= FEED RATE

L2

ACKNOWLEDGE READY

ON { POWER CPU OK

m/s

H3 L3

ABORT FUNCTION

o Z1 = 1500 kg -- I = 100 kg/h

ALARM MIN STOP

START FUNCTION

PREPARE ENTRY

START

L1 kg/h

M

MAX

H1

C1 L4

S2 RESET COUNTER

PRESELECT LOWER DISPLAY

EVENT MESSAGES

FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

gB U SCROLL T i RESET G

FUNCTION

Start/Stop

if preselected

Select lower display line and functions. (1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q (2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v (3) Feed rate Ir in % Reset counter(s) (1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2). (2) Use ENT key to acknowledge. (3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input. (4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits. Call function distributor and event messages (1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function. If an event is available, “Display Event” function is preselected. (2) ENTER key lets you activate function. (3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other. (4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays.

O N f P

DELETE

Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs.

ESCAPE

Abort function and return to normal displays.

ENTER

Acknowledge input, e.g. setpoint, start functions, e.g. Display Events (see “FUNCTION”).

DATA

Prepare input, e.g. parameters.

0837



Control Overview BV-H2214 GB 19

VBW

INTECONT PLUS This page left intentionally blank

0837

Control Overview BV-H2214 GB 20



INTECONT PLUS 4

VBW

Operating Principle

A belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the material amount transported on a conveyor belt. Belt Load: The material is guided to a weighing platform arranged under the belt and limited by 2 carrying idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the platform load excerts a force on load cell (L/C). The deflection for measurement is 0.2 mm. The weighed idlers are connected with the frame structure, e.g. with the use of a leaf spring parallel system.

Belt Speed: A further measure for feed rate is belt speed v, acquired with the use of speed transducer D and translated into a corresponding pulse frequency. If belt load is constant and more approximate accuracy will suffice, speed measurement can be omitted.

Feed Rate: INTECONT normalizes physical units kg/m and m/s. Multiplication of the two values results in feed rate I. I v Q QB Leff

in kg/s in m/s in kg/m in kg in m

I in kg/h: I in kg/h As to the rest, see above.

Proportional to platform load, the load cell output voltage is amplified and transferred to the INTECONT microprocessor with the use of an analog-to-digital converter. The white triangle indicates the load distribution on a single-idler platform scale. Only half of the material’s weight force is applied to the weighed idler. The translation of load ratio into platform length has become accepted usage in weighing technology. Leff = effective platform length Lg = total platform length For weighing platforms equipped with multiple weighed idlers, factor 1/2 is different. Belt load in kg/m is thus: QB = total load on weighing platform. 0837



Operating Principle BV-H2214 GB 21

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Automatic Belt Influence Compensation (BIC):

Batching: In batching mode, a preselected material amount is fed. When batch setpoint is reached, batching stops. Batching can be controlled via conveyor belt drive or material prefeeder. Control via belt drive: In this mode, the conveyor belt is still fully loaded after complete batch.

Not even the best of conveyor belts is perfectly even; particulary in welding points, the belt will be heavier and stiffer. The figure above shows the relations over one belt circuit in exaggerated fashion. Therefore, a high accuracy can normally be ensured only over entire belt circuits, i.e. over the mean value. INTECONT is able to acquire and correct this influence with the use of a belt circuit sensor and a metal belt mark. This considerably increases the scale’s short-term accuracy. To enable variations to be considered during operation, the belt influence is continuously measured. The compensation adaptively follows up, also if material is fed. Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD):

0

Start batch and conveyor belt.

1

Abort batch or

2

resume at any time.

3

Reduce belt speed, change over to dribble feed.

4

Stop conveyor belt.

5

Drive stops, batch setpoint is reached.

For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is not directly located at the point of material discharge. Therefore, if belt load varies, the feed rate measuring result does not exactly correspond to the current feed rate at the point of discharge. A special speed-dependent delay elements shifts the measurement to the discharge point. To do so, no special load transducers are required; however, the additional use of the automatic belt influence compensation is reasonable.



0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Control via prefeeder: Batch complete, conveyor belt is empty. 0

Start batch and conveyor belt. Open prefeeder.

1

Stop belt, if necessary; cut off belt and prefeeder drive.

2

Resume batching.

3

Changeover to dribble feed is possible, but not always reasonable.

4

Stop prefeeder if precalculated distance to setpoint is reached.

5

Batch complete. Conveyor belt continues running for approx. 1/2 belt circuit.

Dribble feed and cut-off point are self-optimizing, i.e. they are automatically corrected after every batch.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837




INTECONT PLUS 5.

n

VBW

Technical Data

Panel-mounting unit VEG 20600/20610

n

Surface-mounting unit: with panel mounting unit VEG 20...

Front panel Panel cut-outs

n

Wall-mounting housing

: 96 x 288 mm : 88 x 282, wall thickness max. 10 mm Mounting depth : min. 225 mm (including 50 mm for connectors) Protected to : IP 20, front to IP 65 Material : plastic grey to RAL 7022 Display : fluorescent, 2 lines of 20 characters, 6 mm high Keyboard : flexible membranes with tactile touch Signal lamps : LEDs, 2 x green, 3 x red Power supply : 24 V(DC) 50 % -25%, max. 1 A, no fuse, pole-reversal protective circuit Ext. power supply : 90...264V/ 50HZ...60HZ

Measuring systems Feeding systems Protected to Material Voltage supply Extension n

: width x height x depth 410x330x236mm : width x height x depth 500x600x300mm : IP 65 : steel sheet, 1.5 mm, grey : 90...264V/50Hz...60Hz : Feed unit controller

Environment Temperature Humidity Interference immunity

: -25 °C ... +45 °C, tested to -40°C : Class F (DIN 40 040) * : to IEC 801

Interference suppression

Z1 = 2500 kg I = 0 kg/h

Housing safety EC recommendations

: to VDE 871, EN 55 011 : to IEC 348 : CE label

* Tropical version (class R) upon request n

Storage temperature -40 °C ... +60 °C

n

Connectors Plug/screw connectors (Phoenix Combicon), non-confusible

n

Control outputs Number Base board Option card Load

0837



: : : :

8 N/O relay contacts 3 5 max. 230 V(AC) 8 A resistive load, 1 A inductive

Technical Data BV-H2214 GB 25

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

If error message “CPU Not OK” is output, all contacts open. n

: : : :

5 3 2 24 V(DC) +/-30 %, 5 mA, galvanically isolated

Control inputs (NAMUR) Number Type

n

External totalizing pulse counter Frequency Pulse length Output

Control Number Base card Option card Type

n

n

: 2 : NAMUR (DIN 19234), short-circuit and cable breakage monitoring n

Analog output Number Base card Option card Current Raise Load Reference

2 1 1 raise ...20 mA impressed 0... <20 mA max. 500 ohms 0 V by user, galvanically isolated : 12 bits +/- 1 d

Resolution

If error message “CPU Not OK” is output, output signal turn 0 mA.

Serial printer interface Number Type

: : : : : : :

Data format Isolation Connectors

Character map n

: max. 10 Hz : selectable 50...1000 ms : 24 V, max. 100 mA optionally active low or active high, galvanically isolated, short-circuit-proof, limited to apr. 350 mA, negative amounts are stored internally and must be compensated by positive amounts before new pulse is output. This ensures integral accuracy also with minimal belt load.

: 1 (option card) : RS 232 (V24), max. 38400 baud : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity : galvanically non-isolated : Phoenix MSTB, contat spacing 3.5 mm, max. 1.5 mm2 : ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1)

Load cell connection Voltage supply

n

Analog input Number Current Raise Load Reference

: : : : :

1 raise ...20 mA impressed 0... 20 mA 500 ohms 0 V internal, galvanically non isolated : 10 bits +/- 1/2 d : <0.4% over entire temperature range

Resolution Acuracy

: +/- 6 V AC (+/-3 %) (apr. 66 Hz short-circuit-proof Measuring cycle : 100ms Resolution : 24 Bit Load : R (load cell) = min. 80 ohms Cable length : max. 30 % voltage drop, max. 500 m Measuring range : -20mV....+50mV with VLW: -1.6mV...min. 32mV

0837

Technical Data BV-H2214 GB

26



INTECONT PLUS n

VBW

Serial interface for service PC Number Type Data format

Isolation Connectors

: 1 : RS232; RS422 or RS 485 max. 19200 baud : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity changeable to even or no : galvanically non-isolated : Phoenix MSTB, contact spacing 3.5 mm, max. 1.5 mm2 or 9-pole D-Sub HD20

0837



Technical Data BV-H2214 GB 27

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank.

0837

Technical Data BV-H2214 GB

28



INTECONT PLUS 6.

n

VBW

Characteristics

Power failure

n

VOLTAGE OK (green) PROCESSOR OK (green) ALARM (red) MIN (red) MIN feed rate value MAX (red) MAX feed rate value

Scale data, calibration values, counter readings and pulses pending remain stored after power failure for an unlimited period of time. The internal clock continues running for approx. 5 days.

n

Dialog language for error messages, operation, and service programs. Select:

n

n

Events and faults are displayed in form of an alphanumeric code. Call clear text of consecutive events via keyboard. Events are organized into Alarms and Warnings, with and without acknowledgement. Alarms stop scale; warnings don’t. All alarms are additionally reported via relay output.

DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANO

:

NON-SI units:

kg , t , m ,

kg/h t/h cm

lb , t , f ,

lb/h t/h inch

n

Start/Stop totalizing counter Select using Parameter B06. Displays Upper display: Lower display:

0837

Totalizing counter 1 Totalizing counters 2 and 3 Feed rate absolute Feed rate relative Belt speed Belt load absolute Belt load relative Batch data

Operating philosophy Operator prompting through multi-level menus. Important configuration and calibration functions are protected by password.

n

(see Parameter List)

n

Event messages

Units (selectable) SI units

n

Signal lamps (top down)

Belt speed For simple applications, speed measurement can be omitted.

n

Zero setting Zero setting can be performed 1- manually via keyboard 2- automatically, if belt is empty.

The maximum admissible zero setting elevation is monitored.

Select for lower display using cursor keys.



Characteristics BV-H2214 GB 29

VBW n

INTECONT PLUS

Taring

n

2 separately selectable limit values for monitoring of signal lamps and relay outputs. Any event can be reported by message.

Designed to zero the basic tare load, the taring program on principle has the same function as the zero setting program. However, tare elevation is not monitored, and the call is protected by password.

n

MIN/MAX for (1) Feed rate (2) Belt load (3) Belt speed

Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) Using an additional belt circuit sensor and a metal belt mark, the dynamic zero point influence of the conveyor belt can be compensated during operation (with and without material).

Switching threshold, relay outputs and event class can be defined individually for all 6 possibilities. n

This considerably increases the belt weigher’s short-term accuracy. n

Define individually for feed rate, belt load and belt speed.

n

(1) Voltage ON-time (2) Scale ON-time

Belt drift display

(3) Zero setting required n

Batching mode

(2) With clearance of conveyor belt. Controlled is the material prefeeder. Cut-off point and start of dribble feed can be adapted automatically in either case.

Statistic Process Control (SPC) Mean values, variances, maximum value storage, zero settings tables, etc. are available in form of service values.

(1) Without clearance of conveyor belt. Controlled is the belt drive motor.

n

Maintenance hints Display event on screen.

For prerequisites, see “BIC”. n

Display filter

Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD) A special speed-dependent delay element shifts the point of measurement to the material discharge point where the material amount discharged is acquired.

n

MIN/MAX messages and outputs

n

Adaptions The electrical system needs not be redesigned, adapted, etc.

Zero drop out Used to suppress totalization upon measurements around zero, for counter to stop while belt is being unloaded. Deselect function, if not desired.

0837

Characteristics BV-H2214 GB

30



INTECONT PLUS n

Calibration

VBW n

Calibration as such is not necessary. All you have to do is enter some constructional data on load cells, speed transducer, belt inclination, etc. INTECONT uses these data to compute all requisite display normalizations. Check, or recalibration, can be effected in two ways:

a) Using material Enter check result into INTECONT, and measuring result will be corrected. b) Using check weight A special check program lets you check normalization, or if certain technical data are not exactly known (lever ratio, belt inclination, etc.), correct them.

Digital Outputs

Number

Name

Default Value

Q04 Q05 Q01 Q02 Q03 Q11 Q12 N15 N16 N17 Q06 Q07 Q08 Q09 Q10 Q13 B11

DO I-MIN DO I-MAX DO ALARM DO START Feeder DO START Scale DO Full Feed DO Dribble Feed DO Belt Skew DO Belt Drift DO Belt Slip DO Q-MIN DO Q-MAX DO v-MIN DO v-MAX DO Batch Active DOKeyboard Mode DO Pulse Counter

DO4 DO2 DO3 — DO1 — — — — — — — — — — — —

In subsequent operation, this program can be used to detect mechanical changes, e.g. platform distorsion after settling of foundation. n

Digital inputs

Number

Name

Default Value

P03 P01 B06 P02 N04 B03 P04 P05 N18 P06

DI Ackn. Events Release START Source DI Abort Batch Sensor Source Tacho Source DI Start DI Zero Set Freeze BIC DI Ext. Event

DI1 DI3 — (OP) — DI6 DI7 — — — —

0837



Characteristics BV-H2214 GB 31

VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837

Characteristics BV-H2214 GB

32



INTECONT PLUS 7

VBW

Setting Programs Function Distributor

The function distributor lets you access all setting programs.

G

Call function distributor. If no event is available, function selected last is displayed.

f N

Start function. Return to normal displays, or abort function.

F u n ctions Displa y Result s

Programming and Calibrating functions lead to further menus you can move through using cursor keys. B=

If batching mode is selected, additional functions can be accessed in main distributor. Abort Batch Deselect Batch Batch Number Print Batch Make-up Next = W/Belt Empty

S=

Calibrating functions protected by password. Prompt is output after call of function only

E=

An event is available.

Z=

Activated via parameter.

Moving through function distributor has no effect on weighing functions. Move through function distributor.

TU Display Results E Display Check START/STOP Feeder Z Service Values Batch Number B Print Counter Readings >0< Zero Set START/STOP Keyboard Mode START/STOP EasyServe Programming Calibration Functions S Read Parameters Enter Parameters Load Default Par. Print Parameters Print Status Report

0837

S S

START/STOP Simulation Tare S Weight Check S Imp/Belt Circuit S Set Time S



Setting Programs BV-H2214 GB 33

VBW

INTECONT PLUS Calibrating Functions

There are 3 setting programs designed to ease initial calibration and recalibration. (1) Pulses/Belt Circuit LB (2) Taring TW (3) Weight Check CW Upon initial calibration, perform functions in the above order of sequence. All functions can be reached using the CALIBRATION function and are protected from unauthorized use by password. During program run until acknowledgement (1) no totalization takes place (2) analog outputs are set to offset values (3) no event messages are suppressed (4) all BIC functions are cut off. The operating sequence is the same with all programs.

G TUf


B7f

Enter password 07734.

Scroll CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS into lower display field and acknowledge.

Call setting program LB: IMP/BELT only (1) upon initial calibration (2) after mounting new belt or considerably varying belt tension (3) after having changed parameter B 04 “Charact.Val. vs” or B 05 “Nominal Speed” (in case of scales with and without speed measurement). Program acquires the number of speed transducer pulses for one belt circuit and uses the number of pulses as belt circuit code for the following programs: (a) Manual or automatic zero setting (b) Taring TW (c) Weight Check CW Upon initial calibration, first call setting program LB. This also applies to scales without speed measurement. Prerequisites : (1) Before calling program, measure time of one belt circuit with maximum possible accuracy and enter into Parameter C 02. (2) Deselect batching mode. (3) Ensure conveyor belt is running. Sequence:

Display shows a setting program, e.g. TW: Tare.

Calibrating Functions S5 TW. Tare

Start setting program.

N f

Belt Circuit LB

Return to normal displays. For approx. 2 min., Calibration menu can be recalled without password input.

Gf

Function distributor, calibrating functions, password (see “Calibrating Functions”)

TU f N

Scroll LB: Imp/Belt into lower display field. Start. Abort at any time.

Setting programs do not control belt drive and prefeeder. If any condition is not met, setting program aborts and a corresponding message is output.

0837




INTECONT PLUS Program running:

>.

LB :

5.6 s 1500 Imp

VBW Error message : If sensor is improperly recognized (sensor pulses measured do not correspond to parameter setting), message “Sensor Error” is output and setting program aborts. For troubleshooting, see “Commissioning/Belt Run Monitoring” item.

Upper display : residual run time in seconds Lower display : added speed transducer pulses

Program complete:

>.

LB: v

0.095 m/s 451251 I/B

Upper display : belt speed mean value over total run time Lower display : Pulses/belt circuit total

f N

Accept result and enter into Parameter D 06. Reject result.

The sequence is the same if no speed measurement is provided. Special Messages: (1) START if belt is not running (2) ABORTED

Tare TW The taring program acquires the belt weigher’s zero point error over one or multiple integer belt circuits and uses value to correct current measuring result in normal mode. On principle, taring program is identical with zero setting program. Tare : acquire basic tare (weight of mechanical system, conveyor belt, etc.) upon commissioning, service and maintenance. Set to zero

: acquire zero point deviation during operation, e.g. contamination.

Unlike the zero setting program, the correction amount of the taring program is unlimited. After taring, the admissible correction amount of the zeroing program relates to the new reference value. Prerequisites : (1) Conveyor belt totally unloaded. Control prefeeder using the START/STOP Feeder function. (2) Clean mechanical scale system in weighing area. Normal deposits immediately recurring during operation need not be removed. (3) Deselect batching mode. (4) Ensure conveyor belt is running. Corresponding hint is output automatically.

Attention!

0837

If a belt circuit sensor is present (N03 = YES), program sequence slightly differs. Running message : E-PROG active (lower display) Complete message : ... - I/B value flickers upon every belt circuit. Operation : as described above


Sequence:

Gf

Function distributor, calibrating functions, password (see “Calibrating Functions”)

TU

Scroll TW: Tare function into lower display field.



VBW

INTECONT PLUS Weight Check CW

Start function.

f N

Abort function at any time.

Program running:

TW: Tare

9 0. 2 % 5 2. 3 5

Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time Lower display : continuously meaned tare in % of nominal belt load

This program lets you check the INTECONT measuring range. Load weighing platform with a known check weight and acquire platform load mean value over one or multiple integer belt circuits. INTECONT compares the result with defined setpoint and displays value. Automatic correction does not take place. Prerequisites : (1) Tare or zero set (2) Enter check weight into Parameter C 08. Select check weight between 30...100 % of nominal platform load Q0.

Program complete: >. Dev. Tare

Q0 q0

2.45 % 53.20

Leff

Upper display : deviation of tare value from previous taring result in % of nominal belt load dev = + : tare has increased dev = - : tare has decreased Lower display : mean value of total tare in % of nominal belt load

f

Accept taring result and enter into Parameter D 04. Set tare correction (D05) to zero.

N

Reject result, i.e. scale is not tared.

Special Messages: (1) START if belt is not running (2) ABORTED Note: (1) Related to nominal belt load, tare value can exceed 100%. (2) If deviation (dev) exceeds 20%, check scale for mechanical faults, e.g. jammed material particles. (3)

= q0 * Leff = nominal belt load Parameter D 01 = eff. platform length Parameter C 05

(3) Apply check weight in proper location. (4) Select batching mode. (5) Start conveyor belt. Corresponding hint is output automatically. Sequence:

Gf

Function distributor, calibrating functions, password (see “Calibrating Functions”).

TU

Scroll CW: Weight Check function into lower display field.

f N

Start function. Abort function at any time.

If BIC is active (M05 = YES), BIC tare vectors are initialized along with taring program.



0837


INTECONT PLUS

Evaluating Result: Error < 1 % : KOR = 0.99...1.01 Scale OK, no further action required.

Program running:

>.

CW: Set / Act

51,4 % 0,9842

Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time Lower display : continuously meaned SET/ACT measuring result

Program complete:

>.

VBW

CW: 1200,34 kg COR 0,99915

Error < 5 %

: KOR = 0.95...1.05 Enter KOR value into Parameter D 02. This make good sense only if parameter has not yet considered result of check using material.

Error > 5 %

: KOR < 0.95, or KOR > 1.05 Multi-percent deviations suggest faulty data input (e.g. belt incination, lever arms not exactly known), and/or mechanical faults (misalignment, distorsions).

Check does not consider Parameter D 02 “Range Correction”, so that check program will indicate same error quotient KOR after check.

Upper display : Fictitious material amount fed over run time *. Lower display : mean value KOR of SET/ACT over total run time

fN

Exit program. Since result is not AUTOMATICALLY ACQUIRED, both keys are equivalent.

Special Messages: (1) START if belt is not running (2) ABORTED (irrelevant)

*

Lets you check scale zero point without check weight. Display format: xxxxxxx,yy kg

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Set Time

Unlike the other programs, date and time can be changed in START and STOP states of scale and read off under SERVICE VALUES.

Gf

Function distributor, Calibrating functions, password (see “Calibrating Functions”).

TU f N 033

Scroll Set Time function into lower display field.

f

Acknowledge every input. As soon as seconds are acknowledged, new date is stored, and complete date is briefly displayed.

O

Delete digit entered last

Call menu.

Simulation Mode The Simulation Mode lets you check all scale functions without material at the time of commissioning. During simulation, scale is cannot operate in normal mode.

Gf

Function distributor, Calibration functions, password (see “Calibration Functions”).

TU f

Scroll “START Simulation” into lower display field. Start program.

Abort at any time. Year, e.g. 03 Enter month, day, hour, minute, second.

After power failure, time remains stored for min. 5 days.

Display

:

Event message S7 In upper line, the “=” symbol flashes.

Function can be cut off in the same way (STOP Simulation).

Features: 1.

All operating functions can be performed.

2.

Feed rate actual value is set to nominal rate.

3.

Belt load and speed measurement are active.

4, All control inputs/outputs operate as usually.

0837




INTECONT PLUS 8

VBW

Service Values

The Service table includes detailed system information. Call does not affect weighing functions.

GT f

6)

Input switching condition I+ : DI = 1 1 1 1 1 + 0 “1" = contact closed ”0" = contact open

Call SERVICE VALUES function and activate.

Inputs 4 + 5 on option card “N” = no option card

TU N

Move through service values. Inputs 6 + 7 designed as Namur inputs (belt sensor, tacho)

Return to normal displays.

“+” short circuit; “-” cable breakage; “1" = sensor covered; ”0" = sensor free

Displays:

7)

1)

VBW 20600-01 2482

Version number

2)

HW = 1

Hardware version

3)

Option card:

0 1

(not available) (available)

EL = 22 h Voltage ON-time Monitored: Parameter K 01, Message S4

8)

ED : >0 = 95 min Scale ON-time after last taring, or last manual or automatic zero set.

O Z1 =

1500100 kg Opt..Card : 1

Prerequisite Monitored

4)

Date and time

5)

Relay outputs switching condition I + DO = 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 “1" = contact closed ”0" = contact open Outputs 4-8 on option card “N” = no option card

9)

: Totalization ON, conveyor belt may be stopped. : Parameter H 07, Message C7

ED = 19 h Scale and conveyor belt ON-times

Prerequisite Monitored

: Totalization ON : Parameter K 03, Message S3

10) Tacho = 96.6 Hz Speed transducer input frequency Select frequency between 0.4...3000 Hz.

0837



Service Values BV-H2214 GB 39

VBW

INTECONT PLUS 17) Belt Drift tr = 0.12 cm

11) aw = 30.988 % Load on load cells related to total of load cells rated capacity. If value exceeds 100 %, load cells are overloaded. From 110 % onward, message H4 :

The arrows indicate the direction of drift.

L/C Input > MAX is output. 12) vap = 0.883168 mV/V Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value delayed for point of material discharge (CPD active). 13) bic = 2.34001 mV/V

Prerequisite: Monitored :

see “Slip” Parameters N09-N12, messages C3 and C4

18) Pulses of sensor area Imp.S. = 386

Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value with active BIC (Belt Influence Compensation)

Measured pulses of sensor area. If belt sensor is properly located, the following result is expected:

Imp.S. = 0.5 * sensor length * 0.01 * charact. value vs

14) L/C = 1.383257 mV/V Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value (Gross).

Prerequisite: see “Slip” 19) Mean value Imitt = 22.27 %

Acquired before belt influence compensation and delay for point of discharge.

Feed rate mean value related to nominal feed rate Filter Prerequisite Initialization

15) R_L/C = 300 ohms

: Exponential, Parameter K 06 : Totalization ON, V > Vmin : Zero at power ON

Load cell resistance value 20) Variance var = 0.02 % 16) Slip s = 0.25 % Variation in belt length in % of total belt length (Parameter D 06).

Prerequisite: Monitored

Belt sensor active (N03), sensor area on conveyor belt (N04). : Parameter N13, message C8

Feed rate variance related to nominal feed rate square. Filter Prerequisite Initialization

: Exponential, Parameter K 06 : Totalization ON, V > Vmin : Zero at power ON

The variance indicates belt load instability. Higher values suggest poor discharge behaviour of material. 0837

Service Values BV-H2214 GB

40



INTECONT PLUS 21) Max. belt load QMAX = 57 % Maximum belt load during preselected SPC time related to nominal belt load. Time Evaluation Prerequisite Initialization Max. display

: : : : :

SPC time, Parameter K 05 SPC time continuously floating Totalization ON, V > Vmin Zero at power ON 255 %

22) No load percentage TQ < MIN = 23 % Total time during which belt load is below Qmin (F 05), related to SPC time, Parameter K 05

VBW 26) ZE = 53 Pulses output across pulse output of external totalizing counter, counted from command “Reset Counter 1 ”

27) ZO = 1 Pulses pending. If value constantly exceeds zero, pulse frequency surpasses 10 Hz. Increase smallest display digit of Counter 1 (Parameter B 07). 28) AI = 12.54 mA

Evaluation Prerequisite Initialization

: SPC time continuously floating : Totalization ON, V > Vmin : with Q = Qmin at power ON

Analog input input current 29) CS = 10851 Check sum of scale software 30) CS_b = 10851 Check sum recomputed in cycles. If value “CS_b” differs from “CS”, a serious fault is present. Contact the Schenck Service. 31) BIC-N = 27 Counter reading indicating how often BIC sensor has been recognized

23) Last taring T (date) 23.51 % 32) BIC-E = 5 Date and total tare related to nominal belt load Prerequisites : Correct zero point using taring program or manual/automatic zero setting function. Manual changes of correction parameters are not recorded. Displayed are the 5 last taring or zeroing operations.

Counter reading indicating faulty BIC circuits not entered into tare vectors

33) ES-Version = 11 Current EasyServe Version

24) AO1 = 4.15 mA Analog output 1 output current 25) AO2 = 10.00 mA

0837

Analog output 2 output current (on option card)



Service Values BV-H2214 GB 41

VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837

Service Values BV-H2214 GB

42



INTECONT PLUS 9.

VBW

Parameterization

General Information Parameters are variable characteristics or data used to match the INTECONT to the application. Display units and format Limit values Nominal and calibration data, etc. Some parameters can be selected in accordance with the requirements (e.g. display formats), others have to be taken from Spec Sheets supplied. During parameter input, all functions are maintained. However, during operation, only parameters with no influence on measurement, e.g. display filter, should be changed. Default Parameters: All parameter are preset with default values. These are proven suggestions and can normally be used as defined.

There are two types of parameter: Selection parameters Let you select from various options, e.g. WARNING, ALARM. Numeric parameters

Enter numeric value, e.g. nominal feed rate.

Call Parameter Menu

G TUf


TUf Bf

Select ENTER PAR. function.

Scroll PROGRAMMING function into lower display field and acknowledge.

Enter password 07734.

The default values can be loaded using sub-function “Load Default Parameters”. Dialog Behaviour Block: A

Identification The parameters are organized into function blocks A, B, ... and, within a block, described by name number 1, 2, 3 .. and value. Values differing from default are identified by a * before the block letter.

Display shows title of first parameter block.

N

Return to normal displays. For approx. 2 minutes, parameter menu can be recalled without password input.


0837



Parameterization BV-H2214 GB 43

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Preselect Parameters

Enter Parameters

P TU

Prepare input.

46 B9

Go to the left (4) or to the right (6), see “Hardware Configuration”.

f O N

Acknowledge input. Next parameter is displayed.

Rated Data Block: B

1. Block letter

TU

Move through blocks A, B ..., up and down. Block letter flashes. Select block. Parameter selected last is displayed.

f

Selection parameters: Value flashes. Scroll desired value into lower display field.

Numeric parameters: Feature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Enter value using keypad.

Delete digits. Abort input.

OFF key 0 is active always; ON key I, only after completed parameter input. 2. Parameter number


TU

Move through parameter numbers within a block. Parameter number flashes.

f

Move through parameter numbers independent of block (UP only).

NN

Return to block titles. Return to normal mode.

0837




INTECONT PLUS Load Default Parameter

Hardware Configuration When parameterizing the hardware used, the source determines whether unit, channel and level must be indicated, or not. The table below will assist you in selecting the hardware configuration: Source

Unit

Channel

VBW

Level

Lets you load the default settings. Function is protected by password and YES/NO prompt. Attention! All variable parameters and calibration values are reset.

FB

G Call PROGRAMMING function and DEFAULT PARAMETERS. B1 YES =1 f Acknowledge NO =0 selection.

OP v DI

I+

DI1-DI7

HI, LO

DO

I+

DO1-DO8

HI, LO

AI

I+

Power Failure Parameters remain stored for an unlimited period of time.

As you can see, with “Fieldbus” [FB", “Control Unit” (OP), “Speed” (v) and “Not Assigned” (-)] no additional information is required. “Digital Inputs” (DI) and “Digital Outputs” (DO) require unit, channel and level to be indicated. With “Analog Input ” (AI), the unit is firmly set to I+. Sample: Parameter B06 “START Source” determines from where the scale is started. Description

Source

B06 START Source

OP

Alternatives

FB, DI, v

On standard, the scale is started from INTECONT keyboard (OP). Alternatively, fieldbus, digital input (DI) or speed (v) can be selected. If DI is the desired source, additionally indicate channel and level (see Hardware Configuration table); the unit is firmly set to I+.

0837

4 6

Keys 4 (go to the left) and 6 (go to the right), let you shift between source, channel and level.




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Parameters Overview

D 05 Tare Correction T D 06 Belt Circuit Char

This list applies to software: VBW 20600-08

Block E

Block A

E 01 E 02 E 03 E 04 E 05 E 06

A 01 A 02 A 03 A 04 A 05 A 06 A 07 A 08 A 09 A 10 A 11

Language Units Password 2.Password Feeder ON/OFF Keyb. Mode ON/OFF Batch ON/OFF >0: Zero ON/OF EasyServe ON/OFF Totalizer1 ON/OFF Totalizer2 ON/OFF

Block B B 01 B 02 B 03 B 04 B 05 B 06 B 07 B 08 B 09 B 10 B11 B12

Feed Rate Unit Nominal Feed Rate Tacho Source vs Charact. Value Nominal Speed START Source FMZ1 Unit FMZ1 Pulse Dur. FMZ2 Unit FMZ3 Unit DO Pulse Counter Pulse Weighting

Block C C 01 C 02 C 03 C 04 C 05 C 06 C 07 C 08

Belt Circuit No. Belt Circuit Time L/C Charac. Value L/C Rated Cap. Eff. Platf. Length Lever Ratio Angle a Check Weight

Block D D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04

Nominal Belt Load Span Correction Total Tare Basic Tare N


Dialog Behaviour ENGLISH SI 07734 or 7734) 2889 active active active active active active active

Rated Data —- t/h 400,0000 t/h DI I+, DI7 HI 50.26 I/m 1,0000 m/s OP —— t 0 ms —— t —— t — 0.0 kg

Calibrating Data 1.00 30.0 s 2,8500 mV/V 220,000 kg 1,000 m 1,0000 0.0 degrees 50,000 kg

Calibrat. Results 111,11 kg/m 1,0000 0,00 kg/m 0,00 kg/m


Elevation AO1 Elevation AO1 Limit Value AO1 Source AO2 Elevation AO2 Limit Value AO2

Block F F 01 F 02 F 03 F 04 F 05 F 06 F 07 F 08 F 09 F 10 F 11 F 12

Value for I-MIN Event Class I-MIN Value for I-MAX Event Class I-MAX Value for Q-MIN Event Class Q-MIN Value for Q-MAX Event Class Q-MAX Value for V-MIN Event Class V-MIN Value for V-MAX Event Class V-MAX

0,00 kg/m 1000 000 I/B Analog Output I 4,00 mA 20,00 mA Q 4.00 mA 20.00 mA Limit Values 5,0 %I WARNING 2 120,0 %I WARNING 2 20,0 %Q WARNING 2 120,0 %Q WARNING 2 5,0 %V WARNING 2 120,0 %V WARNING 2

Block G

Filter Setting

G 01 G 02 G 03 G 04 G 05 G 06

3,0 s 3,0 s 3,0 s 3,0 s 1,0 s 3,0 s

I Display I Analog Output Q Display V Display L/C Filter Afterfl. Time

Block H H 01 H 02 H 03 H 04 H 05 H 06 H 07 H 08 H 09 H 10 H 11 H 12

AUTO Zero Active Limit Value Diff. Mean Limit Value Zero Set Limit Tare Corr. > MAX Zero Set Time Time Elapsed Print Result ZDO Active ZDO Limit Zero Set Diff. Tare Diff. >MAX

AUTO Zero Set NO 0,50 %Q 1,00 %Q 5,00 %Q WARNING 1 4h IGNORE NO NO 1,00 %Q 5,0 % WARNING 2 0837


INTECONT PLUS Block I

Batch Mode

I 01 I 02 I 03 I 04 I 05 I 06 I 07 I 08 I 09

100,000 kg 0,000 kg 1,0 1,0 % 1,0 % WARNING 1 NO IGNORE OP

Batch Dribble FD Batch End Adaption Fact. Batch Tolerance + Batch Tolerance Out of Tolerance Belt Empty Batch > Setp. Batch Source

Block J J 01 J 02 J 03 J 04 J 05 J 06 J 07 J 08 J 09 J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13 J 14 J 15 J 16 J 17 J 18 J 19 J 20 J 21 J 22

Baud Rate AUTO Print Print Subtotal Reset Print FMZ 1 Reset Print FMZ 2 Print Page Length Batch Setp.Line Batch Setp.Col. Batch Act.Line Batch Act.Col. FMZ 1 Line FMZ 1 Column FMZ 2 Line FMZ 2 Column Date/Time Line Date/Time Column Event Line Event Column Set Line to Zero Set Column to Zero Line Number Column Number

Block K K 01 Maintenance Elec. K 02 Event Maint. EL. K 03 Maint. STR-Meter K 04 Event Maint. Run. K 05 SPC Time K 06 SPC Filter BLOCK L

0837

L 01 L 02 L 03 L 04 L 05 L 06 L 07 L 08

Protocol Type Host timeout Comm.-Error Host Word sequence Byte sequence Configuration Address Resolution


Printer Setting 9600 NO Error NO NO 72 lines 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 4 8 12 8 10 8 3 8 Maintenance Int. 3000 hours WARNING 1 3000 hours WARNING 1 8 hrs 1,00 hour Comm. Fieldbus NO 5s ALARM (S 09) I:std/L:std Low-High FIXED 1 4096

VBW L 09 L 10 L 11 L 12 L 13 L 14 L 15 L 17 L 22

Physics Baud Rate Format Data Adresse FLOAT-Format Address Baud Rate S5 Physics Hardware

Block M M 01 M 02 M 03 M 04 M 05

Feeder Active Setting Time Feed Distance Motor STOP aft. ST Change-over FF/DF

Block N N 01 CPD Active N 02 Platf.Dis.Length N 03 Belt Sensor Active N 04 Source Sensor N 05 BIC Active N 06 Sensor Length N 07 Sensor Width N 08 Sensor Offset N 09 Belt Drift N 10 Belt Drift Event N 11 Belt Skew N 12 Belt Skew Event N 13 Slip Limit N 14 Slip Event N 15 DO Belt Drift N 16 DO Belt Skew N 17 DO Slip N 18 Freeze BIC

Block O O 01 O 02 O 03 O 04 O 05 O 06 O 07 O 08 O 09

Power Failure Memory Error Tacho Input Namur Err. Tacho Namur Err Belt L/C Input No Release L/C Input > MAX L/C Input < MIN


RS 485 9600 8-E-1 16 IEEE 63 125K RS422 VxB020

Feeder Control NO 0,0 s 0,00 m NO YES

Scale Monitoring NO 0,00 %LB NO DI6 NO 8.20cm 12.00 cm 0.00 cm 3.00 cm W1 (C04) 4.00cm A (C03) 2.00 %LB W1 (C08) — — — —

Events A (E01) A (S01) A (C02) A (E02) W1 (E03) A (C01) W1 (S02) A (H04) A (L04)


VBW O10 Simualtion Active O11 Error Ext. Event

Block P P 01 P 02 P 03 P 04 P 05 P 06

Release Stop Batch Ackn. Events DI Start DI Setting to zero DI Ext. Event

Block Q Q 01 DO Alarm Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON Q 03 DO Feeder ON Q 04 DO I-MIN Q 05 DO I-MAX Q 06 DO Q-MIN Q 07 DO Q-MAX Q 08 DO v-MIN Q 09 v-MAX Q 10 DO Batch Active Q 11 DO Full Feed Q 12 DO Dribble Feed Q 13 DO Keyboard Mode

Block R R 01 R 02 R 03 R 04 R 05 R 06

Station Address Physics EasyServe Baudr. Format Data Connection MODBUS Idle Time

Block S: S01 S02 S02 S04

DLZ active Baud rate Data format Physics

INTECONT PLUS W2 (S07) A (E06)

Digital Inputs DI I+ DI 3 HI — DI I+DI1 HI — — — Digital Outputs DO I+ D03 LO — DO I+ D01 HI DO I+ DO4 LO DO I+ DO2 LO — — — — — — — —

Comm. EasyServe 1 RS 232 19200 8-0-1 serial 4ms

Block U: U 01 IP-Address 1 U 02 IP-Address 2 U 03 IP-Address 3 U 04 IP-Address 4 U 05 Net Mask 1 U 06 Net Mask 2 U 07 Net Mask 3 U 08 Net Mask 4 U 09 Gatway 1 U 10 Gatway 2 U 11 Gatway 3 U 12 Gatway 4

BLOCK V: V 01 ID Preset Value 1 V 02 ID Preset Value 2 V 03 ID Preset Value 3 V 04 ID Preset Value 4 V 05 ID Preset Value 5 V 06 ID Preset Value 6 V 07 ID Preset Value 7 V 08 ID Preset Value 8 V 09 ID Read Value 1 V 10 ID Read Value 2 V 11 ID Read Value 3 V 12 ID Read Value 4 V 13 ID Read Value 5 V 14 ID Read Value 6 V 15 ID Read Value 7 V 16 ID Read Value 8

Ethernet 192 168 240 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 240 0

Fixmode Parameter 320 352 384 596 594 598 0 0 752 784 1552 1872 1874 1880 1884 1876

Secondary display DLZ No 9600 8 bit NO RS232

0837




INTECONT PLUS Block A :

A 01 Language DEUTSCH Default: DEUTSCH ENGLISH* AMERICAN ENG* FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANO Selection applies to all displays, error messages and parameters. * identical

If you forget your password, you have to change your password with EasyServe or report the shown value of the parameter A03 to Schenck Service to find out the appropriate password

A 04 Second password Range: 1000 - 9999

A 02 Units SI NON-SI

Default: SI

Convert displays and parameter inputs from SI units into American units.

American Units

SI Units

Conversion

lb t f inch

kg t m cm

1 lb = 0.453593 kg 1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb 1 f = 0.3048 m 1 inch = 2.54 cm

*

Dialog Behaviour

Note:

Range:

Range:

VBW

*

The password for using a specific system. This password allows you to protect the basic functions in the function distributor (see above). It does not allow access to parameters or adjustment functions. The changed password is also shown encoded. The default value 2889 generates the return display 14389. Note: If you forget the second password, you can enter a new password in the A04 parameter using the standard password

A 05 Feeder ON/OFF Range:

also applicable to compound units, e.g. kg/hr

active not active Password 2. Password Confirm

Default: 07734 o 7734

The password that secures the INTECONT keyboard access to parameters and adjustment functions can now be changed. The changed password is shown encoded in the parameter dialog and EasyServe. The default value 07734 (or 7734) generates the return display 26574 (this process is identical to DISOCONT).

active:

Access is always allowed.

not active:

Access is never allowed. This function is not visible in the distributor.

Password:

Access is available with the standard password (A03).

Second Password:

0837


Default: active

You can use this parameter to control access to the basic functions of ON/OFF prefeeder. You have the options below::

A 03 Password Range: 1000 - 9999

Default: 2889

Access is available with the new second password (A04)..



VBW Confirm:

INTECONT PLUS Access has to be confirmed again for security reasons.

Note: The prefeeder also has to be activated with parameter M01.

A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF Range:

A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF Range:


You can use this parameter to control access to the basic functions of EasyServe activate/deactivate. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF Range:

A 07 Batch ON/OFF active not active Password 2. Password Confirm

Default: active

You can use this parameter to control deleting counter 2. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF active not active Password 2. Password Confirm


Default: active

You can use this parameter to control access to the basic functions of batch preselect/deselect. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

Range:

Default: active

Default: active

You can use this parameter to control access to the basic functions of keyboard ON/OFF mode. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

Range:


Default: active

A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF Range:

active Default: active not active Password 2. Password Confirm You can use this parameter to control deleting counter 2. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

You can use this parameter to control access to the basic function of >0: zero setting. The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.

0837




INTECONT PLUS Block B :

B 01 Feed Rate Unit

VBW Rated Data

B 05 Nominal Speed

Range:

- - - - - - t/h Default: - - - - - - t/h - - - - . - t/h - - - . - - t/h - - . - - - t/h - - - - - - kg/h - - - - . - kg/h - - -. - - kg/h - -.- - kg/h Determine feed rate display format.

Range:

0,0100...10,000 m/s Default: 1,0000 m/s

Limit value reference. If BIC or CPD (Parameter Block N) are used, value should be accurate to some percent. If scales operate without speed measurement, B 05 determines the accuracy.

B 06 START Source Range:

B 02 Nominal Feed Rate Range:

0,0020...99999,9 t/h Default: 400,0000 t/h

OP FB DI v

Default: OP

Reference for limit values and service displays

B 03 Tacho Source Range:

DI —

Default: DI I+ DI7 HI

Select - to stop belt speed measurement. Computation uses nominal speed B 05.

To start/stop totalization, there is no single solution: OP : from INTECONT keyboard FB : via fieldbus interface DI : using digital input. Default value is DI2. You can also use any other free digital input. Digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if scale fails after Alarm, remove START signal and re-apply. v : If you select belt speed “v”, totalization starts at v>v-min (Parameter F09) and stops at v
B 04 vs Charact. Val. Range:

10,00...100 000,0 I/m

Default: 50,26 I/m

Number of speed transducer pulses per belt meter. Product B 04 * B 05 must range between 0.5...2500 Hz of speed input. Special case:B 03 = NO Do not change characteristic value vs; this would change the run time of your setting programs.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Note: If you select “v”, no batching is possible. Dialog function “Keyboard Mode” lets you change over from selected source to keyboard, and vice versa.

Note G06 defines the totalizing counters tracking time. If Parameter P01 “Release” is set to - -", no release is required.

0837




INTECONT PLUS B 07 FMZ 1 Unit Range:

------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t - - - - - - t *10 ----t *100 - - - - - - - kg - - - - - . - kg - - - - . - - kg - - - . - - - kg

VBW B 09 FMZ 2 Unit

Default: - - - - - - - t

same as B08, however, for Counter 2

B 10 FMZ 3 Unit same as B08, however, for Counter 3

B11 Lets you determine the display format for Counter 1, all batch values and pulse weighting. If no external counter is present, set Parameter B08 to 0.

B 08 FMZ 1 Pulse Dur. Range:

0....1000 ms

Default: 0 ms

Lets you determine output pulse length of external totalizing counter. Pulse weighting corresponds to the smallest display digit of Counter 1 (Parameter B07). B08 < 10 ms : Pulse output is disabled. All pulses not yet output still are deleted. At nominal feed rate the output frequency is:

PNENN

= nominal feed rate in kg/h or t/h

Zmin

= smallest display digit of Counter 1 (B 07) in kg or t

DO Pulse Counter

Range:

— Default: — DO The impulse output of totalizing counter 1 can now also be output via a digital output. The impulse output of INTECONT on plug X6, pins 8-11 is still used with default value “—“ and the configured output is used instead with the alternative DO. The impulse duration is still determined with the B08 parameter. Readings less than 10 ms block the output total and readings up to 1 second are set to 1 second when a digital output is used.

B 12 Pulse Weighting Range:

0.00 – 100000.00 kg

Default: 0.00 kg

The weighting of an output impulse on the impulse output of totalizing counter 1 can now be set to be freely selected. The weighting of an impulse corresponds to the smallest possible digit of counter 1 with default value 0.00 (refer to parameter B07).

Select Zmin (B07) so that f does not exceed 10 Hz. In addition, pulse duration B08 must be smaller than 1/f.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block C : Calibrating Data

C 01 Belt Circuit No. Range:

1...100

C 06 Lever Ratio Default: 1,00

lets you determine the run time of the Zero Setting, Taring and Weight Check setting programs.

Range:

0,0100...2,0000

Default: 1,0000

Lever ratio of force transducing weighed idler of platform and load cell.

Does not apply to AUTO Zero Set.

Q = platform load F = load on load cell

C 02 Belt Circuit Time Range:

1,0...9999,0 s

Default: 30,0 s

lets you determine the measuring time for the “Imp/Belt Circuit” calibration program. Normally, the time is selected for one belt circuit.

With weighing modules with leaf spring parallel guidance, lever ratio is always 1.

C 07 Angle a Range:

Angle of longitudinal scale axis if load cell is mounted vertical to belt.

C 03 L/C Charac. Value Range:

0,01...9,9999 mV/V Default: 2,8500 mV/V

indicates the load cell characteristic value (transmission factor).

C 08 Check Weight Range:

0,5000... 220 000.0 kg

0,001...22000,0 kg Default: 50,000 kg

Weight of material on load cell simulated by check weight

C 04 L/C Rated Cap. Range:

0,0...60,00 degrees Default: 0,00 degrees

Default: 220,000 kg

indicates the total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are considered as load cells.

C 05 Eff. Platf. Length Range:

0,1000...50,000 m

Default: 1,000 m

indicates effective length of weighing platform. 0837




INTECONT PLUS Block D :

D 01 Nominal Belt Load No input possible

Default: 111,11 kg/m

VBW Calibrat. Results

D 05 Tare Correction T No input required max. +- 1000 kg/m

Default: 0,00 kg/m

computed from nominal data B 02 and B 05 used as reference value for limit values and zero setting program.

Result of manual or automatic zero setting program After every taring operation, D 05 is set to 0.

D 02 Span Correction Range:

0,5000...2,0000

Default: 1,0000

proportionally influences measurement of belt load q. q(corrected) = q(measured) · D 02 used to correct measuring system through check with material.

D 06 Belt Circuit Char No input required max. 9E6

Default: 1000000 I/U

D 03 Total Tare No input possible

Default: 0,00 kg/m

Total tare = basic tare + tare correction

Result of basic calibration program “Imp/Belt Circuit”. Determines cycle of setting programs. Divided by Parameter B 04 (vs Charact.Val.), belt length in m results.

D 04 Basic Tare N No input required max. 10000 kg/m

Default: 0,00 kg/m

Result of taring program.

Attention! When entering Parameters D 02 ... D 05 in manual, start with D 02.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block E :

E 01 Source AO 1 Range:

I (feed rate) Q (belt load) V (belt speed)

Analog Output

E 04 Source AO 2 Default: I

Range:

I (feed rate) Q (belt load) V (belt speed)

Default: Q

One of these values can be output in analog fashion.

One of these values can be output in analog fashion.

Filters: Parameters G 02, G 04, G 05

Filters: Parametesr G 02, G 04, G 05

E 02 Elevation AO 1 Range:

0,00...20,00 mA

E 05 Elevation AO 2 Default: 4,00 mA

Output current with E 01 set to 0. The smallest value is limited to E 02, also in stop state of scale.

E 03 Limit Value AO 1 Range:

Range:

0,00...20,00 mA

Default: 4,00 mA

Output current with E04 set to 0. The smallest value is limited to E 05, also in stop state of scale.

E 06 Limit Value AO 2

0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA

Range:

0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA

Output current with E 01 set to 100 % (nominal value).

Output current with E04 set to 100 % (nominal value).

Range of output current is limited to 0...20 mA.

Current output range is limited to 0...20 mA by the hardware.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Block F : If measurement values exceed their MIN/MAX limits, a corresponding event message is output (L1... L3, H1... H3).

Limit Values F 06 Event Class Q-MIN Range:

Monitoring starts 10 s after start up.

WARNING 2 WARNING 1 IGNORE ALARM

L2

Default: WARNING 2

F 01 Value for I-MIN Range:

-10...200,0 % I

F 07 Value for Q-MAX

Default: 5,0 % I

Range:

-10...200,0 % Q

Default: 120,0 % Q

Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02. Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

F 02 Event Class I-MIN Range:


L1

Default: WARNING 2

Range:

F 03 Value for I-MAX Range:

-10...200,0 % I

Default: 120,0 % I

F 04 Event Class I-MAX WARNING 2 WARNING 1 IGNORE ALARM


H2

Default: WARNING 2

F 09 Value for V-MIN

Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02.

Range:

F 08 Event Class Q-MAX

Range:

-10...200,0 % V

Default: 5.0 % V

Reference: Nominal Speed B 05

H1

Default: WARNING 2

F 10 Event Class V-MIN Range:


L3

Default: WARNING 2

F 05 Value for Q-MIN Range:

-10...200.0 % Q

Default: 20,0 % Q

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

F 11 Value for V-MAX Range:

-10...200,0 % V

Default: 120,0 % V

Reference: Nominal Speed B 05

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

F 12 Event Class V-MAX Range:


H3

Default: WARNING 2

Block G : I = feed rate

Q = belt load

V = belt speed

G 01 I Display Range:

0.0...600.0 s

G 04 V Display Default: 3.0 s

Feed rate display

0.0...600.0 s

Default: 3.0 s

Default: 3.0 s

Range:

1.0...600.0s

Default: 1.0 s

Holds for all functions and displays depending on belt load.

G 03 Q Display 0.0...600.0 s

0.0...600.0 s

G 05 L/C Filter

Feed rate analog output

Range:

Range:

Belt speed display

G 02 I Analog output Range:

Filters

G 06 Afterfl. Time Default: 3.0 s

Belt load display

Range:

0.0...2000.0 s

Default: 3.0 s

Determines the time totalization goes on after turn-off of feeder.

All filters are of the 1st order type (exponential), i.e. after abrupt change of signal, approx. 2/3 of the limit value are reached after the set time. Longer times stabilize display but reduce update rate.



0837


INTECONT PLUS Block H : H 01 AUTO Zero Active Range:

NO YES

Default: NO For more information, see Calibration item.

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Lets you select the automatic zero setting function used to correct zero point on empty conveyor belt after every belt circuit. Prerequisites:

v > vmin No setting program No parameter input

0.00...10.00 %Q

AUTO Zero Set H 04 Zero Set Limit Range:

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Maximum admissible totals value of all manual and automatic zero setting operations. Correction is not acquired.

H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX Range:

WARNING 1 ALARM

C5

Default: WARNING 1

H 06 Zero Set Time Range:

H 03 Mean Limit Value 0.00...10.00 %Q

Default: 5.00 %Q

Default: 0.50 %Q

First prerequisite for automatic zero setting. Defines the uniformity of mean belt load between two consecutive belt circuits.

Range:

0.00...100.00 %Q

Automatic zero setting has exceeded Zero Set Limit H04. Value is not acquired.

H 02 Limit Value Diff. Range:

VBW

1...999 h

Default: 4 h

Lets you know that no manual or automatic zero setting nor taring has been performed during the set time.

Default: 1.00 %Q Message C 7: Set Time To Zero

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Second prerequisite for automatic zero setting. Defines the maximum admissible belt load mean value over 2 consecutive belt circuits.

H 07 Time Elapsed Range:

IGNORE WARNING 1 WARNING 2

C7 Default: IGNORE Zeit : H 06

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

H 08 Print Result Range:

NO YES

H 11 Zero Set Diff. Range:

0.00...100.00 %F

Default: 5.0 %F

Default: NO

Print zero setting result after every belt circuit.

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Indicates the difference between two consecutive manual or automatic zero setting operations. Excess is reported by message C9.

Result autom. zero setting Total Tare [kg/m]

50,23

(D 03)

Tare [kg/m] 1,56 (D 05)

H 12 Tare Diff. > MAX Range:

H 09 ZDO Active Range:

NO YES

WARNING 2 WARNING1 IGNORE ALARM

C9

Default: WARNING 2

Default: NO

Activates Zero Drop Out function (see H 10). Manual or automatic zero setting has exceeded difference H 11. Correction is acquired save in case of ALARM messages.

H 10 ZDO Limit Range:

0.0...10.00 %Q

Default: 1.00 %Q

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 If ZDO function is active and belt load exceeds the defined limit, feed rate measurement and totalization are suppressed. No symbol appears on display.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Block I : The sequence of the available batch modes is detailed in Chapter “Details”. Make sure start source B 06 is not set to “v”.

I 01 Range:

Batch Dribble FD 0.00...220 000 kg

Default: 100 000 kg

If batch setpoint is reached “Batch Setpoint I 01-I 02", full feed output Q11 is reset; dribble feed output Q12 activated. These signals can be used, e.g. to reduce belt speed or prefeeder output.

I 02 Range:

Batch Mode I 03 Range:

Adaption Fact. 0.0...1.0

Default: 1.0

Pre-cut-off amount I 02 is adapted automatically, so that the system better suits the situation upon next batch. Value is corrected by the batch error * I 03. I 03 I 03

= 0: = 1:

no adaption full adaption

Intermediate values cause a filtered adaption, preferred in the case of plants with non-exact repeatability.

Batch End 0.00...220 000 kg

Default: 0.000 kg

If batch setpoint minus pre-cut-off amount I 02 is reached, batch is complete. Drive, or prefeeder, stops.

I 04 Range:

Batch Tolerance + 0.0...100.0 %

Default: 1.0 %

Reference: Batch Setpoint Defines the value admissible for excess of batch setpoint.

I 05 Range:

Batch Tolerance 0.0...100.0 %

Default: 1.0 %

Reference: Batch Setpoint Defines the value for shortfall of batch setpoint. I 02 makes allowance for possible afterflow.

I 06 Range:

Out of Tolerance WARNING 1 WARNING2 ALARM IGNORE

B1

Default: WARNING 1

Event message B1 reports excess of limit values I 04 or I 05. 0837




VBW I 07 Range:

INTECONT PLUS

Belt Empty NO YES

Default: NO

NO

: Batching without belt clearance. Stop of conveyor belt aborts batch.

YES

: Batching with belt clearance. Stop of prefeeder aborts batch. (Prefeeder Active M 01 = YES)

I 08 Range:

Batch > Setp. IGNORE WARNING1 WARNING 2 ALARM

B4 Default: IGNORE

Batch actual value exceeds setpoint by tolerance I 04. Message B4 is output. After acknowledgement (also ALARM messages), monitoring of current batch cuts off.

I 09 Range:

Batch Source OP FB

Default: OP

OP

: Batch setpoint, batch number and make-up setpoint are preset from the INTECONT keyboard.

FB

: Above values are set via fieldbus interface.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Block J :

Printer Setting

J 01 Baud rate Range:

2400 4800 9600 19200 38400

Default: 9600 30.09.97 11:45:21L2 W1 0.09.97 11:59:01L2 W1

Load < MIN Load < MIN

Event report

Baud rate for transmission to printer.

J 03 Print Subtotal Print Batch Range: Batch number 30.06.03 Batch Setpoint Batch Actual Val. Totalizer 1 Totalizer 2 Zero Set before

12 11:45:10 1000 kg 998 kg 1200 kg 90000 kg 75 min

Error YES NO

Default: Error

Error

: Each event is printed automatically as soon as available.

YES

: See above, however, including totalizing counter (FMZ) sub-totals.

NO

: No printout

Events

Printing is effected in batching and normal modes. Save parameter J 03, all parameters are valid for batch and counter reports.

J 02 Auto Print Range:

NO YES

Default: NO

NO

: Batch report can be printed only using the control menu.

YES

: Batch report is printed automatically when batch is complete.

Special case: If a value is set to line 0 and column 0, it does not appear in report.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 Range: YES

NO

J 09 Batch Act. Line

NO Default: NO YES : Reset counter 1 upon start of next batch provided that batch report has been printed. 1)

Range:

: Counter 1 can be reset only using the control function.

Range:

0...117

Default: 7

J 10 Batch Act. Col. 0...127

Default: 8

1) also possible without printer (J 02, J 04= YES).

J 11 FMZ 1 Line

J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2 Range:

NO YES

Default: NO

See J 04, however, for counter 2.

Range:

Default: 72 lines

The page must be minimum 4 times longer than the number of data to be printed. The line spacing is always 1/6 inch. Change of parameter automatically initializes printer.

0...117

Default: 6

0...127

Range:

0...117

Default: 9

J 14 FMZ 2 Column Range:

0...127

Default: 8

Range:

0...117

Default: 4

J 16 Date/Time Col.

J 08 Batch Setp. Col. Range:

Default: 8

J 15 Date/Time Line

J 07 Batch Setp. Line Range:

0...127

J 13 FMZ 2 Line

J 06 Print Page Length 9...127 lines

Default: : 8

J 12 FMZ 1 Column Range:

Range:

0...117

Default: 8

Range:

0...127

Default: 8

J 17 Event Line Range:

0...17

Default: 12 0837




INTECONT PLUS J 18 Event Column Range:

0...127

VBW J 21 Line Number

Default: 8

Range:

0...117

Nb Default: 3

J 22 Column Number J 19 Set Line to Zero Range:

0...117

ED:>0

0...127

Default: 8

K 01 Maintenance Elec. 0...10000 h

Default: 8

ED:>0

Block K :

Range:

0...127

Default: 10

J 20 Set Column to Zero Range:

Range:

Nb

Maintenance Int. K 04 Event Maint. Run.

Default: 3000 h Message: S4 (K 02)

Range:

WARNING 1 WARNING 2 IGNORE

S3

Default: WARNING 1

Alerts you on maintenance work to be effected after a certain voltage ON-time.

K 02 Event Maint. EL Range:


S4

The total of conveyor belt run times exceeds the time defined by K 03. When the set interval has elapsed, message S3 is output.

Default: WARNING 1

K 05 SPC Time The total of voltage ON-times exceeds the time defined by K 01. When the set interval has elapsed, message S4 is output.

Range:

1...24 h

Default: 8 h

Acquisition interval for service values, e.g. empty belt. SPC = Statistical Process Control

K 03 Maint. STR-Meter Range:

0837

0...10000 h

Default: 3000 h Message: S3 (K 04)

Alerts you of maintenance work to be effected after a certain conveyor belt run time.




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

K 06 SPC Filter Range:

0.00...24.00 h

Default: 1.00 h

Exponential first-order filter for service values, e.g. mean value and feed rate variance.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Block L :

Communication Fieldbus

L 01 Protocol Type Range:

NO Default: NO MODBUS COMP. S5-BCC COMP. MODBUS PROFIBUS DP DEVICENET MODBUS/TCP Every protocol requires an optional interface card to be present. “COMP” identifies the compatible protocols. Protocol Type

MODBUS/ S5-BCC Comp. MB-COMP .

MODBUS

PROFIBUS DP

DeviceNet

MODBUS TCP

ETHERNET IP

VEG

VSS

VSS

VSS

VPB 020/8020

VCB 020/8020

VET 020

VET 022

BLOCK L

Default

MODBUS/ MB-COMP.

L 01 Protocol Type L 02 TIMEOUT Host L 03 Comm. Error Host L 04 Word sequence L 05 Byte sequence L 06 Configuration L 07 Address L 08 Resolution L 09 Physical attributes L 10 Baud Rate L 11 Data format L 12 Adresse L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT L 14 Address L 15 Baud Rate L 16 S5-Physical attributes L 22 Hardware

NO 5s IG (S 09) I:std/L:std High - Low FIXED 1 4096 RS 485 9600 8-E-1 16 IEEE 63 125K RS422 VxB020

x x x x

PROFIBUS DP x x x

x

DEVICENET x x x x x x

MODBUS/ TCP x x x x

ETHERNET/ IP x x x x x x

x x x x x

S5-BCC Comp. x x x

x x x x

x x x x

x

x

Tabelle der aktiven Parameter abhängig vom Protokolltyp.

L 03 Comm. Error Host

L 02 TIMEOUT Host Range: 1...600s

Default: 10s

If timeout value exceeds zero, a message from host system is expected to arrive during set time. 0837


S9

Range:

IGNORE Default: ALARM W1 (Warnung 1) W2 (Warnung 2) A (Alarm) If no message is received during the time set by Parameter L02, event message S9 “Data Link Host” is output.



VBW

INTECONT PLUS

L 04 Word sequence

L 09 Physical attributes

Range:

I: std/L:std Default: I: std/L: std I: swp/L: std I: std/L: swp I: swp/L: swp The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word. “I” stands for IEEE-754 values (floating point values) “L” stands for 4-Byte integer values “std” does not reverse the word order, “swp” swaps them.

Range:

RS485 RS422 RS232 Default: RS 485

Modbus baud rate.

L 10 Baud Rate Range:

L 05 Byte sequence Range:

LOW-High Default: LOW-High High-LOW Determines the byte sequence in a data word.

L 06 Configuration

2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Modbus-Baudrate.

Default: 9600

L 11 Data format

Range:

FIXED Default: FIXED NO-PARA-ID PARA-ID PARA-6ID* Determines the structure and the size of the process image.

Range:

8-E-1 Default: 8-E-1 8-0-1 8-N-2 8-N-1 Modbus data format (data bits-parity-stop bits).

Only with fieldbus card VxB8020.

L 12 Address

L 07 Address Range:

1...254

Default: 1

Slave address for Modbus protocol.

Range:

0...126

Default: 16

Profibus DP Slaveadresse

L 08 Resolution Range:

1...32767

Default: 4096

Resolving the data in the Modbus protocol nominal value (integer format).

L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT Range:

SIEMENS-KG Default: IEEE IEEE Determines the display of the floating point value for the Profibus DP protocol.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

L 14 Address Range:

0...63

Default: 16

DeviceNet slave address.

L 15 Baud rate Range:

125k 250k 500k DeviceNet baud rates.

Default: 125k

L 17 S5 Physical attributes Range:

RS422 Default RS 422 RS232 Setting the physical interface attributes for the S5 BCC protocol.

L 22 Hardware Range:

VxB020 Default: VxB020 VxB8020 Select fieldbus hardware for Profibus DP and DeviceNet.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block M :

M 01 Feeder Active Range:

YES NO

Feeder Control M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST Range:

NO YES

Default: NO

YES

: The START/STOP Prefeeder dialog function is active. In turned-on state, the prefeeder is controlled through the scale-specific sequence.

NO

: Dialog function is faded out. Control output is always set to STOP Prefeeder.

Default: NO

NO

: After cut-off or batch complete command, belt continues running for the time specified by Parameter M02.

YES

: Conveyor belt immediately stops.

Parameter is active only if Batch Mode has been preselected. Normally, belt immediately stops.

M 02 Setting Time Range:

0.0...1000.0 s

Default: 0.0 s

M 05 Change-over FF/DF Range:

Setting time of material prefeeder

M 03 Feed Distance Range:

0.00...10000.00 m

Default: 0.00 m

Material path from prefeeder to end of weighbridge. Input is required only if Full Feed / Dribble Feed control via prefeeder is desired.

YES NO

Default: YES

I 07 = YES

Belt clearance. M 05 ineffective.

I 07 = NO

No belt clearance. Parameter M 05 lets you select Full Feed / Dribble Feed control via conveyor belt (NO), or prefeeder (YES).

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Block N :

Scale Monitoring

N 01 CPD Active Range:

NO YES

N 04 Source Sensor Range: Default: NO

Starts speed-controlled delay element used to shift belt load measurement to the point of material discharge. Prerequisites:

— DI

Default: DI (DI6)

Digital input for belt sensor. Can be checked using the relevant service value. Only DI6 can be used. If you select alternative “-”, BIC and belt monitoring functions cannot be used.

Speed meter must be present and active. No belt circuit sensor is required.

N 05 BIC Active N 02 Platf.Dis.Length Range:

0.00...50.00 %LB

Range: Default: 0.00 %LB

NO YES

Default: NO

Input required only with CPD active Length from mid platform to material discharge point in % of total belt length LB. The resolution is approx. 200.

Lets you start adaptive belt influence compensation BIC. To initialize BIC: The dynamical tare portion is cleared upon power-up or after changes to a parameter of the following list:

N 03 Belt Sensor Active Range:

NO YES

Default: NO

·

Parameter N 05 “BIC Active”

·

Parameter B 04 “vs Charact. Val.”

·

Parameter D 06 “Belt Circuit Char”

Brief instructions: Belt sensor and sensor area on conveyor belt are designed to acquire belt slip and belt drift, and synchronize the adaptive belt influence compensation BIC.

1. N03 = YES, enter N 06... N 08. 2. Start setting program “LB: IMP/Belt”. 3. Activate BIC (N05 = YES). 4. Tare.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Action:

N 06 Sensor Length Range:

0.01....400.00 cm

Default: 8.20 cm

Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel. See also Service value “Imp.S.”.

Clean head and tail pulleys.

2.

Align belt.

Monitoring system can fail, too. So watch service values of belt circuit sensor and remove fault, if any.

N 11 Belt Skew

N 07 Sensor Width Range: 0.01...400.00 cm

1.

Default: 12.00 cm

Range: 0.01...400.00 cm

Default: 4.00 cm

Limit value for admissible belt skew. If exceeded, event message C3 “Belt Skew” is output and digital output N16 “DO Belt Skew” is set.

Width of sensor area

N 08 Sensor Offset Range:

-400.00....400.00 cmDefault: 0.00 cm

The offset lets you correct the zero point of the belt run monitoring result. However, the maximum display range is limited. Therefore bigger corrections should be effected by sensor shifting (see Commissioning chapter).

N 12 Belt Skew Event Range:

WARNING 1 WARNING 2 Ignore Alarm

C3 Default: Alarm (C03)

Conveyor belt is too far off-centre. Feeder is no longer operable.

New display = old display - offset

Action:

See Belt Drift event.

N 09 Belt Drift Range:

0.01...400.00 cm

Default: 3.00 cm

Limit value for admissible belt drift. If exceeded, event message C4 “Belt Drift” is output and digital output N15 “DO Slip Event” is set.

N 10 Belt Drift Event Range:

WARNING 1 WARNING 2 Ignore Alarm

N 13 Slip Limit Range:

0.00...10.00 %LB

Default: 2.00 %LB

Admissible variance of belt length in % of total belt length.

C4 Default: WARNING 1 (C04)

Limit value exceeded, event message C8 “Slip Error” is output and digital output N17 “DO Slip” is set.

Cause of event: Belt leaves specified tolerance range. 0837




INTECONT PLUS N 14 Slip Event Range:


VBW C8

Default: WARNING 1 (C08)

Admissible limit value (N13) is exceeded.

N 15 Do Belt Drift Range:

DO __

Default: __

Digital output used to report belt drift.

N 16 DO Belt Skew Range:

DO __

Default: __

Digital output used to indicate belt skew event.

N17 DO Slip Range:

DO __

Default: __

Digital output used to indicate belt slip event.

M 18 Freeze BIC Range:

DI __

Default: —

If digital input is set, current BIC values are frozen. This helps to protect acquired values from falsification upon heavily varying belt loads. 0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block O:

O 01 Power Failure Range:

ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2 IGNORE

E1 Default: ALARM

O 02 Memory Error ALARM (S01)

Events O 05 Namur Err Belt Range:

S1

WARNING 1 ALARM IGNORE

E3 Default: WARNING 1

Short-circuit or breakage of belt circuit sensor cable (BIC). Prerequisite: N 03 = YES

No changes possible.

Feeder is no longer operable.

O 06 L/C Input O 03 Tacho Input Range:

ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2

C2

Range:

Default: ALARM


C1 Default: ALARM

1.

Load cell cable not (or improperly) connected.

Input frequency exceeds 2700 Hz. Monitoring starts 10 s after power-up.

2.

Analog-to-digital converter of measuring amplifier is in saturation (see Service Value wz_roh).

Prerequisite: B 03 = YES

3.

Supply voltage has fallen below 19V.

Fault must be available for min. 3 s.

O 04 Namur Err. Tacho Range:

ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2 IGNORE

E2

Default: ALARM

O 07 No Release Range:


S2 Default: WARNING 1

RELEASE input signal pending. Cable breakage or short-circuit.

Special case: IGNORE always releases feeder.

Prerequisite: B 03 = YES Namur errors reset internal speed value to 0. Frequency display (service value) is still active.

0837




INTECONT PLUS O 08 L/C Input > MAX Range:


VBW H4

Default: ALARM

Load on load cell exceeds 110 % of the total of load cell rated capacities (C 04). Full scale: approx. 115 % with CSD load cells.

O 09 L/C Input < MIN Range:


L4 Default: ALARM

Load on load cells is smaller than 3 % of the total of load cell rated capacities.

O 10 Simulation Active Range:

WARNING 1 WARNING 2 ALARM IGNORE

S7

Default: WARNING 2

Simulation mode started

O 11 Error Ext. Event

E6

Range:

ALARM Default: ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2 IGNORE The event E6 is set when the external digital input (parameter P06) is set.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block P:

P 01 Release Range:

DI —

Digital Inputs P 05 DI Setting to zero

Default: DI (DI1)

Determine digital input for feeder release. Setting “-” means that no release is required. Default is DI1, however, any other free digital input can be used as well.

Range:

DI __

Default: —

The function setting to zero can also be started via the digital input. The program is started by a positive flank of the contact. The result is automatically accepted if it is within the admissible zero setting limit (5% of the nominal belt load). An ackowledgement of the result is not necessary. The calibration program can only be aborted in its active phase.

P 02 DI Stop Batch Range:

DI —

Default: DI (DI3)

P06 Range:

Digital input signal used to abort a running batch.

DI Ext. Event — DI

Default: —

Digital input for external fault signals

P 03 Ackn. Events Range:

DI —

Default: DI (DI1)

Digital input used to acknowledge event messages. Level acts statically and should not be permanently available (permanent acknowledgement).

P 04 DI Start Range:

DI __

Default: —

If OP has been selected for start source, digital input “DI Start” can be configured and used to start feeder using a start pulse (key). Feeder is stopped by a pulse output across digital input “Release”. This configuration is possible parallel to the START/STOP keys on INTECONT keyboard.



0837


INTECONT PLUS Block Q: Q 01 DO Alarm Range:

DO —

VBW Digital Outputs Q 05 DO I-MAX

Default: DO I+DO3 LO

Digital output used to report general alarm.

Range:

DO —

Default: DO (DO2)

Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum feed rate (F03) is exceeded up. Contact output is independent of event class (F04).

Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON Range:

DO —

Default: DO (DO4)

Q 06 DO Q-MIN Range:

Digital output used to START/STOP prefeeder.

DO —

Default: —

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum belt load (F05) is exceeded down. Contact output is independent of event class (F06).

Q 03 DO Feeder ON Range:

DO —

Default: DO (DO5)

Q 07 DO Q-MAX Digital output signal used to indicate START/STOP state of scale.

Range:

DO —

Default: —

This very output can also be used to START/STOP drive. Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum belt load (F07) is exceeded up. Contact output is independent of event class (F08).

Q 04 DO I-MIN Range:

DO —

Default: Do (DO1)

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum feed rate (F01) is exceeded down. Contact output is independent of event class (F02).

Q 08 DO v-MIN Range:

DO —

Default: —

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum belt speed (F09) is exceeded down. Contact output is independent of set event class (F10).

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Q 09 DO v-MAX Range:

DO —

Q13 DO Keyboard Mode Default: —

Bereich: — Ur-Wert: — DO Digital output signal to report activated keyboard mode.

Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum belt speed (F11) is exceeded up. Contact output is independent of set event class (F12).

Q 10 DO Batch Active Range:

DO —

Default: —

Digital output signal reporting that a batch is active. Signal becomes active upon start of batch and is deactivated when batch is complete. Signal remains available after abort of batch.

Q 11 DO Full Feed Range:

DO —

Default: DO (DO6)

Full feed signal is available from start of batch until batch amount “Value for I-MIN (F01)- Batch Dribble FD (I02)” is reached. Batching continues in dribble feed.

Q 12 DO Dribble Feed Range:

DO —

Default: DO (DO7)

Dribble feed signal is output after the full feed phase (see Q11).

0837




INTECONT PLUS Block R:

R 01 Station Address Range:

1...254

VBW Comm. EasyServe

R 04 Format Data Default: 1

Station address and baud rate of feeder and EasyServe must be identical. The relevant setting (including communication interface) can be searched using EasyServe (menu: Tools/Options/Communication). The station address is specially designed for plants using a service bus. If the latter is not available, select 1. Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485). See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.

Range:

8-0-1 8-E-1 8-N-1

Default: 8-0-1

EasyServe always uses an 11-bit character frame. For example: 8-0-1 means: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit (N = No parity, E = Even Parity)

R 05 Connection Range:

R 02 Physics Range:

RS 232 RS 422 RS 485

Serial SERIAL+TCP

Default: Serial

Default: RS 232

Determines the physics of the data transmission protocol.

If MODBUS/TCP (Ethernet) has been selected for fieldbus, communication between feeder and EasyServe can also take place via Ethernet. To do so, set Connection parameter to SERIAL-TCP.

R 06 MODBUS Idle Time R 03 EasyServe Baudr. Range:

9600 19200 38400

Range: 2...20ms

Default: 4 ms

Default: 19200 For Modbus driver, single character timeout (idle time) for end recognition can be adjusted using this parameter (see BVH2220).

Baud rate

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block S:

S01

DLZ active

Secondary display DLZ

Note: the BVH2015 Manual on Secondary/Large-Scale Displays

Range:

YES Default: NO NO A large-scale display such as DLZ055 or DLZ110 can be connected at the serial interface on the VEA600V option card (plug X10). Procedure DDP8861 is used. Selecting DLZ active suppresses all printing outputs and the secondary display is triggered instead. The value shown on the lowest line of INTECONT Plus is always outputted.

INTECONT Plus

Character on the secondary display

I

I

feed rate [kg/h] or [ t\h]

Ir

i

relative feed rate [%] rated feed rate

Q

Q

belt load [kg\m]

Qr

q

relative belt load [%] rated belt load

v

v

belt speed [m/s]

Z1

1

counter 1 [kg] or [t]

Z2

2


Z3

3


ZB

B

batching setpoint [kg] or [t]

Zd

R

batching residual value [kg] or [t]

Nb

N

consecutive batching number

ZI

F

actual batching value [kg] or [t]

Zbn

b

reloading setpoint [kg] or [t]

r

residual batching value of the quantity reloaded [kg] or [t]

Display on

Zdn

S02 Range:

Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400

Default: 9600

meaning

S03 Range:

Data format 7 Bit, Even Parity 8 Bit, No Parity

S04

Physics

Range:

RS232 RS485 RS422

Default: 8Bit NO

Default:: RS232

The DLZ055/110 secondary display can only show the dimensions kg and t. If the letter field of the secondary display is illuminated as a full-surface block, this indicates that the value shown is invalid. Either it is not possible to show the desired format or INTECONT is in service operation. The VLZ20100/VLZ20045 secondary displays can also be connected, although they do not have any display for identification and the validity of the outputted measurement. The usage of other secondary displays that understand the DDP8861 protocol has to be examined in specific cases. 0837




INTECONT PLUS Block U:

U 01 IP Address1 Range: 0-255

Default: 192

U 02 IP Address 2 Default: 168

Default: 240

Manual IP address assignment

Default: 1


Range: 0-255

Default: 0

Delegating the subnetwork masks

Range: 0-255

Default: 192

Festlegung der Standard-Gateway-Adresse.

Range: 0-255

Default: 168

Delegating the standard gateway address

U 11 Gatway 3

U 05 Net mask1 Default: 255


Range: 0-255

Default: 240


U 12 Gatway 4

U 06 Net mask2 Range: 0-255


U 10 Gatway 2

U 04 IP Address 4

Range: 0-255

Default: 255

U 09 Gatway 1

U 03 IP Address 3

Range: 0-255

Range: 0-255

U 08 Net mask 4


Range: 0-255

Ethernet

U 07 Net mask 3


Range: 0-255

VBW

Default: 255


Range: 0-255

Default: 0


0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Block V:

As of version VBW20600-08, the options FIXED-1 and FIXED-2 in parameter L06, “Configuration”, are no longer available and have been replaced by FIXED.The values carried over with the setting FIXED are determined by the following parameters. The settings of the original values correspond to the previous FIXED mode 1.A list of all available identifiers and FIXED mode examples can be found in the manual BV-H2220.

Fixmode Parameters V 07 ID preset value 7 Range:

0...4086

Default: 0

V 08 ID preset value 8 Range:

0...4086

Default: 0


Fest eingestellt

Default: 320

Command 4+5

Range:

0...4086

Default: 352

Command 6+7

0...4086

Default: 384

Default: 596

Default: 1872

Default: 594

V 13 ID read value 5 Range:

0...4086

Default: 1874

Totalizing counter 1 [kg]

V 06 ID preset value 6 0...4086

0...4086

Actual flow rate [kg/hr]

Batch setpoint [kg]

Range:

Default: 1552



0...4086

Highest priority event

Rreload setpoint [kg]

Range:

Default: 784



0...4086

Status 4+5

Command 8+9

Range:

Default: 752



0...4086

Status 2+3


V 09 ID read value 1

Default: 598 0837

Batch number




INTECONT PLUS

VBW


0...4086

Default: 1880

Belt load


0...4086

Default: 1884

Belt speed


0...4086

Default: 1876

Totalizing counter 2 [kg]

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837




INTECONT PLUS 10

Event Messages

System Messages S S1 :

S2 :

VBW

S9 :

Memory Error

Program and parameter memories are checked in cycles. If an error is found, cal is inoperable in most cases. Action : Contact the SCHENCK Service. Parameter: O02

Electrics E

No Release

E1 :

External RELEASE signal pending. Scale cannot start. Parameter : O 07

S3 :

Power failed or cut off. Feed rate possibly not recorded during this time. Action : Acknowledge message. Parameter : O 01

E2 :

Namur Err Tacho Short circuit or breakage in speed transducer cable. Scale no longer operable. Action : Check speed transducer cable. Deselect speed measurement for a short time using Parameter B 03 . Parameter : O 04

Maintenance Int. Elec The INTECONT power supply has been switched on for a preset period of time. Perform requisite service work, if necessary. Acknowledgement of message does not influence time intervals. Parameters : K 01, K 02

S7 :

Power Failure

Maint. STR Meter Total ON-time of conveyor belt and measurement is exceeded. Perform requisite service work, if necessary. Acknowledgement of message does not influence time intervals. Parameters : K 03, K 04

S4 :

Data Link Host Serial communication interrupted for longer than timeout. Action : Check cable connections. Parameter : L 03

E3 :

Namur Err Belt Short circuit or breakage in belt circuit sensor cable. Action : Check sensor cable. Parameter : O 05

Simulation Active Operating in Simulation mode, scale is not prepared for normal operation. The Simulation mode lets you test all scale functions without material at the time of commissioning. Action : Deselect “Simulation” function. Parameter : N1

E6 :

Error Ext. Event There is an external fault signal. Actions: Rectify fault. Parameter: P06 ând O11

0837



Event Messages BV-H2214 GB 85

VBW

INTECONT PLUS C7 :

Calibration C C1 :

During preset time, no taring nor manual or automatic zero setting has taken place. Action : Tare or set to zero, acknowledge message. Parameters : H 06, H 07

L/C Input Load cell cable broken, not or improperly connected. Supply voltage too low. Action : Check cabling. If OK, check load cell amplifier. Parameter : O 06 C8 :

C2 :

Conveyor belt length inadmissibly changed. Error is acquired only using additional belt circuit sensor. Action : Check belt tension; if necessary, correct. Check sensor for proper measuring distance. Parameters : N13, N14

C9 :

Tare Diff > MAX

Belt Skew Conveyor belt runs too far off centre. Scale is no longer operable. Action: See C4 Parameters: N11, N12

C4 :

Slip Error

Tacho Input Speed transducer output frequency exceeds 3000 Hz, most probably due to subsequent change of belt speed (e.g. gearbox). Action : Check speed transducer for proper dimensioning. If necessary, measure pulse frequency using oscillograph. Parameter : O 03

C3 :

Set Time To Zero

Automatic or manual zero setting has detected excessive zero point deviation. Correction takes place only if no Alarm is available. Action : Acknowledge message, clean scale; if need be, retare. Parameters : H 01, H 11, H 12

Belt Drift Belt has left defined tolerance zone. Action: 1) Clean head and tail pulleys. 2) Align belt. Parameters: N09, N10

C5 :

Tare Corr. > MAX Automatic zero setting has exceeded specified limit. No correction takes place. Action : Clean scale; if need be, retare. Parameter : H 01, H 04, H 05

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Maximum H

Minimum L

H1 :

L1 :

I > MAX Current feed rate exceeds set limit value. Action : Normally none, unless message H4 is available or system-specific limits have to be observed. Parameters : F 03, F 04

H2 :

Load > MAX

Current feed rate has fallen below set limit value. Error in measurement possibly out of tolerance. Action : System specific unless L4 is additionally available Parameters : F 01, F 02

L2 :

Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Action : Normally none, unless message H4 is available or system-specific limits have to be observed. Parameters : F 07, F 08

L4 : L/C Input > MAX Weighing system overloaded. Errors in measurement possible. Action : Check material infeed; belt load is too big. Parameter : O 08

V < MIN Current belt speed has fallen below set limit value. Action : Check to see if belt is running. Parameters : F 09, F 10

v > MAX Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Action : System specific unless C2 is additionally available. Parameters : F 11, F 12

H4 :

Load < MIN Current belt load has fallen below set limit value. Action : See L1 Parameters : F 05, F 06

L3 : H3 :

I < MIN

L/C Input < MIN Weighing system underloaded. Errors in measurement possible. Action : Check mechanical weighing system, weighed idler alignment and load cell cable. Parameter : O 09

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Batching B1 :

Signal Lamps

Out of Tolerance Batch not completed with specified accuracy. Tolerance : Parameters I 04, 05 Event : Parameter I 06 Cause : Automatic adaption started (Parameter I 03) ? Material infeed or belt drive faulty ?

B4:

MAX Batch Act. Value

a

(green) POWER OK LED not lit: 1. No power supply 2. Device defective 3. All other functions OK, LED probably defective. Call display test.

b

(green) CPU OK Display pending or flashing, processor system is faulty. Scale is inoperable.

X

(red)

Current batch actual value exceeds preset tolerance. Limit value : Parameters I 04, I 08

ALARM flashes if an Alarm message is available. Display additionally shows event code. Action

MIN

(red)

(red)

event

MIN LIMIT VALUE lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded down. Action

MAX

: See relevant code.

: See L1: I
MAX LIMIT VALUE lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded up. Action

: See H1: I>MAX.

No power supply: Upon short circuit on the secondary side of the power supply, internal overload protection responds. Disconnect power supply for approx. 1 minute, and its is ready to operate again.

0837




INTECONT PLUS 11

VBW

Commissioning How To Operate Your INTECONT 1. Event E2 = O04 Namur Err. Tacho

There is no way out. Who wants to put the INTECONT into service has to work himself through the Operation and Service Manuals. To make learning easier, the INTECONT can be operated without mechanical equipment, load cells and speed transducer. Although no feed rate is displayed, all operating functions can be performed. 1. 2.

Connect power supply and turn on (Chapter DETAILS).

Operate cursors to view available events.

T U

1. Namur Err. Tacho E2 Speed transducer not connected, or cabling faulty. 2. L/C Input C1 Load cell not connected, or cabling error.

The upper two green LEDs report “Ready to Operate”, the red LED in the middle flashes and reports Alarm E1.

3. L/C Input >MIN

L4

4. No release S2 No external RELEASE signal. E1

Z= I=

0t 0 kg/h

4.

Upper display : Totalizing Counter Z1 Lower Display : Event Message E1 “Power Failure” Feed Rate I

O

3.

G f

Acknowledge Message E1 with key ACK. Display shows Event Message E2 which reports that no speed transducer is connected. Except “Scale ON” and “Set to Zero”, all functions described in the Operating Manual can be performed, e.g. display of event messages. Call function distributor.

If you wish to turn off the flashing signal lamp or try the setting programs, change some parameters as shown in Parameterization chapter. (a) Parameter O04 to WARNING 1 E2 (b) Parameter O06 to WARNING 1 C1 (c) Parameter O09 to WARNING1 L4 (d) Parameter O07 to IGNORE S2 (e) Parameter B 03 to -Deselect belt speed measurement with Parameter B 03. Weigher can then operate without tacho generator. Use residual parameters to change the event class of the 4 message types. 5.

Set “Release” contact (Parameter P01).

6.

Start INTECONT, all setting programs are available. First call LB program as described in Chapter 6

Start function “Display Events”.

and acquire result using the 7.

f key.

To simulate belt load, see Test Plug item.

0837



Commissioning BV-H2214 GB 85

VBW

INTECONT PLUS Out-of-round

Mechanical Prerequisites Mount mechanical equipment in accordance with the instructions given in separate manual. Check weighed and carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone for correct alignment and out-of-round.

The out-of-round error of idlers in the weigher influential zone must not exceed 0.2 mm.

Securement After alignment, secure idler sets against displacement. Mark idlers and sets to avoid mistakes during maintenance.

Influences

All weighed idlers and three carrying idlers upstream and downstream of weighing station.

Incorrect alignment entails a zero point error which is normally compensated during calibration. However, changes in belt tension increase the error size. For this reason, ensure correct alignment and constant belt tension for accurate weighing.

Alignment

Maintenance

Raise idlers in the influential zone to approx. 3...5 mm above remaining idlers. Align then against one another to a height difference below 0.2 mm.

If idlers are dismounted for maintenance work to be effected, make sure that they are remounted in their former locations.

Influential zone

Electrical Prerequisites Run and connect cables as described in Chapter DETAILS.

Depending on idler set equipment, idlers have to be aligned in various points.

0837

Commissioning BV-H2214 GB

86



INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Enter Parameters All important rated and calibration data are shown in the supplied Spec Sheet. In addition, see hints given below. We recommend to read through all parameters and to select the best possible setting. Parameter Block A Dialog language and display unit. Parameter values are automatically converted if the unit is changed. Parameter Block B Characteristic value vs B 04 is important for calibration. Adjust units to nominal feed rate. To ensure stable display, resolution of feed rate display (B 01) should not exceed 4...5 decimals. Display format of totalizing counters should not exceed 6...7 digits. The decimal point is one digit.

Determine belt inclination by using spirit level and measuring element. Repeat measurement with spirit level turned and calculate mean value of height h.

Example:

Angle C 07:

a = tan (h/l)

Nominal feed rate 10 t/h Unit B 07 —-.—- t Max. Wert 999.999 t

Angles < 20 degr.:

a = 55 h/l

Max. counter run time =

Parameter Block D Calibration results need not be entered. During initial calibration, range correction D 02 should be set to 1. Check to see if, with rated data entered, load cell rated capacity is not exceeded.

F = q * L * H * cos(a)

Then counter is reset. If an external totalizing counter is connected, output frequency must not exceed 10 Hz (see Parameters B 07, 08 and Service Displays Z0 and ZE). Parameter Block C Ensure correct input of calibration and evaluation data as shown in relevant Spec Sheet. Measure effective belt length and inclination at site. For definition of belt length, see Chapter DETAILS.

0837

q L H a F

= = = = =

nominal belt load eff. platform length lever ration angle force on load cell

D 01 C 05 C 06 C 07 in kg

in kg/m in m in degr.

F should be the total of load cell rated capacities C 04. If not, load cells are too small for the requested nominal feed rate.

Enter belt inclination only if load cells are arranged right-angled to belt. If load cells are mounted vertically, the effective angle is 0. For definition of check weight, see Data Flow Diagrams in Chapter DETAILS.




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Parameter Block F

Functional Check

Select limit values and their event classes in accordance with application requirements.

1.

Start weigher and conveyor belt. Starting depends on selected start source B 06 . Acknowledge Message E1.

2.

As running display, a rotating point appears in top left display field. If not, Parameter Vmin (F 09) is set too high or START key has not been operated.

Parameter Block G Adjust display filters, if required. Normally, the default values can be used.

Parameter Block H See “Automatic Zero Setting”. Maintain default values for the time being. Do not start automatic zero setting before calibration is effected.

3. Interpret event messages, if any, as shown in Chapter 10 and remedy fault.

4.

Parameter Block K For calibration, the maintenance parameters are irrelevant. The default values are useful suggestions. Parameter Block N Measuring at discharge point (CPD) should normally be activated (N 01, N 02). For automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) and belt drift display, a special belt circuit sensor and a metal sensor area on belt are required. If these are not available, set Parameter N 03 to NO. Disconnect BIC during initial commissioning. Parameter Block O The event classes are selected for a standard scale. If messages O 04, O 06 and O 07 have been modified for training, reset to default.

Call Service messages. (a) Tachometer If measurement is ON (B 03 = DI7), speed transducer output frequency must be below 3000 Hz. Compare value with Spec Sheet. If frequency heavily varies at constant belt speed, there is too much space between speed transducer NAMUR sensor and gearing. See also “Check of Belt Speed”.

(b) wz The unnormalized output value of load cell amplifier must not exceed 2.85mV/V, not even with nominal platform load. Value changes with varying load on platform (e.g. check weight). Value excessive: – –

Load cell overloaded Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set

Value negative: – –

Load cell improperly connected Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set

(c) aw Load on load cell in percent related to the total of load cell rated capacities. Interpret as under Item b). At nominal belt load, aw should not exceed 100%. 5. If all else fails, see “Test Plug” item.


88



0837

INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Calibration Calibration as such is not required. After input of rated and calibration data, scale is calibrated.

Check Using Check Weight Check with check weight is useful because 1.

Mechanical or electrical faults may be given

2.

Calibration data may be uncertain, e.g. lever ratio not exactly known, inclination hard to measure

3.

Incorrect data may have been entered.

Simply call: 1.

Setting program “Belt Circuit LB” determining the basis of one belt circuit for zeroing and taring programs

2.

Taring program TW

The check weight should range between 30 %...100 % of nominal platform load and be exactly known.

3.

Zero setting program for training. Zero point error should be small after taring.

1. Enter effective check weight as Parameter C 08. If weighing modules with leaf spring parallel guidance are used, the check weight corresponds to the actual value. In other cases, see Spec Sheet or calculate check weight in accordance with Chapter DETAILS / Data Flow Diagrams. For effective check weight, belt inclination is irrelevant.

Always observe the above order of sequence. For first program, measure exact time of one belt circuit and enter value into Parameter C 02. For operation and message interpretation, see Chapter 3. Two further checks should be effected: 1.

Check using check weight

2.

Check of belt speed

2.

Call program “Weight Check CW”, as shown in Chapter “Setting Programs”.

For evaluation of results, see operating sequence description.

Possible causes of faults: Distorsion of platform, insufficient alignment, interferences on load cell cable. In case of suspicion, repeat check with another weight. If something goes wrong: our service department is always prepared to help. Maybe only some small error or maloperation is the cause of trouble. Check individual operations one by one. Normally, the issue can be eliminated.

Unlinearity is mostly due to above faults; linear errors, to incorrect data.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS Check Belt Speed

The speed transducer frequency generator can be driven by 1. Friction wheel in the lower belt run 2. Drive motor shaft. In the first case, the entered characteristic value vs (Parameter B 04) depends on the exact friction wheel diameter; in the second, on the belt wrap factor. Hence, check speed measurement for accuracy. 1. Acquire belt speed with stop watch and tape measure. To be on the safe side, conduct various measurements and calculate mean value.

2. Read INTECONT speed display over the same period of time. 3. Compare both values with one another and, if necessary, correct characteristic value vs B 04.

old new Vg Va

= = = =

old parameter value new parameter value measured speed read off speed

This method is also applicable with unknown characteristic values. If characteristic value vs is known and deviations are excessive, the space between sensor (Namur transducer) and gearing is too big. Check by switching ammeter into sensor circuit.

Tooth over sensor: else:

i= 0.1...1.65 mA i = 1.65...8 mA

Check Using Material Checks or calibrations with check weights cannot reproduce the actual circumstances to perfection. Highly accurate weighing results can be achieved only by various measurements with material and subsequent correction. For correction, use Parameter D 02. Observe the following items: 1. Make sure the route from platform to material collecting point is clean. 2.

Ensure that material diverters, if any, do not divert any material.

3.

If feed screws or air slides are used between platform and collecting point, feeding starts approx. 30 min. before check measurement so that normal build-ups are given.

4.

Set dedustings to a minimum.

5.

Ensure that hoppers or vehicles used for transport of material to a legal-for-trade weigher are cleaned and weighed before every filling operation (tare).

Example: Old value of Parameter D 02 = 1 Within 15 min. a material amount of MW = 4.9 t is fed. Difference in counter reading MA read on INTECONT is 5.0 t.

= 1 x 4.9 = 0.98 —— 5.0 Enter computed value into Parameter D 02 .

Neither level should exceed limit value 1.65 mA.

0837


90



INTECONT PLUS Automatic Zero Setting Activate the automatic zero setting function only in clearly defined cases, e.g. if some belt circuits are run with no load. Parameter H 01 = =

JA NO

Automatic active Automatic not active

Automatic system is active both in turned-on and turned-off state of scale, if belt speed exceeds Vmin.

VBW Belt Run Monitoring INTECONT comes with belt a belt run monitoring function designed to detect belt drift and belt slip. Activate monitoring using Parameter N03 “Belt Sensor Active”. The belt run monitoring functions can be used only if a belt circuit sensor (Namur transducer) and a triangle metal sensor area on belt area available (see Fig. Below). If not, Parameters N03 “Belt Sensor Active” and N05 “BIC Active” must be set to “NO.

Z1 = 2500 kg I = 0 kg/h

Measuring result of one belt circuit is continuously compared to previous result. If “Belt Empty” is identified, zero point is automatically corrected. Set continuous plausibility check with Parameters H 02 and H 03. For normal conveyor belts, default values can be used, however, a check is recommended. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

Deactivate automatic H 01 = NO. Call zero setting program via function distributor various times and acquire result. Note final results Dev. (upper display) as of second run. The . highest value of Item 3 is the smallest value for Parameter H 02. Enter double to triple value, but min. 0.1 %. Parameter H04 monitors the total of all zeroing operations. Enter value, e.g. 2...4 times higher than H 02. Activate Automatic using Parameter H 01.

Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring To activate belt run monitoring: 1. Set Parameter N03 “Belt Sensor Active” to “YES”. 2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter N06 “Sensor Length” (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure). 3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter N07 “Sensor Width” (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure). 4. Set Parameter N08 “Sensor Offset” to 0. 5. Call calibrating function “LB: IMP/Belt”. 6. Acquire result after min. 2 belt circuits. 7. Adjust sensor. Note: Service value ”Imp.S” indicates the number of pulses measured for the covered sensor. If the belt sensor is located exactly in mid sensor area, the following value results: Imp.S. = 0.5 * L (N06) * 0.01 * vs_Charact. Val. (B04) Example: N06 = 8.40 cm and B04 = 1000 I/m result in Imp.S. = 42

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Note: Monitor service value “Belt Drift Tr” indicating the deviation of mid sensor and thus of belt from sensor position in cm. Example: Belt drift = 0.20 cm: Parameter N08 “Sensor Offset” = - 0.20 cm indicates belt slip 0.00 cm. 8.

If necessary, determine event classes of belt slip and drift messages (Parameters N09...N17). Note: Normally, the default values can be used in actual practice.

9.

Control for Point of Discharge CPD Upon measurement at the point of discharge, the measuring point of the weighing platform is shifted to the point of material discharge using a delay element. The amount discharged is measured direct. Note: If CPD is active, Automatic Belt Influence Compensation BIC should be started as well. Prerequisites: ·

Length ratio from mid platform to material discharge point and total conveyor belt length is known.

·

Length ratio in percent is entered into Parameter N02 “Platf.Dis.Length”.

Check messages. Note: To check, adapt Parameter N08 “SensorOffset” accordingly and remember to reset value to default.

To start CPD, set Parameter N01 “CPD Active” to “YES” .

Belt Influence Compensation BIC The automatic Belt Influence Compensation BIC is designed to monitor and correct the belt influence. As is with belt run monitoring, a sensor and a sensor area are required. To commission BIC, first start belt run monitoring. Note: Perform initial commissioning without active BIC. Features After start of the belt influence compensation, the influence of the conveyor belt on measurement will be compensated after approx. 10 belt circuits. Prerequisites: ·

Belt run monitoring commissioned

·

Belt run monitoring started.

To start BIC, set Parameter N05 “BIC Active” to “YES” .

0837


92



INTECONT PLUS

VBW reached. If items 4 and 5 cannot be performed, use pendulum position and Rv in turn.

Cosine Pendulum Belt weighers with variable belt inclination are equipped with a so-called cosine pendulum which compensates the impact of inclination on measuring result.

7.

Tare scale, best in horizontal position.

8.

Calibrate range using check weight and Parameter D 02. Use setting program CW.

The pendulum is switched into the load cell (L/C) supply voltage. L/C

RD

Rp

Rw

Angle

C 06

1 x CSD 2 x CSD 1 x HBM

4000 2000 350

3000 1500 300

727 363 123

+/- 30°

0.73 0.73 0.64

Test Plug

Almost any possible error in operation is reported by event message. For interpretation, see Chapter 10. RD = load cell input resistance in ohms Rp = pendulum potentiometer resistance in ohms Rw = calibrated resistance of Rv in ohms 1. Position pendulum near weighbridge and align using spirit level. 2. Param.:

Angle a Lever Basic Tare N Tare Correction T Do not tare scale.

3.

(C 07) (C 06) (D 04) (D 05)

= = = =

0 table value 0 0

Use Rv to preset RW with highest possible accuracy.

4. Bring weigher into two opposite positions, e.g. degr. Apply check weight, if necessary. 5. Set belt load displays to same value by correcting the pendulum case zero point position. 0837

Check INTECONT for proper operation by using a simple test plug. This helps to see whether the fault is with load cel, or cabling and electrical equipment. 1.

Switch plug as shown in drawing.

2.

Withdraw load cell connector X7 and replace by test plug.

At the indicated resistance values, the following service values result: 1. wz

apr.1.1mV/V

2. Load cell utilization aw

apr. 55 % (C 03 =2mV/V) apr. 39% (C03 =2.85mV/V)

If wz is in specified range, measuring amplifier properly operates. Note: The test plug ordering number is V037426.B01.

6. Use potentiometer rv to vary range until until minimum dependence of belt inclination is




VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837


94



INTECONT PLUS 12

VBW

Details

Start / Stop Start / stop states exclusively refer to belt drive, prefeeder and feed rate measurement. Belt load and belt speed are acquired in either case. Display with START Rotating point in upper display : field. Rotation speed is approximately proportional to feed rate, but never zero. Display with STOP

3. START/STOP with belt speed higher, or smaller, than set limit value Vmin (v). System prompts for input of unmeaned value measured for speed V.

Point stands still after completion : of measurement.

After effective stop command, totalization is cut off as soon as set afterflow time Tnach has elapsed. STOP commands have highest priority. Four different control modes can be configured (see also Parameter B06). 1. START/STOP using digital input. The default value is DI2. However, you can use any other free digital input as well. The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. If scale cuts off after Alarm, START signal must be removed and applied again.

4. START/STOP via fieldbus interface (FB). Serial START/STOP commands acts in the same ways as the corresponding keys. The “Select Keyboard Mode” function lets you shift the Start/Stop commands onto keyboard. Return to “Deselect Keyboard Mode” function using Parameter B06.

2. START/STOP using keyboard (OP)

0837

Start :

START key if no Alarm is available and release signal has been output.

Stop:

Stop key, Alarm, or No Release.



Details BV-H2214 GB 93

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Note 1) Selection “v” does not allow for batching. 2) Digital input “Release” P01 can be cut off (setting “- -”), and scale is released always.

0837

Details BV-H2214 GB

94



INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Batching Without Clearance If batch is complete, belt drive is cut-off. Feeding by full feed/dribble feed can be controlled via belt speed or prefeeder (dashed line). It is recommended to activate delay for material discharge (O 01 = YES). Select keyboard as START source (B 06 = DE + T). For details, see OPERATION chapter. Parameter Schedule: B 06

START source

OP

G 06

Belt tracking time Tn

apr. 3 s

Feed rate determination tracking time after belt cut-off. Enables afterflowing material to be acquired. N 01

CPD Active

YES

Delay for point of discharge I 01

Batch Dribble Feed

kg

Change-over point from full feed to dribble feed, e.g. by belt speed reduction. Enter deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see Figure). I 02

Batch Cut-Off Point

I 03 = 0 : No adaptation I 03 = 1 : Full adaption

kg

Intermediate values lead to filtered adaptation.

Belt drive cut-off point. To be set to slightly below setpoint to enable afterflowing material to be acquired.

Suggestion: I 03 = 0.6

I 03

Suggestion: Mean dribble feed feed rate in kg/h divided by 3600.

I 04...

For monitoring, see Parameter List.

Correction Factor

I 07

Empty Belt

0.6

Dribble feed changeover and cut-off points are automatically adapted upon completion of batch for system to be better matched to actual conditions until the time of next batching operation.

Prerequisite for batching mode. M 01

Feeder Active NO

YES 0837


NO

: Feeder control output is always LOW. Full feed/dribble feed changeover must be controlled via belt drive. Function “Next W/Belt Empty” is not possible. : Prerequisite for feeder control via batch mode and for function “START/STOP Feeder”.



VBW

M 02

INTECONT PLUS

Setting Time

From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence and Parameter M 04). M 03

Feed Distance

m

Material path from feeder to end of weighing platform. If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from platform center to point of discharge (N 02) has to be added.

Details BV-H2214 GB

96

M 05 = NO No entry required.

sec


M 04

Motor STOP Aft. ST

YES/NO

Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking is desired after completion of batch or after cut-off. With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid excess feed. Prerequisite: M 01 = YES 0837


INTECONT PLUS M 05

Change-over FF/DF

Adaption:

NO YES

After every completed batch, system uses the missing amount to compute a correction value for cut-off point A (I 02). Dribble feed changeover point is automatically corrected.

Change-over via belt drive : Change-over via feeder (signals dashed in diagram)

Sequence: 0

1

Start batch through START command. Belt drive, prefeeder, totalization (counters) start operating.

Restart batch through START command.

3

Change-over point from full feed to dribble feed FM = SET - A - F is reached. Signals “Full Feed” and “Dribble Feed” change levels. A and F are the pre-act cut-off points (Parameters I 01 und I 02).

6.

The new cut-off point for the next batch is computed from the error and an evaluation factor.

F(new) = F(0ld) + FAK * Error F

=Batch cut-off point

I 02

FAK

=Adaption factor

I 03 (see Parameter)

Cut-off point HM = SET - A is reached and batch is complete. Belt drive cuts off.

Release Signal:

So as to avoid excess feed, prefeeder shuts down as soon as differential amount M (TZ) is reached (M 04 = NO).

Alarm:

Pending release signal acts as STOP command.

M(TZ) = I * TZ/3600

Batch is interrupted (motor and prefeeder cut off immediately). Remedy fault, acknowledge error message and restart..

I

Power DOWN:

TZ 5

Error = SETPOINT - amount fed

Abort batch through STOP command. To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues running for time TZ after feeder cut-off (Parameters M 01, M 02, M 04).

2

4

VBW

= Current feed rate filtered through display filter G 01 = Parameter M 02

Belt tracking and end of material flow. If Parameters H and V are correctly set, setpoint has now been reached. If not, see Item “Adaptation”. Change-over point from full feed to dribble feed, if prefeeder is used for feed control (Parameter N 05 = YES).

Batch mode is cut off. Counter readings and values of amounts fed remain stored for an unlimited period of time. Resume batching with “Preselect Batch” function. “Abort Batch” function: Abort batch. Control signal behaviour is the same as after STOP command.

Pre-act cut-off point FMS is estimated on the basis of the mean belt load. FMS = VM - L * Q - M(TZ) Q L 0837

= Belt load displayed (Filter G 04) = Material path (M 03) M(TZ)= See Item 4




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Batching With Clearance

When batch is complete, prefeeder cuts off; belt drive, after approx. another half belt circuit. Conveyor belt is empty. Delay for point of discharge should be activated (N 01 = YES). Select keyboard for START source (B 06 = DE + T). Function “Next W/Belt Empty” automatically activates clearance mode. For details, see OPERATION chapter. The smallest possible actual batch amount corresponds to the load on belt from weighing platform to point of feed.

Parameter Schedule: B 06

START source

OP

G 06

Belt tracking time Tn

ca. 3 s

Tracking time of feed rate acquisition after belt cut-off. N 01

CPD Active

YES

Delay for point of discharge

0837

Details BV-H2214 GB

98



INTECONT PLUS I 01

Batch Dribble Feed

VBW Sequence:

kg

0

Start batch through START command. Belt drive, feeder and totalizing counters start operating.

1

Abort batch through STOP command. To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues running for time TZ after prefeeder cut-off (Parameters M 02, M 04).

Feeder cut-off point.

2

Restart batch through START command.

Suggestion: Initial value 0

3

Changeover point to dribble feed is reached. Full feed and dribble feed signals change level.

Change-over point from full feed to dribble feed, e.g. through reduction of feed rate. Enter deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see Diagram). Normally not used in clearance mode. I 02

Batch Cut-Off Point

I 03...

See “Without Clearance”

I 07

Belt Empty

kg

YES

FM = AM - F

Prerequisite for clearance mode M 01

Feeder Active

AM F

YES

Prerequisite for clearance mode

M 02

Setting Time

4

Cut-off point AM is reached, feeder cuts off. Belt drive continues running for time Tab to enable belt to be unloaded.

sec

AM = SOLL - A - Mg

From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence and Parameter M 04). M 03

Feed Distance

A Mg

m

Material path from feeder to end of weighing platform. If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from platform center to point of discharge (N 02) has to be added. M 04

Motor STOP Aft. ST

M 05

Change-Over FF/DF Parameter has no effect.

YES/NO

= Parameter I 02, Cut-Off Point = Estimated load on belt between weighing platform and prefeeder.

Mg = L * Q + I * TZ/3600 I TZ Q

YES/NO

Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking is desired after completion of batch or after cut-off. With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid excess feed (see Sequence and Diagram).

= Cut-off point, see Item 4 = Parameter I 01, Dribble Feed

= Current feed rate filtered through display filter G 01. = Parameter M 02. = Current belt load filtered through display filter G 04

Tab = TZ + time for another half belt circuit With N 04 = NO, TZ is doubled. 5.

Batching amount reached.

Cut-off command routed between Item 4 and 5 totally aborts batch. For Adaption, Release, etc.: See “Batching Without Clearance”.

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Data Flow Diagram

Fig.: Measurement Parameters: Note:

Io

In normal INTECONT operation, data flow diagrams need not be known. In special cases, they can be used to trace internal normalizations, particulary important for (theoretical) precalibration.

Nominal Feed Rate

B 02

in t/h

Io is reference value for limit values and service display. Io has no effects on calibration. Qo = in kg/m Vo = in m/s Io = in t/h 0837

Details BV-H2214 GB

100



INTECONT PLUS

VBW L

Effective Platform Length

C 06

in m

Acquire accurate length and enter. VS

Speed Transducer Characteristic Value B 04

in I/m

VS determines speed measurement normalization, thus being relevant for weighing accuracy. Fo

Load Cell Rated Capacity

C 04

in kg

Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are considered as load cells. Fo = (N +M) * NNENN NENN = load cell rated capacity N = number of load cells M = number of pivots Fo determines weigher accuracy. E

Load Cell Characteristic Value in mV

C 04

The transmission coefficient is an important value for calibration.

Ua Ue F

Fig.: Displays, limit values, analog input Qo

Nominal Belt Load

D 01

in kg/m

= Load cell output voltage in mV = Load cell input voltage in V = 5 V (10 V) = Load on load cell

CSD load cells HBM load cells

Computed by INTECONT, Qo is reference value for limit values and displays.

E = 2.85 mV/V E = 2.00 mV/V

With some types, E is not calibrated. For value, see type plate.

Nominal platform load QB = Qo · L L = effective platform length Vo

Nominal Speed

B 05 in m/s

Reference value for limit values, only relevant for calibration of weighers 1. 2. 0837

H

Lever Ratio

C 06

The lever ratio is decisive for calibration accuracy. However, it must not enter into check weight computation.

operating without speed measurement or using adaptive belt influence compensation BIC is used.



BV-H2214 GB

Details 101

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

elt load results from platform data and belt inclination.

F QB LWB

= Force applied to load cell = Platform load = See Figure.

in kg in kg

With platforms with leaf spring parallel guidance H = 1.

a

Belt Inclination

C08 in degr

Enter belt inclination if load cells are mounted right-angled to belt. With vertically mounted load cells, degree is always 0 QPRF Effective Check Weight

Fo=

Total of load cell rated capacities

in kg

E=

Load cell characteristic value in m/mV

GK=

Device constant

C 08 in kg

This weight serves for check of theoretical calibration.

KOR

As effective check weight, enter platform load simulated by check weight. For check weight factor f, see Spec Sheet.

Ue

QPRF = f * Check Weight

a=

D 02

Range Correction

D 02 is primarily used to calibrate results of a material check. This parameter exclusively acts on belt load measuring branch. Analog Output:

= Load cell input voltage Angle

in V in degr

Belt speed is computed from speed transducer output frequency.

The product from Q and V is feed rate I. I = Q * V * 3600s/f in kg/h For tare parameters to be accurately calibrated, range correction takes place before taring. If range normalization QN is modified (Parameters KOR, Fo, etc.), tare parameters are automatically converted so that zero point is maintained.

ANH << = 1 >> = 20mA X = I, V or Q (see Fig. Analog Output) Operating Principle - Summary

Weighers without Speed Measurement:

Load cell output voltage Va is amplified and converted into digital value d. As transmission factor A0 of AD converter and load cell data are known to INTECONT, load on load cell can be computed from the output voltage.

For setting program LB, a frequency of V0 * VS is internally generated. If one of the two parameters is changed, call LB program again. Only then all other setting programs will run over integer belt circuits.

Details BV-H2214 GB

102


0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Connection Diagram Base Card

0837



BV-H2214 GB

Details 103

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

0837

Details BV-H2214 GB

104



INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Option Card

0837



BV-H2214 GB

Details 105

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Namur Inputs 8 mA = 1.65...8 mA = 0.1...1.65 mA= 0,1 mA =

n

Cable Fastening

Short circuit Level 0 Level 1 (sensor covered) Cable breakage

Option Card: The option card is attached to the INTECONT cover. Signal exchange with base card is via a pluggable flat cable connector. If pulled off, system behaves as if no option card was present and only the operating functions and parameters of the base card can be used. In the rear wall of the INTECONT, under each connector, several slots are provided. The upper slot pair is reserved for the cable clamp which presses the shielded cable against the rear wall. The shield needs not be separately connected. The lower cut-out serves for accommodation of a pull relief, e.g. by cable binders.

Cabling Hints n

All cables are led to the device from the rear (front-of-panel mounting housing) or from below (flush mounting housing) and connected with special connectors. Connectors cannot be confused.

n

The INTECONT is isolated from the mounting surface by its plastic housing. The rear earthing connector is internally connected with the electronics zero potential. The protective ground used requires to be hum- and transient-free. The power supply zero potential (0V ext.) is not connected to the earthing connector. In general, no earthing is required.

n

Ensure that no leakage currents are conducted over cable shields. Therefore shields are applied to one side of INTECONT. The load cell housing is not connected with shields. Shields of data cables to host computer are connected to ground on either side.

n

The consumers connected to the relay and pulse outputs require to be radioshielded, e.g. by suppressor diodes or RC elements.

n

Analog outputs Long cables, particularly to frequency transducers, can interact on analog outputs. We suggest to use an isolating amplifier.

n

Make sure the space between power and measuring cables, if run in parallel, is 0.30 m. If this is not possible lay measuring cable in steel conduit. The same holds if the measuring cable is laid over free stretches or close to powerful transmitters (e.g. broadcasting stations).

Details BV-H2214 GB

106


Attention! Connectors to base card require to be plugged-in with screwed connections up; connectors to option card, with screwed connections down. n

Intecont rear view: Connectors

0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Weighing Platforms 1. Effective Platform Length

Multi-Idler Platform

The effective platform length is an important value for calibration. Determined by platform design, it can normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we recommend to remeasure length and to enter the exact value into parameter. The hatched areas shows the distribution of load on platform. n

Single-Idler Platform

n

Buckled Platform e.g. BMK type The platform consists of two sections. In its center, force is applied to load cell. Instead of weighed idlers, a two-sectional weighing table can also be used.

e.g. BEZ, BED types Platform load is applied to load cell via a weighed idler. This can be done by using a lever system or, with no levers, by leaf spring parallel guidance.

Buckled Platform

Single-Idler Platform n

Multi-Idler Platform e.g. BMP, BMC types Various weighed idler are connected to form a mechanical unit.

0837



BV-H2214 GB

Details 107

VBW n

INTECONT PLUS

One-sided mounting of total belt

2. Check Weight QPRF Simulating a certain belt load, the check weight is used for control of weighing system. It can act on weighing platform direct or via lever system. The weight to be entered into INTECONT is not the actual weight, but the weight acting on platform. Effective check weight QPRF is the platform load in kg simulated by the check weight Single-Idler Platform a) Parallel Leaf Spring Mounting Theoretically, the check weight can be applied to any point of the mechanical platform equipment. Applied weight QP is active always.

One-sided mounting

QPRF = OP b)

Joint Mounting (e.g. Universal Spring Joint):

Lg = Length up to mid hillside

tan(a)

Angle a= 0 Angle a = neg

: K :K

= =

0,018 · a

0 neg 0837

Details BV-H2214 GB

108



INTECONT PLUS Multi-Idler Platform

n

VBW 3. Conveyor Belt Inclination

a) Total platform mounted on load cells: In certain cases, the inclination of conveyor belt has to be entered into parameter. Decisive is the load cell mounting position.

QPRF = QP b)

Joint Mounting

a) Right-angled to conveyor belt

See Single-Idler Platform

Enter angle a into parameter. Load cell is loaded with N = Q * cos a.

Buckled Platform

n

QPRF = QP

n

Normally, check weight acts on center.

n

One-sided mounting of total belt

QPRF = QP

LPG LWZ

b) Vertical to conveyor belt

With inclined belts, consider extension, or shortening, of calibration lever, if any, in accordance with single-idler platform.

Enter 0 as angle a. Load cells are loaded with full force Q.

Chain Calibration Weight: If a chain curtain is placed over the platform area, the total weight of chains in weighing area is the effective check weight. QPRF = n * Lg * s N=

Number of chains

Lg=

Overall belt length

in m

s=

Chain weight per m

in kg/m

0837



BV-H2214 GB

Details 109

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

Printer Connectivity Interface Character map: Cable

: Serial (see Chapter “Technical Data”). ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) : The connection diagram holds for EPSON and CITIZEN printers.

Switch 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5...8 2-1...6

: : : : : :

OFF 8-bit message OFF No parity bit ON, OFF Even/odd OFF Positive edge OFF, ON, OFF, OFF 9600 baud ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF (default)

Use Parameter J 01 to set baud rate to 9600. On the right side of printer, there are two additional DIP switches. Diagram view corresponds to top of printer.

Fig. EPSON Printer Switch 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6...8 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4

Fig.: Printer Cable

EPSON Printer: LX 850

: : : : : : : : : :

OFF Character spacing 10 CPI OFF Zero with no backslash ON Graphics character set OFF Auto hyphenation activated ON Normal print speed ON, ON, ON USA ON Page length 12 inch OFF No cut sheet OFF Jump over perforation OFF No auto line feed

Information on switch position can be printed by using the printer self-test function. (Press line feed key while starting printer). CITIZEN Printer: 120D

Fig. EPSON Interface

Fig. Serial Interface

The interface board is equipped with 2 DIP switches used for selection of serial message base data.

Details BV-H2214 GB

110


0837


INTECONT PLUS

VBW

13 Replacement Instructions Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP —> INTECONT PLUS VEG INTECONT PLUS, type “VEG”, is equipped with added functions for INTECONT PLUS, type “FIP”. Logical inputs/outputs can now be assigned to hardware at will. Please also check all connectors with relevant parameter assignment. When using our convenient replacement set (ordering no. V036910.B01), hardware is adapted by plugging. The EasyServe setting program supplied enables easy assignment and transfer of all software parameters.

FIP base card connection diagram

FIP option card connection diagram 0837



Replacement Instructions BV-H2214 GB 111

VBW

INTECONT PLUS

The FIP base and option cards connection diagrams indicate for every digital input and output the relevant INTECONT VEG parameter numbers used for distribution on physical signals. The tables below compares the connector assignments of FIP and VEG for all physical signals.

Digital Outputs FIP X1 X1 X1 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6

1,2 3,4 5,6 1,2 3,4 5,6 7,8 9,10

Physical Signal

VEG

DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8

X1 X1 X1 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8

1,2 3,4 5,6 1,2 3,4 5,6 7,8 9,10

X3 X9 X9 ——X3 X5 X3

1,2 1,2 3,4

5,6 1,2 3,4

FIP X5 X5 X5 X5 X5 X5

Physical Signal

VEG

DE1 DE2 DE3 DE4 DE5 Sensor = (DE6) V1 (Tacho 1) = DE7 V2 (Tacho2)

X3 X3 X6 X9 X9 X3 X7 —-

1,2 3,4 6,7 1,2 3,4 5,6 1,2

3 4 5 6 7 8

Physical Signal

VEG

OUT1 REF1 IN2 IN1 REF2 OUT2

X7 X7 X7 X7 X7 X7

3 4 6 5 7 8

Attention: Signals IN1 and IN2 are swapped between FIP and VEG. (VEG is compatible to DISOCONT).

Power Supply FIP X2 X2 X2 X2

Digital Inputs FIP

Load Cell

1 2 3 4

Physical Signal

VEG

0V ext 24V ext ext. 0V supply ext. 24V supply

X2 X2 X2 X2

Physical Signal

VEG

Screen TX RX

X10 X10 X10

Physical Signal

VEG

24V Open collector Open emitter 0V

X6 X6 X6 X6

1 2 3 4

Printer FIP X8 X8 X8

1 2 3

1 2 3

Pulse Output Analog Inputs/Outputs FIP FIP X9 ——-

9,10

Physical Signal

VEG

A01 A02

X6 X9

4,5 5,6

AI

X6

1,2,3

X9 X9 X9 X9

5 6 7 8

8 9 10 11

With VEG, fieldbus is connected via separate fieldbus cards (FIP: Connector X7). See Fieldbus Manual BVH2220.

0837




INTECONT PLUS

VBW

Connector Size FIP X1 X2 X3 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9

Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 4 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 7 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 or 10 pins SUB-D: 9 pins SUB-D: 9 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 12 pins

VEG X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10

Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 4 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 6 pins SUB-D: 9 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 7 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 11 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 8 pins Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 10 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 9 pins Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 7 pins

0837




VBW

INTECONT PLUS


0837




INTECONT® PLUS INTECONT® Opus INTECONT® Satus Fieldbus Description

BV-H2220GB

PASS - Service you can rely on. Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire product life cycle. With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever – you need us. It doesn’t matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service. During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures. Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location. Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service .

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

+49 172 6 501700


+49 171 2 251195


© by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008 Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany +49 61 51-15 31 0 www.schenckprocess.com All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change. Note: Translation of the original instructions

Table of Contents

1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ 1 1.1 Validity Range ........................................................................................................ 1

2 FIELDBUS DATA............................................................................... 2 2.1 Data Segments ....................................................................................................... 2 2.2 Units ........................................................................................................................ 2 2.3 Numeric Representation ....................................................................................... 2 2.4 User Data Construction......................................................................................... 4 2.4.1 FIXED Mode...................................................................................................... 4 2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode – Detailed Message Sample................................................. 7 2.4.2 General User Data Construction ....................................................................... 8 2.4.2.1 Message Construction................................................................................ 9 2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer .................................................................................. 11 2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction – Detailed Samples.............................. 13 2.5 User Data Diagnosis ............................................................................................ 15 2.5.1 Serial connection............................................................................................. 15 2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet.................................................................................. 17 2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data.............................................................................................. 19 2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists.............................................................................. 19 2.6.2 Commands ...................................................................................................... 20 2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format .......................................................... 22 2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ..................................................... 23 2.6.5 Status Information ........................................................................................... 24 2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format............................................... 32 2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ......................................... 35 2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format....................................................................... 36 2.6.9 Events ............................................................................................................. 37

3 PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................. 38 3.1 Commissioning Guideline .................................................................................. 38 3.2 Profibus Module Functionality ........................................................................... 38 3.3 User Data Construction....................................................................................... 39 3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT)..................................................................... 39 3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master ......................................................................... 40 3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting......................................................................... 41 3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V) ............................................................................... 42 3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020)................................................................................ 43 3.9 For Further Reading ............................................................................................ 44

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description ©Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

I

Table of Contents

4 DEVICENET ..................................................................................... 45 4.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................45 4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality .........................................................................45 4.3 User Data Construction .......................................................................................45 4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT) .........................................................46 4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master.............................................................................46 4.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .........................................................................47 4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V) .............................................................................48 4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V) .............................................................................49 4.9 For Further Reading .............................................................................................50

5 MODBUS.......................................................................................... 51 5.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................51 5.2 Modbus Module Functionality.............................................................................51 5.3 Data Format...........................................................................................................51 5.4 Function Codes (FC) ............................................................................................52 5.5 Transmission Protection .....................................................................................52 5.6 Error Codes...........................................................................................................52 5.7 Station Addresses ................................................................................................52 5.8 User Data ...............................................................................................................53 5.8.1 Process Values ................................................................................................53 5.8.2 Parameters ......................................................................................................53 5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus.....................................................................53 5.10 Sample Messages...............................................................................................53 5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT)...........................................................54 5.12 Settings on Modbus Master ..............................................................................55 5.13 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .......................................................................55 5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG) .............................................56 5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG) ...........................................58 5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire....................................................................58 5.17 For Further Reading ...........................................................................................58

II

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Table of Contents

6 ETHERNET ...................................................................................... 59 6.1 Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................. 59 6.2 Checking Station Addresses .............................................................................. 60 6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP .................................................................................................... 61 6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline ............................................................................... 61 6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 61 6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 61 6.3.4 Station Addresses ........................................................................................... 62 6.3.5 Function Codes (FC)....................................................................................... 62 6.3.6 Transmission Protection.................................................................................. 62 6.3.7 Error Codes ..................................................................................................... 62 6.3.8 Data Formats................................................................................................... 63 6.3.9 Process Values ............................................................................................... 63 6.3.10 Parameters.................................................................................................... 63 6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview.............................................................................. 63 6.3.12 Message Samples......................................................................................... 64 6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT) .............................................. 64 6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master .................................................................. 65 6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 65 6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V – VEG) ...................................................... 66 6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG.............................................................................. 67 6.3.18 For Further Reading...................................................................................... 67 6.4 Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................................ 68 6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines.............................................................................. 68 6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 68 6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 68 6.4.4 User Data Construction................................................................................... 68 6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT) ................................................... 68 6.4.6 Configuration of the network in “RSLogix 5000" ............................................. 70 6.4.7 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting....................................................................... 71 6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG...................................................... 72 6.5 Ethernet connection VKG ................................................................................... 73 6.5.1 For Further Reading........................................................................................ 73

7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES............................................................. 74 7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers .......................................... 74 7.2 Batching via fieldbus........................................................................................... 75


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

III

Table of Contents

IV

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Overview

1 Overview Before putting into operation one of the protocols described below, always read Item “Fieldbus Data“ and the protocol-specific items. Decisive for the further procedure is the “User Data Construction” item. You can select: ! FIXED mode or ! General user data construction If you arrive at the conclusion that the FIXED mode is the right mode for your application, you can skip all the other information on IDs and parameters. The FIXED mode means you need less time for orientation and it makes it much easier to use the fieldbus connection. You only have to read the FIXED mode Chapter in Sections 1.1-1.4 as well as the sections on diagnosis and troubleshooting wherever necessary. You can find information on the web server in document BVI2060AA.

1.1 Validity Range This item describes all data that can be transferred using the various fieldbus protocols. The data basis is the same for all fieldbuses. Special features are detailed at the protocolspecific items. The “Fieldbus Data” item holds for the following protocols: Protocol Profibus DP DeviceNet Modbus Modbus-TCP/IP and Ethernet/IP

See: Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6

For description of protocol S5-RK512 (3964R), see manual FH458.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

1

Fieldbus Data

2 Fieldbus Data 2.1 Data Segments The INTECONT system distinguishes the following cyclic data: ! Commands (bit or byte information) ! Setpoints (floating point values) ! Status information (bit or byte information) ! Measurement values (floating point values) ! Long (INT32) values (integer values)

2.2 Units INTECONT uses two different unit systems: ! SI units ! NON-SI units Changeover takes place using the “Units” parameter. For the fieldbuses, this means: ! Selection SI lets you transfer all unit values in "m, kg and sec" ! Selection NON-SI transfers your values in "ft, lb and sec".

2.3 Numeric Representation Floating Point Values INTECONT readies measurement values, setpoints and some parameters in the form of floating point numbers in the IEEE-754 4-byte format. Depending on protocol and parameter, these can be converted into another floating point format. For details, see individual protocol descriptions. Transmission always starts with MSB. Example for transmission of value 150.5 in IEEE format (indicating the line sequence): Byte 1: Sign/Exponent

Byte 2: Mantissa 1

Byte 3: Mantissa 2

Byte 4: Mantissa 3

0x43

0x16

0x80

0x00

Sample floating point numbers Number IEEE format (HEX) 1.0 3F800000 10.0 41200000 100.0 42C80000 1000.0 447A0000

2

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

Siemens-KG format (HEX) 01400000 04500000 07640000 0A7D0000


Fieldbus Data

Data (double) words Data words are standard transmitted using the Motorola format (high byte followed by low byte). Depending on protocol and parameter, another byte sequence can be set. For details, see individual protocol descriptions. Word oder / Byte order

Data type

MSB MSB

LSB LSB

Int 32 / LONG 0

0

MSB

LSB

Int 16

Bit information Bits are comprised to form words (Modbus, Modbus/TCP) or double words (Profibus, DeviceNet). The line sequence is as follows: Ex.: Command ID 0x0140 Ex.: Status ID 0x02F0

Comm4_HI Status2_HI


Comm4_LO Comm5_HI Status2_LO Status3_HI

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

Comm5_LO Status3_LO

3

Fieldbus Data

2.4 User Data Construction As mentioned above, INTECONT readies two process images: ! FIXED mode or ! General user data construction. The data of the Fixed Mode Parameter parameter blocks are transferred to set positions between the host system and INTECONT in the FIXED mode. Parameters cannot be transferred. However, you also do not have to study the principle of data exchange via "general user data structure". This is where you can transfer any data you want in any order you want including the equipment parameters. You pay for this flexibility at the price of devoting more time and effort to orientation in terms of the data scope and type of processing. The user data structures of this section also apply to the PROFIBUS, DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP protocols. The Modbus, or Modbus/TCP, protocol is used to transfer continuous data ranges from Master to scale and vice versa (see protocol-specific items).

2.4.1 FIXED Mode The data of the FIXED mode are also adapted to each scale type. In any event, the structure of the data packages as shown in the figure below is identical. Each value is always the size of one data double word (4 bytes). Values not used are filled with zero. For detailed description of commands and status values, refer to the lists of cyclic data given at the end of the Fieldbus Data item.

NOTE In preset value 1 (commands 4 + 5) the release bit (in terms of a fieldbus release) serving for interface monitoring must always be set statically. If this bit is not set, the subsequent preset values are not evaluated and HOST communication fault is set.

4

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description © Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

VBW20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

Read values Fixed Mode 2 VLW20600 Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert 1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 5-8 310 Status 4+5 9-12 610 Highest priority event 13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 17-20 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 21-24 760 Fill [kg] 25-28 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 29-32 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

Wert Commands 4+5 Commands 6+7 Commands 8+9 Make-Up setpoint [kg] Batch setpoint [kg] Batch No. 0 0

VBW20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]

ID (hex) 140 160 180 254 252 256 — —

VBW20600

Byte-No. ID (hex) Wert 1-4 140 Commands 4+5 5-8 160 Commands 6+7 9-12 180 Commands 8+9 13-16 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 17-20 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 21-24 — 0 25-28 — 0 29-32 — 0 Read values Fixed Mode 1 VLW20600 Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert 1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 5-8 310 Status 4+5 9-12 610 Highest priority event 13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 17-20 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 21-24 760 Fill weight [kg] 25-28 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 29-32 766 Actual Setpoint [kg]

VLW20600

Preset values Fixed Mode 1 and 2 Wert Commands 4+5 Commands 6+7 Kommando 8+9 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] Batch setpoint [kg] 0 0 0

VDB20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

VDB20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 766 Actual Setpoint [kg/h]

ID (hex) 140 160 180 250 252 — — —

VDB20600

The table below includes all values transferred with the particular scale type:

VMD20600 ID (hex) 2F0 310 610 750 752 754 768 76A

VMD20600 ID (hex) 2F0 310 610 750 752 75A 75E 766

ID (hex) 140 160 180 250 252 256 254 —

VMD20600

Wert Status 2+3 Status 4+5 Highest priority event Feed rate [kg/h] Totalizer 1 [kg] Totalizer 2 [kg] Batch Feed Rate [kg] Batch Res. Amount [kg]

Wert Status 2+3 Status 4+5 Highest priority event Feed rate [kg/h] Totalizer 1 [kg] Measured load [kg] Speed [1/min] Actual Setpoint [kg/h]

Wert Commands 4+5 Commands 6+7 Commands 8+9 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] Batch setpoint [kg] Batch No. Make-up Setpoint [kg] 0

Wert Commands 4+5 Commands 6+7 Commands 8+9 Make-Up setpoint [kg] Batch setpoint [kg] Batch No. 0 0

5

VMD20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

VDM20600 ID (hex) Wert 2F0 Status 2+3 310 Status 4+5 610 Highest priority event 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 75A Measured load [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]] 768 Actual Setpoint [kg/h]

ID (hex) 140 160 180 254 252 256 — —

VDM20600

Fieldbus Data

6

Fieldbus Data

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

From the programme statuses VBW20600-08 VDB20600-08 VDM20600-05 VLW20600-07 VMD20600-08 there is only one FIXED mode. The values that are then transferred in FIXED mode should be set in the parameter block “Fixed Mode Parameter”. The default values correspond to the values in the table for fixed mode 1.

2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode – Detailed Message Sample INTECONT parameters (scale type: VLW) Configuration Floating point format

FIXED-1 IEEE format

Master->Slave Bytes 1-4 Bytes 5-8 Bytes 9-12 Bytes 13-16 Bytes 17-20 Bytes 21-32

Bytes (hex) 00 0C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 43 16 80 00 42 C8 00 00 ZERO

Meaning (ID value, hex) Commands 4+5 Commands 6+7 Commands 8+9 Setpoint Batch setpoint

(0140) (0160) (0180) (0250) (0252)

Slave->Master Bytes 1-4 Bytes 5-8 Bytes 9-12 Bytes 13-16 Bytes 17-20 Bytes 21-24 Bytes 25-28 Bytes 29-32

Bytes (hex) 01 02 00 00 00 02 00 04 13 18 00 00 42 C8 00 00 44 9A 40 00 43 AC 80 00 45 F6 90 00 42 C8 00 00

Meaning (ID value, hex) Status 2+3 Status 4+5 Most significant error Feed rate actual value Totalizing counter 1 Bin level F Totalizing counter 2 Effective setpoint

(02F0) (0310) (0610) (0750) (0752) (0760) (0754) (0766)


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

Current value Event acknowledged, release set No command active START keyboard mode set 150.5 kg/hr 100 kg Standby Current value Normal mode, no release Filling system, fill level < Min Event S9 ackn., Warning2 100 kg/hr 1234 kg 345 kg 7890 kg 100 kg/hr

7

Fieldbus Data

2.4.2 General User Data Construction Since there is no specific Weighing profile, data construction uses the existing Variable Speed Drives profile. In this profile, user data construction for the cyclic channel is called Parameter Process Data Object (PPO). The guideline determines the user data construction for drives a Master can use to access the drive slaves by means of cyclic data exchange. User data construction in cyclic data exchange comprises two ranges which can be transmitted in every message: !

Process Data Range (PZD), i.e. control words and setpoints, or status information and actual values

!

Parameter Range (PKW) for read/write of parameter values, e.g. read-out of information on parameter characteristics (MIN/MAX values, etc.).

The PPO type used to address the scale from Master can be configured at the time of bus system commissioning. The PPO type is selected as a function of the scale task in the automation environment and used to control the scale in the automation environment, e.g. Start/Stop, Enter Setpoints. The parameter range enables the user to freely access all scale parameters with the use of the bus system. Thus, further information for scale visualization can be called up from a host system, e.g. a PC, with no adverse effects on the efficiency of process data transmission. All messages used in cyclic data transmission have the following basic construction: Protocol frame (header)

Parameters (PKW) optional

User data Process data (PDR)

Protocol frame (trailer)

General message construction PPO types You can select the following PPO types: ! NO_PARA_ID: User data without a parameter range and three defined preset values and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID ! PARA_ID: User data with a parameter range, two preset values and four reading values. ! PARA_6ID: User data with a parameter range with three defined preset values and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020. Parameter range (PKW) The PKW message part (Parameter Code Value) can be used to monitor and/or change any scale parameter. The requisite mechanisms of order/reponse IDs are described at the Parameter Transfer item.

Process data range (PDR) Using the process data, commands and preset values (Master to scale) or status words and actual values ( scale to Master response) can be transmitted. Transmitted process data are immediately effective. .

8

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

2.4.2.1 Message Construction The figure below shows the basic construction of user data in the INTECONT system. The first line shows the message from bus master to scale; the second, the scale reponse.

The user data structure is fixed and the data content (IDs and values) is variable. The size of the user data part of a package is 32 bytes in the process images NO_PARA_ID + PARA_ID. If the DeviceNet or Ethernet/IP protocol is used, 32 should be entered as the number of bytes (as the produced and consumed connection size). The configuration telegram guarantees the correct length information in Profibus . Unused bytes are filled with the value zero. Starting with the program versions 1 VBW20600-08 2 VDB20600-08 3 VDM20600-05 4 VLW20600-07 5 VMD20600-08 the process image PARA_6ID is also supported. The structure corresponds to NO_PARA_ID + up-stream parameter block. Another condition is that a communication module is used with a firmware version. This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020. You can see the version under service values – SW_FB. The process image of the control system to INTECONT is 38 bytes long in this case and 40 bytes are transmitted in the opposite direction.

Sample Data transmission without parameters with 3 preset values, 6 variable user-defined identifications (IDs) – representation HEX


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

9

Fieldbus Data

Note ! The preset IDs from Master to scale must originate from the Command or Preset value ranges. It is possible to preset multiple setpoints (feed rate and batch setpoint) or multiple commands with different IDs in one and the same cycle. ! If one ID is zero, respective value is not evaluated.. ! If all bytes are set to zero in the presetting message (bus Master to INTECONT), fieldbus communication fault is set on INTECONT. INTECONT interprets this state as failure of the bus Master's host CPU whilst the communication processor in Master is active. The INTECONT timeout monitoring cannot compensate this state since formally valid data packages are transferred still. At least one preset ID must have a valid value unequal to zero. ! Control and status information is comprised in 4-byte packages. The IDs assigned to blocks are highlighted in data description. Only these IDs may be used here. If a different ID is used, data are rejected and an error message is output. ! In the response message, status and actual value are identified by their positions in message. The fixed status has ID 0x2F0; the actual value, ID 0x750. ! Through addition of (read) IDs in Master --> scale message, you can cause the scale to enter the desired values into the response message. Value sequence corresponds to the ID sequence. If IDs of the Preset value or Command ranges are entered, the value preset last is reread. ! If an ID is identified as wrong, corresponding value in the response is set to zero. Sample

Data transmission with additional parameter block

The (grey) parameter block always precedes the residual data.

Master --> scale message PKE

IND

PWE1

PWE2

ID Preset value 1

ID Preset value 1 Preset value 2

Preset value 2

Ordering list (read IDs)

Scale response PKE

IND

PWE1

PWE2

Status infos (2+3) Actual value (4 bytes) (4 bytes)

Values as per ordering list

Note Parameter evaluation requires considerable expenditure. We suggest to limit data exchange to parameters of the FLOAT type.

For detailed message samples, see end of item 1.5.

10

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer Parameter block (PKW) Parameter block (PKW), 4 words IND (2nd word) High Low

PKE (1st word)

PWE (3rd and 4th words) PWE1 PWE2

Basic construction of parameter block Parameter ID (PKE), 1st word

The parameter ID (PKE) is always a 16-bit value. Bits 0 to 12 (PNU) include the number of the desired parameter. Bits 13 to 15 (AK) include the order or response ID. For the order message (Master; scale), the meaning of the order ID is shown in table. For the response message (scale ; Master), the meaning of the response ID is shown in table. Depending on order ID, only certain response IDs can be used.

Bit no.

AK 15

14

PNU Bit 0-12

13

Details of parameter ID (PKE) Order ID 0 1

3 4

Meaning No order Request current parameter value (double word) Write (change) parameter value (double word) Order description element (double word)

Pos. response 0 2

Neg. response 7

2

7

2

7

Order IDs (AK) Master station —> INTECONT Response ID 0 2 7 Response IDs (AK)

Meaning No order Transfer current parameter value / event group (double word) Order cannot be executed (error number in PWE2) INTECONT —> Master station


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

11

Fieldbus Data

Parameter index (IND) 2nd word The array sub-index (in PROFIBUS profile simply called “sub-index) is an 8-bit value and transferred upon cyclic data exchange using PPOs in the most significant byte (bits 8 to 15) of parameter index (IND). The less significant byte (bits 0 to 7) always has zero value. IND function If an order transfers a sub-index with values between 1 and 254, the desired index of the selected parameter is transferred. For meanings of single parameter indices, please see the table below. When a description element is processed, the number of the desired element is transferred. Index 0 4 8 12

Meaning Default value Min. value Max. value Unit index (1st word), after-comma places (2nd word)

Index in parameter description (IND) – most significant byte of parameter index Parameter value (PWE) 3rd and 4th words The parameter values (PWE) are always transferred in form of a double word (32 bits). A PPO message can transfer only one parameter value at a time. A 32-bit parameter value consists of PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd word) and PWE2 (less significant word, 4th word). A 16-bit parameter value is transferred in PWE2 (less significant word, 4th word). Set PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd word) to 0 value on Master. Bits 0 ... 15:

Parameter value with 16-bit parameter, or Low portion with 32-bit parameter

Bits 16 ... 31:

Value = 0 with 16-bit parameters, or High portion with 32-bit parameter

Error number 1 2 3 4 5 Error numbers

Meaning Inadmissible parameter number (parameter not available or preset value wrong, e.g. MIN/MAX exceeded up/down) MIN/MAX value exceeded up/down No access right Order not possible in current operating state of scale Order not implemented

Error number (PWE2) If the response ID has value 7 (order cannot be executed), parameter value 2 (PWE2) includes an error number specified in table.

12

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

Order/response processing rules An order and/or response can refer to a single parameter only. The Master must repeat the order until receipt of relevant response. The Master recognises the response on the given order through: ! evaluation of response ID ! evaluation of parameter number PNU ! if necessary, evaluation of parameter index IND ! if necessary, evaluation of parameter value PWE. The complete order must be sent in one message; splitted order messages are not admitted. The same applies to the response. If the response message is repeated, the scale responds with the current values. If no information from PWK interface are needed in cyclic operation (only PZD data matter), set the order ID to “No Order”. For samples, see item below.

2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction – Detailed Samples Sample 1 GSD module: INTECONT parameters Process image length Floating point format

"NO_PARA_ID" Configuration: “NO_PARA_ID” Master -> Slave : 30 bytes, Slave Siemens-KG-Format

-> Master: 32 bytes

Sample Master->Slave process image: Bytes 1+2 Bytes 3-6 Bytes 7+8 Bytes 9-1 Bytes 13+14 Bytes 15-18 Bytes 19+20 Bytes 21+22 Bytes 23+24 Bytes 25+26 Bytes 27+28 Bytes 29+30

0250 0A 7D 00 00 0140 00 41 00 00 0000 00 41 00 00 0752 075C 0754 0758 0000 0000

ID for "Write feed rate setpoint” Setpoint 1000.0 kg/hr ID for "Commands 4+5" Reset control value for scale start and counter 1 Standby Reset control value for scale start and counter 1 (ID=0: not active) ID to request counter 1 reading ID to request belt speed in m/s ID to request counter 2 reading ID to request belt load in kg/m Standby Standby

Sample Slave->Master process image: Bytes 1-4 Bytes 5-8 Bytes 9-12

01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Always status messages to ID 02F0 Always feed rate actual value kg/hr, ID=0750 Value for ID in bytes 19+20, i.e. counter 1 reading

Bytes 13-16 Bytes 17-20 Bytes 21-24 Bytes 25-28 Bytes 29-32

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed Value for ID in bytes 23+24, i.e. counter 2 reading Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load Standby Standby

Bytes 1-4 status messages: set are "Normal mode” and “No release” bits -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

13

Fieldbus Data Sample 2 (preset parameter) GSD module: INTECONT parameters Process image lenght Floating point format

“PARA_ID” Configuration: “PARA_ID” Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave IEEE

-> Master: 32 bytes

Sample Master->Slave process image: Bytes 1-8 Bytes 9+10 Bytes 11-14 Bytes 15+16 Bytes 17-20 Bytes 21+22 Bytes 23+24 Bytes 25+26 Bytes 27+28

7205 0000 4170 0000 0250 44 7A 00 00 0140 00 44 00 00 0752 075C 0754 0758

Preset parameter "F_Control Min. – Feed Index 1" (value =15 %) ID for "Write feed rate setpoint " Setpoints 1000.0 kg/hr ID for "Control" Acknowledge control value for events and reset counter 1 ID to request counter 1 reading ID to request belt speed in m/s ID to request counter 2 reading ID to request belt load in kg/m

Sample Slave->Master process image: Bytes 1-8 Bytes 9-12 Bytes 13-16 Bytes 17-20 Bytes 21-24 Bytes 25-28 Bytes 29-32

5205 0000 4170 0000 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Preset parameter value accepted Always status messages to ID 02F0 Always feed rate actual value in kg/h, ID=0750 Value for ID in bytes 19+20, i.e. counter 1 reading Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed Value for ID in bytes 23+24, i.e. counter 2 reading Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sample 3 (preset parameter with error response) GSD module INTECONT parameters Process image lengths Floating point format

“PARA_ID” Configuration: “PARA_ID” Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave IEEE

-> Master: 32 bytes

Sample Master->Slave process image: Bytes 1-8 ...

7205 0000 447a 0000 ...

Preset parameter "F_Control Min." (value =1000 %) ...

Sample Slave->Master process image: Bytes 1-8 ...

F205 0000 4170 1000 ...

Preset parameter value not accepted (value > MAX) ...

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sample 4 (read parameter) GSD module “PARA_ID” INTECONT parameters Configuration: “PARA_ID” Process image lengths Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave Floating point format IEEE

-> Master: 32 bytes

Sample Master->Slave process image: Bytes 1-8 ...

3205 0000 xxxx xxxx ...

Read parameter "F_Control Min" (xxxx = optional value) ...

Sample Slave->Master process image: Bytes 1-8 ...

14

5205 0000 4170 0000 ...

Parameter value = 15% ...

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

2.5 User Data Diagnosis 2.5.1 Serial connection You can always carry out the utilisation diagnosis with a serial EasyServe connection. In addition, you can always use diagnosis with VEG via Ethernet if the optional VET020V fieldbus card is mounted. The VKG scenario always offers all options. EasyServe readies a very simple form of bus monitor. Menu “Fieldbus View” lets you go to the dialog window. The following diagnoses are possible: Display of first 50 characters of last 100 messages in hex format. Display only shows the mere user data. The following errors can be recognised: ! Parameter with wrong data format. All floating point numbers are improperly indicated. ! Faulty IDs preset from Master (see Lists of Cyclic Data) ! Faulty data contents Not recognised: ! Initialisation error upon connection set-up ! Layer 2 issues upon data exchange

Display of EasyServe monitor (Profibus or DeviceNet)

Representation of Modbus messages (incl Modbus frame)

The figure shows the Modbus telegram depiction (including Modbus frame) INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description © Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

15

Fieldbus Data

Explanations on EasyServe monitor (Profibus sample) Master transfers command (ID=0x0140) “Acknowledge event” bit and command (ID=0x0160). Scale is requested to respond to IDs 0x0758, 0x075E, 0x0310 and 0x0610. Display meanings Display shows current fieldbus protocol (see title) and data selected using checkbox. “==> “ means that Master sends data to scale ( Receive INTECONT). “<== “ identifies data sent from INTECONT to Master Selection buttons Record: Starts recording on scale Display: Data are transferred from scale to PC and then displayed. This process may take some seconds depending on how many data have been stored yet. Maximum the last (most recent) 50 messages can be recorded. Copy: Lets you mark all (no selection), single or a group of messages by mouse click and copy them into clipboard. If requested, data can be copied into an editor. Checkbox: Lets you select the direction of data and activate a time stamp. Note With the Modbus/TCP protocol, the EasyServe monitor displays the data of the internal interface (scale-EtherNet module). The representation corresponds to the Modbus sample.

16

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet The fieldbus view (as shown below) was extended for Modbus/TCP (VEG) and the VKG scenario. All data streams are transmitted to EasyServe using the UDP protocol. Both internal and external data are shown with VEG. This figure shows the difference between internal and external communication. The standard EasyServe fieldbus view always shows the internal data (refer to the chapter on Fieldbus Data).

HOST External Communication (TCP) Communication subassembly VET2xV Internal communication (serial) Unit The next figure shows the data of a VEG. The upper row is identical to the standard diagnose view. The selection fields in the second row allow the selection (filtering) of particular data after recording has been stopped. The filters are described in detail below. Selecting direction

Channel selection

Diagnosing a VEG unit INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description © Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

17

Fieldbus Data

Diagnosing the VKG These 4 bytes represent the time right down to the millisecond. The time stamp in front of it is generated by the PC. It is used by all units that cannot give the exact time. Note: 17 bytes of internal header data that are not user data follow the time stamp with the VvB8020 fieldbus cards.

The direction filter enables selection

All Reception Transmission The channel filters show all channels which appear in the record. The following mean:

All C(ontroller) 1( ... 3) TCP channel number host Combining the two channel filters can either filter out the data of two host channels or the data of a host channel can be combined with the internal data. The host data contain the 6 Modbus/TCP header bytes. The copy function transfers the currently selected data into an editor window.

18

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data

2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data 2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists There are separate lists for the various data types. Each list contains the following information: ID Used with protocols: Modbus Modbus/TCP Profibus DP DeviceNet EtherNet/IP

for data address for data address for ID indicating the value to be transferred s. Profibus s. Profibus

The “ID” value addresses the complete data word. If a bit is to be addressed (as is possible with MODBUS), add the number before value meaning to the word address. e.g.: General alarm (data segment "Status") Word address 0x02F0 + 5 --> bit address 0x02F5 The bold-printed IDs shall be used for: ! Profibus DP ! DeviceNet They determine the base address of a double word. Value The "Value" column states the meaning of the value in the INTECONT system. Scale types The “Type” column indicates whether or not the respective value is available with the selected scale type. If not available, ZERO value is returned. Preset values relating to non-existing IDs are not evaluated. Note: Non-existing values are possibly available in a later software version (new extension stage). Mode (commands only) Commands can be triggered by level or edge. Letter “D(ynamic)“ indicates that a change from “0” to “1” triggers the desired action. Letter “S(tatic)“ indicates that the level determines the function.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

19

Fieldbus Data

2.6.2 Commands Attention: Special condition or source parameter for marked values "!". See manual. (x) Not available with measusing systems o Reserved for use with EasyServe Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

Mode VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 96 HEX starts here! 0

0

100

256

!

Command 0 (coded as number) Feed index (Range 1...4)

1 2

Century 1

2

120

288

3

4

140

320

x

Year

x

x

x

x

x

Month

x

x

x

x

x

Day

x

x

x

x

x

Hour

x

x

x

x

x

Minute

x

x

x

x

x

Second

x

x

x

x

x

Command 4 LO (bit-coded) !

0 – Start Scale

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

!

1 – Stop Scale

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

2 – Clear Events

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

3 – Fieldbus-Release

(S)

x

x

x

x

x

4 – Select Volumetric Mode

(D)

x

x

x

5 – Select Gravimetric Mode

(D)

x

x

x

6 – Reset Totalizer 1

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

7 – Reset Totalizer 2

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

!

9

Command 4 HI (bit-coded) !

!

10

x

Command 3 (coded as number)

7 8

x


5 6

x


3 4

x

5

20

8 – Volum. Synchronous

(D)

9 – Moisture Corr. ON

(D)

A – Moisture Corr. OFF

(D)

B – Meas. Drive OFF

(D)

C – Gate Feedback

(S)

D – Open Gate Manual

(D)

E – Stop Gate Manual

(D)

F – Close Gate Manual

(D)

x

Command 5 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Select Batch

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

1 – Deselect Batch

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Fieldbus Data Attention: Special condition or source parameter for marked values "!". See manual. (x) Not available with measusing systems o Reserved for use with EasyServe Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

11

12

6

160

352

(D)

x

3 - Next Batch +Clearance

(D)

x

4 - Make-Up

(D)

x

5 - Emergency Setpoint ON

(D)

6 - Emergency Setpoint OFF

(D)

7 - Meas. Drive ON

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

x

8 - Filling Start

(D)

x

9 - Filling Stop

(D)

x

A - Emptying Start

(D)

x

B - Emptying Stop

(D)

x

C - Init. Hopper Controller

(D)

D - Activate Fill Unit

(D)

E - Activate Prefeeder

(D)

x

x

x

x

F - Stop Prefeeder

(D)

x

x

x

x

Command 6 LO (bit-coded) Command 6 HI (bit-coded)

7

Command 7 LO (bit-coded) !

0 - Tare

(D)

x

x

!

1 - Zero Set

(D)

x

x

!

2 - Weight Check

(D)

x

x

!

3 - Pulses/Revolution

(D)

x

x

!

4 - DAE Adjustment

(D)

x

!

5 - Linearization P1

(D)

x

!


(D)

x

!


(D)

x

15

16

2 - Abort Batch

Command 5 HI (bit-coded)

13 14


x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Command 7 HI (bit-coded)

8

180

!


(D)

x

!

9 - Volumetric

(D)

x

!

A - Optimize controller

(D)

x

B - Calibration Acquire

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

C - Calibration Abort

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

D - Time Acquire

(D)

!

E - Bin: Tare

(D)

!

F - Bin: Weight Check

(D)

384

Command 8 LO (bit-coded)

17

Command 8 HI (bit-coded) !

8 - Print Batch Report


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

(D)

21

Fieldbus Data Attention: Special condition or source parameter for marked values "!". See manual. (x) Not available with measusing systems o Reserved for use with EasyServe Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

18

9


9 – Print Status Report

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

A – Print Intermediate Totalizer

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

B – Cancel Printout

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

C – Print Parameters

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

D – Print Parameter Shortlist

(D)

E – Reserved (Register EasyServe)

(D)

o

o

o

o

o

F – Reserved (Deregister EasyServe)

(D)

o

o

o

o

o

Command 9 LO (bit-coded)

19

0 – Start Keyb. Mode

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

1 – Stop Keyb. Mode

(D)

x

x

x

x

x

2 – Start Simulation

(D)

x

x

x

x

3 – Stop Simulation

(D)

x

x

x

x

4 – Load Default Parameter

(D)

x

x

x

x

5 – Check Meas. Start

(D)

6 – Manual Prefeeder (ES only)

(D)

7 – Automatic Prefeeder (ES only)

(D)

x

x

Command 9 HI (bit-coded) reserved

2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format

Attention: Special condition or source parameter for marked values "!". See manual.

Byte- Word- ID ID Bem. Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block AO HEX starts here! 0

0

250

592

!

Absolute Setpoint [kg/h]

x

4

2

252

594

!

Absolute Batch Setpoint [kg]

x

8

4

254

596

Make-Up Setpoint [kg]

12

6

256

598

Batch No.

16

8

258

600

PLC-Analog-OUT 1

20

10

25A

602

PLC-Analog-OUT 2

24

12

25C

604

Span Correction Value

28

14

25E

606

Tare Correction Value

22

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x

x

x

X

x

x

X

x

x

x

x


Fieldbus Data 32

16

260

608

36

18

262

610

40

20

264

612

44

22

266

614

48

24

268

616

52

26

26A

618

56

28

26C

620

60

30

26E

622

!

Difference Feed Rate [kg/h] Hopper Level [kg]

!

Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h] Setpoint Hopper Level [kg]

2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus) Attention: Special condition or source parameter for marked values "!". See manual. Value

Byte- Word- ID ID Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM

0

0

20

32

!

Serial Setpoint [kg/h] 0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 300% P

2

1

21

33

!

Serial Batch Setpoint [kg/h] 0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P * 8 HRS.

x

4

2

22

34

Make-Up Setpoint [kg/h] 0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P

x


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

23

Fieldbus Data

2.6.5 Status Information Byte- Word- ID ID Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 64 HEX starts here! 0

0

02D0

1 2

1

2

Scale Type (Low Byte)

x

x

x

x

Software Revision (High Byte)

x

x

x

x

Software-Version (Low-Byte)

x

x

x

x

Software-Version (High-Byte)

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

x

x

x x x

02F0

752 Status 2 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Scale On (measurement active; no motor control in local mode) 1 - No Release

x

x

x

x

2 – Counter Active

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

3 – Volumetric

5

x x

Status 1 (coded as number)

3 4

720 Status 0 (coded as number)

4 – Select. Language OK

x

x

x

x

5 – Alarm

x

x

x

x

x x x x

6 – Warning

x

x

x

x

7 – Calibration Active

x

x

x

x

8 – Normal Mode

x

x

x

x

9 – Keyboard Mode

x

x

x

x

x x

B – Simulation Mode

x

x

x

x

C – Volum. Start-Up

x

x

x

Status 2 HI (bit-coded)

A – Local Mode

D – Meas. Drive ON

x

E – Wheel Meas. Drive Delay

x

F – Setpoint Limited 6

3

x

x

Status 3 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Batch Selected

x

x

x

x

1 – Batch Active

x

x

x

x

2 – Batch Dribble Feed (pre-act cont.)

x

x

x

x

x x x

3 – Batch + Clearance

x

4 – NON-SI active

x

x

x

x

x

8 – Tare

x

x

x

x

9 – Zero Set

x

x

A – Weight Check

x

x

x x x

B – Pulses/Revolution

x

x

5 – Dead Time active 6 – Dead Time Setpoint active 7 – Dead Time ON/OFF active 7

24

Status 3 HI (bit-coded)

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x x


Fieldbus Data Byte- Word- ID ID Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

C – DAE Adjustment D – Auto Zero active

8

4

0310

x x

E – Volumetric Adaption

x

F – Gravimetric Optimization

x

x

x

x

x

x x

784 Status 4 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Meas. System

x

1 – Gain-In-Weight

x

2 – Filling Active

x

3 – Discharge Active

x

x

x

4 – Gate Open

x

5 – Gate Closed

x

! 6 – 2nd Batch Unit active (VLW20151 only) 7 – Surge Hopper present 9

Status 4 HI (bit-coded) 8 – Feed rate > MAX

x

x

x

x

9 – Feed rate < MIN

x

x

x

x

A – Belt load > MAX

x

x

B – Belt load < MIN

x

x

C – Speed > MAX

x

x

D – Speed < MIN

x

x

E – Bin > MAX F – Bin < MIN 10

5

Status 5 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Bin Level Control existent 1 – Hopper level > MAX

x

2 – Hopper level < MIN

x

3 – Measured load > MAX

x

4 – Measured load < MIN 5 – n > MAX

x

6 – n < MIN

x

x

7 – Check system waits for acknowledgement 11

Status 5 HI (bit-coded) 8 – Check system available 9 – Rel. tare exceeded A – Abs. tare exceeded B – Rel. range exceeded C – Abs. range exceeded D – Check meas. announced E – Prepare check F – Check active

12

6

0330

816 Status 6 LO (bit-coded) 0 – NON-SI active

x

x

x

x

1 – Waiting for Confirm.

x

x

x

x

2 – Waiting for checkweight

x

x

x


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x x x 25


VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

3 – Param. active to VLB

13

x

x

x

4 – Linearization P1

x


x


x


x

x

x

Status 6 HI (bit-coded) 8 – Open Gate

x

9 – Blow-out ON

x

A – Manual Prefeeder B - Bin: Tare C - Bin: Weight Check D – Optimization Bin Controller E - 2nd Bridge > MAX F - 2nd Bridge < MIN 14

7

Status 7 LO (bit-coded) 0 – Emergency Setpoint active 1 – Trend active 234567-

15

Status 7 HI (bit-coded) 8 – Moisture Corr. Active 9 – Moisture > MAX A – Moisture Meas. Faulty B – PreFeed Control Active C – EasyServe active

x

x

x

x

D – EasyServe announced

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

x

x

! E – Feeder 1 Active (VLW20152 only) ! F – Feeder 2 Active (VLW20152 only 16

8

0350

848 Status 8 0 – Calibr. Set Nominal Feed Rate 1 - Dig. Output Pre-cut-off Amount 2 – MAX Limit Value 3 - MIN Limit Value 4 – VSM 20110 (DISOCONT L) 5 – Refilling Active 6 – VSM 20107 (Pulverized Coal) 7 – Fill Bin Weigher

17

Reserved 89A-

26

BV-H2220 GB , 0831



VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

BCDEF9

Status 9

18

Reserved

19

Reserved The events defined in a type of scale react on the event-bits. Bits not used are send with the value Null.

20

10

0370

21

880 Event S1-S8 0 – Event Warning 2 S1

x

x

x

x

1 – Event Warning 2 S2

x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x


x

x

x

x

x x x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x

912 Event Warning 2 E1-E8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 2 E9

x

x

x

x

x x

944 Event Warning 2 B1-B8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 2 B9

x

x

x

x

Event S9 8 – Event Warning 2 S9 9ABCDEF-

22

11

--

23 24

-12

0390

25 26

13

--

27 28

-14

03B0

29 30

15

--

31 32 33

x x

-16

03D0

976 ---


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

27


34

17

--

35 36

-18

03F0

37 38

19

20

0410

41 42

21

43 44

22

0430

45 46

23

24

0450

49 50

25

26

0470

53 54

27

x

Event Warning 2 H1-H8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 2 H9

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 2 L9

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 S1-S8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 S9

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 E1-E8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 E9

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 B1-B8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 B9

x

x

x

x

1040 Event Warning 2 L1-L8

x x x x x x x x

1072 --

x x

1104 --

x x

1136 --

-28

0490

1168 ---

29

59 60

x

x

--

57 58

x

x

--

55 56

x

x

--

51 52

x

--

47 48

1008 Event Warning 2 C1-C8 Event Warning 2 C9

39 40

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

30

04B0

61

Event Warning 1 C1-C8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 C9

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

1200 Event Warning 1 H1-H8 Event Warning 1 H9

31 62

Event Warning 1 L1-L8

x

x

x

x

Event Warning 1 L9

x

x

x

x

1232 Event Alarm S1-S8

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x x x x x

63 64

32

65 66

28

04D0

Event Alarm S9 33

--

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


x x


67 68

-34

04F0

1264 Event Alarm E1-E8

69 70

35

36

0510

37

38

0530

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Event Alarm C9

x

x

x

x

Event Alarm H1-H8

x

x

x

x

Event Alarm H9

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

0 – DI1

x

x

x

x

1 – DI2

x

x

x

x x

x x

1328 ---

39

---

40

0550

1360 Event Alarm C1-C8

41

42

0570

1392 Event Alarm L1-L8

85 86

x

x

--

83 84

x

x x

--

81 82

x

Event Alarm B9

79 80

x

x

1296 Event Alarm B1-B8

77 78

x

x

--

75 76

x

x

--

73 74

x

Event Alarm E9

71 72

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

Event Alarm L9 43

x x x x x x

Digital Inputs

2 – DI3

x

x

x

3 – DI4

x

x

x

x

4 – DI5

x

x

x

x

5 – DI6

x

x

x

x

6 – DI7

x

x

x

x

D – DI6 Error

x

x

x

x

E – DI7 Error

x

x

x

x

x x x x x x x

787

Digital Inputs: Error Bits 8 – DI1 Error 9 – DI2 Error A –DI3 Error B – DI4 Error C – DI5 Error

x x

F88

44

0590

1424


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

29


VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

89 90

45

Digital Outputs 0 - DO1

x

x

x

x

1 - DO2

x

x

x

x

2 - DO3

x

x

x

x

3 - DO4

x

x

x

x

4 - DO5

x

x

x

x

5 - DO6

x

x

x

x

6 - DO7

x

x

x

x

7 - DO8

x

x

x

x

x x x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

91 92

46

05B0

1456

05D0

1488

05F0

1520

0610

1552 Highest-Priority Event (LO)

93 94

47

95 96

48

97 98

49

99 100

50

101 102

51

103 104

52

Bit 0 – 3 Event number Range 0 – 8 corresponds to displays 1 - 9 Bit 4 – 7 Event group Range 1 – 12 S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11

105

Highest-Priority Event (HI) Bit 8 – 11 Event class Range 1 – 4 A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4) Bit 12 - 15 Acknowledge event Range 0 – 1 Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0

106 107

30

53

Parameter block of the event class Parameter block number

BV-H2220 GB , 0831



108

54

0630

109 110

55

111 112

56

0650

113 114

57

115 116

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

1584 Century

x

x

x

x

Year

x

x

x

x

Month

x

x

x

x

Day

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

1616 Hour

x x x x

Minute

x

x

x

x

Second

x

x

x

x

x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Time stamp event logger

x

x

Time stamp event logger

x

x

x x

Feed index 58

0670

1648 Next Event from error logger (LO) (Zero if list is empty) Bit 0 - 3 Event number Range 0 - 8 corresponds to displays 1 - 9 Bit 4 - 7 Event group Range 1 - 12 S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11

117

Next Event from error logger (HI) Bit 8 - 11 Event class Range 1 - 4 A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4) Bit 12 Acknowledge event Range 0 - 1 Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0 Bit 13 New Event Range 0 - 1 New = 1 Bit 14 Reset Event Range 0 - 1 (Reset = 1) Bit 15 Time: am /pm Range 0 - 1 (am = 0, pm = 1)

118 119

59

Bit 0- 5: Seconds (0-59) Bit 6-11: Minutes (0-59) Bit 12-15: Hours (0-11)


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

31

Fieldbus Data

2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format

Byte- Word- ID ID Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 6E HEX starts here! 0

0

0750

1872 Feed Rate [kg/h]

4

2

0752

1874 Totalizer 1 [kg]

8

4

0754


12

6

0756


16

8

0758

1880 Belt Load [kg/m]

20

10

075A

1882 Measured load [kg]

24

12

075C

1884 Belt Speed [m/s]

28

14

075E

1886 Speed [1/min]

32

16

0760

1888 Fill Weight [kg]

36

18

0762

1890 Surge Hopper [kg]

40

20

0764

1892 2nd Platform [kg/m]

x x x x x

x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x x x x

x

x

x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x

x

x

x x x x

x x x x

x

x

0766

1894 Actual Setpoint [kg/h]

0768

1896 Batch Feed Rate [kg]

52

26

076A

1898 Batch Res. Amount [kg]

56

28

076C

1900 Relative Setpoint [%]

60

30

076E

1902 Prefeeder Position [%]

64

32

0770

1904 Deviation [%]

68

34

0772

1906 Moisture [%]

72

36

0774

1908 Feed Rate Moisture Corr. [kg/h]

76

38

0776

1910 Totalizer 1 Corr. [kg]

80

40

0778


84

42

077A


88

44

077C

1916 Rel. Bin Weight

92

46

077E

1918 Setpoint Bin Level

96

48

0780

1920 VSE1: Analog Output [mA]

100

50

0782

1922 VEA1: Analog Input [mA]

x x

x x

104

52

0784

1924 VEA1: Analog Output [mA]

x

x

108

54

0786


112

56

0788


116

58

078A


120

60

078C


124

62

078E


128

64

0790


132

66

0792

1938 Belt Slip [%]

136

68

0794

1940 Belt Drift [cm]

140

70

0796

1942 Relative Feed Rate [%]

144

72

0798

1944 Relative Belt Load [%]

x x x x

148

74

079A

1946 External Setpoint [kg/h]

152

76

079C

1948 Batch Setpoint [kg]

156

78

079E

1950 Tacho [Hz]

160

80

07A0

1952 Utilize L/C [%]

164

82

07A2

1954 Load Cell Raw VAP [mV/V]

168

84

07A4

1956 Load Cell Raw BIC [mV/V]

172

86

07A6

1958 Load Cell Raw [mV/V]

x x x x x x x x x x x

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x x x x

22 24

32

x x x x

x

48

x

x x x x x x

x x x x

x x

44

x x

x x x x

x x

x x

x x

x



VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

176

88

07A8

1960 Controller Magnitude [mA]

180

90

07AA

1962 Rel. Fill Weight [%]

184

92

07AC

1964 Calibration Result 1 -Current Upper Value

188

94

07AE

1966 Calibration Result 2 - Current Lower Value

192

96

07B0

1968 Y_unlin

196

98

07B2

1970 Y_lin

200

100

07B4

1972 DAE Utilization [%]

204

102

07B6

1974 Differential of F [kg/h]

208

104

07B8

1976 Adaption Factor Index 1

212

106

07BA


216

108

07BC


220

110

07BE


224

112

07C0

1984 CM Meas. Time [s]

228

114

07C2

1986 Number of all CM

232

116

07C4

1988 Curr. No.

236

118

07C6

1990 CM: Mean Delta-F [kg]

240

120

07C8

1992 CM Mean Feed Rate [kg/h]

244

122

07CA

1994 Feed Constancy [%]

248

124

07CC

1996 Nominal Belt Load [kg/m]

252

126

07CE

1998 Feed Constancy [g]

256

128

07D0

2000 Control Magnitude Yz [mA]

260

130

07D2

2002 Control Magnitude Yzi [%]

264

132

07D4

2004 Nominal Measured Load [kg]

268

134

07D6

2006 Actual Value, not linearized [kg/h]

272

136

07D8

2008 Actual Tare [kg]

276

138

07DA

2010 Bin: Utilize L/C [%]

280

140

07DC

2012 Bin: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]

284

142

07DE

2014 Control Magnitude Yb [mA]

288

144

07E0

2016 Control Magnitude Ybi [mA]

292

146

07E2

2018 Analog Input DI4 [mA]

296

148

07E4

2020 Check: Relative Tare [%]

300

150

07E6

2022 Check: Relative Span [%]

304

152

07E8

2024 Check: Continuous Totalizer Z [kg]

308

154

07EA

2026 Check: Result F/Z

312

156

07EC

2028 Check: Measurement Time [h]

316

158

07EE

2030 Check: Belt Length [m]

320

160

07F0

2032 2nd Bridge: Relative Belt Load [%]

324

162

07F2

2034 2nd Bridge: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]

328

164

07F4

2036 2nd Bridge: Utilize L/C [%]

332

166

07F6

2038 Control Magnitude Y2 [%]

336

168

07F8

2040 Difference Feed Rate [kg/h]

340

170

07FA

2042 Rel. Actual Setpoint [%]

344

172

07FC

2044 Rel. Measured Load [%]

348

174

07FE

2046 Bin Feed Rate [kg/h]

352

176

0800

2048 Check Meas. Monitoring [%]

356

178

0802

2050 Component Control Magnitude [mA]

360

180

0804

2052 Current Batch-No.

364

182

0806

2054 Totalizer Component 1 [kg]

368

184

0808


372

186

080A



x

x x

x x

x x x x x x x x x

x x x

x x

x x x

x x x

x x

x

x

x

x x x x x x x

x x

x

x

x

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x

33


VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

376

188

080C


380

190

080E


384

192

0810


388

194

0812


392

196

0814


396

198

0816


400

200

0818


404

202

081A

2074 Totalizer Sum of all Batches [kg]

408

204

081C

2076 Tacho Input VSE 2 [Hz]

412

206

081E

2078 Corr. Feed Rate rel. [%]

416

208

0820

2080 Belt Load [kg/m] non-linearized

420

210

0822

2082 2-Sensor Slip [%]

424

212

0824

2084 Setpoint last / act. Batch [kg]

428

214

0826

2086 Current No. of last / act. Batch

432

216

0828

2088 Component No. of last / act. Batch

436

218

082A

2090 EIO: Analog Output 1 [mA]

440

220

082C


444

222

082E


448

224

0830


452

226

0832

2098 EIO: Analog Input 1 [mA]

456

228

0834


460

230

0836


464

232

0838


468

234

083A

2106 Setpoint Feeder 1 [kg/h]

472

236

083C

2108 Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h]

476

238

083E

2110 Nominal Feed Rate Total [kg/h]

480

240

0840

2112 Contr. Magnit. 2nd Feeder [mA]

484

242

0842

2114 Speed 2nd Feeder [1/min]

488

244

0844

2116 Feed Rate 2nd Feeder [kg/h]

492

246

0846

2118 Fill-Weight 2nd Feeder [kg]

496

248

0848

2120 Counter 2nd Feeder

500

250

084A

2122 Check Weigher Print Value 1

504

252

084C


508

254

084E


512

256

0850

2128 Check Weigher Actual Value [%]

516

258

0852

2130 Check Weigher Variance

520

260

0854

2132 L/C Resistance [ohms]

524

262

0856

2134 Make-up Setpoint [kg]

528

264

0858

2136 Make-up Residual Amount [kg]

532

266

085A

2138 Mean Value I [%]

536

268

085C

2140 Variance I [%]

540

270

085E

2142 Belt Load QMAX [%]

544

272

0860

2144 Time QMIN [%]

548

274

0862

2146 Taring Result 1 [%]

552

276

0864


556

278

0866


560

280

0868


564

282

086A


568

284

086C


572

286

086E

2158 Pulse Sensor

34

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x x x

x x x

x


Fieldbus Data

2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus) Byte- Word- ID ID Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

0

0

30

48

Actual value [kg/h] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P

x

x

x

x

x

2

1

31

49

Totalizer 1 [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours

x

x

x

x

x

4

2

32

50


x

x

x

x

x

6

3

33

51


x

x

x

x

x

8

4

34

52

Belt Load [kg/m] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q

x

x

10

5

35

53

Measured Load [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q

x

x

12

6

36

54

Speed [m/s] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100%V [cm/s]

14

7

37

55

RPM [1/min] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% N

x

16

8

38

56

Hopper [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% F

x

18

9

39

57

Surge Hopper [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% B

20

10

3A

58

Surge Hopper [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200 % Q

22

11

3B

59

Effective Setpoint [kg/h] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P

24

12

3C

60

Batch Actual Value [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours

26

13

3D

61

Batch Residual Amount [kg] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours

28

14

3E

62

Procental Setpoint Evaluation [%] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %

30

15

3F

63

Prefeeder Position [%] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %

32

16

40

64

Deviation [%] 0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x

x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

35

Fieldbus Data

2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format Byte- Word- ID ID Value Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block C8 HEX starts here! 0

0

0980

2432 Pulses still output

4

2

0982

2434 Pulses output

8

4

0984

2436 Time Voltage ON [h]

12

6

0986

2438 Time Scale ON [h]

16

8

0988

2440 Reserved

20

10

098A

2442 Selected Options

24

12

098C

2444 Status Bit Field 1 for Commands 4 and 5

28

14

098E


32

16

0990


36

18

0992


40

20

0994

2452 Calibration Result 1 – Text ID

44

22

0996

2454 Calibration Result 1 –Unit ID

48

24

0998

2456 Calibration Result 2 – Text ID

52

26

099A

2458 Calibration Result 2 – Unit ID

56

28

099C

60

30

099E

2460 Calibration Result 1 – After -comma-places ID 2462 Calibration Result 2 – After-comma-places ID

64

32

09A0

2464 Calibration Error Text ID

68

34

09A2

2466 Para-Checksum

72

36

09A4

2468 Software Date

76

38

09A6

2470 Flash-Checksum

80

40

09A8

2472 Flash-Checksum calculated

84

42

09AA

2474 Hardware-Version

88

44

09AC

2476 Option Card Version

92

46

09AE

2478 Pulses Output

36

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x


Fieldbus Data

2.6.9 Events The input in table references the parameter used to change the event class. System Message (S-1) S1 Memory Error S2 No Release S3 Maintenance STR-Meter S4 Maintenance Interval Electric S5 RESERVE S6 RESERVE S7 Simulation active S8 Setpoint limited S9 Communication Error Host

VBW O 02 O 07 K 04 K 02

VLW Q 02 Q 07 K 04 K 02

VDB N 02 N 07 K 04 K 02

VMD M 02 M 06 K 04 K 02

VDM M 02 M 04 K 04 K 02

N 10 N 11 L 03

M 08 M 09 L 03

M 07

L 03

Q 10 Q 11 L 03

Electrical System (E-3) E1 Power Failure E2 Namur Error Tacho E3 Namur Error Belt E4 RESERVE E5 Stand-By E6 External Input E7 RESERVE E8 RESERVE E9 RESERVE

VBW O 01 O 04 O 05

VLW Q 01 Q 04 Q 05

VDB N 01 N 04 N 05

VMD M 01 M 04

F 14 F 15

F 14

F 10 M 10

Material Flow (B-5) B1 Out of Tolerance B2 Control Deviation B3 Controller Ltd. B4 Max BATCH Act. Value B5 DAE active B6 DAE Time B7 T_Gate B8 T_Volumetric B9 Linearization

VBW I 06

VLW I 05 R 24 R 25

VDB I 05 O 08 O 09

VMD I 05 N 06 N 07

VDM I 05

O 08 O 09 H 16 H 17 S 10

P 10

O 10

N 10

VDB N 06 N 03 M 12 M 10

VMD M 05 M 03

VDM M 03

H 04

H 04

VMD F 04

VDM F 04

M 07

M 05

L 03 VDM M 01

M 08

I 08

Calibration (C-9) C1 L/C Input C2 Tacho Input C3 Belt Skew C4 Belt Drift C5 Tare Correction > MAX C6 RESERVE C7 Set Time To Zero C8 Slip Error C9 Tare Diff. > MAX

VBW O 06 O 03 N 12 N 10 H 05

Maximum (H-10) H1 I > MAX H2 Load > MAX H3 v > MAX H4 L/C Input > MAX H5 F > MAX H6 Wheel Overload H7 n > MAX H8 F > Fo H9 RESERVE

VBW F 04 F 08 F 12 O 08

Minimum (L-11) L1 I < MIN L2 Load < MIN L3 v < MIN L4 L/C Input < MIN L5 F < MIN L6 RESERVE L7 n < MIN L8 F < Buffer MIN L9 RESERVE

VBW F 02 F 06 F 10 O 09

VLW Q 06 Q 03

H 07 N 14 H 12

M 14

VLW F 04

Q 08 F 08

VDB F 04 F 08 F 12 N 08

F 06 F 12 H 09


VLW F 02

Q 09 F 06

VDB F 02 F 06 F 10 N 09

F 10 H 07

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

VMD F 02

VDM F 02

M 06

F 08

37

PROFIBUS DP

3 PROFIBUS DP This chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Profibus slave to a Profibus Master assembly. Described is the functionality of the Profibus module, the data exchange between Profibus Master and INTECONT, fault diagnosis and troubleshooting. The Profibus hardware is described at the “Profibus Module VPB020V/VPB8020“ item. Designed to assist the S7 programmer in commissioning, Manual BVH2204 describes the use of the general user data construction at the DISOCONT example. However, data construction is identical for INTECONT.

3.1 Commissioning Guideline 1. Prepare the hardware as per the chapter on Profibus Module VPB020V / VPB8020 VPB020 can always be used in the VEG units. Starting with the program versions. VBW20600-08 VDB20600-08 VDM20600-05 VLW20600-07 VMD20600-08 standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The communication subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in the fieldbus block. 2. Determine data to be transferred. Check to see if the data of FIXED mode 1/2 suffice to meet your requirements. If YES, select desired process image at “Fieldbus Communication Configuration”. If NO, configure your process image by input of requisite IDs (see “Fieldbus Data” item). 3. Generating the master parameter sets using the GSD file. Please select the correct GSD file depending on the hardware used. 4. Start communication through Master.

3.2 Profibus Module Functionality ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

38

Module certified to EN 50170 Cyclic user data exchange with Master (DP-V0) Automatic baud rate recognition Bus interface monitoring Easy parameterisation of VPB 020V / VPB8020 using base unit control station or EasyServe diagnostic tool Support of PROFIBUS control command SYNC for synchronised data transfer from Master to various slaves Support of PROFIBUS control command FREEZE for synchronised data transfer from various slaves to Master No user-specific diagnostic functions Fail Safe: clear state supported No change of station address via bus

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


PROFIBUS DP

3.3 User Data Construction For details and examples on user data construction, see “Fieldbus Data” item.

3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT) For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool. The parameter description holds for either unit. Parameter

Value range

Default

Explanation

Protocol type

all fieldbus protocols

NO

Timeout Host

0 ... 300 s

10 s

Communication Host

W2 (Warning 2), W1 (Warning 1), A(LARM), IG(nore) 0 ... 126

IG

Select protocol: here Profibus-DP Designed for interface monitoring. ZERO value means that interface is not activated. Class of communication error

126

Slave address on Profibus

FIXED, NO_PARA_ID, PARA_ID Siemens-KG, IEEE

FIXED

Lets you set construction and meaning of user data.

IEEE

VxB020 VxB8020

VxB020

Format for all setpoints, measurement values and floating point parameters. Selecting the communication subassembly

Address Configuration

Float format

Hardware

Note Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

39

PROFIBUS DP

3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master Unit-master-data files (GSD) INTECONT PLUS is a modular slave whose properties are described by 3 modules. Note: ! You will find the INTECONT PLUS configuration in the S7 hardware configurator at “Profibus-DP/Further Fieldbuses/Controller/INTECONT”. ! The current GSD files ICV10524.GSD (VEG + VPB020) ICV20524.GSD (VEG + VPB8020) can be loaded from the service page of Schenck-Process GmbH (http://support.schenckprocess.com/ , path: Bus Systeme-Profibus). ! Reading/writing of double words in S7 systems: please note that the INTECONT PLUS double words can neither be read nor written using function modules SFC14 and SFC15 of S7 systems. Access the peripherals direct.

40

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


PROFIBUS DP

3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event message "Communication Error Host” (S9) provided that this message is assigned to an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if present, provides further information on fault diagnosis. Event Message “Communication Error Host” The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module: ! Different station address on Master and scale ! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty. Watch LEDs on module. In case of doubt, restart system, and module is initialised provided that parameters are properly set (red LED flashes). ! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see “Fieldbus Hardware” item. ! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available. ! Check resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus connectors. For details, see “Fieldbus Hardware” item. ! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change parameterisation or replace module. ! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation. ! Scale configuration differs from Master configuration. Change GSD module or scale parameterisation. ! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs). ! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one preset ID must be unequal to zero, or – in FIXED mode – the release bit must be set. ! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus parameter. EasyServe Fieldbus view The chapter on Fieldbus Data shows and explains how cyclical user data is displayed for all protocols


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

41

PROFIBUS DP

3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V) Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection On the Profibus connection (VPB020V), the LED is lit H1 (red) Blinking mode: when the Fieldbus connection has been reinitialised. This happens after applying voltage and after changing certain fieldbus parameters (in grey, see below) OFF: when initialising is complete and the user data exchange is OK H2 ON: when user data is being transmitted (green) OFF: Connection not yet initialised or fieldbus malfunctioning If no LED is lit, please check the parameterisation and the cable connection to the main board. To provide an interface to the Profibus, the module can be attached to the INTECONT PLUS cover. The module is certified to EN 50170, the protocol used is DP-V0. Bus termination: Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so, set plug-in jumpers (W150, W151;W152) on board to position 1-2. On standard, the resistors are not activated (position 2-3). Bus address: ! Set address via parameter. LED ! Status LED for communication OK (green) ! Bus error or configuration display (red)

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3. 42

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


PROFIBUS DP

3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020) An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base card (VKG) of INTECONT to create an interface to the Profibus. The module is certified in conformity with EN 50170, the protocol is DP-V0.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3. Bus termination The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a rule the resistances are not activated (position 2-3). Bus addresses: ! The addresses are set using parameters. Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection

If no LED is lit, please check the parameterization and the cable connection to the main board.

Opertion Mode (LED) State Off Green Green Red Red

Indication Not online/No power On-line, Date exchange

blinking on-line, clear mode blinking (1 Hz) parameter error blinking (2 Hz) configuration error

State LED INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description © Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

43

PROFIBUS DP

Status Off Green Green Red

Indication Not power or not initialised Initialised

blinking initialised, diagnostic event is pending Exceeption error

Connector assignment (applies to all Profibus cards) Pin

Signal (X20, 9-pin Sub-D-female)

1 2

-

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing

B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD * RTS, Request To Send GND BUS +5V BUS A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD ** Bus Cable Shield

* **

Signal (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm²) Not used in INTECONT PLUS B-Line, positive RS485 RxD/TxD * A-Line, negative RS485 RxD/TxD ** GND BUS +5V BUS Screening -

This cable has the conductor color red. This cable has the conductor color green.

Characteristics (applies to all Profibus cards)

Isolation Voltage supply Current supply Connectors

optocouplers 5V DC internal max. 310mA 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm² 9-pin Sub-D-female

3.9 For Further Reading Profibus standard Profibus user organisation PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1, Grundlagen, Tipps und Tricks für Anwender HMS documentation on Anybus-IC BVH2204 BVH2098AA

44

EN 50170 www.profibus.com Manfred Popp, Hüthig Verlag , 2000 www.hms-networks.com Commissioning aid for S7 programmers EASYSERVE

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


DeviceNet

4 DeviceNet The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT DeviceNet slave to a DeviceNet Master assembly. Described is the functionality of the DeviceNet module, the data exchange between DeviceNet Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting. For DeviceNet hardware, see “DeviceNet Module VCB020V / VCB8020V “ item.

4.1 Commissioning Guideline The VCB020 can always be used in the VEG units. Starting with the program versions ! VBW20600-08 ! VDB20600-08 ! VDM20600-05 ! VLW20600-07 ! VMD20600-08 standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The communication subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in the fieldbus block. ! Determining the data to be transmitted - the ID of the data is required (see 'Fieldbus Data' chapter). ! Creating master parameter sets using the EDS file. Please select the correct EDS file depending upon the hardware used. ! Set the Slave Address INTECONT parameter ! Start communication by the master

4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality ! Module certified to DeviceNet specification 2.0 ! Cyclic exchange of user data with Master. As a rule, the POLL mode is used for transfer of I/O data. ! Bus interface monitoring ! Easy parameterisation of VCB020V / VCB8020V via base unit control station or EasyServe diagnostic tool.

4.3 User Data Construction For details and samples on general user data construction, see “Fieldbus Data” item.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

45

DeviceNet

4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT) For parameterisation, use Operator Panel or EasyServe tool. The parameter description holds for both units. Parameter

Value range

Default

Explanation

Protocol type

all fieldbus protocols 0 ... 300 s

NO

IG

Address

W2 (Warning 2), W1 (Warning 1), A(LARM), IG(nore) 1 ... 63

Select protocol: here DeviceNet Designed for interface monitoring. ZERO value means that interfance is not activated. Class of communication error

63

Slave address on DeviceNet

Baud rate

125k, 250k, 500k

125k

DeviceNet baud rate

Configuration

FIXED, NO_PARA_ID, PARA_ID High-Low Low-High I:std / L:std I:swp / L:std I:std / L:swp I:swp / L:swp

FIXED

Lets you set construction and meaning of user data

Low-High

Byte sequence within a data word Word sequence within a data double word, separately settable for floating point values I(EEE) and integer values L(ONG) Selecting the communication subassembly

Timeout Host

Communication Host

DVN byte sequence DVN word sequence

Hardware

VxB020 VxB8020

10 s

I:std / L:std

VxB020

Note ! Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) The description file files can be found at the Schenck Process GmbH service side (http://support.schenckprocess.com, path: Service-Download-Bus systemsDeviceNet). The download file includes a Readme with detailed information.

46

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


DeviceNet

4.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that this message is assigned to an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if present, provides further information on fault diagnosis. Event Message“Communication Error Host” The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module: ! Different station address on Master and scale ! Different baud rate on Master and scale ! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty. ! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see “Fieldbus Hardware”. ! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available. Check resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus connectors. For details, see “Fieldbus Hardware”. ! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change parameterisation or replace module. ! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation. ! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs). ! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one preset ID must be unequal to zero, or – in FIXED mode – the release bit must be set. ! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus parameter. EasyServe Fieldbus View The representation of cyclic user data is the same for all protocols. For details, see “Fieldbus Data” item.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

47

DeviceNet

4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V) To provide an interface to CAN bus using the DeviceNet protocol, you can attach the module to the INTECONT cover. Bus termination ! Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so, set the plug-in jumper W160 on board to position 1-2. On standard, the resistors are not activated (position 2-3). Baud rate and bus address are set via parameter.

X20 "

Set jumper W100 (Power supply source) to position 2-3.

48

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


DeviceNet

4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V) An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base board (VKG) of INTECONT to create an interface to the CAN bus with the DeviceNet procedure.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3. Bus termination ! The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By default, the resistances are not activated (position 2-3). Baud rate and bus addresses: ! Both values are set using parameters. Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection

Network Status (LED) Status OFF Greev Green Red Red Alternating Red/Green

Indication Not online/ No power On-line, one or more connections are established

blinking on-line, no connection Critical link failure

blinking (1 Hz) One or several connections are in time-out Self test

Moduel Status LED INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description © Schenck Process

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

49

DeviceNet

Status Off Green Green Red Red Alternating Red/Greed

Indication No power Operating in normal condition

blinking Faulty Configuration Unreccoverable Faultst(s)

blinking Rectifiable Defect Self test

Connector assignment (applies to all Devicenet cards) Pin 1 2 3 4 5

Signal X20 VCAN_L screening CAN_H V+

Characteristics (applies to all Devicenet cards) Isolation Voltage supply Current supply Connectors

optocouplers 5V DC internal max. 250mA Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm² Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm²

4.9 For Further Reading DeviceNet specification Bosch CAN specification DeviceNet user organisation HMS documentation on Anybus-IC BVH2098AA

50

Version 2.0 (ODVA) Version 2.0, Sept. 1991 www.odva.com www.hms-networks.com EASYSERVE

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Modbus

5 Modbus The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Modbus slave with a Modbus Master assembly and describes the Modbus in the form activated by the MODBUS selection. The previous version of the INTECONT-compatible Modbus (MODCOMP) is described in Manual FH525 (only VEG). Described is the functionality of the Modbus module, the data exchange between Modbus Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting. The hardware of the Modbus module is described at the end of this chapter.

5.1 Commissioning Guideline Prepare the hardware as described in the “Fieldbus Hardware” item. ! Determine data to be transferred using the data IDs (see “Fieldbus Data”). ! Set INTECONT PLUS parameters “Slave Address” and “Data Format”. ! Start communication through Master.

5.2 Modbus Module Functionality In general: ! Cyclical user data exchange with the master ! Monitoring the bus interface ! Easy to parameterise using the basic model's operating station or the EasyServe diagnostic tool ! Modbus mode: RTU VEG: ! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The physical characteristics can be selected by parameters. It can als be connected via RS232. VKG : ! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The physics are selected with wire jumper. It is connected directly to the base board.

5.3 Data Format Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values can be transmitted both in the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits) and in the integer format. The integer format readies a 16-bit word whose resolution can be set in the range of 0 .... MAXINCREMENTS. The maximum resolution is 215 increments. Integer and IEEE format are addressed using different data addresses. For every parameter, the IEEE format can be swapped wordwise. All control information and statusses are represented in the form of a binary signal using the 8 data bits of each character. In addition, all control and status information can be treated as single bit information.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

51

Modbus

5.4 Function Codes (FC) The table below lists the codes used and explains their meanings. FC [dec] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 15 16 23

Meaning Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits) Bitwise reading of status information (one/multiple bits) Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement values, LONG values and parameters (one/multiple words) Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words) Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit) Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word) Diagnosis (only sub-codes 0 and 1) Bitwise writing of control information (one/multiple bits) Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words) Reading and writing of multiple data words in one cycle. This function code may be used in all cases where FC3 or FC16 can be used.

5.5 Transmission Protection The characters are protected by a parity bit (see MODBUS specification). The messages are protected by check sum (CRC16) (see MODBUS specification). The MODBUS specification determines the reaction on transmission errors (see 2-1 EXCEPTION RESPONSE).

5.6 Error Codes Used are only error codes 01 to 03. Upon CRC error no response is sent. All errors described below are comprised in device in the form of general error message ‘Communication Host’. The message includes the timeout. Error code 1 2

3

Meaning Station does not support requested function (FC). Faulty data address ! ID or SC out of range ! Data offset + length excessive Wrong data type ! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000) ! Data length < 0 ! Requested length excessive ! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd

5.7 Station Addresses Each scale receives a slave address starting from 1 in rising sequence. In the following text, the highest settable address is called MAXSLAVE. The address is set on scale or EasyServe in the dialog mode. MAXSLAVE has value 254. Address 0 is the boradcast address. In this case, the slaves do not return any response.

52

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Modbus

5.8 User Data 5.8.1 Process Values Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the data within a segment are added in continuous succession. The data of a segment can be read or written using a message.

5.8.2 Parameters All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, only one parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID unique throughout the system. For some important parameters of wagon type VLW, these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For the residual parameters, EasyServe can create a list including the IDs. Note: Menu item “EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETER-Print SysID” lets you activate printout of the IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note that the modification of the selection parameters requires special knowledge. Floating point and/or integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data formats correspond to those of the cyclic values.

5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending on function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must be incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocol’s register addresses start from 1. So the data address is configured like this: Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT PLUS Address + 1.

5.10 Sample Messages The following lines show the construction of the Modbus messages. The first column represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale response. Floating point values are represented in the form of an (unswapped) IEEE number. Data to scale

Scale response

Meaning

01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2

01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2

Start scale (single-bit command) Stop scale (single-bit command)

01 06 0140 0040 8812 01 03 02F0 0004 4582

01 06 0140 0040 8812 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx cc cc 01 03 04 42C8 0000 6FB5

Reset counter 1 (preset word) Read 4 words of status information xx = data, cc = CRC16 Read parameter (nominal feed rate, ID=1082 (hex), value = 100)) Write parameter (value =163.34)

01 03 1082 0002 60E3 01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678 6C1A

01 10 1082 0002 E520


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

53

Modbus

5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT) For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool. The parameter description holds for either unit. Parameter

Value range

Default

Explanation

Protocol type

all fieldbus protocols

NO

Timeout Host

0 ... 300 s

10 s

Communication Host

W2 (Warning 2), W1 (Warning 1), A(LARM), IG(nore) 1 ... 254 1 ... 32767

IG

Select protocol: here Modbus Designed for interface monitoring. ZERO value means that interface is not activated. Class of communication error

I:std / L:std I:swp / L:std I:std / L:swp I:swp / L:swp 9.6 19.2 38.4 kBaud

I:std / L:std

8-O-1 8-E-1 8-N-2 8-N-1 (10-bit frame)

8-O-1

VEG:

Physics RS485-2wire

Modbus address Modbus resolution Modbus IEEE format

Modbus baud rate Modbus data format

Physics

RS232 RS422 RS485

1 4096

9.6 kBaud

Slave address on Modbus Indicates maximum number of increments of value in analog, or integer, format. Determines the word sequence for transmission of measurement values in the I(EEE)/L(ONG) format. Baud rate Modbus normally uses an 11-bit character frame, e.g. 8-O-1 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit Selecting the interface physics

VKG: RS485-2-wire RS485-4-wire

RS485-4wire

Note Used for message end identification, the Modbus idle time is defined with 3.5 characters as a function of selected baud rate, and corresponds to approx. 4 milliseconds at 9600 baud. For adaptation to specific device configurations, this time can be set in the EasyServe block. The setting acts both on EasyServe and fieldbus interfaces. Selected baud rate 9600 19200 38400

Modbus idle time in milliseconds 4 2 1

When operating the EasyServe interface using a radio converter, the times stated in table may be longer.

54

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Modbus

5.12 Settings on Modbus Master ! If data from various segments (see Fieldbus Data) are used, every segment needs at least one message. ! Set correct byte sequence with values in the IEEE and LONG formats. ! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailer bytes.

5.13 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction is reported by event message "Communication Error Host” (S9) provided that message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis. Meaning of the ‘Communication Host’ S9 event message ! Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports the following errors: ! Different station address on Master and scale ! Different baud rates on Master and scale ! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty ! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see “Fieldbus Hardware“ item. ! Bus termination absent or present multiple times. Check the jumpers in the fieldbus connectors on the module. For details, see “Fieldbus Hardware“ item. ! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change parameterization or exchange module. ! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization. ! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message. See also “Error Codes“ item. EasyServe Fieldbus View The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the „Fieldbus Data“ item.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

55

Modbus

5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG) To provide a serial interface to the fieldbus Master, you can attach the module to the INTECONT cover. Bus termination ! The bus termination is realized using jumpers in the fieldbus connectors. This ensures that the termination is preserved upon replacement of card. ! Am Busmaster sollten Sie einen 220 Ohm-Widerstand zur Terminierung verwenden. Baud rate, bus address, interface physics, data format ! All values are set via parameters. Depending on selected physics, different connections must be realized on fieldbus connector (see below).

X20 "

Connector assignment X20 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

56

RS 232 GND TX RX -

RS 422 GND TXRXRX+ TX+ Bus termination Bus termination

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

RS 485 GND RX-/TXRX+/TX+ Bus termination Bus termination


Modbus

Jumpers for interface physics and bus termination with RS485 (2-wire)

Bus terminal jumpers with RS422 (4-wire)

Characteristics Isolation Voltage supply Current supply Connectors


Optocouplers 5V DC internal max. 100mA Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm²

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

57

Modbus

5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG) Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped for operating as an RS485-2-wire interface. An additional 120 Ohm bus termination resistance should be installed for the last bus subscribers.

5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the reception side (PINS 6-9).

5.17 For Further Reading Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide BVH2098AA

58

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996 EASYSERVE


Ethernet

6 Ethernet This chapter describes all protocols and tools basing on Ethernet. At present, these are the Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP application protocols. Modbus/TCP This uses the TCP/IP standard for data transmission and the application data appear as a Modbus-RTU frame. VEG: Here, the Modbus/TCP interface is created via optional fieldbus card (VET020V). VKG: The Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP use the same Ethernet connection on the base card. This makes it possible to connect the EasyServe via Modbus/TCP in parallel to the Ethernet/IP fieldbus. Ethernet/IP EtherNet/IP adds the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP™) to standard Ethernet. This is the same application protocol and object model used with DeviceNet. CIP facilitates interoperability between devices from different manufacturers and sub-networks. VEG: Implemented with the optional fieldbus card (VET022V) VKG:S. Note Modbus/TCP.

6.1 Ethernet Settings Your INTECONT can be parameterized using the INTECONT control unit or the EasyServe tool. The settings apply to Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP. The parameter description holds for either system. Parameter

value range

IP address 1 IP address 2 IP address 3 IP address 4 Network mask 1 Network mask 2 Network mask 3 Network mask 4 Gateway 1

0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255

Default value 192 168 240 1 255 255 255 0 0

Gateway 2 Gateway 3 Gateway 4

0 – 255 0 – 255 0 – 255

0 0 0


Explanation Manual IP address assignment (see above) (see above) (see above) Delegating the Subnetz mask (see above) (see above) (see above) Delegating the standard gateway address (see above) (see above) (see above)

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

59

Ethernet

Note If you operate your INTECONT units on a local sub-network with specific network card, we suggest to set the PC network adapter to the following values: ! IP address: 192.168.240.254 ! Net mask: 255.255.255.0 ! Gateway: 0.0.0.0 ! INTECONT 1-n: 192.168.240.x wo x=1-n ! Always use unique IP addresses. Ask your system administrator for available addresses.

6.2 Checking Station Addresses You can check network parameters using the PING command available on any PC, e.g. “ping 192.168.240.1” If check is successful, reponse time of the final unit is displayed.

60

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP This item describes the functionality of INTECONT used as server on Ethernet. In detail: ! Ethernet module (“Ethernet Bus Module “VET020V” - VEG) item ! Ethernet module configuration (determine characteristics and assign station addresses) ! FIELDBUS mode: Data exchange between Ethernet client and INTECONT via Modbus/TCP ! WEB SERVER mode: Preparation and call of a WEB page ! Diagnosis and troubleshooting.

6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline ! Prepare hardware as described at “Ethernet Bus Module VET020V (only VEG) “ item. ! Activate protocol type Modbus-TCP on INTECONT. ! Parameterize Ethernet address on module. ! In FIELDBUS mode: Determine data to be transferred – data IDs required (s. “Fieldbus Data“ item). ! Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode). ! Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.

6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions ! Connect module using RJ45 connector. ! The server can exchange data with as many as 3 clients simultaneously in fieldbus mode. If the EasyServe tool is used, it can occupy one of the three channels if the coupling is performed over the network. The data are either sent as Modbus (RTU)/TCP packets or are expected as such from external. The functional range is described in more detail below. ! Monitoring the bus interface ! Easy to parameterise the interface using the basic model's operating station or the EasyServe diagnostic tool.

6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like a Modbus/TCP server in accordance with standard “OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999“ and masters all function codes of Classes 1 and 2 (save FC7) as well as the most significant codes of Class 2 (FC15 and 23). Data representation is totally oriented to the Modbus standard. The TCP safety layer performs the function of the check sum (CRC16) of the Modbus message. Of the 6byte message header defined in the OPEN MODBUS standard, INTECONT only uses the 6th byte to transfer the data length. The residual bytes are returned in the response in ratio 1:1. To enable later extensions, these header bytes (1-5) should not be used; set them to ZERO.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

61

Ethernet

6.3.4 Station Addresses In the Ethernet network, all stations are clearly identified by their IP addresses. Therefore the Modbus slave address can always be set to value 1.

6.3.5 Function Codes (FC) The list below explains the codes used: FC [dec] 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 15 16 23

Meaning Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits) Bitwise re-reading of status information (one/multiple bits) Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement, LONG and parameter values (one/multiple words) Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words) Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit) Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word) Diagnosis (sub-codes 0 and 1 only) Bitwise writing of control information (one/(multiple bits) Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words) Wordwise writing and simultaneous reading of data (one/multiple data words)

6.3.6 Transmission Protection With Modbus/TCP, the transmission is protected by the safety measures of the TCP layer.

6.3.7 Error Codes Only error codes 01 to 03 are used. Upon CRC error, no reponse is sent. All errors described below are comprised in system in the form of general error message “Communication Error Host“. This message includes the timeout. Error Code Meaning 1 Station does not support requested function (FC). 2 Wrong data address ! ID or SC out of range ! Data offset + length excessive 3 Wrong data type ! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000) ! Data length < 0 ! Requested length exceeded ! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd

62

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

6.3.8 Data Formats Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values are transferred in the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits). All control information and statusses are represented in form of a binary signal using the 8 data bits of each character. In addition, all control and status information can be treated as single bit information.

6.3.9 Process Values Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the data within a segment are consecutively added. The data of a segment can be read or written using a single message.

6.3.10 Parameters All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, however, only one parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID unique throughout the system. For some significant parameters of scale type VLW, these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For residual parameters, EasyServe can prepare a list complete with IDs. Note: Menu item “EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETERS-Print SysID” lets you activate printout of IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note that special knowledge is required to edit the selection parameters. Floating point and/or integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data formats correspond to those of the cyclic values. Note: Parameters preset via fieldbus are accepted only if parameter mode is not active at the same time.

6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending on function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must be incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocol’s register addresses start from 1. So the data address is configured like this: Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT Address + 1.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

63

Ethernet

6.3.12 Message Samples The following lines show the construction of the Modbus/TCP messages. The first column represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale response. Data to scale

Scale response

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 05 0140 ff00 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 05 0141 ff00 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 06 0140 0040 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 02F0 0004 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 1082 0002 00 00 00 00 00 0B 01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 05 0140 ff00 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 05 0141 ff00 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 06 0140 0040 00 00 00 00 00 0B 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 00 00 00 00 07 01 03 04 42C8 0000 00 00 00 00 00 06 01 10 1082 0002

Meaning Start scale (single-bit command) Stop scale (single-bit command) Reset counter 1 (preset word) Read 4 words of status information xx = data, cc = CRC16 Read parameter (nominal feed rate, ID=1082 (hex), value = 100)) Write parameter (value =163.34)

6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT) Parameter

Value Range

Default

Explanation

Protocol Type

Any fieldbus protocol 5 ... 300 s

NO

Select protocol: here Modbus/TCP

10 s

Serves for interface monitoring. Values less than 5 are limited to the minimum value. Class of communication error

Host Timeout

Communication Error Host

WEB Coding (only VEG)

DHCP (only VEG)

64

W2 (Warning 2), W1 (Warning 1), A(LARM), IG(nore) HTML, XML

IG

NO

NO

XML

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

Determines type of WEB page coding. If XML is selected, data in browser are represented by the style sheet. The IP address is assigned on device or configuration tool (EasyServe).


Ethernet

6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master ! If data from various segments are used (s. Fieldbus Data), every segment needs at least one message. ! Set correct byte sequence for values in the IEEE and LONG formats. ! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailor bytes.

6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction is reported by event message "Communication Error Host” (S9) provided that message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis. Note An internal communication fault (fieldbus card – INTECONT main board) produces a timeout on fieldbus Master. To remove, restart your INTECONT. Event message Communication Host S9 Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports the following errors: ! Different station address on Master and scale ! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty ! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see “Fieldbus Hardware“ item. ! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change parameterization or exchange module. ! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization. ! Inadmissible ID (data address) detected in Master -> scale message. See also “Error Codes“ and "Interface Configuration“ items. Monitoring the Fieldbus channels (VEG) Only the channel with writing authorisation is monitored when fieldbus channels are monitored for error indication and safety turn-off for the scale. Communication faults are only shown for this channel. Setting the event class for the Host Communication Fault to ALARM switches off the scale and all static command bits are put in the safe state. One exception: It also shows the Host Communication Fault if there is no fieldbus channel that has acquired the specification right and if the fieldbus has already been activated. In this case, the fault message can only be suppressed by changing the event class to IGNORE. In terms of this monitoring strategy, EasyServe is not considered to be a Fieldbus client. The special settings in the relevant parameter block apply to EasyServe and also the same rules with regard to logging on and off apply as with a serial coupling.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

65

Ethernet

6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V – VEG) You can also attach the module to the INTECONT PLUS cover in order to provide an Ethernet interface (10BaseT) to the TCP client. Plug jumper W100 (determining voltage supply) in position 2-3.

X20 "

Pin Assignment X20 (RJ45) Meaning TX+ TXRX+ --RX-

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEDs on the communication module Green on / red off Green on / red on All off

Communication is taking place via one of the field bus channels. The telegrams are free of error. Communication running, but an error exists (wrong ID, wrong function code, wrong length) No field bus client active or the mod bus/TCP protocol has not been preselected.

Features Separation Voltage supply Current supply Ethernet topology Connector 66

Yes 5V DC internal Max 500mA 10BaseT RJ45

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG The VKG scenario uses the standard Ethernet connection on the base board.

Netblock LED: 1 Link (green): 2 FDX (yellow): 3 100 (red):

Ethernet has the connection full duplex 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)

6.3.18 For Further Reading OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide

Schneider Electric, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999 PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996

Note All external documents, updates and examples listed here can be loaded from the service page of Schenck Process GmbH (http://support.schenckprocess.com, path: Bus Systeme-TCP).


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

67

Ethernet

6.4 Ethernet/IP 6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines ! ! ! ! ! !

Prepare hardware as described at item “Ethernet Bus Module VET022V“(VEG). Activate protocol type "Ethernet/IP" on INTECONT. Parameterize Ethernet address on module. Select process image and determine data to be transmitted. Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode). Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.

6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions ! Connect module using RJ45 connector. ! In FIELDBUS mode, server can exchange data of multiple clients at the same time. Ethernet/IP and Modbus/TCP are available as protocols. The process image of the two protocols is the same. The communication module is not designed to block any attempt to write, i.e. the last client having sent preset values is the winner. ! The module can be used as Group 2 and 3 server on the Ethernet/IP network. For more information, see ODVA WEB page. ! When using the Modbus/TCP protocol, the rules of Modbus/TCP specification V1.0 apply. For details, see MODBUS.ORG or SCHENCK PROCESS Service WEB pages. ! Bus interface is monitored. ! Easy parameterization of VET022V using base unit control station or EasyServe diagnostic tool.

6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like an Ethernet/IP or Modbus/TCP server. The comments below dedicate to Ethernet/IP. For Modbus/TCP, a different communication module is available, better suited to use the device features. For protocol itself, see separate item.

6.4.4 User Data Construction For details and examples on user data construction, see “Fieldbus Data” item.

6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT) Parameter

Value Range

Default

Explanation

Protocol Type

Any fieldbus protocol 5 ... 300 s

NO

Select protocol: here Ethernet/IP

10 s

Serves for interface monitoring. Values less than 5 are limited to the minimum value. Class of communication error

Host Timeout

Communication Error Host

68

W2 (Warning 2), W1 (Warning 1), A(LARM), IG(nore)

IG

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Explanation

Byte sequence

High-Low Low-High I:std / L:std I:swp / L:std I:std / L:swp I:swp / L:swp

HighLow I:std / L:std

FIXED, NO_PARA_ID, PARA_ID, PARA_6ID

FIXED

Swaps byte sequence in every user data word Determines the word sequence during transmission of measurement values in the I(EEE)-/L(ONG) format. Also swaps analog preset values. The parameter specifies the process image

Word sequence

Configuration

Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

69

Ethernet

6.4.6 Configuration of the network in “RSLogix 5000"

70

! ! ! ! ! ! !

Create a new project in RSLogix Configure the controller Select the EtherNet/IP bridge Configure the EtherNet/IP Bridge Add the INTECONT Satus station to the I/O configuration Add a generic Ethernet module Configure the new Ethernet/IP module

!

Set connection options for INTECONT

!

Download the configuration BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

6.4.7 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction is reported by event message "Communication Error Host” (S9) provided that message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next items. The EasyServe tool, if present, provides further information on error diagnosis. Event message Communication Host S9 Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports the following errors: ! Different station addresses on Master and scale ! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty ! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see “Fieldbus Hardware“ item. ! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change parameterization or exchange module. ! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization. ! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message (exclusively use bold IDs). ! All preset IDs in host system message are set to zero (communication between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). At least one preset ID must be set to a correct value (unequal to zero); or Release bit set in FIXED mode. ! If, despite established data communication, the data of the INTECONT (VKG) is not updated, it is probably because the Ethernet/IP option is not activated (see BVH2346, chapter “Set options”). EasyServe Fieldbus View The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the “Fieldbus Data“ item.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

71

Ethernet

6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG To provide an Ethernet interface (10/100 BaseT) to the TCP client, you can also attach the module to the INTECONT cover. To do so, plug jumper W100 (determine power supply) in position 2-3.

X20 "

Pin assignment X20 (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6

Meaning TX+ TXRX+ --RX-

Characteristics Separation Voltage supply Current supply Ethernet topology Connector

72

Yes 5V DC internal Max 500mA 10/100 BaseT RJ45

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


Ethernet

6.5 Ethernet connection VKG

Netblock LED: 1 Link (green): 2 FDX (yellow): 3 100 (red):

Ethernet has the connection full duplex 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)

6.5.1 For Further Reading Ethernet/IP Specification ANYBUS-IC Design Guide ANYBUS-IC Fieldbus Appendix Network Analyzer (Packetyzer)


www.odva.org www.hms-networks.com www.hms-networks.com www.packetyzer.com

BV-H2220 GB , 0831

73

Application Examples

7 Application Examples 7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers Step

ID dec.

ID hex.

Comment

Leave normal mode and prepare Zeroing and Taring Turn OFF 1 321 0x141 for batch to be deselected Abort batch 2 338 0x152 for batch to be deselected Deselect batch 3 337 0x151 Select volumetric mode 4 324 0x144 Speed proportional to setpoint Close prefeeder 5 351 0x15F Prefeeder and feed gate remain closed also if setpoint is not zero. Turn ON

320

6 Setpoint needs not be 0.

0x140

Belt is running proportionally to setpoint. If P=Po then v=vo; if P=Pn then v=vn. Continue belt run until belt load is almost 0. Read belt load 1880 0x758 7 Select zeroing or taring and continue accordingly. ! Zeroing: Item 8 and 9 ! Taring: Item 10 and 11 Zeroing 8 Start Zeroing 367 0x171 Check statuses 776 0x308 9 Taring 10 Start Taring Check statuses 11 Wait for status change. 12 Nullstellen (Step 13) Calibration results included 13

368 777 817

0x170 Ensure that statuses are 0x309 available during zeroing, or taring. 0x331 Wait for acknowledgement.

1964

0x7A C

Deviation from last zero set or taring

1966

0x7A E

New value for tare (P09.04) or tare correction (P09.05)

379

0x17B Acceptance command

1880

0x758 belt

in measurement values

Tarieren (Step 14) 14 Acquire calibration result (Step 15)

15 Check belt load

If you select acquisition, make sure load measurement value is zero (= oscillates around zero point).

Reject calibration result and abort (Step 16) 16 380 0x17C Return to Normal Mode Turn OFF 321 0x141 17 Activate batch (if desired). 336 0x150 18 Involve prefeeder 350 0x15E 19 20 Gravimetrisch aktivieren 325 0x145 Enter desired setpoint; if need be, also batch setpoint. 21 Continue in normal mode. 22 74

BV-H2220 GB , 0831



7.2 Batching via fieldbus Please remember that not all actions are available for all scale types. You can ascertain availability in the list of cyclical data. You can also use the FIXED mode with the exception of the data specified under item 7.

Step

Control system action

Data Type

ID hex. ID dec. Remarks

Preparations: Set the turn-on source parameter (control sources block) and batch setpoint source (batching operation block) on DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS to FB 1

Activate batching mode

Command

150

336

2

Specify the batch setpoint [kg]

Setpoint (IEEE float)

252

594

3

Specify the batch number

256

598

4

Start the batch

Setpoint (IEEE float) Command

140

320

Positive flank

5

Make an active test of the batch Test the batch pre-act contact

Status information

301

769

Status information

302

770

Log. 1 during full feed/dribble feed and afterflow time Dribble feed reached

Status information

590

1424

Not in the FIXED mode

8

Query the digital outputs on the scale (such as scale on/off and prefeeder on/off) Interrupt the batch

Command

141

321

9

Let batch continue

Command

140

320

Positive flank You can continue the batch in progress with the start command Positive flank

10

End batch

Command

152

160

11

1898

768

1896

The quantity already discharged

13

Deselect batch

Readings (IEEE float) Readings (IEEE float) Command

76A

12

Query the remaining batch quantity [kg] Actual batch value [kg]

Positive flank Any subsequent start command starts a new batch while the last batch is not continued. The quantity still to be discharged

151

15F

Positive flank This deactivates batching mode

6 7

Positive flank This is still maintained if there is a power failure in the scale. Batch setpoints sent when the batch is in progress only go to effect when the next batch is started.

NO_PARA_ID – no parameters, 3 predetermination values, 6 reading values

VID1

Commands 4+5

Status 2+3 (ID 02F0)

VID2

Current feed rate (ID 0750)

Commands 6+7

VID3

Status 4+5

Status 6+7 Digital outputs (ID 0330) (ID 0590)

(ID 0310)

Batch setpoint

LID1

LID2

LID3

Actual batch value

LID4

LID5

Counter 1 (ID 0752)

LID6

0

Highestpriority event (ID 0610)

((ID 0768)

V-ID1 0140

commands 4+5 start, stop and reset counter, etc.


BV-H2220 GB , 0831

75


V-ID2 0160 calibration V-ID3 0252

commands 6+7 wg. Start zero setting+ accept calibration result/abort

L-ID1 L-ID2 L-ID3 L-ID4 L-ID5 L-ID6

Status 4+5 Status 6+7 digital outputs actual batch value counter 1 highest-priority event

76

0310 0330 0590 0768 0752 0610

batch setpoint wg. Query whether the batch is active at clear wg. Calibration + wait for acknowledgement wg. Scale on/off + prefeeder on/off

BV-H2220 GB , 0831


DISOMAT Satus® System Manual

BV-H2331GB


Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies. J +49 171 2 251195


J +49 172 6 501700



Contents 1 2

Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1 2.2

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 For systems in zone 1 explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3

Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3.1

Control displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4

Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4

Instructions for specific applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Some examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Assembly in the 19” rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Field case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5

Connecting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10

Connection assignment: non-explosive zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Instruction for connecting the serial S3 interface (RS485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting DISOMAT® Satus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 with the VNT power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connection for the power supply for the VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC) . . . . . . 20 Protection against EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connections into the explosive zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

6

Bus coupling modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6

Profibus VPB 020 coupler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Profibus module (VPB8020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

7

Analog display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Parametrization and calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Function Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Loading language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Backup and Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Loading flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Product Service Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

9 10

Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Batching with DISOMAT® Satus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

10.1 10.2 10.3

Filling Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Dispatch Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Materiald data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

11 11.1

Data processing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

DISOMAT Satus System Manual © Schenck Process

BV-H2331GB / 0836

I1

11.2 11.3 11.3.1.1 11.3.1.1 11.3.1.2 11.3.1.2 11.3.2.1 11.3.2.1 11.3.3.1 11.3.3.1 11.3.3.2 11.3.3.2 11.3.3.3 11.3.3.3 11.3.4.1 11.3.4.1 11.4 11.5 12

List of procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Siemens procedure 3964R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Examples for SIMATIC S5 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Teleperm M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 The structure of the utility data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Data processing commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

13

Event Message Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

13

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

15

Equipment supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

16

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

16.1

Fieldbus accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

I2

BV-H2331GB / 0836

System Manual DISOMAT Satus © Schenck Process

The Manual This manual describes the DISOMAT Satus control electronics, called DISOMAT or the system below It explains: – How it works – Connection diagrams – Accessories – for the VSE 20900, VFG 20900 and VFG 20910 system versions This manual is valid starting from the VWW 20900-004 firmware version You can find additional information (such as other details on the fieldbus couplings) in the following manuals for the DISOMAT system. n

DISOMAT® Data Communication, Bplus, DISOMAT® Opus, DISOMAT® Satus, DISOBOX Data Communication BV-H 2359

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 © Schenck Process

i


ii

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Safety Instructions

1

Safety Instructions Using for the Intended Purpose The measuring system with the mechanical components connected to it is only intended for weighing and control applications directly associated with that. Any use beyond that is considered not intended.

Sources of danger The measuring system does not generate any hazards during weighing operation if the system is properly installed and put into service. Using the measuring system might be dangerous if the system takes on contral applications or when the material weighed is transported. Potential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or metered in. In these cases, the measuring system may cause residual hazards if untrained staff uses or operates it incorrectly.. This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The user is fully responsible for overall plant safety.

Labeling residual hazards The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has the potential to cause severe injury or death. This symbol labels signs on hazard that could cause property damage to the measuring system or other system components.

Personnel Only skilled persons may prepare, install, start-up, operate, maintain and service these systems. Everyone doing work on the measuring system should read the safety instructions and be aware of and follow the parts of the service manual applicable to them. The operator should use the service manual to instruct the operating personnel to comply with all regulations and instructions.


1

Safety Instructions

Changing parameters The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only persons familiar with how the system functions should be allowed to change these parameters (such as with Schenck Process training). Incorrectly set parameters may cause injuries to persons or damage to the machine whenever user control systems are connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.

Password Parameters are protected by password from unauthorised changes. The measuring system operator should act responsibly with the password.

Acknowledging fault messages Fault messages may only be acknowledged after the cause of the fault has been rectified. Before acknowledging a fault, please ensure that connected peripheral units are functioning properly. Check to see that any connected control systems are in safe state.

Service and maintenance Please follow all warning signs on the scale. Please shut off the measuring system before working on the mechanical equipment or peripheral units (particularly control systems). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring system cannot be inadvertently restarted. Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug).

Moisture and humidity All of the parts of the scale (particularly electrical components) have to be protected from moisture and humidity when the housing is open such as during service work. Beyond this, the protection classes of the housing should be observed.

Design modifications Modifications to the measuring system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process renders Schenck’s liability null and void for resulting damage. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect the operating safety of the measuring system.

Replacing parts Only use original Schenck Process replacement parts for repair. Using other spare parts renders the warranty invalid.

2

BV-H2331GB / 0836


System characteristics

2.1 General Information

2


2.1

General Information DISOMAT® Satus is a measuring amplifier for forming and monitoring weight readings. Its standard equipment is: n

n n

n n n

A load cell connection for measurement transducers (such as Schenck Process-RT load cells or Schenck Process measuring eyes) a serial service interface for configuring with a PC or VT terminal two serial data processing interfaces for transmitting data to a higher-level data processing system one analog output 4 output contacts (relays) 3 input contacts (optocouplers)

DISOMAT® Satus is particularly suited to systems that measure and/or monitor the weights of a number of individual scales. It can be connected to a process control system – via analog output or – to a data processing system via serial interface or – fieldbus. A typical area of application is fill level monitoring in multiple-hopper systems. DISOMAT® Satus can also be used as a filling or dispatch scale using the serial interface to control the batching process (for instance, presetting the setpoint or feed ON/OFF). Control LEDs display the most important operating states of DISOMAT® Satus while the DISOPLAN® PC software package is for easy and convenient start-up. DISOMAT® Satus is installed in a field case or a 19“ module assembly frame. The voltage is supplied by a local 24 V = supply, the power supply unit in the 19“ module assembly frame or a transformer in the field case. Several DISOMAT® Satus units can be integrated in Profibus and DeviceNet networks with optional fieldbus upgrades. The standard interface for integrating in Ethernet networks via MODBUS-TCP and Ethernet-IP protocols are available in the unit.


3

2.2 For systems in

2.2


For systems in zone 1 explosive areas

Fig. 1:

The VXB 209... protective circuits are part of the equipment that disconnects intrinsically safe circuits from those that are not intrinsically safe. They have to be built in an safe area. The components installed for limiting current and voltage provide the explosion protection while retaining the galvanic connection to the circuits.

Intended Use The protective circuit is made of a Z barrier for: n n n n

the load cell(s) 2 binary inputs the serial secondary display the analog output (4-20 mA)

You can find details on using the VXB 209... protective circuit in the BV-H2330 Safety Instructions.

4

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Start-Up

3.1 Control displays

3

Start-Up

3.1

Control displays An der Frontplatte des DISOMAT® Satus befinden sich 8 Leutdioden, die Betriebszustände des DISOMAT® Satus signalisieren.

Fig. 2:


5

3.1 Control displays

Start-Up

The version with a display (VSE 20910) also has a 3 1/2 digit red LED display and 3 operating buttons (figure). Chapter 7. describes how the display is connected and adjusted while the function of the keys depends on the chosen configuration.

Fig. 3:

6

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Planning

4

Planning The VFE 900 main card has all of the components for normal operation: the measuring circuit, CPU, power supply unit, serial interface for connecting up to a data processing system, 4 safely disconnected relay outputs, 4 optocoupler inputs and one analog output.

The Components and How They Function Designation

Function

DISOMAT® Satus = VSE 20900 Main Card

Measuring and Monitoring Weights and Data Transmission to Higher-Level Data Processing Systems

DISOMAT® Satus = Main card with the display and operating buttons: VSE 20910

Measuring and monitoring weights and showing them on a 3½-digit LED display. The operating button for Set tare / Clear tare / Zero setting.

19“ VNG 900 module assembly frame (without racks and with blank panels)

Space for as much as 10 DISOMAT® Satus or 5 DISOMAT® Satus and 5 VXB oer 5 DISOMAT® Satus VSE20910 or 9 DISOMAT® Satus + 1 VNT 3xx power supply unit

VNT20900 power supply unit VNT20910 VNT20930

Power supply for as much as 6 DISOMAT® Satus in the 19“ module assembly frame for as many as 9 DISOMAT® Use Satus VNT 20930

VFG20900 field case

Space for one DISOMAT® Satus

VFG20910 field case

Space for one DISOMAT® Satus including the transformer (230/115 V) for its power supply

VPB 020 Profibus card VCB 020 DeviceNet card

Integrating into the Profibus or DeviceNet systems

VXB 209 ex interface module...

intrinsically safe connection for components used in explosive zones such as Schenck-RT load cells (DISOMAT® Satus outside of the explosive zone!)

DISOPLAN

for convenient start-up under MS-Windows XP/2000


7

4.1 Instructions for specific applications

4.1

Planning

Instructions for specific applications Connecting several load cells/measuring eyes To connect several load cells or measuring eyes to DISOMAT® Satus, you need a DKK 69/70 interconnecting box (for as many as 4 load cells) or a DKK6 (for 6 load cells) or a VKK 28008 (for 8 load cells) with overload protection wherever required.

The Control System of DISOMAT® Satus (such as with a data processing system, process control system or PLC) You can trigger one single DISOMAT® Satus via serial or analog interface, although several DISOMAT® Satus have to be controlled. There are the following options for solving this problem: n

n

n n

The control system has enough analog interfaces (such as the process control system or PLS) They control the DISOMAT® Satus units via the compatible-for-bus RS 485 interface with a MODBUS/J-Bus protocol and a data processing system. You couple the DISOMAT® Satus units via fieldbus upgrade. You couple via built-in Ethernet interface (MODBUS-TCP or Ethernet-IP protocol).

Maximum distances The acceptable distances between DISOMAT® Satus and peripheral units connected to it depend on what interface the peripheral units are operated on. Serial computer interface Interface

Maximum cable length

RS 232

15 m

RS 485, 2-wire

800 m at the maximum baudrate of 9,600 baud (compatible for bus with a maximum of 16 bus subscribers)

Analog interface n 300 m Connecting the load cells n

8

1,000 m with Schenck Process load cells and Schenck Process measuring eyes (8 x 0.5 mm measuring cable)

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Planning

4.2

4.2 Some examples of applications

Some examples of applications The graph below shows all options for connecting up and upgrading a DISOMAT® Satus. The connecting options are shown in broken lines.

Fig. 5:

First example: DISOMAT® Satus in a non-explosive zone via analog interface on a process control system

Fig. 4:


9

4.2 Some examples of applications Second example:

Planning

DISOMAT® Satus in the Profibus with a VPB fieldbus card

Fig. 7:

Third example:DISOMAT® Satus with a scale, display and control system in an explosive zone

Fig. 6:

10

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Planning

4.3

4.3 Assembly in the 19” rack

Assembly in the 19” rack 19” subassemblies of DISOMAT® Satus have the dimensions below: Height – 129 mm (3HE) The width of the standard subassemblies VSE 20900 VXB 209xx VNT – 41 mm (8TE) The version with the display (VSE 20910) is twice as wide (82 mm) – –

The depth of the boards is 270 mm Installation depth including the plug and cable outlet: 330 mm

It is best to use the DNG 900 rack for assembling the components. This is either is supplied complete with DISOMAT® Satus subassemblies when ordered or empty with the equipped blank panels. You can also use any 19” systems for installation, although the cable have to be carefully supported (mechanically with strain relief and electrically with cable shields). The rack takes a maximum of 10 subassemblies where units with a display require 2 slots. An example of maximum fitting: – 10x VSE 20900 24 VDC feed – 9x VSE 20900 network feed – 5x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, 24 VDC – 4x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, network feed – 5x VSE 20910 24 VDC A power supply unit is always mounted on the far right side of the rack. Bus cards, Profibus and DeviceNet are mounted directly on DISOMAT. You do not need any additional space in the rack.


11

4.4 Field case

4.4

Planning

Field case

Fig. 8:

12

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Connecting the Unit

5

4.4 Field case

Connecting the Unit Figure 9 shows the location of the terminals

Fig. 9

1:

2:

3: 4: 5:

power supply digital outputs digital inputs analog output serial interface S2 (RS 232) serial interface S3 (RS 485) load cell connection serial interface S1 (RS 232) network connection (Ethernet) Adapter plug for the fieldbus modules


13

5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone

5.1

Connecting the Unit

Connection assignment: non-explosive zone

Fig. 10:

*

14

You can use a fourth input contact after removing the encoder pin from X1.1B Pin4.

BV-H2331GB / 0836



Memory for calibration data

Circuit board

82.1 81.1 82 81

27 28 NV

WH Screen

Load Cell Signal -27

Screen plate 50

Jumper for write-protection of calibration data (jumper open = parameters can be written)

Screen plate

+ Supply Sense - Supply Sense + Supply Voltage - Supply Voltage

- Load Cell Signal + Load Cell Signal

RD

Load Cell Signal +28

GR GN RD WH

YE GN RD

GR

Totally Screened

Junction Box (DKK 6,69,70)

BL

BU

NF

BK (BN)

The power cable for the DVC platform scale

BK

On Screen Plate

Totally Screened screened in pairs

GN

YE

BU/WH

BL

Supply Sense -81.1

Supply Sense+82.1

Supply Voltage -81

BK/WH

BK

2 4x2x0,5 mm2 7x0,5 mm

YE/BK

50

81

82

27 28 82.1 81.1

50

81

27 81.1

82.1

82

28

50

81

81.1

27

82.1

82

28

50

81

81.1

27

82.1

82

28

50

81.1 81

27

82.1

82

28

27 WH 81.1

82.1

28 RD 82 BK

YE/BK

BU

WH

BK

RD

YE/BK

BU

WH

BK

RD

YE/BK

BU

WH

BK

81 BU BU 50 YE/BK Junction Box (if required) RD

WH

BK

RD

Potential equalization rail

81 -

+ 82 28 +

81 -

+ 82

28 +

81 -

+ 82

28 +

81 -

82

28 +

vh231001.cdr

Load Cells

- 27

To Potential Equalization Line On Junction Box

- 27


- 27


YE/BK

- 27

Potential Equalization Line

5.2

Supply Voltage +82

Signal

Connecting the Unit 5.2 Load cells

Load cells

Fig. 11: Schenck RT-weighing cell connection

15

5.2 Load cells

Connecting the Unit If the scale design provides the ground connection from a load cell body, it is not necessary to connect it via PAS. The cable screen does not need to be connected to terminal 50 of the interconnecting box for load cells whose connecting cable shield is connected to the load cell body (e.g. Schenck VBB). In this case, the shield is connected via the load cell body and PAS or ground. Please refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for details on connecting more load cells.

5.2.1 Preparing the load cell plug The memory chip for setting and adjustment data has to be mounted before connecting the load cell cable. – – – –

The chip is attached to the unit. Remove connection 1 of the chip (refer to the figure; the flat side is upwards) It is connected on pins 2 and 3 of the plug as shown (refer to the figure; the flat side is upwards) The parameters are write-protected with a jumper between pins 1 and 3.

Fig. 12

Fig. 13

16

BV-H2331GB / 0822


Connecting the Unit Signal

4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2

5.2 Load cells 4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 4 x 2 x 0.23 mm2

7 x 0.5 mm2

ULC+/82

BKs4 + BK/WHs1

GNs4 + YEs1

gn

(BK)

ULC-/81

BUs4 + BU/WHs1

BNs4 + WHs1

BN/BU

(BU)

Usense+/82.1

GYs2

GNs2

GN/BU

(YE)

Usense-/81.1

GNs2

WHs2

WH/BU

(GN)

UMeas+/28

RDs3

BNs3

bn

(RD)

UMeas-/27

WHs3

WHs3

wh

(GR)

Shield/50

Shield

Shield

NC *

(NC)*

s1, s2, s3, s4 = screened in pairs Schenck Process material no.

3849.807 / 3849.808

3849.809 / 3849.810 / 3849.009

3849.717 / 3849.718 (3849.701 / 3849.711)

*Neutral colour Strands colour-coded as per DIN IEC

German BK

black

BN

brown

RD

red

OG

orange

YE

yellow

GN

green

BU

blue

VT

violet

GY

grey

WH

white

PK

pink

GD

gold

TQ

turquoise

SR

silver


17

5.4 Relay outputs

5.3

Connecting the Unit

Digital inputs

Fig. 15: Inputs connection diagram

5.4

Relay outputs

Fig. 14: Relay outputs connection diagram

18

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Connecting the Unit

5.5

5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial

Instruction for connecting the serial S3 interface (RS485) Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped to operate it as a RS485 2-wire interface and an 120-Ohm bus termination resistor should be mounted for the last bus subscriber.

Fig. 16: Connection diagram S3 as RS485-2

If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the reception side (PINS 6-9).

5.5.1 Connnecting a PC or VT terminal to the S1 service interface Pin assignment:

Use a null modem cable for connections (length < 3m)

Pin 2: RxD

Pin 3: TxD

Pin 5: 0 V


19

5.7 Connection for the power supply for the

5.6

Connecting the Unit

Connecting DISOMAT® Satus with the VNT power supply unit

Fig. 17:

5.7

Connection for the power supply for the VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC) There is a mains transformer in the VFG20910 field device. The terminals of the transformer are labelled. They are connected to the terminals depending on the mains voltage. Terminals 0 and 230 V or 0 and 115 V 0

20

115V

230V

BV-H2331GB / 0836

X


Connecting the Unit

5.8

5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier

Protection against EMC Please do the following to guarantee optimum EMC resistance for DISOMAT® Satus: n Do not conduct the measuring cable shield on the X1.0A plug, but lay it on the shield rail or housing. n Do not lay the shield of serial lines on the X1.0B plug, but directly on the housing/mounting plate (fast-on). n Connect the fast-on on the back side of the unit by a short path with the housing (19“ rack and mounting plate). Ground the housing well (we recommend a minimum line cross-section of 4 mm)2 and contact via screwed cable lug (not fast-on).

5.9

Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier The VXB safety barrier and main VFE subassembly are connected electrically via multi-strand flat cable with preconnected plugs. It is virtually impossible to plug the wrong pin in the wrong socket due to the different pole numbers on the plug. The assignment is: – –

–

– –

inputs, 4-pole —-> X1.1. B 5-8 analog output, 2-pole —-> X1.1. A 1-2 The attached analog doubler from DISOMAT (X1.1 A1-2) has to be attached if you want the analog output to be used for triggering an analog display in the explosive zone and for issuing signals in the safe zone (PLC, analog display). It may never be doubled on the explosive side of the barrier (X41), feed 3-pole —-> X1.1. B 1-3, double underclamp or use the free connection on the VNT power supply unit. serial interface 5-pole, small grid load cell 10-pole

—-> X0B 6-10 —-> X0A

The dongle with the memory chip is already mounted with the VXB. IMPORTANT: It makes sense to use the old memory chip again when replacing the VXB to keep the scale parameters.


21

5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier

Connecting the Unit

Fig. 18:

A cover (6) is bolted onto the VXB 209... protective circuits to comply with the air and conducting paths as per Table 4 of EN 50020. This provides a thread measure of more than 50 mm between connecting components that are intrinsically safe and those that are not intrinsically safe.

22

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Connecting the Unit

5.10 Connections into the explosive zone


Fig. 19:

You can find the safety instructions and data with an impact on safety on the VXB209x barriers in the BV-H2330 manual.


23


Connecting the Unit


24

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Bus coupling modules

6

6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module

Bus coupling modules The VPB 020, VPB 8020, VCB 020 and VCB8020 bus coupling modules are fastened to the CPU board with 3 screws each (component side upwards). It is electrically connected up via the ribbon cable. All of the parts needed for subsequent mounting are attached to the coupling module.

6.1

Profibus VPB 020 coupler module The module can be attached to the main DISOMAT board to create an interface to the PROFIBUS-DP. This module is designed and certified as per DIN 19245 or Part 2 of EN 50170and has an automatic baud rate identification of up to 12 Mbit/s (12 MBaud). The circuit board has two connections for connecting the bus. You can use both the XP3 plug (terminals) and the XP1 (HD-9 pole) in the DISOMAT. Please remember that the first and last unit on the PROFIBUS-DP system has to have a bus termination . To solve this problem, jump W150, W151 and W152 to 1-2. Caution: All bridges have to be in the same position. Pin assignment XP1

XP3

Pin no.

Pin No.

3 8 5 6 1

1 2 3 4 5

RxD/TxD-P* RxD/TxD-N** DGND VP shield***

* : = -P = B ** : N = A *** : Please do not put the shield on the plug, but on the cable clamp The HI20 LED’s indicate proper bus operation (transmitting and receiving)


25

6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module


Fig. 20: Position of connections and jumpers VPB 020

Important! W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT. Note: If the last actively terminated slave is removed from the bus, this may cause the entire bus to malfunction. This fault occurs particularly frequently when using alternating scales. This problem can be avoided by using a separate active bus termination as offered by Siemens under order number 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0 . You can also purchase the bus termination from Schenck Process under material no. V014298.B01. External wiring You can find instructions for installing external wiring and protecting against malfunctions in the Profibus Guideline from the Profibus User Organisation (PNO), order number 2.111. You can find other details on the Profibus, in particular on building up the transmitted data in the DISOMAT® Bplus Manual, Opus, Satus, DISOBOX BVH2316. Projecting aids (drawings, rules) The Profibus standard DIN 19245 (part 3) defines a unit master data file and you can download the suitable Profibus projecting file (.gsd) by Internet from the Schenck Process product page under www.schenckprocess.com under products/services and downloads.

26

BV-H2331GB / 0836



6.2

6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)

Profibus module (VPB8020) As an option, the module can be fastened on the unit’s base card to provide an interface to the Profibus.

Bus termination The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a rule the resistances are not activated (position 2-3). Bus addresses: n The addresses are set using parameters.

1

4

3

2

5

Operation Mode Status-LED

6

7

8

9

Front View

Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection On the Profibus connection (VPB8020), the LED is lit Opertion Mode State

Indication

Off

Not online/No power

Green

On-line, Date exchange

Flashing Green

On-line, clear

Flashing Red (1 Hz)

Parametrization error

Flashing Red (2 Hz)

PROFIBUS Configuration error


27

6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)


Status State

Indication

Off

Not power or not initialised

Green

Initialised

Flashing Green

Initialised, diagnostic event(s) present

Red

Exceeption error

Pin assignment Pin

Signal (XP1 9-pin Sub-D-female)

Signal (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm²)

1

-

B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD *

2

-

A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD **

3

B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD *

GND BUS

4

RTS, Request To Send

+5V BUS

5

GND BUS

Shielding

6

+5V BUS

-

7

-

-

8

A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD **

-

9

-

-

Housing

Bus Cable Shield

-

* **

This cable has the conductor color red. This cable has the conductor color green.

Characteristics

28

Disconnection

Optocoupler

Power supply

5V DC internal

Power supply

Max 310mA

Plug connector

5-Pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm² 9-pin Sub-D-femal

BV-H2331GB / 0836



6.3

6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data Profibus configurations Various configurations are available in DISOMAT® Satus: n DISOMAT® Satus – Standard 32 / 22 bytes per direction n DISOMAT® Satus - Short 10/2 bytes per direction n DISOMAT Satus Extended 56/60 bytes per direction Flexible ID mechanism n Select the coupling card used (VPB020/VPB8020) when configuring the Profibus. n Select compartibility (DISOMAT T/DISOMAT Satus) n Select the configuration (see below) n

The following figure shows the valid constellations together with the gsd files to be used and wherever necessary the CFC modules.

n

Device type

DISOMAT T

Software version

All

DISOMAT Satus <4

4 and larger

Profibus-subassembly

VPB 20100

VPB 020

VPB 020

Short Standard 4 ID, no text

VPB 8020 DISOMAT T

DISOMAT Satus

4 ID, no text

Short Standard Extended

0 – 8 ID, no text

Compatibility Possible configurations

Short Standard Extended

GSD file

DSV4 6712

DSA1 0A97

DSA1 0A97

DSV4 6712

DSA1 0A97

CFC module

DISOMAT T, Tplus

—-

—-

DISOMAT T, Tplus

DISCO_P7


29



6.3.1 DISOMAT® Satus standard configuration (“Standard Process Image” VPB020 and VPB8020, Mode DISOMAT T) DP read register (32 bytes) Object Index

Byte

Contents

0

0-3

Pending faults

1

4-5

Input contacts 1-4

2

6-9

Output contacts 1-4

3

10-11

Undefined

4

12-15

Net (INT32)

[g]

5

16-19

Tare (INT32)

[g]

6

20-21

Scale status

7

22-25

Feed rate dg/dt (Float) [kg/s]

8

26-29

Batch actual value (Float) [kg]

9

30-31

Undefined

Pending faults The number assigned to the fault message of a pending fault. Refer to the table in the chapter on ‘Event Messages’ Input contacts The date indicates the positions of the bit-coded input contacts. bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4 bit n = 0 : contact low bit n = 1 : contact high Output contacts The outputs are also compiled bit coded in a datum as per the inputs. bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4 bit n = 0 : contact low bit n = 1 : contact high Scale status, bit-coded (low byte) UNDERFLOW bit 0, scale is in the underflow OVERFLOW bit 1, scale is in the overflow Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, scale is precisely zero RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times resolution of weight is switched on INVALID bit 5, weight is invalid Tare_SET bit 6, scale is tared NO_MOTION_STATE bit 7, scale is in no-motion state ADJUSTMENT JUMPER bit 10, jumper in the adjustment position

30

BV-H2331GB / 0731




DP write register (22 bytes) Object index

Byte

Contents

0

0-1

Unused

1

2-3

Scale commands

2

4-5

Undefined

3

6-7

Set data processing contacts

4

8-9

Data processing contacts

5

10 - 11

Unused

6

12 - 13

Unused

7

14 - 17

Unused

8

18 - 21

Unused

Scale commands bit 1 : Clear tare bit 0 : Tare bit 2 : Zero setting This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then changed to 1. “set data processing contacts“ and ”data processing contacts“ There are 4 data processing contacts Bit 0 corresponds to contact 1 and bit 3 corresponds to contact 4 If a bit is 1 in the Set Data Processing Contacts space, the contact is set as per the value in the Data Processing Contacts space. Example: Data processing contacts:

0x0a = 00001010

Set data processing contacts:

0x09 = 00001001

Contact 1 is set to LOW and contact 4 is set to HIGH. 1 in bit 1 of the Data Processing Contacts space does not have any meaning. In DISOMAT® Satus, the physical output contacts are set if they were configured to From Data Processing in the configuration.


31



6.3.2 Configuration DISOMAT® Satus-Short (“Configuration Short Process Image”,VPB020 and VPB8020, Mode DISOMAT T) DP read register (10 bytes) Object index

byte

Content

0

0-3

Gross weight in kg (IEEE float)

1

4-7

Tare in kg (IEEE float)

2

8-9

Scale status

Scale status, bit-coded (low byte) UNDERFLOW bit 0, the scale is in the underflow OVERFLOW bit 1, the scale is in the overflow Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, the scale is precisely zero RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times the resolution if the weight is switched on INVALID bit 5, the weight is invalid Tare_SET bit 6, the scale is tared NO-MOTION STATE bit 7, the scale is in no-motion state DP write register (2 bytes) Object index

Byte

Content

1

0-1

Scale commands

Scale commands Bit 1 : Clear tare Bit 0 : Tare Bit 2 : zero setting This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then changed to 1.

32

BV-H2331GB / 0836




6.3.3 Konfiguration Satus-Extended (only VPB8020, Mode DISOMAT T) DP read register (32 bytes)

Object index

byte

Contents

0

0-3

Pending faults

Alternative reading data

1

4-5

Entry contacts 1 - 4

2

6-9

Output contacts 1 - 4

3

10 - 11

Batch number

4

12 - 15

Net (INT32)

[g]

5

16 - 19

Tare (INT32)

[g]

6

20 - 21

Scale status

7

22 - 25

Feed rate dg/dt (float)

[kg/s]

8

26 - 29

Actual batch value (float)

[kg]

9

30 - 33

Residual Amount of batch (float)

[kg]

Adaptation Factor (float)

10

34 - 37

Current setpoint/last batch (float)

[kg]

Controller magnitude full-feed (float)

11

38 - 41

Setpoint for next batch (float)

[kg]

Control magnitude for dribble feed (float)

12

42 - 45

Level gross (float)

[kg]

Time for dribble speed of ramp (float)

13

46 - 49

Batch sum (balance sheet) (float)

14

50 - 53

Correction Amount (main contact) (float)

[kg]

Neg. tolerance (float)

15

54 - 55

Batching status

Pre-contact (float)

Alternative reading data The alternative content of bytes 26-53 can be adjusted via bit 15 of the accept command and it is the readback tool for the component parameters set. Batching status Bit 0 : feed unit ON Bit 1 : batch active Bit 2 : full feed Bit 3 : dribble feed Bit 4 : filling active Bit 5 : discharging active Bit 6 : open flap (for discharging or filling; identical with digital output for flap OPEN) Bit 7 : LOW / GIW type Bit 8 : material quantity (Note: initiate discharging or filling) Bit 9 : batching time > Max. Bit 10 : time the flap is open> Max. Bit 11 : except pos. tolerance Bit 12 : except neg. tolerance Bit 13 : spare Bit 14 : spare


33



DP writing index (60 bytes) Object index

byte

Contents

0

0-1

Unused

1

2-3

Scale commands

2

4-5

Accept commands

3

6-7


4

8-9

Data processing contacts

5

10 - 11

Command

6

12 - 13

Value 1 (INT16)

7

14 - 17

Value 2 (INT 32)

8

18 - 21

Value 3 (INT 32)

9

22 - 25

Batch setpoint (float)

10

26 - 29

Pre-contact (float)

[kg]

11

30 - 33

Correction Amount (float)

[kg]

12

34 - 37

Adaptation factor (float)

[kg]

13

38 - 41

Controller Magnitude for full feed (float)

[mA]

14

42 - 45

Controller Magnitude for dribble feed (float)

[mA]

15

46 - 49

Time of dribble feed ramp (float)

[s]

16

50 - 53

Pos. tolerance (float)

[kg]

17

54 - 57

Neg. tolerance (float)

[kg]

18

58 - 59

Batching commands

[kg]

The dosage can be guided via charging commands in addition to the scale commands of bytes 2/3 already described. This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then changed to 1. Charging commands Bit 0: start Bit 1: stop Bit 2: cancel Bit 3: clear batching total Bit 4: start filling Bit 5: stop filling Bit 6: start discharging Bit 7: stop discharging Accept commands (bits 0-8 only go into effect when changing from 0 to 1) Bit 0: accept pre-contact Bit 1: accept correction amount Bit 2: accept adaptation value Bit 3: accept controller magnitude for full feed Bit 4: accept controller magnitude for dribble feed Bit 5: accept time for dribble feed ramp Bit 6: pos. Accept tolerance value bit 7: neg. Accept tolerance value Bit 8: accept setpoint Bit 9 - 14: spare Bit 15: request component parameters (refer to read-only data) statically Note: Values marked (float) are floating point numbers in the IEEE 7544 byte format

34

BV-H2331GB / 0836




MSB

LSB

Vorz/Exponent

Mantissa 1

Mantissa 2

Mantissa 3

The transmission begins at the same time as the MSB. For example: Specifications for the master —-> slave byte 0– 1 00 00 byte 2– 3 00 00 byte 4– 5 01 00 accept setpoint byte 6 —- 21 00 —- 00 byte 22 – 25 41 20 00 00 setpoint: byte 26 – 29 3e 4c cc cd pre-contact: byte 30 - 33 3d 4c cc cd correction amount byte 34 - 37 3f 00 00 00 adaptation value byte 38 —- 59 00 —- 00

10 kg 0,2 kg 0,05 kg 0,5

Note: Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 —> 01 00: DISOMAT only accepts the batch setpoint. Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 —> 01 07: DISOMAT accepts the setpoint and also the pre-contact, correction amount and adaptation value. Process image slave —-> master byte 0–3 00 00 00 00 byte 4–5 00 00 byte 6–9 00 00 00 00 byte 10 – 11 00 27 byte 12 – 15 00 00 1f 66 byte 16 – 19 00 00 00 00 byte 20 – 21 00 80 byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

22 – 25 26 – 29 30 – 33 34 – 37 38 – 41 42 – 45 46 – 49 50 – 53 54 – 55

b9 ca d6 19 40 9f 8e 25 3c 63 b4 00 40 9f ff ff 41 20 00 00 41 00 b5 17 43 6e c9 78 3d 30 56 4d 00 00 00 00

batch number 39 net (int) tare (int) wagon status: scale is in the no-motion state dG/ dt: ca. 0.000 actual batch value: 4,986 kg residual batch quantity: 0,014 kg current setpoint/last batch: 5 kg setpoint for next batch: 10 kg level: 8,044 kg batching total: 238,787 kg correction amount: 0,043 kg batching status

6.3.4 Flexible ID Mechanism (VPB020 and VPB8020 + DISOMAT Satus) Refer to the BV-H2359 Manual for details


35

6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module

6.4


Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP) Since output contacts can be set via fieldbus interface and drives of feed units can be triggered , a communication failure has to be identified and the corresponding outputs have to be changed into the safe state. Monitoring is active when the set timeout > 0 and a fieldbus card is connected. If the connection to a fieldbus master fails, current batching is stopped after timeout and a fault message is issued. The fault message is automatically cleared after resuming the connection.

6.5

VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module This module can be attached to DISOMATs to interface it to the DeviceNet. The VCB 020 card has two bus connecting plugs. Both XC1 and XC3 plugs can be used in DISOMAT®. Pin no.. 1 2 3 4 5

0V CANShield (please lay on the cable inlet and not on the XC plug) CAN+ +24V

The bus address is set via software. Put jumper W160 onto 1-2. W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT. You can find more details on the Devicenet, in particular on the structure of transmitted data, in the Data Communication BV-H2359 manual.

36

BV-H2331GB / 0836



6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module

Fig. 21: Position of connectors and jumpers VCB 020


37

6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020)

6.6


DeviceNet module (VCB8020) As an option, the module can be fastened on the unit’s mainboard to provide an interface to the CAN-Bus with DeviceNet procedure.

XP3 XP1

1

VCB8020

W160 H120

5 4 3 2 1

1 2

FeldbuskartenVerbinder

3 4 5

H110

W100 DC/DC

1

vh233407.cdr

Bus termination n

The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By default, the resistances arenot activated (position 2-3).

Baud rate and bus addresses: n

Both values are set using parameters.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3.

XP1 1

2

3

4

5

Network Status LED Module Status LED

Front View

38

BV-H2331GB / 0836




Network Status (LED) Status

Indication

Off

Not online/ No power

Green

On-line, one or more connections are established

Flashing Green (1Hz)

Onl-ine, no connaections established

red

Critical link failure

Flashing Red (1 Hz)

One of more connection timed-out

Alternating Red/Green

Self test

Moduel Status LED Status

Indication

OFF

No power

Green

Operating in normal condition

Flashing Green (1Hz)

Missing or incomplete configutation, device needs commissioning

Red

Unreccoverable Faultst(s)

Flashing Red (1 Hz)

Recoverable (Fault(s)

Alternating Red/Greed

Self test

Plug assignment X20/XC3 Pin

Signal X20

3

Screening

4

CAN_H

2

CAN_L

1

V-

5

V+

Characteristics Disconnection

Optocoupler

Power supply

5V DC internal

Power supply

Max 250mA

Plug connector

Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm² Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm²


39




40

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Analog display

7

Analog display An optional simple display can be connected to DISOMAT® Satus that is triggered by the analog interface (4 – 20 mA). Although the display is entirely fed from the interface’s current, its load is so low that an analog PLC input can be fed without any problems (maximum external load: 250 Ω). The display has 3 1/2 digits n n n

The digits are 10 mm high It can be set with the DIP switch and potentiometer It can be combined with the 19" rack.

Connection and Configuration

Fig. 22:

The standard preset display shows triggering 0-1,000 at 4–20 mA. The display is completely readjusted in the order described below. 1. Turn the zero point R3 potentiometer and the R7 zone potentiometer to the right all the way to the catch. Set the SW4 –SW6 switches to OFF 2. The SW1 switch to ON (the end of the zone can be set between 650-1,350) 3. Trigger with 4 mA and set the display to 000 with the R3 potentiometer. 4. Trigger with 20 mA and set the display to 1000 with the R7 potentiometer. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as a check. 6. Set the desired decimal point with the SW4 – SW6 switches. SW6 ON 1 place behind the decimal point SW5 ON 2 places behind the decimal point SW4 ON 3 places behind the decimal point You can preset the display ranges with the SW1-SW3 switches.


41

Analog display SW1

SW2

SW3

4mA

20mA

OFF

OFF

OFF

000

to

1050 - 1999

ON

OFF

OFF

000

to

650 - 1350

OFF

ON

OFF

000

to

450 - 800

OFF

OFF

ON

000

to

300 - 500

ON

ON

ON

000

to

200 - 300

Note: You can easily specify 4 mA or 20 mA by issuing the setpoint via analog output. Set P12 of the scale control parameters to 4 (refer to Chapter 6.5.7) and use Disoplan or the TCLI command ES to select the setpoint.

42

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

8

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN The DISOPLAN PC program is available for conveniently configuring and parametering the DISOMAT family scales The instruments that can be interfaced now are: – DISOMAT Opus – DISOMAT Satus – DISOBOX – DISOMAT Tersus Acceptable operating systems are: n WINDOWS XP n WINDOWS 2000 n WINDOWS Vista You can do the following with DISOPLAN: n Assign subscriber addresses to the serial bus n Configure interfaced instruments n Displaying the scale weights and operating the scale n Display group and channel weights and their status (only with DISOBOX ) n Edit the language files and load into DISOMAT n Read out the entire system configuration (back-up) and store in the PC n Load stored data into a DISOMAT (restore) for fast substitute system set-up. NOTE: Access to the DISOPLAN functions is administered via license levels. They range from the standard operator to the instrument developer. This is the reason why some of the functions shown in this manual may not be visible or accessible in other installations. DISOPLAN installation is self-explanatory.


43

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN IMPORTANT NOTE: – –

– – – –

There are some unit parameters that cannot be set via DISOPLAN menu item in the DISOMAT-Satus firmware version combination: VWW20900-04 with DISOPLAN version 5. Please use the Control Terminal function to configure these items. Follow these steps: Start the control terminal main menu/display/control terminal) Navigate with the arrow keys to menu item 41 (down/right/right/down). Start password input (ENTER) Password 618349 (ENTER) Navigate with the arrow keys to the menu items.

This affects the items: – – –

“Calibration analog output” menu item 435 Fieldbus 4334 Option management/release Ethernet-IP) 5d

Data acquisition (OK) is located in the control terminal on the END button.t. Please leave the menu tree by repeatedly pressing the Arrow Up button before you close the control terminal.

44

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.1

8.1 Serial connection

Serial connection You can connect these system with the following interfaces

DISOMAT® Tersus

S3

DISOMAT® Satus

S1

DISOMAT® Opus

S1

DISOBOX

S1

9-pole HD-plug (use a null modem cable)

Use the V052410.B01 cable or make cables according to the connection diagram in the system manual.

Matching cables are included in DISOPLAN-CD. You can connect DISOPLAN at any time if the interface is not occupied by other systems. You have to turn the system on and off if the interface is otherwise occupied (for instance, with a secondary display) and you can start set-up operation with DISOPLAN within the first minute after turning it on. Turn DISOPLAN on and off after ending it and its resumes normal operation after one minute. You can activate set-up operation in menu item 5C Start DISOPLAN at any time if the system has a display and keyboard. All systems can also be configured via Ethernet (the VET 020 option card has to be installed on DISOBOX). This allows access to the system at any time, but the configuration of the PC used has to allow access to the system’s network address. The following figure shows the start screen of DISOPLAN:


45

8.1 Serial connection


Connected systems are identified by the Search for New Systems function and the following series of figures shows how to communicate via Ethernet (there is a different process with serial communication).

The figure below shows an example of how DISOMAT Opus is found.

Other detected device types are displayed in the window with different symbols. To configure a system, either click the symbol twice or branch off to the specific system via Display Selection.

46

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.2

8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus

DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus If you start configuring DISOMAT from the DISOPLAN start screen, you come to the following overview field where you can call up the most important functions directly:

Before starting configuration, you have to use the Enter Password function to set the correct operating privilege. You can find details on the structure of privileges in each operating manual. IMPORTANT: The current passwords in the system are used (they may differ from the factory values given in the manual). –

This does not apply to DISOMAT Satus.


47

8.3 Parametrization and calibration

8.3


Parametrization and calibration You can use the settings symbol to get to instrument configuration. You can set some important system parameters directly in the window shown in the following figure. They are: Function variant - see below Link function blocks (only DISOMAT Tersus) - refer to the BVH2317 Manual Fieldbus communication IP configuration Create a printing pattern Specific national settings - see below Edit language - see below

–

You can use the Parameter function to arrive at setting all system parameters.

When you load the data, it shows the internal menu tree of DISOMAT as shown. It offers all instrument parameters and functions in a transparent fashion for editing and executing. Since all of the functions have been explained in the BV-H2313 Operating Manual, we shall not go into them in detail here.

48

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

Fig. 24:

8.4

Scale Scales parameters. The best place to set the calibration and scales parameters is in the menu “Scales display / Parameters”. The scales can also be set in this menu under the “Set” sub-menu.

Fig. 23:


49

8.4 Scale

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN Setting the Calibration Parameters

The scales can be configured in the “Parameters / Calibration Parameters” menu. Details on the parameters can be found in the BVH2313 instruction manual.

50

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

8.4.1 The Unit parameter Display:

Unit kg

Selection:

t - tonnes kg - kilogram (= preset) g - gram lb - Pound N - Newton kN - Kilo-Newton

Function:

This parameter sets the unit of weight in your DISOMAT. This holds true for inputting all parameters (such as pre-contact or main contact) and for the weight display (base position).

8.4.2 Final Value parameter Display:

Final Value [current dim.]

600,000

Input:

Any values in the range of 0.1 to 9000000 preset = 600,000

Function:

This parameter defines final value of the scale. This is the final value of the largest range with the multiple-division or multiple-range scale. Important: The Scale Interval parameter is linked directly to the Final Value parameter and both values have to fit together.

8.4.3 The Scale Interval parameter Display:

Scale interval [current dim.] 0.200

Input:

Values in the range from 0.001 to 1000 preset = 0,200

Function:

This parameter defines the scale interval and therefore the part number of the scale.

Remarks:

The scale interval defines the part number of the scale along with the final value parameter. part number = final value/scale interval Scale intervals are only possible in modules of 1, 2 and 5. If the scale interval entered is not realistic, you receive a event message ‘W1211:scale interval wrong’.


51

8.4 Scale


8.4.4 No motion difference parameter Display:

No motion difference 1d

Selection:

0d; 1d; 2d; 4d; preset = 1d selection in scale intervals

Function:

This parameter defines when the scale identifies the no-motion state along with the no motion time parameter . The scale identifies the no-motion state when the readings measured in the no motion time do not differ from the last reading measured any more than the no motion difference.

Remarks:

You can key in the no motion time under the Scale Parameter menu item.

8.4.5 Zero setting range parameter Display:

Zero setting range 4%

Selection:

0%; 2%; 4%; 10%; 20%; preset = 4%

Function:

Along with the final value parameter, this parameter defines the range within the scale can be set to zero. It is entered in % of the final value’.

Remarks:

The weighing range is not narrowed down by zero setting. The zero setting range is asymmetrical to the zero point: 2% = -0.5 .... +1.5 4% = -1.0 .... +3.0 10% = -2.5 .... +7.5 20% = -10.0 .... +10.0

52

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

8.4.6 Overrange parameter Display:

Overrange 9d

Selection:

100%; 101%; 102%; 110%; 9d preset = 9d selected in % or in d (digit). 9d has to be selected with legal-for-trade scales. The digital parts or the smallest possible resolution of the weighing range is called digit (d). This value corresponds to the scale interval of the scale.

Function:

This parameter defines what weight is shown above the final value in relation to the final value. If the weight on the scale is greater than the overrange, the symbol “oooooo” is shown instead of a weight provided that the parameter ‘legal-for-trade’=yes. If ‘legal-for-trade=no’, the overrange is shown by the symbol T symbol; the weightis still displayed.

8.4.7 F-mechanical parameter Display:

F-mechanical

Input:

any values in the range of 0.1 to 99999 preset = 1,00 input without dimensions

Function:

This ‘mechanical factor’ includes the mechanical design of the scale (i.e., transmission, lifting and load sharing ratios). F-mechanical = load on the scale / load on the load cell

Remarks:

With scales without load transmission, the factor 1.00. value < 1,0000: load reduction value > 1,0000: load transmission


1.00

53

8.4 Scale

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN Examples for ‘F-mechanical’: A bin weigher is placed on 1 load cell and 2 fixed bearings. If the load cell and the two fixed bearings are arranged to be symmetric to rotation around a circular bin with its centre of gravity in the middle (load support to 3 x 120 degrees), the load is distributed at 1/3: 33,33 % Festlager Pivot Palier Supporto fisso Fmech =

33,33 % Wägezelle Load cell Capteur Cella pesatrice

100 % 33,33 %

=3

33,33 % Festlager Pivot Palier Supporto fisso

Fig. 25:

You get different results with a rectangular bin or a circular bin in a symmetrical weighing frame (even if it is square and completely symmetrical):

50 % Wägezelle Load cell Capteur Cella pesatrice

25 % Festlager Pivot Palier Supporto fisso Behälter Hopper Récipient Recipiente

Fmech =

100 % 50 %

=2

25 % Festlager Pivot Palier Supporto fisso

Fig. 26:

The reason for this load distribution is the fact that the distance of

• the load cell (1/2 side length) and • the fixed bearings (1/2 of a diagonal) to the bin’s centre of gravity differ; that means that the three bearing points do not form a triangle with sides of equal length. This gives a value of 2 for theoretical calibration. The load of the load cells has to be correctly applied for their design. In contrast to the two simple borderline cases shown here (rectangular bin with non-symmetrical load distribution), it either has to be derived from a precise geometric analysis or by weighing the medium (liquid) put into the bin in advance (which is preferable). IMPORTANT: Every calibration done with weights has to ensure that a centre of gravity exactly in the middle.

54

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

8.4.8 F-adjustment parameter Display:

F-adjustment 1.00

Input:

any values in the range of 0.9 to 1.1 preset = 1 input without dimensions This ‘adjustment factor’ takes in scattering in the indicators of the load cells or the overal indicator of the scale mechanism. The system ascertains the parameter value during the zone adjustment (Refer to menu item ‘4453:range’). ‘F-adjustment’ = test weight / weight shown

8.4.9 Load cell nominal load parameter Display:

Load cell nominal load 1000kg

Input always in [kg]:

1 - 999999 preset = 1000

Function:

This parameter gives the nominal load of the load cells used. If a eine load cell is loaded with the nominal load, it gives voltage as a measuring signal at a feed voltage of 1V that corresponds to its load cell factor (parameter ‘WZ_K [mV/V]’ ).

Remarks:

Always enter in kg. Load cells with nominal load information in other units has to be converted to kg.

8.4.10 Load cell number parameter Display:

Load cell number 1

Input:

any values in the range of 1 to 20 preset = 1 input without dimensions

Function:

This parameter gives the number of load cells of the scale. This does not count any fixed bearings.

8.4.11 Load cell indicator parameter DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 © Schenck Process

55

8.4 Scale

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN Display:

WZ-K [mV/V] 2.85

Input:

any values in the range of 0.1 to 10 preset = 2,85

Function:

The load cell indicator (nominal indicator) states what output voltage (measuring signal) a load cell supplies depending upon the feed voltage if it is at its nominal load.

8.4.12 Dead weight parameter Display:

Dead weight +

0.00kg

Input:

any values in the range of 0 to ± 999999 preset = 0,00

Function:

Dead weight is the weight of the scale mechanism (the weight of the empty scale) that loads the load cells in addition to the useful load, i.e., the material to be weighed. The dead weight is calculated at dead weight adjustment and keyed in as the Dead Weight calibration parameter. It is one of the two parameters that does not have to be keyed in along with the ‘adjustment factor’. The correct value only has to be keyed manually for the dead weight with mathematical adjustment.

The “legal for trade” parameter has not significance for DISOMAT® Satus.

56

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

After completing the first parameter block, a second block opens automatically

Fig. 27:

8.4.13 Scale code parameter Display:

Scale code Scale 1(for example)

Input:

Any text, max. 7 digits

Function:

The operator uses this parameter to define the name of the scale.

8.4.14 Class parameter Display:

Class Handelswg. Kl. III

Selection:

Handelswg. Kl.III; rough scale Kl.IIII; SWA; user-defined minimum load

Function:

This parameter defines the accuracy class of the scale. This changes the minimum load depending upon the application.

8.4.15 User-defined minimum load parameter Display:

User-defined minimum load [current dim]

0.00

Input:

The minimum load of the scale in the current dimension preset = 0

Function:

This parameter defines the ‘min= ‘ value of the electronic descriptive plate if user-defined minimum load is selected in the Class parameter]___ ‘ getroffen wurde.


57

8.4 Scale

Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN Other data are set under parameter/scale parameters, in particular the filter times.

8.4.16 Switch filter parameter Display:

Switch filter 0.20s

Selection:

0.02 s; 0.04 s; 0.10 s; 0.20 s; 0.40 s; 1.00 s preset = 0.20 s

Function:

Limit monitoring. This parameter defines the filter time in seconds for the weights used by the Fast Comparators and for batching. The longer the filter time, the more sluggish is scale monitoring. The value to be set is dictated by the external vibratory influences where the scale is installed (such as mechanical vibrations).

8.4.17 Display filter parameter

58

Display:

Display filter 0.47s

Selection:

0.06 s; 0.10 s; 0.15 s; 0.22 s; 0.33 s; 0.47 s; 0.68 s; 1.00 s; 1.50 s; 2.00 s; 3.30 s; 4.70 s preset = 0.47 s

Function:

This parameter defines the filter time for weights shown in the display. Function blocks, data processing transmission and no-motion state monitoring also use the filtered weight. The longer the filter time, the more sluggish is the scale display. The value to be set is dictated by the external vibratory influences where the scale is installed (such as mechanical vibrations)..

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

8.4.18 No motion time parameter Display:

No motion time 1.0s

Input:

any values in the range of 0.0 to 10.0 preset = 1.0

Function:

This parameter defines the no motion difference along with the calibration parameter when the scale identifies the no-motion state. rule of thumb: no motion time ≥ 0.8 * display filter The system identifies no-motion state when the readings measured in no motion time do not differ from the last reading measured any more than the no motion difference .The no-motion state is shown in the weight display with the >< symbol.

8.4.19 Zero tracking parameter Display:

Zero tracking No

Selection:

No = off (preset) yes = on Auto = zero setting *)

Function:

This parameter defines whether the scale is automatically reset to zero within the zero setting range. The following conditions apply to zero tracking: 1.

The scale has to be in no motion for at least 1 second. (refer to the conditions under the No Motion Time parameter)

2.

The weight may not differ from the current zero point by any more than ± ½ d.

3.

The weight may not have changed in the last second by any more than 0.5 d/s.

4.

The new zero point has to be within the zero setting range (refer to Zero Setting Range parameter). Any zero point shifts beyond this will be shown as weight.

*) If you select Auto, conditions 2 and 3 do not apply to negative weights.


59

8.4 Scale


8.4.20 Switch-over delay parameter Display:

Switch-over delay 1.0s

Input:

any values in the range of 0.0 to10.0 preset = 1,0

Function:

This parameter defines the switch-over delay between the two ranges with the multiple-range scale/multiple-division cale. This keeps the scale from switching to another range from a brief impact of weight such as putting on the weighing material. It is switched over when no-motion state or time has expired.

Remarks:

Switch-over delay is only important for the multiple-division or multiple-range scale.

8.4.21 Filter time dG/dt parameter Display:

Filter time dG/dt [s]

2.00

Input:

Any values in the range of 0 to 30,000 preset = 2,00

Function:

This parameter defines filter time for the weight change display

8.4.22 Dead weight adjustment (adjustment / dead weight) The dead weight is the constant weight of a scale design (such as the empty bin and weighbridge) that loads the load cells (refer to the Dead Weight calibration parameter).

The term dead weight does not have anything to do with the Tare function.

Make sure that the scale does not have a load. The systenm uses this menu item to calculate the Dead Weight parameter and keys in the value. This weight will be subtracted from the reading in future so that the actual weight is shown on the scale.

8.4.23 Range adjustment (adjustment/range The system uses the weight keyed in and the weight measured to calculate the adjustment factor and keys it into the parameter list (refer to the F-adjustment calibration parameter).

60

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.4 Scale

8.4.24 Linearisation (adjustment/linearisation correct (25%, 50%, 75% of the final value of the range) to ± 9.9 scale intervals. The dead weight and range of the scale have to be adjusted before linearisation

Calculating the characteristic curve Determine characteristic deviation in each support point and enter value.

• Apply 25% of range as calibration weight. • Read the actual weight and make a note of it. • Calculate the correction in scale intervals (scale interval e is on the upper left-hand side of the display) according to the formula: Correction = (set weight - actual weight) / scale interval (the scale interval of the large range with MT/MB scales)

• Key in the correction in scale intervals under the ‘4452:linearisation’ menu item.

• Check deviation. Repeat if necessary. Resume from next support point (50%, 75%). Example calculation You have a scale with a 600 kg weighing range and a verification scale interval of 0.2 kg (i.e., with 3,000 parts). The scale shows a value of 300.28 with linearisation at 50% (equalling 300 kg) with the support point. To linearise the scale, you have to calculate the correction in scale intervals (not in kg) according to the formula above and key it in: correction = (300.00 kg - 300.28 kg) / 0.2 kg = -0.28 / 0.2 = -1.4 The correction value to be entered is -1.4.


61

8.6 Loading language

8.5


Function Variants You can use this menu item to activate and parameter predefined configurations for the DISOMAT. You can find details in Chapters 9 and 10.

8.6

Loading language

Abb. 28:

A pre-prepared language file can be loaded into the DISOMAT in the “Maintenance / Language” menu.. Select “Standard“ and the desired language (Spanish in the example). Confirming with “OK” will load the new language.Then activate this language under National Settings / Language Loaded.

62

BV-H2331GB / 0836



8.7

8.9 Product Service Internet

Backup and Restore The items concerning saving data can be found in the ”Maintenance“ menu: – –

8.8

Data security: reading out the program and data from DISOBOX into a back-up file. This can also be called up directly from the main menu. Data restoration: restoring data from the back-up file into the instrument

Loading flash Loading a new software version. Loading is registered in the instrument (logfile)

8.9

Product Service Internet The code issued under Information / Product Service Internet enables you to download current information on DISOBOX such as software updates or the latest manuals.


63

8.9 Product Service Internet



64

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter

9

Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter DISOMAT ® Satus provides a signal exchange via analog output and binary inputs/outputs in the weighing transmitter mode along with data transmission via serial interface or fieldbus . Do the following to configure this mode: Start die Function Variants function from the main screen of the DISOPLAN configuration program and select the variant of weighing transmitter. The following configuration screen opens

Fig. 29: Analog output block Analog output

OFF

4-20 mA

Analog source block Source

Gross

MIN reference value

0

This block selects what size is issued on the analog output and how it is scaled. The following are optional sizes and reference values: source Dimension for Min/Max gross: Dimension of the scale net: Dimension of the scale dG/dt: Dimension of the scale / h fieldbus: none (the IEEE value of the PLS-AIn is issued) controller magnitude: not available in Opus; 0 is always issued setpoint: Dimension of the scale actual value %: Percent of setpoint actual value dim: Dimension of the scale residual value %: Percent of setpoint residual value dim: Dimension of the scale next setpoint: Dimension of the scale

MAX reference value 0 Output blocks ... output 4 If an analog signal is used (such as gross), a comparator is created with hysteresis on this signal via the two ON and OFF parameters. PLS-AOut block Reference value

20

= reference value Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the PLS analog output 1. MAX


65

Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter The IN1, IN2 and IN3 inputs are permanently occupied with the Set Tare, Clear Tare and Zero Setting functions in the Weighing Transmitter operating type.

66

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Batching with DISOMAT® Satus

10 Batching with DISOMAT® Satus When batching, a certain quantity of material is conveyed into a bin or discharged from a bin. A batch can be started, interrupted and continued or cancelled and the setpoint specified dictates the feed amount. Both full feed and dribble feed contacts and an analog controller magnitude signal of 0(4) - 20 mA are provided to trigger the feed unit. All commands, status information and readings for controlling a batch are available via serial interface. The start, stop, cancel and acknowledge fault commands can also be specified via digital inputs. If the commands for control come via fieldbus, it makes sense to set the Timeout parameter in the bus coupling unequal to zero so that DISOMAT® Satus monitors the coupling to the master. If data transmission is malfunctioning, feeding is put into the correct state. NOTE: You cannot use the fieldbus to control batching via VPB020 and VCB020 fieldbus cards. Instead, use a DSIOMAT T control electronics unit.


67


10.1 Filling Scale

10.1 Filling Scale The filling scale conveys a specified set quantity from a storage bin into a weighing bin. Discharge weighing

Surge hopper

DISOMAT T

DO DO

Batch active

MAX control level

MIN control level Fieldbus

M

0-20mA Full feed

Fill unit

Dribble feed

WZ

PMS

AO DO DO

vh2331_27.cdr

Fig. 30:

You can define different batching functions depending on how the scale control parameters are set (refer to Chapter 6.5.7 ): n Simple feeding while checking whether the desired batching quantity fits into the weighing bin. n Automatically emptying the weighing bin at the beginning or end of a batch. n Multiple-feeding with manual or automatic emptying of the weighing bin when it reaches the maximum filling quantity (MAX control level). n It empties to the minimum filling quantity (MIN control level) and the duration of the emptying process is monitored.

68

BV-H2331GB / 0836



10.1 Filling Scale

Do the following to configure the filling scale: n

Start the Function Variants function from the start screen of the DISOPLAN configuration program and select the Filling Scale variant.

Fig. 31:

The parameters have the following meaning: Analog output block Analog output

OFF

4-20 mA

Analog source block Actual value of dim: Source

Full

You can use this block to select what quantity should be issued on the analog output and how it is scaled. The potential quantities and reference values are: Source Dimension for Min/Max Gross: Dimension of the scale Net: Dimension of the scale dG/dt: Dimension of the scale/ h Fieldbus: none; the IEEE value of the PLS-AIn is issued Controller magnitude: not available in Opus; output is always 0 Setpoint: Dimension of the scale Actual value %: Percent of the setpoint Actual dim.: Dimension of the scale Residual value %: Percent of the setpoint Residual value dim: Dimension of the scale Next setpoint: Dimension of the scale

Output 4 block This is where you can define the function of binary output 4 not used by batching. If an analog signal is used (such as gross), a comparator is created with hysteresis on this signal via the two ON and OFF parameters..

Discharge Weighing block


69


10.1 Filling Scale Single feeding:[BR] Setpoint > MaxFillWgt.

The maximimum weight in the weighing bin

Max.Fill Weight

0.0

Fill weight

0.0

Optimization

No

Start/stop optimization (Yes/No)

No-Motion Time

20.0

The maximum time it waits for no-motion state after feeding.

Timeout

0.0

0 sec:

Tare memory is not cleared after feeding > 0 sec Tare memory is cleared after a time entered and it can start again after this time.

Settling time:

0.0

Time that can be set between the main contact dropping (dribble feed) and tolerance check

Automatic filling/discharging

OFF

This parameter defines DISOMAT’s behaviour when emptying the filling scale off: It is not automatically emptied. before start + manual release: The scale is emptied if it is higher than Maximum Filling (material data) before starting and it does not start automatically. before start + auto release: As above, but it is automatically started after emptying after ending: It is emptied after feeding if the weight > Maximum Filling multiple + manual release: This is used when the setpoint is greater than the scale capacity. The system stops at Maximum Filling, empties and waits for manual release again. multiple + auto release: As above, but with automatic restart

block ‘PLS-AOut’ Reference value

70

20

= MAX reference value

BV-H2331GB / 0836

Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the PLS analog output 1.



10.2 Dispatch Scale

10.2 Dispatch Scale The dispatch scale dispatches a specified set quantity from the weighing bin. Discharge weighing

Surge hopper

DISOMAT T

DO DO

Batch active

MAX control level

MIN control level Fieldbus

M

0-20mA Full feed

Fill unit

Dribble feed

WZ

PMS

AO DO DO

vh2331_27.cdr

Fig. 32:

You can define different batching functions depending on how the scale control parameters are set (refer to Chapter 6.5.7 ): : n Simple feeding while checking whether there is sufficient material in the weighing bin for the desired batching quantity. n Automatically filling the weighing bin at the beginning or end of a batch n Multiple-feeding with manual or automatic filling of the weighing bin when it reaches the minimum filling quantity (MIN control level). n It is filled to the maximum filling quantity (MAX control level) where the duration of the filling process is monitored.


71


10.2 Dispatch Scale

Fig. 33:

If the weight signal is invalid (during the intake phase after voltage ON, with cable break and if there are readings outside of the valid measuring range), an on command is rejected or current feeding is stopped.

72

BV-H2331GB / 0836



10.2 Dispatch Scale

Fig. 34:

Discharge Weighing block Fill weight

0.0

Optimization

No

Start/stop optimization (Yes/No)

No-Motion Time

20.0

The maximum time it waits for no-motion state after feeding.

Timeout

0.0

0 sec: Tare memory is not cleared after feeding > 0 sec Tare memory is cleared after a time entered. Restart only possible after this time..

Settling time:

0.0

The time that can be set between the main contact dropping (dribble feed) and tolerance check

Automatic filling/discharging

OFF

This parameter defines DISOMAT’s behaviour when emptying the filling scale off: It is not automatically emptied. before start + manual release: The scale is emptied if it is higher than Maximum Filling (material data) before starting and it does not start automatically. before start + auto release: As above, but it is automatically started after emptying after ending: It is emptied after feeding if the weight > Maximum Filling multiple + manual release: This is used when the setpoint is greater than the scale capacity. The system stops at Maximum Filling, empties and waits for manual release again. multiple + auto release: As above, but with automatic restart wie oben, aber mit automatischem Wiederanlauf

PLS-AOut block Reference value

20

= MAX reference value

Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the PLS analog output 1.


73


10.3 Materiald data

10.3 Materiald data DISOMAT® Satus administers two sets of sorting data that apply the material parameters of the feeder. The sorting data are divided up into two blocks and set under Setting/Sorting/Sorting Data 1 or Sorting Data 2.

Fig. 35:

Max fill level: Min fill level: Prefill value: Pre-contact Main contact:

It is emptied when it is above this value or it is refilled to this value. It is refilled when it is below this value or it is emptied to this value. It is filled to this value in dribble feed (splashing liquid)

Switching from full to dribble feed or turning off dribble feed (depending on the setpoint) Plus tolerance: There is a fault message if the fed value is more than PLUS above the setpoint. MINUS tolerance: It is refilled if the value is more than MINUS below the setpoint. Optimization factor: Discrepancies from the setpoint are weighed with this factor to calculate the new main contact. Optimization = 0 the main contact is not refilled. Refeeding pulse length: This is the length of the refeeding pulse Maximum feeding time Max. discharge/filling times: Monitoring time behaviour.

74

BV-H2331GB / 0836



10.3 Materiald data

Fig. 36:

Full: Dmax ramp: dribble: Refeeeding:

Analog controller magnitude in full feed The time for switching from full/dribble Analog controller magnitude in dribble feed Analog controller magnitude in when refeeding


75


10.3 Materiald data


76

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Data processing interface

11.1 Preface

11 Data processing interface 11.1 Preface If you want DISOMAT® Satus to be connected to and remote-controlled by a higher-order data processing system (such as a process computer, PC or PLC), agreements have to be made on electrical connections (the physical level) and data exchange. You can integrate DISOMAT® Satus into local networks via serial interface. Data is exchanged based on the same protocols as in PLC that we will call procedures in this framework. Procedures 1) are rules agreed for establishing communication, formating and coding data including guaranteeing no-fault transmission. All procedures used for DISOMAT® Satus use messages to transmit or receive data blocks (messages) and acknowledging connections. All procedures have in common the immediate response behaviour: DISOMAT® Satus responds immediately to each message and transmits another message after execution with commands that might need a certain amount of time for execution (such as taring has to wait for the no-motion state). The data to be transmitted, known as utility data, are packed into data messages that also contain control and test characters. The control characters define the beginning and end of the data message. To do this, the utility data of the beginning and end character are limited or a message header states the entire length of the data message. The block check character (BCC) is used for data security because they enable the recipient to identify faults in data transmission. Data and utility data can be transmitted character-coded (such as 7-bit ASCII, 8-bit ASCII) or as binary sequences of bits.

Message:

Synchronisation

Data message

Opening

Head

Data security User data


Ending

77

11.3 Procedures


11.2 List of procedures The list below shows the procedures in DISOMAT® Satus for communicating via serial interfaces. Procedure refer to Chapter SCHENCK poll procedure (DDP 8785) 11.4.1 Siemens procedure 3964R 11.4.2 SIMATIC S5 control system 11.4.3 Teleperm M 11.4.4 J-Bus (Modbus) 11.4.5

11.3 Procedures 11.3.1 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) This procedure was developed from Schenck’s standard procedure and is used for special applications such as for regular weight display in the higher-level PC. The data processing partner begins communicating directly with the request message and DISOMAT responds with the appropriate data record. Neither side acknowledges or repeats if there is a fault. The block check mechanism ensures the transmission of the content of the data (identifying falsifiED messages). Note: Important response messages could be lost with this procedure, particularly the delayed response messages because it is not possible to say precisely when they will occur. e.g. The delayED message of the taring command (AT) only directly follows the first reaction with the no-motion state.

11.3.1.1 Procedure agreements

Message:

Synchronisation

Data message

Opening

Head

Data security User data

Ending

78

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

Opening N/a Data message Die data messages (Sende-, Anforderungs- und response messages) sind folgendermaßen aufgebaut: Utility data Acknowledge N/a Fault identification One of the two partners does not give feedback within a specified period. What to do with faults in data transmission If there are faults in data transmission, the sender tries to repeat the message several times. Synchronisation, monitoring periods and repetition: No Acknowledge response monitoring time ta : 5 seconds No opening No data repeats There are not any data processing faults on DISOMAT Satus® Data security and generating the block check character The block check character (BCC) is only formed as a longitudinal parity over all characters transmitted. The bits of the BCC supplements the number of bits of a bit number line (see below) to straight. The parity bit of the BCC is not formed according to this rule. It is generated out of the 7 bits of the BCC itself and the recipient generates the BCC code and compares it with the block check character received. For example: forming the block check character for data AB34.

S T X

A

B

3

4

E T X

B C C

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 1

Parity bit uneven

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

Bit number

(Longitudinal parity: even and BCC parity like character parity)


79

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface Transmitting priority DISOMAT Satus always has a low priority. If both communication partnerss want to open data traffic, DISOMAT Satus interrupts and goes into the receiving state.

11.3.1.2 Routine

Fig. 37:

For example: The data processing system transmits the command for ascertaining and transmitting weight data to DISOMAT with scale number 02. 02#TG#

DISOMAT responds directly with the data message. 02#TG#netto#tara#dg/dt#status#

80

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

11.3.2 Siemens procedure 3964R 11.3.2.1 Procedure agreements

Message:

Synchronisation

Data message

Opening

Head

User data

Data security Ending

The following characterises the individual components of data transmission, although the order of the components named is not meant as a temporal sequence. Opening The sender opens data transmission with the control characters Data message The data messages (transmission, request and response messages) are structured as following: utility data Acknowledge If data transmission is successful, the recipient acknowledges with and, with faulty data transmission, with . Fault identification The recipient acknowledges with or one of the two partners does not give feedback within a specified period. What to do with faults in data transmission If there are faults in data transmission, the sender tries to repeat the message several times. Repeat always begins when opened. Synchronisation, monitoring periods and repetition: n n n n n

Acknowledge monitoring time tq 2 seconds Response monitoring time ta 5 seconds Opening monitoring time te 2 seconds Max. number of repeating opening is 5 Max. number of repeating data is 5

Data security and generating the block check character refer to Chapter 11.4.1.1. Transmitting priority refer to Chapter 11.4.1.1.


81

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface Value range The value range of the characters of the data part transmitted extends over the entire 8 bits (i.e., from 00 to FF in hexadecimals). It is necessary to have special treatment for the final code of the utility data to reach this range of values if the sequence of bits of the character occurs accidentally in the utility data. A duplication is used here. Duplication The sender duplicates a in the utility data so that the recipient receives all of the utility data. When receiving two the recipient undoes duplication and treats it as a data byte. The routine with Request Data (Siemens procedure 3964R)

Fig. 38:

For example: The data processing system transmits the command for ascertaining and transmitting weight data to the DISOMAT® T with scale number 02...

82

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Data processing interface 1)

11.3 Procedures

Master (data processing)

Slave (DISOMAT)

Opening

02#TS#

2)


Acknowledge Request message

Acknowledge

Slave (DISOMAT)

Component of the procedure

Opening

Acknockledge 02#TS#s#

3)


Response message Acknowledge


Slave (DISOMAT)


Opening

Acknockledge 02#TS#netto#tara#status#

Response message Acknowledge

The data processing system transmits the command for transmitting the weights at the no-motion state (1). It immediately receives the response that the command was understood (2) (immediate response). Then, DISOMAT sends a delay ED message. If the command can be executed within a specified period (20 seconds), DISOMAT transmits the data requested in the delay ED message, in this case the weights (3). Otherwise, it sends the fault message after the specified period. (The value s in the response message is for the status of the data processing command) Note: The Immediate Response response is transmitted with Transmit Data and the second response message is not needed.

11.3.3 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512) Procedure RK512 differs from the SIEMENS 3964R procedure due to a message header 10 bytes long in front of the utility data where the target, command and length information are leyed in. To address a scale, n n

the data module (DB) has to be used for a scale number (0-255) and the message code has to be in the data word (DW).

The values are in the table of Chapter 7.6. The messages to DISOMATs go to directly neighbouring addresses.


83

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface For example:

“Query of weight at the no-motion state” to DW=6, “Periodic Request” to DW=7.

The address of the AD messages from DISOMAT is composed of a data module that can be entered and the data word (permanently assigned) for the message code. All data are transmitted ASCII-coded in SIMATIC S5 mode. The data module or data word is shown hexadecimal 0-FF.

11.3.3.1 Procedure agreements The procedure is 3964R. Refer to Chapter 11.4.2.1

11.3.3.2 Routine The description of the AD and ED message: An AD message (TRANSMIT message “Transmit Data”) consists of the message header (10 bytes) with the attached data. The response message has 4 bytes. An ED message (FETCH message “Request Data”) consists of the message header (10 bytes). The response message then consists of the message header abbreviated to 4 bytes and the requested data attached to it. The message header of the request message with SIMATIC S5 In SIMATIC S5 mode, all data in the message header are shown hexadecimal and all messages start with 2 zero bytes (Ø). Then the message type (ED or AD), data module address, data word address, data length and two coordination flags follow.

Byte number Meaning 1

0000

2 3

message type (ED or AD)

4 5

Data module address = scale number

6

Data word address = command code

7

Data length (1)

8 9

The coordination flag. The value FF is expected per byte in the interest of cutting down on configuration work while maintaining maximum data security (only with the ED messagesn).

10 11 ...

Data whose length is given in the 7th and 8th byte (at least 1 data word has to be transmitted).

The structure of the AD message The AD message using the example of clear tare (AC)

84

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

Request message (SIMATIC S5 DISOMAT)

Byte number

Meaning

1

0000

2 3

message type (ED or AD)

4 5

Data module address = scale number

6

Data word address = command code

7

Data length ( 1)

8 9

The coordination flag. The value FF is expected per byte in the interest of cutting down on configuration work while maintaining maximum data security (only with the ED messages).

10 11 ...

Data whose length is given in the 7th and 8th byte (at least 1 data word has to be transmitted).

The structure of the AD message The AD message using the example of clear tare (AC) request message (SIMATIC S5 DISOMAT)

Byte number

hex.

ASCII

Meaning

1

00

2

00

3

41

A

Command:

issue

4

44

D

Type:

data

5

01

Target:

DB = scale number, such as 1

6

02

Target:

DW = command code “AC”

7

00

Number:

8

01

Number: 1 DW

9

ff

Coordination flags (byte)

10

ff

Coordination flags (bit)

11

20

First data byte - blank

12

20

Second data byte - Blank


85

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface Response message (DISOMAT SIMATIC S5)

Byte num- hex. ber

Meaning

1

00

Fixed length 4 byte

2

00

3

00

4

xx

xx = fault code (00 = order ok; not equal to 00 = faults)

The structure of the ED message ED message using the example of Query Weight (TG) This command transmits the weights back to S5 without the no-motion state query. S5 can read the scale state from the scale status. For example: net = 123.5 kg, tare 100.0 kg and material flow 12.3 kg/second Request message (SIMATIC S5 —> DISOMAT)

86

Byte number

hex.

ASCII

Meaning

1

00

Order type

2

00

Order type

3

45

E

Command: input

4

44

D

Type: data

5

01

Source: DB = scale number, such as 1

6

05

Source: DW = command code “TG”

7

00

Number:

8

0e

Number: 14 DW

9

ff


10

ff


BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

Reaction message (DISOMAT —> SIMATIC S5)

Byte num ber

hex.

ASCII

Meaning

1

00

2

00

3

00

4

00

5

20

6

2d

-

7

31

1

Third data byte

8

32

2

Fourth data byte

Fault number (00 = no faults) First data byte

+

Second data byte

net

9

33

3

Fifth data byte

10

2c

,

Sixth data byte

11

35

5

Seventh data byte

+

12

23

#

Eighth data byte

-

13

20

Ninth data byte

+

14

20

15

31

1

Eleventh data byte

16

30

0

Twelfth data byte

17

30

0

Thirteenth data byte

18

2c

,

Fourteenth data byte

19

30

0

Fifteenth data byte

+

20

23

#

Sixteenth data byte

-

21

20

Seventeenth data byte +

22

20

Eighteenth data byte

23

20

Nineteenth data byte

24

31

1

25

32

2

Twenty-first data byte

26

2c

,

Twenty-second data byte

27

33

3

Twenty-third data byte +

28

23

#

Twenty-fourth data byte

29

63

c

Twenty-fifth data byte

-

scale status n1

30

30

0

Twenty-sixth data byte

-

scale status n0

31

23

#

Twenty-seventh data byte - separator

32

00

separator

Tenth data byte

tare

separator

Twentieth data byte

flow velocity kg/sec.

- separator

Twenty-eighth dummy byte


87

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface or if there is a fault: Byte number

hex.

Meaning

1

00

Fixed length 4 byte

2

00

3

00

4

xx

xx = fault code

11.3.3.3 Examples for SIMATIC S5 messages Set tare memory (AT) Send message AT Byte number

hex.

ASCII

Meaning

1

00

02

00

3

41

A

Command:

issue

4

44

D

Type:

data

5

01

Target:?DB = scale number z.B. 1

6

01

Target: “AT”

7

00

Number:

8

01

Number:

9

ff


10

ff


11

20

First data byte - blank

12

20

Second data byte - blank

DW = command code

1 DW

Reaction message direct

88

Byte number

hex.

Meaning

1

00

Fixed length 4 bytes

2

00

3

00

4

00

Fault code (00 = no faults)

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

Response message delayed After the weighing equipment has identified the no-motion state or the no-motion waiting period of 20 seconds is over, DISOMAT® Satus transmits the following message

Byte number

hex.

1

00

2

00

3 4 5

32

Target: DB can be adjusted in the menu tree, such as 50

6

54

Target: DW permanently assigned

7

00

Number:

8

01

Number:

9

ff


10

ff


11

30

0

First data byte – status

12

23

#

Second data byte - separator 1=

ASCII

Meaning

41

A

Command:

issue

44

D

Type:

data

1 DW

0= No OK

11.3.4 Teleperm M Siemens 3964R in Teleperm M-mode Teleperm M uses the procedure (and data head) such as the SIMATIC S5 RK512 (refer to Chapter 7.4.3). No character-orientated protocols are agreed to under Teleperm M. This is the reason why special messages are defined: n Data messages for transmitting floating point numbers in the Teleperm M format. n Bit-orientat ED messages that transmit the information to and from DISOMAT as bit spaces.


89

11.3 Procedures


11.3.4.1 Procedure agreements Message:

Synchronisation

Data message

Opening

Head

User data

Ending

Data security

10 bytes

(8 bits)

All numbers are shown as floating point numbers in the Teleperm M format. n n n n n

4 message types were defined for communication: Status message Actual value message Order message Setpoint message

All other messages that do not contain utility data also apply here.

Command

Type

Data word DW

Data length

dec.

hex.

dec.

Available in DISOMAT

hex

Status message

ES

93

5D

T

Actual value message

ED

94

5E

T

Command

Code

Request message

Response message

Status message

5D

(10 byte data head)

(4 bytes of data head) a a = 3 bytes of status information

Actual value message 5E

(10 byte data head)

(4 byte data head) z1z2z3z4 z1z2z3z4 = 4 floating point numbers

direct

90

BV-H2331GB / 0836

delayed



11.3 Procedures

11.3.5 J-Bus (Modbus) The J-Bus or the Modbus originally rolled out by Gould Modicon is a bus system particularly wide-spread in France that is especially customary when triggering peripheral systems with the PLC. These two bus systems differ with their physical connection. While the Modbus only allows RS485 4-wire interfaces, the J Bus is specified as RS485 2-wire and also allows power interfaces and RS232 as a point-to-point connection. DISOMAT® Satus uses RTU framing. J-Bus and Modbus are genuine bus systems. That means that all units are connected in parallel on the bus and a bus master settles the access authorisation to the bus (the master-slave principle). Three of the numerous functions provided by the J-Bus procedure are sufficient to produce the desired functionality: First type 3: Reading several words For data queries; identical to the ED messages of SIMATIC S5. For example: weight query Second type 6:

Writing a word For commands without data; identical to the AD messages of SIMATIC S5. Examples: Taring or start feeding.

Thitd type 16:

Writing several words For commands with data; Also identical to AD messages of SIMATIC S5; Examples: Specifying a setpoint and keying in manual tare.

A detailed description of the function code Function code 3, Reading several words The data structure of the request message Address Function code = 3 high byte start address (ignored in DISOMATs) low byte start address ( = message code in DISOMATs) number of words to be read high byte (ignored) number of words to be read low byte (ignored) CRC16 Response message if successful Address 3 (echo of the function code) length of the issue data in bytes data CRC16


91

11.3 Procedures

Data processing interface Response message if there is a fault Address 83 (hex) = echo of the function code (3) + 8. bit set fault code CRC16 IMPORTANT: Partial data records cannot be read by giving an address longer than the message code. Here’s an example: It is not possible to read the gross, net and status of address 50 and only reading the status of address 64. Function code 6, writing a word The data structure of the request message Address function code = 6 high byte address (ignored in DISOMATs) low byte address ( = message code in DISOMATs ) high byte value to be written low byte value to be written CRC16 Response message if successful Address 6 (echo of the function code) high byte address (ignored in DISOMATs) as an echo low byte address (= message code in DISOMATs) as an echo high byte value to be written as an echo low byte value to be written as an echo CRC16 Response message if there is a fault Address 86 (hex) = echo of the function code (6) + 8. bit set fault code CRC16 Function code 16, writing several words The data structure of the request message address function code = 16 high byte start address (ignored in DISOMATs) low byte start address ( = message code in DISOMATs) number of words to be written high byte (ignored) number of words to be written low byte (ignored) number of bytes to be written values to be written CRC16

92

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.3 Procedures

Response message if successful Address 16 (echo of the function code) high byte start address as an echo low byte start address (= message code in DISOMATs) as an echo number of words to be written high byte as an echo number of words to be written low byte as an echo CRC16 Response message if there is a fault Address 90 (hex) = echo of the function code (16) + 8. bit set fault code CRC16 Fault codes may be: 1: An invalid function code ( not 3, 6 or 16) 2: An invalid address = DISOMAT does not know the message code 3: Invalid data 4: System failure = local communication software (data processing task) does not respond or faults when processing the reading command Peculiarities of the J-Bus/Modbus The J-Bus procedure is only a master-slave procedure. In other words, there is only a data query of the master from the slave. No slave can transmit without being commanded to. The consequence is the fact that delayed response messages do not arrive. All data processing functions that require a delayed response messages can only be used to a limited extent or not at all (there is no delayed response on success/failure).

Non-applicable data processing functions with the J-Bus/Modbus n

Set tare

n Zero setting

Remedies/way out

Look for the tared bit in the scale status. Look in the area of zero for weight.

n

Query weight in the no-motion state

Obtain the weight without the no-motion state and look for the no-motion state bit.

n

Periodic weight query

Read weight periodically.

The data are transmitted in ASCII code. This means that ASCII messages are used, although without the #XX#-command code. This makes it generally valid considering the many different data formats depending on the machine with J-Bus transmission (Modbus transmission). Note: This offers transmitting 4-byte integer values as a special application.


93

11.4 The structure of the utility data


11.4 The structure of the utility data WN#XX#...utility data...# WN#XX#: Message header WN: Scale number or target address (two-digit decimal number (ASCII-coded 00-99) ) XX: message code (2 letters (A..Z, ASCII-coded) # Separators within utility data Utility data: Data as per the message code All data are transmitted (such as Teleperm M) in ASCII coding if not otherwise stated. Examples for utility data Specifying data to DISOMAT® Satus with scale number 02: Giving the weight on the scale in the current unit with range adjustment (AR): 02#AR#200,0# In this case:Adjust the range to 200 kg if the unit is preset to kg . DISOMAT result data: The response message with net weight, tare weight and status (TS, 7 total digits for the numerical values). 02#TS# 120,0# 40,0#c0# The response message with the scale parameters of DISOMAT in units of 0.1 seconds WR. 02#WR#20#15#0# Filter time: No motion time: Zero point tracking:

94

2.0 seconds 1.5 seconds off

BV-H2331GB / 0836



11.5 Data processing commands

11.5 Data processing commands 11.5.1 Table of the data processing commands This table applies to DISOMAT® T from version 2.0. Data processing commands added afterwards are marked in the last column.

The table of the data processing commands in DISOMAT® Satus Command

Code (AS-CII message)

Type with SIMATIC S5

Data word DW with SIMATIC S5

Type with J-Bus

Address with J-Bus dec.

from version

Data length

DW dec.

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

Group of scale commands Tare Clear tare Key in tare Zero setting Query weight and dg/dt Weight with no-motion state Periodic weight request Request gross weight Request weight (16-bit Integer format)

AT AC ET AZ TG TS SZ TB IG

AD AD AD AD ED AD AD ED ED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ES AS GB BL GO HA AB DG

AD ED ED AD AD AD AD ED

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

RK PK

ED AD

64 68

PA AF

AD ED

85 66

14

E

6

6

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

5 9

5 9

9

9

40 44 55 42

4

4

13

D

6 6 16 6 3 * * 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 * * 8 9

16 3 3 6 6 6 6 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

3 16 16 3

64 68 85 66

Group of feeding Specify setpoint Query setpoint Read balance Clear balance Start feeding Stop feeding Cancel feeding Query feeding status

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Group of general control Read all contacts Set contacts Set analog output Query faults


95



The table of the data processing commands in DISOMAT® Satus Command

Code (AS-CII message)

Type with SIMATIC S5

Data word DW with SIMATIC S5

DW

dec.

Type with J-Bus

Address with J-Bus dec.

from version

Data length hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

Along with the messages described above, all of which were initiated by the data processing partners, there are a series of messages that are sent at the initiative of DISOMAT. Note: This does not apply to J-Bus operation. These messages are only sent in SIMATIC S5 operation if the target data module that can be keyed into DISOMAT’s dialog is not equal to zero. The messages are then sent to data words in this target DB with fixed offset.

Weight with no-motion state Periodic weight transmission Taring is done Zero setting is done Dead weight adjustment ended Range adjustment ended

96

TS TG AT AZ TO AR

AD AD AD AD AD AD

16 32 84 88 92 96

10 20 54 58 5C 60

BV-H2331GB / 0836




11.5.2 The table of command formats You can find a table of the command formats of the utility on the following pages, ordered according to: n Group of scale commands n Group of diagnosis n Group of feeding n Group of adjustment n Group of general control n Group of parametrisation

The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT® Satus Command

Send or request message

Response message direct

Response message delayed

AT

WN#AT#

WN#AT#s# The message is processed

WN#AT#s# The command is executed

Code

Group of scale command Taring

Clear tare

AC

WN#AC#

WN#AC#s#

Key in tare

ET

WN#ET#tara#

Tare the tare weight

WN#ET#s#

Zero setting

AZ

WN#AZ#

WN#AZ#s#

WN#AZ#s#

The message is processed

The command is executed

Query Weight

TG

WN#TG#

WN#TG#netto#tara#dg/dt#status# Net: net (7-digit) such as . - 123,5 Tare: tare (7-digit) such as - 50,0 dg/dt: DG/dt (7-digit) status: scale status

Weight in the no-motion state

TS

WN#TS#

WN#TS#s#

Request periodic weight transmission

SZ

WN#SZ#w# w: Period in multiples of 0.1 seconds acceptable values: 0 or 5-99 (w=0 switches dispatch off)

WN#SZ#s# The message is processed

Request gross weight

TB

WN#TB#

WN#TB#brutto# Gross: gross

Request weight (16-bit Integer format)

IG

WN#IG#

WN#IG# LowByteHighByte(Net)LowByte HighByte(Tare)LowByteHighByte(dg/dt) Net, Tare, dG/dt as a 16-bit Integer, standardised to 10,000 (scale final value), status

The message is processed


WN#TS#netto#tara#status# This message is transmitted after the weighing equipment identifies the no-motion state or the waiting time of 20 seconds is over. periodical: WN#TG#netto#tara#dg/dt#status#

(7-digit)

97



The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT® B, C and T command

Code

Transmission or request message


Response message delayed

Group of feeding Specify setpoint

ES

WN#ES#g# g: setpoint (7digit)

WN#ES#s#

Query setpoint

AS

WN#AS#

WN#AS#g# g setpoint (9-digit)

Query balance

GB

WN#GB#

WN#GB#g#w# g: balance total (11-digit, right-justified, with 2 places right of the decimal point) w: number of dumps (4-digit)

Clear balance

BL

WN#BL#

WN#BL#s#

Start feeding

GO

WN#GO#

WN#GO#s#

Stop Dosieren

HA

WN#HA#

WN#HA#s# The message is processed

Cancel feeding

AB

WN#AB#

WN#AB#s#

Query feeding status

DG

WN#DG#

WN#DG#stat#ist#soll# stat: feeding status 0: batch ended, feeding OFF 1: feeding ON 2: feeding stopped 3: after voltage ON, no batch run (0-3) + 10: past max. batching time (0-3) + 20: past max. filling or emptying time actual: actual value set: setpoint

98

BV-H2331GB / 0836




The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT® Satus Command

Code

Transmission or request message


Response messagedelayed

Group of general control Read all contacts

RK

Set contacts

pk

WN#RK#

WN#RK#K1#K2#K3#K4# Kx: position of contact x (x = 1,2,3 or 4) Kx = ‘1’: HIGH, Kx = ‚0’: LOW

WN#PK#K1#K2#K3#K4#

WN#PK#s# Kx: the value to set on contact x is Kx = ‘1’: HIGH, Kx = ‘0’: LOW,

Everything else: the contact is unchanged. Contacts can only be set by data processing if the source of the contact is set to Data Processing in configuration. Set analog output

PA

WN#PA#aaaa# aaaa: value of the analog output, 0 - 10,000

WN#PA#

0 <—> minimum power (0 or 4 mA) 10000 <—->maximum power (20 mA)

Query faults

AF

WN#AF#

WN#AF#F-Text#

F-Text:

fault number and text


99



11.5.3 Explanation on the commands WN S

The scale number is double-digit (such as 01) The code number of the status of the data processing command. If the code number is not equal to 0, it was not possiuble to execute the command without fault.

Code number

Status/faults

0

ok

1

No no-motion state

2

Outside of the zero setting range

3

Parameter faulty

4

Command faulty

5

Tare too small

6

Range too small

7

Cable break

8

Mechanical fault

9

Parameterisation fault

10

Fault in original adjustment

11

Values invalid

12

Fault in test number

13

Calibration switch, adjustment contact or adjustment jumper in the wrong position

14

Fault in scale interval

15

Data cannot be changed

-1

Miscellaneous faults

Status

100

scale status in hexadecimal view

Bit number

Meaning

0

Underrange

1

Overrange (weight > weighing range final value)

2

Tare calculated

3

Exactly zero

4

Operated with ten times the resolution of the weight

5

Weight invalid

6

Tare set

7

No-motion state identified

BV-H2331GB / 0836




For example:

status “c0" is interpreted as a hexadecimal number 0xc0 and converted to binary 11000000;

Value:

11000000

bits 6 and 7 are set. That means that tare is set and no-motion state is identified.

Bit:

76543210

Remarks:

The hexadecimal numbers a-f are always issued as lower-case letters.

Remarks:

The hexadecimal numbers a-f are always issued as lower-case letters.


101




102

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Calibration

12 Calibration The calibration parameters and the results of adjustment are stored in the scale connector called a dongle. The benefit is the fact that it does not have to be adjusted again after exchanging or changing the DISOMAT. Manipulating the dongle causes a loss of adjustment.

Fig. 39

Please do the following for parameterising and adjustment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn off the power. Open the unit and the housing of the dongle by raising it on the side with a screwdriver. Remove the jumper between terminals 1 and 3 of the connecting plug (refer to the photograph) Carry out parameterisation and adjustment as described in the Operating Manual. Placing a jumper between terminals 1 and 3 makes the relevant data write-protected. Clip the together plastic housing components of the dongle.


103

Calibration


104

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Event Message Construction

13 Event Message Construction Event messages are constructed as follows:

KNNTT[-ID]:Text where: K = Class (1 digit) NN = Event number (2 digits) TT = Task number (2 digits) -ID = Optional ID number :Text = Event text The first letter (K) is the code letter of the event class currently assigned to the event. The next 2-digit number (NN) is the unique code of the reported event (=consecutive numbering of all event texts). Next, the 2-digit number of the task (TT) that started the event is read out. Optionally, an ID number (ID) designed to specify the cause of the reported event can follow. After the double point, the event is read out in text form.

Defined Event Classes Event Class

Code

Meaning

Message

M

Please note An event is information intended for the operator. A message will disappear automatically after 30 seconds. Messages can be acknowledged without passwords being required, if you wish to clear one before it disappears automatically. The DISOMAT will continue operating regularly.

Warning

W

The event informs the operator of an uncritical situation. The warning must be noted and acknowledged (no password required). The DISOMAT will continue operating regularly.

Alarm

A

Simple malfunction Informs the operator of a critical situation. The DISOMAT input and output contacts stop being processed and the outputs are set on safety standby. *) An alarm must be taken note of and the cause of this simple malfunction may need to be rectified; then the message must be acknowledged (no password required). Inputs/outputs will then continue being processed. *) As long as an alarm is activated, all malfunction-relevant binary function block outputs (primarily function blocks of the function block groups CONTROL and COMPARATORS) are set to ‘logical zero’.

Malfunction

S

Serious malfunction Informs the operator of very critical situations, e.g. device hardware faults. As with Alarm messages, inputs/outputs will not be processed and outputs are set to safety standby.*) The cause of the malfunction must be rectified to ensure that the system will continue operating regularly. The malfunction message must then be acknowledged. An arbitrary password is required (parameter or configuration password). *) As long as a malfunction is present, all malfunction-relevant binary function block outputs (primarily function blocks of the function block groups CONTROL and COMPARATORS) are set to ‘logical zero’.

With the event number, the optional ID and the event text, you can use the list in the following section to assist in troubleshooting.


105


List of Relevant Event Messages for the DISOMAT Satus Display Text

Cause

Repair

Scales 1 dongle missing

Re-plug dongle.

A0209: Mains failure A0309-nnn: Restart **) A04xx-nnn: Parameter error **) M06xx: No idle **) M07xx: Out of zeroing range **) M08xx: Tare too small **) S0909-x: Hardware error **) A1111-1:Cable breakage

Replace hardware

A13xx-nn:Check number **) M1520-1: Communication error

Repeat function (when scales idle!) Fieldbus: Unknown Write ID

M1520-2: Communication error

Fieldbus: Unknown Read ID

A1911: Measuring voltage too high

Measuring channel 1 input signal too high

Calibrate dead load.

W2105: Tare > Gross W4004: Feeding stopped W4104: Feeding aborted W4204-1: Setpoint

too low

Acquire setpoint.

W4204-2: Setpoint

too large

Acquire setpoint

W4304: Fill value too low W4404: Excess feeding

Setpoint will cause overfill

W4404-1: Excess feeding

Setpoint greater than maximum fill value

W4504: Out of tolerance

Out of POSITIVE tolerance

A4804: Analog interface cable breakage W5404: Check for empty

Bin tare weight out of configured limits

W6020: PLS no longer transmitting

External fieldbus master no longer polling controller

W700x-nnn: DP error

Empty bin

**)

Various identification numbers (IDs) not listed in this documentation can be read out for this event. They are designed to assist the suppliers’ service personnel in troubleshooting

106

BV-H2331GB / 0836



Parameter Error Itemization A0402-1:Parameter error

DP configuration

A0404-2: Parameter error

Analog output calibration


Material data


Maximum dW/dt


Load collective memory


Event classes

A0409: Parameter error

Country-specific settings


DISOPLAN

A0410: Parameter error

DT control


Scales 1 calibration parameters


Scales 1 weigh parameters


Calibration parameters part 2


Balances


Fixed tare


Scales 1 operation mode


Scales 1 calibration times


Scales 1 linearization

A0411-10: Parameter Error

Scales 1 times

A0411-11: Parameter Error

Scales 1 assignment dongle/measuring module


Modbus


Profibus-DP


DeviceNet


Modbus/TCP


Re-calibrate analog output.

107



108

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Technical Data

13 Technical Data Supply voltage of the 19“ VSE 20900 unit

18 – 36 VDC/VAC

Supply voltage of the VFG 20900 / 20910 field unit

18 – 36 VDC / 115/230VAC

Power consumption

10 VA max.

Temperature range

Performance temperature: -30 to +60°C Storage temperature: -40 to +80 °C

Measuring channels

1

Load cell supply:

5V alternating current supply

Input signal

0 to 15 mV

Sensitivity

0.7 µV/d

Unit

kg, g, t, lb; N; kN

Scale value

1, 2 and 5 etc. adjustable from 0.01-5,000

Linearity

< 0,5%o

Zero point stability

< 1,0µV/10K = 0,07%o with reference to the maximum input voltage

Range stability

< 0,1%o/10K

Accuracy

< 0,2%o/10K

Taring

To 100% of the weighing range

Load cell impedance:

Min. 47 Ω ( entspricht 8 x 350 Ω - Load cell or > 20 RT load cells @ 4000 Ω )

Date/Time

Real-time clock (RTC), Minimum buffer time 7 days

Housing (VFE Type)

19“ cassette, 3HE, 8TE

Housing (VFE Type)

Plastic IP 65 protection class, suited for wall-mounting

Binary inputs *

3 x optocoupler, 18-36 VDC, type. 5 mA Fourth input also used as an option

Binary outputs *

4 x relay, 230 VAC, 60 W max. 1 x optocoupler, 18 - 36 VDC, max. 50 mA

Analog output

1 x 0(4) – 20 mA, 12 bits, max. load 500Ω

Serial interfaces:

2 interfaces for data processing or secondary display interface S1: RS 232 interface S2: 485, 2/4-wire; * Max. baud rate: 38400

Service interface

S1: for configuration ( DISOPLAN )

Data processing procedures

Siemens 3964R S5 (RK512) Schenck’s standard procedure DDP8672 Schenck’s poll procedure DDP8785 MODBUS MODBUS-TCP

Secondary display procedures:

DTA DDP 8861 DDP 8850 VLZ20200-D

Ethernet interface *

10/100MBaud, on board

Fieldbus (optional)

Profibus DP-V0 DeviceNet Ethernet-IP


109

Technical Data


110

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Equipment supplied

15 Equipment supplied Designation

Material number

DISOMAT® SATUS VSE 20900 circuit board incl. front plate

V052188.B01

DISOMAT® SATUS VSE 20901 circuit board incl. front plate; with mounted PROFIBUS option

V052188.B02

DISOMAT® SATUS VSE 20910 circuit board incl. front plate, with integrated LED weight display

V053903.B01

DISOMAT® SATUS in the VFG 20900 field casing for 24 VDC supply

V053921.B01

DISOMAT® SATUS in VFG 20901 field casing for 24 VDC supply; with mounted PROFIBUS option

V053921.B02

DISOMAT® SATUS in VFG 20910 field casing with transformer for 115/230 VAC supply

V053922.B01

justrightDISOMAT® SATUS in VFG 20911 field casing with transformer for 115/230 VAC supply; with mounted PROFIBUS option

V053922.B02

VNG 0900 19" rack

V055346.B01

Power supply unit for 85-250 V AC, for up to 9 VSE 209xx with fieldbus cards

V053978.B01

VXB 20901 safety barriers for RTN/RTB/VBB/PWS load cells in potentially hazardous area of ATEX category 2G

V068489.B01

VXB 20911 safety barrier for RTK/DMA weigh cells

V068493.B01

Profibus installation set for DISOMAT® SATUS

V053917.B02

DeviceNet Satus installation set

V053918.B02

DISOPLAN VPL 20430 configuration software

V029764.B01

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0648 © Schenck Process GmbH

111

Equipment supplied - Reserved for user’s notes -

112

BV-H2331GB / 0836


Appendix

16.1 Fieldbus accessories

16 Appendix 16.1 Fieldbus accessories For connecting and cabling the fieldbus modules of DISOMAT® We recommend Satus for the following components: Bus distributor star distributor IP20

D-SUB System

Star distributor for TS 35 assembly, 1 bus-in (pin), 5 bus-out (bushing), Phoenix PSM-PTK4

Schenck material no. E013613.01

Bus distributor T-piece IP20 T-piece for TS 35 assembly, 1 bus-in (pin), 2 bus-out (bushing), Phoenix PSM-PTK

D-SUB System

9-pin Steckverbinder IP20 for 1 cable Interbus S (pin), Phoenix-Subcon-9/M-SH (bushing), Phoenix-Subcon-9/F-SH

D-SUB System


Schenck material no. E030909.01 Schenck material no. E012924.02

9-pin plug-in connector IP20 for 2 cable: Profibus (pin), Phoenix-Subcon-Plus M1

D-SUB System

9-pin plug-in connector IP20 for 2 Profibus cables (pin), with screw terminals and connectable terminal resistor SIEMENS, 35 degree outgoing cable

D-SUB System


Schenck material no. V022274.B01 9-pin plug-in connector IP20 for 2 Profibus cabless (pin), with screw terminals and connectable terminal resistor SIEMENS, 90 degree outgoing cable 9-pin plug-in connector IP20 for 2 Profibus cables (pin), with screw terminals and connectable terminal resistor SIEMENS, 180 degree outgoing cable Fieldbus cable for Profibus DP,

D-SUB System

Schenck material no. E094704.06 D-SUB System

Schenck material no. E909543.01 Schenck material no. E054627.01

Interbus, Modbus can be universally used to 500 kbit/s, d=7,1 mm 6-strand to 12 MB/s violet special cable, d=7.7 mm 2-strand


Schenck material no. 3849219

113

16.1 Fieldbus accessories

Appendix


114

BV-H2331GB / 0836


DISOMAT®Satus , DISOMAT®Opus, DISOMAT® Tersus Data Communication

BV-H2359GB




J +49 172 6 501700



Contents 1

Something about this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2

Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1

Information for operators of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3.1

List of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.2

The interface parameter of DISOMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

4

Computer, PC Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4.1

Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2

Schenck Process Standard Protocol (DDP 8672). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Schenck Process Poll Protocol (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Schenck Minproz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Siemens Protocol 3964R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ASCII-S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ASCII - Modbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 User Data Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 EDP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4.3

Commands Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

5

Coupling for SPS and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5.1

Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3

The structure of the data telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The structure of the fault telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The address ranges of the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Data from the process control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Data on the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Modbus interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Modbus/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Example telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Parameterising the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 The Functionality of Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 User Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Configuring the Network in RSLogix 5000" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Profibus DP protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Data segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Structure of user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Data from the process control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication © Schenck Process

BV-H2359GB/0902

I

5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.7

II

Data on the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Profibus-DP interface parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Planning aids (drawings, rules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 DeviceNet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Structure of user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Parameterising DeviceNet interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Available data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Controller data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Date/time format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

BV-H2359GB/0902


Something about this manual

1

Something about this manual Who is it written for? This manual is for technicians and programmers who want to control the equipment described (called DISOMAT or equipment below) with a data processing unit or create their own function block linkages. The assumption is made that DISOMAT functions are known and the user has a basic knowledge of data exchange in local computer networks (point-to-point connections and bus systems).

Software versions DISOMAT OPUS DISOMAT Satus DISOMAT Tersus

starting from version 20700-003 starting from version 20900-001 starting from version 20450-002

What does this describe? It describes: n n n n

Procedures Data processing commands Bus interfaces The entire function block strategy

A table of supplementary manuals

Internal numbers DISOMAT® Opus System Manual

BV-H2310GB

DISOMAT® Opus Operating Manual

BV-H2313GB

DISOMAT® Satus System Manual

BV-H2331GB

DISOMAT® Tersus System Manual

BV-H2334GB

DISOMAT® Tersus Operating Manual

BV-H2335GB


BV-H2359GB/0902

1

Something about this manual

- Reserved for Notes -

2

BV-H2359GB/0902


Safety Instructions

2

Safety Instructions Intended use When controlling DISOMAT, please make sure that it is used for the intended purpose as described in the manual. Any use beyond that is considered not for the intended purpose.

General hazards if safety instructions are not obeyed DISOMAT is reliable state-of-the-art equipment when connected. However, there might be residual hazards if untrained personnel use it incorrectly.

Safety-conscious work Anyone entrusted with the DISOMAT data processing should have read and understood the manual and in particular the safety instructions. n Only trained and authorised personnel may connect DISOMAT to a computer and control it via data lines. The assumption is made that the personnel is familiar with weighing equipment functions. n Fault messages may only be acknowledged after the reason for the fault has been rectified and there is no longer a hazard. n Fault messages may only be acknowledged with a password after the reason for the fault has been rectified. Beyond this, if control systems are connected to a lower order DISOMAT, they have to ensure that the control systems stay in a safe state after acknowledging default. n


BV-H2359GB/0902

3

2.1 Information for operators of

Safety Instructions

Labelling residual hazards Some commands may only be used interactively. This generally applies to all commands critical to safety such as acknowledging a fault message and starting feeding. These commands are marked with the symbol below in this manual. There might be danger to persons or property if these commands are carried out without the approval of an operator. When computer controlling DISOMAT, please make sure that commands critical to safety are only carried out if they are approved by an operator. Before giving approval, this operator has to satisfy him or herself that there is no danger. If this is not possible, you should avoid using commands critical to safety in computer control.

Safety notes for the user company The user company shall bear the responsibility for proper data processing for the connected DISOMAT. n Personnel supervisors should be familiar with the chapter on safety instructions and the operation and start-up items with an impact on safety. n Before start-up, supervisors should check whether computer controlled DISOMAT operation might cause additional hazards in connection with other machines or plant components . If necessary, supervisors should supplement safety instructions. n

2.1

Information for operators of calibrated scales Requirements made of add-on non-verifiable equipment/data processing systems for recording readings for commercial applications. Legal provisions Readings for commercial applications have to be obtained with calibrated measuring instruments. The readings may be forwarded to add-on non-verifiable equipment (computer systems) for creating commercial vouchers assuming that the scale or the configurable (i.e., approved) add-on equipment records or stores readings in a non-deletable fashion and without making any changes · and that the readings are accessible to both parties affected by the measurement. *)

*) The weights and measures regulations state that add-on equipment is equivalent to the measuring instruments. The weights and measures act and weights and measures regulations take these circumstances into consideration by making specific requirements of the data processing equipment and programs used in commercial applications.

Requirements made of data processing connections/query for recording readings and creating vouchers: 1. Legal-for-trade reading query (guaranteeing legal-for-trade data storage):

4

BV-H2359GB/0902


Safety Instructions

2.1 Information for operators of · · ·

The legal-for-trade reading has to be queried as per the instructions in Schenck manuals. When changing the prompting mode from DP to scale, always check to see if data is correctly saved. Readings for a commercial voucher may not be further processed without prior legal-for-trade data storage (for instance, with a fault message). If this is not respected, this would be a violation of calibration regulations which would be tantamount to a regulatory offense.

2. Labeling readings: · Identification features (strings) such as

° Date/Time ° Cons. No. ° Vehicle No. are or should be assigned to legal-for-trade readings for tracing them from the legal-for-trade data memory to the commercial voucher. ·

The commercial voucher has to have the following note: “Readings from freely programmable add-on equipment. These legal-for-trade readings may be inspected.”

3. The duration of legal-for-trade data storage. The minimum storage period for legal-for-trade readings is 3 months. The oldest reading is overwritten when storing new readings. Storage periods > 3 months can be set. The operator of the scale equipment is responsible for complying with the statutory requirements.


BV-H2359GB/0902

5

2.1 Information for operators of

Safety Instructions


6

BV-H2359GB/0902


Introduction

3

Introduction Agreements on electrical connections (on the physical level) and data exchange are necessary if DISOMAT is supposed to be connected to and remote-controlled by a higher-level data processing system (a process computer, PC or stored program control). DISOMAT can be connected into local networks via serial interface and data exchange is geared towards the normal protocols in the stored program controls (SPC). They are called procedures in this framework. Procedures are rules agreed for establishing communication as well as formatting and coding data including ensuring correct transmission. All procedures applied to DISOMAT use messages for transmitting or receiving data blocks (telegrams) and confirming the connection (acknowledging). What all procedures have in common is the “immediate response” property: DISOMAT responds immediately to each telegram and transmits another telegram after execution (such as “taring has been completed”) with commands that require a certain time for execution. The data to be transmitted, known as user data, are packed into data telegrams that also contain control and test characters. Control characters define the beginning and end of the data telegram. To do this, either the user data from the beginning and end characters are limited or the entire length of the data telegram is given by the telegram head. Block check characters (BCC) are used for data storage because they enable the recipient to identify faults in data transmission. The data and user data can be character-coded (such a 7-bit ASCII. 8-bit ASCII) or transmitted as binary sequences of bits.

Message:

Synchronisation

Data telegram

Opening

Head


User data

BV-H2359GB/0902

Data storage Ending

7

3.1 List of procedures

3.1

Introduction

List of procedures The list below shows the procedures presently used in DISOMAT for communication via serial interfaces. Couplings for computers, PCs q SCHENCK Standard Procedure; refer to Chapter 4.1.1 q SCHENCK Poll Procedure; refer to Chapter 4.1.2 q SIEMENS 3964R; refer to Chapter 4.1.3 q ASCII-S5; refer to Chapter 4.1.4 q ASCII-Modbus; refer to Chapter 4.1.5 Other procedures may be visible in the selection depending upon the equipment configuration such as DDP 8672-MS. These procedures are only of importance in specific applications and they are documented in each plant description. q q q q

3.2

Coupling for SPS and PLC Modbus Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.1 Profibus-DP Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.2 Interbus-S Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.3

The interface parameter of DISOMAT Several parameters have to be set before the interface can be operated. The parameters can be keyed in or selected with DISOMAT in the menu tree under the following menu items: n n n

PERIPHERY /interfaces PERIPHERY /COMMUNICATION/ data processing PERIPHERY /COMMUNICATION/fieldbus

You can find an exact description of the settings in each operating manual.

8

BV-H2359GB/0902


Computer, PC Coupling

4.1 Protocols

4


4.1

Protocols

4.1.1

Schenck Process Standard Protocol (DDP 8672) Protocol Agreements Nachricht:

Synchronisation Eröffnung

Daten-Telegramm Kopf Nutzdaten

Nachspann

...

Datensicherung

In the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The sequence of elements is not to be understood as time sequence. Enquiry The sender starts data transmission with control character . Acknowledgement The receiver acknowledges the enquiry with (ready to receive) or (not ready). Data Message The data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as follows: User Data Acknowledgement Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with ; faulty data transmission, with . Error Recognition Receiver acknowledges with or one of the two stations fails to send feedback within preset period of time.


BV-H2359GB/0902

9

4.1 Protocols


Behaviour Upon Errors In Data Transmission Upon errors in data transmission, sender repeats sending various times. With errors in connection set-up, repeats start from enquiry. With faulty transmission of user data, repeats start with data message.

Synchronization Monitoring Times, Repeats: Acknowledgement monitoring time

tq 2 seconds

Response monitoring time

ta 5 seconds

Enquiry monitoring time

te 2 seconds

Max. number of enquiry repeats:

3

Max. number of data repeats:

3

Data Protection, Block Check Character Generation BCC is formed as longitudinal parity over all character sent exclusive of . BBC bits complete number of bits 1 of a bit number line to even (s. Example) parity bit is not formed in accordance with this rule. It is generated from the 7 bits of the BBC itself. Receiver for his part generates the BCC code and compares it with block check characters received.. Block check character formation for AB34 data.

Example: Bit No.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Parity bit Here: Odd

S T X 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

A

B

3

4

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

E T X 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

B C C 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

(Longitudinal: Always even and BCC parity same as character parity)

10

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.1 Protocols

Sending Priority The DISOMAT units always have low priority. If both stations attempt to start data communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state.

Sequence 1. Sample Sequence: DISOMAT with address 01 is to transmit current weight values to EDP. 1) EDP sends command for weigh data transmission to DISOMAT (01#TG#).

Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element Enquiry

01#TG#

Acknowledgement Request message

Acknowledgement

2) DISOMAT responds with response message comprising net and tare weights, weight change per time unit (dW/dt) and scale status information.

Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element

Enquiry

STX>01#TG#netto#Tare#dg/dt#status#

Response message

Acknowledgement


Acknowledgement

BV-H2359GB/0902

11

4.1 Protocols

Computer, PC Coupling 2. Example:

Command with delayed response

DISOMAT with address 01 is to be tared remote-controlled via EDP. 1) EDP sends taring command (01#AT#) to DISOMAT. Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )


01#TG#

Acknowledgement Request message

Acknowledgement

2) Taring is possible only under certain conditions, e.g. DISOMAT must have recognized no-motion. This may take some seconds. Therefore, DISOMAT sends an immediate response message informing EDP that the command is being processed.

Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element

Enquiry

Acknowledgement 01#TG#

Response message direct Acknowledgement

S=0: Command execution OK S¹ 0: Command execution faulty 3) DISOMAT tries to tare scale and, once command is successfully executed, sends a response message including the information 01#AT#0# (user data). If the command could not be performed (DISOMAT has not recognized no-motion after a certain timeout), the response includes a number unequal to 0, e.g. 01#AT#1#. Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element

Enquiry

Acknowledgement 01#TG#

12

Response message delayed Acknowledgement

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.1.2

4.1 Protocols

Schenck Process Poll Protocol (DDP 8785) This protocol has been developed from the SCHENCK Standard Protocol (see Item 4.1.1, or Spec Sheet DDP8 672) and is used for special applications, for instance, running weight display in superordinate PC. EDP starts communication direct with request message and DISOMAT responds with corresponding data record. This is done without acknowledgement and without repeat in case of error. Transmission of data contents is secured through block check mechanism (recognition of faulty messages). Note: With this protocol, important response messages can get lost, particularly the delayed response messages whose output time is not exactly predictable. Examples: n The feed result message (DO) may be output several hours after start of feeding. n The delayed message of the taring command (AT) follows only in no-motion.

Protocol Agreements Message

Synchronization Enquiry

Data Message Header User data STX>

Data Protection Ending

IIn the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The sequence of elements is not to be understood as timely sequence. Enquiry Omitted! Data Message The data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as follows: User Data Acknowledgement Omitted! Error Recognition One of the two stations does not send feedback within preset period of time.


BV-H2359GB/0902

13

4.1 Protocols


Behaviour Upon Errors in Data Transmission Upon errors in data transmission (timeout), sender retries data request.

Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats: n n n n n

No acknowledgement Response monitoring time ta : 5 sec. No enquiry No data repeats No EDP error on DISOMAT

Data Protection, Block Check Character Generation See Item 4.1.1, page 7. Sending Priority The DISOMAT units always have low priority. If both stations try to start data communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state.

Sequence

Example: EDP sends command for weigh data acquisition and transmission to DISOMAT .

01#TG#

>

DISOMAT reponds directly with data message.

<

14

01#TG#netto#Tare#dg/dt#status#

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.1.3

4.1 Protocols

Schenck Minproz Minproz was consciously developed as a very simple procedure. Its set-up without character check or block check characters makes it possible to trigger telegrams from a terminal program for testing purposes (such as Windows Hyperterminal). The fact that there is no block check means that data can be falsified without decection. This is the reason why it is not advisable to apply this procedure when operating the scale. Master starts communication with the request message direct and DISOMAT responds with the corresponding data record. On either side, this takes place without acknowledgement, block check and repeat in case of error.

Protocol Agreements Synchronisation Message:

Enquiry

Data Message Header

User data

—-

Data Saving Ending

Enquiry, acknowledgement, error recognition omitted! Data message Data messages (send, request and reponse messages) are constructed as follows:

User data EDP sends command for acquisition and transfer of weigh data to DISOMAT.

>

01#TG#

DISOMAT responds with data message direct.

<

01#TG#net#tare#dW/dt#status#


BV-H2359GB/0902

15

4.1 Protocols

4.1.4


Siemens Protocol 3964R Protocol Agreements Synchronization Message:

Enquiry

Data Message Header

Data Protection

User data

Ending

...

In the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The sequence of elements is not to be understood as timely sequence. Enquiry Sender starts data transmission with control character . Acknowledgement The receiver acknowledges the enquiry with (ready to receive) or (not ready). Data Message Data messages (send, request and response messages) are construction as follows:

User data Acknowledgement Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with ; faulty transmission, with . Error Recognition Receiver acknowledges with or one of the two stations fails to send feedback within preset period of time.

Behaviour Upon Errors in Data Transmission Upon errors in data transmission, sender repeats sending various times. In principle, repeats start from enquiry.

Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats: n n n n n

16

Acknowledgement monitoring time Response monitoring time Enquiry monitoring time Max. number of enquiry repeats Max. number of data repeats

BV-H2359GB/0902

tg 2 sec. ta 5 sec. te 2 sec. 5 5



4.1 Protocols

Data Protection, Block Check Character Generation See Item 4.1.1, page 7. Sending Priority DISOMAT aways has low priority. If both stations try to start data communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and returns to receiving state. Value Range The value range of transmitted characters of a data section covers 8 bits, i.e. in hexadecimal representation 00 to FF. This value range requires a special treatment of user datas’ end code (), if the bit string of the character is included in user data. This is done by doubling the Doubling character. Doubling occurring in user data is doubled by transmitter, for receiver to completely receive user data. If two codes are received, receiver resets doubling and treats as data byte.


BV-H2359GB/0902

17

4.1 Protocols


Data Request Sequence Example:

1)1) EDP sends command for weigh data transmission upon no-motion.

Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element

Acknowledgement

Acknowledgement

Enquiry Response message

01#TS#

2) EDP receives immediate response that command has understood. The code in response message stands for the status of the EDP command. 0=OK, 1=Error

18

BV-H2359GB/0902



Master (EDP)

4.1 Protocols

Slave (DISOMAT )


Acknowledgement 01#TS#s#

Response message Acknowledgement

s = 0: Command execution OK s¹ 0: Command execution faulty 3) Then, DISOMAT sends delayed message. If command can be executed within preset period of time (20 seconds), delayed message includes requested data, here: weight values and status. If not, corresponding error message is output after elapse of preset period of time. Master (EDP)

Slave (DISOMAT )

Protocol Element

Enquiry

Acknowledgement 01#TS#netto#Tare#status


Response message Acknowledgement

BV-H2359GB/0902

19

4.1 Protocols

4.1.5


ASCII-S5 The protocol used with SIMATIC S5/S7 differs from the SIEMENS 3964R protocol by the 10-byte message header ahead of user data which comprises address, command and length information. In DISOMAT this protocol is called “S5”. In SIMATIC S5 Mode, all data are transmitted in ASCII code. Data block or word are represented hexadecimally (0..FF) To address a scale, n the data block (DB) for scale number (0...255) must be used and n the message code must be included in data word (DW). For corresponding values, see Table “EDP Commands” at Item 4.2.2. Example:

“Request weight in no-motion" to DW=6, “Periodic request” to DW=7.

The address of the AD messages sent from DISOMAT consists of data block and data word (firmly preset) for the message code. See Item 4.2.2.

Protocol Agreements Synchronization Message:

Data Message

Enquiry

Header

User data

Ending

10 Bytes

...

Data Protection

IIn the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The sequence of elements is not to be understood as timely sequence. Enquiry Sender starts data transmission with control character . Data Message Data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as follows: Message header User Data . Acknowledgement Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with ; faulty data transmission, with . Error Recognition Receiver acknowledges with or one of the two stations fails to send feedback within preset period of time.

20

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.1 Protocols

Behaviour Upon Errors in Data Transmission Upon errors in data transmission, transmitter repeats sending various times. Repeats always start from enquiry.

Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats n n n n n

Acknowledgement monitoring time Response monitoring time Enquiry monitoring time Max. number of enquiry repeats: Max. number of data repeats

tq = 2 sec. ta = 5 sec. te = 2 sec. 5 5

Sending Priority DISOMAT always has low priority. If both stations try to start data communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state. Value Range The value range of transmitted characters of a data section covers 8 bits, i.e. in hexadecimal representation 00 to FF. This value range requires a special treatment of user datas’ end code (), if the bit string of the character is included in user data. This is done by doubling the character. Doubling occurring in user data is doubled by transmitter, for receiver to completely receive user data. If two codes are received, receiver resets doubling and treats as data byte.


BV-H2359GB/0902

21

4.1 Protocols

Computer, PC Coupling Request Message Header With ”S5” Protocol In ”S5” mode, all data in the message header are represented in hexadecimal fashion. All messages start with two zero bytes ( ) followed by message type (ED or AD), data block address, data word address and two coordination flags. Byte No.

Meaning

1

00

2

00

3 4

Message type (ED or AD)

5

Data block address = Scale number

6

Data word address = Command code

7 8

Data length (> 1) in words

9

Coordination flag

10 11 ...

To keep configuration work down and ensure maximum data safety, value FF is expected for every byte. Data; length indicated in 7th and 8th byte. (At least one data word must be sent.)

AD and ED Message Descriptions: AD messages (SEND messages) consist of message header (10 bytes) followed by data. Response message contains a 4-byte status information. ED messages (FETCH messages) consist of message header (10 bytes). Response message comprises 4-byte status information and requested data.

22

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.1 Protocols

AD Message Construction AD message in the Clear Tare example (AC) Request message (SIMATIC DISOMAT ) Byte No.

hex.

ASCII

1 2 3

00 00 41

Meaning

A

Vommand: Output

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

44 21 02 00

D

Type: Data Destination: DB = Scale no., e.g. 33 Destination: DW = Clear Tare command code Number

01 FF FF

Number : 1 DW Coordination flag (byte) Coordination flag (bit)

11 12

20 20

1st data byte — (blank) 2nd data byte – (blank)

>

Response message (DISOMAT —> SIMATIC).

<

Byte No.

hex.

Meaning

1 2 3 4

00 00 00 xx

4-byte fixed length

xx= Error code (00 = Job OK; unequal to 00 = Error)

ED Message Construction ED message in the ”Request Weight” example (TG) This command returns the weight values to SIMATIC without no-motion inquiry. SIMATIC can read out scale status (see Item 4.3). In our example, net = -123.5kg, tare=100.0kg and material flow=12.3kg/sec.

Request message (SIMATIC —> DISOMAT ) Byte No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

00 00 45 44 21 02 00 0e FF FF

hex.

ASCII

E D


Meaning

Command: Input Type: Data Source: DB = Scale number, e.g. 33 Source: DW = Request weight command code Number Number : 14 DW Coordination flag (byte) Coordination flag (bit)

BV-H2359GB/0902

>

23

4.1 Protocols


Response message (DISOMAT

<

Byte No. Meaning 1 2 3 4

hex.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

20 2d 31 32 3

33 2c 35 23 20 20 31 30 30 2c 30 23 20 20 20 31 32 2c 33 23 63 30 23 00

SIMATIC)

ASCII

00 00 00 00

Error number (00 = No error)

1 2

5 #

1 0 0 , 0 #

1 2 , 3 # c 0 #

1st data byte 2nd data byte 3rd data byte 4th data byte Net 5th data byte 6th data byte 7th data byte 8th data byte - Separator 9th data byte 10th data byte 11th data byte 12th data byte Tare 13th data byte 14th data byte 15th data byte 16th data byte - Separator 17th data byte 18th data byte 19th data byte Material flow kg/s 20th data byte 21st data byte 22nd data byte 23rd data byte 24th data byte - Separator 25th data byte - Scale status n1 26th data byte - Scale status n0 27th data byte - Separator 28th dummy byte

or, if an error has occurred:

<

24

Byte No. 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00

hex.

ASCII

BV-H2359GB/0902

Meaning 4-byte fixed length

xx = error number (00 = OK; not 00 = error)



4.1 Protocols

Further Examples Acquire Tare Send message AT: Byte No. 1

Hex. 00

2

00

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

41 44 21 01 00 01 FF FF

11 12

20 20

ASCII

Meaning

A D

Command: Output Type: Data Destination: DB = Scale number, e.g. 33 Destination: DW = Tare command code Number Number : 1 DW Coordination flag (byte) Coordination flag (bit) 1st data byte - blank 2nd data byte - blank

>

Direct response message

<

Byte No. 1 2 3 4

Hex. 00 00 00 00


Error code (00 = No error)

Delayed response message Once weighing system has recognized no-motion or the 20-second no-motion timeout has elapsed, DISOMAT sends the following message:

<

Byte No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Hex. 00 00 41 44 32 54 00 01 FF FF

ASCII

Meaning1

A D

Command: Output Type: Data Destination: DB settable in menu tree, e.g. 50 Destination: DW permanently assigned with AT = 84 Number: Number: 1 DW Coordination flag (byte) Coordination flag (bit)

11 12

30 23

0 #

1st data byte - Status 0 = OK 1 = Not effected 2nd data byte - Separator


BV-H2359GB/0902

25

4.1 Protocols


Feeding Stopped Send message BR: Byte No. Hex. 1 00 2 00 3 41 4 44 5 32 6 50 7 00 8 01 9 FF 10 FF 11 12

31 23

ASCII

Meaning

A D

Command: Output Type: Data Destination: DB settable in menu tree, e.g. 50 Destination: DW = perm. assigned with BR = 80 Number: Number : 1 DW Coordination flag (byte) Coordination flag (bit)

1 #

Feeding Stopped code Separato

>

Response message:

<

Byte No. 1 2 3 4

Hex. 00 00 00 00


Error code

DISOMAT automatically sends this message to SIMATIC provided that feeding has been started by SIMATIC and the data block address has been entered at DISOMAT menu item EDP Configuration in decimal fashion (e.g. 50, hex 32). This message is output if: n n n n

First HA command (Stop Feeding) from SIMATIC AB command (Abort Feeding) from SIMATIC First stop via keyboard or input contact Error in feeding operation.

Restart stopped feeding operation with ‘Start Feeding’ (”GO”, hex 24).

4.1.6

ASCII - Modbus The ASCII-Modbus protocol corresponds to the message construction described at Item 5.2. The user data, however, are in the ASCII format. For type and address values, see “ZDV Commands” table at Item 4.2.2.

26

BV-H2359GB/0902



4.2 Message Descriptions

4.2

Message Descriptions

4.2.1

User Data Construction Data construction in protocol frame is organized as follows:

Address # EDP Command# Specific Data#

Address Meaning Used to distinguish multiple scales or DISOMAT units operating in group mode, the scale address must have two digits, e.g. 04 and an ASCII code. DISOMAT units equipped with two channels reserve 4 addresses/channel. Enter scale address in menu tree at Item ‘4431:EDP’. 1st address identifies the displayed scale. 2nd address …Scale 1 3rd address …Scale 2 4th address …Twin-unit scale

EDP Commands The ”EDP Command” field consists of a 2-digit ASCII code used as abbreviation of the command to be executed on DISOMAT , see Table at Item 4.2.2. Example: AT Aquire Tare ES Enter Setpoint For ASCII-S5, the ‘Address #EDP Command#‘ sequence is replaced by the message header of SEND/FETCH (AD/ED) messages. The ”EDP Command” field is converted into data words within the addressed data block. The ‘Specific Data‘ are transmitted as user data in the ASCII code.

Specific Data This part of the user data is variable and corresponds to the parameters sent to DISOMAT using the relevant EDP command. The Address and EDP Command fields are separated by #. Example: Scale adress 1 means: Adress 1 = displayed scale Adress 2 = Scale 1 Adress 3 = Scale 2 Adress 4 = Twin unit scale If multiple devices are present on a bus, next DISOMAT receives scale address 5.


BV-H2359GB/0902

27


4.2.2


EDP Commands

Table of DISOMAT EDP Commands Command

Identifier (ASCII telegram)

Type with

Data word DW with

Type

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S5/S7

with J-Bus

* = not implemented

DW

addre ss with J-Bus

Data length

dec.

hex.

1 2 3 4 10

1 2 3 4 0a

dec.

hex.

dec.

dec.

6 6 16 6

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

5 * *

16 3 16 3

32 33 41 42

16

43

3 3 6

34 40 35

6 16 6 6

36 45 37 38

Group of ‘Scale Commands’: AT AC ET AZ WN

AD

TG TS SZ

ED AD AD

5 6 7

5 6 7

Specify setpoint Query setpoint Specify material number and setpoint Query current material number and setpoint Specify data for specific sorts Query data for specific sorts

ES AS SE SR

AD ED AD ED

32 33 41 42

20 21 29 2a

SD SA

AD *

43

2b

Query balance Read sort balances Delete balances

GB SB BL

ED ED AD

34 40 35

22 28 23

Start feeding with current data Start feeding data for specific sorts Stop feeding Cancel feeding

GO SG HA AB

AD AD AD AD

36 45 37 38

24 2d 25 26

Query feeding status Query extended feeding status

DG DA

ED *

39

27

9

9

3

39

AF QU

ED AD

6 67

42 43

21

15

3 6

66 67

AP EP

* AD

* 71

47

* 16

* 71

Disomat Read function block parameters Set function block parameters Start ‘Processing Function Block’

PL PS FS

* AD AD

* 87 74

57 4a

* 16 6

* 87 74

PLC order telegram (bits) PLC read telegram (bits)

SS SL

AD ED

77 78

4d 4e

16 3

77 78

Set fast comparator Read fast comparator

SK GK

AD *

79 *

4f

16 *

79 *

lock keyboard Release keyboard

LK UK

AD AD

81 82

51 52

6 6

81 82

Weight telegram for legal-for-trade PC

PC

*

*

*

*

*

ID

ED

128

80

3

128

Taring Clear tare Key in tare Zero setting Connect scale

Query weight and dG/dt Query weight in the no-motion state Start cyclical output

AD AD AD AD

14

0e

5 7

5 7

‘Feeding’ group:

9 50

9 32

‘General Control’ group:

Query faults Acknowledge fault Disomat B compatible Read function block parameters Set function block parameters

0e 14

‘General Control’ group:

‘Paramerterising’ group: Query equipment ID

28

BV-H2359GB/0902

43

2b




Read form format Set form format

DL DS

* AD

* 130

82

* 16

* 130

Set time Read maximum values Set maximum values

EU LM SM

AD ED AD

131 138 139

83 8a 8b

16 3 16

131 138 139

Read fixed tare values Set fixed tare values

LF SF

ED AD

144 145

90 91

3 16

144 145

Specify string 1 Specify one of five strings

EB EI

AD AD

96 98

60 62

16 16

96 98

printing telegram

DR

AD

97

61

16

97

15

0f

50

32

‘Printing’ group:

There are a series of telegrams sent on the initiative of DISOMAT along with the previously described telegrams, all of which were initiated by the data processing partners. Note: This does not apply to Modbus operatioon (DISOMAT is always slave here). These telegrams are only sent in SIMATIC S5 operation if the target data module that can be entered in the DISOMAT dialog is not equal to zero. Then the telegrams are sent to the data word in this target data module with a fixed offset. Feeding ended Weight in the no-motion state Periodical weight transmission Feeding interrupted Taring carried out Zero setting carried out

DO1 TS TG BR AT AZ

AD AD AD AD AD AD

0 16 32 80 84 88

0 10 20 50 54 58

Print-out ended

DR

AD

100

64

12 10 14 1 1 1

0c 0a 0e 1 1 1

^^ 1 wird nur gesendet, wenn über Telegramm gestartet wurde (GO bzw. SG).


BV-H2359GB/0902

29




30

BV-H2359GB/0902


WN#AZ#

WN#WN# *

ET

AZ

WN

TG $)

TS

Key in tare

Zero setting

Connect scaleNot available for Opus

Query weight

Query weight in the no-motion state


WN#TS#

WN#TG#

Tare = tare weight

WN#ET#tara#

WN#AC#

AC

Clear tare

WN#AT#

Send or request telegram

AT

Identifier

Taring

Group of scale commands:

Command

The table of command formats for the data processing commands in DISOMAT


w: currently connected scale

The telegram is being processed

S 0 with the MT scale when the tare value is greater than the small range.


tare:

(7-digit) (7-digit)

(7-digit)

BV-H2359GB/0902

WN#TS#s# ? The telegram is being processed

such as # -123,5# 50,0# 0,0#c0# kg/t/g depending on the scale adjustment

status: Scale status (refer to Chapter 4.3)

dG/dt: dG/dt

Net tare

net:

WN#TG#netto#tara#dG/dt#status#

WN#WN#w#

WN#AZ#s#

WN#ET#s#

WN#AC#s#

WN#AT#s#

Reply telegram direct

Command executed

Command executed

This telegram is sent after the weighing facility has identified the no-motion state or the waiting time of 10 seconds is over.

WN#TS#netto#tara#status#

WN#AZ#s#

WN#AT#s#

delayed

31

SZ

Start cyclical output

WN = 01, 02, 03 connects the addressed scale.

WN = 00 leaves the connected scale

WN#TG#netto#tara#dG/dt#status#


*

cyclical:

WN#SZ#s#

Period in multiples of 0.1 seconds acceptable values: 0 or 5-99 (w=0 turns off output)

delayed


w:

WN#SZ#w#


32

^^

BV-H2359GB/0902


$) Note: The TG and TS commands do not trigger weight registration in DISOMAT (printout and legal-for-trade memory). This is why they never may be used for triggering legal-for-trade weighing. Please only use the DR command for this.

Identifier

Command

The table of command formats for the data processing commands in DISOMAT


SR

Query current material number and setpoint

Setpoint for sort 1 (max. 7 digits)

Material number 1-10

WN#SR#

Setpoint

kg/t/g/ depending upon scale

(8-digit, right-justified 3 positions after the decimal point)

n: Material numbers 1-10 /Opus 1-2 target: setpoint such as # 1# 100,0# kg/t/g depending upon scale adjustment

WN#SR#n#soll#

WN#SE#s#

such as # 100.000# adjustment

g:

WN#AS#g#

WN#ES#s#


BV-H2359GB/0902

such as #1#100#xy# kg/t/g depending on scale adjustment

target: Setpoint (max. 7 digits) ak: optional order identifier, maximal 25 characters of text = string 5

n:

WN#SE#n#soll#ak#

WN#AS#

such as #100# kg/t/g/ depending upon scale adjustment

g:

WN#ES#g#



SE

AS

ES

Identifier

Specify material number and setpoint

Not available for Opus

Query setpoint


Specify setpoint

Feeding group:

Command

Table of the command formats of data processing commands in DISOMAT


delayed

33

GB

SB-0016

BL

GO

Query balance

Read the sort balances

Clear balance

Start feeding with current

34

Pre-fill switching threshold Pre-contact switching threshold

vf: vk:

Optimisation factor target: * such as #1#10#20#10#5#0,1#

opt:

WN#GO#

WN#BL#

WN#SB#

Number of bulk solids dumps (max. 5-digit)

w:

WN#GO#s#

WN#BL#s#

delayed


such as # 123,4#...kg/t/g depending upon scale adjustment

Sort balance (9-digit right-justified, positions after the decimal point and shown as in the display format)

sb1-sb10 :

WN#SB#sb1#sb2#...#sb10#

Balance total (11-digit, right-justified, with 2 positions after the decimal point)

g:

WN#GB#g#w#

Refer to command SA for parameters

WN#GB#

WN#SA#vf#vk#hk#tol#opt#soll#

n: Material numbers 1-10/Opus 1-2

WN#SD#s#


WN#SA#n#

kg/t/g depending upon scale adjustment

Tolerance range

tol:

hk: Main contact switching theshold

Material number 1-10

n:

WN#SD#n#vf#vk#hk#tol#opt#soll#


BV-H2359GB/0902

SA

Query data for sort

data

SD

Identifier

Specify data for sort

Feeding group:

Command



HA

AB

DG

DA

Stop feeding

Cancel feeding

Query feeding status

Query extended feeding status

: Material numbers 1-10/Opus 1-2

WN#DA#

WN#DG#

WN#AB#

WN#HA#

target : Setpoint ak: optional order identifier maximal 25 characters text = string 5

n

WN#SG#n#soll#ak#



^

SG

Identifier

Trigger feeding start for specific sorts

Feeding group:

Command



feeding status 0/1/2 “ none / active / stopped

BV-H2359GB/0902

feeding status 0/1/2 “ none / active / stopped total actual value total setpoint material number actual value of current bulk solids dump setpoint of current bulk solids dump release status 1= feeding can be started order identifier max. 25 characters text = string 5 fk: function block identifier (configuration identifier) max. 10 characters text such as ‘acceptance scale’

stat: istg: sollg: sn: actual: target: fg: ak:

WN#DA#stat#istg#sollg#sn#ist#soll#fg#ak#fk#

actual: actual value target: setpoint

stat:

WN#DG#stat#ist#soll#

WN#AB#s#

WN#HA#s#

WN#SG#s#


Reply: WN#BR#Feeding interrupted and WN#DO# feeding ended

Reply: WN#BR#feeding is stopped

delayed

35

36

Read all contacts

General control group:

Command

TK

Identifier

BV-H2359GB/0902

WN#TK#


Table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT

X1..x4: x5..x10: x11..x14: a1,a2:

delayed


position of input contacts 1-4 position of output contacts 1-6 position of virtual data processing contacts 1-4 analog data processing outputs (10-digit, right-justified, 3 positions after the decimal point) (contact set = 1, contact not set = 0)

WN#TK#x1#x2#x3#x4#x5#x6#x7#x8#x9#x10#x11#x12#x 13#x14#a1#a2#



TA

Identifier

WN#TA#



Contact status


Command



BV-H2359GB/0902

ICP-In-W#ICP-In-Ä# Int-Out-W#Int-Out-Ä# ICP-Out-W#ICP-Out-Ä# PLS-In-W#PLS-In-Ä# PLS-Out-W#PLS-Out-Ä# data processing contacts# net: display format, 7-digit tare: display format, 7-digit status: 4-digit, hex, bit-coded WK:scale identifier 1 (scale 1), 2 (scale 2), 3 (twin-unit) Int-In-X: internal input contacts, 2-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram ICP-In-X: OK extension to input contacts, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram Int-Out-X: internal output contacts, 2-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram ICP-Out-X: OK extension to output contacts, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram PLS-In-X: PLS inputs, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram PLS-Out-X: PLS outputs, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded X == W: current values X == Ä: change since last telegram data processing contacts: as with TK telegram

WN#TA#Netto#Tara#Status#WK# Int-In-W#Int-In-Ä#


delayed

37

b: Function block identifier p1...pn: Parameter values of the function block Refer to the function block description for the number

WN#PL#b#

b: Refer to the function block description for the function block identifier

PL

Read DISOMAT function block parameters

38

*:Setpoint only SWA VKD204000


Read DISOMAT function block parameters

WN#PL#b#p1#...#pu#

WN#QU#

QU

BV-H2359GB/0902

delayed


You can only acknowledge faults of the message, warning and alarm classes. You have to acknowledge malfunction class faults in the menu tree of DISOMAT (after keying in your password) .

WN#QU#s#

E-Text: Result number and text as display (max. 40 characters)

WN#AF#E-Text#

Acknowledge fault

WN#AF#

DISOMAT automatically resets any data processing contact set after reading.

Do not set contact=0 abcd: PLS input function blocks, hex, bit-coded, such as 000f#

Set contact = 1,

gaps S

WN#EK#s#


Query fault

WN#EK#x1#x2#x3#x4# oder WN#EK#x1#x2#x3#x4#abcd# X1-x4: contacts 1-4


EK

Identifier



Command



turn-on value

turn-off value

on:

activate: 0/1 no/yes

e:

on:

Comparator number 1-6

n:

WN#SK#n#e#ein#aus#

WN#SL#

for an explanation)

XX=2 Order bytes (refer to Chapter 4.3, page 47

WN#SS#XX#

s ¹ 0:

b: Function block identifier p1...pn: Parameter values

Byte 2 = data processing and input contacts Byte 3 = output contacts

B2: B3: Net (7-digit)

BV-H2359GB/0902

WN#SK#s#

dG/dt: dG/dt (7-digit)

Gross: gross (7-digit)

Net:

(refer to Chapter , page for the meaning)

Byte 1 = scale status

B1:

WN#SL#B1B2B3#netto#brutto#dg/dt#

WN#SS#s#

Feed operation active, no parameter change available now

WN#PS#s#


WN#PS#b#p1#...#pn#




Set fast comparator

SK

SL

PLC read telegram (bits)


SS316

PS

Identifier

PLC order telegram (bits) Not available for Opus


Set DISOMAT function block parameters


Command



Other reply telegrams depending upon requirements: WN#AT#s#, WN#AZ#s#, WN#BR#s#, etc.

delayed

39

UK

Release keyboard

40

LK

GK

Identifier

Block the keyboard for 1 minute


Read fast comparator


Command

Comparator number

BV-H2359GB/0902

^

WN#UK#

WN#LK#

n:

WN#GK#n#



WN#UK#s

WN#LK#s

WN#GK#n#e#ein#aus# Refer to command SK for parameters



delayed


Identifier

WN#LM#

EU

LM

Set time

Read maximum values

Refer to under DL for parameters

WN#DS#nr#muster#



WN#EU#TT.MM.JJ#hh:mm:ss# Tag.Monat.Jahr#Stunde:Minute:Sekunde

DS

Set form format

BV-H2359GB/0902

Dg: Max. dG/dt (10-digit, right-justified, 3 positions after the decimal point) bl: Max. balance (12-digit, right-justified, 2 positions after the decimal point) sch: Max. bulk solids dumps (5-digit)

WN#LM#dg#bl#sch#

WN#EU#s#

WN#DS#s#

Numbers 1-3 = printing format 1-3 Number 4 = data processing format (variable part) Number 5 = side head format Number 6 = legal-for-trade memory format (variable part) Numbers 7-9 = format of printing 4-6 Pattern: format string of the printing pattern

nr:

Number of form format 1/2/3/4

nr:

Text DISOMAT Schenck Process GmbH software identifier date written equipment serial number

WN#DL#nr#muster#

DL

Read form format

sk: sd: sn:

T:

WN#ID#t sk sd sn#


WN#DL#nr#

ID

WN#ID#


Query equipment ID

Paramerterising group:

Command

The table of command formats for data processing commands in DISOMAT


delayed

41

Identifier

SF

Set fixed tare values

EI

Specify one of five strings

42

EB

Specify string 1

‘Printing’ group:

LF

SM

Read fixed tare


Set maximum values


Command

BV-H2359GB/0902

WN#EI#n#text n: string numbers 1-5 text: max 25 characters

WN#EB#text# text: max. 30 character of text

WN#SF#w1#...#w9# w1-w9: fixed tare values

WN#LF#

WN#SM#dg#bl#sch# Refer to command LM for parameters



WN#EI#s

WN#EB#s#

WN#SF#s#

WN#LF#w1#...#w9# w1-w9: fixed tare values

WN#SM#s#


delayed



Identifier

DR

Registering in the legal-for-trade memory printing pattern

n = 0:

The texts are printed if the BZ1-BZ5 string identifier is also entered in the corresponding printing pattern.

n = 1...6:

max. 25 characters per string text

text1-text5:

or with several strings WN#DR#n#text1#text2#...#text5#

string texts (max. 25 characters)

1-scale system, legal-for-trade brackets, Dimension “t” # <0,00t> B # -> length 17 1-scale system, no legal-for-trade brackets, Dimension “kg” # 150.0kg B # -> length 15 2-scale system, legal-for-trade bracket, Dimension “t” # <17.34t> B 1# -> length 17

The weight description is generally constant in its length, but it is dependent on the system configuration, such as:

Refer to Chapter 5.2.1.5 in the Operating Manual for an example,

Refer to Chapter , page for the scale status. formated string.

String=

Faults occurred when printing Faults with data in the legal-for-trade memory

X=1 X=2 Status=

Number of the printing pattern No fault when printing

X=0

WN#DR#n#x#status#string# n=

After printing:

Number of the printing pattern

If s ¹ 0, it is still moving (send it again later).

*

WN#DR#s#

delayed

n: 0-6 text:


WN#DR#n#text#



BV-H2359GB/0902

The DR command triggers weight registration in DISOMAT (printer and legal-for-trade memory). This is why it can be used to trigger legal-for-trade weighing. Please read the notes in Chapter 2.1 if weight is further processed in non-legal-for-trade plant components.

Printing telegram


Command



43

Identifier


BR

Interrupt feeding

44

DO

Feeding ended actual value actual value - setpoint optimised main contact

BV-H2359GB/0902

^^

WN#BR#

This telegram is only sent if feeding was started per telegram (GO or SG).

g1: g2: g3:

WN#DO#g1#g2#g3#

DISOMAT message group: DISOMAT sends a telegram.

Command

Table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT Reply telegram direct


delayed



4.3 Commands Explanations

4.3

Commands Explanations

WN s

Scale number always in 2-digit form, e.g. 01 Codes number of EDP command status If the code number unequals 0, command was not properly executed. S = 0: Command execution OK s>< 0: Command execution faulty

status

Scale status in hexadecimal format Bit No.

Meaning

0

Underrange

1

Overrange (weight > full scale value)

2

Tare computed

3

Exact zero

4

—- Not used —-

5

Weight invalid

6

Tare acquired

7

No-motion recognized

With 16-bit status: Bit No.

Meaning

8

Initialisation

9

—- Not used —-

10,11

Range (1,2,3)

12

In zeroing range

13

Twin-unit scale

14

Multi-divisional scale

15

Multi-range scale

Example:

Status ”c0” is interpreted as hexadecimal number 0xc0 and converted into binary 1100 0000.

Bit:

76543210

Bits 6 and 7 are set, i.e. tare is acquired;

Value:

11000000

no-motion, recognized.

Note:Hexadecimal numbers a...f are always transmitted as lower-case letters.


BV-H2359GB/0902

45


SS


vUsed in PLC order message Message type: Data block: Data word:

Bit output Scale number 4d (hex)

Message construction:

16 bits, each bit coding an order to connected scale. Bit setting starts order. Meaning of individual bits:

Bit No.

Meaning

0

Acquire tare

1

Clear tare

2

Set to zero

3

Start feeding

4

Stop feeding

5

Abort feeding

6

Clear balance

7

Acknowledge error

8-15

Standby

Selected command is executed only upon first sending of message (”rising edge”). To have command executed, reset relevant signal..

46

BV-H2359GB/0902



SL


Used in PCL read message Byte

1

2

Explanation

Bit No.

Meaning

0

Underrange

1

Overrange

2

Tare computed

3

Exact zero

4

Resolved mode

5

Weight invalid

6

Tare acquired

Scale status

7

No-motion

8

Contact 1

9

Contact 2

10

Contact 3

11

Contact 4

12

EDP 1

13

EDP 2

14

EDP 3

Output of DISOMAT physical input

Output of DISOMAT virtual (EDP) outputs statusses:

3

15

EDP 4

16

Contact 1

17

Contact 2

18

Contact 3

19

Contact 4

20

Contact 5

21

Contact 6

22

Standby

23

Standby

Output of DISOMAT physical output contact statusses

Sequence in message:

Bytes:

1

2

3

Bits:

76543210

15...8

23...16


BV-H2359GB/0902

47




48

BV-H2359GB/0902


Coupling for SPS and PLC

5

5.1 Modbus-RTU

Coupling for SPS and PLC This chapter describes coupling between an SPS/PLC and the equipment. · DISOMAT Satus (only for the process image “No text/4ID” with Profibus and DeviceNet) · DISOMAT Opus · DISOMAT Tersus The equipment is called the controller below. The text will explicitly point out whether parts of this description are only for one specific piece of equipment. Note: · The BV-H2331 System Manual describes the standard and short process images of DISOMAT Satus that are compatible with DISOMAT T. · The description of the Profibus is based upon the VPB8020 hardware. · The description of DeviceNet is based upon the VCB8020 hardware. · You can find the common database for all controllers and protocols in the chapter on “Available Data” at the end of this document.

5.1

Modbus-RTU The general specification of the Modbus protocol describes two ways to code data: n n

7-bit ASCII framing RTU framing

The controllers only work with RTU framing. The specification below describes the special properties for coupling a process control system (PLS) and the controller.

Terminology The following chapters describe: HEXADECIMAL values in the form of 0x1234 and DECIMAL values in the form of 1234.

Logical hierarchy The process control system is bus master and the controllers are treated as individual slaves. One telegram cycle always consists of a query from the master (PLS) and a reply from the slave. The reply is either the acknowledgment to an order from the master or a data record that the master requested in its query.

Physical arrangement The best way to couple the bus is via RS485 (2- or 4-wire) interface. This is interface S3 with DISOMAT Satus and Opus while interfaces S1 or S2 are available for DISOMAT Tersus. You can find the connection diagram in the system manual.


BV-H2359GB/0902

49

5.1 Modbus-RTU


Data format and data signaling rate This uses the RTU format with an 11-Bit character frame. The data format, baud rate and interface physics are set in the interfaces menu item.

Data position The transmission begins at the same time as the MSB. The setpoints and readings are transmitted both in the IEEE float format (IEEE 754, 32 bits) and in the integer format. You have a 16-Bit word available with the integer format and you can adjust its resolution over a range of 0-MAXTEILE while maximum resolution is 215-1 parts. Here is an example of transmitting the value 150.5 in the IEEE format (this gives the sequence in the circuit): Byte 1: sign / exponent

Byte 2: Mantissa 1

Byte 3 Mantissa 2

Byte 4: Mantissa 3

0x43

0x16

0x80

0x00

All control information and statuses are represented as a binary signal with the 8 data bits of each character. Additionally, all control and status information can be treated as single-bit information.

Guaranteeing Transmission The characters are secured by a parity bit (see MODBUS specifications). The telegrams are secured by a checksum (CRC16; see Modbus specifications). The Modbus specification defines the reaction to transmission errors. You can guarantee the transmission between the controller and the control system in the controller via TIMEOUT. Then, the controller expects a telegram from the control system at specific intervals. The type of telegram is not important here. You can set both the interval and the type of reaction from the controller to no telegram on the controller via parameters and you can find the events notes in each operating manual of the controller. The TIMEOUT = 0 setting means that the data flow between the controller and master is not monitored by the controller.

Routines Any routines important for specifying data are described in each section.

Subscriber addresses Every controller is given a slave address beginning with 1 in ascending order. The highest address it is possible to set is labeled MAXSLAVE in the following text. You can set the address by dialog on the controller. MAXSLAVE has a value of 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address..

50

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1.1

5.1 Modbus-RTU

The structure of the data telegrams The data are transmitted in separate telegrams arranged according to data types (binary or analog) to make it easier to process the data in PLS. All programs have the following structure: T1 T2 T3

Slave Address

Function Code

Data

Check CRC16

T1 T2 T3

Break

8 bits

8 bits

n * 16 bits

16 bits

Break

Several readings can be transmitted simultaneously. The start address of the data registers and then the data are arranged in the ‘Data’ field. The number of data is defined by the LENGTH field (word count or byte count). This information depends upon the function code and direction of transmission at various points (explicit or implicit length information). No length information is given if a single reading is transmitted (function codes 5 or 6). Function codes: Function code

Description

1

Bitwise reverse reading of control information (one or several bits)

2

Bitwise reading of status information (one or several bits)

3

Wordwise (reverse) reading of setpoints and readings (one or several words)

4

Wordwise reading of status information (one or several words)

5

Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always one bit)

6

Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoint values (always one data word)

15

Bitwise writing of control information (one or several bits)

16

Wordwise writing of setpoints in the IEEE format (one or several data words)

Note: Often, the control system should add what is known as a “segment address” (depending upon the function code) to the data address to be described. Furthermore, the data address should be set up one because the register addresses start at 1 with the Modbus protocol. In other words, the rule for configuring the data address is: The data address = segment address + controller address + 1.


BV-H2359GB/0902

51

5.1 Modbus-RTU

Coupling for SPS and PLC The structure of the data field: The data telegram from PLS ADDRESS HI ADDRESS LO VALUE HI VALUE LO

start address of the data registers start address of the data registers content of the data registers content of the data registers

The request telegram from PLS ADDRESS HI ADDRESS LO LENGTH HI LENGTH LO

start address of the data registers start address of the data registers number of the data fields in words number of the data fields in words

The readings telegram from the controller LENGTH VALUE 1 HI VALUE 1 LO ... VALUE n HI VALUE n LO

number of the data fields in bytes content of the data registers

All fields are 8 bits long.

52

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1.2

5.1 Modbus-RTU

The structure of the fault telegrams The fault telegrams have the following structure T1 T2 T3

Slave Address

Function Code

Error Code

CRC16

T1 T2 T3

Break

8 bits

8 bits

8-bits

16-bits

Break

The value 0x80 is added to the ‘Function Code’ value from the request in the fault telegram. You can see the meaning of the fault codes in the table below.

Error Code

This means

1 The subscriber does not support the function requested (FC) 2 Faulty data address such as - data address out of range - data address with IEEE or odd - data offset + length too long 3 The wrong data type such as - The wrong data with FC 5 (0xFF00 and 0x0000 are acceptable) - The data length is smaller than 0 - The length requested is too long

5.1.3

The address ranges of the coupling The following data ranges are defined for Modbus coupling. The writing range with - controll information and - setpoints (in IEEE or integer format) - predetermination values in the LONG integer format) - text (not with DISOMAT Satus) and the reading range with - status information and - readings (in IEEE or integer format) - readings in the LONG integer format - text (not with DISOMAT Satus)


BV-H2359GB/0902

53

5.1 Modbus-RTU

5.1.4


Data from the process control system The data from the control system can always be assigned to one of the groups specified: · Control bits -The information transmitted is assigned to one of the 16 bits of the PLS-DIn1-16 function blocks. What effect the control information has depends upon how the function block is wired. Please ensure that the desired function block is also loaded (with the Load Fixed Linkage function). The positive flank had this effect on all control bits and the status has to be pending for at least 100 ms to be identified unambiguously. The bit should be taken back after carrying out the control function. A bit number (which of the possible 16 bits should be changed) may be calculated from the four lowest-value bits in the data address LO. If, for instance, the database address is 0x1010, this references bit 0 while bit 7 is addressed in Highbyte with the address 0x101F. The value 0xFF in Highbyte of the control word sets the flag while the value 0x00 deletes the flag (function code 5). ·

Commands- A 16-bit data word is always transmitted as a command. There has to be a change for a command to be effective. If you would like to execute the same command several times, you have to transmit the ZERO command between commands.

·

Analog predetermination values - These values can be transmitted as an IEEE floating point value (4-byte) or an integer (2-byte).

·

(String) texts (not with DISOMAT Satus)

Control information (PLS-DIn 1-16 and commands) The telegram to the controller (function codes 5, 15, 6,16) has binary information that you can read back with function codes 1 and 3.

54

Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

1, 5, 15 bit operations

Function codes

3, 6, 16 word operations

basic data address

0x0010 commands 0x0020 PLS-DIn 1-16

The number of data words / bits

0x0002 / 0x0020

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1 Modbus-RTU

General control telegram: (commands) Slave address (1 byte)

FC (1 byte)

Data address (2 bytes)

Data (2 bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)

Wordwise presetting of commands: Slave address 0x01-0xfe

FC 0x06

Data address 0x0010

Data (1 Wort)

CRC

For example, wordwise presetting (commands): Slave address 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01

FC

Data address

Data

0x06 0x06 0x06 0x06 0x06

0x0010 0x0010 0x0010 0x0010 0x0010

0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0080 0x0000

CRC

Meaning Taring Clear tare Zero setting Acknowledge error Reset

Note: You can only specify commands with FC 6 or 16 because this is a number, not bit-coded data. This means that only one command can be executed per transmission. For example, for bitwise presetting via function block (PLS-DIn 1-16): CRC

Meaning

Slave address

FC

Data address

Data

0x01 0x01

0x05 0x05

0x0020 0x0020

0xFF00 0x0000

Set PLS-DIn 1 Reset PLS-DIn 1

0x01

0x06

0x0020

0x0010

Set PLS-DIn 5

Data addresses

Meaning

0x0010

Low Byte

Command number (refer to the chapter on Available Data Specifications)

0x0020

Low Byte function blocks

PLS -DIn-1 PLS -DIn-2 PLS -DIn-3 PLS -DIn-4 PLS -DIn-5 PLS -DIn-5 PLS -DIn-6 PLS -DIn-7 PLS -DIn-8

bit address

0x0020 0x0021 0x0022 0x0023 0x0024 0x0024 0x0025 0x0026 0x0027

0x0020

High Byte function blocks

PLS -DIn-9 PLS -DIn-10 PLS -DIn-11 PLS -DIn-12 PLS -DIn-13 PLS -DIn-14 PLS -DIn-15 PLS -DIn-16

bit address

0x0028 0x0029 0x002A 0x002B 0x002C 0x002D 0x002E 0x002F


BV-H2359GB/0902

55

5.1 Modbus-RTU


Predetermination values in the IEEE format A telegram to the controller (function code 16) has predetermination values in the IEEE format. You can read back this information with function code 3. Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

16, 3

basic data address

0x0x100

Number of data words

0x0012

The general telegram in the IEEE format: Slave address

FC

Data address

Length in words

Byte count

Data/ Value

CRC

(1 byte)

(1 byte)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(1 byte)

(4 bytes)

(1 byte)

Data

CRC

CRC

The setpoint value in the IEEE format: Slave address

FC

Data address

Number in words

Byte count

0x01-0xfe

0x10

0x0100

0x0012

0x0024

An example of a setpoint telegram (manual tare 1 = 100 kg for slave1): Slave address

FC

Data address

Length in words

Byte count

Data

0x01

0x10

0x0100

0x0002

0x04

0x42c80000

Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings

56

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1 Modbus-RTU

The predetermination values in the integer format You can also transmit the IEEE setpoints with the 6/16 function codes in the integer format always using the final value set in the parameters as the reference value For example: 0 ... MAXTEILE correspond to 0 ... scale final values in kg. You can read back this information with function code 3. Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

6, 16, 3

basic data address

0x0200


0x0009

Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for the table of valid addresses

Note: Integer format values are always positive while negative values are set to zero.

Setpoints in the LONG integer format Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

16, 3

basic data address

0x0800


0x0006

Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for the table of valid addresses


BV-H2359GB/0902

57

5.1 Modbus-RTU


Transmitting texts to the controller For instance, this telegram can be used to transmit formatted texts (such as printing strings) to the controller with a maximum text length of 32 characters per string. The print form further processes 25 of these 32 characters. The rest is not used and is replaced by the zero value when reading back. You can also combine all strings into one setpoint telegram by filling up each partial string to 32 bytes. Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

16, 3

basic data address

0x0600


0x0010 (words per string)

The following text specifications are implemented: Meaning

Text ID

String text 1

1 (basic data address 0x0600)

String text 2


String text 3


String text 4


String text 5


The general telegram format: Slave address (1 byte)

FC

Data address

Length in words

Data/text

CRC

(1 byte)

Byte count

(2 Byte)

(2 bytes)

(1 byte)

( as much as 160 bytes)

(2 bytes)

Some examples of text setpoint telegrams for slave 1. n n n

String text 1 String text 3 All string texts (1-5)

Slave address

FC

Data address

Length in words

Byte count

Data

0x01 0x01 0x01

0x10 0x10 0x10

0x0600 0x0620 0x0600

0x0010 0x0010 0x0050

0x20 0x20 0xA0

0x41424344... 0x41424344... 0x41424344..

CRC

If the number of text bytes is odd, fill up the text with a space at the end.

58

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1.5

5.1 Modbus-RTU

Data on the process control system Status information The following telegram is used for requesting status information. Status information may be requested wordwise (function code 4) or bitwise (function code 2). FC3 can also be used instead of FC4. Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

2, 4, (3)

basic data address

0x1300

The number of data words / bits

0x0018/0x0180

The general request telegram Slave address (1 byte)

FC (1 byte)


Length (2 bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)

Data address 0x1300

Length in words 0x0018

CRC

Data address 0x1300

Number of bits 0x0180

CRC

Length 0x0001 0x0010

CRC

Wordwise request of status information Slave address 0x01-0xfe

FC 0x04

Bitwise request of status information Slave address 0x01-0xfe

FC 0x02

An example of a request (status word): Slave address 0x01 0x01

FC 0x04 0x02

Data address 0x1300 0x1300

Refer to the chapter on Available Data for the Controller Data for the list of valid addresses


BV-H2359GB/0902

59

5.1 Modbus-RTU


Readings in the IEEE format The control system can request readings with the following telegram in the IEEE format. The dimensions of these readings are always kg or kg/second.

Bus address

1... MAXSLAVE

Function codes

4, (3)

basic data address

0x0700


0x00D0

The general request telegram: Slave address (1 byte)

FC (1 byte)


Length (2 bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)

Length in words 0x007C

CRC

Readings request in the IEEE format Slave address 0x01-0xfe

FC 0x03

Data address 0x0700

An example for requesting the gross weight on scale 1: Slave address 0x01

FC 0x03

Data address 0x0700

Length 0x0002

CRC


60

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1 Modbus-RTU

Readings in the integer format The host system can request the IEEE readings in the integer format with the following telegram using the final value set in the parameters as the reference value. The dimensions of these readings are always kg or kg/second. Bus address

1..MAXSLAVE

Function codes

4, (3)

basic data address

0x0400


0x0010

The base data address can be calculated from the IEEE address according to the formula (refer to the section on available data for the controller data). For example: rated weight, unrounded, kg

400HEX + (736HEX - 700HEX) /2 = 400HEX + 36HEX / 2 = 400HEX + 1BHEX = 41BHEX Note: Integer format values are always positive while negative values are set to zero.

Readings in the LONG integer format Bus address

1..MAXSLAVE

Function codes

4, (3)

basic data address

0x0900


0x000E



BV-H2359GB/0902

61

5.1 Modbus-RTU


Read the texts of the controller For instance, this telegram can be used to read formatted texts (such as printing strings) with a maximum text length of 32 characters per string. Bus address

1..MAXSLAVE

Function codes

4, (3)

basic data address

0x0500


0x0010, data words per string

The general request telegram:: Slave address (1 byte)

FC (1 byte)


Length (2 bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)

Data address 0x0500

Length 0x0010

CRC

An example of request for text Slave address 0x01

62

FC 0x03

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.1.6

5.1 Modbus-RTU

Modbus interface parameters

What the parameters mean: q

q

q

q q

q

Internal address

defining the bus address (0-254)

Reference value for converting a physical quantity into parts that are transmitted (1-32767) such as 10,000,000 kg <> 32 767 parts. Final value the maximum value to be transmitted when the quantity to be transmitted reaches a reference value. Interface selecting the fieldbus interface Timeout for monitoring the interface in seconds; 0 s = no monitoring 1-300s = value range Swapping order of bytes for floating point numbers and words on the bus (BIG Endian, BYTE Swap, WORD Swap, LITTLE Endian)

Note: If monitoring is activated -address errors -function code errors, and - incorrect length information are also shown as communication errors in the controller’s display.


BV-H2359GB/0902

63

5.2 Modbus/TCP

5.2

Modbus/TCP The chapter below describes the functionality of the controllers as servers on Ethernet. The following are described in detail:: n Server configuration n Data exchange between an Ethernet client and the controller per Modbus/TCP, n Notes for troubleshooting and diagnosis n It is connected via RJ45 plug on the VFE xx. n The server can exchange data with as many as 3 clients simultaneously. If the DISOPLAN start-up tool is used, it can occupy one of the three available channels if coupling is performed via network. The data are either sent as Modbus/TCP packets or are expected as such from outside. The function scope is identical with that of Modbus-RTU excepting the Modbus/TCP header (refer to Chapter 5.1.1–5.1.5). n The controller functions like a Modbus/TCP server as per the standard OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0,’ 29th March, 1999. It can handle all class 1 and 2 function codes (except for FC7) and the most important class 2 codes (FC15 and FC23).

This data representation is based entirely on the Modbus standard. The TCP safety layer takes on the role of the Modbus telegram check sum (CRC 16). The controllers evaluate the length field and protocol identifier and all other bytes are sent back in the reply unchanged. n Customer applications should always set the protocol identifier to zero. n

64

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.2 Modbus/TCP

Subscriber addresses All stations in the Ethernet network are unambiguously identified via IP address. This is the reason why the Modbus slave address can always be set to 1.

5.2.1

Example telegrams The lines below show the structure of the Modbus/TCP telegrams. The first column is the telegram of the bus master to the scale and the second column is the scale’s reply.

5.2.2

Data to Scales

Scale’s Reply

Meaning

00 00 00 00 00 06

00 00 00 00 00 06

Taring

01 06 0010 0001

01 06 0010 0001

00 00 00 00 00 06

00 00 00 00 00 05

01 03 0300 0001

01 03 02 xx xx

00 00 00 00 00 06

00 00 00 00 00 23

01 03 0748 0010

01 03 20 xx ..... xx

00 00 00 00 00 0B

00 00 00 00 00 06

01 10 0110 0002 04 4323 5678

01 10 0110 0002

Read group status Read gross weights on channels 1-8 Write setpoint (value = 163.34)

Diagnosis and Troubleshooting The event message is a group message for all faults concerning the fieldbus connection. These are: n Different station addresses sent to the master and scales. n There is a problem with the cabling between the fieldbus connection and main board. n The fieldbus cable is defective or incorrectly connected. n The timeout parameter has been set at too small a value. Change the parameterisation of the scales. n An unacceptable ID (data address) was identified in the telegram of the master to the scale. Also refer to the section on fault codes (also refer to Modbus-RTU).


BV-H2359GB/0902

65

5.2 Modbus/TCP

5.2.3

Parameterising the controller Parameterising should be carried out with controllers both with the operator panel and DISOPLAN. The parameter description applies to both pieces of equipment.

66

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.2 Modbus/TCP Parameters

Value range

Default value

Explanation

Protocol type

All fieldbus protocols

OFF

Protocol selection: in this case, Modbus/TCP

Timeout Host

0-300 s

0s

The parameter is used for interface monitoring. ZERO meansthatthe interface is not monitored.

IP address

192.168.240.1


Network mask

255.255.255.0


Gateway

0.0.0.0


Notes If you operate the controller on a local subnetwork with an internal network card for this network, it would make sense to set the PC network adapter as follows: 192.168.240.254 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.240.n where n=1-253 n IP addresses have to be unambiguous. This is why you should ask your system administrator for valid addresses that are not in use.

n n n n

IP address: Network mask: Gateway: Controller 1-n:


BV-H2359GB/0902

67

5.3 Ethernet/IP

5.3

Ethernet/IP The DISOMAT uses the Ethernet/IP protocol to exchange data through an Ethernet network with a suitable control system.

5.3.1

Start Up n n n n n

5.3.2

The Functionality of Ethernet Connections n

5.3.3

Releasing the Ethernet/IP option on the unit (separate ordered item) Activating the Ethernet/IP protocol type in the Fieldbus item on the menu Configuring communication – You can find details in the operating manuals Defining the data to be transmitted. Start communication by the master

The module can be employed as a group 2 and group 3 server in the Ethernet/IP network. Further information can be found on the ODVA website.

User Data Structure You can find details on and examples of the user data structure in the chapter on the Profibus User Data Structure.

68

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.3 Ethernet/IP

5.3.4

Configuring the Network in RSLogix 5000" · · · · · · ·

Setting up a new project in RSLogix Configuring the controller Selecting the EtherNet/IP Bridge Configuring the EtherNet/IP Bridge Adding DISOMAT to the I/O configuration Adding a generic Ethernet module Configuring a new Ethernet/IP module

·

This example applies to the parameter definition No Text / 1 ID

·

Setting the linking options for DISOMAT

·

Downloading the configuration


BV-H2359GB/0835

69

5.3 Ethernet/IP


70

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.3 Profibus DP protocol

5.3

Profibus DP protocol The general specification of the Profibus-DP protocol is in EN50170. The specification below describes the special properties for coupling a process control system and the controller. IMPORTANT: Please remember that the last physical subscriber has to terminate the Profibus with a terminating resistor. There may be communication malfunctions if this subscriber is taken by the bus.

Terminology The following chapters describe: HEXADECIMAL values in the form of 0x1234 and DECIMAL values in the form of 1234.

Logical hierarchy The process control system is bus master and the controllers are treated as individual slaves. One telegram cycle always consists of a query from the master (PLS) and a reply from the slave (controller). The bus master cyclically acquires a process image of the controller of no more than 70 bytes and cyclically transmits a command telegram to the controller of no more than 56 bytes. The master is notified of the current size of the process image by the selection of the correct modules from the equipment master data file (refer to the table on ‘Assigning the Parameter Setting of the Profibus Interface to Modules in the GSD File’ at the end of the chapter). Important: The controller is modeled as a modular slave. If a new module is activated on the master, the same set of parameters has been activated on the controller. The reverse is also true. For example: Set of parameters number ID Text block 4-byte text Module (refer to GSD) “Short Text - 4ID”


BV-H2359GB/0902

4

71


Data format The setpoints and readings are transmitted in the IEEE float format (IEEE 754, 32 bits) or the Siemens float format. The transmission always begins at the same time as the MSB..

Guaranteeing Transmission The transmission between the controller and the control system can be secured in the controller by TIMEOUT. The controller expects a telegram from the control system at certain intervals. Both the interval and the type of controller’s reaction to no telegrams (refer to the chapter on Event Messages in the operating manual) can be set on the controller via parameters. The setting TIMEOUT = 0 means that the data flow between the controller and control system is not monitored by the controller.

Routines Any routines important for specifying data are described in each section.

Subscriber addresses Every controller is given a slave address beginning with 0 in ascending order. The highest address it is possible to set is labeled MAXSLAVE in the following text. You can set the address by dialog on the controller and MAXSLAVE has the value 126.

5.3.1

Data segments We distinguish: The writing range with n control information, n predetermination values in the IEEE format, n Setpoints in the LONG integer format n Texts from the master to the controller (not with DISOMAT Satus) and the reading range with n status information n Readings in the IEEE format n Readings in the LONG integer format n The controller’s texts (not with DISOMAT Satus) Blocks of four bytes each can be unambiguously addressed with a two-byte identifier (ID; refer to the tables on “Available Data”).

72

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.3.2

Structure of user data This means that the telegrams of cyclical data transmission have the basic structure below: Protocol frame (Header)

Texts (TXT) Optional

User data Process data

Protocol frame (Trailer)

Figure 1 The basic structure of the Profibus telegrams The types below have been defined: n User data without a text range and with defined setpoint and process data (white) and as many as 8 additional values that can be selected via ID (grey). Also refer to Figure 2 n User data with a text range and with the selection of process data described above. Text range (TXT) You can read or write texts with as many as 128 bytes with the TXT telegram part. The section on “Text Transmission via Profibus DP” describes the necessary mechanisms of order/reply identifiers. We distinguish 4-and 20-byte text blocks where the longer variant should only be used with greater quantities of text to keep the transmission period low.

Process data range You can use the process data to transmit control words and setpoints (orders: master —> 6 controller) or state words and actual values (replies: controller —> master). The process data transmitted go into effect immediately.


BV-H2359GB/0902

73

74

C o m m S t a t

ID 1

PID 1

Gross unroun ded

Preset value 1

ID 1

Value1

Preset value 2

Gross in display format

PID 2

BV-H2359GB/0902

F C B

Text block

C o m m S t a t Gross unroun ded

Preset value 1

Text 4 Byte

ID 1

PID 1

Text Header 4 Byte

ID 3

ID 5

F C B

Text block

Text 20 Byte

F C B

Value1

ID 1

Value3

ID 4

Preset value 2


PID 2

Value2

ID 2

Text block

Data packets with 20-Byte text block

Text Header 4 Byte

F C B

Text block

Data packets with 4-Byte text block

F C B

F C B

Data packets without text block

ID 7

ID 3

C o m m S t a t ID 1

PID 1

Value2

ID 2

Value4

ID 6

ID 5

Gross unroun ded

Preset value 1

32 Bytes

Value3

ID 4

32 Bytes

Value5

ID 8

32 Bytes

ID 7

Value1

ID 1

Value5

ID 8

Value7

Preset value 2


PID 2

Value4

ID 6

Value6

ID 3

Value2

ID 2

Value6

Value8

ID 5

Value3

ID 4

Value7

ID 7

Value4

ID 6

Value8

Value5

ID 8

Value6

Value7

Value8

38 - 70 Bytes

40 - 56 Bytes

22 - 54 Bytes

24 - 40 Bytes

14 - 46 Bytes

16 - 32 Bytes

max. Paketlängen


Figure 2 The user data structure of Profibus telegrams


5.3 Profibus DP protocol The bright areas are the minimum parts of the telegram and they cannot be changed. You can add as many IDs piecewise to the telegrams (depending upon the set parameters) as needed in the current application. Note: Reading-writing in double words in S7 systems: please remember that the double words cannot be read or written with the SFC14 and SFC15 function modules of the S7 systems. Instead, use direct peripheral access.

Examples of telegrams The following figure shows the basic structure of Profibus telegrams. The first line is the telegram from the bus master to the controller and the second line is the controller’s reply. Example 1: Data transmission without a text block and without variable user-defined identifiers (ID) Parameter settings: Text block number ID

no 0

Telegram master to the controllers. FKB bin. out (2 bytes)

Commands

ID

Manual tare or FKB analog

ID


(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

Reply of the controller FKB bin in

Status Scale displayed

Mirror-ID in this case: zero

Scale showed gross

(2 bytes)

Gross Scale displayed rounded off in the display format

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

The commando telegram that changes manual tare for scale/group 1 and specifies the first analog value of the analog function block: FKB binary xx xx xx xx

command value xx xx

ID manual tare1 value of manual tare 1

ID FKB1/1

2000

42 C8 00 00

42 10 00 00

200C

The values for (control) commands 00 01 Taring on the scale displayed 00 02 Clear tare on the scale displayed 00 03 Zero setting on the scale displayed


BV-H2359GB/0902

75


Remarks The identifier and corresponding values in the telegram from the master to the controller are always expected in precisely this order and position. If an ID is zero,the corresponding value will not be evaluated. The control and status information is always combined into packets of four bytes. If the wrong identifier is used, the datawill be rejected. These specification data have to be pending at least 100 ms to ensure that the controller can identify them without any problems. The values in the reply telegram are identified using the position in the telegram. This is the reason why identifiers are not needed. Example 2: Data transmission without a text block and with 2 variable user-defined identifiers (ID) Parameter settings Text block number ID

no 2

Telegram of master to the controller FKB PLS-DIn 1-16

Comma nds

ID

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)


ID


ID1

ID 2

(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

Reply of the controller FKB PLSDOut 1-16

The status on the scale displayed

(2 Byte)

(2 bytes)

Mirror-ID = ID 1

(2 bytes)

Gross on the scale displayed

Gross The scale displayed rounded in the display format

Value ID 1

Value ID 2

(4 bytes)

(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

Remarks: You can make the controller enter the desired values into the reply telegram by adding identifiers in the telegram of the master to the controller. The order of values corresponds to the order of the identifiers. The identifiers may come from all data segments, which enables you to read back the predetermination values. If an identifier is identified as incorrect, its value in the reply will be set to zero. The identifiers should not be changed in regular user data operation because this would make it impossible to unambiguously assign the ID to the value at the switch-over point. Example 3: Data transmission with text blocks and without variable user-defined identifiers (ID). Parameter settings:

76

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.3 Profibus DP protocol Text block number ID

4-byte text block (not with DISOMAT Satus) 0

The text block is always set in front of the other data. Telegram of master to the controller Text header

Text-user data

FKB PLS-DIn

Commands

ID

4 bytes

4 bytes

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)


ID


(4 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

Reply of the controller Text header

Text-user data

FKB PLSDout

The status on the scale displayed

Mirror-ID in this case: ZERO

Gross on the scale displayed

4 bytes

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(2 bytes)

(4 bytes)

4 Byte

Gross The scale displayed in the display format rounded 4 bytes)

Text transmission via Profibus DP All explanations in this chapter relate to the 4-byte text block and the same applies correspondingly to the 20-byte text block. It only differs in the number of text-user data that can be transmitted per cycle.

Text header AK

Text-user data Text-ID

AKT

MAX

As much as 4- or 20-byte text-user data (unused bytes should filled with zero)

Figure 3 The basic structure of the text block The meaning of the byte in the text header AK

The first byte contains the order or reply identifier Refer to the table further below for details.

Text-ID

The second byte contains the text identifier (1-5) that specifies the text to be transmitted in greater detail. Refer to the Text-ID table for details.

AKT

AKT specifies the current index value in texts that cannot be transmitted in one cycle. If you select short (4-byte) text, this gives you the sequence 0,4,8,... for the index value. If you select long (20-byte) text, this gives you the sequence 0,20,40,... for the Index Value. Important: AKT has to accept the value of MAX at the end of the text transmission for least one telegram cycle. This indicates to the controller that all text segments were transmitted and that the text should now be accepted in the controller.

MAX

The byte always contains the total length of the text user data in bytes.


BV-H2359GB/0902

77

5.3 Profibus DP protocol The following text types are implemented: Meaning

Text-ID

String text 1

1

String text 2

2

String text 3

3

String text 4

4

String text 5

5

You can find the meaning of the order identifier in Table 1 for the order telegram (master —> controller). Order identifier

Meaning

0

No order

1

Read the text from the scale

2

Write the text for the scale

Tab. 1 Order identifiers (AK) master station -> DISOMAT You can find the meaning of the reply identifier in Table 2 for the reply telegram (controller —> master). Reply identifier

Meaning

0

No order

2

Text fragment successfully transmitted

7

Order cannot be executed

Tab. 2 Reply identifiers (AK) DISOMAT -> master station The master has to repeat an order until he has received the appropriate reply. The master recognises the reply to an order placed by evaluating the reply identifier If text information is not needed in cyclical operation, the order identifier has to be set to “no order”.

78

BV-H2359GB/0902



Read text (controller text transmitted to the master) If there is a new text, the text is requested piecewise, but no more than 4 or 20 bytes per cycle. While the maximum index always gives the length of the text, n the current index has the sequence 0, 4, 8 with the 4-byte text block to the maximum index. n and the current index has the sequence 0, 20, 40 in the 20-byte text block to the maximum index. Example: Reading a text 21 bytes long with the 4-byte text block (“This is an example”)

xx any characters 01 01 00 12 xx xx xx xx 02 01 00 12 54 68 69 73 01 01 04 12 xx xx xx xx 02 01 04 12 20 69 73 20 01 01 08 12 xx xx xx xx 02 01 08 12 61 6E 20 65 01 01 0C 12 xx xx xx xx 02 01 0C 12 78 61 6D 70 01 01 10 12 xx xx xx xx 02 01 10 12 6C 65 00 00 01 01 12 12 xx xx xx xx


1. request 1. reply (This) 2. request 2. reply ( is ) 3. request 3. reply (an e) 4. request 4. reply (xamp) 5. request 5. reply (le) end telegram (The master has read the entire text)

BV-H2359GB/0902

79


Write a text (transmit the text of the master to the controller) The text is transmitted piecewise, no more than 4 or 20 bytes per cycle. While the maximum index always give the length of the text, n the current index has the sequence 0, 4, 8 in the 4-byte text block to the maximum index. n and the current index has the sequence 0, 20, 40 in the 20-byte text block to the maximum index. Example: Specifying a text 21 bytes long with the 4-byte text block (“This is an example”) (The replies of the controller are not described) 02 01 00 12 54 68 69 73 (This) 02 01 04 12 20 69 73 20 ( is ) 02 01 08 12 61 6E 20 65 (an e) 02 01 0C 12 78 61 6D 70 (xamp) 02 01 10 12 6C 65 00 00 (le) 01 01 12 12 xx xx xx xx end telegram (The application accepts the text) The end telegram where the current index is set equal to the maximum index always has to transmit regardless of the length of the text. It is only transmitted to the scale after transmitting this packet..

80

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.3.3

Data from the process control system DP write register (control information and analog predetermination values) Description without a text block

byte

Code

Contents

0-1

0x1002

Function block PLS-DIn 1-16 PLS-DIn 9-16 is transmitted first followed by PLS-DIn 1-8

2-3

0x1000

1 byte unused Command number in LOW-byte (1 byte) Refer to the list of available data

4-5

ID1 analog specification (refer to the list)

6-9

Value for the ID1 analog specification

10 - 11

ID2 analog specification (refer to the list)

12 - 15

Value for the ID2 analog specification

16 - 17

ID1

18 - 19

ID2

20 - 21

ID3

22 - 23

ID4

24 - 25

ID5

26 - 27

ID6

28 - 29

ID7

30 - 31

ID8

The commands on the scale displayed Please key in the coding of the command into the command byte. This action is immediately triggered after correct reception. When giving be ‘Clear Tare’ command, please remember that the manual tare value is set to ZERO at the same time as the command. The identifiers for PLS-DIn 1-16 and the commands are not transmitted. They are only used to refer to the list of the “Available Data”. Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for valid setpoints The procedure for specifying the values via fieldbus The values addressed above can be specified by one of the following sources: n Data processing procedure n Local operating panel (menu tree or function key(s)) n Fieldbus


BV-H2359GB/0902

81

5.3 Profibus DP protocol 1. Setpoint and material number: The fieldbus is always the sole determinant source when the ID in the telegram assigned to the value is transmitted from the master to the controller. Any values from other sources are then overwritten in the next fieldbus cycle. If you want to use the fieldbus to change the value, set the desired value in the fieldbus protocol and then transmit it to the controller together with its ID. To allow other sources to specify, the IDs for setpoint or material number have to be set to zero or the ID on of a different value in the fieldbus telegram. That means that the specification IDs determine which source has priority. 2. Other values: The controller accepts the manual tare of the scale displayed and the data PLS-AIN-1 - PLS-AIN-4 after changing the corresponding values. The controller requires at least 100 ms to accept. It can be accepted by waiting this period or also by reading back current values. Reading back is done by setting the corresponding read-ID.

82

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.3.4

Data on the process control system DP read register (status information and readings) Description without a text block byte

Identifier

Contents

0-1

0x300C

Function block PLS-Dout 1-16

2-3

0x3000

The scale status on the scale displayed

4-5

0x3002

Request (ID1 mirrored)

6-9

0x4000

Gross weight on the scale displayed unrounded in kg

10 - 13

0x4010

Gross weight on the scale displayed rounded off in the display format

14 - 17

See list for ID

Value 1

18-21

See list for ID

Value 2

22-25

See list for ID

Value 3

26-29

See list for ID

Value 4

30-33

See list for ID

Value 5

34-37

See list for ID

Value 6

38-41

See list for ID

Value 7

42-45

See list for ID

Value 8

Word = 16-bit data word Long = data double word Note: When range 1 and range 2 are set, the scale is in range 3. The bold print identifiers are not transmitted and they are only used to refer to the list of the “Available Data”. Refer to the chapter on Available Data for the Controller Data for the reading ID list


BV-H2359GB/0902

83


5.3.5

Profibus-DP interface parameters

What the parameters mean: q

Internal address ? station address for the Profibus (0-126)

q

Number of IDs

identifiers of all values that should be requested for specific customers (0-8).

q

Text block

This parameter defines whether a fixed text block is put ahead of the normal user data and, if this is the case, its size (off, 4 bytes, 20 bytes).

q

Data format

The format for all floating point numbers (IEEE, SIEMENS-KG)

q

Timeout for monitoring the interface in seconds; 0s = no monitoring 1-300 s = value range

The number of IDs, text block and internal address parameters are only used after reset and the old (i.e., effective) values are showed until then. Note: If monitoring is activated, the controller shows both timeouts and faulty identifiers (ID) as communication malfunctions.

84

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.3.6

Planning aids (drawings, rules) You can load the appropriate Profibus planning file (.gsd) from the address below: http://support.schenckprocess.com- Steuerungen\Profibus. You can find the controller in the hardware configurator of an S7 under: Profibus-DP/weitere Feldgeräte/Regler/DISOMAT xxxx The names of the GSD modules are structured according to the following scheme: Text block, number IDs For example: · · · ·

No Text, 0 ID No Text, 4 ID Short Text, 2 ID Long Text, 4 ID etc.


BV-H2359GB/0902

85



86

BV-H2359GB/0902


5.4 DeviceNet Protocol

5.4

DeviceNet Protocol Terminology The following chapters describe: HEXADECIMAL values in the form of 0x1234 and DECIMAL values in the form of 1234.

Logical hierarchy The process control system is the bus master and the controllers are treated as individual slaves. One telegram cycle always consists of a query from the master (PLS) and a reply from the slave. The bus master cyclically acquires a process image of the controller and cyclically transmits a command telegram to the controller

Data Format The setpoints and readings are transmitted in the IEEE float format (IEEE 754, 32 bits) or the Siemens float format. They are transmitted according to standard procedure starting with the MSB. You can use the swapping parameter to change the order all bytes.

Guaranteeing Transmission Timeout can guarantee transmission between the controller and control system in the controller so that the controller expects a telegram from the control system at particular intervals. You can use parameters to set both the interval and the type of reaction from the controller to no telegram on the controller. The setting TIMEOUT = 0 means that the data flow between the controller and control system is not monitored by the controller.

Routines Any routines important for specifying data are described in the specific section.

Subscriber addresses Every controller is given a slave address beginning with 0 in ascending order. The highest address that can be set is marked in the following text as MAXSLAVE. You can set the address by dialog on the controller. MAXSLAVE is 63.


BV-H2359GB/0902

87


5.4.1

Structure of user data The data content is identical to the Profibus-DP coupling (refer to the chapter on Data Segments and User Data).

5.4.2

Parameterising DeviceNet interface parameters

What the parameters mean: q Internal address station address for DeviceNet (0-63) q Timeout for monitoring the interface in seconds; 0s = no monitoring 1-300 s = value range q q

Baud rate on the DeviceNet (125 kB, 250 kB and 500 kB) User data “no text/4 ID”, “text/2 ID”, establishing the composition of the data to be requested via DeviceNet. 4 customised data can be requested WITHOUT text and 2 customised data can be requested WITH text.

q

Data format

q

Swapping

Format for all floating point numbers (IEEE, SIEMENS-KG) order of bytes for the floating point numbers and words on the bus (BIG Endian, BYTE Swap, WORT Swap, LITTLE Endian) The setting LITTLE Endian make sense in connection with ROCKWELL control systems.

Note: When monitoring is activated, both timeouts and faulty identifiers (ID) are shown as communication malfunctions.

88

BV-H2359GB/0902


Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

5.5


Diagnosis and Troubleshooting Faulty functions from event messages are shown if you activated (selected) one of the fieldbuses: The A6020:PLS No Longer Transmitting event message The event is set when the host no longer operates the controller within the configured timeout. Some other possible causes for this message are: · · ·

Different station addresses sent to the master and scales. There is a problem with the cabling between the fieldbus connection and main board. The fieldbus cable is defective or incorrectly connected. See the chapter ‘Fieldbus Hardware’ for the correct connection.

The timeout parameter has been set at too small a value. Change the parameterisation of the scales. M1520-X: Communication Faults event message X == 1 : A specification ID in the telegram is not known to the controller. X == 2 : A reading ID in the telegram is not known to the controller. X == 3: There is no connection to the host in the case of Ethernet/IP.


BV-H2359GB/0902

89


Diagnosis and Troubleshooting


90

BV-H2359GB/0902


Setpoint

5.6.1

4096

10

16

Num.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW

Command number

(dec)

Meaning

DW

DW

Data Type


The meaning of the command numbers

1000

Commands

(hex)

(hex)

(dec)

Modbus Modbus/TCP

(dec)

Identifiers

Identifiers

Profibus DeviceNet

WRITE fieldbus

Available data

5.6

BV-H2359GB/0902

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Added Information

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

X

DISOMAT Satus

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

X

DISOMAT Opus

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

X

DISOMAT Tersus

91

92

(hex)

(hex) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 71 72 73 74 75

DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW

(dec)

Meaning

DW

Data Type

BV-H2359GB/0902

(dec)

Modbus Modbus/TCP

Profibus DeviceNet

(dec)

Identifiers

Identifiers

Connect scale

Connect scale

Connect scale

Connect scale

Connect scale

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Clear tare

Taring

Zero setting

Added Information

DISOMAT Satus

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 1

Twin-unit

DISOMAT Tersus


DISOMAT Opus

4098

(hex)

1002

32

78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 128

DW DW DW DW DW DW DW

DW DW DW DW

8200

8204

8208

2008

200C

2010

100

108

106

104

102

256

264

262

260

258

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW


8192

8196

2000

2004

PLS -AIn-2

PLS -AIn-1

unused

unused

Manual tare

Function blocks (16 bits) PLS-DIn-xx

77

DW

76

DW

(dec)

Meaning

DW

Data Type

Predetermination values (floating point values, IEEE)

20

(hex)

(dec)

Profibus DeviceNet

(dec)

Identifiers

Modbus Modbus/TCP

Identifiers

BV-H2359GB/0902

Refer to the loaded function block linkage for the meaning of the bits

Acknowledging the highest pending fault

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Connect scale

Connect scale

Connect scale

Added Information

X

X

Scale displayed

X

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Satus

X

X

Scale displayed

X

X

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Opus

X

X

Scale displayed

X

X

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 1

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Tersus

93

8220

8224

8228

8232

200C

2020

2024

2028

10A

266

1536

1552

1568

1584

1600

610

620

630

640

276

274

272

270

268

600

114

112

110

10E

10C

32772

32776

8004

8008

94

32768

8000

804

802

800

2052

2050

2048

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type

BV-H2359GB/0902

Predetermination values (integers, ULONG)

Texts/string (ASCI

8212

8216

2014

(hex)

(dec)

(hex)

2018

Modbus Modbus/TCP

Profibus DeviceNet

(dec)

Identifiers

Identifiers

Added Information

Material number 1

Time and coding as per Profibus specifications

Date and coding as per Profibus specifications

String 5

String 4

String 3

String 2

String 1

Setpoint 2 in kg

Material number 2

Setpoint 1 in kg

Material number 1

PLS -AIn-4

PLS -AIn-3

(dec)

Meaning

X

X

X

A maximum of 25 characters





X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Satus

X

X

X






X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus


X

X

X






X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Opus

(hex)

12288

4864

4864

4865

4866

4867

4868

4869

4870

4871

4872

4873

4874

4875

4876

4877

4878

4879

1300

1300

1301

1302

1303

1304

1305

1306

1307

1308

1309

130A

130B

130C

130D

130E

130F

DW

Data Type


3000

Status information

Modbus/TCP

(hex)

DeviceNet

(dec)

Modbus

Profibus

(dec)

Identifiers

READ fieldbus

Controller data

Identifiers

5.6.2 Added Information

BV-H2359GB/0902

This is a multi-range scale

This is a multi-interval scale

The scale is in the zero setting range

The scale is in range 2

The scale is in range 1

Measuring is being initialised: No weights are being established

Scale in no-motion

Scale tared

The weight is not valid

Scale is exactly zero

Manual or fixed tare is set

The scale is in the overrange

The scale is in the underrange

Status (as data word, 16 its)

Meaning

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Satus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Opus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Tersus

95

Modbus/TCP

(hex)

(dec)

12292

12296

12300

12304

12308

DeviceNet

(hex)

3004

3008

300C

3010

3014

96

Modbus

Profibus

5024

5024

5025

5026

5027

5028

5029

5030

13A0

13A0

13A1

13A2

13A3

13A4

13A5

13A6

4992

5008

1380

1390

4976

4960

1360

1370

4944

4928

1350

4912

1340

4896

1320

1330

4880

1310

(dec)

Identifiers

Identifiers

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

BV-H2359GB/0902

Num.

Num.

Num.

Num.

Num.

Data Type

Added Information

The load cell cable is broken to channel 1

Measuring signal to large channel 1

Initialising channel 1

Status (as a double word, 16 bits)

Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details)



Binary function blocks (16 bits) PLS-DOut-xx Refer to the loaded function block linkage for the meaning of the bits

Fault ident

The LE group of the highest pending fault

The fault number of the highest pending fault

The fault class of the highest pending fault 0:no result 1:message 2:warning 3:alarm 4:fault

Mirror-ID (first requested ID)

Meaning

Scale 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Disobox 1 channels 1-2

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus


Scale 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Opus

X

DISOMAT Satus

12316

12320

12324

301C

3020

3024

5152

1420

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

Data Type


5136

5120

1400

1410

5104

5088

13E0

13F0

5072

5056

13C0

13D0

5040

13B0

13AF

12312

5038

5039

13AE

3018

5037

13AA

13AD

13A9

5035

5034

13A8

(hex)

5036

5033

13A7

DeviceNet

13AC

5032

(hex)

(dec)

Profibus

13AB

5031

Modbus

Modbus/TCP

(dec)

Identifiers

Identifiers

Added Information

BV-H2359GB/0902

Dimension (0:kg 1:g 2:t 3:lb) High-Word/Low-Byte

Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details)







The load cell cable is broken to channel 2

Measuring signal to large channel 2

Initialising channel 2

Meaning

X

DISOMAT Satus

X

DISOMAT Opus

X








X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus

97

12332

12336

12340

302C

3030

3034

1280

1296

1312

1328

1344

510

520

530

540

5296

14B0

500

5280

14A0

5264

1490

5232

5248

1470

1480

5216

1460

5184

5200

1440

1450

5168

1430

98

4000

16384

700

1792

Readings (floating point values, IEEE)

Texts/string (ASCII)

12328

3028

(dec)

Modbus/TCP

(hex)

(dec)

(hex)

Modbus

Profibus

DeviceNet

Identifiers

Identifiers

BV-H2359GB/0902

DDW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

DW

Data Type

Added Information

GROSS weight

String 5

String 4

String 3

String 2

String 1

unrounded in kg

Feed status of feed operation 2 feeding status 0/1/2 “ none / active /stopped

Feed status of feed operation 1 feeding status 0/1/2 “ none / active /stopped

Physical digital outputs

Physical digital inputs






Meaning

Scale displayed






X

X

X

DISOMAT Satus

Scale displayed






X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus


Scale displayed






X

X

X

DISOMAT Opus

16448

16452

16456

16460

4040

4044

4048

404C

704

726

724

722

720

71E

71C

71A

718

716

714

712

710

70E

70C

70A

708

706

1830

1828

1826

1824

1822

1820

1818

1816

1814

1812

1810

1808

1806

1804

1802

1800

1798

1796

1794

(dec)

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type


16440

16436

4034

16444

16432

4030

403C

16428

402C

4038

16424

401C

4028

16412

4018

16416

16408

4014

16420

16404

4010

4024

16400

400C

4020

16392

16396

4008

702

(hex)

(dec)

16388

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

4004

Modbus

Profibus

(hex)

Identifiers

Identifiers

Balance (current sort) 100000 multiple (kg)

Balance (current sort) 100000 rest (kg)

X

X

X

X

X

BV-H2359GB/0902

Registered consecutive number (float data format)

X

Registered consecutive number (integer data format) X

Registered net rounded in the display format

Registered tare rounded in the display format

PLS -AOut-4

PLS -AOut-3

PLS -AOut-2

X

X

X

X

X

Rounded in the display Scale displayed format



Balance (total) 100000 multiple (kg)

PLS -AOut-1

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Satus


unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

Added Information

Balance (total) 100000 rest (kg)

NET weight

dW/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dW/dt

TARE weight

Meaning

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Opus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

Scale displayed

DISOMAT Tersus

99

100

16548

40A4

16536

4098

16540

16532

4094

16544

16528

4090

409C

16524

408C

40A0

16516

16520

4084

4088

16512

4080

73C

16504

16508

4078

407C

73A

752

750

74E

74C

74A

748

746

744

742

740

73E

738

736

734

16500

4068

732

730

4074

16488

4064

16492

16484

4060

72E

16496

16480

405C

72A

72C

4070

16476

4058

406C

16468

16472

4054

728

1874

1872

1870

1868

1866

1864

1862

1860

1858

1856

1854

1852

1850

1848

1846

1844

1842

1840

1838

1836

1834

1832

(dec)

(hex)

(dec)

16464

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

4050

Modbus

Profibus

(hex)

Identifiers

Identifiers

BV-H2359GB/0902

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

Setpoint in kg

Material number

Setpoint in t

Material number

Meaning

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

Feed operation 2

Feed operation 2

Feed operation 1

Feed operation 1

Added Information

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

X

X

DISOMAT Satus

Disobox1-Channel 6

Disobox1-Channel 5

Disobox1-Channel 4

Disobox1-Channel 3

Disobox1-Channel 2

Disobox1-Channel 1

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus


Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

X

X

DISOMAT Opus

16564

16568

16572

16576

16580

16584

16588

16592

16596

16600

16604

40B4

40B8

40BC

40C0

40C4

40C8

40CC

40D0

40D4

40D8

40DC

756

76E

76C

76A

768

766

764

762

760

75E

75C

75A

758

1902

1900

1898

1896

1894

1892

1890

1888

1886

1884

1882

1880

1878

1876

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type


16556

16560

16552

40A8

40AC

(hex)

(dec)

(hex)

40B0

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

(dec)

Modbus

Profibus

754

Identifiers

Identifiers

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

Meaning

DISOMAT Satus

BV-H2359GB/0902

Rounded in the display format








Rounded in the display Scale 1 format




unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

Added Information

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

DISOMAT Opus

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Twin-unit

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 2

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Scale 1

Disobox1-Channel 8

Disobox1-Channel 7

DISOMAT Tersus

101

(hex)

(dec)

16608

16612

16616

16620

16624

16628

16632

16636

16640

16644

16648

16652

16656

16660

16664

16668

16672

16676

16680

16684

16688

(hex)

40E0

40E4

40E8

40EC

40F0

40F4

40F8

40FC

4100

4104

4108

410C

4110

4114

4118

411C

4120

4124

4128

412C

4130

102

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

798

796

794

792

790

78E

78C

78A

788

786

784

782

780

77E

77C

77A

778

776

774

772

1944

1942

1940

1938

1936

1934

1932

1930

1928

1926

1924

1922

1920

1918

1916

1914

1912

1910

1908

1906

1904

(dec)

Modbus

Profibus

770

Identifiers

Identifiers

BV-H2359GB/0902

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

GROSS weight

Meaning

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

Added Information

DISOMAT Satus

Disobox 2 channel 8

Disobox 2 channel 7

Disobox 2 channel 6

Disobox 2 channel 5

Disobox 2 channel 4

Disobox 2 channel 3

Disobox 2 channel 2

Disobox 2 channel 1

DISOMAT Tersus


DISOMAT Opus

16700

16704

16708

16712

16716

16720

16724

16728

16732

16736

16740

16744

16748

16752

413C

4140

4144

4148

414C

4150

4154

4158

415C

4160

4164

4168

416C

4170

7B8

7B6

7B4

7B2

7B0

7AE

7AC

7AA

7A8

7A6

7A4

7A2

7A0

79E

79C

1976

1974

1972

1970

1968

1966

1964

1962

1960

1958

1956

1954

1952

1950

1948

1946

(dec)

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type


16696

4138

79A

(hex)

(dec)

16692

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

4134

Modbus

Profibus

(hex)

Identifiers

Identifiers

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

Meaning

BV-H2359GB/0902










unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

unrounded in kg

Added Information

DISOMAT Satus

DISOMAT Opus

DISOMAT Tersus

103

16764

16768

16772

16776

16780

16784

16788

16792

16796

16800

16804

16808

417C

4180

4184

4188

418C

4190

4194

4198

419C

41A0

41A4

41A8

104

16760

4178

7D4

7D2

7D0

7CE

7CC

7CA

7C8

7C6

7C4

7C2

7C0

7BE

7BC

7BA

2004

2002

2000

1998

1996

1994

1992

1990

1988

1986

1984

1982

1980

1978

(dec)

(hex)

(dec)

16756

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

4174

Modbus

Profibus

(hex)

Identifiers

Identifiers

BV-H2359GB/0902

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type

dG/dt

dW/dt

dW/dt

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

GROSS weight

NET weight

dG/dt

TARE weight

Meaning

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms












Added Information

DISOMAT Satus

DISOMAT Tersus


DISOMAT Opus

16828

16832

16836

16840

16844

16848

41BC

41C0

41C4

41C8

41CC

41D0

7EE

7EC

7EA

7E8

7E6

7E4

7E2

7E0

7DE

7DC

7DA

7D8

28676

28680

28684

7004

7008

700C

906

904

902

900

2310

2308

2306

2304

2030

2028

2026

2024

2022

2020

2018

2016

2014

2012

2010

2008

2006

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

DDW

Data Type


28672

7000

Readings (integers, ULONG)

16860

16824

41B8

41DC

16820

41B4

16852

16816

41B0

16856

16812

41AC

41D4

(hex)

(dec)

(hex)

41D8

Modbus/TCP

DeviceNet

(dec)

Modbus

Profibus

7D6

Identifiers

Identifiers

Feed operation 2

Feed operation 2

Feed operation 1

Feed operation 1

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms

kg / 100 ms

Added Information

Registration time

Registration date

BV-H2359GB/0902

The current time Coding according to the Profibus specifications

The current date Coding according to the Profibus specifications

unused

unused

Current residual value

Current actual value

unused

unused

Current residual value

Current actual value

dW/dt

dW/dt

dW/dt

dW/dt

dW/dt

Meaning

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Satus

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Opus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DISOMAT Tersus

105

106

BV-H2359GB/0902



5.7

Date/time format

DISOMAT ® B plus, Opus, DISOBOX, Datenkommunikation Schenck Process

BV -H2316DE/0715

107

5.7 Date/time format


108

BV-H2359GB/0902


DISOCONT® Weighfeeder Operating Instructions

DE

Bedienhinweise

Dosierbandwaage

GB

Operating Instructions

Weighfeeder

FR

Instructions de service

Doseur pondéral à bande

IT

Istruzioni per l´uso

Bilancia pesatrice con nastro

ES

Instrucciones de uso

Báscula dosificadora

NL

Bedieninstructies

Banddoseertoestel

PT

Manual de instruções

Balança dosadora de correia

Service

BV-H2061AA

Service

Service après-vente

Qualität und Zuverlässigkeit sind die Grundlagen der Schenck Unternehmensphilosophie, weltweit. Deshalb bieten wir Ihnen ein umfangreiches Service-Konzept, von der strengen Qualitätskontrolle über die Montage und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur lückenlosen Betreuung an. Wir sind jederzeit für Sie da!

Quality and reliability form the basis for Schenck's corporate philosophy all over the world. That's why we offer you an extensive service strategy starting with our stringent quality control through assembly and commissioning right down to all-round support. We're always there for you.

La qualité et la fiabilité - sur cette base repose la philosophie d'entreprise de Schenck, dans le monde entier. C'est pourquoi, nous vous offrons un large concept de service, depuis le contrôle qualité sévère, en passant par le montage et la mise en service, jusqu'à l'assistance sans lacune. Nous sommes toujours à votre service !

Helpdesk - kostenfrei (Mo. - Fr., mindestens 8.00 – 17.00 Uhr MEZ)

Free Helpdesk (Monday through Friday from at least 8 o'clock to 5 p.m. CET)

Support Clients - appel gratuit (LU-VE, au moins 8H–17H, heure de l'Europe centrale)

Während unserer normalen Bürozeiten stehen Ihnen in jedem Geschäftsbereich Service-Spezialisten zur Problemfall- / Störfallanalyse zur Verfügung.

Service specialists are available to you in every department during our normal office hours for analying problems and malfunctions.

Pendant nos heures de bureau normales, dans chacune de nos divisions vous trouverez nos spécialistes en matière d'analyses de problèmes / défaillances à votre disposition.

Heavy Building materials, mining, foundry, steel and cement Phone: +49 6151 1531-3138 Fax: +49 6151 1531-3270 [email protected]

Vibrating & Screening Technology Phone: +49 6151 1531-3525 Fax: +49 6151 1531-3096 [email protected]

Light

Spare Parts & Components

Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and pharmaceuticals Phone: +49 6151 1531-2971 Fax: +49 6151 1531-2668 [email protected]

Phone: +49 6151 1531-1758 Fax: +49 6151 1531-3632 [email protected] [email protected]

Transport Automation All industries with logistics processes and trains Phone: +49 6151 1531-2448 Fax: +49 6151 1531-1369 [email protected]

Individuelles Telefon Consulting – kostenpflichtig

Individual phone consulting (fee required)

Consultation individuelle téléphonique – appel à titre onéreux


(Monday through Friday from at least 8 o'clock to 5 p.m. CET)

(LU-VE, au moins 8H–17H, heure de l'Europe centrale)

Sie wünschen eine Inbetriebnahme mit telefonischer Unterstützung eines Service-Spezialisten oder eine Online-Diagnose / Optimierung Ihres Systems? Wir sind für Sie da. Planen Sie mit uns Ihren Wunschtermin.

Do you want one of our service specialists to give you phone support in commissioning your system or on-line diagnosis / system optimisation? We're there for you. Schedule an appointment with us whenever you need it.

Vous souhaitez une mise en service avec l'assistance téléphonique d'un spécialiste de service, ou un diagnostic / l'optimisation en ligne de votre système ? Nous sommes à votre disposition. Projetez avec nous votre date de rendez-vous.

Kundenservice 24h Notfall-Hotline – kostenfrei

Free 24 h Customer Service Hotline

Service après-vente - Ligne d'urgence 24h/24 – appel gratuit

Sie haben einen Stör- / Problemfall außerhalb unserer normalen Arbeitszeiten. Kein Problem, Sie können auch außerhalb unserer Bürozeiten jederzeit einen Schenck-Servicemitarbeiter zur Problem- / Störfallannahme, Service-Disposition und ‚Ersten Hilfe’ erreichen.

You have a malfunction or problem outside of our normal business hours. No problem. You can reach a Schenck service technician at any time outside of our office hours for recording problems or malfunctions, service scheduling and 'first aid'.

Vous avez une panne / un problème en dehors de nos heures de travail normales. Pas de problème ; vous pouvez toujours joindre quelqu'un du personnel de service de Schenck qui prendra note de votre problème / panne, qui se chargera de le / la transmettre et qui vous portera 'Premiers secours' - même en dehors de nos heures de bureau.

24h Notfall-Hotline: +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation und statische WägetechnikTransport +49 171 2 251195 Heavy Industry, Light Industry ohne statische Wägetechnik

24h Emergency-Hotline : +49 172 6 501700 Automation and Static Weighing Equipment +49 171 2 251195 Heavy Industry, Light Industry excluding Static Weighing Equipment

Ligne d'urgence 24h/24 : +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation (automatisation du transport) et technique du pesage statique +49 171 2 251195 Heavy Industry, Light Industry sans technique du pesage statique

Copyright 2006 Schenck Process GmbH Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany www.schenckprocess.com Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Jegliche Vervielfältigung dieser Dokumentation, gleich nach welchem Verfahren, ist ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Schenck Process GmbH, auch auszugsweise, untersagt.

All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation, regardless of method, without prior permission by Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.

Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction de cette documentation, même partielle, et par quelque procédé que ce soit, sans l’autorisation préalable écrite de Schenck Process GmbH, est strictement interdite.

Änderungen ohne vorherige Ankündigung bleiben vorbehalten.

Subject to change without prior notice.

Sous réserve de modification sans avis préalable.


Nota : Traduction des instructions originales de service


Contents

1 DEUTSCH .......................................................................................... 1 1.1 Allgemeines............................................................................................................ 1 1.2 Sicherheitshinweise .............................................................................................. 1 1.3 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente.............................................................................. 3 1.3.1 Das Disocont Bediengerät ................................................................................ 3 1.3.2 Meldelampe....................................................................................................... 4 1.3.3 Statusfeld .......................................................................................................... 4 1.3.4 Anzeigefeld........................................................................................................ 5 1.3.5 Meldungsfeld ..................................................................................................... 6 1.3.6 Wichtige Tasten................................................................................................. 6 1.3.7 Funktionstasten................................................................................................. 6 1.3.8 Funktionsverteiler.............................................................................................. 7

2 ENGLISH ........................................................................................... 8 2.1 General.................................................................................................................... 8 2.2 Safety Instructions ................................................................................................ 8 2.3 Display and Control Elements............................................................................ 10 2.3.1 Disocont Control Unit ...................................................................................... 10 2.3.2 LED ................................................................................................................. 11 2.3.3 Status Field ..................................................................................................... 11 2.3.4 Display Field.................................................................................................... 12 2.3.5 Message Field ................................................................................................. 13 2.3.6 Important Keys ................................................................................................ 14 2.3.7 Function Keys ................................................................................................. 14 2.3.8 Function Distributor ......................................................................................... 15

3 FRANÇAIS ....................................................................................... 16 3.1 Généralités ........................................................................................................... 16 3.2 Instructions de sécurité ...................................................................................... 16 3.3 Eléments d'affichage et de service .................................................................... 18 3.3.1 L'unité de service Disocont ............................................................................. 18 3.3.2 Lampe témoin.................................................................................................. 19 3.3.3 Champ d'état ................................................................................................... 19 3.3.4 Champs de textes affichés.............................................................................. 20 3.3.5 Ligne de signalisations.................................................................................... 21 3.3.6 Touches importantes....................................................................................... 22 3.3.7 Touches de fonction........................................................................................ 22 3.3.8 Menu des fonctions ......................................................................................... 23

4 ITALIANO ........................................................................................ 24 4.1 Generalità ............................................................................................................. 24 4.2 Istruzioni di sicurezza ......................................................................................... 24 4.3 Elementi di indicazione e di comando............................................................... 26 4.3.1 L'unità di comando Disocont ........................................................................... 26 DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions BV-H2061AA, 0532

Schenck Process

I

Contents 4.3.2 Spia di segnalazione........................................................................................27 4.3.3 Righe di testo ...................................................................................................27 4.3.4 Campo di indicazione ......................................................................................28 4.3.5 Riga di messaggio ...........................................................................................29 4.3.6 Tasti importanti ................................................................................................30 4.3.7 Tasti di funzione...............................................................................................30 4.3.8 Distributore di funzioni .....................................................................................31

5 ESPAÑOL ........................................................................................ 32 5.1 Generalidades.......................................................................................................32 5.2 Instrucciones de seguridad.................................................................................32 5.3 Elementos de indicación y de mando ................................................................34 5.3.1 La unidad de mando Disocont .........................................................................34 5.3.2 Lámpara de señalización.................................................................................35 5.3.3 Zona de estado ................................................................................................35 5.3.4 Zona de indicación...........................................................................................36 5.3.5 Línea de señalización ......................................................................................37 5.3.6 Teclas importantes...........................................................................................38 5.3.7 Teclas de función.............................................................................................38 5.3.8 Menú de funciones...........................................................................................38

6 NEDERLANDS................................................................................. 40 6.1 Algemeen ..............................................................................................................40 6.2 Veiligheidsinstructies ..........................................................................................40 6.3 Display- en bedieningselementen ......................................................................42 6.3.1 Het Disocont bedieningstoestel .......................................................................42 6.3.2 Signaallampjes.................................................................................................42 6.3.3 Statusveld ........................................................................................................43 6.3.4 Displayveld.......................................................................................................44 6.3.5 Meldingsveld ....................................................................................................45 6.3.6 Belangrijke toetsen ..........................................................................................46 6.3.7 Functietoetsen .................................................................................................46 6.3.8 Functiemenu ....................................................................................................47

7 PORTUGUÊS................................................................................... 48 7.1 Generalidades.......................................................................................................48 7.2 Instruções de segurança .....................................................................................48 7.3 Elementos de visualização e comando..............................................................50 7.3.1 A unidade de comando Disocont.....................................................................50 7.3.2 Lâmpada de sinalização ..................................................................................51 7.3.3 Campo de estado.............................................................................................51 7.3.4 Campo de visualização....................................................................................52 7.3.5 Campo de mensagem .....................................................................................53 7.3.6 Teclas importantes...........................................................................................54 7.3.7 Teclas de comando..........................................................................................54 7.3.8 Menu de funções .............................................................................................55

II

BV-H2061AA , 0532“ DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions © Schenck Process

Deutsch

Allgemeines

1 Deutsch 1.1 Allgemeines Diese Kurzhinweise beschreiben die Funktionen des DISOCONT VLB-Bediengerätes zur regelmäßigen Bedienung des DISOCONT Systems. Für ausführlichere Informationen verweisen wir auf: - das Systemhandbuch BV-H2085DE und - das Betriebshandbuch DISOCONT Dosierbandwaage BV-H 2062DE.

1.2 Sicherheitshinweise Zur Vermeidung von Personen- und Sachschäden sind die im folgenden genannten Bedingungen und Vorschriften einzuhalten. Beachten Sie darüber hinaus: !

Sicherheitshinweise in der Auftragsdokumentation.

!

Sicherheitshinweise, die Mechanikkomponenten betreffen.

!

Vorschriften für Lieferanteile, die nicht von Schenck Process hergestellt wurden oder nicht zum Lieferumfang von Schenck Process gehören.

Bei Montage-, Inbetriebnahme- und Servicearbeiten sind die im Bestimmungsland gültigen Regeln der Technik zu beachten. Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Das Mess-System mit den angeschlossenen Mechanikkomponenten ist ausschließlich für Wägeaufgaben und direkt damit verbundene Steuerungsaufgaben zu verwenden. Jeder darüber hinausgehende Gebrauch gilt als nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Gefahrenquellen Vom Mess-System geht während des Wägebetriebs keine Gefahr aus, wenn das System ordnungsgemäß installiert und in Betrieb genommen wurde. Gefahren beim Einsatz des Mess-Systems können entstehen, wenn das System Steuerungsaufgaben übernimmt oder beim Transport des Wägeguts. Mögliche Gefahrenquellen sind dann z.B. Zusatzvorrichtungen, durch die das Wägegut befördert oder dosiert wird. In diesen Fällen können Restgefahren vom Mess-System ausgehen, wenn es von ungeschultem Personal unsachgemäß eingesetzt oder bedient wird. Das Mess-System kann Bestandteil einer komplexeren Anlage sein. Der Betreiber der Anlage trägt die Gesamtverantwortung für die Betriebssicherheit der Anlage. Kennzeichnung von Restgefahren Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Hinweise auf Gefahren, die zu Sachschäden am Mess-System oder anderen Anlagenteilen führen können. Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Hinweise auf Gefahren, die zur Verletzung von Personen oder im Extremfall sogar zum Tod führen können.

Personal DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions ©Schenck Process

BV-H2061AA , 0532

1

Deutsch

Sicherheitshinweise

Vorbereitung, Montage, Inbetriebnahme, Bedienung, Wartung, Instandhaltung und Servicearbeiten dürfen nur von fachlich geeignetem Personal durchgeführt werden. Alle Personen, die mit dem Mess-System zu tun haben, müssen die Sicherheitshinweise und die für sie wichtigen Teile des Betriebshandbuchs kennen und beachten. Der Betreiber muss das Bedienpersonal anhand des Betriebshandbuchs unterweisen, mit der Verpflichtung, sämtliche Vorschriften und Anweisungen einzuhalten. Parameteränderung Die Funktionsweise des Mess-Systems wird durch Parameter festgelegt. Die Parameter dürfen nur von Personen geändert werden, die mit der Arbeitsweise des Gerätes vertraut sind (z.B. durch Schulung bei Schenck Process). Falsch eingestellte Parameter können bei angeschlossenen Steuerungen zu Gefährdungen von Personen oder zu Sachschäden führen. Darüber hinaus können sie den Wägebetrieb erheblich stören. Passwort Die Parameter werden per Passwort vor unbefugter Änderung geschützt. Der Betreiber des Mess-Systems muss auf einen verantwortungsbewussten Umgang mit dem Passwort achten. Quittieren von Ereignismeldungen Ereignismeldungen dürfen nur quittiert werden, wenn die Ursache des Ereignisses beseitigt ist. Achten Sie vor der Quittierung eines Ereignisses darauf, daß angeschlossene Peripheriegeräte ordnungsgemäß arbeiten. Insbesondere angeschlossene Steuerungen müssen in einem definierten, sicheren Zustand sein. Wartung und Instandhaltung !

Es sind alle an der Waage angebrachten Warn- und Hinweisschilder zu beachten.

!

Vor Arbeiten an der mechanischen Ausrüstung oder Peripheriegeräten (insbesondere Steuerungen) muss das Mess-System abgeschaltet werden. Es sind Messnahmen zu treffen, die ein unbeabsichtigtes Einschalten des Mess-Systems ausschließen.

!

Arbeiten an elektrischen Ausrüstungen dürfen nur im spannungsfreien Zustand durchgeführt werden (Netzstecker ziehen!).

!

Die Geräte dürfen nur in den vorgesehenen Gehäusen betrieben werden, da sonst die Gefahr der Berührung spannungsführender Teile besteht.

Nässe und Feuchtigkeit Alle Teile der Waage, insbesondere die elektrischen Teile, müssen vor Nässe und Feuchtigkeit geschützt werden, wenn die Gehäuse geöffnet werden, z.B. bei Wartungs- und Servicearbeiten. Ansonsten müssen die Schutzarten der Gehäuse beachtet werden. Konstruktive Änderungen Wenn Sie das Mess-System konstruktiv verändern oder durch Komponenten ergänzen, die nicht von Schenck Process geliefert werden, übernimmt Schenck Process keine Haftung und keine Garantie. Dies gilt insbesondere für Änderungen, die die Betriebssicherheit des Mess-Systems beeinflussen können. Austausch von Teilen

2

BV-H2061AA, 0532

DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions © Schenck Process

Deutsch

Anzeige- und Bedienelemente

Müssen bei einer Reparatur Teile ausgetauscht werden, so dürfen nur OriginalErsatzteile von Schenck Process verwendet werden. Werden andere Ersatzteile verwendet, erlischt die Garantie.

1.3 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente 1.3.1 Das Disocont Bediengerät In der folgenden Abbildung ist die Frontansicht des DISOCONT Bediengeräts mit Kennzeichnung der Anzeigefelder dargestellt:

In diesem Betriebshandbuch wird bei der Beschreibung von Tasten die Abkürzung "Taste " verwendet, z.B. Taste . Bedient wird der DISOCONT mit Funktionstasten bis (gelb), Cursortasten , , , (grün), einem Nummerntastenblock (weiß) und der Taste (rot). Die jeweilige Belegung der Funktionstasten ist von der Bediensituation abhängig. Die Funktion wird über oder neben der Taste angezeigt. Der Kontrast der Anzeige wird um eine Stufe erhöht, indem Taste <.> und Cursortaste gleichzeitig gedrückt werden. Der Kontrast wird um eine Stufe verringert, indem Taste <.> und Cursortaste gleichzeitig gedrückt werden. Standardmäßig wird nach 15 Minuten die Hintergrundbeleuchtung ausgeschaltet. Ein beliebiger Tastendruck schaltet die Beleuchtung wieder ein. Mit der Tastenkombination <.> und Cursortaste wird die Beleuchtung auf Dauerlicht geschaltet. Die Kombination <.> und Cursortaste schaltet wieder in den Grundzustand. Der zuletzt gewählte Zustand bleibt auch nach Spannungsausfall erhalten. Die in der Abbildung "Frontansicht des DISOCONT Bediengerätes" dargestellten Elemente haben folgende Bedeutung.

DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions ©Schenck Process

BV-H2061AA , 0532

3

Deutsch


1.3.2 Meldelampe Wenn die grüne Meldelampe leuchtet, ist der DISOCONT betriebsbereit.

1.3.3 Statusfeld In der 1. oder 2. Textzeile kann folgender Text angezeigt werden: Anzeige

Bedeutung

OFF

Waage ist ausgeschaltet. Nur Bandbeladung und Bandgeschwindigkeit werden weiterhin gemessen und angezeigt.

ON

Waage ist eingeschaltet. Förderorgan läuft, Fördermenge und Förderstärke werden erfaßt.

VOL

Volumetrischer Betrieb.

VOL-->

Anfahr- oder Leerfahrbetrieb

VOL-S

Volumetrisch synchron

OP

Tastatur-Betrieb.

SIM

Simulationsbetrieb ist eingeschaltet.

BATCH

Vorgewählter Batchbetrieb.

ES 11

Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software Version 11 ist passiv beobachtend angeschlossen

ES-ACT 11

Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software Version 11 ist aktiv angeschlossen und kann Werte verstellen

ES-DIS

Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software hatte eine Unterbrechnung ohne sich ordnungsgemäß abgemeldet zu haben.

PA

Waage im Parametriermode

CA

Einstellprogramm aktiv

LOCAL

Lokal-Betrieb ist vorgewählt

CHECK

Eine Kontrollmesseinrichtung ist aktiv

MAN +

Manuelles Füllen des Behälters gestartet

MAN -

Manuelles Füllen des Behälters gestopt

4

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Deutsch


1.3.4 Anzeigefeld Im Anzeigefeld kann in zwei Zeilen jeweils eine der folgenden Prozessgrößen dargestellt werden. Die Zeilenanzeige kann auch ganz ausgeblendet werden. Die Auswahl der Größen wird mit den Cursortasten vorgenommen: Die Cursortasten und beziehen sich auf das erste Textfeld und die Cursortasten und auf das zweite Textfeld. Die angegebene Reihenfolge der Größen entspricht dem Durchrollen mit der Cursortaste bzw. : Angezeigte Größe

Dimension

Bezugsgröße

Aktueller Sollwert

kg/h oder t/h

-

Förderstärke I

kg/h oder t/h

-

Relat. Förderstärke

%

Nenn-Förderstärke

Bandbeladung

kg/m

-

Rel. Bandbeladung

%

Nennbandbeladung

Bandgeschwindigkeit

m/s

-

Zähler 1

kg oder t

-

Zähler 2

kg oder t

-

Zähler 3

kg oder t

-

Regelabweichung

%

(Sollwert-Istwert)/NennFörderstärke *100

Externer Sollwert (1)

kg/h oder t/h

-

Relativer Sollwert

%

externer Sollwert

Batch-Sollwert (2)

kg oder t

-

Batch-Restmenge (2)

kg oder t

-

Batch-Istwert (2)

kg oder t

-

Feuchte (3)

%

-

Korrigierter Istwert (3)

kg/h oder t/h

-

Korr. Rel. Istwert (3)

%

Nenn-Förderstärke

Zähler 1 Korr. (3)

kg oder t

-

Zähler 2 Korr. (3)

kg oder t

-

Zähler 3 Korr. (3)

kg oder t

-

B: Füllgewicht (4)

kg oder t

-

B: Rel. Füllgewicht (4)

%

Nennfüllstand

B: Sollwert (5)

kg

-

Position Zuteiler (6)

%

100%

Differenz Istwert (7)

kg/h

-

Korrektur Tara rel. (8)

%

Nenn-Bandbeladung

Korrektur Ber. rel. (8)

%

Bereichskorrektur

Kontroll-Länge (8)

m

-

Kontin. Ergebnis Z (8)

kg

-

Kontroll-Erg. F/Z (8)

-

-

Bandbelad. 2. Brücke (9)

kg/m

-

rel. Beladung 2.Br. (9)

%

Nenn-Bandbeladung


BV-H2061AA , 0532

5

Deutsch

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


nur, wenn Parameter P 03.03 "Sollwertquelle" auf ein externes Gerät (Feldbus oder analoger Eingang) eingestellt ist. nur, wenn Parameter "Chargierbetrieb" auf "YES" steht und die Funktion "Batch Vorwahl" aktiv ist. Nur, wenn Feuchte Messung aktiv (Block 28) Nur, wenn Behälterwaage aktiv (Block 24) Nur, wenn Behälter-Regelung EIN (Block 25) Nur, wenn P31.01 AI Zuteiler Position ungleich "--" Nur, wenn P03.09 Differenz Istwert ungleich "--" Nur, wenn Kontroll-Messeinrichtung aktiv (Block 27) Nur, wenn P26.01 2. Wägebrücke aktiv auf "YES"

1.3.5 Meldungsfeld Im unteren Bereich des Anzeigefeldes gibt es das Meldungsfeld. Dort wird eine eventuell anstehende Ereignismeldung mit dem Kurzkode und einem Erläuterungstext angezeigt. Beispiel für eine Ereignismeldung ist: "WE-01 Netzausfall".

1.3.6 Wichtige Tasten 1.3.7 Funktionstasten Über oder neben den Funktionstasten bis wird die für den Bedienkontext maßgebende Tasten-Bedeutung auf der Anzeige dargestellt. Die folgenden Tasten sind wichtig zur Bedienung des DISOCONT: Taste

Belegung

Funktion

F5

ON

Einschalten

F6

OFF

Ausschalten

F4

DEL

Löschen der zuletzt eingegebenen Zahl oder des zuletzt eingegebenen Zeichens.

F1

EDIT

Vorbereiten der Eingabe.

F3

ESC

Abbrechen von Eingaben, Programmen und allen anderen Funktionen nach Aufruf.

F2

MENU

Aufrufen des Funktionsverteilers.

F7

ResTot

Löschen eines Fördermengenzählers.

F7

Events

Ereignisse zeigen

F7

Print T

FMZ drucken

F7

Volum

Volumetrisch

F7

Grav

Gravimetrisch

F7

VolSyn

Volumetrisch synchron

F7

EndBat

Batch beenden

F7

Print B

Batch drucken

Return

Abschließen einer Eingabe. Aufrufen eines Programms, einer Funktion.

F8

ClrEvt

Quittieren von Ereignismeldungen

F9

Ba Set

Batch Sollwert eingeben

Die Funktionstaste F7 dient als Hot-Key mit dem spezielle Funktionen direkt ausgeführt werden können. Die Belegung der Taste erfolgt mit dem Parameter P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7". 6

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Deutsch


1.3.8 Funktionsverteiler Der Funktionsverteiler ist das Element zur Bedienung spezieller Funktionen des DISOCONT. Vom Funktionsverteiler wird auf Funktionsgruppen zugegriffen, die zum Konfigurieren und Steuern der Anlage benötigt werden. Die Funktionsgruppen sind Betriebsfunktionen, Justagefunktionen und Programmierfunktionen. Zu ihnen gehören beispielsweise Einstellprogramme und Parametereingabe. Um die Gefahr von Fehlbedienungen gering zu halten, sind einige Funktionen im Funktionsverteiler mit Passwort gesichert. In der folgenden Abbildung ist der Funktionsverteiler mit allen untergeordneten Menüs dargestellt.

Abb.: Funktionsverteiler mit Menüs Vorgehen zum Aufruf des Funktionsverteilers 1. Einstellen der Normal-Anzeige durch ein- oder mehrmaliges Betätigen derTaste 2. Betätigen der Taste 3. Durchrollen der Funktionen mit Cursortasten 4. Auswahl mit Taste Hinweis: Bei Funktionen mit zwei Auswahlmöglichkeiten wird die nicht aktive Funktion angezeigt, z.B. wird "Batch Abwahl" angezeigt, wenn "Batch Vorwahl" aktiv ist.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

7

English

General

2 English 2.1 General This set of quick references describes the functions of the DISOCONT control unit that can be used in daily system operation. For details, please read - System Manual BV-H2085GB and - Operating Instructions BV-H2062GB.

2.2 Safety Instructions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated below. Additionally, you should observe: !

Safety hints given in order-specific documentation

!

Safety hints relating to mechanical components

!

Instructions given in sub-suppliers documentation.

When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations. Use As Originally Intended The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively designed for weighing and controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is considered inappropriate. Risks No danger originates from the measuring system itself, if it is properly installed and commissioned. However, upon use of the measuring system, danger may result during transit of material to be weighed (e.g. from auxiliaries used to handle or feed material) or if system assumes control tasks. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle the system. The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The user is fully responsible for the overall plant safety. Identification of Residual Risks The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has the potential to cause damage to the measuring system or other plant sections. The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has the potential to cause severe injury or death. Personnel Preparation, installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance, and servicing may exclusively be performed by skilled persons only. All persons working on the measuring system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical documentation relevant to their work.

8

BV-H2061AA, 0532


English

Safety Instructions

The supervisor is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions given. Parameter Changes The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters, which must exclusively be changed by persons familiar with the measuring system operating principles (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a user control system is connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation. Password Software parameters are protected from unintended change by password. The measuring system user has to ensure safe password handling. Error Message Acknowledgement Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied. Before you acknowledge an error message, check to see that connected peripherals properly operate. Check to see that connected control systems, if any, are in fail-safe state. Maintenance and Repair !

During maintenance and repair, observe any warning symbols on the scale.

!

Before performing work on the mechanical system or peripherals (particularly the control system), disconnect the measuring system and protect the system from inadvertent restart.

!

Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply.

!

The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.

Moisture Protection Protect all system parts, electrical items in particular, from moisture (e.g. during maintenance and servicing) when housings are open. Observe housing protection standards. Modification & Replacement Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect the operating safety of the measuring system. Replacement of Components Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this requirement is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will be void.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

9

English

Display and Control Elements

2.3 Display and Control Elements 2.3.1 Disocont Control Unit The figure below shows the DISOCONT control unit front panel and its display fields.

This manual uses the abbreviations " key", e.g. key. Cursor keys are called "cursor or ". The DISOCONT is operated with the use of function keys (yellow), keypad (white) and Return key (red). Function keys are assigned in accordance with the specific control situation. The particular function is displayed over or right next to the key. You can increase display contrast by operating key <.> and single or repeated operation of the cursor. Use <.> keys and cursor to decrease display contrast. On standard, the background lighting cuts off after 15 minutes and comes on again after operation of any key. Use shortcut <.> and cursor key for steady light. Shortcut <.> and cursor key lets you return to default state. The state selected last is maintained also after power failure. The elements shown in the figure have the following meanings.

10

BV-H2061AA, 0532


English


2.3.2 LED If the green LED lights, DISOCONT is ready to operate.

2.3.3 Status Field In the first and second text lines you can read the following texts: Display Meaning OFF

Scale OFF. Only belt load and belt speed continue being measured and displayed.

ON

Scale ON. Feed unit is active, amount fed out and feed rate are aquired.

VOL

Volumetric mode

VOL--> Start-up or clearance mode VOL-S

Volumetric Synchronous mode

OP

Keyboard mode

SIM

Simulation ON

BATCH Batch mode selected ES 11

PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is connected for passive monitoring.

ESPC with EasyServe software Version 11 is actively connected and can be used to ACT 11 change values. ES-DIS PC with EasyServe software disrupted without previous log-off. PA

Scale in parametrization mode

CA

Setting program active

LOCAL Local mode preselected CHECK Check system active MAN + Manual hopper filling started MAN -

Manual hopper filling stopped


BV-H2061AA , 0532

11

English


2.3.4 Display Field In the display field, one of the following process variables can be displayed in two lines. You can also fade out line display.: Selection is by cursor keys. and cursors refer to the first text field; and cursors, to the second text field. The stated sequence of variables corresponds to scrolling with or cursor. Displayed Variable

Unit

Reference Value

Current Setpoint

kg/hr or t/hr

-

Feed Rate I

kg/hr or t/hr

-

Relative Feed Rate

%

Nominal feed rate

Belt Load

kg/m

-

Relative Belt Load

%

Nominal belt load

Belt Speed

m/s

-

Totalizer 1

kg or t

-

Totalizer 2

kg or t

-

Totalizer 3

kg or t

-

Deviation

%

(Setpoint-actual value)/nominal feed rate *100

External Setpoint (1)

kg/hr or t/hr

-

Relative Setpoint

%

External setpoint

Batch Setpoint (2)

kg or t

-

Batch Resid. Amount (2)

kg or t

-

Batch Feed Rate (2)

kg or t

-

Moisture (3)

%

-

Corr. Feed Rate (3)

kg/hr or t/hr

-

Corr. Rel. Feed Rate (3)

%

Nominal feed rate

Totalizer 1 Corr. (3)

kg or t

-


kg or t

-


kg or t

-

BIN: Fill Weight (4)

kg or t

-

BIN: Rel. Fill Weight (4)

%

Nominal fill level

BIN: Setpoint (5)

kg

-

Flow Gate Position (6)

%

100%

Difference Feed Rate (7)

kg/hr

-

Rel. Tare Corr. (8)

%

Nominal belt load

Rel. Span Corr. (8)

%

Range correction

Check Belt Length (8)

m

-

Contin. Result Z (8)

kg

-

Check Result F/Z (8)

-

-

Belt load 2nd Bridge (9)

kg/m

-

Rel. Load 2nd Bridge (9)

%

Nominal belt load

12

BV-H2061AA, 0532


English

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


Only if Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to external system (fieldbus or analog input). Only if Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES" and "Preselect Batch" Function is active. Only if moisture measurement is active (Block 28) Only if hopper scale is active (Block 24) Only if bin weigher control is ON (Block 25) Only if P31.01 AI Pos. Flow Gate unequals "--" Only if P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" unequals "--" Only if check system is active (Block 27) Only if P26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to "YES"

2.3.5 Message Field The message field in the lower display field area shows the event message, if any, complete with code and a short explanatory text. Sample event message: "WE-01 Power Failure".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

13

English


2.3.6 Important Keys 2.3.7 Function Keys Over or next to function keys to , the contact specific key definition is shown on display. The following keys are important for DISOCONT control: Key

Assignment Function

F5

ON

Turn on

F6

OFF

Turn off

F4

DEL

Delete number of character entered last

F1

EDIT

Prepare input

F3

ESC

Abort inputs, programs and all other function after call

F2

MENU

Call function distributor

F7

ResTot

Reset totalizing counter

F7

FILL

Start filling

F7

NO FILL

Stop filling

F7

Events

Display events

F7

Print T

Print totalizing counter readings

F7

Volum

Volumetric mode

F7

Grav

Gravimetric mode

F7

VolSyn


F7

EndBat

Terminate batch

F7

Print B

Print batch

Return

Acknowledge input. Call program or function.

F8

ClrEvt

Acknowledge event messages

F9

Ba Set

Enter batch setpoint

Function key F7 serves as hot-key designed to directly perform special functions. Key is assigned using Parameter P 02.14 "Hot-Key F7".

14

BV-H2061AA, 0532


English


2.3.8 Function Distributor The function distributor is designed to access special DISOCONT functions required for system control and configuration. Among these are, for instance, operating, calibrating, and programming functions, as well as setting programms and parameter input. To reduce the risk of maloperation, some functions are protected by password. Using the function distributor, you can select the following functions and menus: FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

Print FMZ Reset Totalizer Test Display Select/Stop Prefeeder Service Values Trend Volumetic/Gravimetric Volum. Synchronous Start/Stop Keyb. Mode Display Events (1) Select/Deselect Batch (2 Abort Batch (3) Print Batch (4) Start Span Corr. (5) Finish Check Meas. (5) Accept Correction (5) >0< Zero Set Programming Calib.Functions

“PROGRAMMING” Menu

Read Parameters Enter Parameters Load Default Param. Print Parameters Print Shortlist Print Status Rep.

“CALIB. FUNCTIONS” Menu

(1) only if events are available (2) only if Parameter P 14.01 “Batch Mode” is set to “YES” (3) only if “Select Batch” is active (4) only if a batch is complete (5) only if check system is active (Block 27) (6) only if bin weigher is active (Block 24) (7) only if bin control is started (P 25.01) (8) only if bin controller has been selected manually .

START/STOP Simulation TW: Tare CW: Weight Check LB: Pulses/Belt TB: Tare (6) CB: Weight Check (6) BIN: Contr. Optim. (7) Set Time Autom. Manual Bin Control (6) Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (8)

vh206201_GB.cdr

Fig: Function Distributor With Menus Follow these steps: 1. Select normal display by pressing key as many times as required. 2. Press key. 3. Scroll functions using cursor keys. 4. Select with key. NOTE: In case of functions with two possible selections, the function not active is displayed, e.g. if "Select Batch" is active, "Deselect Batch" is displayed.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

15

Français

Généralités

3 Français 3.1 Généralités Ces instructions succintes décrivent les fonctions utiles de l'unité de service DISOCONT pour réaliser les opérations usuelles sur le système Disocont. Pour obtenir des informations plus détaillées, veuillez vous reporter - au manuel du système BV-H2085FR correspondant et - au manuel de service BV-H2062FR.

3.2 Instructions de sécurité Afin d'éviter la mise en danger de personnes ainsi que l'endommagement du matériel, il faut respecter les conditions et prescriptions suivantes. De plus, veuillez observer : !

Instructions de sécurité faisant partie de la documentation spécifique à la commande.

!

Instructions de sécurité se référant aux composants mécaniques.

!

Prescriptions pour les pièces fournies qui n'ont pas été fabriquées par la société Schenck Process ou qui ne font pas partie de l'étendue de fourniture de la société Schenck Process.

Pour les travaux de montage, de mise en service et de maintenance, il faut respecter les réglementations en matière technique, valables dans le pays de destination. Utilisation selon destination Le système de mesure avec les composants mécaniques raccordés doit être utilisé uniquement pour réaliser des fonctions de pesage/dosage et des fonctions de commande y reliées directement. Toute autre utilisation allant au-delà est considéré comme n'étant pas conforme à sa destination. Sources de dangers Pendant le pesage/dosage, il n'y a aucun danger qui peut se produire à partir du système de mesure à condition que le système ait été installé et mis en service correctement. Il peut y avoir risque de danger pendant l'utilisation d'un système de mesure lorsque le système de mesure remplit des fonctions de commande ou lors de la manutention du produit à peser. D'éventuelles sources de dangers sont alors, par exemple, des dispositifs supplémentaires à l'aide desquels l'on réalise la manutention ou le dosage du produit à peser. Dans ces cas, des dangers résiduels peuvent provenir du système de mesure, s'il est utilisé ou manœuvré de manière mal appropriée par du personnel non spécialisé. Le système de mesure peut faire partie d'une installation complexe. L'utilisateur de l'installation porte la responsabilité totale pour la sécurité de fonctionnement de l'installation. Marquage de dangers résiduels Ce symbole caractérise les dangers qui peuvent entraîner des endommagements sur le système de mesure ou sur des autres parties de l'installation.

16

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Français

Instructions de sécurité Ce symbole caractérise les dangers qui peuvent entraîner la blessure de personnes, ou même - dans des cas extrèmes - la mort.

Le personnel Les travaux de préparation, de montage, de mise en service, de manœuvre, d'entretien, de réparation et de maintenance ne doivent être réalisés que par du personnel spécialisé en ces matières. Toutes les personnes travaillant sur le système de mesure doivent connaître et respecter les instructions de sécurité et les chapitres du manuel de service, importants pour leur travail. L'utilisateur doit former le personnel de service à l'aide du manuel de service, tout en l'obligeant à respecter toutes les prescriptions et instructions. Modification des paramètres Le fonctionnement du système de mesure est déterminé par des paramètres. Les paramètres ne doivent être modifiés que par les personnes qui se sont familiarisées avec le mode de fonctionnement du système de mesure (par exemple après avoir participé à un stage de formation de la société Schenck Process). Des paramètres mal réglés peuvent entraîner - lorsque des systèmes de commande sont raccordés des dangers pour les personnes et l'endommagement du matériel. De plus, ils peuvent déranger considérablement le mode de pesage/dosage. Mot de passe Les paramètres sont protégés par un mot de passe contre toute modification non autorisée. L'utilisateur du système de mesure doit veiller à ce que le mot de passe soit utilisé tout en étant conscient de la responsabilité qui en résulte. Acquittement de signalisations d'erreurs Les signalisations d'erreurs ne doivent être acquittées que si la cause de l'erreur a été éliminée. Avant d'acquitter une erreur, veillez à ce que les périphériques raccordés fonctionnent correctement. Surtout les systèmes de commande raccordés doivent se trouver dans un état défini et sûr. Entretien et maintenance !

Il faut respecter toutes les enseignes appliquées sur le système de pesage.

!

Avant de réaliser des travaux sur l'équipement mécanique ou sur les périphériques (surtout systèmes de commande), il faut mettre le système de mesure à l'arrêt. Il faut prendre les mesures respectives pour exclure la mise en marche involontaire du système de mesure.

!

Les travaux sur les équipements électriques ne doivent être réalisés qu'à l'état libre de tension (retirer la prise du secteur !).

!

Les appareils ne doivent être utilisés que dans les boîtiers/coffrets prévus à cet effet, car sinon il y a danger de rentrer en contact avec des pièces électriques sous tension.

Humidité Toutes les pièces du système de pesage, surtout les pièces électriques, doivent être protégées contre l'humidité lors de travaux d'entretien et de service, quand il faut ouvrir les coffrets. Sinon, il faut respecter les types de protection des coffrets. Modifications de la construction Si vous modifiez la construction du système de mesure ou si vous y ajoutez des composants qui n'ont pas été fournis par la société Schenck Process, Schenck Process décline toute responsabilité et garantie. Ceci est le cas surtout quand il s'agit


BV-H2061AA , 0532

17

Français

Eléments d'affichage et de service

de modifications pouvant agir sur la sécurité de fonctionnement du système de mesure. Remplacement de pièces Lorsqu'il faut remplacer des pièces lors de travaux de réparation, uniquement des pièces de rechange d'origine de la société Schenck Process doivent être utilisées. Si l'on utilise des autres pièces de rechange, Schenck Process décline tous droits de garantie.

3.3 Eléments d'affichage et de service 3.3.1 L'unité de service Disocont La figure suivante montre la face avant de l'appareil de pilotage DISOCONT, avec le repérage des champs d'indication :

Dans ce manuel de service lors de la description des touches, on utlisera l'abréviation "Touche ", par ex. Touche . Pour les touches du curseur on utilisera l'abréviation "Touche curseur ", par ex. Touche curseur . Le DISOCONT est piloté avec des touches de fonctions (jaunes), des touches curseur (vertes), un bloc de touches numériques (blanches) et une touche Entrée (rouge). L'affectation des touches de fonction dépend de chaque situation dans laquelle évolue l'appareil. Le nom de la fonction est indiqué sur ou à côté de la touche. Le contraste de l'indication est augmenté d'un cran, en appuyant simultanément sur la touche <.> et la touche curseur . Le contraste est diminué d'un cran, en appuyant simultanément sur la touche <.> et la touche curseur . En standard, après 15 minutes le rétro-éclairage est coupé. Par appui sur une touche quelconque l'éclairage est remis en route. Avec la combinaison des touches <.> et de la touche curseur l'éclairage est commuté en position continue. La combinaison <.> et la touche curseur commute à nouveau dans la position par défaut. La dernière position choisie reste conservée même en cas de coupure de courant. Les éléments représentés dans la figure ont la signification suivante :

18

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Français


3.3.2 Lampe témoin Lorsque la lampe témoin verte est allumée, le DISOCONT est prêt au service.

3.3.3 Champ d'état A la 1ère ou 2de ligne, le texte suivant peut s'afficher : Abréviation

Signification

OFF

Le système de pesage est à l'arrêt. On continu seulement à mesurer et à indiquer la charge sur la bande et la vitesse de bande.

ON

Le système de pesage est en marche. L'organe de transport marche ; la quantité transportée et le débit sont mesurés.

VOL

Mode volumétrique

VOL-->

Fonctionnement de démarrage ou d'arrêt (vidange)

VOL-S

Volumétrique synchrone

OP

Mode de service clavier

SIM

Le mode simulation est en marche.

BATCH

Mode chargement présélectionné

ES 11

Un PC avec le Software Version 11-EASYSERVE est raccordé en actif et peut modifier des valeurs

ES-ACT 11

Un PC avec le Software Version 11-EASYSERVE est raccordé en actif et peut modifier des valeurs

ES-DIS

Un PC avec le Software-EASYSERVE a eu une interruption sans avoir annoncé correctement son arrêt.

PA

Mot de passe actif - En mode de paramétrage

CA

Programme d'ajustage activé

LOCAL

La marche local est sélectionnée

CHECK

Une opération de mesure de contrôle est active

MAN +

Démarrage du remplissage manuel de la trémie

MAN -

Arrêt du remplissage manuel de la trémie


BV-H2061AA , 0532

19

Français


3.3.4 Champs de textes affichés Dans le champs de textes affichés, il est possible d'afficher une des grandeurs du process suivantes sur deux lignes. L'affichage des lignes peut aussi être supprimé. La sélection des grandeurs s'effectue au moyen des touches curseur : Les touches curseur et se réfèrent au 1er champ de texte, et les touches curseur et se réfèrent au 2d champ de texte. Grandeur indiquée

Dimension

Grandeur de référence

Consigne actuelle

kg/h ou t/h

-

Valeur réelle

kg/h ou t/h

-

Valeur réelle négative

%

Débit nominal

Charge sur la bande

kg/m

-

Charge rel. sur bande

%

Charge nominale sur la bande

Vitesse de la bande

m/s

-

Compteur totalisateur 1

kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-

Ecart régulation

%

(Consigne-valeur réelle)/Débit nominal *100

Consigne externe (1)

kg/h ou t/h

-

Consigne relative

%

Consigne externe

Consigne pour le Batch (2)

kg ou t

-

Quantité de reste du Batch (2)

kg ou t

-

Valeur réelle du Batch (2)

kg ou t

-

Grandeur indiquée

Dimension

Grandeur repère

Humidité

%

-

Consigne (3)

kg/h ou t/h

-

Corr. rel. valeur fixe (3)

%

Débit nominal

Corr.- compteur 1 (3)

kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-

B: Poids de remplissage (4)

kg ou t

-

B: poids de remplissage rel. (4)

%

Remplissage nominal

B: Consigne (5)

kg

-

Position alimentateur (6)

%

100%

Différence valeur réelle (7)

kg/h

-

Correction tare rel. (8)

%

Charge nominale sur la bande

Correction gamme rel. (8)

%

Correction de gamme

Contrôle-Longueur (8)

m

-

Résultat continu Z (8)

kg

-

Contrôle résul. F/Z (8)

-

-

Charge bande 2. tablier (9)

kg/m

-

Charge rel. 2.tab. (9)

%

Charge nominale

20

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Français


(1)

Seulement, quand le paramètre P 03.03 "source consigne" correspond à un appareil externe (Bus de champ ou entrée analogique). (2) Seulement, quand le paramètre "Marche chargement" est placé sur "YES" et que la fonction "Sélection Batch" est active. (3) Seulement, quand la mesure de l'humidité est active (Bloc 28) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

Seulement, quand la trémie peseuse est active (Bloc 24) Seulement, quand régulation trémie est en MARCHE (Bloc 25) Seulement, quand P31.01 AI Position alimentateur n'est pas égale à "--" Seulement, quand P03.09 Différence valeur réelle n'est pas égale à "--" Seulement, quand l'équipement de contrôle de la mesure est actif (Bloc 27) Seulement, quand P26.01 2. tablier de pesage actif sur "YES"

3.3.5 Ligne de signalisations Dans la zone inférieure du champ d'affichage se trouve le champ de signalisation. Une éventuelle signalisation d'événement y est affichée avec un code abrégé et un texte explicatif. Voici l'exemple d'une signalisation d'événement : "WE-01 Panne secteur".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

21

Français


3.3.6 Touches importantes 3.3.7 Touches de fonction Sur l'affichage apparaît au-dessus ou à côté des touches de fonctions - la signification des touches importantes pour le contexte de service respectif. Les touches suivantes sont importantes pour réaliser divers opérations sur le DISOCONT. Touche

Signification

Fonction

F5

ON

Marche

F6

OFF

Arrêt

F4

DEL

Effacer le dernier chiffre ou caractère introduit.

F1

EDIT

Préparation de l’introduction.

F3

ESC

Interruption des introductions, programmes et toutes autres fonctions après sélection.

F2

MENU

Appel du répartiteur de fonctions.

F7

ResTot

Effacement d’un compteur totalisateur.

F7

Events

Indication des événements

F7

Print T

Impression compteur totalisateur

F7

Volum

Volumétrique

F7

Grav

Gravimétrique

F7

VolSyn

Volumétrique synchrone

F7

EndBat

Terminer Batch

F7

Print B

Impression Batch

Return

Terminer une introduction. Appel d’un programme, d’une fonction.

F8

ClrEvt

Acquittement d’une annonce d’événement

F9

Ba Set

Introduire une consigne Batch

La touche de fonction F7 sert de Hot-Key avec laquelle des fonctions spéciales peuvent être exécutées directement. La signification de la touche se fait à l’aide du paramètre P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

22

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Français


3.3.8 Menu des fonctions Le repartiteur de fonctions est l'élément utilisé pour réaliser des fonctions spéciales du DISOCONT. A partir du repartiteur de fonctions, l'on a recours, par exemple, à des fonctions nécessaires pour configurer le système. Les groupes de fonctions comprennent les fonctions d'opération, d'ajustage et de programmation. A fin de réduire des erreurs de manipulation, quelques fonctions du repartiteur de fonctions sont protégées par mot de passe. Les fonctions et menus suivants peuvent être sélectionnés à partir du répartiteur de fonctions :

Fig. : Répartiteur de fonctions avec menus Procédé pour appeler le menu des fonctions 1. Afficher l'affichage normal en appuyant une ou plusieurs fois sur la touche . 2. Appuyer sur la touche . 3. Faire défiler les fonctions au moyen des touches curseur. 4. Sélectionner avec touche . NOTA: En cas de fonctions avec deux possibilités de sélection, la fonction non active est affichée, p.ex. si "Sélect. Batch" est activé, "Déseléct. Batch" est affiché.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

23

Italiano

Generalità

4 Italiano 4.1 Generalità Le presenti istruzioni per l'uso descrivono le funzioni utili dell'unità di comando DISOCONT per la normale operazione del sistema Disocont. Per informazioni più dettagliate si rimanda al relativo - il manuale di sistema BV-H2085GB ed - manuale di esercizio BV-H2062.

4.2 Istruzioni di sicurezza Osservare le condizioni e le norme elencate nel seguito al fine di evitare danni a persone e cose. Rispettare inoltre : !

Istruzioni di sicurezza contenute nella documentazione dell'ordine.

!

Istruzioni di sicurezza relative ai componenti meccanici.

!

Norme per le parti di fornitura che non sono state prodotte da Schenck Process o che non fanno parte del complesso di fornitura di Schenck Process.

Durante lavori di montaggio, messa in servizio e service devono essere osservate le norme tecniche vigenti del paese di destinazione. Impiego secondo l'uso previsto Il sistema di misura con i componenti meccanici collegati deve essere utilizzato esclusivamente per compiti di pesatura ed i compiti di comando ad essi direttamente collegati. Qualsiasi impiego che esuli da ciò non viene considerato a norma. Fonti di pericolo Durante il funzionamento di pesatura non derivano pericoli dal sistema di misura se il sistema è stato installato e messo in servizio correttamente. Durante l'impiego di un sistema di misura possono insorgere pericoli quando il sistema di misura esegue compiti di comando oppure durante il trasporto del materiale di pesatura. Possibili fonti di pericolo sono allora p.es. rappresentate da dispositivi addizionali con i quali viene trasportato o dosato il materiale. In questi casi possono derivare pericoli residui dal sistema di misura quando viene impiegato od operato in modo inadeguato da personale non addestrato. Il sistema di misura può essere parte integrante di un impianto più complesso. La ditta utente dell'impianto risponde in toto della sicurezza di esercizio dell'impianto. Identificazione dei pericoli residui Questo simbolo indica pericoli che possono causare danni materiali al sistema di misura o ad altre parti dell'impianto.

Questo simbolo indica pericoli che possono mettere in pericolo l'incolumità delle persone fino, in casi estremi, a causarne la morte.

24

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Italiano

Istruzioni di sicurezza

Personale Preparazione, montaggio, messa in servizio, operazione, manutenzione e lavori di service devono essere eseguiti solo da personale appositamente qualificato. Tutte le persone che hanno a che fare con il sistema di misura devono essere a conoscenza ed osservare le istruzioni di sicurezza e le sezioni rilevanti del manuale di esercizio. La ditta utente deve istruire il personale operatore sulla base del manuale di esercizio, informandolo dell'obbligo di osservare tutte le norme e le istruzioni. Modifica dei parametri Il modo di funzionamento del sistema di misura viene definito mediante parametri. I parametri devono essere modificati solo da persone che hanno dimestichezza con il funzionamento di sistema di misura (p.es. acquisita in seminari presso Schenck Process GmbH). Quando i comandi sono collegati, errori nell'impostazione dei parametri possono mettere in pericolo l'incolumità di persone o causare danni materiali. Essi possono altresì disturbare notevolmente il funzionamento di pesatura. Password I parametri vengono protetti con una password da modifiche non autorizzate. La ditta utente del sistema di misura deve provvedere ad usare coscienziosamente la password. Conferma dei messaggi di errore I messaggi di errore devono essere confermati solo una volta eliminata la causa dell'errore. Prima della conferma di un errore controllare che le periferiche collegate funzionino correttamente. In particolar modo i comandi collegati devono trovarsi in uno stato sicuro definito. Manutenzione !

Osservare tutte le targhe monitorie ed informative applicate alla bilancia.

!

Disinserire il sistema di misura prima di eseguire lavori all'equipaggiamento meccanico o alle periferiche (soprattutto ai comandi). Occorre adottare delle misure affinché sia impossibile inserire accidentalmente il sistema di misura.

!

Lavori agli equipaggiamenti elettrici devono essere eseguiti solo in assenza di tensione (togliere la spina di alimentazione rete!).

!

Gli apparecchi devono venir azionati solo nelle custodie previste altrimenti esiste il pericolo di contatto dei pezzi sotto tensione.

Umidità e bagnato Tutti i componenti della bilancia, soprattutto le parti elettriche devono essere protette dall'umidità e dal bagnato, per es. durante lavori di manutenzione e di service, quando devono essere aperte le custodie. Altrimenti osservare i tipi di protezione delle custodie. Modifiche costruttive Se vengono eseguite modifiche costruttive al sistema di misura o vengono aggiunti componenti che non sono stati forniti da Schenck Process, Schenck Process declina allora ogni responsabilità e garanzia. Ciò vale in particolar modo per modifiche che possono influire sulla sicurezza di esercizio del sistema di misura. Sostituzione di componenti Se nel corso di una riparazione si rende necessaria la sostituzione di componenti, devono essere utilizzati solo componenti originali Schenck Process. Se vengono impiegate altre parti di ricambio, la garanzia si estingue.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

25

Italiano

Elementi di indicazione e di comando

4.3 Elementi di indicazione e di comando 4.3.1 L'unità di comando Disocont Nell'illustrazione seguente è raffigurata la veduta frontale dell'unità di comando DISOCONT con l'identificazione dei campi di indicazione :

Nel presente manuale di uso, la descrizione dei tasti utilizza l'abbreviazione "tasto, p.es. tasto . Il DISOCONT viene operato con i tasti di funzione fino a (gialli), i tasti cursore e , e (verdi), il blocco di tasti numerici (bianco) ed il tasto (rosso). Sopra o accanto ai tasti di funzione viene indicato il significato dei tasti per il contesto di operazione. Il contrasto dell'indicazione viene intensificato se il tasto <.> ed il tasto cursore sono premuti allo stesso tempo. Il contrasto dell'indicazione si riduce se il tasto <.> ed il tasto cursore sono premuti al tempo stesso. Normalmente dopo 15 minuti l'illuminazione di fondo si disattiva. Una qualsiasi pressione di tasto riattiva di nuovo l'illuminazione. Con la combinazione dei tasti <.> e con il tasto cursore l'illuminazione viene attivata su luce continua. La combinazione <.> ed il tasto cursore aziona di nuovo lo stato default. Lo stato selezionato da ultimo resta anche dopo Power Down. Gli elementi rappresentati nella figura hanno il significato seguente.

26

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Italiano


4.3.2 Spia di segnalazione Quando si accende la spia verde, il DISOCONT è pronto al funzionamento.

4.3.3 Righe di testo Nella 1a o 2a riga di testo viene rappresentato if seguente testo: Sigla

Significato

OFF

La bilancia è disinserita. Vengono misurati ed indicati solo il carico e la velocidad di nastro.

ON

La bilancia è inserita. L'organo di trasporto è in funzione, la quantità materiale e la portata vengono acquisite.

uisite

Modo volumetrico

VOL-->

Modo avviamento oppure scarico

VOL-S

Volumetrico sincrono

OP

Modo tastiera

SIM

Modo simulazione inserito

BATCH

Modo batch preselezionato

ES 11

Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software Versione 11 è collegato passivamente osservando

ES-ACT 11

Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software Versione 11 è collegato attivamente e può regolare valori

ES-DIS

Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software ha avuto un'interruzione senza aver notificato il ritiro secondo le norme.

PA

Password attiva - in modo parametrizzazione

CA

Programma attiva

LOCAL

Modo locale preselezionato

CHECK

Un dispositivo controllo misura è attivo

MAN +

Riempimento manuale del recipiente iniziato

MAN -

Riempimento manuale del recipiente interrotto


BV-H2061AA , 0532

27

Italiano


4.3.4 Campo di indicazione Nel campo di indicazione può essere visualizzata in due righe una delle seguenti grandezze di processo. L'indicazione della riga può essere spenta del tutto. La selezione viene eseguita con i tasti cursore: I tasti cursore e si riferiscono al 1o campo di testo e i tasti cursore e al 2o campo di testo. Grandezza

Unità

Riferimento

Valore imposto attuale

kg/h oppure t/h

-

Portata I

kg/h oppure t/h

-

Portata rel.

%

Portata nominale

Carico di nastro

kg/m

-

Carico di nastro rel.

%

Carico di nastro massimo

Velocià di nastro

m/s

-

Totalizzatore 1

kg oppure t

-

Totalizzatore 2

kg oppure t

-

Totalizzatore 3

kg oppure t

-

Scarto regolazione

%

(Valore imposto-valore reale)/val. nom. *100

Valore imposto esterno (1)

kg/h oppure t/h

-

Valore imposto relativo

%

Valore imposto esterno

Valore imposto batch (2)

kg oppure t

-

Quantità residual batch (2)

kg oppure t

-

Valore reale batch (2)

kg oppure t

-

Umidità (3)

%

-

Valore reale corr. (3)

kg/h oppure t/h

-

Corr. valore reale re. (3)

%

Portata nominale

Totalizzatore 1 corr. (3)

kg oppure t

-


kg oppure t

-


kg oppure t

-

Recipiente: Peso del materiale (4)

kg oppure t

-

Recipiente: Peso mat. rel. (4)

%

Riempimento nominale

Recipiente: Valore imposto (5)

kg

-

Posizione alimentatore (6)

%

100%

Differenza valore imposto (7)

kg/h

-

Correzione tara rel. (8)

%

Portata nominale

Correzione campo rel. (8)

%

Correzione del campo

Lunghezza di controllo (8)

m

-

Risultato cont. Z (8)

kg

-

Risultato di controllo F/Z (8)

-

-

Carico di nastro Ponte 2 (9)

kg/m

-

Carico rel. Ponte 2 (9)

%

Carico di nastro nominale

28

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Italiano

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


Solo, se il parametro P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" è impostato su dispositivo esterno (bus di campo oppure ingresso analogico) Solo, se il parametro "Batch Mode" è impostato su "YES" ed è attiva la funzione "Selezione batch" Solo, se Moisture è attivo (blocco 28) Solo, se Bin Weigher è attivo (blocco 24) Solo, se Bin Level Controller è impostato su ON (blocco 25) Solo, se P31.01 "AI Pos. Flow Gate" non è impostato su "--" Solo, se P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" non è impostato su "--" Solo, se Check System è attivo (blocco 27) Solo, se P26.01 "2. Weighbridge active" è impostato su "YES"

4.3.5 Riga di messaggio Nella parte inferiore del campo di indicazione si trova il campo di messagio. Qui viene indicato un messaggio di evento avveratosi eventualmente con un codice corto ed un testo esplicativo. Un esempio di messaggio di evento è dato da : "WE-01 Mancanza tensione di rete".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

29

Italiano


4.3.6 Tasti importanti 4.3.7 Tasti di funzione Sopra o accanto ai tasti di funzione - viene indicato il significato dei tasti per il contesto di operazione. I tasti seguenti sono importanti per l'operazione del DISOCONT : Tasto

Assegnazione Funzione

F5

ON

Inserire

F6

OFF

Disinserire

F4

DEL

Cancella l'ultimo numero o carattere introdotto

F1

EDIT

Preparare l'introduzione

F3

ESC

Interrompe le introduzioni, i programmi et tutte le altre funzioni dopo il richiamo

F2

MENU

Richiama il distributore di funzioni

F7

ResTot

Cancella un totalizzatore

F7

Events

Indicare eventi

F7

Print T

Stampa totalizzatore

F7

Volum

Volumetrico

F7

Grav

Gravimetrico

F7

VolSyn

Volumetrico sincrono

F7

EndBat

Annulla batch

F7

Print B

Stampa batch

Return

Concludere introduzione. Richiama un'introduzione, una funzione.

F8

ClrEvt

Conferma segnalazioni di errore

F9

Ba Set

Imettere valore imposto

Il tasto di funzione F7 è uno strumento (Hot-Key) di eseguire funzioni speciali. L'assegnazione dei tasti viene eseguita con il parametro P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

30

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Italiano


4.3.8 Distributore di funzioni Il distributore di funzioni è l'elemento per il comando di funzioni usate meno frequentemente del Disocont. Dal distributore di funzioni si accede per es. a funzioni necessarie per la configurazione del dosatore a perdita di peso. Nel distributore di funzioni possono essere selezionati le funzioni ed i menu seguenti:

Fig: Distributore di funzioni Menu Come procedere per richiamare il distributore di funzioni 1. Impostazione dell'indicazione normale premendo una o più volte il tasto . 2. Premere il tasto . 3. Far scorrere le funzioni con i tasti cursore. 4. Selezionare con tasto . NOTA: In caso di funzioni con due possibilità de selezione, la funzione non attiva viene indicata, per es. se "Select Batch" è attivo, "Deselect Batch" è indicato.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

31

Español

Generalidades

5 Español 5.1 Generalidades Estas instrucciones de uso resumidas describen las funciones útiles de la unidad de mando DISOCONT para realizar el manejo usual del sistema Disocont. Para informaciones más amplias hay que leer - el manual de sistema BV-H2085GB y - el manual de servicion BV-H2062 respectivo.

5.2 Instrucciones de seguridad Para evitar daños personales y materiales hay que respetar las siguientes condiciones y disposiciones. Además hay que observar : !

Instrucciones de seguridad descritos en la documentación específica al pedido.

!

Instrucciones de seguridad que se refieren a los componentes mecánicos.

!

Disposiciones para piezas entregadas que no fueron producidas por Schenck Process, o que no forman parte del volumen de suministro de Schenck Process.

Para realizar los trabajos de montaje, de puesta en servicio y de servicio hay que observar las reglas técnicas vigentes en el país de destino. Uso conforme al destino El sistema de medición con los componentes mecánicos conectados debe utilizarse exclusivamente para funciones de pesaje y funciones de mando relacionadas directamente con éstas. Cada uso superando lo descrito está considerado como no conforme al destino. Fuentes de peligro Durante el modo de pesaje no procede ningún peligro del sistema de medición, siempre que el sistema fuera instalado y puesto en servicio correctamente. Durante el uso de un sistema de medición pueden surgir peligros si el sistema de medición realiza funciones de mando o si se trata del transporte del producto a pesar. Posibles fuentes de peligro son entonces dispositivos adicionales sirviendo al transporte o a la dosificación del producto a pesar. En estos casos pueden proceder peligros restantes del sistema de medición, siempre que se trate de personal no formado que efectua un uso o manejo no apropiado. El sistema de medición puede ser parte integrante de una instalacion compleja. El usuario de la instalación tiene la responsabilidad completa para la seguridad de funcionamiento de la instalación. Marcación de peligros restantes Este símbolo caracteriza indicaciones con respecto a peligros que pueden llegar a daños materiales en el sistema o en otros partes de la instalación.

Este símbolo caracteriza indicaciones con respecto a peligros que pueden llegar a daños personales o - en casos extremos - a la muerte.

32

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Español

Instrucciones de seguridad

Personal Los trabajos de preparación, montaje, puesta en servicio, manejo, entretenimiento, mantenimiento y servicio sólo deben ser efectuados por un personal especializado. Todas las personas que tienen algo que hacer con el sistema de medición deben conocer y respetar las instrucciones de seguridad y todas las partes del manual de operación importantes. El usuario debe instruir el personal de servicio basándose en el manual de operación, obligándole a respetar todas las disposiciones e instrucciones. Modificación de los parámetros El funcionamiento del sistema de medición es determinado por parámetros. Los parámetros sólo deben ser modificados por personas que conocen el funcionamiento del sistema de medición (después de un curso de formación por la Schenck Process, por ejemplo). Parámetros no ajustados correctamente pueden causar - con sistemas de mando conectados - peligros personales o materiales. Además pueden molestar considerablemente el modo de pesaje. Contraseña de acceso Los parámetros están protegidos contra modificación no admitida por medio de una contraseña de acceso. El usuario del sistema de medición debe cuidar a un empleo de la contraseña de acceso, consciente de su responsabilidad. Acuse de recibo de señalizaciones de errores Sólo está permitido acusar recibo de señalizaciones de errores cuando ya se ha eliminada la causa del error. Antes del acuse de recibo de un error hay que cuidar que los dispositivos periféricos conectados trabajan correctamente. Especialmente sistemas de mando conectados deben encontrarse en un estado definido, seguro. Entretenimiento y Mantenimiento !

Hay que respetar todos los rótulos indicadores y de aviso que se encuentran en el sistema de pesaje.

!

Antes de realizar trabajos en el equipo mecánico o en periféricos (especialmente sistemas de mando) hay que desconectar el sistema de medición. Hay que tomar las medidas necesarias para excluir una puesta en marcha involuntaria del sistema de medición.

!

Trabajos en equipos eléctricos sólo deben hacerse al estado libre de tensión (¡ quitar el enchufe con la red !).

!

Los aparatos deben utilizarse sólo en las cajas previstas, si no existiría el riesgo del contacto con piezas bajo tensión.

Humedad Todas las piezas del sistema de pesaje, especialmente las piezas eléctricas, deben ser protegidas contra humedad, por ejemplo durante trabajos de entretenimiento y de servicio cuando hay que abrir los cárteres. En otro caso deben respetarse los tipos de protección de los cárteres. Modificaciones constructivas Si Vd. modifica la construcción del sistema de medición o si añade Vd. componentes que no son entregados por Schenck Process, Schenck Process declina la responsabilidad y la garantía. Esto vale especialmente para modificaciones que pueden influir la seguridad de funcionamiento del sistema de medición.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

33

Español

Elementos de indicación y de mando

Recambio de piezas Cuando hay que reemplazar piezas durante una reparación, sólo deben utilizarse piezas de recambio originales de Schenck Process. Si se usan otras piezas de recambio ya no tendrá ninguna garantía.

5.3 Elementos de indicación y de mando 5.3.1 La unidad de mando Disocont En la figura siguiente está representada la cara frontal de la unidad de mando DISOCONT con las características de las zonas de indicación :

Fig. : Cara frontal de la unidad de mando DISOCONT En el presente manual de servizio, la descripción de las teclas utiliza la abreviatura "tecla, p.ej. tecla. El DISOCONT se maneja por medio de las teclas de funciones hasta (amarillas), las teclas del cursor , , , (verdes), el bloque de teclas numericas (blanco) et la tecla (roja). El significado de la teclas de funciones depende del contexto de servicio. La función está representada en el display por encima o al lado de la tecla. El contraste de la indicación se intensifica de un escalón si la tecla <.> et la tecla cursor se apretan al mismo tiempo. El contraste baja de un escalón si la tecla <.> et la tecla cursor se apretan al mismo tiempo. Los elementos representados en la figura tienen la siguiente significación .

34

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Español


5.3.2 Lámpara de señalización Cuando la lámpara verde de señalización está encendida, el DISOCONT está listo para el servicio.

5.3.3 Zona de estado En la 1a ó 2a línea de texto puede indicarse el texto siguiente : Abreviación

Significado

OFF

El sistema de pesaje está desconectado. Solamente siguen medidas e indicadas la carga y la velocidad de cinta.

ON

El sistema de pesaje está conectado. El órgano de transporte está en marcha, se detectan la cantidad de producto transportado y el caudal.

VOL

Modo volumétrico

VOL-->

Modo de arranque ó de vaciado

VOL-S

Modo volumétrico-síncrono

OP

Modo por teclado

SIM

El modo de simulación está en marcha.

BATCH

Modo de carga predeterminado

ES 11

Un PC equipado con el software EasyServe, versión 11, está conectado de manera pasiva observando

ES-ACT 11

Está conectado de manera activa un PC equipado con el software EasyServe, versión 11, e idóneo para modificar valores

ES-DIS

Un PC equipado con el software EasyServe ha tenido una interrupción sin despedirse correctamente.

PA

Contraseña ativa - en modo de parametraje

CA

Programa de ajuste activo

LOCAL

Modo local preseleccionado

CHECK

Un sistema de medición control es activo.

MAN +

Llenado manual de tolva iniciado

MAN -

Llenado manual de tolva interrumpido


BV-H2061AA , 0532

35

Español


5.3.4 Zona de indicación En la zona de indicación puede indicarse en dos líneas una de las siguientes magnitudes del proceso. También puede oprimirse completamente la indicación por líneas. La selección de la magnitudes se hace por medio de las teclas del cursor : Las teclas del cursor y se refieren a la 1a zona a texto, y las teclas del cursor y a la 2a zona a texto : Magnitud

Dimensión

Referencia

Valor consigna actual

kg/h ó t/h

-

Caudal I

kg/h ó t/h

-

Caudal relativo

%

Caudal nominal

Carga de cinta

kg/m

-

Carga de cinta rel.

%

Carga de cinta nominal

Velocidad de cinta

m/s

-

Contador 1

kg ó t

-

Contador 2

kg ó t

-

Contador 3

kg ó t

-

Desviación de regulación

%

(Valor consigna - valor real)/Valor nominal *100

Valor consigna externo (1)

kg/h ó t/h

-

Valor consigna relativo

%

Valor consigna externo

Valor consigna de carga (2)

kg ó t

-

Cantidad residual de carga (2)

kg ó t

-

Valor real de carga (2)

kg ó t

-

Humedad (3)

%

-

Valor real corrigido (3)

kg/h ó t/h

-

Valor real rel. corr. (3)

%

Caudal nominal

Contador 1 corr. (3)

kg ó t

-


kg ó t

-


kg ó t

-

Tolva: Peso de llenado (4)

kg ó t

-

Tolva: Peso de llenado rel. (4)

%

Nivel de llenado nominal

Tolva: Valor consigna (5)

kg

-

Posición alimentador (6)

%

100%

Diferencia valor real (7)

kg/h

-

Corrección tara rel. (8)

%


Corrección rango rel. (8)

%

Corrección del rango

Longitud de control (8)

m

-

Resultado cont. Z (8)

kg

-

Resultado control F/Z (8)

-

-

Carga de cinta Puente 2 (9)

kg/m

-

Carga de cinta rel. Puente 2 (9)

%


36

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Español

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


Sólo si el parámetro P 03.03 "Fuente del valor consigna" está ajustado al aparato externo (bus del campo ó entrada analógica) Sólo si el parámetro "Modo de carga" está fijado a "YES" y si la función "Preselección de carga" es activa Sólo si Humedad es activa (Bloque 28) Sólo si Báscula de tolva es activa (Bloque 24) Sólo si Regulación tolva está fijado a ON (Bloque 25) Sólo si P31.01 "AI Posición alimentador" no está fijado a "--" Sólo si P03.09 "Diferencia valor real" no está fijado a "--" Sólo si Sistema de medición control es activo (Bloque 27) Sólo si P26.01 "Puente 2 activo" está fijado a "YES"

5.3.5 Línea de señalización En la zona inferior de la zona de indicación se encuentra la zona de señalización. Allí está indicado un acontecimiento eventualmente ocurrido con su código abreviado y un texto de explicación. Un ejemplo para una señalización de acontecimiento es : "WE-01 Power Failure".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

37

Español


5.3.6 Teclas importantes 5.3.7 Teclas de función Por encima o al lado de las teclas de funciones -< F9> está representada en el display la significación de las teclas necesarias para el contexto de servicio. Las siguientes teclas son importantes para el manejo del DISOCONT : Tecla

Abbreviación Función

F5

ON

Conectar

F6

OFF

Desconectar

F4

DEL

Borrar la cifra o el caracter entrado(a) por último

F1

EDIT

Preparar la entrada

F3

ESC

Ruptura de entradas, de programas y de todas las otras funciones después de su llamada.

F2

MENU

Llamar el menú de funciones

F7

ResTot

Poner a cero un totalizador

F7

Events

Indicar acontecimientos

F7

Print T

Impresión totalizador

F7

Volum

Volumétrico

F7

Grav

Gravimétrico

F7

VolSyn

Volumétrico-síncrono

F7

EndBat

Acabar la carga

F7

Print B

Impresión de la carga

Return

Acabar una entrada. Llamada de una entrada ó de una función

F8

Confirmar avisos de acontecimiento

ClrEvt

F9 Ba Set Entrar el valor consigna de la carga La tecla de función F7 sirve de Hot-Key destinado a ejecutar funciones speciales directamente. La ocupación de las teclas se hace con el paramétro P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

5.3.8 Menú de funciones El menú de funciones es el elemento utilizado para realizar las funciones menos frecuentes del DISOCONT. Desde el menú de funciones se puede acceder, por ejemplo, a funciones necesarias para configurar la báscula dosificadora diferencial. Las siguientes funciones y los siguientes menús pueden seleccionarse desde el menú de funciones:

38

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Español


Fig: Función Menu Ramificado Procedimiento para llamar al menú de funciones 1. Ajustar la indicación normal pulsando una o varias veces la tecla . 2. Pulsar la tecla . 3. Hacer desfilar las funciones por medio de las teclas del cursor. 4. Seleccionar con botón Nota: En caso de funciones con dos posibilidades de selección, la función non activa viene indicada, por ej, si "Select Batch" esa activo, "Deselect Batch" viene indicado.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

39

Nederlands

Algemeen

6 Nederlands 6.1 Algemeen Deze beknopte instructies beschrijven de functies van het DISOCONT VLBbedientoestel die een courante bediening van het DISOCONT-systeem mogelijk maken. Voor meer informatie verwijzen wij naar : - het systeemhandboek BV-H2085NL en - het bedrijfshandboek DISOCONT banddoseertoestel BV-H 2062DE.

6.2 Veiligheidsinstructies Ter vermijding van gevaar voor personen of beschadigingen moeten onderstaande voorwaarden en voorschriften nageleefd worden. Respecteer bovendien: !

de veiligheidsinstructies in de documentatie bij de bestelling.

!

de veiligheidsinstructies betreffende de mechanische componenten.

!

de voorschriften voor delen die niet gefabriceerd werden door SCHENCK of niet tot de levering van SCHENCK behoren..

Bij montage-, inbedrijfname- en servicewerken moeten de regels in het bestemmingsland gerespecteerd worden. Doelgericht gebruik Het meetsysteem met de aangesloten mechanische componenten mag uitsluitend gebruikt worden voor weegopdrachten en de rechstreeks daarmee verbonden sturingsopdrachten. Elk ander gebruik geldt als "niet doelgericht". Gevarenbronnen Van het meetsysteem gaat er tijdens het weegbedrijf geen gevaar uit, indien het systeem reglementair geïnstalleerd en in bedrijf genomen werd. Gevaren bij het gebruik van het meetsysteem kunnen ontstaan, wanneer het systeem sturingsopdrachten overneemt of bij het transport van het weeggoed. Mogelijke gevarenbronnen zijn dan bijv. bijkomende inrichtingen voor het transport of de dosering van het weeggoed. In deze gevallen kan restgevaar uitgaan van het meetsysteem, in geval van ondeskundig gebruik of bediening door ongeschoold personeel. Het meetsysteem kan een onderdeel zijn van een complexere installatie. De exploitant van de installatie draagt de volledige verantwoordelijkheid voor de bedrijfszekerheid van de installatie. Kentekens voor restgevaar Dit symbool wijst op gevaar dat kan leiden tot verwonding van personen, en in extreme gevallen zelfs tot de dood.

40

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Nederlands

Veiligheidsinstructies Dit symbool wijst op gevaar dat kan leiden tot beschadiging aan het meetsysteem of andere installatiedelen.

Personeel Voorbereiding, montage, inbedrijfname, bediening, onderhoud, herstelling en servicewerken mogen enkel uitgevoerd worden door vakkundig personeel. Alle personen die met het meetsysteem te maken hebben, moeten de veiligheidsinstructies en de voor hun belangrijke delen van de bedrijfshandleiding kennen en respecteren. De exploitant moet het bedienpersoneel onderrichten aan de hand van de bedrijfshandleiding en hen wijzen op de verplichting alle veiligheidsinstructies en aanwijzingen na te leven. Parameterverandering De werkwijze van het meetsysteem wordt vastgelegd door parameters. De parameters mogen enkel veranderd worden door personen, die vertrouwd zijn met de werkwijze van het toestel (bijv. door scholing bij SCHENCK). Fout ingestelde parameters kunnen bij aangesloten sturingen tot gevaar leiden voor personen of schade toebrengen. Bovendien kunnen zij het weegbedrijf aanzienlijk storen. Paswoord De parameters worden door een paswoord beveiligd tegen onbevoegde veranderingen. De gebruiker van het meetsysteem moet instaan voor een verantwoorde omgang met het paswoord. Kwiteren van foutmeldingen Foutmeldingen mogen enkel gekwiteerd worden, wanneer de oorzaak van de fout weggenomen is. Let er vóór de kwitering van de fout op, dat aangesloten randtoestellen reglementair werken. Vooral aangesloten sturingen moeten zich in een gedefinieerde, zekere toestand bevinden. Onderhoud en herstellingen !

Alle waarschuwings- en instructieplaatjes op het doseertoestel moeten gerespecteerd worden.

!

Vóór werken aan de mechanische uitrusting of aan randapparatuur (vooral sturingen) moet het meetsysteem uitgeschakeld worden. Er moeten maatregelen getroffen worden om een onopzettelijk inschakelen van het meetsysteem uit te sluiten.

!

Werken aan elektrische uitrustingen mogen enkel uitgevoerd worden in spanningsvrije toestand (netstekker uittrekken!).

!

De toestellen mogen enkel gebruikt worden in de voorziene behuizingen, aangezien er anders gevaar bestaat voor contact met spanningsgeleidende delen.

Nat en vocht Alle delen van het doseertoestel, vooral de elektrische delen, moeten beveiligd worden tegen nat en vocht, wanneer de behuizing geopend wordt, bijv. bij onderhouds- en servicewerken. De beveiligingen van de behuizing moeten gerespecteerd worden. Constructieve veranderingen


BV-H2061AA , 0532

41

Nederlands

Display- en bedieningselementen

Wanneer u het meetsysteem constructief verandert of componenten toevoegt, die niet door SCHENCK geleverd worden, neemt SCHENCK geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid of garantie op zich. Dit geldt vooral voor veranderingen die de bedrijfszekerheid van het meetsysteem kunnen beïnvloeden. Vervanging van onderdelen Moeten er bij een herstelling onderdelen vervangen worden, dan mogen enkel de originele wisselstukken van SCHENCK gebruikt worden. Worden er andere wisselstukken gebruikt, dan vervalt de garantie.

6.3 Display- en bedieningselementen 6.3.1 Het Disocont bedieningstoestel De volgende afbeelding toont het vooraanzicht van het DISOCONT bedieningstoestel met aanduiding van de displayvelden:

In dit bedrijfshandboek wordt bij de beschrijving van toetsen de afkorting "toets " gebruikt, bijv. toets . De DISOCONT wordt bediend met functietoetsen tot (geel), cursortoetsen , , , (groen), een numeriek toetsenbord (wit) en de toets (rood). De bezetting van de functietoetsen is afhankelijk van het bedienstation. De functie wordt weergegeven boven of naast de toets. Het displaycontrast wordt met een stap verhoogd door de toets <.> en de cursortoets gelijktijdig in te drukken. Het contrast wordt met een stap verlaagd door de toets <.> en de cursortoets gelijktijdig in te drukken. Standaard wordt na 15 minuten de achtergrondbelichting uitgeschakeld. Door het indrukken van een willekeurige toets schakelt de belichting weer in. Met de toetsencombinatie <.> en cursortoets schakelt men over op continubelichting. De combinatie <.> en cursortoets schakelt opnieuw over naar de initiële toestand. De laatst gekozen toestand blijft ook behouden na power down. De elementen weergegeven in de afbeelding "Vooraanzicht van het DISOCONT bedieningstoestel" hebben volgende betekenis:

6.3.2 Signaallampjes Wanneer het groene signaallampje oplicht, is de DISOCONT bedrijfsklaar.

42

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Nederlands


6.3.3 Statusveld In de eerste of tweede tekstregel kan volgende tekst aangeduid worden: Display

Betekenis

OFF

Doseertoestel is uitgeschakeld. Enkel bandbelasting en bandsnelheid worden verder gemeten en aangeduid.

ON

Doseertoestel is ingeschakeld. Transportelement loopt, transporthoeveelheid en debiet worden geregistreerd.

VOL

Volumetrisch bedrijf.

VOL-->

Start- of leegloopbedrijf

VOL-S

Volumetrisch synchroon

OP

Toetsenbordbedrijf.

SIM

Simulatiebedrijf is ingeschakeld.

BATCH

Voorgekozen batchbedrijf.

ES 11

Een PC met de EasyServe-Software versie 11 is passief observerend aangesloten

ES-ACT 11

Een PC met de EasyServe-Software versie 11 is actief aangesloten en kan waarden veranderen

ES-DIS

Een PC met de EasyServe-Software had een onderbreking zonder zich zoals het hoort afgemeld te hebben.

PA

Doseertoestel in parametreermode

CA

Instelprogramma actief

LOCAL

Lokaal bedrijf is voorgekozen

CHECK

Een controlemeetinrichting is actief

MAN +

Manueel vullen van het reservoir gestart

MAN -

Manueel vullen van het reservoir gestopt


BV-H2061AA , 0532

43

Nederlands


6.3.4 Displayveld In het displayveld kan in twee regels telkens één van de volgende processwaarden weergegeven worden. De regeldisplay kan ook volledig uitgeschakeld worden. De keuze van de waarden gebeurt met de cursortoetsen: de cursortoetsen en hebben betrekking op het eerste tekstveld en de cursortoetsen en op het tweede tekstveld. De aangegeven volgorde van de waarden komt overeen met het doorrollen met de cursortoets of : Aangeduide waarde

Dimensie

Referentiewaarde

Actuele streefwaarde

kg/h of t/h

-

Debiet I

kg/h of t/h

-

Relat. Debiet

%

Nominaal debiet

Bandbelasting

kg/m

-

Rel. Bandbelasting

%

Nominale bandbelasting

Bandsnelheid

m/s

-

Teller 1

kg of t

-

Teller 2

kg of t

-

Teller 3

kg of t

-

Regelafwijking

%

(Streefwaarde-reële waarde)/nom.debiet *100

Externe streefwaarde (1)

kg/h of t/h

-

Relatieve streefwaarde

%

externe streefwaarde

Batch-streefwaarde (2)

kg of t

-

Batch-resthoeveelheid (2)

kg of t

-

Batch-reële waarde (2)

kg of t

-

Vocht (3)

%

-

Gecorrigeerde reële waarde (3)

kg/h of t/h

-

Gecor. Rel. reële waarde (3)

%

Nominaal debiet

Teller 1 corr. (3)

kg of t

-

Teller 2 corr. (3)

kg of t

-

Teller 3 corr. (3)

kg of t

-

B: Vulgewicht (4)

kg of t

-

B: Rel. vulgewicht (4)

%

Nominale vulstand

B: Streefwaarde (5)

kg

-

Positie toewijzer (6)

%

100%

Verschil reële waarde (7)

kg/h

-

Correctie tarra rel. (8)

%


Correctie ber. rel. (8)

%

Bereikscorrectie

Controlelengte (8)

m

-

Doorl. resultaat Z (8)

kg

-

Controleresultaat F/Z (8)

-

-

Bandbelast. 2. brug (9)

kg/m

-

rel. belasting 2.br. (9)

%


44

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Nederlands

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


Enkel wanneer parameter P 03.03 "streefwaardebron" ingesteld is op een extern toestel (veldbus of analoogingang). Enkel wanneer parameter "chargebedrijf" op "YES" staat en de functie "batch voorkeuze" actief is. Enkel wanneer vochtmeting actief (Blok 28) Enkel wanneer reservoirweging actief (Blok 24) Enkel wanneer reservoirregeling AAN (Blok 25) Enkel wanneer P31.01 AI toewijzerpositie niet gelijk is aan "--" Enkel wanneer P03.09 verschil reële waarde niet gelijk is aan "--" Enkel wanneer controlemeetinrichting actief (Blok 27) Enkel wanneer P26.01 2. weegbrug actief op "YES"

6.3.5 Meldingsveld In het onderste bereik van het displayveld bevindt zich het meldingsveld. Daar wordt een eventueel aanstaande foutmelding aangeduid met de code en een verklarende tekst. Voorbeeld van een foutmelding is: "WE-01 Stroomonderbreking".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

45

Nederlands


6.3.6 Belangrijke toetsen 6.3.7 Functietoetsen Boven of naast de functietoetsen tot wordt de voor de bediencontext geldende toetsenbetekenis weergegeven op het display. De volgende toetsen zijn belangrijk voor de bediening van de DISOCONT: Toets

Bezetting

Functie

F5

ON

Inschakelen

F6

OFF

Uitschakelen

F4

DEL

Wissen van het laatst ingegeven getal of van het laatst ingegeven teken.

F1

EDIT

Voorbereiden van de invoer.

F3

ESC

Afbreken van invoeren, programma's en alle andere functies na oproep.

F2

MENU

Oproepen van het functiemenu.

F7

ResTot

Wissen van een transporthoeveelheidsteller.

F7

Events

Gebeurtenissen tonen

F7

Print T

FMZ afdrukken

F7

Volum

Volumetrisch

F7

Grav

Gravimetrisch

F7

VolSyn

Volumetrisch synchroon

F7

EndBat

Batch beëindigen

F7

Print B

Batch afdrukken

Return

Afsluiten van een invoer, oproepen van een programma, een functie.

F8

ClrEvt

Kwiteren van gebeurtenismeldingen

F9

Ba Set

Batch streefwaarde ingeven

De functietoets F7 dient als Hot-Key waarmee speciale functies direct uitgevoerd kunnen worden. De bezetting van de toets gebeurt met de parameter P 02.11 "HotKey F7".

46

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Nederlands


6.3.8 Functiemenu Het functiemenu is het element voor de bediening van de speciale functies van de DISOCONT. Vanuit het functiemenu krijgt men toegang tot de functiegroepen, die nodig zijn voor het configureren en sturen van de installatie. De functiegroepen zijn bedrijfsfuncties, justeringsfuncties en programmeerfuncties. Daartoe behoren bijvoorbeeld de instelprogramma's en de parameterinvoer. Om het gevaar voor verkeerde bedieningen zo klein mogelijk te houden, zijn een aantal functies in het functiemenu beveiligd met een paswoord. De volgende afbeelding toont het functiemenu met alle ondergeschikte menu's. FUNCTIEMENU FMZ afdrukken Teller wissen Displaytest Toewijzer DEELNEMEN/UIT Service-waarden Trend Volumetrisch/gravimetrisch Volum. Synchroon Toetsenbordmode AAN/UIT Gebeurtenissen tonen (1) Batch voorkeuze/niet herkiezen Batch beëindigen (3) Batch afdrukken (4) Start tarra-corr. (5) Start bereikscorr. (5) Controle afbreken (5) Corrigeren (5) >0< nulstellen Programmeren Justeringsfunctie

Menu „Programmeren“ Parameters lezen Parameters invoeren Oorspr.parameters laden Parameters afdrukken Beknopte lijst afdrukken Toestandsprotokol KME-res. afdrukken (5)

Menu „Justeringsfunctie“

(1) enkel bij optreden gebeurtenissen (2) enkel wanneer parameter P14.01 “chargebedrijf” op “YES” staat (3) enkel wanneer een charge actief is (4) enkel wanneer een charge beëindigd is . (5) enkel wanneer controlemeetinrichting actief (blok 27) (6) enkel wanneer reservoirweegtoestel actief (blok 24) (7) enkel wanneer reservoirregeling AAN (P25.01) (8) enkel wanneer reservoirregelaar manueel opgeroepen werd

Simulatie AAN/UIT TW: tarreren CW : gewichtscontr. LB: Impulsen/band TB: tarreren (6) CB: gewichtscontr. (6) B: regelaar-optim. (7) Tijd instellen Reservoir reg. Manueel/autom. (6) Res. reg. man. start/stop (8) vh206201_NL.cdr

Afb.: Functiemenu met bijmenu's Procedure voor het oproepen van het functiemenu 1. Instellen van de normale aanduiding door de toets één of meerdere keren in te drukken 2. Activeren van de toets 3. De functies doorrollen met de cursortoetsen 4. Selectie met de toets Opmerking: Bij functies met twee keuzemogelijkheden wordt de niet-actieve functie aangeduid, bijv. "Batch uit selectie", wanneer "Batch voorkeuze" actief is.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

47

Português

Generalidades

7 Português 7.1 Generalidades As presentes instruções resumidas descrevem as funções da unidade de comando DISOCONT VLB para efetuar as operações usuais no sistema DISOCONT. Para informações mais detalhadas ver: - o manual do sistema BV-H2085DE e - o manual de instruções DISOCONT Balança Dosadora de Correia BV-H 2062DE.

7.2 Instruções de segurança Para evitar danos pessonais e materiais devem observar-se as seguintes condições e instruções. Além disso devem observar-se: !

as instruções de segurança contidas na documentação específica do pedido.

!

as instruções de segurança que se referem aos componentes mecânicos.

!

os regulamentos para unidades fornecidas não fabricadas pela Schenck Process ou que não formam parte do volume de fornecimento da Schenck Process.

Para efetuar trabalhos de montagem, operação inicial e manutenção é necessário que se observem as regras técnicas válidas no país de destino. Uso conforme à finalidade prevista O sistema de medição com os componentes mecânicos ligados deve ser usado exlusivamente para funções de pesagem e funções de comando diretamente relacionadas. Qualquer uso além do uso especificado será considerado como uso contrário à finalidade prevista. Fontes de perigo Não emanará nenhum perigo do sistema de medição durante o modo de pesagem sempre que o sistema tenha sido instalado e posto em funcionamento de acordo com as instruções. Podem surgir perigos durante o uso do sistema de medição se o sistema assumir funções de comando ou durante o transporte do produto a pesar. As possíveis fontes de perigo são por exemplo os dispositivos adicionais que servem para o transporte ou dosagem do produto. Nesses casos podem emanar perigos residuais do sistema de medição se este for usado ou manejado impropriamente por pessoal nao adestrado. O sistema de medição pode formar parte de uma instalação mais complexa. Nesse caso o operador da instalação será responsável da segurança da instalação. Identificação dos perigos residuais Este símbolo faz referência aos perigos que podem causar danos materiais no sistema de medição ou outras partes da instalação.

48

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Português

Instruções de segurança Este símbolo faz referência aos perigos que podem provocar lesões ou, em casos extremos, até a morte.

Pessoal A preparação, montagem, operação inicial, manejo, trabalhos de manutenção e inspeção não devem ser efetuados senão por pessoal qualificado. Qualquer pessoa que trabalhe com o sistema de medição deve conhecer e observar as instruções de segurança e as partes relevantes do manual de instruções. O operador deve instruir o pessoal operador com base no manual de instruções obrigando-o a observar todas as instruções. Modificação dos parâmetros A funcionalidade do sistema de medição está definida pelos parâmetros. Os parâmetros não devem ser modificados senão por pessoas familiarizadas com o funcionamento da unidade (p.e. depois de terem assistido a um curso de treinamento na Schenck Process). Com o sistema de comando ligado, os parâmetros ajustados incorretamente podem causar riscos para pessoas ou danos materiais. Além disso podem afetar consideravelmente as operações de pesagem. Palavra passe Os parâmetros estão protegidos contra uma modificação não autorizada por uma palavra passe. O usuário do sistema de medição deve cuidar de que a palavra passe seja usada com responsabilidade. Confirmação das mensagens de evento As mensagens de evento não devem ser confirmadas senão depois de eliminada a sua causa. Antes de confirmar um evento verifique-se de que as unidades periféricas funcionem corretamente, especialmente de que qualquer comando ligado se encontre numa condição segura definida. Trabalhos de manutenção e inspeção !

Devem observar-se todas as placas de aviso e informação instaladas no sistema de pesagem.

!

Antes de efetuar qualquer trabalho nos dispositivos mecânicos ou unidades periféricas (especialmente nas unidades de comando) é necessário desligar o sistema de medição. É necessário tomar medidas para excluir que o sistema de medição seja ligado involuntariamente.

!

Para trabalhos nos equipamentos elétricos é necessário que o sistema esteja livre de tensão (tirar a ficha de rede!).

!

Os equipamentos só devem funcionar nas caixas previstas porque senão existe o risco de que o pessoal entre em contato com peças sob tensão.

Humidade É necessário proteger todas as peças do sistema de pesagem, sobretudo as peças elétricas, contra humidade quando se abrem as caixas p.e. durante trabalhos de manutenção. De resto deve observar-se a classe de proteção das caixas. Modificações na construção Se se efetuarem modificações na construção ou se se acrescentarem componentes não fornecidos pela Schenck Process a mesma não assumirá qualquer responsabilidade nem garantia. Isso valerá especialmente em relação às DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions ©Schenck Process

BV-H2061AA , 0532

49

Português

Elementos de visualização e comando

modificações que possam afetar a segurança operacional do sistema de medição. Substituição de peças Se for necessário substituir alguma peça durante trabalhos de reparação, só usar peças originais da Schenck Process. Se se usarem outras peças a garantia extinguirse-á.

7.3 Elementos de visualização e comando 7.3.1 A unidade de comando Disocont A seguinte figura mostra a vista frontal da unidade de comando DISOCONT com a descrição dos campos de visualização:

primeira linha de texto segunda linha de texto primeiro campo de texto

primeiro campo de visualização bloco de teclas numéricas

segundo campo de texto

segundo campo de visualização

tecla

lâmpada de sinalização

campo de mensagem

teclas de comando F1-F9 campo de estado

teclas do cursor

VH206410_pt.cdr

Para descrever as teclas usa-se, no presente manual de instruções, a forma resumida "tecla ", p.e. tecla . A unidade DISOCONT é comandada mediante as teclas de comando a (amarelas), as teclas do cursor , , , (verdes), um bloco numérico (branco) e a tecla (vermelha). A configuração das teclas de comando depende da situação de funcionamento, sendo visualizada ao lado ou em cima da respetiva tecla. Para aumentar o contraste da visualização por um degrau carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e e para diminui-lo por um degrau carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e . Geralmente a iluminação de fundo desliga-se após 15 minutos. Para religar a iluminação basta carregar em qualquer tecla. Para mudar para iluminação permanente carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e e para voltar à condição básica carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e . A última condição selecionada será mantida também no caso de haver uma falha de tensão. Os elementos representados na figura "Vista frontal da unidade de comando DISOCONT" indicam o seguinte.

50

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Português


7.3.2 Lâmpada de sinalização Se a lâmpada verde estiver encendida, a unidade DISOCONT está pronta para entrar em funcionamento.

7.3.3 Campo de estado Na primeira ou segunda linha de texto poderá aparecer o seguinte texto: Visualização

Significado

OFF

A balança está desligada, apenas a carga e a velocidade da correia continuam a ser medidas e indicadas.

ON

A balança está ligada. O órgão transportador está a funcionar, a quantidade transportada e o débito sendo detectados.

VOL

Modo volumétrico.

VOL-->

Modo de arranque ou esvaziamento

VOL-S

Volumétrico síncrono

OP

Modo teclado.

SIM

Modo de simulação está ligado.

BATCH

Modo batch pré-seleccionado..

ES 11

Um PC com a software EasyServe versão 11 está ligado para observação passiva

ES-ACT 11

Um PC com a software EasyServe versão 11 está ligado activamente, podendo ajustar os valores.

ES-DIS

Um PC com a software EasyServe teve uma interrupção sem ter terminado a sessão devidamente.

PA

Balança no modo de parametrização

CA

Programa de ajuste activo

LOCAL

Modo local está pré-seleccionado

CHECK

Um dispositivo de medição de controlo está activo

MAN +

Enchimento manual do recipiente iniciado

MAN -

Enchimento manual do recipiente parado


BV-H2061AA , 0532

51

Português


7.3.4 Campo de visualização No campo de visualização, uma das seguintes variáveis de processo será representada em duas linhas. Também é possível suprimir a visualização. As variáveis são selecionadas mediante as teclas do cursor: As teclas e correspondem ao primeiro campo de texto e as teclas e ao segundo campo de texto. A sequência indicada das variáveis aparecerá ao fazer-se "scrolling" com a tecla do cursor ou : Valor visualizado

Dimensão

Valor de referência

Valor teórico actual

kg/h ou t/h

-

Débito nominal I

kg/h ou t/h

-

Débito relativo

%

Débito nominal

Carga da correia

kg/m

-

Carga relativa de correia

%

Carga nominal da correia

Velocidade da correia

m/s

-

contador 1

kg ou t

-

Contador 2

kg ou t

-

Contador 3

kg ou t

-

desvio de regulação

%

(valor téorico - valor real)/débito nominal *100

valor teórico externo (1)

kg/h ou t/h

-

valor teórico relativo

%

valor teórico externo

valor batch teórico (2)

kg ou t

-

quantitade batch residual (2)

kg ou t

-

valor Batch real (2)

kg ou t

-

humidade (3)

%

-

valor real corrigido (3)

kg/h ou t/h

-

valor real rel. corr. (3)

%

débito nominal


kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-


kg ou t

-

B: peso de enchimento (4)

kg ou t

-

B: peso rel. de enchimento (4)

%

nível nominal

B: valor teórico (5)

kg

-

Posição alimentador (6)

%

100%

Differença valor real (7)

kg/h

-

Correcção tara rel. (8)

%


Correcção da gama rel. (8)

%

Correcção da gama

Comprimento de controlo (8)

m

-

Resultado contín. Z (8)

kg

-

Resultado controlo F/Z (8)

-

-

Carga da correia 2da ponte (9)

kg/m

-

Carga rel. da correia 2da pte. (9)

%


52

DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions

BV-H2061AA, 0532

© Schenck Process

Português

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)


apenas se o parâmetro P 03.03 "fonte de valor teórico" estiver ajustado a um dispositivo externo (bus de campo ou entrada analógica). apenas se o parâmetro "modo batch" estiver ajustado a "YES", a função "préselecção batch" estiver activa. apenas se a medição da humidade estiver activa (bloco 28) apenas se a balança para recipientes estiver activa (bloco 24) apenas se a regulação de recipiente estiver LIG (bloco 25) apenas se P31.01 AI alimentador posição desigual "--" apenas se P03.09 diferença valor real desigual "--" apenas se o dispositivo de medição de controlo estiver activo (bloco 27) apenas se P26.01 2da ponte de pesagem estiver activa em "YES"

7.3.5 Campo de mensagem Na zona inferior do campo de visualização há um campo de mensagem onde aparecerá uma eventual mensagem de evento com o seu código abreviado mais um texto explicativo. Um exemplo de uma mensagem de evento é "WE-01 Falha de rede".


BV-H2061AA , 0532

53

Português


7.3.6 Teclas importantes 7.3.7 Teclas de comando Em cima ou ao lado das teclas de comando a será visualizada a função das teclas no respectivo contexto de funcionamento. As seguintes teclas são importantes para a operação do DISOCONT: Tecla

Configuração

Função

F5

ON

ligar

F6

OFF

desligar

F4

DEL

anular o último número introduzido ou o último carácter introduzido.

F1

EDIT

preparar a introdução

F3

ESC

Interromper introduções, programas e quaisquer outras funções depois de chamadas

F2

MENU

Chamar o distribuidor de funções

F7

ResTot

Apagar um contador

F7

Events

Visualizar eventos

F7

Print T

Imprimir contador

F7

Volum

volumétrico

F7

Grav

gravimétrico

F7

VolSyn

Volumétrico síncrono

F7

EndBat

terminar batch

F7

Print B

imprimir batch

Return

Terminar uma introdução. Chamar um programa, uma função.

F8

ClrEvt

Confirmar mensagens de eventos

F9

Ba Set

Introduzir o valor batch teórico

A tecla de comando F7 serve como tecla hot-key a qual permite efectuar funções especiais directamente. A tecla é configurada com o parâmetro P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

54

BV-H2061AA, 0532


Português


7.3.8 Menu de funções O menu de funções é o elemento para aceder a funções especiais da unidade DISOCONT necessárias para configurar e comandar o sistema, entre elas as funções de operação, ajuste e programação, como p.e. programas de ajuste e introdução de parâmetros. Para reduzir o risco de comandos errados, algumas funções estão protegidas por palavra passe. A seguinte figura mostra o menu de funções com os submenus que se podem selecionar. FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

Print FMZ Reset Totalizer Test Display Select/Stop Prefeeder Service Values Trend Volumetic/Gravimetric Volum. Synchronous Start/Stop Keyb. Mode Display Events (1) Select/Deselect Batch (2 Abort Batch (3) Print Batch (4) Start Span Corr. (5) Finish Check Meas. (5) Accept Correction (5) >0< Zero Set Programming Calib.Functions (1) only if events are available (2) only if Parameter P 14.01 “Batch Mode” is set to “YES” (3) only if “Select Batch” is active (4) only if a batch is complete (5) only if check system is active (Block 27) (6) only if bin weigher is active (Block 24) (7) only if bin control is started (P 25.01) (8) only if bin controller has been selected manually .

“PROGRAMMING” Menu

Read Parameters Enter Parameters Load Default Param. Print Parameters Print Shortlist Print Status Rep.

“CALIB. FUNCTIONS” Menu

START/STOP Simulation TW: Tare CW: Weight Check LB: Pulses/Belt TB: Tare (6) CB: Weight Check (6) BIN: Contr. Optim. (7) Set Time Autom. Manual Bin Control (6) Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (8)

vh206201_GB.cdr

Fig.: Distribuidor de funções com menus Procedimento para chamar o menu de funções 1. Selecionar a visualização normal carregando uma ou várias vezes na tecla 2. Carregar na tecla 3. Fazer "scrolling" das funções mediante as teclas de seta 4. Selecionar mediante a tecla Nota: No caso de funções com duas seleções possíveis será visualizada a função não ativada, p.e. "deselecionar batch" será visualizado se "pré-selecionar batch" estiver ativado.


BV-H2061AA , 0532

55

Português

56


BV-H2061AA, 0532


Index

A unidade de comando Disocont 50 Algemeen 40 Allgemeines 1 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente 3 Anzeigefeld 5 Belangrijke toetsen 46 Campo de estado 51 Campo de mensagem 53 Campo de visualização 52 Campo di indicazione 28 Champ d'état 19 Champs de textes affichés 20 Das Disocont Bediengerät 3 Deutsch 1 Disocont Control Unit 10 Display and Control Elements 10 Display- en bedieningselementen 42 Display Field 12 Displayveld 44 Distributore di funzioni 31 Elementi di indicazione e di comando 26 Elementos de indicación y de mando 34 Elementos de visualização e comando 50 Eléments d'affichage et de service 18 English 8 Español 32 Français 16 Functiemenu 47 Functietoetsen 46 Function Distributor 15 Function Keys 14 Funktionstasten 6 Funktionsverteiler 7 General 8 Generalidades 32, 48 Generalità 24 Généralités 16 Het Disocont bedieningstoestel 42 Important Keys 14 Instrucciones de seguridad 32 Instruções de segurança 48 Instructions de sécurité 16 Istruzioni di sicurezza 24 Italiano 24 La unidad de mando Disocont 34 Lâmpada de sinalização 51 Lámpara de señalización 35 Lampe témoin 19 LED 11 Ligne de signalisations 21 Línea de señalización 37 L'unità di comando Disocont 26 L'unité de service Disocont 18 Meldelampe 4 Meldingsveld 45 Meldungsfeld 6 Menú de funciones 38 Menu de funções 55 Menu des fonctions 23 Message Field 13 Nederlands 40 Português 48 Riga di messaggio 29 Righe di testo 27 Safety Instructions 8 Sicherheitshinweise 1 DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions ©Schenck Process

BV-H2061AA , 0532

1

Index Signaallampjes 42 Spia di segnalazione 27 Status Field 11 Statusfeld 4 Statusveld 43 Tasti di funzione 30 Tasti importanti 30 Teclas de comando 54 Teclas de función 38 Teclas importantes 38, 54 Touches de fonction 22 Touches importantes 22 Veiligheidsinstructies 40 Wichtige Tasten 6 Zona de estado 35 Zona de indicación 36

2

BV-H2061AA, 0532


DISOCONT ® Weighfeeder Instruction Manual

we make processes work

BV-H2062GB

Contacts, Copyright Sales:

Tel.: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 10 28 [email protected]

Service:

24h Emergency hotline:

+49 (0) 172 - 650 17 00 +49 (0) 171 - 255 11 95 (Beltweigher, Weighfeeder) service.process@ schenck.net

eMail:

Business Segments: Heavy Duty Weighing & Feeding Service Tel.: Service Fax: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 26 23 +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 32 70 [email protected]

Light Duty Weighing & Feeding Service Tel.: Service Fax: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 25 72 +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 20 72 [email protected]

Vibrating Machines Service Tel.: Service Fax: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 35 25 +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 30 96 [email protected]

Transport & Logistics Service Tel.: Service Fax: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 24 48 +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 13 69 [email protected]

Components & Spare Parts Service Tel.: Service Fax: eMail:

+49 (0) 61 51 32 - 17 58 +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 36 32 [email protected]

© Copyright 2005 SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH Measuring and Process Technologies Landwehrstraße 55, D-64293 Darmstadt http://www.schenck-process.com All rights reserved. Any reproduction of manual, regardless of method, without prior permission by SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited. Subject to change without prior notice.

Contents

1 ON MANUAL...................................................................................... 1 2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................. 2 3 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ 4 3.1 What is DISOCONT? .............................................................................................. 4 3.2 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 5 3.3 Measuring Principle............................................................................................... 5 3.4 Operating Modes.................................................................................................... 7 3.5 Control .................................................................................................................... 7 3.5.1 Weighfeeder ...................................................................................................... 7 3.5.2 Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder ............................................. 8 3.5.3 Belt Weighers With Constant Load ................................................................... 8 3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC ........................................................................ 9 3.7 Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP ................................................................. 9 3.8 Batching................................................................................................................ 10

4 CONTROL........................................................................................ 11 4.1 Control Unit .......................................................................................................... 11 4.1.1 LED ................................................................................................................. 12 4.1.2 Status Field ..................................................................................................... 12 4.1.3 Display Field.................................................................................................... 13 4.1.4 Message Field ................................................................................................. 14 4.1.5 Function Keys ................................................................................................. 14 4.2 Function Distributor ............................................................................................ 15 4.3 Basic Functions ................................................................................................... 16 4.3.1 START/STOP Feeder ..................................................................................... 16 4.3.2 Setpoint Input .................................................................................................. 16 4.3.3 Relative Setpoint ............................................................................................. 17 4.3.4 Reset Totalizing Counters............................................................................... 17 4.3.5 Acknowledge Event Messages ....................................................................... 18 4.4 Operating Functions............................................................................................ 18 4.4.1 Test Display..................................................................................................... 19 4.4.2 Select/Stop Prefeeder ..................................................................................... 19 4.4.3 Service Values ................................................................................................ 19 4.4.4 Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric Modes............................ 23 4.4.5 START / STOP Keyboard Mode ..................................................................... 23 4.4.6 >0< Zero Set ................................................................................................... 24 4.4.7 Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings) ....................................................... 25 4.4.8 Display Events ................................................................................................ 25 4.4.9 Trend ............................................................................................................... 26 4.5 Calibrating Functions .......................................................................................... 27 DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

I

Contents

4.5.1 "TW: Tare" .......................................................................................................28 4.5.2 "CW: Weight Check" ........................................................................................29 4.5.3 "LB: Pulses/Belt" ..............................................................................................30 4.5.4 "Set Time" ........................................................................................................32 4.5.5 "START / STOP Simulation"............................................................................32 4.6 Programming Functions ......................................................................................34 4.6.1 Read Parameters.............................................................................................34 4.6.2 Enter Parameters.............................................................................................35 4.6.3 Load Default Parameters.................................................................................36 4.6.4 Print Parameters ..............................................................................................36 4.6.5 Print Parameter Shortlist..................................................................................37 4.6.6 Status Report ...................................................................................................38 4.7 Batching Functions ..............................................................................................39 4.7.1 Select Batch.....................................................................................................39 4.7.2 Abort Batch ......................................................................................................40 4.7.3 Print Batch .......................................................................................................40 4.7.4 Deselect Batch.................................................................................................41 4.8 Bin Weigher...........................................................................................................41 4.8.1 "Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function .................................41 4.8.2 "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function ...........................................42 4.8.3 "TB: Tare" Calibrating Function .......................................................................42 4.8.4 "CB: Weight Check" Calibrating Function........................................................43 4.8.5 "B: Controller Optim." Calibrating Function......................................................44 4.9 On-stream Calibration System............................................................................45 4.9.1 "Start Tare Corr." function................................................................................45 4.9.2 "Start Range Corr." ..........................................................................................46 4.9.3 "Correct" function .............................................................................................46 4.9.4 "Abort Check" function .....................................................................................47

5 COMMISSIONING............................................................................ 48 5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites ....................................................................................48 5.2 Alignment ..............................................................................................................48 5.2.1 Out-of-Round Error ..........................................................................................48 5.2.2 Maintenance ....................................................................................................49 5.3 Electrical Wiring ...................................................................................................49 5.4 Input Important Parameters ................................................................................49 5.5 Control ...................................................................................................................50 5.5.1.1 Setting external feed rate controller ..........................................................50 5.5.1.2 Setting internal controller ..........................................................................50 5.6 Controller Calibration...........................................................................................51 5.7 Belt Run Monitoring .............................................................................................51 5.8 Belt Influence Compensation BIC.......................................................................52 5.9 Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP...........................................................52

6 CHECKS .......................................................................................... 53 II

BV-H2062GB , 0521

DISOCONT Weighfeeder © SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt

Contents 6.1 Functional Check ................................................................................................. 53 6.2 Check Using Check Weight ................................................................................ 53 6.3 Belt Speed Check................................................................................................. 54 6.4 Check Using Material .......................................................................................... 55 6.5 Test Plug............................................................................................................... 56

7 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 57 7.1 General Information............................................................................................. 57 7.2 Parameter List ...................................................................................................... 61 7.3 Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules ......................................................... 78 7.4 Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions ............................................................ 81 7.5 Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources ............................................................. 85 7.6 Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data............................................................ 88 7.7 Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling ........................................................... 89 7.8 Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring ............................................................ 90 7.9 Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters ................................................................ 95 7.10 Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values .................................................................. 96 7.11 Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data ........................................................... 98 7.12 Parameter Group 10 - Controller ...................................................................... 99 7.13 Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs .......................................................... 103 7.14 Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs .............................................................. 106 7.15 Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs ........................................................... 110 7.16 Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode................................................................. 113 7.17 Parameter Group 15 - Process Control ......................................................... 116 7.18 Parameter Group 16 - VAP.............................................................................. 117 7.19 Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring ........................................................ 117 7.20 Parameter Group 18 - Printer.......................................................................... 120 7.21 Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe...................................................... 121 7.22 Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus ......................................................... 123 7.23 Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs ............................................................... 131

DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

III

Contents

7.24 Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller ...................................................133 7.25 Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking .................................................................136 7.26 Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher.................................................................140 7.27 Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller....................................................145 7.28 Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge.........................................................149 7.29 Parameter Group 27 - Check System .............................................................153 7.30 Parameter Group 28 - Moisture.......................................................................165 7.31 Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time....................................................................167 7.32 Parameter Group 30 - Linearization................................................................169 7.33 Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate.....................................................................170 7.34 Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip...............................................................172 7.35 Event Messages................................................................................................174

8 TYPICAL APPLICATIONS............................................................. 182 8.1 Weighfeeder ........................................................................................................182 8.2 Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder...........................................................183 8.3 Belt Weigher with Constant Load .....................................................................185

9 APPENDIX ..................................................................................... 187 9.1 Linearization .......................................................................................................187 9.2 Sensor Slip ..........................................................................................................188 9.3 Source Selection ................................................................................................189 9.4 Setpoint and Start Sources ...............................................................................190 9.5 Batching ..............................................................................................................193 9.6 Feed Rate Control...............................................................................................195 9.7 Effective Platform Load .....................................................................................201 9.8 Belt Load Control ...............................................................................................203 9.9 Hopper Control ...................................................................................................204 9.10 Interlocking P23.01...P23.19 ............................................................................205 9.11 Interlocking P23.20...P23.27 ............................................................................207 9.12 Details: Time Gate P22.28...P22.37 .................................................................208 IV

BV-H2062GB , 0521


Contents 9.13 On-stream Calibration System ....................................................................... 210

DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

V

Contents

VI

BV-H2062GB , 0521


On Manual

1 On Manual The Operating and Service Manual is designed for use by the operator and the service engineer. This manual is available both in printed and Windows-Help (Winhlp) formats. You may also access the printed version electronically in the Adobe PDF format. The daily user will find the information he needs in the Operating Manual. Information on the DISOCONT electronic design is included in the System Manual (BV-H2085).

DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

-1-

Safety Instructions

2 Safety Instructions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated below. Additionally, you should observe: !

Safety hints given in order-specific documentation

!

Safety hints relating to mechanical components

!

Instructions given in sub-suppliers documentation.

When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations. Use As Originally Intended The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively designed for weighing and controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is considered inappropriate. Risks No danger originates from the measuring system itself, if it is properly installed and commissioned. However, upon use of the measuring system, danger may result during transit of material to be weighed (e.g. from auxiliaries used to handle or feed material) or if system assumes control tasks. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle the system. The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The user is fully responsible for the overall plant safety. Identification of Residual Risks The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has the potential to cause severe injury or death.

The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has the potential to cause damage to the measuring system or other plant sections. Personnel Preparation, installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance, and servicing may exclusively be performed by skilled persons only. All persons working on the measuring system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical documentation relevant to their work. The supervisor is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions given. Parameter Changes The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters, which must exclusively be changed by persons familiar with the measuring system operating principles (e.g. after training by SCHENCK). Parameters incorrectly set may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a user control system is connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation. Password Software parameters are protected from unintended change by password. The measuring system user has to ensure safe password handling.

-2-

BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder © SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt

Safety Instructions

Error Message Acknowledgement Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied. Before you acknowledge an error message, check to see that connected peripherals properly operate. Check to see that connected control systems, if any, are in fail-safe state. Maintenance and Repair !

During maintenance and repair, observe any warning symbols on the scale.

!

Before performing work on the mechanical system or peripherals (particularly the control system), disconnect the measuring system and protect the system from inadvertent restart.

!

Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply.

!

The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.

Moisture Protection Protect all system parts, electrical items in particular, from moisture (e.g. during maintenance and servicing) when housings are open. Observe housing protection standards. Modification & Replacement Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by SCHENCK voids SCHENCK's liability for any resulting damages. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect the operating safety of the measuring system. Replacement of Components Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by SCHENCK. To ensure this requirement is met, only genuine SCHENCK spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will be void.


-3-

Overview

3 Overview The Overview chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT system used in conjunction with a feeder or meter.

3.1 What is DISOCONT? The DISOCONT is a versatile family of modular weighing electronics for use with weighing and feeding systems. Its components are system unit VSE, local control unit VLB and input/output unit VEA. The DISOCONT is designed for continuous measuring and control tasks as well as discontinuous batching. The system also performs all weighing and processing functions required for the measuring and feeding of bulk solids. The DISOCONT is suited for flexible adaptation to space requirements and interconnection. Used in conjunction with the specific application software for weighing and feeding tasks, the DISOCONT can be used in the following industries: !

Steel

!

Basic Materials

!

Cement

!

Food

!

Chemical

In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems are supported:

-4-

!

Belt weighers

!

Weighfeeders

!

Solids flow meters (chutes)

!

Solids flow feeders

!

Loss-in-weight, gain-in-weight feeders

!

Mass flow meters (Coriolis meters)

!

Mass flow feeders (Coriolis feeders)

!

Filling systems


Overview

3.2 Definitions The table below explains some basic terms. Abbreviation Meaning

Explanation

Unit

I

Actual feed rate

Material amount per unit time

kg/hr or t/hr

P

Set feed rate

Preset feed rate actual value is controlled for

kg/hr or t/hr

Z

Totalized amount

Weight of material amount fed out since last counter reset

kg or t

V

Belt speed

Conveyor belt speed

m/s

Q

Belt load

Weight of material fed on one meter of belt kg/m length

QB

Platform load

Y

Controller magnitude

Xd Deviation Tab.: Definitions

kg Depending on deviation

mA

Difference from setpoint - actual value

%

3.3 Measuring Principle The belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the amount of material transported on a conveyor belt. The measuring principle is shown in the "Measuring Principle" figure. The material is guided over a platform arranged below belt and limited by two carrying idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the material amount on platform excerts a force on load cell L/C. Weighed idlers are connected to the frame structure, e.g. via leaf-spring parallel guidance.

Fig.: Measuring Principle


-5-

Overview

The load cell output voltage is proportional to platform load. It is amplified and transferred to the microprocessor with the use of an analog/digital converter. The load pattern of a single-idler belt weigher is shown in the "Measuring Principle" figure by the white triangle. Only half of the material weight load is applied to the weighed idler. Weighing technology considers the weight pattern of platform load in the computation of the effective platform length. For the single-idler platform, the following holds true: Leff = Lg / 2 Leff = Effective platform length in m Lg = Total platform length in m NOTE: For multi-idler platforms, compute effective platform length as explained in the "Details: Platforms" item of the Appendix. Belt load Q is computed as follows: Q = QB / Leff Q = Belt load in kg/m QB = Weight of load on platform in kg Another significant measurement value is the belt speed acquired by a speed transducer and converted into a corresponding pulse frequency. DISOCONT uses belt load and speed to compute the feed rate in accordance with the following formula: I = Q * v = QB * v / Leff I = Feed rate in kg/s v = Belt speed in m/s Q = Belt load in kg/m QB = Weight of load on platform in kg Leff = Effective platform length in m

-6-


Overview

3.4 Operating Modes The DISOCONT can operate in three modes: !

Gravimetric Mode (Controlled) Actual feed rate is controlled for preset feed rate. Maximum possible setpoint corresponds to nominal feed rate. If input value is too big, system reports error.

!

Volumetric Mode (Uncontrolled) Feed unit is set proportional to set feed rate. Changes in hopper weight do not influence feed unit control. At rated conditions, feed rate approximately corresponds to defined setpoint. Setpoint is limited to three times the nominal feed rate. If value is exceeded, system reports error.

!

Volumetric Synchronous Mode In contrast to volumetric mode, current belt speed setpoint is not computed using nominal belt load but the belt load measured before change-over. This ensures that change-over takes place without jerks.

3.5 Control This items briefly describes how the control system operates with different applications. NOTE: All applications require the belt to be driven by an external power stage with armature voltage or speed control.

3.5.1 Weighfeeder The figure below shows how the conveyor belt extracts material from a silo. Actual feed rate is compared to setpoint and the difference is transferred to controller R which continues varying belt speed until actual feed rate is equal to setpoint.

Fig.: Weighfeeder Control DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

-7-

Overview

3.5.2 Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder The figure on the next page reflects the control principle. A controlled prefeeder feeds the material onto a conveyor belt. The feed rate is controlled for setpoint by change of belt load. Normally, belt speed is constant.

Prefeeder

Q

Y

V

-

ACT

+

SET

Xd

R

Vh206224_gb.cdr

kg/hr

Fig.: Belt Weigher Control With Controlled Material Prefeeder NOTE: Position-controlled prefeeders require an external three-point step controller to be connected.

3.5.3 Belt Weighers With Constant Load The figure below shows the control principle. An uncontrolled prefeeder feeds the material onto a conveyor belt. The controller adapts belt speed such that it always corresponds to nominal belt load Qo. Since the weighing system always uses the same working point, a high measuring accuracy can be achieved. The feed rate at the point of discharge corresponds to the prefeeder feed rate.

Prefeeder

Q

V

M ACT Y

R

+

Xd

ACT

SET Vh206225_gb.cdr

Qo

Fig.: Belt Weigher With Constant Load

-8-


Overview

3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC Not even the best conveyor belts have exactly the same material properties. Particularly at the welds, conveyor belts become thicker and stiffer. The figure below enlarges the situation over one belt circuit.

Fig. Material Distribution On Conveyor Belt On these grounds, high accuracy can be ensured only over complete belt circuits, i.e. via the mean value. An additional belt circuit sensor and a metallic marker on belt enables the DISOCONT to acquire and compensate the dynamic zero point influence which increases the scale's short-term accuracy. To compensate changes in running operation, belt influence is continuously measured. Adaptive compensation is active also while material is being measured.

3.7 Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is not arranged directly at the point of material discharge. So, if belt load varies, the feed rate measured does not correspond to the current feed rate at the point of discharge. A special speed dependent delay element shifts the measurement to the point of discharge where it acquires the amount of material directly. There is no need for special measurement value transducers. Material flow, too, is controlled for point of discharge.


-9-

Overview

3.8 Batching In batch mode, a preselected amount of material is discharged. If batch setpoint is reached, batching process is complete. Batching can be performed in any mode and with any variant. The figure below shows the batching sequence of a controlled system:

Fig.: Batching The represented sections mean: 0 : Start batch 1 : Stop batch 2 : Continue stopped batch 3 : Continuously decrease set feed rate 4 : Stop batch automatically if preset amount has been batched.

- 10 -


Control

4 Control This chapter details the DISOCONT control. There are three different modes: ! Control via the VLB local control box ! Control via "Easyserve" software on PC ! Local control (emergency mode) via the VLG local control box.

4.1 Control Unit After start of the DISOCONT control unit, display is automatically tested. If test is complete, the device version number is displayed for some seconds, to be then replaced by the normal display. NOTE: The following values and settings remain stored after power failure: ! Counter readings ! Parameter settings ! Setpoints ! Service values ! Counter pulses not yet output ! Date and time for approx. 5 days provided that a DISOCONT input/output unit is connected. The figure below shows the DISOCONT control unit front panel and its display fields.

This manual uses the abbreviations " key", e.g. key. Cursor keys are called "cursor or ". The DISOCONT is operated with the use of function keys (yellow), keypad (white) and Return key (red).


- 11 -

Control

Function keys are assigned in accordance with the specific control situation. The particular function is displayed over or right next to the key. You can increase display contrast by operating key <.> and single or repeated operation of the cursor. Use <.> keys and cursor to decrease display contrast. On standard, the background lighting cuts off after 15 minutes and comes on again after operation of any key. Use shortcut <.> and cursor key for steady light. Shortcut <.> and cursor key lets you return to default state. The state selected last is maintained also after power failure. The elements shown in the figure have the following meanings:

4.1.1 LED If the green LED lights, DISOCONT is ready to operate.

4.1.2 Status Field In the first and second text lines you can read the following texts: Display Meaning OFF

Scale OFF. Only belt load and belt speed continue being measured and displayed.

ON

Scale ON. Feed unit is active, amount fed out and feed rate are aquired.

VOL

Volumetric mode

VOL--> Start-up or clearance mode VOL-S


OP

Keyboard mode

SIM

Simulation ON

BATCH Batch mode selected ES 11

PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is connected for passive monitoring.

ESPC with EasyServe software Version 11 is actively connected and can be used to ACT 11 change values. ES-DIS PC with EasyServe software disrupted without previous log-off. PA

Scale in parametrization mode

CA

Setting program active

LOCAL Local mode preselected CHECK Check system active MAN + Manual hopper filling started MAN -

- 12 -

Manual hopper filling stopped


Control

4.1.3 Display Field In the display field, one of the following process variables can be displayed in two lines. You can also fade out line display.: Selection is by cursor keys. and cursors refer to the first text field; and cursors, to the second text field. The stated sequence of variables corresponds to scrolling with or cursor. Displayed Variable

Unit

Reference Value

Current Setpoint

kg/hr or t/hr -

Feed Rate I

kg/hr or t/hr -

Relative Feed Rate

%

Nominal feed rate

Belt Load

kg/m

-

Relative Belt Load

%

Nominal belt load

Belt Speed

m/s

-

Totalizer 1

kg or t

-

Totalizer 2

kg or t

-

Totalizer 3

kg or t

-

Deviation

%

(Setpoint-actual value)/nominal feed rate *100

External Setpoint (1)

kg/hr or t/hr -

Relative Setpoint

%

External setpoint

Batch Setpoint (2)

kg or t

-

Batch Resid. Amount (2)

kg or t

-

Batch Feed Rate (2)

kg or t

-

Moisture (3)

%

-

Setpoint (3)

kg/hr or t/hr -

Corr. Rel. Feed Rate (3)

%

Nominal feed rate


kg or t

-


kg or t

-


kg or t

-

BIN: Fill Weight (4)

kg or t

-

BIN: Rel. Fill Weight (4)

%

Nominal fill level

BIN: Setpoint (5)

kg

-

Flow Gate Position (6)

%

100%

Difference Feed Rate (7)

kg/hr

-

Rel. Tare Corr. (8)

%

Nominal belt load

Rel. Span Corr. (8)

%

Range correction

Check Belt Length (8)

m

-

Contin. Result Z (8)

kg

-

Check Result F/Z (8)

-

-

Belt load 2nd Bridge (9)

kg/m

-

Rel. Load 2nd Bridge (9)

%

Nominal belt load

(1)

Only if Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to external system (fieldbus or analog input).


- 13 -

Control

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

Only if Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES" and "Preselect Batch" function is active. Only if moisture measurement is active (Block 28) Only if hopper scale is active (Block 24) Only if bin weigher control is ON (Block 25) Only if P31.01 AI Pos. Flow Gate unequals "--" Only if P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" unequals "--" Only if check system is active (Block 27) Only if P26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to "YES"

4.1.4 Message Field The message field in the lower display field area shows the event message, if any, complete with code and a short explanatory text. Sample event message: "WE-01 Power Failure".

4.1.5 Function Keys Over or next to function keys to , the contact specific key definition is shown on display. The following keys are important for DISOCONT control: Key

Assignment Function

F5

ON

Turn on

F6

OFF

Turn off

F4

DEL

Delete number of character entered last

F1

EDIT

Prepare input

F3

ESC

Abort inputs, programs and all other function after call

F2

MENU

Call function distributor

F7

ResTot

Reset totalizing counter

F7

FILL

Start filling

F7

NO FILL

Stop filling

F7

Events

Display events

F7

Print T

Print totalizing counter readings

F7

Volum

Volumetric mode

F7

Grav

Gravimetric mode

F7

VolSyn


F7

EndBat

Terminate batch

F7

Print B

Print batch

Return

Acknowledge input. Call program or function.

F8

Acknowledge event messages

ClrEvt

F9 Ba Set Enter batch setpoint Function key F7 serves as hot-key designed to directly perform special functions. Key is assigned using Parameter P 02.14 "Hot-Key F7".

- 14 -


Control

4.2 Function Distributor The function distributor is designed to access special DISOCONT functions required for system control and configuration. Among these are, for instance, operating, calibrating, and programming functions, as well as setting programms and parameter input. To reduce the risk of maloperation, some functions are protected by password. Using the function distributor, you can select the following functions and menus:

Fig: Function Distributor With Menus Follow these steps: 1. Select normal display by pressing key as many times as required. 2. Press key. 3. Scroll functions using cursor keys. 4. Select with key. NOTE: In case of functions with two possible selections, the function not active is displayed, e.g. if "Select Batch" is active, "Deselect Batch" is displayed.


- 15 -

Control

4.3 Basic Functions This item describes the use of the basic functions, e.g. start/stop feeder, enter setpoint, relative setpoint, reset totalizing counters and acknowledge event message.

4.3.1 START/STOP Feeder Prerequisites !

No alarm available.

!

External release signal available. If not, event message IL-01 "No Release" is output.

!

Keyboard mode ON or Parameter P03.02 "Feeder Start" set to "OP".

To start: 1. Press key. Feature "ON" appears in first text line in double-size letters. To stop: 1. Press key. Feeder cuts off. Measurement starts after elapse of the time set by Parameter P 05.03 "Afterfl. Totalizer". Feature "OFF" appears in first text line in double-size letters.

4.3.2 Setpoint Input Prerequisite: !

Keyboard Mode ON or Parameter P03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" set to "OP".

To enter setpoint: 1- Press key. 2- Enter desired figures on keypad using keys <1> to <9>. NOTE: Delete single figures using the key. 3- Acknowledge with key, or 4- Abort with key. NOTE: In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate; in volumetric mode, to three times the nominal feed rate.

- 16 -


Control

4.3.3 Relative Setpoint Relative setpoint Pr can be used to percentally evaluate setpoint Pe input from external source. Pr value can be preset via VLB or analog input (see P03.08). Prerequisites !

Parameter P 03.03 "Setpoint" set to "AI", "DI4" or "FB"

!

Parameter P 03.08 "Rel. Setpoint" not set to "--"

!

Keyboard mode OFF

Compute control setpoint using the following formula: P = Pe * Pr / 100% P = Effective setpoint Pe = External setpoint Pr = Relative setpoint NOTE: In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate; in volumetric mode, to three times the nominal feed rate.

4.3.4 Reset Totalizing Counters DISOCONT is equipped with three totalizing counters. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset; counter 3 automatically resumes counting from 0 in case of overflow. To reset: 1. Press (F7) key. If Hot-Key does not offer the function (Parameter P02.11), call "Reset Counter" using the function distributor. 2. Enter number of counter to be reset. 3. Acknowledge with or 4. Abort with key. Old counter readings remain stored.


- 17 -

Control

4.3.5 Acknowledge Event Messages All significant feeder functions are monitored. If an error occurs, an event message is displayed in message field. If several messages occur at the same time, the most significant event is displayed first. Priority sequence: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2. NOTE: The "Display Events" function details the event messages (cf. "Operating Functions" item). To acknowledge:

Before you acknowledge event message on DISOCONT, remove cause of fault! 1. Remove cause of fault. 2. Operate key. For list of events, see "Parameters" chapter, "Event Messages" item.

4.4 Operating Functions This item describes how to use the operating functions. These are: Print FMZ Reset Totalizer Test Display Select/Stop Prefeeder Service Values Trend Volum. Mode/Gravimetric Volum. Synchronous Start/Stop Keyb. Mode Display Events (1) Select/Deselect Batch (2) Abort Batch (3) Print Batch (4) Start Tare Corr (5) Start Span Corr (5) Finish Check Meas. (5) Accept Correction (5) >0< Zero Set Programming Calib. Functions (1) Only if events are available (2) Only if Parameter P14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES" (3) Only if a batch is active (4) Only if a batch is complete (5) Only if check system is active (Block 27) NOTE: The use of the operating functions always starts from normal display. Go to normal display by pressing the key as many times as required.

- 18 -


Control

4.4.1 Test Display This function lets you test display using a test pattern. In addition, the DISOCONT software version is displayed. To test: 1. Call up function distributor using the key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. NOTE: Test is complete after 10 s. System returns to normal display. Display !

For approx. 2 s display reads "Display Test".

!

DISOCONT application, device type and number are displayed for some seconds.

4.4.2 Select/Stop Prefeeder With the use of this function, DISOCONT controls a connected prefeeder. Prerequisite: !

Prefeeder present and connected.

To select/stop: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select function "Select/Stop Prefeeder" with cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key.

4.4.3 Service Values The service values provide detailed information on weighing system, its active units and their digital and analog inputs/outputs. To call service values: 1. Call up function distributor using the key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. 4. Select desired service value using or cursor.


- 19 -

Control

The following service values are available: Service Value

Sample

DISOCONT VDB 20150-1 2312 VSM 20102

Explanation Device family, software number, ID number and VSM module

Current Time

28.07.2001 15:05:27

VSE1 : DO =

0000

Digital outputs on DISOCONT control unit 1

VSE 2 : DO =

0100


VSE 3 : DO =

1001


VEA1 : DO =

01110

Digital outputs on DISOCONT input/output unit 1

VEA2 : DO =

01001


VEA3 : DO =

10011


EIO: DO =

0001001100001101

Digital outputs on DISOCONT external input/output unit

EIO: DI =

0110010011000010 Digital inputs on DISOCONT external input/output unit

VSE1: DI =

01++

Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 1 "+" = short circuit; "-" = cable breakage

VSE2 : DI =

0010

Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 2

VSE3 : DI =

1000

Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 3

VEA1 : DI =

0000

Digital inputs on DISOCONT input/output unit 1

VEA2 : DI =

0110


VEA3 : DI =

1000


Time Voltage ON

33 h

Time Scale ON: 13 h Tacho

100.000 Hz

Nominal Belt Load

27.778 kg/m

Speed transducer input frequency

Belt Load Unlin. 18.081 kg/m

Load on belt before linearization (only if P 30.01 "Linearization ON" is set to YES).

Utilize L/C

100.000 %

Load cell load

Loadcell Raw VAP

0.904076 mV/V

Raw measured value with VAP active (delay for point of discharge only if P 16.01 is set to YES.

Loadcell Raw BIC

0.904076 mV/V

Raw measured value with BIC active (belt influence compensation); (only if P 17.03 is set to YES).

Loadcell Raw

0.462963 mV/V

BIN: Utilize LC

70.095%

- 20 -

Load on hopper load cells (only if P 24.01 "Bin Weigher Active" is set to YES).


Control

Service Value

Sample

Explanation

BIN: Loadcell Raw

0.713456 mV/V

Hopper raw measured value (only if P 24.01 "Bin Weigher Active" is set to YES).

Check Meas. Window

0,00 %

Measure for adverse effects on hopper (wind, etc.); (only if P 24.01 "Bin Weigher Active" is set to YES). See also P 27.44 "Max. Bin Error".

2.Br. Loadcell Raw

0.653456 mV/V

Second weighbridge raw measured value (only if P 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to YES).

2.Bridge Utilize LC

60.321 %

Second weighbridge load cell load (only if P 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to YES).

Controller Mag. Y2

30.22 %

Belt load controller control magnitude (see Appendix); (only if P 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to YES).

2-Sensor Slip

0.21 %

Acquired belt length change in % of total conveyor belt length (only if P 32.01 2-Sensor Slip act. is active: Block 32).

Belt Slip

0.21

Acquired belt length change in % of total conveyor belt length (only if P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" is set to YES).

Belt Drift

0.12 cm

Acquired belt drift in cm. Monitoring starts one belt circuit after start. In cut-off state, the old display is maintained (only if P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" is set to YES).

VSE1: Analog Output

0.00 mA

Analog output on DISOCONT control unit 1

VSE1: Analog Output 2

4.50 mA

Analog output 2 on DISOCONT control unit 1

VSE2 : Analog Output

2.45 mA


VSE3 : Analog Output

12.50 mA


EIO: Analog Output 1

2.05 mA

Analog output 1 on DISOCONT external input/output unit


3.00 mA



0.00 mA



15.40 mA


VEA1: Analog Output

4.00 mA

Analog output on DISOCONT input/output unit 1

VEA2: Analog Output

11.25 mA


VEA3: Analog Output

9.35 mA



- 21 -

Control

Service Value

Sample

Explanation

VEA1: Analog Input

0.00 mA

Analog input on DISOCONT input/output unit 1

VSE1: Analog Input

9.89 mA

Analog input on DISOCONT control unit 1

VEA2: Analog Input

4.48 mA


VEA3: Analog Input

7.85 mA


VSE1 : Analog DI4

5.96 mA

Analog input DI 4 on DISOCONT control unit 1 (only if DI4 is used).

EIO: Analog input 1

0.00 mA

Analog input 1 on DISOCONT external input/output unit

EIO: Analog input 2

3.45 mA


EIO: Analog input 3

11.40 mA


EIO: Analog input 4

17.50 mA


Controller Magnitude

7.77 mA

Feed rate controller control magnitude

Controller Mag. Yb

5.21 mA

Bin controller control magnitude (only if P25.01 "Bin Controller Active" = YES).

Controller Mag. Ybi

3.21 mA

Bin controller internal auxiliary magnitude, see Appendix (only if P25.01 "Bin Controller Active" = YES).

Pulses Output

319

External totalizing counter pulses (see Parameter P 02.07 "Counter 1 Unit").

Pulses pending

7

External totalizing counter pulses still to be output. Value should not exceed 10. In case of excess, adjust weighting (see Parameter P 02.07 "Counter 1 Unit").

Flash Checksum 16798

Checksum via feeder software

Flash-Checksum 16798 calc.

New checksum cyclically computed via Flash Eprom. If value unequals Flash check sum, a serious fault is present. Inform the Schenck Service.

Controller Mag. Yz

3.48 mA

Prefeeder control magnitude for belt load controller (only if P 22.01 "Controller Belt load" is set to YES).

Controller Mag. Yzi

3.45 %

Belt load controller internal auxiliary magnitude (only if P 22.01 "Controller Belt load" is set to YES).

Hardware version

1

DISOCONT VSE current hardware version

Data are also acquired in turned-off state of scale. NOTE: Value on display remains active until function is terminated by operating the key in normal display.

- 22 -


Control

4.4.4 Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric Modes This function lets you select "Volumetric", "Volumetric Synchronous" and "Gravimetric" modes. Volumetric Mode: Prefeeder drive motor is controlled porportional to setpoint. At rated conditions, flow rate approximately corresponds to selected setpoint. Setpoint is limited to the triple nominal flow rate. Excessive values cause output of message SC1 "Setpoint Limited". Volumetric Synchronous Mode: In contrast to volumetric mode, current belt speed setpoint is not computed using nominal belt load but the belt load measured before change-over. This ensures that change-over takes place without jerks. Gravimetric Mode: Flow rate actual value is controlled for selected setpoint. Maximum possible setpoint equals nominal flow rate. Excessive values cause output of message SC1 "Setpoint Limited". To select: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select desired function with cursor keys. 3. Activate displayed mode with key. Note: You can also call the "Volumetric", "Volumetric Synchronous" and "Gravimetric" modes using hot-key F7 (see Parameter P02.11 "Hot-Key F7"). Display "VOL" in the first text line indicates Volumetric mode; VOL-S in the first text line indicates Volumetric Synchronous mode; in Gravimetric mode, no symbol is displayed.

4.4.5 START / STOP Keyboard Mode Use function to assign preselected Start/Stop and Setpoint sources to keys on DISOCONT keyboard. If keyboard mode is deselected, previous operating sources are active again. NOTE: Upon changeover from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, scale START / STOP status and setpoint remain stored, and vice versa. To start/stop: 1. Call up function distributor using the key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Display "OP" is displayed in second line if keyboard mode is selected.


- 23 -

Control

4.4.6 >0< Zero Set Use function to call up zero setting program designed to acquire the weighfeeder's zero point error over one or multiple belt circuits. Unlike the taring program, function is used in daily operation and therefore not protected by password. At that, the zero setting program only accepts values outside of basic tare within certain tolerances. If tolerance is exceeded, scale has to be re-tared (see "Calibrating Functions" item). Prerequisites !

Volumetric mode preselected

!

No material on conveyor belt

!

Prefeeder, if any, disconnected using the STOP Prefeeder function

!

Feeder connected

!

Batch mode not active.

Follow these steps: 1. Call up function distributor using key. 2. Select ">0< Zero Set" function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function using key. 4. Enter displayed value into Parameter P 09.05 "Tare Correction" with key or abort with key. NOTE: If deviation exceeds 20%, check for mechanical scale error. Display !

"CA" is displayed in second text line.

!

While program is running, ">0 Measurement ON" is displayed in first text field; residual run time in %, in first display field.

!

If program is terminated, "Deviation" is displayed in first text field; percent value, in first display field.

!

"Tare Correction" is displayed in second text field; tare correction value related to nominal belt load in %, in second display field.

Special Messages Message

Cause

START!

Scale cut off.

Select VOLUM! Gravimetric mode selected Aborted !

Process aborted; no changes effected

Value too big

Zero setting result exceeds set limit value. Result is not acquired.

Batch Active

Batch mode is active.

Note: You can also start Zero Set function via digital input (see P12.24 "DI Zero Set"). Positive contact edge starts function. Results within tolerance (5% of nominal belt load) are acquired automatically; results out of tolerance, rejected automatically. - 24 -


Control

Note: Successful completion of zero setting program can be checked via digital output P13.17 "DO Zero Setting OK". Start of zero setting program closes digital output. After check, contact reopens provided that the result is in tolerance.

4.4.7 Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings) Use function to print totalizing counter readings. Prerequisite: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active P01.02 = "YES". NOTE: You can also print totalizing counter readings during batching. To print: 1. Call up function distributor using the key. 2. Select "Print FMZ" function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Note: You can also call function "Print FMZ" using hot-Key (Parameter P02.11 "Hot-Key F7" = "Print Totalizer) (Assignment of : Print T). Printout may look like this:

Fig.: Sample Totalizing Counter Report

4.4.8 Display Events This function gives detailed information on all available event messages. Prerequisite !

At least one event has occurred. If not, function is not available.

To display events: 1. Call up function distributor using key. NOTE: If events are available, function automatically appears first in function distributor display. 2. Activate function with key. 3. If several events are available, these can be viewed by operating the or cursor. 4. Sorted by priority, the events additionally reference the relevant parameter, e.g. 1st event IL06 = P23.19 "Not Ready For Start". DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 25 -

Control

5. Return to normal display with key. Note: You can also call the "Display Events" function using hot-key (Parameter P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7" = Display Events"). (Assignment of : Events).

4.4.9 Trend The trend is defined as graphical representation of measuring results over a certain period of time on the VLB control unit. The resolution is 50 * 100 pixels (value, time). Parametrization uses Parameters P02.12 - P02.15. The following measurement values can be represented: Values

Parameter Setting

Rel. feed rate

I

Rel. belt load

Q

Current setpoint

W

B: Rel. fill weight:

B

Deviation

Xd

2nd weighbridge rel. load

2nd weighbridge

Moisture

Moisture

Corrected rel. Icorr. actual value Note: The trend values are continuously transferred to VLB and stored there. Only if time axis P 02.14 or the value of P 02.15 are changed, the values stored in VLB are deleted. The values of P 02.12 "Upper Limit Trend" and P 02.13 "Lower Limit Trend" can be changed at will without loss of data.

- 26 -


Control

4.5 Calibrating Functions The following calibration programs are available: START/STOP Simulation TW: Tare CW: Weight Check LB: Pulses/Belt TB: Tare (1) CB: Weight Check (1) BIN: Contr. Optim. (1) Set Time Autom. Manual Bin Control (1) Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (2) (1) Only if bin weigher is active (Block 27) (2) Only if bin controller has been selected in manual Calibrating functions are protected from inadvertent use by password. NOTE: Preset password: 7353. The calibrating functions descriptions given at the items below start from the Calibrating menu. To go to Calibrating menu: 1. Go to normal display by pressing the key as many times as required. 2. Go to function distributor using key. 3. Select Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys. 4. Activate menu using key. 5. Enter password. 6. Acknowledge using key. NOTE: All programs can be aborted with at any time. Previous status is maintained. NOTE: Upon weighfeeder initial calibration, first call "LB: Pulses/Belt" function; all other calibrating functions always refer to one or multiple belt circuits. NOTE: During program run time until acknowledgement 1. no totalization takes place 2. analog outputs are set to the elevation value 3. no event messages are suppressed.


- 27 -

Control

4.5.1 "TW: Tare" Use function to acquire the belt weigher's zero point error over one or multiple belt circuits. Unlike the zero setting program, function is exclusively used for commissioning or after conversions. It is protected from inadvertent use by password. After taring, belt load is 0 kg/m. Prerequisites !

Volumetric mode preselected

!

No material on conveyor belt

!

Prefeeder, if any, cut off using the STOP Prefeeder function

!

Scale turned on

!

Batch mode not active.

Follow these steps: 1. Select "TW: Tare" program in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys. 2. Start program using key. 3. Wait for new tare value to be displayed. 4. Acquire measuring result with key or abort with key. Taring program result is entered into Parameter P09.04 "Basic Tare", and Parameter P09.05 "Tare Correction" is set to zero. Display !

Second text line reads "CA".

!

While function is active, first text field reads "TW: Measurement ON"; first display field indicates residual run time in %.

!

If function is terminated, first text field reads "Deviation"; first display field indicates deviation value related to previous tare value.

!

Second text field reads "Tare"; second display field indicates tare value related to nominal belt load in %.


Cause

START !

Feeder cut off

Aborted !

Process aborted; no changes

Select Volum.!

Gravimetric mode selected

Batch active!

Batch mode active

Note: If BIC is active, P17.03 = "YES", BIC tare vectors are initialised along with taring program. Note: 2nd weighbridge tare is acquired and stored upon taring (P26.15).

- 28 -


Control

4.5.2 "CW: Weight Check" Use function to check the DISOCONT measuring range. Platform is loaded with known check weight and the platform load mean value is acquired over one or multiple integer belt circuits. The result is compared with setpoint, to be then displayed. NOTE: Result does not automatically enter into Parameter P 09.01 "Range Correction" nor into any other parameter. Prerequisites !

Ensure that there is no material on conveyor belt.

!

If prefeeder is involved, cut off using the "STOP Prefeeder" function.

!

Perform taring or zero setting operation.

!

Enter Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight". Ensure that check weight is between 30% and 100% of nominal platform load Q0. Nominal platform load is computed from: Q0 = q0 * Leff q0 = Nominal belt load Leff = Eff. platform length

!

Apply check weight in appropriate location.

!

Start scale.

!

Preselect volumetric mode.

!

Ensure Batch mode is not active.

Follow these steps: 1. Select function in menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function with key. 3. Evaluate acquired values using the table below. 4. Exit function with . NOTE: Acquisition with key is not possible. Display !


!

Function active: First text field reads "CW: Measurement ON"; first display field indicates residual run time in %.

!

Function active: Second text field reads "Set/Act"; second display field indicates the quotient from Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight" and check weight measurement value.

!

Function terminated: First text field reads "CW: Complete"; first display field indicates measured weight of fictitiously fed material amount in kg.

!

Function terminated: Second text field reads "KOR"; second display field indicates SET/ACT mean value over the entire run time.


- 29 -

Control


Cause

START !

Feeder cut off

Aborted !

suppressed

Select Volum ! Gravimetric mode selected Batch active!

Batch mode active

Evaluation Table Error

KOR

<1%

0.99.....1.01

Scale OK; no further action required

0.95.....1.05

If the result of a material check has not yet been considered with Parameter "Range Correction", enter KOR value into Parameter.

< 5%

Explanation

< 0.95 Deviations of several percent may be due to input of wrong or technical data (e.g. belt inclination not yet known, lever > 1.05 arms) or mechanical faults (alignment, wrong belt tension). Note: Parameter P09.01 "Range Correction" is not considered during check. After correction, check program displays the same error quotient KOR. >5%

4.5.3 "LB: Pulses/Belt" Use function to acquire the number of speed transducer pulses for one belt circuit. Number of pulses is used as belt circuit code for the following functions: !

Zero Set >0<

!

TW: Tare

!

CW: Weight Check

Upon initial calibration, the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function is the first to be called up. Function requires to be called whenever !

scale is initially calibrated

!

a new belt has been applied

!

belt tension heavily varies

!

with scales with or without speed measurement, Parameter P 04.01 "vsCharact.Val" or Parameter P 02.04 "Nominal Speed" has been changed.

Prerequisites !

Before calling function, measure the time for one belt circuit with utmost precision and enter value in Parameter P 09.02 "Belt Circuit Time".

!

Turn on feeder.

!

Select Volumetric mode .

!

Ensure Batch mode is not active.

- 30 -


Control

Follow these steps: 1. Select function in Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function with key. 3. Acquire result with key or abort with key. NOTE: If you press key, result is acquired and stored in Parameter P 09.06 "Belt Circuit No.". Display !

Function active: First text field reads "LB: Measurement ON"; first display field shows residual run time in s.

!

Function active: Second display field indicates the number of totalized speed transducer pulses.

!

Function terminated: First text field reads "LB: v"; first display field indicates belt speed mean value over the entire run time.

!

Function terminated: Second display field indicates the total result of pulses per belt circuit. Note: If belt sensor is active, P17.01 = "YES", program sequence slightly differs. Second text field immediately shows current value of pulses per belt circuit. Value flashes upon every belt circuit. Note: Also if the belt sensor is active, enter the time for one belt circuit into P09.02 as precisely as possible. If you fail to do so, the belt speed mean value is incorrectly displayed after termination of setting program.

Special Message Message

Cause

START!

Feeder cut off

Aborted!

Process aborted; no changes

Select Volum! Gravimetric mode selected Batch active! Batch mode active


- 31 -

Control

4.5.4 "Set Time" Use function to set date and time. Prerequisite: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active; P01.02 = "YES". To enter: 1. Select Set Time function in Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys. 2. Start Calibrating Function using key. 3. Enter year via keypad. 4. Acknowledge with . 5. Enter month via keypad. 6. Acknowledge with . 7. Enter day via keypad. . 8. Acknowledge with . 9. Enter hour via keypad. 10. Acknowledge with . 11. Enter minute via keypad. 12. Acknowledge with . 13. Enter second via keypad. NOTE: No entry means 00 seconds. 14. Acknowledge with .

4.5.5 "START / STOP Simulation" Designed for training purposes, the simulation function enables all scale functions to be tested without material. Setting programs can also be called in simulation mode. NOTE: In simulation mode, no normal weighing operation can be performed. Features !

All operating functions can be performed.

!

Normal weighing and feeding operations cannot take place.

!

Control circuit is closed internally, with actual feed rate being controlled for setpoint by the connected controller.

!

Control magnitude Y is transferred to the outside.

!

Belt load and speed measurement are active.

!

All control input and outputs operate normally.

- 32 -


Control

To start/stop: 1. Select function in Calibrating Menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. Display "SIM" is displayed in second text line as soon as START Simulation function is active.


- 33 -

Control

4.6 Programming Functions This item details the functions of the Programming menu. These are: Read Parameters Enter Parameters Load Default Parameters Print Parameters Print Shortlist Print Status Report Print Check Result (1) (1) Only if check measurement is active (Block 24) Parameters are variable features or data used to program DISOCONT for the application. Parameters are organized by function blocks and consecutively numbered within a block. Parameter input is protected by password. NOTE: Preset password: 7353 The programming functions described at the items below start from the Programming menu. To call Programming menu: 1. Go to normal display by pressing as many times as required. 2. Call up function distributor using key. 3. Select Programming menu using cursor keys. 4. Activate menu using key.

4.6.1 Read Parameters Use function to view parameters. Editing is not possible. NOTE: Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *. To read: 1. Select function in Programming menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. NOTE: Display shows title of first parameter block. 3. Select parameter block with cursor keys, or direct using <.> key and enter via keypad. 4. Activate parameter block using key. 5. View parameters within a block using cursor , keys, or directly select number using <.> key and enter via keypad. 6. Return to parameter block using key. 7. If need be, resume from step 3. 8. Return to normal display using key. Display "PA" is displayed in second text line. - 34 -


Control

4.6.2 Enter Parameters Use function to read and edit parameters. Enter password. NOTE: Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *. To enter: 1. Select function in Programming menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. 3. Enter password. 4. Acknowledge with key. NOTE: Display shows title of first parameter block. 5. Select parameter block with cursor keys, or select direct using <.> key and enter via keypad. 6. Activate parameter block using key. 7. View parameters within a block using cursor , keys, or directly select number using <.> key and enter via keypad. NOTE: Use cursor keys to choose parameters of selected block. Press to choose parameters in rising sequence independent of block. 8. Activate parameter using key. 9. Enter new value using keypad or cursor keys. 10. Acquire new value with key, or reject with key. 11. Return to parameter block using key. 12. If need be, resume from step 5. 13. Return to normal display using key. Display "PA" is displayed in second text line.


- 35 -

Control

4.6.3 Load Default Parameters Use function to reset parameters to default values.

Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset. We recommend to print parameters using the Print Parameters function before loading default values. To load: 1. Select function in Programming menu using cursor keys. 2. Start function using key. 3. Enter password. 4. Acknowledge with key. NOTE: System prompts for acknowledgement. 5. Enter "1" for "YES" or "0" for "NO". 6. Acquire "1" or "0" using key.

4.6.4 Print Parameters Prerequisite: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active; P 01.02 = "YES". Use function to print parameter list complete with current settings, software version and current date. In addition, current hardware assignment and event message are printed. Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *. To print: 1. Select function using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. 3. Abort using key.

- 36 -


Control

Sample Printout:

4.6.5 Print Parameter Shortlist Prerquisiste: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active (P 01.02 = "YES"). The shortlist contains the parameters deviating from default values (identified with* in Parameter List) as well as scale version and date/time. To print: 1. Select function using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. 3. Abort using key. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 37 -

Control

4.6.6 Status Report Prerequisite: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active; P 01.02 = "YES". The status report includes the most important status values as well as all event messages occurred since last printout. If no status report has been printed yet, events are counted from last DISOCONT power-up.

To print: 1. Select function using cursor keys. 2. Activate function using key. 3. Abort using key.

- 38 -


Control

4.7 Batching Functions NOTE: For batching, Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" has to be set to "YES". Only then, the "Select Batch / Deselect Batch" function is available in function distributor. In addition, the following functions are available: Abort Batch Print Batch

4.7.1 Select Batch This function provides the prerequisites for batching, however, does not start batching process. Prerequisite !

Feeder disconnected

To call Batch mode: 1. Call function distributor using key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Start function with key. 4. Enter batch setpoint using <1>... <9> keys. 5. Acquire batch setpoint and return to normal display using key, or 6. Abort with key. Note: If no batching operation has been started or stopped, you can change batch setpoint in normal display using the key provided that batch active setpoint P.14.02 is set to "OP". Note: Items 4-6 can be omitted if active batch setpoint P 14.02 is not set to "OP". Features Display: "BATCH" in first text line The following process variables can be scrolled into normal display using cursor keys: !

Batch setpoint

!

Batch actual value = Amount discharged

!

Batch residual value = Amount still to be discharged.

Display format corresponds to that of totalizing counter 1. During batching, "Batch actual value" display is running from 0 towards setpoint; "Batch residual value" display is running from setpoint towards 0. NOTE: Before start of new batch, "Batch actual value" and "batch residual value" displays show the amounts reached with previous batch. After deselection of batching mode ("Deselect Batch" function), displayed values can no longer be used. However, they reappear upon new selection of function. To start/stop batch: 1. Start selected batch mode using the key. 2. Abort batching using the key. 3. Resume stopped batch using the key. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 39 -

Control

4.7.2 Abort Batch Abort batching process. Batch Mode remains stored. NOTE: Next start command starts new batch. Old batch is not resumed. Prerequisite !

Batching started

To abort: 1. Call up function distributor using key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function using key. Note: You can also print batch using hot-Key , if Parameter P 02.11 is set to "Abort/Print Batch" and offers "EndBat".

4.7.3 Print Batch Prerequisites: DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active; P01.02 = "YES". If batch is complete or has been aborted, you can start printing in manual using the "Print Batch" function. Note: If Parameter "Automatic Printout" is set to "YES", printing starts automatically after every complete batch. Prerequisite: !

Batching is complete or has been aborted using the "Abort Batch" function.

If batching is complete or has been aborted, you can start printout in manual using the "Print Batch" function. NOTE: If Parameter "Automatic Printout" is set to "YES", batch report is printed automatically after every complete batch. Prerequisite !

Batching complete or aborted via "Abort Batch" function.

To start printout in manual: 1. Call up function distributor using key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function using key. Note: You can also print batch using hot-Key , if Parameter P 02.11 ist set to "Abort/Print Batch" and offers "Print B".

- 40 -


Control

4.7.4 Deselect Batch Use function to deselect batching mode and remove function of active range. BATCH display disappears from first text line. Batching values, i.e. "Batch Setpoint", "Batch Actual Value" and "Batch Residual Amount", can no longer be called up. However, they are not cleared. Prerequisites !

Batching complete or aborted using the "Abort Batch" function

!

Feeder disconnected

To deselect batch: 1. Call up function distributor using key. 2. Select function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function using key. Note: Reactivate batch mode using the "Select Batch" function. The old batch values "Batch Setpoint", "Batch Actual Value" and "Batch Residual Amount" can be viewed again.

4.8 Bin Weigher Operating totally independent of the continuous scale, the bin weigher is designed for display of bin weight, monitoring and reporting of limits values, control of fill level as well as for use as check scale in conjunction with an on-stream calibration system.

4.8.1 "Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function Bin level can be controlled either manually or automatically. Upon automatic control, the prefeeder is turned on/off as a function of limits values P24.12 and P24.13 "Control Level MIN" and "Control Level MAX" (Parameter P24.14 "DO Bin Filling"). Upon manual control, you can start/stop prefeeder direct using the "Bin Contr. Man. Start" or Bin Contr. Man.Stop" calibrating functions. To avoid bin overflow, prefeeder cuts off in both modes as soon as limit value P24.13 "Control Level MAX" is exceeded. Upon changeover from Manual to Automatic Bin Control, any active filling operation is synchronized. To change over: 1. Select "Manual/Autom. Bin Control" in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys. 2. Activate function with key. Display: In manual mode, first text line reads "MAN+" or "MAN-".


- 41 -

Control

4.8.2 "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function In manual mode, this function starts/stops prefeeders. Prerequisites: !

Set bin controller to manual.

!

If limit value P24.13 "Control Level MAX" is exceeded, prefeeder cannot be started.

To start/stop bin controller: 1. Select the "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" in "Calibrating Functions" menu using cursor keys. 2. Acticate function with key. Note: Ensure that prefeeder feed rate exceeds maximum discharge rate. Display: With prefeeder started, first text line reads "MAN+"; in cut-off state, "MAN-". Note: If continuous bin control in P 25.01 "Bin Controller ON" mode is set to YES, the fill or discharge unit control magnitude P25.03 "AO Contr. Mag." is set to 20mA with manually started prefeeder, and to 0mA with manually stopped prefeeder. Digital input P25.04 "DO Scale ON" is started/stopped likewise.

4.8.3 "TB: Tare" Calibrating Function The taring program automatically acquires the weight of the empty bin and enters it into Parameter P24.25 "Tare". If taring is complete, bin fill weight is 0 t. Prerequisites: !

Bin must be empty.

!

Bin must not be filled.

To tare: 1. Select "TB: Tare" setting program in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys. 2. Start setting program with key. 3. Wait for new tare value to be displayed. 4. Acquire measuring result with key or abort with key. Display: !


!

While function is active, first text field reads "TB: Measurement running", and first display field shows the residual run time in %.

!

If function is complete, first text field displays "Deviation", and first display field shows the deviation value related to previous tare value.

!

Second text field changes to "Tare", and second display field shows the tare value related to load cell rated capacity in % (P24.04 "L/C Rated Cap.").

- 42 -


Control


Cause

Aborted!

Process aborted; no change.

4.8.4 "CB: Weight Check" Calibrating Function The "CB: Weight Check" automatically aquires the value of P24.24 "Range Correction" used to corrected the bin measuring result. Prerequisites: !

Bin not filled or discharged.

To check bin weight: 1. Select "CB: Weight Check" in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys. Check weight (Parameter P24.26 "Check Weight") may already be applied. 2. Start setting program with key. 3. Wait until current bin weight is acquired, prompt "Checkweight Up/Down" displayed in first text line, and check weight value displayed in first display field. 4. Apply or remove check weight. 5. Continue setting program with key. 6. Wait for new "Set/Act" value to be displayed. 7. Acquire measuring result with key or abort with key. New value for Parameter P24.24 "Range correction" is computed using the following formula:

Abbreviation Description KOR

Parameter P24.24

new

New value

old

Old value

set

Check weight

act

Measured check weight

Display: !


!

During first measuring phase, first text field reads "CB: Measurement running", and first display field shows residual run time in %.

!

Second text field displays "Weight"; second display field, current bin weight.

!

If first measuring phase is complete, first text field reads "Checkweight Up/Down"; first display field, check weight value.

!

Second text and display fields continue indicating current weight.


- 43 -

Control

!

In second measuring phase, with check weight applied or removed, first field shows the residual run time; second field, the measured check weight value. If check weight has been removed, value is negative.

!

If setting program is complete, first text fields displays "Weight"; first display field, measured check weight value. If check weight has been removed, value is negative.

!

Second text field displays "Set/Act"; second display field, the ratio between check weight and measured value.


Cause

Aborted!

Process aborted; no change.

4.8.5 "B: Controller Optim." Calibrating Function The bin controller optimization program automatically computes control parameters KP and TN (P25.08 and P25.09) from feed or discharge unit constants (P25.06) and dead time (P25.07). Prerequisites: !

Bin control active (P25.01 set to "YES").

!

Fill or discharge unit technical data (P25.06 "Scale Constant" and P25.07 "Dead Time TT") correctly set.

To optimize controller: 1. Select "B: Control Optim." setting program in "Calibrating Functions" menu using cursor keys. 2. Start setting program with key. Note: With this setting program, the results are entered automatically, i.e. the program must not be terminated with or . The values computed for Parameters P25.08 "P-Component KP" and P25.09 "I-Component TN" can be adjusted in manual. The residual hopper control parameters (D-Component, Bypass, Elevation, etc.) are not affected by the optimization program. Display: !


!

While function is active, first text field reads "CO: P-Component KP", and first display field shows the newly computed value of Parameter P25.08 "P-Component KP".

!

Second text field displays "I-Component TN"; second display field, the newly computed value for Parameter P25.09 "I-Component TN".

!

After approx. 10 seconds, normal display returns.

Note: If there is no valid scale constant value (P25.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA), function is aborted, and Parameters KP and TN remain unchanged. In this case, first text field displays "Scale Constant"; first display field, value 0.0. After approx. 5 seconds, message "Aborted"! is output.

- 44 -


Control

4.9 On-stream Calibration System The KME system basically consists of a bin weigher used to check and correct the weighfeeder actual feed rate. During check and correction, the material flow is not interrupted. The check results comprises the measuring results of the two scales for the material amount actually fed out. Being by far more accurate than dynamic weighing, the static weighing result is acquired as correct. The correction value is computed from the difference, or the ratio, of the two amounts. Correction of the zero point error compensates additive errors, e.g. caused by material deposits on weighing platform. Ranges correction compensates multiplicative errors. Range correction is principally required after commissioning; zero point correction, also in running operation. For setting details, see Block 27 and Appendix.

4.9.1 "Start Tare Corr." function Use function to start on-stream calibration system in order to acquire the feeder's tare error. Prerequisites: !

Parameter P27.01 "Type of Check" set to "YES".

!

The source of Parameter P27.09 "Start Tare Corr." set to "OP".

To start: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select "Start Tare Corr." function with cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Features "CHECK" display in second text line. The following additional process variables can be displayed in normal mode using cursor keys: Displayed Variable

Unit

Description

Continuous results Z

kg

Amount acquired by continuous scale

Check length

m

Belt length passed over weighbridge during check

Check result F/Z

Static /Dynamic Amount ratio

Tare rel. correction

Check result (see P27.34)

Note: If check-and-correct measurement is complete, system automatically acquires result (P27.02 = "YES") provided that it is between defined limits (P27.31 and P27.32). If not, acquire result using the "Correct" function, or reject with "Abort Check" function.


- 45 -

Control

4.9.2 "Start Range Corr." Use function to start on-stream calibration in order to acquire the scale range error. Prerequisites: !

Parameter P27.01 "Type of Check" set to "YES".

!

Source of Parameter P27.08 "Start Range Corr." set to "OP".

To start range correction: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select "Start Range Corr." function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Features "CHECK" display in second text line. The following additional process variables can be displayed in normal mode using cursor keys: Displayed Variable

Unit

Description

Continuous results Z

kg

Amount acquired by continuous scale

Check length

m

Belt length passed over weighing platform during check

Check result F/Z

Static / Dynamic Amount ratio

Range rel. correction

Check result (see P27.36)

Note: If on-stream calibration is complete, system automatically acquires result (P27.02 = "YES") provided that it is within defined limits (P27.31 and P27.32). If not, acquire result using the "Correct" function, or reject with "Abort Check" function.

4.9.3 "Correct" function Use function to acquire check result after completion of measuring phase. Prerequisites: !

KME measuring phase complete

!

Source of Parameter P27.10 "Correct" set to "OP".

To correct check result: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select "Start Range Corr." function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Features "CHECK" display removed from second text line Note: Upon range correction, the result enters into Parameter P09.01 "Range Correction" ; upon tare correction, into Parameter P09.05 "Tare Correction"

- 46 -


Control

4.9.4 "Abort Check" function Use function to reject result after completion of a KME measuring phase. Prerequisites: !

KME measuring phase complete

!

Source of Parameter P27.11 "Abort Check" set to "OP"

To reject check result: 1. Call function distributor with key. 2. Select "Start Range Corr." function using cursor keys. 3. Activate function with key. Features "CHECK" display removed from second text line Note: The process values of the last check operation are present displayed in normal display until start of a new check measurement. If P27.01 "Type of Check" is set to "NO", no KME process values can be called any longer.


- 47 -

Commissioning

5 Commissioning 5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites Mount mechanical equipment as described in the Installation Instructions. The weigher influential zone comprises all weighed idlers and three carrying idler approach and retreat of weighing station. The weigher influential zone is shown in the figure below.

Fig.: Weigher Influential Zone Upon installation, check for proper alignment and out-of-round error of weighed and carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone. Improper alignment causes a zero point error that depends on belt load and cannot be tared off. Exact alignment is the essential prerequisite for an accurate scale.

5.2 Alignment The figure below shows the points of alignment which must be observed for perfect alignment.

Fig.: Alignment Points Lift idlers in the weigher influential zone to 3...5 mm above residual idlers. Ensure that their difference in height does not exceed 0.4 mm. Depending on idler station equipment, alignment must be performed in several points.

5.2.1 Out-of-Round Error Ensure that the idlers out-of-round error in the weigher influential zone does not exceed 0.4 mm. In addition, protect idler stations from displacement after alignment.

- 48 -


Commissioning

5.2.2 Maintenance Always remount serviced idlers in previous pattern. NOTE: Therefore: Mark idlers and idler stations before performing maintenance work. Once service work is done, check for proper alignment and retare scale.

5.3 Electrical Wiring Depending on equipment supplied, DISOCONT can be wired as shown in sample or system specific circuit diagrams. For electrical data and assembly interfaces, see DISOCONT Hardware Manual BVH2085.

5.4 Input Important Parameters System comes with Spec Sheet including all important nominal and calibrating data. In addition, some values have to be determined in the field, e.g. belt inclination. No further parameters changes are required. Parameter default values are suitable for most practical applications. Principal data and parameters: !

Total of load cell rated capacities. Parameter P 04.03 "Lever Ratio".

!

Load cell characteristic. Parameter P 04.02 "L/C Charact. Value".

!

Lever ratio, if any. Parameter P 04.05 "Angle".

!

Nominal feed rate. Parameter P 02.03 "Display Formats".

!

Speed transducer characteristic value. Parameter P 04.01 "vs Charact. Value".

!

Effective platform length. Parameter P 04.04 "Eff. Platf. Length".

!

Belt rise. Parameter P 04.06 "Angle" (cf. "Details: Belt Rise" item in the Appendix).

!

Belt circuit time. Parameter P 09.02 "Belt Circuit Time".

NOTE: For parameter input, see "Programming Functions" item. For parameter meanings and settings, see "Parameters" item.


- 49 -

Commissioning

5.5 Control Before commissioning the control system, set external feed rate controller and internal controller. NOTE: The setting description below holds true for weighfeeders with DC drive. With some few changes, description equally applies to other systems.

5.5.1.1 Setting external feed rate controller 1. Set setpoint ramp, if any, to smallest value. 2. Set I-R compensation, if any, to zero. 3. Set current limitation to approx. two times the rated motor current. 4. Set controller Parameters P 10.02 "P-Component" and P 10.03 "I-Component" to zero (note default value). 5. Set Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset" to 10...15 mA. NOTE: If need be, you can set control magnitude via local control unit. 6. Calibrate external controller amplification so that weighfeeder nominal speed is reached.

At 10 mA control magnitude, speed must not exceed motor rated speed. 7. Enter setpoint steps into Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset", check external controller control behaviour and optimize. 8. Set Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset" such that motor just stops revolving (normally 0 mA).

5.5.1.2 Setting internal controller 1. Enter default values of controller parameters P 10.02 "P-Component" and P 10.03 "I-Component". 2. Select Volumetric mode. 3. Enter setpoint steps and, if need be, optimize controller parameters P 10.02 "P-Component" and P 10.03 "I-Component". NOTE: Default values may slow down speed settling. 4. Check setting in Gravimetric mode using check weights.

- 50 -


Commissioning

5.6 Controller Calibration Calibration as such is not required. After entry of nominal and calibrating data, scale is calibrated. Call the following programs:

Rigidly observe order of sequence. 1. "LB: Pulses/Belt" setting program. 2. "TW: Tare" setting program. After calibration, two checks are useful (cf. Check item). 1. Check using check weight 2. Check of belt speed

5.7 Belt Run Monitoring DISOCONT is equipped with integrated belt run monitoring function. Activate monitoring using Parameter P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active".

Provided that belt is equipped with a belt circuit sensor N (NAMUR) and a triangled metallic sensor area, programs can be used for belt monitoring (see Belt Monitoring figure). If not, set Parameters P 17.01"Belt Sensor Active" and P 17.03 "BIC Active" to NO.

Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring Activating belt run monitoring: 1. Set Parameter P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" to YES. 2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter P 17.04 "Sensor Length" (see Belt Run Monitoring figure). 3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter P 17.05 "Sensor Width" (see Belt Run Monitoring figure). 4. Set Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset" to 0. 5. Call up the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 51 -

Commissioning

6. Acquire result after minimum two belt circuits. 7. Adjust sensor. NOTE: To adjust sensor, the "Belt Slip" service value is monitored. This value indicates the belt off-centre deviation in cm. Example: Belt slip = 0.20 cm: Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset" = - 0.20 cm, belt slip = 0.00 cm is indicated. 8. If necessary, determine event classes of belt drift and belt skew messages (Parameters P 17.07 to P 17.12). NOTE: In most cases, the default values can be used. 9. Check messages. NOTE: Perform check, e.g. by changing Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset". Ensure that parameter value is reset after check.

5.8 Belt Influence Compensation BIC The automatic belt influence compensation BIC is designed to monitor and correct the belt influence. Like belt monitoring, sensor and sensor area are required. Before starting BIC, turn on belt run monitoring. NOTE: Perform first start without BIC active. Features After start of the belt influence compensation, belt influence on measurement is compensated after approx. ten belt circuits. Prerequisites !

Belt monitoring commissioned

!

Belt monitoring turned on.

To start BIC: Set Parameter P 17.03 "BIC Active" to "YES".

5.9 Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP With measurement at the point of discharge VAP, a delay element shifts the weighing platform measuring points to the point of material discharge. The amount discharged is acquired directly. NOTE: If VAP is active, we recommend to turn on the BIC belt influence compensation. Prerequisite !

The length ratio of platform centre up to discharge point over the entire conveyor belt length is known.

!

Enter length ratio in percent into Parameter P 16.02 "Platf.Dis.Length".

To start VAP: Set Parameter P 16.01 "VAP Active" to YES.

- 52 -


Checks

6 Checks 6.1 Functional Check Follow these steps: 1. Connect scale. 2. Interpret event messages, if any, and remedy fault. 3. Go to "Service Values" function and check the following values: o

Tachometer: Ensure that speed transducer output frequency is below 2900 Hz. The value should more or less correspond to Spec Sheet. If the frequency heavily varies at constant belt speed, the speed transducer Namur sensor is likely to be too far away from gearing (see also "Check Belt Speed" item).

o

Raw measured value: Ensure that the unnormalized load cell amplifier output value does not exceed 3.5mV/V, not even at nominal belt load. Value must change if weighing platform is loaded, e.g. by check weight. If value is excessive, load cell is overloaded. If value is negative, load cell is improperly connected.

o

L/C utilization: Load cell load in percent related to total load cell rated capacities. Value must change if weighing platform is loaded, e.g. by check weight. If value is excessive, load cell is overloaded. If value is negative, load cell is improperly connected. At nominal platform load, load cell utilization should not exceed 100%.

NOTE: If no stable operating state can be achieved, read the Check Using Test Plug item.

6.2 Check Using Check Weight Check using check weight makes good sense since !

mechanical or electrical errors are detected

!

calibrating data can be "uncertain", e.g. lever ratio is not exactly known or belt rise difficult to measure

!

faulty data can be recognized.

Prerequisites !

Check weight exactly known

!

Effective check weight exactly known

!

Effective check weight between 30% and 100% of nominal platform load. NOTE: If weighing modules with leaf-spring parallel guidance are used, effective platform weight equals the real value. In other cases, see Spec Sheet or compute effective check weight as described at the "Details: Check Weight" item. For effective platform load, belt rise is irrelevant.


- 53 -

Checks

Follow these steps: 1. Enter effective check weight into Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight". 2. Call up the "CW: Weight Check" calibrating function (see Calibrating Functions item). Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by !

Platform distortion

!

Improper alignment

!

Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.

NOTE: If one of these causes is likely to be given, we recommend to perform additional tests with different check weights. Non-linear deviations are probably due to the above causes and linear deviations to faulty data.

6.3 Belt Speed Check The speed sensor frequency transducer can be driven either by !

a friction wheel on the return belt, or

!

the drive motor shaft.

In the first case, the value of Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value" depends on exact friction wheel diameter, in the second case, on gearbox and belt underslung factor. Therefore, speed measurement accuracy must be checked. Follow these steps: 1. Acquire conveyor belt speed Vg using stop watch and tape measure. NOTE: To be on the safe side, perform several measurements and compute mean value. 2. Read off speed value Va on DISOCONT, at best over the same period of time. 3. Compare values for deviation. If yes: 4. Acquire new value for Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value" using the following formula: Parameter P 04.01 (new) = Parameter P 04.01 (old) *Va / Vg Vg = Speed measured Va = Speed read off 5. Enter new value into Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value". NOTE: This method can also be used with unknown Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value". If bigger deviations occur With unknown vs-characteristic value and big deviations, the NAMUR sensor is in many cases too far away from sprocket.

- 54 -


Checks

NOTE: We suggest to switch an ammeter into sensor circuit. The following measurement values are to be expected: Tooth over sensor : i = 0.1...1.65 mA In all other cases: i = 1.65...8 mA.

6.4 Check Using Material No check or calibration using check weights can simulate the natural conditions to perfection. A highly accurate scale can only be achieved with the aid of multiple measurements with material and subsequent correction. Correction is performed using Parameter P 09.01 "Range Correction". Prerequisites !

Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally clean.

!

Material diverters do not divert any material.

!

If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point, have system feed material for approx. 30m minutes before starting check measurement. Thus, the normal build-ups are formed on feed units.

!

Dedustings are reduced to a minimum.

!

Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial scale have been cleaned and re-weighed before filling (tare weight).

Example: The "Check Using Material" figure shows the operating principle of a check using material.

Fig.: Check Using Material Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is fed. The material value MA displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P 09.01 "Range Correction" is computed using the following formula: Parameter P 09.01 (new) = Parameter P 09.01 (old) * MW / MA In our example, value is 0.98. Enter new value into Parameter P 09.01 "Range Correction".


- 55 -

Checks

6.5 Test Plug Most functional errors are reported by event message. If a measured value displayed is obviously wrong, you can check measuring amplifier function with the aid of a simple test plug (s. Test Plug figure). Using the test plug you can easily find out whether the fault is with load cell, cabling, or electronics.

Fig.: Test Plug Connecting test plug: 1. Wire plug as shown in drawing. 2. Turn off power. 3. Withdraw load cell connector X6. 4. Plug test plug into load cell connector X6 slot. 5. Turn on power. If the stated resistors are used, the following service values result: !

Raw measurement value approx. 1.500000 mV/V.

!

L/C utilization approx. 75% for 2mV/V load cell characteristic value.

!

L/C utilization approx. 53% for 2.85mV/V load cell characteristic value.

If raw measurement value is in specified range, measuring amplifier operates free from fault. Measured load display depends on scale rated data. Note: With other resistors R1 and R2, the following raw measured value results: Raw measured value ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V] If parameter default values are used, display reads approx. 90 kg/m.

- 56 -


Parameters

7 Parameters This chapter discusses the parameters available with DISOCONT and presents a list of event messages relating to the individual parameters.

7.1 General Information Parameters are variable features or data used to adapt DISOCONT to the application. There are two principal types of parameter: !

!

Selection parameters - for selection from multiple alternatives o

Select characteristic values (e.g. display unit, control behaviour)

o

Select event classes (determine reaction on events)

o

Select hardware configuration (source, unit, channel, level)

Numeric parameters - for direct input of numeric values

Parameters can be changed during operation. However, parameters influencing measuring result, e.g. display filters, must not be changed. Default Values All parameters are preset with default values which normally need not be changed. You can recall default values using the "Load Default Parameters" function. NOTE: For loading default values, see "Loading Default Parameters" item. Identification Parameters are organized by function group and identified as follows: "Group number - parameter number", e.g. P01.02. The system ID is a unique identification code used throughout the DISOCONT system. It is used, for instance, in data transfer or for special service tasks. Dependencies There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values. These dependencies are stated in the header of every single parameter description.


- 57 -

Parameters

Abbreviations Source Description FB

Fieldbus

OP

Operator Panel (control unit)

DI

Digital input

DO

Digital output

AI

Analog input

AO

Analog output

DI 4

Analog input with low resolution

W1

Warning 1 (acknowledgement required)

W2

Warning 2 (no acknowledgement required)

A

Alarm

IG

No event message but contact outputs

LC

Load cell

LS

Logical signal

VSE

System unit

VEA

Input/output unit

I

Flow rate

Q

Belt load

V

Belt speed

EIO

External I/O unit

Notes Inputs/outputs Number Description 1.

Select source DI, DO ...,... "--" means "not assigned", i.e. function is not available.

2.

Select unit VSE 1 ... Display only shows units selected in Parameter Block 1.

3.

Select channel number DI 1 ...

4.

Select signal level LOW or HIGH (N/C or N/O contact)

Analog Input DI 4: Low-resolution input designed to be used only for minor auxiliary signals. Description

Unit

Resolution:

Max. 1000d

Galvanic isolation:

None

Input: 0...10V Across positive input, an internal voltage of +9V over 1 kilohm is available.

- 58 -


Parameters

Hardware Configuration Upon parametrization of the hardware used, the source determines whether unit, channel and level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies: Possible hardware configurations: Source

Unit

Channel

Level

FB OP v -DI4 AI

VEA1-VEA3 EIO AI1-AI4

AO

VEA1-VEA3 VSE1-VSE3 EIO

AO1-AO4

LC

VSE1-VSE3

DI

VEA1-VEA3 DI1-DI4 VSE1-VSE3

DO

VEA1-VEA3 DO1-DO5 VSE1-VSE3 DO1-DO4

EIO

EIO LS

High, Low

DI1-DI16 High, Low

DO1-DO16

VEA1-VEA3 DI1-DI4 DO1-DO5

High, Low

VSE1-VSE3 DI1-DI4 DO1-DO4 EIO

DI1-DI8 DO1-DO8

As you can see, with fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), are not assigned (--) and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does not require additional specification for unit, channel or level. Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified. Digital inputs (DI), outputs (DO) and logical signals (LS) require unit, channel and level to be specified. The external input/output unit readies 4 analog input and outputs, and 16 digital inputs and outputs. Extension card VEA 20101 offers the following additional inputs and outputs on VSE 1: Analog output A02 Analog input AI1 Digital inputs DI5, DI6 and DI7 Digital outputs DO5, DO6 and DO7.


- 59 -

Parameters

Example: Parameter P 03.02 determines the scale start source. Description

Source

P 03.02

FB

Start

Alternatives

OP, DI

On standard, the scale is connected via fieldbus (FB). Alternatively, you can select control unit (OP) or a digital input (DI). If DI is desired, additionally specify active unit with channel and level (see Possible Hardware Configurations table). Event messages The reaction on events can be parametrized using the event classes. As a rule, all classes (Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2) and No Message (IG) can be set. Therefore, the parameter default value suffices. Example: P 06.09

Power Down A

Event WE 01

After power failure, event WE 01 is set as Alarm.

- 60 -


Parameters

7.2 Parameter List This item includes a list of all DISOCONT parameters divided into functional parameter blocks. Listed are number, name and the so-called Sys ID. The latter is the DISOCONT internal ID number for the single parameters. The following list applies to VDB 20150-13 1155 01 - Hardware Modules Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 01.01

Com. Error OP

IG

4218

P 01.02

VEA20100-Unit 1

YES

4208

P 01.03

VEA20100-Unit 2

NO

4209

P 01.04

VEA20100-Unit 3

NO

4210

P 01.05

VSE20100-Unit 2

NO

4211

P 01.06

VSE20100-Unit 3

NO

4212

P 01.07

Com. VEA20100-Unit 1

A

4213

P 01.08


A

4214

P 01.09


A

4215

P 01.10

Com. VSE20100-Unit 2

A

4216

P 01.11

Com. VSE20100-Unit 3

A

4217

P 01.12

External I/O

NO

4219

P 01.13

Com. Ext. I/O

A

4220

P 01.14

VEA 20101

NO

4221

P 01.15

Com. VEA 20101

A

4222

02 - Scale Definitions Number:

Name

Default

P 02.01

Language

DEUTSCH

4224

P 02.02

Units

SI

4225

P 02.03

Nominal Flow Rate Io

10000.0 kg/h

4226

P 02.04

Nominal Speed

0.1000 m/s

4227

P 02.05

Display Formats

STANDARD

4228

P 02.06

Flow Rate Units

------ kg/h

4229

P 02.07

Counter 1 Unit

------- kg

4230

P 02.08

Pulse Length Total

0.050 s

4231

P 02.09

Counter 2 Unit

----.-- t

4232

P 02.10

Counter 3 Unit

-----.- t

4233


Sys ID

- 61 -

Parameters

P 02.11

Hot-Key F7

Reset Totalizer

4238

P 02.12

Upper Limit Trend

100.00 %

4235

P 02.13

Lower Limit Trend

0.00 %

4234

P 02.14

Trend Period

1.00 h

4236

P 02.15

Trend Value

I

4237

P 02.16

DO Pulse Counter

--

4239

P 02.17

Pulse Weighting

0.00 kg

4254

Sys ID

03 - Control Sources Number:

Name

Default

P 03.01

Control Sources

STANDARD

4240

P 03.02

Scale Start

FB

4241

P 03.03

Absolute Setpoint

FB

4242

P 03.04

Setpoint Range

20.00 mA

4243

P 03.05

Setpoint Offset

4.00 mA

4244

P 03.06

Release

--

4245

P 03.07

Event No Release

W2

4246

P 03.08

Relative Setpoint

--

6233

P 03.09

Difference Flow Rate

--

4248

P 03.10

Diff.Flow Rate Range

20.00 mA

4249

P 03.11

Diff. Flow Rate Off.

4.00 mA

4250

P 03.12

Difference Function

NO

4251

P 03.13

Rel.Setp. Range

20.00 mA

6240

P 03.14

Rel. Setp. Offset

4.00 mA

6241

04 - Scale Rated Data Number:

Name

Default

P 04.01

vs Charact. Val.

10000.0 I/m

4256

P 04.02

LC Charac. Value

2.0000 mV/V

4257

P 04.03

LC Rated Cap.

60.000 kg

4258

P 04.04

Eff. Platf.Length

0.500 m

4259

P 04.05

Lever Ratio

1.0000

4260

P 04.06

Angle

0.00 degr.

4261

P 04.07

Speed Measurement

DI

4262

P 04.08

Belt Load Measurem.

LC

4263

- 62 -

Sys ID


Parameters

05 - Scale Controlling Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 05.01

Volum. Start-Up

0.00 % length

4272

P 05.02

Volum. Clearance

0.00 % length

4273

P 05.03

Afterfl.Totalizer

3.0 s

4274

P 05.04

Zero Drop-Out Active

NO

4679

P 05.05

Zero Drop-Out Limit

1.00 % Q

4680

P 05.06

Start-Up Mode

% length

4276

P 05.07

DO Scraper

--

4277

P 05.08

Pulse Length Scraper

0.25 h

4278

P 05.09

Pulse Pause Scraper

6.00 h

4279

06 - Scale Monitoring Number:

Name

Default

P 06.01

Scale Monitoring

STANDARD

4288

P 06.02

Stand-By Event

W2

4289

P 06.03

Stand-By Limit Value

2 % Io

4290

P 06.04

Tacho Event

A

4291

P 06.05

Error LC Input

A

4293

P 06.06

LC Input < MIN

A

4294

P 06.07

LC Input > MAX

A

4295

P 06.08

Setpoint Limited

W1

4296

P 06.09

Power Failure

A

4297

P 06.10

Time Deviation

20.0 s

4298

P 06.11

Threshold Deviation

5.0 %

4299

P 06.12

Factor Deviation

1.0

4320

P 06.13

Event Deviation

A

4300

P 06.14

Controller Limited

W2

4301

P 06.15

Memory Error

A

4302

P 06.16

License Violation

A

4303

P 06.17

Password

10000

4292

P 06.18

Source Emerg. Setp.

--

4930

P 06.19

Emergency Setpoint

0.0 kg/h

4931

P 06.20

Analog Input< Offset

A

5418


Sys ID

- 63 -

Parameters

07 - Display Filters Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 07.01

Display Filters

STANDARD

4327

P 07.02

LC Filter

0.25 s

4334

P 07.03

I-Display

3.0 s

4328

P 07.04

I-Analog Output

3.0 s

4329

P 07.05

I-Serial Output

3.0 s

4330

P 07.06

Belt Load

3.0 s

4331

P 07.07

Belt Speed

3.0 s

4332

P 07.08

Deviation

3.0 s

4333

08 - Limit Values Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 08.01

Limit Values

STANDARD

4336

P 08.02

Value for I-Min

5.0 % Io

4337

P 08.03

Event Class I-Min

W1

4338

P 08.04

Value for I-Max

120.0 % Io

4339

P 08.05

Event Class I-Max

W1

4340

P 08.06

Value for Q-Min

60.0 % Q

4341

P 08.07

Event Class Q-Min

W1

4342

P 08.08

Value for Q-Max

120.0 % Q

4343

P 08.09

Event Class Q-Max

W1

4344

P 08.10

Value for V-Min

5.0 % V

4345

P 08.11

Event Class V-Min

W1

4346

P 08.12

Value for V-Max

120.0 % V

4347

P 08.13

Event Class V-Max

W1

4348

09 - Calibration Data Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 09.01

Range Correction

1.0000

4352

P 09.02

Belt Circuit Time

30.0 s

4353

P 09.03

Eff. Check Weight

10.000 kg

4354

P 09.04

Basic Tare

0.00 kg/m

4355

P 09.05

Tare Correction

0.00 kg/m

4356

P 09.06

Belt Circuit No.

1000000 I/U

4357

- 64 -


Parameters

10 - Controller Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 10.01

Optim. Controller

STANDARD

4368

P 10.02

P-Component KP

0.02000 mA/%

4369

P 10.03

I-Component TN

1.0 s

4370

P 10.04

Lower Limit

0.00 mA

4371

P 10.05

Upper Limit

20.00 mA

4372

P 10.06

Contr. Magn. Offset

0.00 mA

4373

P 10.07

Position at STOP

0

4374

P 10.08

Bypass

0.00 mA

4375

P 10.09

Store

NO

4376

P 10.10

Volumetric Mode

Qconst

4377

P 10.11

Setp. Filter 1st Ord

0.0 s

4378

P 10.12

Setp. Filter 2nd Ord

0.0 s

4379

P 10.13

Set/Act Comparison

W-X

4380

P 10.14

Set/Act Sources

I

4381

P 10.15

Adaptation 1

NO

4382

P 10.16

Adaptation 2

NO

4383

11 - Analog Outputs Number:

Name

Default

P 11.01

Analog Outputs

STANDARD

4384

P 11.02

Setpoint

--

4385

P 11.03

Setpoint Offset

4.00 mA

4386

P 11.04

Setpoint Range

20.00 mA

4387

P 11.05

Actual Flow Rate

--

4388

P 11.06

Flow Rate Offset

4.00 mA

4389

P 11.07

Flow Rate Range

20.00 mA

4390

P 11.08

Belt Load

--

4391

P 11.09

Belt Load Offset

4.00 mA

4392

P 11.10

Belt Load Range

20.00 mA

4393

P 11.11

Speed

--

4394

P 11.12

Speed Offset

4.00 mA

4395

P 11.13

Speed Range

20.00 mA

4396

P 11.14

Deviation

--

4397

P 11.15

Deviation Offset

4.00 mA

4398

P 11.16

Deviation Range

20.00 mA

4399

P 11.17

Controller Magnit. Y

AO

4400


Sys ID

- 65 -

Parameters

12 - Digital Inputs Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 12.01

Digital Inputs

STANDARD

4416

P 12.02

Error Ext. Event 1

A

4417

P 12.03

DI Ext. Event 1

DI

4418

P 12.04

Error Ext. Event 2

A

4430

P 12.05

DI Ext. Event 2

--

4431

P 12.06

DI Acknowl. Events

--

4419

P 12.07

DI Local Mode

DI

4420

P 12.08

DI Volumetric ON

--

4421

P 12.09

Belt Limit Switch

--

4422

P 12.10

Event Limit Switch

IG

4423

P 12.11

NAMUR Error VSE1-DI3

A

4424

P 12.12


A

4425

P 12.13


IG

4426

P 12.14


IG

4427

P 12.15


IG

4428

P 12.16


IG

4429

P 12.17

Error Ext. Event 3

IG

4730

P 12.18

DI Ext. Event 3

--

4731

P 12.19

Error Ext. Event 4

IG

4732

P 12.20

DI Ext. Event 4

--

4733

P 12.21

DI Volum. Sync. ON

--

4941

P 12.22

DI:Reset Totalizer 1

--

5414

P 12.23

DI:Reset Totalizer 2

--

5415

P 12.24

DI Zero Set

--

4255

13 - Digital Outputs Number:

Name

Default

P 13.01

Digital Outputs

STANDARD

4432

P 13.02

DO Scale Start

DO

4433

P 13.03

DO Scale Started

--

4434

P 13.04

DO Start Prefeeder

DO

4435

P 13.05

DO ALARM

--

4436

P 13.06

DO Deviation

--

4437

P 13.07

DO I-MIN

--

4438

P 13.08

DO I-MAX

--

4439

- 66 -

Sys ID


Parameters

P 13.09

DO Q-MIN

--

4440

P 13.10

DO Q-MAX

--

4441

P 13.11

DO v-MIN

--

4442

P 13.12

DO v-MAX

--

4443

P 13.13

DO Volumetric Mode

--

4444

P 13.14

DO Local Mode

--

4445

P 13.15

DO WARNING

--

4759

P 13.16

DO Keyboard Mode

--

4462

P 13.17

DO Zero Set OK

--

4463

14 - Batch Mode Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 14.01

Batch Mode

NO

4448

P 14.02

Batch Setp. Source

OP

4449

P 14.03

Adaptation Time

3s

4450

P 14.04

Correction Amount

0.000 kg

4451

P 14.05

Adaptation Factor

0.5

4452

P 14.06

Automatic Printing

NO

4453

P 14.07

DI Batch Terminate

--

4454

P 14.08

DO Batch Running

--

4455

P 14.09

DO Dribble Feed

--

4456

P 14.10

DO Full Feed

--

4457

P 14.11

Analog Setp. Relat.

1000.0 kg

4936

P 14.12

Batch Setp. Range

20.00 mA

4937

P 14.13

Batch Setp. Offset

4.00 mA

4938

P 14.14

Batch Tolerance

100000.000 kg

4458

P 14.15

Out of Tolerance

W2

4459

P 14.16

Pre-cut-off Amount

0.000 kg

4460

P 14.17

DO Pre-cut-off

--

4461

15 - Process Control Number:

Name

Default

P 15.01

Process Control

STANDARD

4464

P 15.02

Maintenance Elec.

3000 h

4465

P 15.03

Event Maint. EL.

IG

4466

P 15.04

Maint. Scale Run.

3000 h

4467

P 15.05

Ev.Maint Scale Run.

IG

4468


Sys ID

- 67 -

Parameters

16 - VAP Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 16.01

VAP Active

NO

4480

P 16.02

Platf.Dis.Length

0.00 % length

4482

17 - Scale Monitoring Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 17.01

Belt Sensor Active

NO

4496

P 17.02

Source Belt Sensor

DI

4497

P 17.03

BIC Active

NO

4498

P 17.04

Sensor Length

8.20 cm

4500

P 17.05

Sensor Width

12.00 cm

4501

P 17.06

Sensor Offset

0.00 cm

4502

P 17.07

Belt Drift

3.00 cm

4503

P 17.08

Belt Drift Event

W1

4504

P 17.09

Belt Skew

4.00 cm

4505

P 17.10

Belt Skew Event

A

4506

P 17.11

Slip Value

2.00 % length

4507

P 17.12

Slip Event

W1

4508

P 17.13

Belt Drift DO

--

4509

P 17.14

Belt Skew DO

--

4510

P 17.15

Slip DO

--

4511

Number:

Name

Default

P 18.01

Baud Rate

9600

4512

P 18.02

Page Length

72

4513

P 18.03

Print Event

NO

4514

18 - Printer

- 68 -

Sys ID


Parameters

19 - Comm. EasyServe Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 19.01

Own Address

1

4520

P 19.02

Baud Rate

9600

4521

P 19.03

Diagnosis

0

4522

P 19.04

Flag 1

0

5444

P 19.05

Flag 2

0

5445

P 19.06

Format Data

8-O-1

4523

P 19.07

Connection

Serial

4526

P 19.08

Modbus Idle Time

4 ms

4527

20 - Comm. Fieldbus Number:

Name

Default

P 20.01

Protocol Type

NO

4528

P 20.02

Timeout Host

10 s

4529

P 20.03

Comm. Error Host

IG

4530

P 20.04

Modbus Address

1

4531

P 20.05

Modbus Diagnosis

0

4532

P 20.06

Resolution

4096

4533

P 20.07

Word Sequence

IEEE:std / LONG:std

4534

P 20.08

Modbus Baud Rate

19200

4535

P 20.09

Modbus Data Format

8-O-1

4656

P 20.10

S5 Diagnosis

0

4536

P 20.11

S5 Float Format

SIEMENS-KG

4537

P 20.12

S5 Baud Rate

9600

4538

P 20.13

S5 Data Format

8-E-1

4657

P 20.14

PB-DP Address

10

4539

P 20.15

PB-DP-FLOAT Format

IEEE

4540

P 20.16

PB-DP Parameter

NO

4658

P 20.17

PB-DP-ID Count

6

4659

P 20.18

DVN Address

63

4541

P 20.19

DVN Baud Rate

125K

4542

P 20.20

SE-Bus Address

33

4543

P 20.21

IB-FLOAT Format

SIEMENS-KG

4686

P 20.22

IB-Effective Data

NO PARAM / 2 ID

4685

P 20.23

PB-DP-Set-Val Count

2 Preset IDs

4734

P 20.24

DVN-Parameter

NO

4780

P 20.25

DVN-ID Count

6

4779


Sys ID

- 69 -

Parameters

P 20.26

DVN-Set-Val Count

2 Preset IDs

4781

P 20.27

Byte Sequence

Low - High

4924

P 20.28

Word Sequence

IEEE:std / LONG:std

5474

P 20.29

WEB Coding

XML

6228

P 20.30

DHCP

NO

6229

P 20.31

IP Address 1

192

6216

P 20.32

IP Address 2

168

6217

P 20.33

IP Address 3

240

6218

P 20.34

IP Address 4

1

6219

P 20.35

Net Mask 1

255

6220

P 20.36

Net Mask 2

255

6221

P 20.37

Net Mask 3

255

6222

P 20.38

Net Mask 4

0

6223

P 20.39

Gateway 1

0

6224

P 20.40

Gateway 2

0

6225

P 20.41

Gateway 3

0

6226

P 20.42

Gateway 4

0

6227

P 20.43

Byte Sequence

High - Low

6231

P 20.44

Word Sequence

IEEE:std / LONG:std

6232

P 20.45

Configuration

FIXED

6230

P 20.46

T-Mode with Comm-Obs

YES

6234

21 - PLS Outputs Number:

Name

Default

P 21.01

PLS Binary OUT 1

--

4662

P 21.02

PLS Binary OUT 2

--

4663

P 21.03

PLS Binary OUT 3

--

4664

P 21.04

PLS Binary OUT 4

--

4665

P 21.05

PLS Binary OUT 5

--

4666

P 21.06

PLS Binary OUT 6

--

4667

P 21.07

PLS Binary OUT 7

--

4668

P 21.08

PLS Binary OUT 8

--

4669

P 21.09

PLS Analog OUT 1

--

4670

P 21.10

PLS Analog OUT 2

--

4671

- 70 -

Sys ID


Parameters

22 - Belt Load Controller Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 22.01

Belt Load Controller

NO

4544

P 22.02

Contr. Magn. Adapt.

10.0000 mA

4545

P 22.03

Blind Distance

5.00 m

4546

P 22.04

Offset

0.00 mA

4547

P 22.05

Lower Limit

0.00 mA

4548

P 22.06

Upper Limit

20.00 mA

4549

P 22.07

Position at STOP

0

4550

P 22.08

Store

NO

4551

P 22.09

Contr.Mag. Prefeeder

--

4552

P 22.10

Pulse Length

1.0 s

4553

P 22.11

S: P-Component

0.5000 s/mA

4687

P 22.12

S: I-Component

3.0 s

4688

P 22.13

S: Threshold Resp.

0.00 %

4689

P 22.14

S: DO Open Flow Gate

--

4702

P 22.15

S: DO Close Flow G.

--

4703

23 - Interlocking Number:

Name

Default

P 23.01

DI Error Mechanics 1

--

4760

P 23.02


--

4761

P 23.03


--

4762

P 23.04


--

4763

P 23.05


--

4764

P 23.06

DI Error Electr. 1

--

4765

P 23.07

DI Error Electr. 2

--

4766

P 23.08

DI Error Electr. 3

--

4767

P 23.09

DO Error Mechanics

--

4768

P 23.10

Error Mechanics

W1

4769

P 23.11

DO Error Electricity

--

4770

P 23.12

Error Electricity

W1

4771

P 23.13

DO Error Mechatr. 1

--

4772

P 23.14

DO Error Mechatr. 2

--

4773

P 23.15

Error Mechatronics

W1

4774

P 23.16

DO Ready

--

4775

P 23.17

Not Ready

W1

4776

P 23.18

DO Ready for Start

--

4777


Sys ID

- 71 -

Parameters

P 23.19

Not Ready for Start

W1

4778

P 23.20

LS_1 AND-Gate 1

--

5376

P 23.21

LS_2 AND-Gate 1

--

5377

P 23.22

Error AND-Gate 1

W1

5378

P 23.23

LS_1 AND-Gate 2

--

5379

P 23.24

LS_2 AND-Gate 2

--

5380

P 23.25

Error AND-Gate 2

W1

5381

P 23.26

DO: AND-Gate 1

--

5416

P 23.27

DO: AND-Gate 2

--

5417

P 23.28

LS TIME-Gate 1

--

5520

P 23.29

Delay TIME Gate 1

0.0 s

5521

P 23.30

Pulse TIME Gate 1

10.0 s

5522

P 23.31

Active at OFF:TIME 1

YES

5523

P 23.32

DO: TIME Gate 1

--

5524

P 23.33

LS TIME-Gate 2

--

5525

P 23.34

Delay TIME Gate 2

0.0 s

5526

P 23.35

Pulse TIME Gate 2

10.0 s

5527

P 23.36

Active at OFF:TIME 2

YES

5528

P 23.37

DO: TIME Gate 2

--

5529

24 - Bin Weigher Number:

Name

Default

P 24.01

Bin Weigher Active

NO

4704

P 24.02

Load Measurement

--

4705

P 24.03

LC Charac. Value

2.0000 mV/V

4706

P 24.04

LC Rated Cap.

1000.000 kg

4707

P 24.05

LC Filter

0.25 s

4708

P 24.06

Bipolar Measurement

NO

4712

P 24.07

Error LC Input

W1

4709

P 24.08

LC Input > MAX

W1

4710

P 24.09

Nominal Bin Load

100.0 % LC

4711

P 24.10

Display Format

---.--- t

4672

P 24.11

Display Filter

3.0 s

4713

P 24.12

Control Level MIN

60.0 %

4714

P 24.13

Control Level MAX

70.0 %

4715

P 24.14

DO Bin Filling

--

4716

P 24.15

Bin Level MIN

5.0 %

4717

P 24.16

Event Bin Level MIN

W1

4718

- 72 -

Sys ID


Parameters

P 24.17

DO Bin Level MIN

--

4719

P 24.18

Bin Level MAX

120.0 %

4720

P 24.19

Event Bin Level MAX

W1

4721

P 24.20

DO Bin Level MAX

--

4722

P 24.21

AO Bin Load

--

4723

P 24.22

AO Offset

4.00 mA

4724

P 24.23

AO Range

20.00 mA

4725

P 24.24

Range Correction

1.0000

4726

P 24.25

Tare

0.000 kg

4727

P 24.26

Eff. Check Weight

10.00 kg

4728

P 24.27

Control. in OFF-Mode

YES

4755

P 24.28

DI: Bin Load Sensor

--

5401

P 24.29

Bin Load MAX Sensor

W1

5402

25 - Bin Level Controller Number:

Name

Default

P 25.01

Bin Controller ON

NO

4735

P 25.02

Filling Type

YES

4736

P 25.03

A0 Contr. Magn.

--

4738

P 25.04

D0 Scale ON

--

4758

P 25.05

Setpoint Bin Level

0.00 kg

4757

P 25.06

Scale Constant

0.0 (kg/h)/mA

4741

P 25.07

Dead Time TT

3.0 s

4742

P 25.08

P-Component KP

0.00000 mA/kg

4739

P 25.09

I-Component TN

0.0 s

4740

P 25.10

D Portion TV

0.0 s

4747

P 25.11

D Filter TD

0.0 s

4748

P 25.12

Bypass

10.00 mA

4743

P 25.13

Bypass D Portion

0.0 s

4749

P 25.14

Contr. Magn. Offset

0.00 mA

4744

P 25.15

Lower Limit

0.00 mA

4745

P 25.16

Upper Limit

20.00 mA

4746

P 25.17

Dead Band Deviation

0.0 kg

4750

P 25.18

Dead Band Factor

0.0

4751

P 25.19

Setpoint Filter

0.5 s

4752

P 25.20

Flow Rate Filter

0.5 s

4753

P 25.21

DI Init. Controller

--

4754

P 25.22

Bin Setpoint source

PARAMETER

5476


Sys ID

- 73 -

Parameters

26 - 2nd Weighbridge Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 26.01

2.Weighbridge active

NO

4905

P 26.02

2nd Weighbridge

--

4906

P 26.03

LC Charac. Value

2.0000 mV/V

4907

P 26.04

LC Rated Cap.

200.000 kg

4908

P 26.05

Eff. Platf.Length

0.180 m

4909

P 26.06

LC Filter

0.25 s

4910

P 26.07

Error LC Input

W1

4911

P 26.08

2nd Bridge MIN

5.0 %

4912

P 26.09

Event 2nd Bridge MIN

W2

4913

P 26.10

DO 2nd Bridge MIN

--

4914

P 26.11

2nd Bridge MAX

150.0 %

4915

P 26.12

Event 2nd Bridge MAX

W2

4916

P 26.13

DO 2nd Bridge MAX

--

4917

P 26.14

Range Correction

1.0000

4918

P 26.15

Tare

0.00 kg/m

4919

P 26.16

Controller active

NO

4920

P 26.17

P-Component KP

0.500

4921

P 26.18

I-Component TN

10.0 s

4922

P 26.19

Analog Output 2nd Br

--

5383

P 26.20

2nd Bridge Offset

4.00 mA

5384

P 26.21

2nd Bridge Range

20.00 mA

5385

27 - Check System Number:

Name

Default

P 27.01

Type of Check System

NO

4861

P 27.02

Auto Correction

NO

4903

P 27.03

Cyclic Auto Start

NO

4862

P 27.04

Cycle Time

0.50 h

4863

P 27.05

Print Check Result

NO

4886

P 27.06

Release Check System

--

4864

P 27.07

No Check Release

W2

4884

P 27.08

Start Span Corr

OP

4865

P 27.09

Start Tare Corr

OP

4866

P 27.10

Accept Correction

OP

4867

P 27.11

Finish Check Meas.

OP

4868

- 74 -

Sys ID


Parameters

P 27.12

Circuits or Quantity

Quantity

4869

P 27.13

Check Circuits

0.0

4870

P 27.14

Check Quantity

0.0 kg

4871

P 27.15

Storage Quantity

500.0 kg

4872

P 27.16

Min. Check Quantity

0.0 kg

4873

P 27.17

Min. Check Quantity

W1

4874

P 27.18

Min. Fill Weight

0.0 kg

4875

P 27.19

Min. Fill Weight

W1

4876

P 27.20

Max. Fill Weight

1000.0 kg

4877

P 27.21

Max. Fill Weight

W1

4878

P 27.22

Damping Time

3.0 s

4879

P 27.23

Blind Distance

0.0 %

4880

P 27.24

DO: Control Started

--

4881

P 27.25

Scale Stopped

--

4882

P 27.26

Scale Not Stopped

W1

4883

P 27.27

Prepare Check Meas.

W2

4885

P 27.28

DO:Check Meas Active

--

4887

P 27.29

Expect Acceptance

W2

4888

P 27.30

DO:Expect Acceptance

--

4889

P 27.31

Absolute Range

10.0 %

4890

P 27.32

Relative Range

3.0 %

4891

P 27.33

Abs.Tare Corr. Error

W1

4892

P 27.34

Rel.Tare Corr. Error

W1

4893

P 27.35

Abs.Span Corr. Error

W1

4894

P 27.36

Rel.Span Corr. Error

W1

4895

P 27.37

Corr. Evaluation

1.000

4896

P 27.38

Correction Speed

0.0 s

4897

P 27.39

AO:Check Meas Result

--

4898

P 27.40

DO: Check Gate

--

4899

P 27.41

Check Gate Feedback

--

4900

P 27.42

Check Gate Time

0s

4901

P 27.43

Check Gate Error

W1

4902

P 27.44

Max. Bin Error

0.0 %

4946

P 27.45

Event Bin Error

W1

4947

P 27.46

DO: Correction Error

--

4904


- 75 -

Parameters

28 - Moisture Number:

Name

Default

Sys ID

P 28.01

Moisture Active

NO

5386

P 28.02

Moisture Select

--

5399

P 28.03

Moisture Measurement

--

5387

P 28.04

Nominal Moisture

20.00 %

5388

P 28.05

Moisture Offset

4.00 mA

5389

P 28.06

Moisture Range

20.00 mA

5390

P 28.07

DO Moisture active

--

5400

P 28.08

Moisture MAX

10.00 %

5391

P 28.09

DO Moisture MAX

--

5392

P 28.10

Event Moisture MAX

W1

5393

P 28.11

AO Flow Rate corr.

--

5394

P 28.12

AO Flow Rate Offset

4.00 mA

5395

P 28.13

AO Flow Rate Range

20.00 mA

5396

P 28.14

Pulse Counter corr.

NO

5397

Number:

Name

Default

P 29.01

Dead Time Active

NO

5403

P 29.02

Dead Time

0.00 s

5404

P 29.03

Setpoint Select

--

5405

P 29.04

Setpoint Clock ON

--

5406

P 29.05

ON/OFF Select

--

5407

P 29.06

ON/OFF Clock ON

--

5408

P 29.07

Time Elem. Preassign

--

5409

P 29.08

Time Elements Init.

--

5410

P 29.09

DO Dead Time Active

--

5411

P 29.10

DO Setpoint Active

--

5412

P 29.11

DO ON/OFF Active

--

5413

29 - Dead Time Sys ID

30 - Linearization Number:

Name

Default

P 30.01

Linearization ON

NO

4577

P 30.02

Lin. S1

25.00 % Q

4681

P 30.03

Lin. I1

25.00 % Q

4579

P 30.04

Lin. S2

50.00 % Q

4682

P 30.05

Lin. I2

50.00 % Q

4581

- 76 -

Sys ID


Parameters

P 30.06

Lin. S3

75.00 % Q

4683

P 30.07

Lin. I3

75.00 % Q

4583

P 30.08

Lin. S4

100.00 % Q

4684

P 30.09

Lin. I4

100.00 % Q

4585

P 30.10

Lineariz. Error

W2

4586

Number:

Name

Default

P 31.01

AI Pos.Flow Gate

--

4691

P 31.02

AI Offset

4.00 mA

4692

P 31.03

AI Range

20.00 mA

4693

P 31.04

AO Pos. Flow Gate

--

4694

P 31.05

AO Offset

4.00 mA

4695

P 31.06

AO Range

20.00 mA

4696

P 31.07

Err. MIN Flow Gate

W2

4697

P 31.08

Pos. MIN Flow Gate

--

4698

P 31.09

Err. MAX Flow Gate

W2

4699

P 31.10

Pos. MAX Flow Gate

--

4700

31 - Flow Gate Sys ID

32 - 2-Sensor Slip Number:

Name

Default

P 32.01

2-Sensor Slip act.

NO

5433

P 32.02

Source Sensor 1

Speed

5434

P 32.03

DI Sensor 1

--

5435

P 32.04

Char. Value Sensor 1

100.00 I/m

5436

P 32.05

DI Sensor 2

--

5437

P 32.06

Char. Value Sensor 2

100.00 I/m

5438

P 32.07

Slip Value 2

2.00 % length

5439

P 32.08

Slip Error 2

W1

5440

P 32.09

DO Slip 2

--

5443


Sys ID

- 77 -

Parameters

7.3 Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules A DISOCONT system can comprise maximum 3 VSE system units, 3 VEA input/output units, 1 EIO external input/output unit and 1 OP control unit. For servicing, a PC with the EasyServe program can be connected. Except EasyServe, all units involved must be logged in using Parameter P01.02.... Non-logged in units are inoperable and the EasyServe and control unit parametrization and control functions are not available either. With units actively involved in closed- and open-loop control, communication error messages P01.07... must be set to Alarm. P 01.01 Com. Error OP

Default: IG

Event Group: SY

Number: 07

Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT control unit. Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cable connections. P 01.02 VEA20100-Unit 1

Default: YES

Alternative: NO YES Disocont Input/Output Unit 1 P 01.03 VEA20100-Unit 2

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Disocont Input/Output Unit 2 P 01.04 VEA20100-Unit 3

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Disocont Input/Output Unit 3 P 01.05 VSE20100-Unit 2

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Disocont Control Unit 2 P 01.06 VSE20100-Unit 3

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Disocont Control Unit 3

- 78 -


Parameters

P 01.07 Com. VEA20100-Unit 1 Event Group: SY

Default: A Number: 04

Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 1 (VEA1). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling . Must be set to Alarm if VEA1 actively intervenes in control loop. P 01.08 Com. VEA20100-Unit 2 Event Group: SY


Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 2 (VEA2). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Achtion: Check cabling . Must be set to Alarm if VEA2 actively intervenes in control loop. P 01.09 Com. VEA20100-Unit 3 Event Group: SY


Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 3 (VEA3). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VEA3 actively intervenes in control loop. P 01.10 Com. VSE20100-Unit 2 Event Group: SY


Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT system unit 2 (VSE2). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VSE2 actively intervenes in control loop. P 01.11 Com. VSE20100-Unit 3 Event Group: SY


Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT system unit 3 (VSE3). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VSE3 actively intervenes in control loop. P 01.12 External I/O

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES External I/O expansion (EIO) for additional digital and analog inputs/outputs


- 79 -

Parameters

P 01.13 Com. Ext. I/O

Default: A

Event Group: SY

Number: 10

Cause of Event: Error in communication with DISOCONT External I/O (EIO). P 01.14 VEA 20101

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES To equip VSE base card with additional I/O, extension card VEA 20101 is available. Plugged on the base card fieldbus connector, the extension card offers the following additional inputs/outputs on VSE 1: Analog output A02 Analog input AI1 Digital inputs DI5, DI6 and DI7 Digital outputs DO5, DO6 and DO7 Output DO7 can also be used for pulse output. NOTE: After start-up, plugged-on card is automatically identified and activated. P 01.15 Com. VEA 20101 Event Group: SY


Cause of Event: Error in communication with extension card VEA 20101.

- 80 -


Parameters

7.4 Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions P 02.01 Language

Default: DEUTSCH

Alternative: DEUTSCH ENGLISH OTHER Select DISOCONT dialog langue. OTHERS let you use your own texts that can be created using EasyServe. P 02.02 Units

Default: SI

Alternative: SI NON-SI Change over displays and parameter inputs from SI units to the American metric system (NON-SI). Numerical values entered are automatically converted. The table below shows the conversion from one unit system into the other: NON-SI unit SI-unit

Conversion

pound lb

Kilogramm kg 1 lb = 0.453593 kg

ton t

Tonne t

1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb

feet f

Meter m

1 f = 0.3048 m

inch " Millimeter mm 1" = 25.4 mm This table equally applies to combined units, e.g. kg/hr. P 02.03 Nominal Flow Rate Io Min: 0.0 kg/h

Default: 10000.0 kg/h Max: 220000000.0 kg/h

Nominal flow rate is the scale characteristic value used as reference for limit values and service displays. P 02.04 Nominal Speed Min: 0.0010 m/s

Default: 0.1000 m/s Max: 50.0000 m/s

Serving as reference value for limit value monitoring, nominal speed determines nominal belt load together with nominal feed rate. Value should be accurate to some percent. P 02.05 Display Formats

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether standard or user specific display formats are to be used. Preset standard display formats are matched to scale depending on nominal flow rate . Normally, display formats suit the practical application.


- 81 -

Parameters

P 02.06 Flow Rate Units

Default: ------ kg/h

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE Alternative: ------ kg/h ----.- kg/h ---.-- kg/h --.--- kg/h ------ t/h ----.- t/h ---.-- t/h --.--- t/h ----.-- kg/min Lets you display format of flow rate actual value and setpoint. P 02.07 Counter 1 Unit

Default: ------- kg

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE Alternative: ------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t Display format for counter 1 and pulse weighting for external counter. P 02.08 Pulse Length Total

Default: 0.050 s

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE Min: 0.000 s

Max: 10.000 s

External totalizing counter output pulse duration (VEA 1). Pulse weighting corresponds to the Counter 1 smallest display digit. If pulse duration is smaller than 10 ms, pulse output is blocked. All pulses not yet output are reset. At nominal flow rate, output frequency f is:

Pnom = Nominal flow rate in kg/hr or t/hr Zmin = Counter 1 smallest display digit in kg or t If an external counter is connected, output frequency has to be smaller than or equal to 10 Hz.

- 82 -


Parameters

P 02.09 Counter 2 Unit

Default: ----.-- t

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE Alternative: ------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t Counter 2 display format. P 02.10 Counter 3 Unit

Default: -----.- t

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE Alternative: ------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t Counter 3 display format. P 02.11 Hot-Key F7

Default: Reset Totalizer

Alternative: Reset Totalizer Display Events Print Totalizer Volum / Grav Volum-Syn / Grav Abort / Print Batch Key F7 on control unit VLB can be assigned with different functions: Reset Totalizer: Reset totalizing counter readings. Display Events: Display event list (scroll using cursor keys). Print Totalizer: Print out batch report. Volum./Grav.: Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric mode, and vice versa. Volum-Syn./Grav: Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric Synchronous mode, and vice versa. Abort/Print Batch: Abort batch, print batch report. Print command is effective only after completion of batch.


- 83 -

Parameters

P 02.12 Upper Limit Trend Min: -200.00 %

Default: 100.00 % Max: 200.00 %

The trend is a graphical representation of measuring results over the time displayed on control unit VLB. The resolution is 50 * 100 pixels (value, time). See Operating Functions chapter, Trend item. P 02.13 Lower Limit Trend Min: -200.00 %

Default: 0.00 % Max: 200.00 %

P 02.14 Trend Period

Default: 1.00 h

Min: 0.19 h

Max: 100.00 h

P 02.15 Trend Value

Default: I

Alternative: I Q W B Xd 2.Br. Feuchte/Moisture I corr. I: Feed rate Q: Belt load W: Setpoint B: Bin level Xd: Deviation 2. Br: Load on second weighbridge Feuchte/Moisture: Moisture measurement value Icorr: Feed rate, moisture corrected

- 84 -


Parameters

P 02.16 DO Pulse Counter

Default: --

Alternative: DO Totalizing counter 1 pulse output can alternatively be output via digital output. Default value "---" uses the pulse output on VEA 1. The "DO" alternative uses the configured output. Pulse time is determined by Parameter P02.08 now as before. Values below 10ms totally block output, and values up to 1 second are set to "High" for 1 second. P 02.17 Pulse Weighting Min: 0.00 kg

Default: 0.00 kg Max: 100000.00 kg

Lets you select output pulse weighting at will. With default value " 0.00 kg", weighting corresponds to the smallest display digit of counter 1 (see Parameter P02.07).

7.5 Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources P 03.01 Control Sources

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default or user specific parameter values are to be used for control source configuration. P 03.02 Scale Start

Default: FB

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: OP DI Determine scale start source. The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if scale shuts down after alarm, reset Start signal. P 03.03 Absolute Setpoint

Default: FB

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: OP AI DI4 Determine setpoint source.


- 85 -

Parameters

P 03.04 Setpoint Range

Default: 20.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 1000.00 mA

Maximum input current for 100% analog setpoint. The range and elevation parameters are effective only if Parameter P03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to A1 or DI4. P 03.05 Setpoint Offset

Default: 4.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -200.00 mA

Max: 200.00 mA

Elevates input current for 0% nominal feed rate setpoint. Active only if Parameter P 03.03 "Setpoint" is set to AI or DI4. P 03.06 Release

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI FB Determines system responsible for scale release. Setting "--" means that no release is required. P 03.07 Event No Release

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: IL

Number: 01

Cause of Event: No release signal from source defined by Parameter "Release". P 03.08 Relative Setpoint

Default: --

Alternative: OP AI DI4 Lets you evaluate absolute setpoints from fieldbus (FB) or analog input (AI, or DI4) relatively. Example: OP : Percental setpoint from VLB AI, DI4: Percental setpoint via analog input or DI4. For normalization, use Parameters P03.13 "Rel.Setp. Range" and P03.14 "Rel.Setp.Elevation". Attention: Only absolute setpoints from external source can be evaluated relatively. If Keyboard Mode or OP are selected for absolute setpoint, absolute setpoint from keyboard is active directly.

- 86 -


Parameters

P 03.09 Difference Flow Rate

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: FB AI DI4 For explanation, see Parameter P 03.12. P 03.10 Diff.Flow Rate Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

Maximum input current for 100% flow rate (Parameter P 03.09 set to AI or DI4). P 03.11 Diff. Flow Rate Off.

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

Input current for 0% flow rate. P 03.12 Difference Function

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 03.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: NO Control Display Control + Display Using input "P 03.09" an additional feed rate value can be entered into system. NO: Value is ineffective for control, display and totalization. Control: Value can be subtracted from measured feed rate and used for control. Measured feed rate is displayed and counted. Display: Value can be subtracted from measured feed rate and displayed. Control uses measured feed rate. Control + Display: Display and control use the difference between actual value measured and actual value difference. P 03.13 Rel.Setp. Range Min: 0.00 mA

P 03.14 Rel. Setp. Offset Min: -200.00 mA

Default: 20.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA



- 87 -

Parameters

7.6 Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data P 04.01 vs Charact. Val. Min: 1.0 I/m

Default: 10000.0 I/m Max: 1000000.0 I/m

vs-characteristic value is defined as number of speed transducer pulses per belt length meter. If no tachometer is active, do not change vs- characteristic value. This would change setting programs run time. P 04.02 LC Charac. Value Min: 0.0100 mV/V

Default: 2.0000 mV/V Max: 10.0000 mV/V

Load cell characteristic value (transmission factor). P 04.03 LC Rated Cap.

Default: 60.000 kg

Min: 0.500 kg

Max: 220000000.000 kg

Total of load cells rated capacities. P 04.04 Eff. Platf.Length Min: 0.100 m

Default: 0.500 m Max: 50.000 m

Effective platform length P 04.05 Lever Ratio

Default: 1.0000

Min: 0.0100

Max: 2.0000

Lever ratio between load cell and force transducing weighed idler. Lever ratio = load cell load / platform load P 04.06 Angle

Default: 0.00 degr.

Min: 0.00 degr.

Max: 60.00 degr.

Inclination of scale longitudinal axis if load cell is mounted vertical to belt. P 04.07 Speed Measurement

Default: DI VSE1.DI3 High

Alternative: -Determine device configuration for speed acquisition. Only DI3 can be used on VSE1. If the "--" alternative is selected, speed acquisition is inactive. Nominal speed P 02.04 is internally active. With weighfeeders, the alternative is useful only for testing.

- 88 -


Parameters

P 04.08 Belt Load Measurem.

Default: LC VSE1

Alternative: -Belt load measurement device configuration. With the "--" alternative, belt load measurement is inactive. Internally, nominal belt load P(Nenn)/v(Nenn) is active. This possibility is useful only for special cases.

7.7 Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling P 05.01 Volum. Start-Up Min: 0.00 % length

Default: 0.00 % length Max: 200.00 % length

Volumetric start-up cycle after start of scale, before start of Gravimetric (controlled) mode. Display feature "VOL -->" in first text line. Input is in % of belt length. P 05.02 Volum. Clearance Min: 0.00 % length


Volumetric clearance cycle after scale stop. Prefeeder immediately cuts off. After set number of belt circuits, belt stops. Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric mode takes place smoothly. Display feature "VOL-->" in first text line. P 05.03 Afterfl.Totalizer Min: 0.0 s

Default: 3.0 s Max: 2000.0 s

During this period of time, after scale stop, the amount fed out is still acquired. P 05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES If belt load falls below the value set by Parameter P05.05, measurement value is set to 0. Feed rate and totalized amount are no longer acquired. Zero Drop Out is useful only with feed-controlled belt weighers, not with weighfeeders. P 05.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Min: 0.00 % Q

Default: 1.00 % Q Max: 10.00 % Q


- 89 -

Parameters

P 05.06 Start-Up Mode

Default: % length

Alternative: Q MIN % length Lets you optimize start-up behaviour. %length: Start-up mode always uses the belt length set by Parameter P05.01. Qmin: Lets you abort start-up mode. As soon as belt load exceeds limit value Qmin (P08.06 Q-Min Limit), system goes to Gravimetric Mode. If limit value is not exceeded, changeover takes place as soon as belt length value set by Parameter P05.01 is reached. P 05.07 DO Scraper

Default: --

Alternative: DO Parameters P05.07 to P05.09 let you control a cleaning scraper in cycles. If weighfeeder is STARTED, digital output (P05.07) for pulse time (P05.08) is open, and closed for pause (P05.09). Special cases: P05.09 = 0.00h ---> no pause P05.09 > 1000.00h ---> only one pulse; then always pause. P 05.08 Pulse Length Scraper Min: 0.01 h

Default: 0.25 h Max: 1000.00 h

P 05.09 Pulse Pause Scraper Min: 0.00 h

Default: 6.00 h Max: 1001.00 h

7.8 Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring P 06.01 Scale Monitoring

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter values are to be used for scale monitoring. P 06.02 Stand-By Event

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: SC

Number: 02

Cause of Event: Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.03 "Standby Limit"). Material prefeeder cuts off. - 90 -


Parameters

P 06.03 Stand-By Limit Value

Default: 2 % Io

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 0 % Io

Max: 100 % Io

Cuts off belt drive and prefeeder (not scale), if setpoint is smaller than this value. Control magnitude is set to the value of Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP". Change-over to Stand-by mode is delayed by 3s, return is immediately effected. P 06.04 Tacho Event

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: CA

Number: 02

Cause of Event: Input frequency exceeds 2900 Hz. Prerequisite: Parameter P 04.07 "Speed Measurement" not set to "--". P 06.05 Error LC Input

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: CA

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Load cell cable wrong. Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state. Supply voltage is below 19V. Error must be available for minimum 3s. Action: Check cabling. If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective. Check for either possibility. If scale connot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device off and restart. P 06.06 LC Input < MIN

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: LO

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Load cell load is smaller than 3% of load cell rated capacities. P 06.07 LC Input > MAX

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: HI

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities. Full scale value: 125% with 2.85mV/V load cells 175% with 2mV/V load cells Action: Check material infeed. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 91 -

Parameters

P 06.08 Setpoint Limited

Default: W1


Number: 01

Cause of Event: Depending on selected mode: a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate. b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal value. c) Emergency setpoint is active (P 06.18). P 06.09 Power Failure

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: WE

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class. P 06.10 Time Deviation

Default: 20.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Time during which the deviation may exceed the limit determined by "Deviation Threshold" parameter. See also "Deviation Factor" parameter. P 06.11 Threshold Deviation

Default: 5.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 0.0 %

Max: 100.0 %

Maximum admissible deviation. Reference: Nominal feed rate P 06.12 Factor Deviation

Default: 1.0

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 0.0

Max: 1.0

If the deviation absolute value exceeds threshold P 06.11(12) for time P 06.10 , event message HI 5 (P 06.13) is output. At 100% setpoint, the effective threshold should be equal to Parameter P 06.11. For smaller setpoints, threshold can be reduced using Parameter P 06.12. P 06.12 = 0 : Effective threshold = P 06.11 * Setpoint/nominal value P 06.12 = 1 : Effective threshold = P 06.11

- 92 -


Parameters

P 06.13 Event Deviation

Default: A


Number: 05

Cause of Event: Maximum control deviation exeeded. Actual feed rate strongly differs from setpoint for more than preset time. There are various possible causes: 1. Material handling error Material flows irregularly or cannot be discharged with sufficient qualitiy. Controller is out of limit for a certain time. 2. Electronics error Check external feed rate controller and motor cablings. Check feed controller for proper setting (current limitation, speed range). 3. Calibration error During initial calibration, controller was set so critically that smallest changes of system properties cause unreliable operation. Action: Repeat this commissioning step. P 06.14 Controller Limited

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: CO

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output. 1. Material flow missing or irregular. 2. External feed rate controller wrongly set. Action: Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.


- 93 -

Parameters

P 06.15 Memory Error

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: SY

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Error has been detected by cyclic check of program and parameter memories. If SY 01 is output immediately after power-up, check VSM module for proper seat. If this is no help, call the "Load Default Parameters" function. If this does not help either, contact the Schenck Service; in most cases, scale is inoperable. P 06.16 License Violation

Default: A

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: SY

Number: 09

Cause of Event: Loaded software or activated parameter blocks (e.g. Bin Weigher) are not licensed through the VSM module used. You need a module with a higher type number. The only possible event class is "Alarm". P 06.17 Password

Default: 10000

Min: 1000

Max: 9999

Change the password protecting parameters, calibrating functions, etc. from access through the control unit. Changed password is displayed in encoded form. Default password 7353 results in return display 10 000. Password forgotton: Tell the SCHENCK service the value of Parameter P 06.17, or change password using EasyServe. P 06.18 Source Emerg. Setp.

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI FB Activate the emergency setpoint, and setpoints higher than P 06.19 are limited to this value. Message SC01 (P 06.08) is output. Keyed in setpoints are automatically set to the emergency setpoint. P 06.19 Emergency Setpoint

Default: 0.0 kg/h

Only available if Parameter: 06.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 0.0 kg/h

- 94 -

Max: 220000000.0 kg/h


Parameters

P 06.20 Analog Input< Offset

Default: A


Number: 08

Cause of Event: The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the set zero point elevation.

7.9 Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters P 07.01 Display Filters

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine if default values or user defined values of display filter parameters are to be used. The load cell filter (2nd order) acts on all measurement values depending on belt load. All other filters (1st order) act only on corresponding displays and outputs. P 07.02 LC Filter

Default: 0.25 s


Max: 300.00 s

Load cell filter acts on all load cell dependent measurement values. P 07.03 I-Display

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Filter for feed rate display and output on operator panel, EasyServe and all fieldbuses (except SEBUS). P 07.04 I-Analog Output

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Flow rate analog output P 07.05 I-Serial Output

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Filter for serial output via SEBUS (see "Protocol Type" parameter)


- 95 -

Parameters

P 07.06 Belt Load

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Belt load display P 07.07 Belt Speed

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Belt speed display P 07.08 Deviation

Default: 3.0 s


Max: 600.0 s

Deviation display

7.10 Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values P 08.01 Limit Values

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter values are to be used for limit value messages. Digital outputs for limit value messages report excess of MIN/MAX values independent of event class. Limit values are monitored only in turned-on state of scale. Monitoring starts 10s after start of scale. P 08.02 Value for I-Min

Default: 5.0 % Io

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % Io

Max: 200.0 % Io

Reference: Nominal flow rate P 08.03 Event Class I-Min

Default: W1


Number: 02

Cause of Event: Flow rate smaller than set minimum value.

- 96 -


Parameters

P 08.04 Value for I-Max

Default: 120.0 % Io

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % Io

Max: 200.0 % Io

Reference: Nominal flow rate P 08.05 Event Class I-Max

Default: W1


Number: 02

Cause of Event: Flow rate exceeds set maximum value. P 08.06 Value for Q-Min

Default: 60.0 % Q

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % Q

Max: 200.0 % Q

Reference: Nominal belt load P 08.07 Event Class Q-Min

Default: W1


Number: 03

Cause of Event: Belt load smaller than set minimum value. P 08.08 Value for Q-Max

Default: 120.0 % Q

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % Q

Max: 200.0 % Q

Reference: Nominal belt load P 08.09 Event Class Q-Max

Default: W1


Number: 03

Cause of Event: Belt load exceeds set maximum value. P 08.10 Value for V-Min

Default: 5.0 % V

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % V

Max: 200.0 % V

Reference: Nominal speed


- 97 -

Parameters

P 08.11 Event Class V-Min

Default: W1


Number: 04

Cause of Event: Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value. P 08.12 Value for V-Max

Default: 120.0 % V

Only available if Parameter: 08.01 = SELECTABLE Min: -10.0 % V

Max: 200.0 % V

Reference: Nominal speed P 08.13 Event Class V-Max

Default: W1


Number: 04

Cause of Event: Belt speed exceeds set MAX value.

7.11 Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data P 09.01 Range Correction Min: 0.5000

Default: 1.0000 Max: 2.0000

Proportionally influences belt load q measurement. q(corrected) = q(measured)·range correction Enter result of the "Weight Check" setting program. P 09.02 Belt Circuit Time Min: 1.0 s


Determines measuring time for the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function. Normally the time for one belt circuit is selected. P 09.03 Eff. Check Weight Min: 0.001 kg

Default: 10.000 kg Max: 22000.000 kg

Check weight value used to perform the "Weight Check" calibrating function, P 09.04 Basic Tare Min: 0.00 kg/m

Default: 0.00 kg/m Max: 10000.00 kg/m

Taring function result.

- 98 -


Parameters

P 09.05 Tare Correction Min: -1000.00 kg/m

Default: 0.00 kg/m Max: 1000.00 kg/m

Result of zero setting program and on-stream calibration (KME). Upon every taring operation, tare correction is set to 0. Using the zero setting program, a value of max. 5% of nominal belt load can be entered into parameter. Message "Value Too Big" aborts zero setting program. P 09.06 Belt Circuit No. Min: 0 I/U

Default: 1000000 I/U Max: 9000000 I/U

Result of the "LB:Pulses Belt" . Determines setting programs running cycle. Division by characteristic value vs results in belt length (in m). Upon initial calibration, always call the "LB:Pulses Belt" setting program in first place, also if P 04.07 is set to "--".

7.12 Parameter Group 10 - Controller P 10.01 Optim. Controller

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD UNIVERS STANDARD: Standard controller setting for Weighfeeder applications. UNIVERS: User-defined controller settings for special cases (see Appendix). For detailed schematic diagrams and special applications, see Appendix. Attention! Change-over from UNIVERS to STANDARD resets parameters from P 10.08 onward to default values. P 10.02 P-Component KP Min: 0.00000 mA/%

Default: 0.02000 mA/% Max: 1000.00000 mA/%

Reference: Nominal setpoint Special case: KP=0 results in I-controller


- 99 -

Parameters

P 10.03 I-Component TN Min: 0.0 s


Feed rate controller tracking time (integral component). Tracking time TN is defined as the time during which the I component changes the control magnitude in the exact same way as the P component. Special cases: 1st KP = 0 : I controller TN is the reciprocal of integration constant KI, i.e. a big value means a slow controller. KI = 1/TN TN in %/(mA/s) 2nd TN = 0 : P-controller The I component is reset. P 10.04 Lower Limit

Default: 0.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 20.00 mA

Lower controller magnitude limit. P 10.05 Upper Limit

Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 20.00 mA

Controller magnitude upper limit. With inputs smaller than 20 mA, limit depends on setpoint size.

1st upper limit P 10.05 = 20mA 2nd upper limit P 10.05 = 10mA 3rd upper limit P 10.05 = 0mA P 10.06 Contr. Magn. Offset Min: 0.00 mA


Elevation of control magnitude by a constant value. Elevation acts before control magnitude limitation.

- 100 -


Parameters

P 10.07 Position at STOP

Default: 0

Alternative: 0 Lower Limit In stop state of scale, control magnitude can be set either to 0 or to the elevation value set by Parameter P 10.04 "Lower Limit". 0: In turned-off state of feeder, control magnitude is set to 0. Lower Limit: Control magnitude is set to the lower limit (P10.04). P 10.08 Bypass

Default: 0.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 20.00 mA

Proportional to preset setpoint, the control magnitude is additively superimposed by a value. This parameter indicates the bypass value for the nominal setpoint. P 10.09 Store

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: NO YES YES-A Store last control value of after scale stop. Next start uses this value. NO : No storage YES : Store YES-A : Store only if scale has not been stopped by alarm. Alarm in stop state of scale does not influence stored value.


- 101 -

Parameters

P 10.10 Volumetric Mode

Default: Qconst

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: Qconst Yconst Determines volumetric mode. Qconst: V*Qconst acts as actual value.V= actual belt speed and Qconst= stored value (nominal belt load, or last measurement value). Scale operates in speed-controlled fashion. Yconst: Controller is cut off, setpoint by-pass (Parameter P 10.08 "Bypass") acts alone. For more information, see Appendix "Details: Control". P 10.11 Setp. Filter 1st Ord

Default: 0.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Min: 0.0 s

Max: 6000.0 s

First-order filter in setpoint branch. Does not act on bypass. P 10.12 Setp. Filter 2nd Ord

Default: 0.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Min: 0.0 s

Max: 6000.0 s

Second-order filter in setpoint branch. Does not act on bypass. P 10.13 Set/Act Comparison

Default: W-X

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: W-X X-W Set/act comparison: W-X: Controller receives control difference "setpoint - actual value" X-W: Controller receives control difference "actual value - setpoint"

- 102 -


Parameters

P 10.14 Set/Act Sources

Default: I

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: I Q I setting: Setpoint = Set feed rate Actual value = Measured feed rate Q setting : Setpoint = Nominal belt load Qo. Actual value = Measured belt load P 10.15 Adaptation 1

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: NO V 1/Q 1/W For adaption across controller input, see Appendix. P 10.16 Adaptation 2

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS Alternative: NO W For adaption across controller output (see Appendix).

7.13 Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs P 11.01 Analog Outputs

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter values are to be used for analog outputs. In cut-off state of scale, all analog outputs are set to the value of the particular elevation. P 11.02 Setpoint

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: AO Set feed rate analog output source. P 11.03 Setpoint Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


- 103 -

Parameters


Max: 200.00 mA

Output current for 0% set feed rate value. P 11.04 Setpoint Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

Output current for 100% set feed rate value. P 11.05 Actual Flow Rate

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: AO Actual flow rate analog output source P 11.06 Flow Rate Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

Output current for 0% actual flow rate value. P 11.07 Flow Rate Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

Output current for 100% actual flow rate value. P 11.08 Belt Load

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: AO Belt load analog output source P 11.09 Belt Load Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

Output current for 0% belt load

- 104 -


Parameters

P 11.10 Belt Load Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

Output current for 100% belt load P 11.11 Speed

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: AO Belt speed analog output source P 11.12 Speed Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

Output current for 0% belt speed P 11.13 Speed Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

Output current for 100% belt speed P 11.14 Deviation

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: AO Deviation analog output source P 11.15 Deviation Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

Deviation value "zero" is symmetrically between elevation and 20 mA. P 11.16 Deviation Range

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA

For output current, the folowing ratio holds:


- 105 -

Parameters

P 11.17 Controller Magnit. Y

Default: AO VSE1

Only available if Parameter: 11.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: -Analog output for feed rate controller control magnitude Y.

7.14 Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs P 12.01 Digital Inputs

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter settings are to be used for digital inputs. P 12.02 Error Ext. Event 1

Default: A


Number: 05

Cause of Event: External fault signal at input 1. P 12.03 DI Ext. Event 1

Default: DI VSE1.DI1 Low

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: -Input 1 for external fault signal. Linked with internal fault logic (Block: Interlocking). P 12.04 Error Ext. Event 2

Default: A


Number: 06

Cause of Event: External fault signal at Input 2. P 12.05 DI Ext. Event 2

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Input 2 for external fault signal. Linked with internal fault logic (Block: Interlocking).

- 106 -


Parameters

P 12.06 DI Acknowl. Events

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input for acknowledgement of event messages. Designed for static action, the level must not be continuously available (continuous acknowledgement). P 12.07 DI Local Mode


Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: -Local control unit feedback signal reports that mode has been switched to "Local". DISOCONT operates as display unit only. To suppress event messages, it is automatically set to "Volumetric" mode. Upon reset, DISOCONT cuts off. Digital outputs for control of drives (P13.02 and P13.04) are reset in Local Mode. P 12.08 DI Volumetric ON

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input for changeover of scale to volumetric mode; not to volumetric/synchronous mode. P 12.09 Belt Limit Switch

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input for connection of belt limit switch. Monitoring is independent of belt drift monitoring using belt sensor (Block: Conveyor Belt ). P 12.10 Event Limit Switch

Default: IG

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Event Group: WM

Number: 01

Cause of Event: Belt limit switch for belt run monitoring has been triggered.


- 107 -

Parameters

P 12.11 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI3

Default: A


Number: 02

Cause of Event: Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable. If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG type. External Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required (the same holds the for the Namur monitorings below). P 12.12 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI4

Default: A


Number: 03

Cause of Event: Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. P 12.13 NAMUR Error VSE2-DI3

Default: IG


Number: 04


Default: IG


Number: 05


Default: IG


Number: 06


Default: IG


Number: 07

Cause of Event: Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. - 108 -


Parameters

Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. P 12.17 Error Ext. Event 3

Default: IG


Number: 11

Cause of Event: External fault signal across fault input 3. P 12.18 DI Ext. Event 3

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Input 3 for external fault signal. Linked with internal fault logic (Block: Interlocking). P 12.19 Error Ext. Event 4

Default: IG


Number: 12

Cause of Event: External fault signal across fault input 4 P 12.20 DI Ext. Event 4

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Input 4 for external fault signal. Linked with internal fault logic (Block: Interlocking). P 12.21 DI Volum. Sync. ON

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input used for change-over of scale to Volumetric Synchronous mode. P 12.22 DI:Reset Totalizer 1

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input used to reset totalizing counter 1. The positive edge is active.


- 109 -

Parameters

P 12.23 DI:Reset Totalizer 2

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI Digital input used to reset totalizing counter 2. The positive edge is active. P 12.24 DI Zero Set

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 12.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DI You can also start Zero Set function using this digital input (Item 4.4.6). Positive contact edge starts function. Results within tolerance (5% of nominal belt load) are acquired automatically; results out of tolerance, rejected automatically.

7.15 Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs P 13.01 Digital Outputs

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter settings are to be used for digital outputs. P 13.02 DO Scale Start

Default: DO VSE1.DO1 High

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: -Digital input used to start/stop feeder drive P 13.03 DO Scale Started

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal used to display START/STOP states of scale. P 13.04 DO Start Prefeeder

Default: DO VSE1.DO2 High

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: -Digital output for prefeeder start/stop

- 110 -


Parameters

P 13.05 DO ALARM

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output used to indicate general alarm. P 13.06 DO Deviation

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output if maximum deviation ( P 06.11) is reached. Contact output is independent of event class. P 13.07 DO I-MIN

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output when minimal flow rate (P08.02) is exceeded down. Contact output is independent of event class. P 13.08 DO I-MAX

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output when maximum flow rate (P08.04) is exceeded up. Contact output is independent of event class. P 13.09 DO Q-MIN

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output if minimum belt load (P 08.06) is reached. Contact output is independent of event class P 13.10 DO Q-MAX

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output if maximum belt load (P 08.08) is reached. Contact output is independent of event class.


- 111 -

Parameters

P 13.11 DO v-MIN

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output if minimum speed (P 08.10) is reached. Contact output is independent of event class. P 13.12 DO v-MAX

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output if maximum speed (P 08.12) is reached. Contact output is independent of event class. P 13.13 DO Volumetric Mode

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal when scale changes over to volumetric mode. P 13.14 DO Local Mode

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal when scale changes over to local mode. P 13.15 DO WARNING

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal output when a warning is available P 13.16 DO Keyboard Mode

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Digital output signal transferred when Keyboard Mode is selected.

- 112 -


Parameters

P 13.17 DO Zero Set OK

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 13.01 = SELECTABLE Alternative: DO Successful completion of zero setting program can be checked via digital output. Start of zero setting program closes digital output. After check, contact reopens provided that the result is in tolerance.

7.16 Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode P 14.01 Batch Mode

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Determine whether batch mode can be run or not. Additionally select operating menu item "Select Batch". P 14.02 Batch Setp. Source

Default: OP

Alternative: FB AI DI4 Enter source determining batch setpoint. P 14.03 Adaptation Time Min: 0 s

Default: 3 s Max: 3600 s

If adaption time is reached, set feed rate decreases towards zero. P 14.04 Correction Amount Min: -100000.000 kg

Default: 0.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg

Shifts the start of the adaption time by the correction amount. Adaption time = 0 corresponds to a pre-cut-off point. Upon commissioning, the correction amount should be 0.


- 113 -

Parameters

P 14.05 Adaptation Factor Min: 0.0

Default: 0.5 Max: 1.0

Start of tracking time automatically adapts the cut-off function, so that system is nearer to real conditions upon next batch. Adaption factor = 0 : No adaption Adaption factor = 1 : Full adaption Intermediate values lead to filtered adaption which is to be preferred with systems with inaccurate repeat behaviour. The adaption result enters into the Correction Amount parameter. P 14.06 Automatic Printing

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES YES: Automatic printout after every complete batch . NO: Batch printout is possible only via a control menu. Printout is possible only if batch has been terminated automatically or in manual. P 14.07 DI Batch Terminate

Default: --

Alternative: DI Digital input signal used to terminate active batch. P 14.08 DO Batch Running

Default: --

Alternative: DO Digital output signal available if batch is running. Signal is activated upon batch start, and deactivated after completion of batch. In case of batch stop, signal is maintained. P 14.09 DO Dribble Feed

Default: --

Alternative: DO Dribble feed signal is output during adaption time. P 14.10 DO Full Feed

Default: --

Alternative: DO Full feed signal is output from feed start to end of adaption time. Feeding continues in dribble feed.

- 114 -


Parameters

P 14.11 Analog Setp. Relat. Min: 0.0 kg

Default: 1000.0 kg Max: 220000000.0 kg

Reference value used to parametrize the "Batch Setpoint" analog input. (Source P 14.02 = AI or DI4) P 14.12 Batch Setp. Range Min: 0.00 mA


Input current for a batch setpoint in the amount of P 14.11. P 14.13 Batch Setp. Offset Min: -200.00 mA


Input current for batch setpoint 0. With negative values, the input range can be expanded, e.g. P 14.11 = 1000 kg P 14.12 = 20mA P 14.13 = -20mA 0...20mA correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg P 14.14 Batch Tolerance Min: 0.000 kg

Default: 100000.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg

If batch is out of tolerance, the correction amount maximally changes by the set tolerance value during adaption. P 14.15 Out of Tolerance Event Group: MF

Default: W2 Number: 06

Cause of Event: Batch out of tolerance P 14.16 Pre-cut-off Amount Min: 0.000 kg

Default: 0.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg

If batch residual amount falls below the "Pre-cut-off Amount" parameter, digital output "DO Pre-cut-off Amount" opens and remains open until batch is complete. P 14.17 DO Pre-cut-off

Default: --

Alternative: DO


- 115 -

Parameters

7.17 Parameter Group 15 - Process Control P 15.01 Process Control

Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD SELECTABLE Determine whether default values or user specific parameter settings are to be used for process control. P 15.02 Maintenance Elec.

Default: 3000 h

Only available if Parameter: 15.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 1 h

Max: 10000 h

Hint on possible maintenance work depending on voltage ON-time. P 15.03 Event Maint. EL.

Default: IG


Number: 04

Cause of Event: Total of power-on time exceeds value of "Voltage On-Time" parameter. After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required. P 15.04 Maint. Scale Run.

Default: 3000 h

Only available if Parameter: 15.01 = SELECTABLE Min: 1 h

Max: 10000 h

Hint on possible maintenance work depending on scale ON-time. P 15.05 Ev.Maint Scale Run.

Default: IG


Number: 03

Cause of Event: Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required.

- 116 -


Parameters

7.18 Parameter Group 16 - VAP P 16.01 VAP Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Start speed-dependent belt load delay VAP. Permits belt load measurement to be shifted to point of discharge. Prerequisites: Speed measurement system has to be installed and activated. No belt circuit sensor is required. P 16.02 Platf.Dis.Length Min: 0.00 % length


Distance from mid weighbridge to material discharge point in percent of total belt length (not to be confused with tail pulley spacing).

7.19 Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring P 17.01 Belt Sensor Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Belt sensor and sensor area in conveyor belt serve for acquisition of belt drift, belt skew and synchronization of adaptive belt influence compensation BIC. P 17.02 Source Belt Sensor


Alternative: -Belt sensor digital input. Function can be controlled using relevant service value. Only DI4 on VSE1 can be used. With alternative "--" , BIC and belt monitoring functions cannot be used.


- 117 -

Parameters

P 17.03 BIC Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Start adaptive belt influence compensation. BIC initialization: Dynamic tare component is cleared upon Power On or change of parameters: !

Parameter P 17.03 "BIC Active"

!

Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Characteristic Value"

!

Parameter P 09.06 "Belt Circuit Code ".

Brief instructions: 1. Set P 17.01 to YES. 2. Enter P 17.04...06. 3. Run setting program "LB: Pulses/Belt". 4. Activate BIC (P 17.03 = YES) 5. Tare scale. P 17.04 Sensor Length

Default: 8.20 cm

Min: 0.01 cm

Max: 400.00 cm

Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel. P 17.05 Sensor Width

Default: 12.00 cm

Min: 0.01 cm

Max: 400.00 cm

Sensor area width P 17.06 Sensor Offset

Default: 0.00 cm

Min: -400.00 cm

Max: 400.00 cm

Offset can be used to correct belt run monitoring zero point. However, maximum display range is limited. Bigger differences should be compensated by shifting of sensor (see Commissioning chapter). New display = old display - offset P 17.07 Belt Drift Min: 0.01 cm

- 118 -

Default: 3.00 cm Max: 400.00 cm


Parameters

P 17.08 Belt Drift Event Event Group: WM


Cause of Event: Belt out of tolerance. Action: 1. Clean tail and drive pulleys. 2. Align belt. Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be, remedy fault. P 17.09 Belt Skew Min: 0.01 cm

Default: 4.00 cm Max: 400.00 cm

P 17.10 Belt Skew Event Event Group: WM


Cause of Event: Belt has run off-center. Scale is no longer operable. Action: See Belt Slip event. P 17.11 Slip Value Min: 0.00 % length


Admissible slip between conveyor belt (sensor area) and speed acquisition in % of total belt length. P 17.12 Slip Event Event Group: WM


Cause of Event: Admissible slip exceeded. P 17.13 Belt Drift DO

Default: --

Alternative: DO Digital output reporting Belt Drift event. P 17.14 Belt Skew DO

Default: --

Alternative: DO Digital output reporting Belt Skew event.


- 119 -

Parameters

P 17.15 Slip DO

Default: --

Alternative: DO Digital output reporting Belt Slip event.

7.20 Parameter Group 18 - Printer P 18.01 Baud Rate

Default: 9600

Alternative: 9600 4800 2400 19200 Protocol baud rate Data format: 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity P 18.02 Page Length Min: 1

Default: 72 Max: 127

Number of lines per page. Change of parameter or Power ON starts printer. Printer is connected to first VEA input/output unit. P 18.03 Print Event

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES NO : No printout. YES : Every event is automatically printed the moment it occurs.

- 120 -


Parameters

7.21 Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe P 19.01 Own Address Min: 1

Default: 1 Max: 16

Station addresses and baud rates of scale and EasyServe must be identical. Settings (including the COM interface) can be searched using EasyServe (Menu: Extra/Options/Communication). The station address is specially designed for systems with Service bus. If there is no Service bus, select address 1. P 19.02 Baud Rate

Default: 9600

Alternative: 9600 19200 Baud rate P 19.03 Diagnosis Min: 0

Default: 0 Max: 1

Activate various diagnostic stages. Zero means: No diagnosis. Diagnosis is possible only using a special interface card. P 19.04 Flag 1 Min: -3276


Note: Scale does not evaluate this parameter. Parameter can be used for fail-safe storage of user-specific characteristic. P 19.05 Flag 2 Min: -3276


Same function as "Flag 1" parameter P 19.06 Format Data

Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-N-2 8-E-1 8-O-1 8-N-1


- 121 -

Parameters

P 19.07 Connection

Default: Serial

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: Serial SERIAL+TCP When fieldbus is set to MODBUS/TCP, EasyServe can additionally be operated via TCP. P 19.08 Modbus Idle Time Min: 2 ms

Default: 4 ms Max: 20 ms

Lets you freely select message end-of-text character for Modbus driver. According to the Modbus standard, the idle time is 3.5 digits depending on baud rate. For setting details, see Manual BVH2104. 4ms value fits 9600 baud rate. For other speeds, calculate and enter correct time. Faulty input can increase fieldbus error rate.

- 122 -


Parameters

7.22 Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus P 20.01 Protocol Type

Default: NO

Alternative: NO MODBUS S5 S5-BCC PROFIBUS DP FIX PROFIBUS DP INTERBUS-S DEVICE NET FIX DEVICE NET MODBUS/TCP SEBUS Lets you select protocol. For detailed protocol description, see the following manuals: BV-H 2100: General fieldbus description applicable to any fieldbus. BV-H 2101: Special INTERBUS-S manual BV-H 2102: Special PROFIBUS-DP manual BV-H 2103: Special DEVICE NET manual BV-H 2104: Special MODBUS manual BV-H 2105: Special S5 and S5-BCC manuals BV-H 2243 Special manual for MODBUS/TCP Attention! Changes to Parameters P 20.14, P 20.16, P 20.17, P 20.18, P 20.19, P 20.22, P 20.23, P 20.24, P 20.25 and P 20.26 are active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. Note: DISOCONT recognizes a Profibus-DP or Interbus-S hardware, if present, and selects the relevant protocol type automatically. If the fieldbus coupling is not active, ensure that the event class of Parameter 20.03 "Host Communication " is not set to Alarm. Otherwise scale cannot be started. P 20.02 Timeout Host Min: 0 s

Default: 10 s Max: 600 s

Interface monitoring. Zero means that interface is not activated.


- 123 -

Parameters

P 20.03 Comm. Error Host Event Group: SY

Default: IG Number: 08

Cause of Event: Interruption of serial communication exceeds the timeout period. Action: Check cabling. P 20.04 Modbus Address

Default: 1

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS Min: 1

Max: 254

Slave address on Modbus P 20.05 Modbus Diagnosis

Default: 0


Max: 15

Activate various diagnostic stages. Zero means that diagnostics is not active. P 20.06 Resolution

Default: 4096


Max: 32767

Maximum number of increments of the measurement value transferred is output in analog or integer format. P 20.07 Word Sequence

Default: IEEE:std / LONG:std

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS Alternative: IEEE:std / LONG:std IEEE:swap/ LONG:std IEEE:std/ LONG:swap IEEE:swap/LONG:swap Determines word sequence during measurement value transmission in the IEEE/LONG format. P 20.08 Modbus Baud Rate

Default: 19200

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS Alternative: 9600 19200 Baud rate

- 124 -


Parameters

P 20.09 Modbus Data Format

Default: 8-O-1

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS Alternative: 8-N-2 8-E-1 8-O-1 8-N-1 Modbus always uses an 11-bit character frame. Example: 8-O-1 means: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit. (N = No Parity, E = Even Parity) P 20.10 S5 Diagnosis

Default: 0

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = S5, S5-BCC Min: 0

Max: 15

Activates various diagnostic stages. Zero means that diagnostics is not active. P 20.11 S5 Float Format

Default: SIEMENS-KG

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = S5, S5-BCC Alternative: SIEMENS-KG IEEE Format indication for all setpoints, measurement values and floating-point parameters. P 20.12 S5 Baud Rate

Default: 9600

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = S5, S5-BCC Alternative: 9600 19200 Baud rate P 20.13 S5 Data Format

Default: 8-E-1

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = S5, S5-BCC Alternative: 8-N-2 8-E-1 8-O-1 8-N-1 The S5 protocol always uses an 11-bit character frame. Example: 8-E-1 means: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit.


- 125 -

Parameters

P 20.14 PB-DP Address

Default: 10

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX Min: 0

Max: 126

Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. Slave address on Profibus P 20.15 PB-DP-FLOAT Format

Default: IEEE

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX Alternative: SIEMENS-KG IEEE Format indication for all setpoints, measurement value and floating-point parameters. P 20.16 PB-DP Parameter

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX Alternative: NO YES Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. Select whether user data package includes parameter block or not. P 20.17 PB-DP-ID Count

Default: 6

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX Min: 0

Max: 12

Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. Select optional measurement and status values (scale --> Master). P 20.18 DVN Address

Default: 63

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Min: 1

Max: 63

Attention! Parameter is active only after a 30-second power down. Slave address on DeviceNet.

- 126 -


Parameters

P 20.19 DVN Baud Rate

Default: 125K

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Alternative: 125K 250K 500K Attention! Parameter is active only after a 30-second power down. Baud rate. P 20.20 SE-Bus Address

Default: 33

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = SEBUS Min: 1

Max: 33

Internal bus address P 20.21 IB-FLOAT Format

Default: SIEMENS-KG

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = INTERBUS-S Alternative: SIEMENS-KG IEEE

P 20.22 IB-Effective Data

Default: NO PARAM / 2 ID

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = INTERBUS-S Alternative: NO PARAM / 2 ID NO PARAM / 4 ID NO PARAM / 6 ID 1 PARAM / 2 ID 1 PARAM / 4 ID Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. P 20.23 PB-DP-Set-Val Count

Default: 2 Preset IDs

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX Alternative: 2 Preset IDs 3 Preset IDs 4 Preset IDs Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN.


- 127 -

Parameters

P 20.24 DVN-Parameter

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Alternative: NO YES Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. P 20.25 DVN-ID Count

Default: 6

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Min: 0

Max: 12

Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. P 20.26 DVN-Set-Val Count

Default: 2 Preset IDs

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Alternative: 2 Preset IDs 3 Preset IDs 4 Preset IDs Attention! Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN. P 20.27 Byte Sequence

Default: Low - High

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Alternative: High - Low Low - High

P 20.28 Word Sequence


Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX Alternative: IEEE:std / LONG:std IEEE:swap/ LONG:std IEEE:std/ LONG:swap IEEE:swap/LONG:swap

P 20.29 WEB Coding

Default: XML

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: XML HTML

- 128 -


Parameters

P 20.30 DHCP

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: NO

P 20.31 IP Address 1

Default: 192

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Min: 0


Max: 255

Default: 168



Max: 255

Default: 240



Max: 255

Default: 1


P 20.35 Net Mask 1

Max: 255

Default: 255


P 20.36 Net Mask 2

Max: 255

Default: 255


P 20.37 Net Mask 3

Max: 255

Default: 255


Max: 255


- 129 -

Parameters

P 20.38 Net Mask 4

Default: 0


Max: 255

P 20.39 Gateway 1

Default: 0


Max: 255

P 20.40 Gateway 2

Default: 0


Max: 255

P 20.41 Gateway 3

Default: 0


Max: 255

P 20.42 Gateway 4

Default: 0


Max: 255

P 20.43 Byte Sequence

Default: High - Low

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: High - Low Low - High

P 20.44 Word Sequence


Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: IEEE:std / LONG:std IEEE:swap/ LONG:std IEEE:std/ LONG:swap IEEE:swap/LONG:swap

- 130 -


Parameters

P 20.45 Configuration

Default: FIXED

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP Alternative: FIXED NO_PARA_4_4 NO_PARA_3_6 PARA_2_4

P 20.46 T-Mode with Comm-Obs

Default: YES

Alternative: NO YES To be able to use Keyboard mode as Emergency mode without disrupting fieldbus connection, fieldbus communication monitoring can be deactivated in Keyboard mode, for feeder to be operated also if fieldbus connection is faulty.

7.23 Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs P 21.01 PLS Binary OUT 1

Default: --

Alternative: DO Control digital output 1 via fieldbus. PMS Binar-OUT 1-8 outputs can be controlled via fieldbus. The residual inputs/outputs configured are accessible on fieldbus for information. P 21.02 PLS Binary OUT 2

Default: --

Alternative: DO Control digital output 2 via fieldbus. P 21.03 PLS Binary OUT 3

Default: --


Default: --


Default: --

Alternative: DO Control digital output 5 via fieldbus.


- 131 -

Parameters

P 21.06 PLS Binary OUT 6

Default: --


Default: --


Default: --

Alternative: DO Control digital output 8 via fieldbus. P 21.09 PLS Analog OUT 1

Default: --

Alternative: AO Control analog output 1 via fieldbus. P 21.10 PLS Analog OUT 2

Default: --

Alternative: AO Control analog output 2 via fieldbus.

- 132 -


Parameters

7.24 Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller P 22.01 Belt Load Controller

Default: NO

Alternative: NO ANALOG PULS Stepping NO: No belt load control. ANALOG: Analog control magnitude output for speed-controlled prefeeders. PULSE: Pulse/pause output for intermittently controlled prefeeders. Stepping: Position-controlled prefeeder with Parameters P 22.11-P 22.15. For controller schematic, see Appendix. For second weighbridge controller, see Parameter Block 26. P 22.02 Contr. Magn. Adapt. Min: 0.0010 mA


Speed bypass superimposing belt load controller. Use parameter to calibrate belt load in volumetric mode to nominal value. P 22.03 Blind Distance Min: 0.00 m

Default: 5.00 m Max: 100.00 m

Distance between prefeeder material infeed point and platform centre. Controller automatically adjusts as a function of the socalled blind distance, nominal speed and load cell filter P 07.02. Big distances result in slow controller, and vice versa. P 22.03 = 0.0m : Controller cut off and in home position (0). P 22.04 Offset Min: -20.00 mA


Elevates control magnitude by a constant value. If parameter P 22.01 is set to "Pulse", value is normally zero. P 22.05 Lower Limit Min: 0.00 mA


Belt load controller control magnitude lower limit. If parameter P 22.01 is set to "Pulse", value is normally zero.


- 133 -

Parameters

P 22.06 Upper Limit

Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 20.00 mA

Controller control magnitude upper limit. Upon inputs smaller than 20 mA, limit depends on setpoint size (see Parameter P 10.05). P 22.07 Position at STOP

Default: 0

Alternative: 0 Lower Limit In cut off state of scale, you can set control magnitude either to 0 or to the lower limit in Parameter P 22.05. P 22.08 Store

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES YES-A Store last value of belt load controller after scale stop. Next start uses this values. NO : No storage YES : Store YES-A : Store only if scale has not been stopped by alarm. P 22.09 Contr.Mag. Prefeeder

Default: --

Alternative: AO Control magnitude analog output (P 22.01 = ANALOG). Configure "Start Prefeeder" output using Parameter P 13.04. P 22.10 Pulse Length

Default: 1.0 s

Min: 0.0 s

Max: 60.0 s

Pulse length for "PULSE" setting of Parameter P 22.01 "Belt Load Controller". Pulse length remains constant; pause is adjusted before control. Output "Start Prefeeder, P 13.04" should be placed on first system unit VSE 1. P 22.11 S: P-Component

Default: 0.5000 s/mA

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping Min: 0.0000 s/mA

Max: 1000.0000 s/mA

Parameters P 22.11-P 22.15 hold for position controlled prefeeders. For relevant gate control, see Block 31.

- 134 -


Parameters

P 22.12 S: I-Component

Default: 3.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping Min: 0.0 s

P 22.13 S: Threshold Resp.

Max: 60000.0 s

Default: 0.00 %

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping Min: 0.00 %

P 22.14 S: DO Open Flow Gate

Max: 1000.00 %

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping Alternative: DO Step controller "Prefeeder OPEN" control output (P 22.01 = Stepping). At best, set output on first VSE system unit. P 22.15 S: DO Close Flow G.

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping Alternative: DO Step controller "Prefeeder CLOSED" control output (P22.01 = Stepping"). At best, set output on first VSE system unit.


- 135 -

Parameters

7.25 Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking P 23.01 DI Error Mechanics 1

Default: --

Alternative: DI LS The complete interlock circuitry consists of a big interlock block and two smaller blocks. 1. Big block P23.01...P23.19 The entire interlock circuitry comprises 1 big and 2 smaller interlock blocks. 2. Big blocks P 23.01...P 23.19 Let you interlink fault inputs of mechanical and electrical system with relevant Error and Ready messages. All digital system inputs/outputs can be placed on inputs. 3. Small blocks P 23.20...P 23.37 2 Freely available AND gates with 2 inputs each. P22.20...P22.27 All digital system inputs/outputs can be placed on gate inputs. 2 universal time gates P23.28-P23.37 DI continue being active also when events are configured for IG. For complete signal patterns, see Appendix. P 23.02 DI Error Mechanics 2

Default: --

Alternative: DI LS

P 23.03 DI Error Mechanics 3

Default: --

Alternative: DI LS


Default: --

Alternative: DI LS


Default: --

Alternative: DI LS

P 23.06 DI Error Electr. 1

Default: --

Alternative: DI LS

- 136 -


Parameters


Default: --

Alternative: DI LS


Default: --

Alternative: DI LS

P 23.09 DO Error Mechanics

Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.10 Error Mechanics Event Group: IL

P 23.11 DO Error Electricity


Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.12 Error Electricity Event Group: IL

P 23.13 DO Error Mechatr. 1


Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.14 DO Error Mechatr. 2

Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.15 Error Mechatronics Event Group: IL

P 23.16 DO Ready


Default: --

Alternative: DO


- 137 -

Parameters

P 23.17 Not Ready Event Group: IL


P 23.18 DO Ready for Start

Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.19 Not Ready for Start Event Group: IL


P 23.20 LS_1 AND-Gate 1

Default: --

Alternative: LS


Default: --

Alternative: LS

P 23.22 Error AND-Gate 1 Event Group: IL



Default: --

Alternative: LS


Default: --

Alternative: LS

P 23.25 Error AND-Gate 2 Event Group: IL


P 23.26 DO: AND-Gate 1

Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.27 DO: AND-Gate 2

Default: --

Alternative: DO - 138 -


Parameters

P 23.28 LS TIME-Gate 1

Default: --

Alternative: LS Lets you select input signal (digital input or output). If signal is available, contact P23.32 for time P23.30 is output after delay time P23.29. Parameter P23.31 lets you determine whether time gate is active always or only in ON state of feeder. P 23.29 Delay TIME Gate 1 Min: 0.0 s

P 23.30 Pulse TIME Gate 1 Min: 0.0 s

P 23.31 Active at OFF:TIME 1



Default: YES

Alternative: NO YES

P 23.32 DO: TIME Gate 1

Default: --

Alternative: DO

P 23.33 LS TIME-Gate 2

Default: --

Alternative: LS Parameters P23.33 - P23.37 refer to the second time gate (see P23.28). P 23.34 Delay TIME Gate 2 Min: 0.0 s

P 23.35 Pulse TIME Gate 2 Min: 0.0 s

P 23.36 Active at OFF:TIME 2



Default: YES

Alternative: NO YES


- 139 -

Parameters

P 23.37 DO: TIME Gate 2

Default: --

Alternative: DO

7.26 Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher P 24.01 Bin Weigher Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Simulation The bin weigher operates entirely independent of continuous scale. Functions: 1. Display bin weight 2. Monitor and report limit values 3. Control MIN/MAX levels 4. Check scale for a on-stream calibration system. You can also fill scale via menu. P 24.01 = Simulation: Simulates bin and MIN/MAX control. Continuous scale extracts material; filling uses 4 * P(Nenn) P 24.02 Load Measurement

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: LC FB

P 24.03 LC Charac. Value

Default: 2.0000 mV/V

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.0100 mV/V

- 140 -

Max: 10.0000 mV/V


Parameters

P 24.04 LC Rated Cap.

Default: 1000.000 kg

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.500 kg

Max: 220000000.000 kg

Load Cells Rated Capacities Total If a hopper is supported to x% on load cells, to the rest on non-weighed support points (pivots), and load cells rated capacity total is L/Cnom1, the load cell rated capacity to be entered results from L/C rated capacity = L/Cnom1 * 100% / x%. If percental share x% is not known, determine rated value by external weighing of a hopper contents. P 24.05 LC Filter

Default: 0.25 s

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.25 s

Max: 300.00 s

The load cell filter acts on all measurement values depending on measured load. P 24.06 Bipolar Measurement

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: NO YES NO : Measurement value 0...175% of load cell rated capacity (2mV/V). YES : Measuring range -175%...175% of load cell rated capacity Since the A/D converter resolution is higher in case of "NO", "YES" should be used only in special cases (e.g. if measuring eyes are used). P 24.07 Error LC Input

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Event Group: CA

Number: 03

Cause of Event: See Parameter P 06.05. P 24.08 LC Input > MAX

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Event Group: HI

Number: 10

Cause of Event: See Parameter P 06.07.


- 141 -

Parameters

P 24.09 Nominal Bin Load

Default: 100.0 % LC

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.0 % LC

Max: 1000.0 % LC

Indicated in percent of load cell rated capacity (P 24.04), nominal bin load serves as reference value for limit values and analog outputs. P 24.10 Display Format

Default: ---.--- t

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: ------- kg -----.- kg ----.-- kg ---.--- kg --.---- kg ------- t -----.- t ----.-- t ---.--- t

P 24.11 Display Filter

Default: 3.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.0 s

Max: 600.0 s

Filter applies to analog, or serial, output, however, not to limit values and control contacts. P 24.12 Control Level MIN

Default: 60.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: -10.0 %

Max: 200.0 %

MIN/MAX levels can be used to control a fill unit (output P 24.14). Fill unit stops if MIN value is reached, and cuts off if MAX value is reached. P 24.13 Control Level MAX

Default: 70.0 %


Max: 200.0 %

P 24.14 DO Bin Filling

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: DO Upon every scale alarm, contact is set to "No Filling". During its measuring phase, the automatic on-stream calibration system (Block: Check System) performs the control. - 142 -


Parameters

P 24.15 Bin Level MIN

Default: 5.0 %


Max: 200.0 %

Freely definable limit value P 24.16 Event Bin Level MIN

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Event Group: LO

Number: 11

Cause of Event: Set MIN value exceeded down P 24.17 DO Bin Level MIN

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: DO

P 24.18 Bin Level MAX

Default: 120.0 %


Max: 200.0 %

Freely definable MAX value. P 24.19 Event Bin Level MAX

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Event Group: HI

Number: 11

Cause of Event: Set MAX value exceeded up P 24.20 DO Bin Level MAX

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: DO

P 24.21 AO Bin Load

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: AO Fill weight analog output.


- 143 -

Parameters

P 24.22 AO Offset

Default: 4.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: -200.00 mA

Max: 200.00 mA

0% fill weight output current. P 24.23 AO Range

Default: 20.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 1000.00 mA

100% fill weight output current P 24.24 Range Correction

Default: 1.0000

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Min: 0.5000

Max: 2.0000

Serving for correction of measuring result, parameter is automatically set by the "CB: Weight Check" setting program. P 24.25 Tare

Default: 0.000 kg


Max: 220000000.000 kg

Setting program "TB: Tare" automatically acquires tare and enters value into parameter. P 24.26 Eff. Check Weight

Default: 10.00 kg


Max: 220000000.00 kg

Enter relevant check weight for the "CB: Weight Check" setting program. P 24.27 Control. in OFF-Mode

Default: YES

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: NO YES Determines whether fill weight (P24.12 and P24.13) and bin control (Block: Bin Control) are active always or only in turned-on state of scale.

- 144 -


Parameters

P 24.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: DI Fill weight sensor digital input. If sensor responds, filling is suppressed or aborted for 60s. 5. DO (P 24.14) OFF 6. DO (P 25.04) OFF 7. Control magnitude (P 25.03) 0, controller in home position. Filling aborts independent of source (open loop control, closed loop control, manual) and event class (P 24.29). P 24.29 Bin Load MAX Sensor

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Event Group: CO

Number: 04

Cause of Event: Fill weight sensor digital input has responded.

7.27 Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller P 25.01 Bin Controller ON

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation Alternative: NO YES Continuous bin control with interference quantity application, suitable for all feed units controlled with 0(4)...20mA. For controller schematic, see Appendix. P 25.02 Filling Type

Default: YES

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Alternative: NO YES YES: Weighfeeder extracts material from bin. Fill weight is controlled using fill unit. NO: Weighfeeder fills material into bin. Fill weight is controlled using discharge unit.


- 145 -

Parameters

P 25.03 A0 Contr. Magn.

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Alternative: AO Fill/discharge unit control magnitude (P 25.02 = YES or NO) P 25.04 D0 Scale ON

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Alternative: DO Fill/discharge unit digital output. Upon every scale alarm, output is set to "Off", control magnitude to "0" and controller to home position. During its measuring phase, the on-stream calibration system performs the control. P 25.05 Setpoint Bin Level

Default: 0.00 kg

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.00 kg

Max: 1000000.00 kg

Fill weight setpoint to be used for control. P 25.06 Scale Constant

Default: 0.0 (kg/h)/mA

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.0 (kg/h)/mA

Max: 1000000.0 (kg/h)/mA

The fill/discharge unit constant is defined as feed rate in kg/hr per mA control magnitude. Together with deadtime parameter P 25.07, it serves for automatic setting of control parameters KP and TN. Setting uses the "BIN: Controller Optim." setting program. P 25.07 Dead Time TT

Default: 3.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.0 s

Max: 60000.0 s

Deadtime from feed unit to bin (see also P 25.06). P 25.08 P-Component KP

Default: 0.00000 mA/kg

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.00000 mA/kg

Max: 10000.00000 mA/kg

KP = 0 results in an I controller producing an instable control loop. This setting should be avoided.

- 146 -


Parameters

P 25.09 I-Component TN

Default: 0.0 s


Max: 60000.0 s

TN = 0 results in a P controller; the I component is reset. P 25.10 D Portion TV

Default: 0.0 s


P 25.11 D Filter TD

Max: 60000.0 s

Default: 0.0 s


Max: 60000.0 s

Filter for D component. Value should not exceed the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 TV is normal. P 25.12 Bypass

Default: 10.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 20.00 mA

Weighfeeder setpoint additively superimposes control magnitude. Enter the current value to be active upon weighfeeder nominal rate. Calibrate bypass thus that with controller cut off (KP, TN, TV = 0) and scale turned on, bin fill level is maintained (amount extracted = amount filled). With controller active, bypass can be changed in small steps until service display yBi is around 0. P 25.13 Bypass D Portion

Default: 0.0 s


Max: 60000.0 s

In critical cases (small bin, high deadtime), the bypass D component can relieve weighfeeder in case of big setpoint changes. Deviation time integral can be minimized. Suggestion: Normally 0, in critical cases, approx. TT/2 (P25.07). P 25.14 Contr. Magn. Offset

Default: 0.00 mA


Max: 20.00 mA

Elevate control magnitude.


- 147 -

Parameters

P 25.15 Lower Limit

Default: 0.00 mA


Max: 20.00 mA

Control magnitude lower limit. P 25.16 Upper Limit

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 20.00 mA

Control magnitude upper limit. P 25.17 Dead Band Deviation

Default: 0.0 kg

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.0 kg

Max: 10000.0 kg

Within dead band, the effective control deviation Xd(w) can be reduced by factor P 25.18. This helps to achieve a slower control behaviour in balanced state, e.g. in case of bin vibrations. P 25.18 Dead Band Factor

Default: 0.0

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Min: 0.0

Max: 1.0

See P 25.17. P 25.19 Setpoint Filter

Default: 0.5 s


Max: 200.0 s

Bin level setpoint filter. Helps to avoid overshooting in case of setpoint changes caused by the on-stream calibration system.

- 148 -


Parameters

P 25.20 Flow Rate Filter

Default: 0.5 s


Max: 200.0 s

Actual value filter for bin level control. Calibrating program "BIN: Controller Optim." automatically considers set value. P 25.21 DI Init. Controller

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Alternative: DI Contact initializes all memorizing controller elements. As long as contact is available, only bypass + elevation are active. P 25.22 Bin Setpoint source

Default: PARAMETER

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES Alternative: PARAMETER FB Lets you determine whether bin level setpoint is to be determined by Parameter P25.05 "Bin Level Setpoint" or via fieldbus interface.

7.28 Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge P 26.01 2.Weighbridge active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Parameter combinations: 1. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = YES, P 22.01 = YES First and second weighbridge belt load controllers are active. 2. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = YES, P 22.01 = NO, P 22.03 = 0 Second weighbridge controller is active. 3. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = NO, P 22.01 = NO Second weighbridge with displays and limit values is active.. Special features: 1. Parameter P 22.08 (Store) applies to first weighbridge controller only. In cut-off state of scale, second weighbridge controller is reset. 2. Upon start of second weighbridge controller, control magnitude is synchronized.


- 149 -

Parameters

P 26.02 2nd Weighbridge

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Alternative: LC Parameter to "--": Q = 0 P 26.03 LC Charac. Value

Default: 2.0000 mV/V

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.0100 mV/V

Max: 10.0000 mV/V

P 26.04 LC Rated Cap.

Default: 200.000 kg

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.001 kg

Max: 220000000.000 kg

Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are counted as load cells. P 26.05 Eff. Platf.Length

Default: 0.180 m

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.001 m

Max: 100.000 m

P 26.06 LC Filter

Default: 0.25 s

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.25 s

Max: 300.00 s

Filter applies to all functions and displays depending on belt load. P 26.07 Error LC Input

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Event Group: CA

Number: 04

Cause of Event: See Parameter P 06.05. P 26.08 2nd Bridge MIN

Default: 5.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: -200.0 %

Max: 200.0 %

Minimum belt load limit value.

- 150 -


Parameters

P 26.09 Event 2nd Bridge MIN

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Event Group: LO

Number: 12

P 26.10 DO 2nd Bridge MIN

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Alternative: DO

P 26.11 2nd Bridge MAX

Default: 150.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: -10.0 %

Max: 200.0 %

Maximum belt load limit value P 26.12 Event 2nd Bridge MAX

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Event Group: HI

Number: 12

P 26.13 DO 2nd Bridge MAX

Default: --


P 26.14 Range Correction

Default: 1.0000

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.2000

Max: 5.0000

Only manual correction is possible. Check to see that first and second weighbridge displays coincide with Parameter P 26.14. P 26.15 Tare

Default: 0.00 kg/m

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.00 kg/m

Max: 10000.00 kg/m

Taring program "TW: Tare" simultaneously acquires the tare of both weighbridges and enters the result into the respective parameters. There is no special taring program for second weighbridge.


- 151 -

Parameters

P 26.16 Controller active

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Alternative: NO YES See Parameter P 26.01. P 26.17 P-Component KP

Default: 0.500

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.000

Max: 100.000

KP = 0 results in an I controller with KI = 1/TN (P 26.18). P 26.18 I-Component TN

Default: 10.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.0 s

Max: 1000.0 s

TN = 0 results in a P controller; the I component is reset. P 26.19 Analog Output 2nd Br

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Alternative: AO Analog output for belt load on second weighbridge. P 26.20 2nd Bridge Offset

Default: 4.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: -200.00 mA

Max: 200.00 mA

Output current for 0 belt load . P 26.21 2nd Bridge Range

Default: 20.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES Min: 0.00 mA

Max: 1000.00 mA

Nominal belt load output current.

- 152 -


Parameters

7.29 Parameter Group 27 - Check System P 27.01 Type of Check System

Default: NO

Alternative: NO Single Unit Separated Units Filling System Extern Single Unit: Forming a mechanical unit, weighfeeder and check weigh bin are weighed at a time. Weighfeeder discharges from bin. Separate Units: Weighfeeder and check weigh bin are decoupled from one another. Weighfeeder discharges from bin. Filling System: During check measurement, weighfeeder fills material into check bin. External: Check sequence is controlled by a host system. DISOCONT only supplies relevant measurement values. Only the following parameters are active: P 27.28 DO Check Meas. Active P 27.31 Absolute Range P 27.32 Relative Range The following parameter description primarily relates to the first two types. For sequence diagram, see Appendix. P 27.02 Auto Correction

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: NO YES NO : Start correction in manual. YES: Correction takes place automatically if the correction result is within P 27.31, P27.32. P 27.03 Cyclic Auto Start

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: NO Tare Span Automatically starts on-stream calibration system for "Tare" or "Range". Start is delayed by the timeout set by Parameter P 27.04. It is useful to additionally select automatic correction (P 27.02). DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 153 -

Parameters

P 27.04 Cycle Time

Default: 0.50 h

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.01 h

Max: 100.00 h

See Parameter P 27.03. P 27.05 Print Check Result

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: NO YES Prints check measurement result after every check operation. 1. Date and time 2. Continuous result Z = .... kg 3. Check result F/Z = ... 4. Check length = ... m 5. Correction Tare rel. ... % * 6. Correction Span rel. ... % * * depending on correction target P 27.06 Release Check System

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: FB DI If release is missing 1. No check measurement starts 2. Active check measurement aborts. If you enter "--", on-stream calibration system is permanently released. P 27.07 No Check Release

Default: W2

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Event Group: CH

Number: 09

Cause of Event: On-stream calibration system started; no release available. Message is output in turned-on and turned-off state of scale. P 27.08 Start Span Corr - 154 -

Default: OP


Parameters

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DI FB Start on-stream calibration system to acquire scale span error and correct, if necessary. For details, see Parameter P 27.09. P 27.09 Start Tare Corr

Default: OP

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DI FB Start on-stream calibration system to acquire scale tare error and correct, if necessary. Primarily caused by material deposits in weigh hopper, tare error should be corrected as frequently as possible. Span error is normally acquired only during initial and re-calibration of scale. You can start check measurement also in cut-off state of scale. However, start in turned-on state is preferrable. While a setting program is running, no check measurement can be started. Start is caused by the input signal edge P 27.10 Accept Correction

Default: OP

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DI FB If measurement is complete, on-stream calibration system goes to acknowledgement phase and waits for correction command. If tolerances P 27.31, P 27.32 are exceeded, you can also start correction in manual. Correction is started through input edge. P 27.11 Finish Check Meas.

Default: OP

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DI FB Check measurement can be aborted at any time. Input is edge-controlled.


- 155 -

Parameters

P 27.12 Circuits or Quantity

Default: Quantity

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: Quantity Circuits You can select check setpoint as 1. Quantity, P 27.14 2. Integer number of belt circuits, P 27.13.. In case of weighfeeders without BIC (P 17.03) and increased requirements, the second option is preferrable. P 27.13 Check Circuits

Default: 0.0

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0

Max: 100.0

See P 27.12. If possible, select integer belt circuits. P 27.14 Check Quantity

Default: 0.0 kg

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0 kg

Max: 100000000.0 kg

See P 27.12

- 156 -


Parameters

P 27.15 Storage Quantity

Default: 500.0 kg


Max: 100000000.0 kg

The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level required for a check measurement. Before measurement, bin is filled up to this level. Prerequisites: 1. Ensure that storage quantity is below maximum check level P 27.15 < P 27. 20 If this is not given, check aborts after start and message CH 03 (Max. Check Level) is output. 2. Ensure that storage quantity exceeds the total from check amount, minimum check level and safety reserve P 27.15 > P 27.14 (P 27.13) + P 27.18 + MT + MB If this is not given, bin level falls below minimum check bin level. Measurement aborts and message CH 02 (MIN Bin Level) is output. MT = Lost amount caused through damping time P 27.22. MB = Lost amount caused through blind distance P 27.23 (with Single Unit type only). P 27.16 Min. Check Quantity

Default: 0.0 kg


Max: 10000.0 kg

Determines and monitors the smallest admissible check amount upon setpoint presetting by belt circuits. If set amount is not reached after selected number of belt circuits, measurement aborts and message CH 01 (Check Amount Too Small) is output. At best, set Parameter P 27.12 = Quantity to 0 P 27.17 Min. Check Quantity

Default: W1


Number: 01

Cause of Event: After completion of measurement, bin weigher has acquired a check amount below that preset minimum value (P 27.16). Check measurement aborts. Either number of belt circuits (P 27.12,13) or belt load is too small. P 27.18 Min. Fill Weight

Default: 0.0 kg


Max: 100000000.0 kg

Smallest bin level admissible during measurement. If value falls below MIN level, check measurement aborts and message CH 02 (Min. Check Level) is output. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 157 -

Parameters

P 27.19 Min. Fill Weight

Default: W1


Number: 02

Cause of Event: During measurement, bin level has fallen below admissible minimum value (P 27.18). Check measurement aborts. Check setpoint is too big or storage quantity too small. P 27.20 Max. Fill Weight

Default: 1000.0 kg


Max: 100000000.0 kg

Maximum bin level is the highest admissible level admitted during check. Measurement does not start before MAX value is exceeded down. The MIN (P 27.18) and MAX (P 27.20) values determine the check measurement working point within bin. P 27.21 Max. Fill Weight

Default: W1


Number: 03

Cause of Event: Storage quantity (P 27.15) exceeds MAX bin level (P 27.20). Check aborts immediately after start. In case of error, check both parameters values. P 27.22 Damping Time

Default: 3.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0 s

Max: 3600.0 s

Timeout between filling and measuring period, also if no refilling is required. P 27.23 Blind Distance

Default: 0.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0 %

Max: 100.0 %

P 27.01 = Single Unit 1. VAP (P 16.01) = NO Blind distance from mid weighbridge to material discharge point in % of total belt length 2. VAP = YES Blind distance is 0. - 158 -


Parameters

P 27.01 = Separated Unit 1. VAP = NO Blind distance from material infeed point to mid weighbridge 2. VAP = YES Distance from material infeed to material discharge P 27.24 DO: Control Started

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DO Digital output "Check Active" Signal is available from start to effected correction, or abort. P 27.25 Scale Stopped

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: FB DI Fill unit Start/Stop feedback. "OFF" message starts damping time. P 27.26 Scale Not Stopped

Default: W1


Number: 08

Cause of Event: 1. The echo (P 27.25) is pending (3s after "Stop Filling"). Check does not abort but waits for echo. 2. If there is no echo during measuring phase, i.e. Start Filling is reported, check aborts without message. P 27.27 Prepare Check Meas.

Default: W2


Number: 10

Cause of Event: Check process is in filling or damping phase, or bin level exceeds maximum check level (P27.20).


- 159 -

Parameters

P 27.28 DO:Check Meas Active

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System, Extern Alternative: DO Digital output reporting measuring phase. P 27.29 Expect Acceptance

Default: W2


Number: 11

Cause of Event: On-stream calibration system waits for operator's intervention. (a) Accept correction (b) Reject correction and abort. If "Automatic Correction" (P 27.02 = YES) is selected, intervention is required only if tolerance is exceeded. P 27.30 DO:Expect Acceptance

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DO Acknowledgement phase digital output. P 27.31 Absolute Range

Default: 10.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System, Extern Min: 0.0 %

Max: 1000.0 %

Limit for total of all corrections; see Parameters P 27.33 and P 27.35. P 27.32 Relative Range

Default: 3.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System, Extern Min: 0.0 %

Max: 1000.0 %

Limit for single correction; see Parameters P 27.34 and P 27.36.

- 160 -


Parameters

P 27.33 Abs.Tare Corr. Error

Default: W1


Number: 04

Cause of Event: This correction raises the zero point correction total to above limit P 27.31. No automatic correction is performed. Acknowledge message and accept the result in manual. Monitoring and reporting take place in the acknowledgement phase. Correction evaluation factor P 27.37 is not considered for error evaluation.

Tabs = Absolute tare in % TK = Parameter P 09.05 (Tare Correction) in kg/m Qo = Nominal platform load in kg/m N = Acquired zero point error (Z-F)/L in kg/m F = Bin weigher check amount (setpoint) Z = Weighfeeder check amount (actual value) L = Belt length passed over weighbridge during check measurement P 27.34 Rel.Tare Corr. Error

Default: W1


Number: 05

Cause of Event: Relative zero point error, i.e. the error acquired during last check measurement exceeds limit value P 27.32.

For details, see Parameter P 27.33. P 27.35 Abs.Span Corr. Error

Default: W1


Number: 06

Cause of Event: Causes the total of all span corrections to exceed limit value P 27.31. Babs = Absolute span in % B = Acquired span error F/Z F = Bin weigher check amount (setpoint) Z = Weighfeeder check amount (actual value) K = Parameter P 09.01 (Span Correction) 1 = Default of Parameter P 09.01 For details, see Parameter P 27.33.


- 161 -

Parameters

P 27.36 Rel.Span Corr. Error

Default: W1


Number: 07

Cause of Event: Relative span error, i.e. error acquired during last check measurement, exceeds limit value P 27.32.

Values Brel, Trel, B and Z are displayed during acknowledgement phase. P 27.37 Corr. Evaluation

Default: 1.000

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.000

Max: 1.000

Factor "Correction Evaluation" evaluates measuring result; only a part of it is used for zero point and span correction. This enables variations in measurement to be averaged over various check operations. N(KOR) = N * KB B(KOR) = 1 + (B -1) * KB KB = Correction evaluation P 27.38 Correction Speed

Default: 0.0 s

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0 s

Max: 3600.0 s

To avoid feed rate steps through correction, correction can be performed automatically in small steps. Enter 0, and correction is effected in one single step. Parameter defines the time between two steps. One steps is 0.1% Qnenn, or 0.1%K. Qnenn = Nominal belt load K = Range Correction parameter P 09.01

- 162 -


Parameters

P 27.39 AO:Check Meas Result

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: AO Analog output of measuring result B = F/Z. Update takes place upon start of acknowledgement phase. Output value is maintained until next measuring result. 4mA : F/Z = 0,9 12mA : F/Z = 1 20mA: F/Z = 1,1 Correction Evaluation P 27.37 is not considered. P 27.40 DO: Check Gate

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DO Parameters P 27.40...P27.43 refer to the Filling System check type. Sequence: Control gate (material diverter) can guide the material to the normal conveyor route or to a check bin. Digital input "Gate Feedback" lets you monitor gate position. If no feedback is output during set monitoring time (P27.42"Gate Monit. Time"), event message CH12 "Gate Error" is output and check measurement aborts. P 27.41 Check Gate Feedback

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DI

P 27.42 Check Gate Time

Default: 0 s

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0 s

Max: 3600 s


- 163 -

Parameters

P 27.43 Check Gate Error

Default: W1


Number: 12

Cause of Event: Check gate not in proper position or too slow. Check measurement aborts. P 27.44 Max. Bin Error

Default: 0.0 %

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Min: 0.0 %

Max: 10000.0 %

Bin level is measured upon start and end of measuring phase. Both points are monitored for measuring errors. If the error exceeds set limit values P 27.44, a second attempt starts after damping time P 27.22. If this attempt fails, too, check measurement aborts. With default value 0, monitoring is inactive. Suggestion: 8. Set limit to 10 000%. 9. Watch service display "KME Window" during check measurement and note maximum value. 10. Enter approx. triple value into Parameter P 27.44. P 27.45 Event Bin Error

Default: W1


Number: 13

Cause of Event: Upon second attempt, measuring error acting on bin exceeded set limit (P 27.44). Check measurement aborts. Abort also takes place with event class IG. P 27.46 DO: Correction Error

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling System Alternative: DO Contact is set if one of events CH 04...CH 07 occurs upon end of measuring phase.

- 164 -


Parameters

7.30 Parameter Group 28 - Moisture P 28.01 Moisture Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES Moisture block can be used to correct actual value. For controller input and batch counter, the corrected value is used if moisture is activated. Pulse counter readings can be corrected using Parameter P 28.14, or output without being corrected. P 28.02 Moisture Select

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Alternative: DI FB With default value "--" , moisture is activated. P 28.03 Moisture Measurement

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Alternative: AI DI4 Parameters P 28.03...P 28.06 determine the input for moisture acquisition and normalization. P 28.04 Nominal Moisture

Default: 20.00 %

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Min: 0.00 %

P 28.05 Moisture Offset

Max: 100.00 %

Default: 4.00 mA


P 28.06 Moisture Range

Max: 200.00 mA

Default: 20.00 mA


Max: 1000.00 mA


- 165 -

Parameters

P 28.07 DO Moisture active

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Alternative: DO Moisture digital output active P 28.08 Moisture MAX

Default: 10.00 %

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Min: 0.00 %

Max: 100.00 %

Parameters P 28.08...P 28.10 monitor moisture for MAX value. P 28.09 DO Moisture MAX

Default: --


P 28.10 Event Moisture MAX

Default: W1

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Event Group: MF

Number: 05

P 28.11 AO Flow Rate corr.

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Alternative: AO Parameters P 28.11...P 28.13 determine corrected actual value analog output and its normalization. P 28.12 AO Flow Rate Offset

Default: 4.00 mA


Max: 200.00 mA

P 28.13 AO Flow Rate Range

Default: 20.00 mA


- 166 -

Max: 1000.00 mA


Parameters

P 28.14 Pulse Counter corr.

Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 28.01 = YES Alternative: NO YES If "NO" is selected, VEA 1 pulse output outputs uncorrected Counter 1 readings (see Parameters P 02.06 and P 02.07).

7.31 Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time P 29.01 Dead Time Active

Default: NO

Alternative: NO Setpoint + ON/OFF Setpoint ON/OFF Dead time elements for setpoint and ON/OFF command are available and can be activated separately. NO : No dead time active Setpoint : Only setpoint dead time active ON/OFF : Only ON/OFF dead time active Setpoint + ON/OFF: Setpoint and ON/OFF dead times are active. P 29.02 Dead Time

Default: 0.00 s

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Min: 0.00 s

Max: 600.00 s

Dead time value is valid for both elements. P 29.03 Setpoint Select

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB With default value "--", preselection is active. P 29.04 Setpoint Clock ON

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB "--" starts setpoint element clock. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 167 -

Parameters

P 29.05 ON/OFF Select

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB "--" activates preselection. P 29.06 ON/OFF Clock ON

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB "--" starts ON/OFF element clock. P 29.07 Time Elem. Preassign

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB Time elements can be assigned from outside with available setpoint, or current ON/OFF command. P 29.08 Time Elements Init.

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DI FB Upon initialization, setpoint element is preset with zero; the ON/OFF element, with OFF. P 29.09 DO Dead Time Active

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DO Digital output for setpoint or ON/OFF dead times active. P 29.10 DO Setpoint Active

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DO Digital output for setpoint dead time active.

- 168 -


Parameters

P 29.11 DO ON/OFF Active

Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF Alternative: DO Digital output for ON/OFF dead time active.

7.32 Parameter Group 30 - Linearization P 30.01 Linearization ON

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES The linearization function is designed to linearize belt load measurement. You can determine the 4 linearization points through calibration with check weights or checks using material. Place points not required or measured outside of measuring range or interpolate. For calibration details, see Appendix. P 30.02 Lin. S1 Min: 0.01 % Q

Default: 25.00 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization Point 1: Actual belt load, e.g. acquired using check weight or material measurement. P 30.03 Lin. I1 Min: 0.01 % Q

Default: 25.00 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 1: Belt load measured by DISOCONT P 30.04 Lin. S2 Min: 0.01 % Q

Default: 50.00 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 2: See P 30.02 P 30.05 Lin. I2 Min: 0.01 % Q

Default: 50.00 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 2: See P 30.03 P 30.06 Lin. S3 Min: 0.01 % Q

Default: 75.00 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 3: See P 30.02


- 169 -

Parameters

P 30.07 Lin. I3

Default: 75.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q

Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 3: See P 30.03 P 30.08 Lin. S4

Default: 100.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q

Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 4: See P 30.02 P 30.09 Lin. I4

Default: 100.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q

Max: 1000.00 % Q

Linearization point 4: See P 30.03 P 30.10 Lineariz. Error Event Group: CA


Cause of Event: Monitoring for monotonously rising compensation takes place: o

Upon linearization start

o

Upon parameter change.

7.33 Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate This block describes the flow gate parameters that can be used for positioncontrolled belt load control. The gate can also be used independent of belt load controller. P 31.01 AI Pos.Flow Gate

Default: --

Alternative: AI DI4 Prefeeder position analog input. For normalization, use Parameters P 31.02...P31.03. P 31.02 AI Offset Min: -200.00 mA


Calibrate input for 0% nominal position.

- 170 -


Parameters

P 31.03 AI Range Min: 0.00 mA


Calibrate input for 100% nominal position. With nominal position, 100% material flow should be available at rated conditions. P 31.04 AO Pos. Flow Gate

Default: --

Alternative: AO Prefeeder position analog output P 31.05 AO Offset Min: -200.00 mA


Calibrate output for 0% position. P 31.06 AO Range Min: 0.00 mA


Calibrate output for 100% position. P 31.07 Err. MIN Flow Gate Event Group: CO


Cause of Event: "Prefeeder Pos. MIN" (P31.08) digital input event message. Position controlled prefeeder is in MIN position. P 31.08 Pos. MIN Flow Gate

Default: --

Alternative: DI Prefeeder MIN value message digital input. Signal does not affect control. P 31.09 Err. MAX Flow Gate Event Group: CO


Cause of Event: "Prefeeder Pos. MAX" (P31.10) digital input event message. Position controlled prefeeder is in MAX position.


- 171 -

Parameters

P 31.10 Pos. MAX Flow Gate

Default: --

Alternative: DI Prefeeder MAX value message digital input. Signal does not affect control.

7.34 Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip P 32.01 2-Sensor Slip act.

Default: NO

Alternative: NO YES The 2-sensor slip speeds up the detection of slip errors with slow-going belts. Normal slip monitoring (see Block 17) requires a belt sensor to detect a new slip error upon entire belt circuits. The 2-sensor slip can do without belt sensor to continuously acquire the slip error. For detailed description of function, see Appendix. P 32.02 Source Sensor 1

Default: Speed

Alternative: Speed DI Either the input of the tacho sensor (speed) (P 04.07 speed detection) or any other digital input can be chosen as source for sensor 1. The requirements for a signal connected via DI are described in the Annex. P 32.03 DI Sensor 1

Default: --

Alternative: DI If you set Sensor 1 source (P 32.02) to DI, determine physical input. The requirements for a signal connected via DI are described in the Annex. P 32.04 Char. Value Sensor 1 Min: 0.01 I/m

Default: 100.00 I/m Max: 1000000.00 I/m

Sensor 1 characteristic value if P32.02 is set to DI. No further function. P 32.05 DI Sensor 2

Default: --

Alternative: DI Sensor 2 digital input.

- 172 -


Parameters

P 32.06 Char. Value Sensor 2 Min: 0.01 I/m

P 32.07 Slip Value 2 Min: 0.00 % length

Default: 100.00 I/m Max: 1000000.00 I/m


Admissible change of belt length in % of total belt length. P 32.08 Slip Error 2 Event Group: WM


Cause of Event: Slip error has exceeded limit value P 32.07. P 32.09 DO Slip 2

Default: --

Alternative: DO Slip error (P 32.08) digital output


- 173 -

Parameters

7.35 Event Messages Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.

Before acknowledging event message, always remedy cause of fault. If this is not done, system has the potential to cause injuries or damage to the machine. Reactions on events can be parametrized using event classes. The parameters appertaining to event messages are indicated in brackets. There are four different event classes: Event Class

Code

Display / Effect

Alarm

A

Event is highlighted and underscored. All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.

Warning 1

W1

Event is underscored. Message remains underscored until event has been acknowledged. Display does not efface before cause of fault has been remedied. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.

Warning 2

W2

Event is displayed as long as cause has not been remedied. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.

Ignore

IG

Event is not displayed. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.

The event messages are comprised in form of groups. The following priority applies: Event Group

Symbol

System message

SY

Sequence monitoring

SC

Electrical system

WE

Mechanical system

WM

Material flow

MF

Interlocking

IL

Controllers

CO

Check-and-correct system CH Calibration

CA

Maximum

HI

Minimum LO NOTE: In the following list, the parameters appertaining to the event message displayed are stated in brackets.

- 174 -


Parameters

Event Group: Calibration ( P 06.05 ) CA-01 LC Input Load cell cable wrong. Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state. Supply voltage is below 19V. Error must be available for minimum 3s. Action: Check cabling. If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective. Check for either possibility. If scale connot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device off and restart. ( P 06.04 ) CA-02 Tacho Input Input frequency exceeds 2900 Hz. Prerequisite: Parameter P 04.07 "Speed Measurement" not set to "--". CA-03 LC Input Bin See Parameter P 06.05.

( P 24.07 )

CA-04 LC Input 2.Bridge See Parameter P 06.05.

( P 26.07 )

( P 30.10 ) CA-05 Linearization Monitoring for monotonously rising compensation takes place: o Upon linearization start o Upon parameter change. Event Group: Check Measurement ( P 27.17 ) CH-01 Min. Check Quantity After completion of measurement, bin weigher has acquired a check amount below that preset minimum value (P 27.16). Check measurement aborts. Either number of belt circuits (P 27.12,13) or belt load is too small. ( P 27.19 ) CH-02 Min. Fill Weight During measurement, bin level has fallen below admissible minimum value (P 27.18). Check measurement aborts. Check setpoint is too big or storage quantity too small. ( P 27.21 ) CH-03 Max. Fill Weight Storage quantity (P 27.15) exceeds MAX bin level (P 27.20). Check aborts immediately after start. In case of error, check both parameters values. ( P 27.33 ) CH-04 Abs.Tare Corr. Error This correction raises the zero point correction total to above limit P 27.31. No automatic correction is performed. Acknowledge message and accept the result in manual. Monitoring and reporting take place in the acknowledgement phase. Correction evaluation factor P 27.37 is not considered for error evaluation.

Tabs = Absolute tare in % TK = Parameter P 09.05 (Tare Correction) in kg/m Qo = Nominal platform load in kg/m N = Acquired zero point error (Z-F)/L in kg/m F = Bin weigher check amount (setpoint) Z = Weighfeeder check amount (actual value) DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 175 -

Parameters

L = Belt length passed over weighbridge during check measurement ( P 27.34 ) CH-05 Rel.Tare Corr. Error Relative zero point error, i.e. the error acquired during last check measurement exceeds limit value P 27.32.

For details, see Parameter P 27.33. ( P 27.35 ) Abs.Span Corr. Error CH-06 Causes the total of all span corrections to exceed limit value P 27.31. Babs = Absolute span in % B = Acquired span error F/Z F = Bin weigher check amount (setpoint) Z = Weighfeeder check amount (actual value) K = Parameter P 09.01 (Span Correction) 1 = Default of Parameter P 09.01 For details, see Parameter P 27.33. ( P 27.36 ) Rel.Span Corr. Error CH-07 Relative span error, i.e. error acquired during last check measurement, exceeds limit value P 27.32.

Values Brel, Trel, B and Z are displayed during acknowledgement phase. CH-08 15.

( P 27.26 ) Scale Not Stopped The echo (P 27.25) is pending (3s after "Stop Filling"). Check does not abort but waits for echo. 16. If there is no echo during measuring phase, i.e. Start Filling is reported, check aborts without message.

( P 27.07 ) CH-09 No Check Release On-stream calibration system started; no release available. Message is output in turned-on and turned-off state of scale. ( P 27.27 ) CH-10 Prepare Check Meas. Check process is in filling or damping phase, or bin level exceeds maximum check level (P27.20). ( P 27.29 ) CH-11 Expect Acceptance On-stream calibration system waits for operator's intervention. (a) Accept correction (b) Reject correction and abort. If "Automatic Correction" (P 27.02 = YES) is selected, intervention is required only if tolerance is exceeded. CH-12 Check Gate Error Check gate not in proper position or too slow. Check measurement aborts.

( P 27.43 )

( P 27.45 ) CH-13 Max. Bin Error Upon second attempt, measuring error acting on bin exceeded set limit (P 27.44). Check measurement aborts. Abort also takes place with event class IG.

- 176 -


Parameters

Event Group: Controller ( P 06.14 ) CO-01 Controller Limited Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output. 17. Material flow missing or irregular. 18. External feed rate controller wrongly set. Action: Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA. CO-02 Err. MIN Flow Gate "Prefeeder Pos. MIN" (P31.08) digital input event message. Position controlled prefeeder is in MIN position.

( P 31.07 )

CO-03 Err. MAX Flow Gate "Prefeeder Pos. MAX" (P31.10) digital input event message. Position controlled prefeeder is in MAX position.

( P 31.09 )

CO-04 Bin Load MAX Sensor Fill weight sensor digital input has responded.

( P 24.29 )

Event Group: Electrical System ( P 06.09 ) WE-01 Power Failure Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class. ( P 12.11 ) WE-02 Namur Error VSE1-DI3 Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable. If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG type. External Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required (the same holds the for the Namur monitorings below). ( P 12.12 ) WE-03 Namur Error VSE1-DI4 Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. ( P 12.13 ) WE-04 Namur Error VSE2-DI3 Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. ( P 12.14 ) WE-05 Namur Error VSE2-DI4 Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. ( P 12.15 ) WE-06 Namur Error VSE3-DI3 Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. ( P 12.16 ) WE-07 Namur Error VSE3-DI4 Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable. Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable. ( P 06.20 ) WE-08 Analog Input< Offset The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the set zero point elevation.


- 177 -

Parameters

Event Group: Interlock ( P 03.07 ) IL-01 No Release No release signal from source defined by Parameter "Release". IL-02

Error Mechanics

( P 23.10 )

IL-03

Error Electricity

( P 23.12 )

IL-04

Error Mechatronics

( P 23.15 )

IL-05

Not Ready

( P 23.17 )

IL-06

Not Ready for Start

( P 23.19 )

IL-07

Error AND-Gate 1

( P 23.22 )

IL-08

Error AND-Gate 2

( P 23.25 )

> Event Group: Material Flow MF-05

Moisture > MAX

MF-06 Out of Tolerance Batch out of tolerance

( P 28.10 ) ( P 14.15 )

Event Group: MAX ( P 06.07 ) HI-01 LC Input > MAX Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities. Full scale value: 125% with 2.85mV/V load cells 175% with 2mV/V load cells Action: Check material infeed. HI-02 I > MAX Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.

( P 08.05 )

HI-03 Load > MAX Belt load exceeds set maximum value.

( P 08.09 )

HI-04 v > MAX Belt speed exceeds set MAX value.

( P 08.13 )

( P 06.13 ) HI-05 Deviation Maximum control deviation exeeded. Actual feed rate strongly differs from setpoint for more than preset time. There are various possible causes: 1. Material handling error Material flows irregularly or cannot be discharged with sufficient qualitiy. Controller is out of limit for a certain time. 2. Electronics error Check external feed rate controller and motor cablings. Check feed controller for proper setting (current limitation, speed range). 3. Calibration error During initial calibration, controller was set so critically that smallest changes of system properties cause unreliable operation. - 178 -


Parameters

Action: Repeat this commissioning step. HI-10 Bin: LC Input > MAX See Parameter P 06.07.

( P 24.08 )

HI-11 B > MAX Set MAX value exceeded up

( P 24.19 )

HI-12

2nd Bridge > MAX

( P 26.12 )

Event Group: Mechanic WM-01 Belt Limit Switch Belt limit switch for belt run monitoring has been triggered.

( P 12.10 )

WM-02 Slip Error Admissible slip exceeded.

( P 17.12 )

WM-03 Belt Skew Belt has run off-center. Scale is no longer operable. Action: See Belt Slip event.

( P 17.10 )

( P 17.08 ) WM-04 Belt Drift Belt out of tolerance. Action: 1. Clean tail and drive pulleys. 2. Align belt. Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be, remedy fault. WM-05 Slip Error 2 Slip error has exceeded limit value P 32.07.

( P 32.08 )

Event Group: MIN ( P 06.06 ) LO-01 LC Input < MIN Load cell load is smaller than 3% of load cell rated capacities. LO-02 I < MIN Flow rate smaller than set minimum value.

( P 08.03 )

LO-03 Load < MIN Belt load smaller than set minimum value.

( P 08.07 )

LO-04 v < MIN Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.

( P 08.11 )

LO-11 B < MIN Set MIN value exceeded down

( P 24.16 )

LO-12

2nd Bridge < MIN

( P 26.09 )

> Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ( P 06.08 ) SC-01 Setpoint Limited Depending on selected mode: a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate. b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal value. DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 179 -

Parameters

c) Emergency setpoint is active (P 06.18). ( P 06.02 ) SC-02 Stand-By Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.03 "Standby Limit"). Material prefeeder cuts off. ( P 15.05 ) SC-03 Maint. Scale Run. Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required. ( P 15.03 ) SC-04 Maintenance Int.Elec Total of power-on time exceeds value of "Voltage On-Time" parameter. After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required. SC-05 External Event 1 External fault signal at input 1.

( P 12.02 )

SC-06 External Event 2 External fault signal at Input 2.

( P 12.04 )

SC-11 External Event 3 External fault signal across fault input 3.

( P 12.17 )

SC-12 External Event 4 External fault signal across fault input 4

( P 12.19 )

> Event Group: System Message ( P 06.15 ) SY-01 Memory Error Error has been detected by cyclic check of program and parameter memories. If SY 01 is output immediately after power-up, check VSM module for proper seat. If this is no help, call the "Load Default Parameters" function. If this does not help either, contact the Schenck Service; in most cases, scale is inoperable. ( P 01.10 ) SY-02 Com. VSE20100-Unit 2 Error in communication with DISOCONT system unit 2 (VSE2). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VSE2 actively intervenes in control loop. ( P 01.11 ) SY-03 Com. VSE20100-Unit 3 Error in communication with DISOCONT system unit 3 (VSE3). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VSE3 actively intervenes in control loop. ( P 01.07 ) SY-04 Com. VEA20100-Unit 1 Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 1 (VEA1). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling . Must be set to Alarm if VEA1 actively intervenes in control loop. ( P 01.08 ) SY-05 Com. VEA20100-Unit 2 Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 2 (VEA2). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Achtion: Check cabling . - 180 -


Parameters

Must be set to Alarm if VEA2 actively intervenes in control loop. ( P 01.09 ) SY-06 Com. VEA20100-Unit 3 Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 3 (VEA3). Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cabling. Must be set to Alarm if VEA3 actively intervenes in control loop. SY-07 Comm. Error OP Error in communication with DISOCONT control unit. Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s. Action: Check cable connections.

( P 01.01 )

( P 20.03 ) SY-08 Comm. Error Host Interruption of serial communication exceeds the timeout period. Action: Check cabling. ( P 06.16 ) SY-09 License Violation Loaded software or activated parameter blocks (e.g. Bin Weigher) are not licensed through the VSM module used. You need a module with a higher type number. The only possible event class is "Alarm". SY-10 Com. Ext. I/O Error in communication with DISOCONT External I/O (EIO).

( P 01.13 )

SY-11 Com. VEA 20101 Error in communication with extension card VEA 20101.

( P 01.15 )


- 181 -

Typical Applications

8 Typical Applications 8.1 Weighfeeder The figure below shows the DISOCONT controlling a weighfeeder. Material is extracted from a silo and off-handled by a conveyor belt. Actual feed rate is compared to setpoint, with the difference being transferred to controller R1. Controller continues varying belt speed until actual value equals setpoint. If a controlled prefeeder is required, additional belt load controller R2 can be activated which is capable of controlling prefeeder continuously or via starting pulses. Yz

V

-

R2 +

Q

+

V

M

V

Qo P Y

R1

vh206221_gb.cdr

-

ACT

+

SET

Xd

kg/hr

Fig.: Weighfeeder Feature

Setting

Controller type

Set Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" to "STANDARD" or "UNIVERS"

Control scheme

See "Standard Controller" figure shown at the "Detail: Control" item of the Appendix

Actual feed rate Q * V control

Gravimetric mode

Belt speed control Volumetric mode You can also select the weighfeeder control structure by setting Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" to "UNIVERS". This offers the additional possibility to adapt the controller to changes in weigh span amplification caused by varying belt load.

- 182 -



8.2 Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder Feed rate is controlled for setpoint by changing of belt load. Belt speed is normally constant. NOTE: Position-controlled prefeeders require an external three-point step controller to be available. The figure below shows the control loop of a belt weigher operating with connected prefeeder. Prefeeder

Q

Y

R

V

-

ACT

+

SET

Xd

Vh206224_gb.cdr

kg/hr

Fig.: Belt Weigher With Controlled Prefeeder Feature

Setting

Controller type

Set Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" to "UNIVERS"

Control scheme

As shown in the "Universal Controller" figure at the "Detail: Control" of the Appendix


Gravimetric mode

Prefeeder control via Volumetric mode setpoint bypass The control scheme corresponds to that of the Universal Controller (s. "Details: Control" item in the Appendix). If Gravimetric Mode is selected, actual feed rate is controlled. If Volumetric Mode is selected, prefeeder is controlled via the setpoint bypass (s. figure).


- 183 -


Enter the following parameter settings for the "Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder" application: Parameter

Setting

P 10.01 "Optim.Controller"

"UNIVERS"

P 10.08 "Bypass"

apr.10...15 mA

P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode"

"Yconst"

P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord"

apr. Tt / 5

P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord"

apr. Tt / 5

P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison"

"W-X"

P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources"

"I"

P 10.15 "Adaption 1"

"1 / W"

P 10.16 "Adaption 2" "W" The adaption points enable the controller working point to be quickly adapted to setpoint changes. Parameters KP and TN are maintained. Filter Parameters P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" simulate the time behaviour of weigh span with dead time Tt, so that upon setpoint steps only the bypass is active. If after a setpoint step actual value strongly tends to over or undershooting, filters have to be adapted empirically.

- 184 -



8.3 Belt Weigher with Constant Load An uncontrolled prefeeder feeds the material onto a conveyor belt. Controller adapts belt speed such that belt load always corresponds to rated value Qo. The figure below shows the control loop for the "Belt Weigher With Constant Load" application. Prefeeder

Q

V

M ACT Y

R

+

Xd

ACT

SET Vh206225_gb.cdr

Qo

Fig.: Belt Weigher With Constant Load Features

Setting

Controller type

Set Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" to "UNIVERS"

Control scheme

As shown in the "Universal Controller" figure at the "Detail: Control" of the Appendix


Gravimetric mode

Prefeeder control via setpoint bypass

Volumetric mode

NOTE: To prevent belt from standstill with smaller belt loads, enter control magnitude lower value by setting Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP" to "Lower Limit". The always identical working point of the weighing system permits a high measuring accuracy to be achieved. Feed rate at the point of discharge corresponds to the prefeeder feed rate. Enter the following parameter settings for the "Belt Weigher With Constant Load" application: Parameter

Setting

P 10.01 "Optim.Controller"

"UNIVERS"

P 10.07"Position at STOP"

"Lower Limit"

P 10.08 "Bypass"

apr.10...15 mA

P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode"

"Yconst"

P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord"

0

P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord"

0

P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison"

"X-W"


- 185 -


Parameter

Setting

P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources"

"Q"

P 10.15 "Adaption 1"

"V"

P 10.16 "Adaption 2" "NO" Belt speed control changes the dead time between prefeeder and weighing platform. To ensure same control quality over wide ranges, controller is adapted as a function of belt speed.

- 186 -


Appendix

9 Appendix This chapter details special functions.

9.1 Linearization Belt load linearization is normally not required. It makes good sense only with high belt load variations and simple scale mechanics. Calibration Using Check Weights: 19. Apply check weight Q1. Start scale and call zero setting program. 20. Note zero setting final result (under display) and enter later into Parameter Lin-I1. Abort program; do not overwrite result. 21. Enter

into Parameter Lin-S1. Value Meaning

Unit

Q1

Check weight

kg

L

Effective platform length

m

q0

Nominal belt load

kg/m

22. Repeat steps 1...3 with increasing check weights for all other linearization points. Calibration Through Check With Material: 23. Perform material check at q1 nominal belt load. 24. Read off belt load mean value q1(a) from DISOCONT. Enter value into Parameter Lin-I1. 25. Enter

into Parameter Lin-S1. Value Description

Unit

Ms

kg

Material amount fed out

Material amount read off kg from DISOCONT 26. Repeat steps 1...3 with increasing check weights for all other linearization points. Ma


- 187 -

Appendix

9.2 Sensor Slip

The smallest slip that still can be acquired SMin is the bigger value of S1 or S2.

Value

Meaning

IB

No. of Belt Circuits (P 09.06)

K1

Sensor 1 Char. Val. (P 32.04)

K2

Sensor 2 Char. Val. (P 32.06)

Vs Example:

VS Characteristic (P 04.01)

Value

Size

vs

10 000 I/m

IB

30 000 I/r

K1, K2

100 I/m

SMin 0.667 % If the value of Parameter P 32.07 falls below value SMin, SMin automatically becomes active. Attention! The pulses on sensors S1 and S2 must be available for at least 1.2 seconds. Pulse intervals must also exceed 1.2 sec. When using binary inputs on main VSE (equipped with program VDB 20150xx) for sensor signals, the minimum pulse/pause times are reduced to 0.2s.

- 188 -


Appendix

9.3 Source Selection Source selection is used to assign a logical signal (source) to a hardware channel (unit, channel). Moreover, it can be used to determine the digital signal level which causes signal to become active (level = low or high). Hardware configuration is thus highly flexible. Assignment of analog and digital inputs/outputs to logical signals can be optimized for the DISOCONT assemblies spatial arrangement. Every signal that can be configured is identified by the following information: o

Source = Logical signal name

o

Unit = Hardware assembly for which signal has been configured Counter number 1-n stands for the address set in the following table: ! VSE = System unit ! VEA = Input/output unit ! VLB = Local control box ! Hardware address setting for Local Bus Address switch for Device-Net setting: VSE1 = 1 VSE2 = 2 VSE3 = 3 VEA1 = 11 VEA2 = 12 VEA3 = 13 VLB1 = 21 EIO = 31

o

Channel = Name of output, or input, on assembly ! DI = Digital input ! DO = Digital output ! AO = Analog output ! AI = Analog input

o

Level = Effective level ! Low = input 0V, or output contact open With Namur inputs, "Low" corresponds to > 1.6 mA current, or sensor not covered ! High = Input energized, or output contact closed With Namur inputs, "High" corresponds to < 1.6 mA current, or sensor covered


- 189 -

Appendix

9.4 Setpoint and Start Sources

Fig.: Setpoint and Start Sources "Select Setpoint" and "Start/Stop" sources can be started from various operating sources. Source is preselected by parameter. Using the "Keyboard Mode" dialog function, we can change from preselected sources to keyboard, and vice versa. Parameter Function

Range

P03.02

Start source

Keyboard/serial/contact

P03.03

Setpoint source

Keyboard/serial analog

P03.08

Setpoint with percental evaluation --, OP, AI, DI4

Setpoint Displays: Value Description P

Effective setpoint

Pe

External setpoint (if selected with P03.03)

Pr

Percental evaluation (if selected with P03.08)

In Keyboard Mode, selected Pe and Pr displays are maintained. Entering Setpoint Via Keyboard: Value Description

- 190 -

T

Absolute setpoint (only if no external setpoint is selected)

Tr

Percental setpoint (only if P03.08 is set to OP and analog, or serial, input is selected with P03.03. Relative setpoint can also be selected using analog input (see Parameter P03.08).


Appendix

Setpoint Synchronization: Upon change-over from external setpoint source to keyboard, external setpoint is acquired. In opposite direction, the external source is active. Start / Stop Synchronization: Upon change-over from external setpoint source to keyboard, the Start/Stop status is maintained. In opposite direction, the external source is active. Power OFF: Keyboard setpoints are stored.

Fig.: Control Inputs/Outputs Parameter

Function

Range

P05.01

Start-up period

in % length

P05.03

Counter tracking time

in s


- 191 -

Appendix

Point in time: 1. As long as contact is open (no release signal), no start command is active. 2. Release signal is available, feeder is released. 3. During start-up period P05.01 feeder is in volumetric mode. In many cases, P05.01 is set to zero. 4. Automatic change-over to gravimetric mode takes place. 5. Cut-off command is output (Release contact open). Prefeeder immediately cuts off. 6. During counter tracking time (P05.03), feed rate acquisition and totalization are still active. Alarm: If feeder is cut off due to Alarm, prefeeder immediately stops. If the time set by Parameter P05.03 has elapsed, measurement is complete. Measurement and Displays: Belt load and belt speed are always acquired and displayed. Feed rate is acquired only in turned-on state and during counter tracking time (P05.03). All phases of active feed rate acquisition are reported by ON message.

- 192 -


Appendix

9.5 Batching The figure below applies to controlling feeders.

Fig.: Details: Batching NOTE: The most important batching settings are effected in Parameter Block 14 "Batch Mode". Batching Sequence ("Details:Batching" figure) Point 0 : Connect scale to start batch. Point 1 : Cut off scale to stop batching. Totalizing counter continuous measurement for the time set by Parameter P 05.03 "Afterfl. Totalizer". Point 2 : Restart scale to resume batching. Also possible during counter tracking time. Point 3 : Set feed rate moves towards zero; Full Feed or Dribble Feed signal changes its level. This point is determined using Parameter P 14.03 "Adaption Time" indicating the reset time. Point 4 : Cut-off point. Batch setpoint minus the correction amount acquired by Parameter P 14.04 "Correction Amount" is reached and batch is complete. Feed unit cuts off.


- 193 -

Appendix

Point 5 : Material afterflow. Totalizing counter continues operating for the time set by Parameter P 05.03 "Afterfl. Totalizer". New batch can start only if afterflow time has elapsed. Adaption After every complete batch, system computes a correction amount based on missing amount and stores value in Parameter "Correction Amount". Steps 3 and 4 automatically shift during next batching operation (s. Fig. Details: Batching). K(new) = K(old) + Adap * Error K(new) = New correction amount Adap. = Adaption factor Errors smaller than smallest display digit are not corrected. Alarm Aborts batch. After remedy of cause and acknowledgement of message, batching can be resumed. Power OFF Batch aborts, batching mode remains selected. All counter readings and batch values are stored. Next start command starts new batch Stand-By Mode During deceleration time, feeder can go to stand-by mode. Relevant message is suppressed. Limit Values Event messages P-min and v-min are suppressed during deceleration time. This does not apply to digital outputs. Clearance Mode Batching with Parameter P 05.02 "Volum. Clearance" = > 0 makes good sense only if prefeeder is controlled by the DISOCONT. Control sequence slightly varies.

- 194 -

o

Prefeeder cuts off at Point 4 as shown the in the "Details: Batching" figure.

o

Drive and dribble feed contact switch as soon as set clearance time has elapsed.

o

Counter tracking time starts as soon as drive and dribble feed cut off.


Appendix

9.6 Feed Rate Control The setting of P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" determines the control scheme used for the particular application. The "STANDARD" controller optimization is specially designed for speedcontrolled weighfeeders. The figure below shows the control loop.

Fig.: Standard Control Loop The "UNIVERS" control optimization with setpoint bypass and adapting interventions can be matched to the specific task by using additional parameters. The figure below shows the extended control loop:


- 195 -

Appendix

Fig.: Universal Controller Control Loop The listing below indicates the meanings of the most important parameters occurring in the "Standard Controller Control Loop" and "Universal Controller Control Loop" figures. NOTE: For information on other parameters, see the "Parameters" item. Parameter P 10.02 "P-Component KP" (cf. "Controller Constants" figure.) Nominal feed rate, or nominal belt load, is used as reference. Parameter P 10.03 "I-Component TN" (cf. "Controller Constants" figure.) TN is the time during which the Icomponent causes the same control magnitude change as the P-component.

Fig.: Controller Constants

- 196 -


Appendix

Special Cases (cf. "Controller Constants" figure.) 1. KP = 0 : I-Controller. TN is the reciprocal of integration constant KI, i.e. a big value means a slower controller. KI = 1/TN in %/(mA/s). 2. TN = 0 : P-Controller. The I-Component is reset. 3. KP=TN= 0 : Controller output = elevation 4. Parameter P 05.01 "Volum. Start-Up" Volumetric start-up mode for belt circuits after connection of scale. See Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" and further explanations given at this item. Parameter P 05.02 "Volum. Clearance" Volumetric clearance mode for belt circuits after disconnection of scale. See Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" and further explanations given at this item. Parameter P 10.08 "Bypass" Proportional to setpoint, control magnitude is additively superimposed by a value. Parameter indicates nominal setpoint bypass value in mA. Parameter P 10.09 "Store" Stores integral component or belt load after disconnection of scale. Acts in start-up mode. Value Meaning NO

No storage

YES

Store

YES-A Store only if scale did not fail due to alarm Prerequisites: Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" = UNIVERS, Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst. Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" Determines volumetric mode. There are two possible selections: Qconst: Controller continuous operating. Actual value is the current belt speed multiplied by Qconst. Qconst can be either the value of nominal belt load or the value stored after cut-off (Parameter P 10.09 "Store"). This mode is designed for speed controlled weighfeeders. Yconst: Controller cuts off. Setpoint bypass and constant controller output YR are active. YR is either 0 or the integral controller component stored after cut-off (Parameter P10.03 "I-Component"). This mode is designed, for instance, for belt weighers operating with controlled prefeeders. Parameter P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" 1st-order filter for setpoint branch in (cf. Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord"). Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" 2nd-order filter for setpoint branch. If bypass is used, set the approximate control loop time pattern using Parameters P 10.15 "Adaption 1" and P 10.16 "Adaption 2". If no bypass is used, Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1" can be used as setpoint ramp. Parameter P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison" DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 ©SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt

- 197 -

Appendix

Forming deviation Xd: o

Xd = Set-Act (W-X)

o

Xd = Act-Set (X-W)

Case "Xd = Act-Set (X-W)" makes good sense only with belt weighers controlled for constant belt load. Parameter P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources" Selecting setpoint and actual value: o

I : Setpoint = feed rate corresponding to the setpoint source set by Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint". Actual value = measured feed rate

o

Q : Setpoint = nominal belt load Qo; Actual value = measured belt load

In the second case, setpoint cannot be entered from selected setpoint sources. Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1" Controlled adaption of controller input Value Meaning NO

No adaption

V

Multiplication by V/Vo

1/Q

Multiplication by Qo/Q

Multiplication by Wo/W Adapting the controller to variable loop gains, control behaviour is improved. 1/W

Parameter P 10.16 "Adaption 2" Controlled adaption of controller output Value Meaning NO

No adaption

Multiplication by setpoint (cf. Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1") Control parameter values essential for some operating states: W

Power ON Reset controller. Set Parameter P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" to 0. Qold = Qo. STOP Scale Parameters P 10.11"Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" are still active, controller integral component and belt load are stored. START Scale Set stored controller or belt load value to 0 (Qo) as a function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store" or use value for start-up mode.

- 198 -


Appendix

Stand-By If setpoint falls below stand-by limit for more than 3 s, scale operates in StandBy mode. Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst Cut off controller and initialize. Y corresponds to Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP". Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst Cut off controller. Y corresponds to Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP". Reset or store integral component as a function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store". "Drive" and "Prefeeder" control outputs are switched to OFF, "Feeder START" output remains set to START. System immediately returns to normal mode. Synchronization Upon changes to setpoint bypass and adaption points no synchromization takes place. To prevent bigger feed steps from occurring, change bypass in small steps, or with scale cut off. This equally applies to adaption changes. Operating Intervals with Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" determines the types of volumetric, start-up and clearance modes. Controller parameter selection "Controller Type = STANDARD" has the same effect as parameter setting "Volumetric Type" = Qconst. o

Start-Up: Start command immediately sets "Prefeeder" and "Drive" outputs to START. Controller belt load input is set to nominal belt load Qo or stored value Qa as a function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store". Belt speed is controlled proportional to setpoint. After the start-up period, system automatically switches over to the belt load measurement value, e.g. the feed rate (Gravimetric Mode).

o

Clearance: Stop command immediately shuts prefeeder. Controller continues operating as in start-up mode. Belt load is not the measurement value but value Qa last measured and stored. This ensures smooth change-over. Qa is the value smoothed by the display filter and stored for next start-up period. Start command during clearance triggers new start-up period.

o

Alarm: Alarm messages cut off scale without clearance. Only Qa is stored.

o

Volumetric: Belt speed is controlled proportional to setpoint. On the controller belt load input, constant value Qo (nominal belt load) is available. Volumetric mode does not use any stored values upon start-up and clearance. In contrast to gravimetric mode, you can enter the triple nominal setpoint.

o

Volumetric Synchronous: See above; however, in place of Qo, the last value measured before changeover becomes active.

o

Gravimetric: Feed rate control I = Q * v. Q and v are the current measurement values. Gravimetric mode is given outside volumetric, start-up and clearance modes. Setpoint is limited to nominal setpoint.


- 199 -

Appendix

Operating Intervals with Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst This setting is possible only if Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" is set to "UNIVERS". o

Start-up: Start command immediately switches "Prefeeder" and "Drive" outputs to START. Controller remains cut off. Its YR output is set to 0 or integral component stored as a function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store". External controller drive thus operates proportionally to setpoint. Once start-up is complete, controller automatically connects and gravimetric mode (feed rate control) starts.

o

Clearance: Stop command immediately shuts prefeeder and cuts off controller. The integral component is stored for next start-up period. Setpoint bypass is superimposed by the integral component of controller YR. After start-up, drive automatically cuts off. A start command during clearance triggers new start-up period.

o

Alarm: Alarm messages cut off scale without clearance. Only the controller integral component is stored.

o

Volumetric: Only setpoint bypass is active. Controller integral component is reset and controller cuts off. Any external control drive is this controlled proportionally to setpoint. As maximum setpoint you can enter the triple nominal feed rate of scale.

o

Volumetric Synchronous: See above; however, the controller integral component is not reset.

o

Gravimetric: See Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst

Displaying/storing operating modes Volumetric: "VOL" in upper text line Start-up: "VOL->" in upper text line Clearance: "VOL->" in upper text line Keyboard mode: "OP" in upper text line Gravimetric: No special symbol Volumetric synchronous: VOL-S Power OFF Volumetric, Gravimetric, and Keyboard modes are stored.

- 200 -


Appendix

9.7 Effective Platform Load Effective platform length value is essential for calibration. Determined by the platform construction, it can normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we recommend to check for actual length and enter value into Parameter "Eff. Platf. Length". Single Idler Platform Scale The figure below shows the operating principle of a single idler platform scale.

Vh206212gb.cdr

Fig.: Single Idler Platform Scale The hatched area shows the distribution of load on weighing platform. Platform load weight is applied to load cell via a weighed idler. This can be done via lever system or leaf-spring parallel guidance. With a single idler platform scale, effective platform length is computed using the following formula: L = Lg / 2 L = effective platform length Lg = total platform length as shown in the Single Idler Platform Scale figure. Multi Idler Platform Scale The figure below shows the operating principle of a multi idler platform scale.

Platform

Vh206213gb.cdr

Fig.: Multi Idler Platform Scale With a multi idler platform scale, effective platform length is computed using the following formula: L = (a+b) / 2 + c L = effective platform length a,b,c = length section as shown in the Multi Idler Platform Scale figure Buckled Platform A buckled platform is of two-sectional design. In its centre the load is applied to the load cell.


- 201 -

Appendix

For load application, weighed idlers can be replaced by the sectional weighing table. The figure below shows the operating principle of a multi idler platform scale.

Mount Vh206215_gb.cdr

Fig.: Buckled Platform With a buckled platform scale, effective platform length is computed using the following formula: L = Lg / 2 L = effective platform length Lg = total platform length as shown in the Buckled Platform figure

- 202 -


Appendix

9.8 Belt Load Control

Fig.: Belt Load Control


- 203 -

Appendix

9.9 Hopper Control

Fig.: Hopper Control

- 204 -


Appendix

9.10 Interlocking P23.01...P23.19

Explanations: All signal levels can be inverted by parameter setting. The drawing shows the default values. o

LOW = Closed contact in position of rest, i.e. voltage is available. If signal is active, contact is open (N/C contact).

o

HIGH = Open contact in position of rest, i.e. no voltage is available. If signal is active, contact is closed (N/O contact).


- 205 -

Appendix

E = Event message DI = Digital input DO = Digital output Legende Parameter Alarm

Signal Name All event messages of the ALARM class

DI E 1

P 23.06

DI Error Electricity 1

DI E 2

P 23.07

DI Error Electricity 2

DI E 3

P 23.08

I Error Electricity 3

DI EE 1

P 12.03

DI Ext. Event 1

DI EE 2

P 12.05

DI Ext. Event 2

DI EE 3

P 12.18

DI Ext. Event 3

DI EE 4

P 12 20

DI Ext. Event 4

DI M 1

P 23.01


DI M 2

P 23.02


DI M 3

P 23.03


DI M 4

P 23.04


DI M 5

P 23.05


DO E

P 23.11

DO Error Electricity

DO M

P 23.09

DO Error Mechanics

DO MT 1 P 23.13

DO Error Mechatr 1

DO MT 2 P 23.14

DO Error Mechatr 2

DO R

P 23.16

DO Ready

DO RS

P 23.18

DO Ready vor Start

IL-2

P 23.10

Error Mechanics

IL-3

P 23.12

Error Electricity

IL-4

P 23.15

Error Mechatronics

IL-5

P 23.17

Not Ready

IL-6

P 23.19

Not Ready for Start

Int. Alarm

Internal alarms from event messages CA-01, CA-02, WM-01. WM02, WM-03, WM-04

NO S

No service mode: No keyboard mode, no local mode, no simulation mode

Release P 03.06

Release

SC-5

P 12.02

Event Ext. Event 1

SC-6

P 12.04

Event Ext. Event2

SC-11

P 12.17

Event Ext. Event 3

SC-12

P 12.19

Event Ext. Event 4

Note: With signals DI E1 - DI E2 and DI M1 - DI M5, you can also select LS (Logical Signal) for source. This enables digital outputs to be used as well.

- 206 -


Appendix

9.11 Interlocking P23.20...P23.27

Fig. Sample Interlock Circuitry with AND-Gate 1 The above sample shows how the AND gates are used. The external fault (P12.03) should become active only in turned-on state of scale (P12.12). P 23.20 : Input LS-1 AND gate 1 : DO, VSE1, DO1, HIGH (Waage Ein, P13.02) P 23.21 : Input LS-2 AND gate 1 : DI, VSE1, DI1, HIGH (DI Ext.Ereignis 1, P12.03) In turned-on state of scale, error message IL07 (P23.22) is output after approx. 0.33 s as soon as the External Event contact opens. At the same time, digital output P 23.26 "DO ÷ AND Gate 1" is set. Note: Input/output signal levels are polled directly. This means the HIGH/LOW level preselection is irrelevant for inputs.


- 207 -

Appendix

9.12 Details: Time Gate P22.28...P22.37 Logical signals

Bit = 1

Bit = 0

Level: HIGH

1

0

Level: LOW

0

1

Fig.: Time Gate 1

Fig.: Time Gate Input/Output

- 208 -


Appendix

Note: The time gate output cycle always consists of delay time plus pulse time. Input is not reevaluated before this cycle has elapsed. Use: (i) Short signals --> extend for fixed time (ii) Long signals --> generate cycle (pulse/pause) Example: Simple fill control using single contact (e.g. MAX). If MAX contact is open, filling interrupts for a defined time. When this time has elapsed, MAX contact is reevaluated, and cycle restarts. Parameter "Active in OFF" lets you determine whether fill control operates in ON state only or also in OFF state.


- 209 -

Appendix

9.13 On-stream Calibration System

- 210 -


"Abort Check" function 47 "B Controller Optim." Calibrating Function 44 "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function 42 "Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function 41 "CB Weight Check" Calibrating Function 43 "Correct" function 46 "CW Weight Check" 29 "LB Pulses/Belt" 30 "Set Time" 32 "START / STOP Simulation" 32 "Start Range Corr." 46 "Start Tare Corr." function 45 "TB Tare" Calibrating Function 42 "TW Tare" 28 >0< Zero Set 24 Abort Batch 40 Acknowledge Event Messages 18 Alignment 48 Appendix 187 Basic Functions 16 Batching 10, 193 Batching Functions 39 Belt Influence Compensation BIC 9, 52 Belt Load Control 203 Belt Run Monitoring 51 Belt Speed Check 54 Belt Weigher with Constant Load 185 Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder 8 Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder 183 Belt Weighers With Constant Load 8 Bin Weigher 41 Calibrating Functions 27 Check Using Check Weight 53 Check Using Material 55 Checks 53 Commissioning 48 Control 7, 11, 50 Control Unit 11 Controller Calibration 51 Definitions 5 Deselect Batch 41 Details Time Gate P22.28...P22.37 208 Display Events 25 Display Field 13 Effective Platform Load 201 Electrical Wiring 49 Enter Parameters 35 Event Messages 174 Feed Rate Control 195 Function Distributor 15 Function Keys 14 Functional Check 53 General Information 57 Hopper Control 204 Input Important Parameters 49 Interlocking P23.01...P23.19 205 Interlocking P23.20...P23.27 207 LED 12 Linearization 187

Load Default Parameters 36 Maintenance 49 Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP 52 Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP 9 Measuring Principle 5 Mechanical Prerequisites 48 Message Field 14 On Manual 1 On-stream Calibration System 45, 210 Operating Functions 18 Operating Modes 7 Out-of-Round Error 48 Overview 4 Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules 78 Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions 81 Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources 85 Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data 88 Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling 89 Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring 90 Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters 95 Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values 96 Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data 98 Parameter Group 10 - Controller 99 Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs 103 Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs 106 Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs 110 Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode 113 Parameter Group 15 - Process Control 116 Parameter Group 16 - VAP 117 Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring 117 Parameter Group 18 - Printer 120 Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe 121 Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus 123 Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs 131 Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller 133 Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking 136 Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher 140 Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller 145 Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge 149 Parameter Group 27 - Check System 153 Parameter Group 28 - Moisture 165 Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time 167 Parameter Group 30 - Linearization 169 Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate 170 Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip 172 Parameter List 61 Parameters 57 Print Batch 40 Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings) 25 Print Parameter Shortlist 37 Print Parameters 36 Programming Functions 34 Read Parameters 34 Relative Setpoint 17 Reset Totalizing Counters 17 Safety Instructions 2 Select Batch 39 Select/Stop Prefeeder 19 Sensor Slip 188 Service Values 19 Setpoint and Start Sources 190 Setpoint Input 16 Setting external feed rate controller 50 Setting internal controller 50 Source Selection 189 START / STOP Keyboard Mode 23 START/STOP Feeder 16

Appendix Status Field 12 Status Report 38 Test Display 19 Test Plug 56 To start: 45 Trend 26 Typical Applications 182 Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric Modes 23 Weighfeeder 7, 182 What is DISOCONT? 4


-3-

Measuring and Process Systems

The

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH D-64273 Darmstadt Phone: +49 (0) 6151-32 10 28 Fax: +49 (0) 6151-32 11 72 E-Mail: [email protected] www.schenck-process.net

Group

DISOCONT® System Manual

BV-H2085GB




J +49 172 6 501700


© by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008 Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany J +49 61 51-15 31 0 www.schenckprocess.com All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.


CONTENTS On Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Use As Orginally Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 General Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Residual Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Safety-Minded Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Safety Hints For The User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Conversion And Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Standalone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Group Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Mixed Equipment with MULTICONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Mounting Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Local Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Local / Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Basic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Cable Fixation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DISOCONT Components Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fieldbox VFG 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cabinet Housing VEG 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 System Unit VSE 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Setting Local Bus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Memory Module VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 I/O Unit VEA 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Setting Local Bus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Control Unit VLB 20105 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Control Unit VLB 20120 (Fieldbox Variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Setting Local Bus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Fieldbus Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

DISOCONT System Manual © Schenck Process

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

I1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Mounting Fieldbus Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Local Control Unit VLG 20105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 For Position-controlled Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Local Control Unit VLG 20110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Local Control Unit VLG 20120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Service Bus and Remote Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Sealing of Control Boxes (Protection Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Junction Box VAK 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Laptop Connecting Set (PC with Easyserve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Connecting Set For Portable VLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Use in the Hazardous Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Gas-Ex Area Zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Gas-Ex Area Zone 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Dust-Ex Area Zone 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Dust-Ex Area Zone 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fieldbus Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Attachment To Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

I2

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

System Manual DISOCONT © Schenck Process

On Manual

On Manual This system manual describes the hardware components of the DISOCONT system. The functionality of the feeders and feeder controllers is described in feeder operating manuals.

Safety Instructions Use As Orginally Intended The DISOCONT with connected scales, is exclusively designed for weighing applications and directly relating control tasks. Any use other than orginally intended is considered inappropriate.

General Risks Designed to the latest state of the art, DISOCONT is safe in operation. The machine may cause residual risks if improperly installed, commissioned and operated by unqualified workers. Every person involved with installation, commissioning, maintenance or repair is required to have read the manual, particularly the safety instructions.

Residual Risks The DISOCONT capabilities and equipment cover the control technology only in part. Safety aspects of control technology have to be planned and realized in the responsibilities of the plant designer, outfitter and user such that residual risks are minimized. Any existing regulation has to be observed. Residual risks in conjunction with control technology have to be indicated. After settings and operation have been established, make sure that connected control systems remain in a safe state until the DISOCONT switching behaviour has been checked. The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.

Safety-Minded Working Changes of password-protected DISOCONT settings as well as mounting and service work may be performed only by skilled and authorized persons.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

1

Safety Instructions Before performing work on electrical equipment, ensure that the assemblies have been de-energized and protected from inadvertent power-up. Never acknowledge error messages before the cause has been remedied and all hazards are excluded.

Safety Hints For The User Superiors of operating and service personnel are required to know the safety instructions as well as the safety relevant items of operation and commissioning. They have to ascertain that the operating personnel has read and understood all safety instructions. Before commissioning this system, check to see that the DISOCONT does not cause additional risks in conjunction with other machines or plant sections. If need be, the user shall add cross-instructions, make them available to his operators and have their receipt confirmed. The user shall clearly determine the lines of responsibility (password privileges) concerning the DISOCONT operation.

Conversion And Modification The DISOCONT and connected scale must not be modified neither in construction nor safety technology with out our prior written consent. We do not assume any liability whatsoever for damages resulting from unauthorized modifications. Repair or soldering work to the boards and the exchange of components must not be performed. When replacing complete assemblies, always use the original Schenck Process parts.

2

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Introduction

Introduction Designed as modular electronics system for all weighing and feeding tasks, DISOCONT is the system of choice whenever material flows are to be measured and controlled in industrial processes. The system performs the following functions: n Measurement of transducer signals n Control of feeder motors and auxiliaries (e.g. scrapers) n Communication with other units, PCs and plant controls via different fieldbus systems n Operation via operator panel, PC/plant control, or in manual mode n Event report n Data logging n Report generation The modular DISOCONT system is very flexible and offers a host of advantages. It can be used in conjunction with – volumetric feeders – gravimetric feeders – continuous feeders – discontinuous feeders DISOCONT can be used on loss-in-weight feeders, standard weighfeeders, solids flow meters, Coriolis measuring systems, belt weighers and batching systems. This system offers all electronic and mechanical features required by state-of-the-art plants: n n n n n n n n

High weighing accuracy EMC protection RFI suppression Noise immunity Compliance with CE requirements Compliance with EN 600068 Suitability for use in hazardous areas (electronics in safe area) Permanent storage of all operating parameters on memory card n Operation from 24V DC up to 230V AC. DISOCONT further excels through easy handling, a feature which is gaining ever increasing importance in modern plant control concepts: n Pluggable modules exchangeable with no need for recalibration n Intuitive graphical user interface for operation and service n Fault tolerance n Input/output channels configurable via software


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

3

Introduction n Manual operation (bypass) possible Reduced cabling keeps system costs down. The special design offers a host of advantages: n Exhaustive diagnostics, locally or remote via modem n Minimal service and spare parts requirements (small number of hardware components, functionality provided by software ) n Simple replacement of faulty electronic components; current parameters stored on memory card n Defective modules exchangeable without recalibration. The DISOCONT hardware and software has been re-designed with the aim to keep the overall system costs down. Savings begin with the installation: no external cabinet necessary, all components can be attached to the feeder itself. The use of a fieldbus system considerably reduces cabling. Many different configurations are possible (e.g. for installation in control cubicle) with the use of two basic modules. TheEasyServe diagnostic and service software with its intuitive interface helps to reduce maintenance costs.

4

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Configurations

Configurations The DISOCONT electronics consists of system unit VSE and several optional units that can be combined to form a system tailored to your application. The optional units include additional I/O unit VEA, control unit VLB, several fieldbus modules and two different local control units VLG. The system unit VSE performs all measuring and control tasks as a function of scale software loaded. The VSE unit can be equipped with a communication module for a standard fieldbus system. A local fieldbus integrated into DISOCONT connects the other DISOCONT units and local bus stations. As extension module, input/output unit VEA is available and connected to the VSE via the local bus. This unit is required if controlled material infeed into feeder is desired or if the control unit is mounted in a central control panel. The most cost effective system configuration is local mounting with integrated motor drive. This solution offers a compact system with minimum cabling overhead and low overall costs. In addition, the risk of EMC and RFI issues is considerably reduced since no cable is required between motor and frequency controller. Unfortunately, this variant is not suitable for all configurations. It depends on the availability of integrated drives and the necessity of explosion protection. In any event, DISOCONT offers a host of equipment and installation variants.

Options You can use the DISOCONT as a standalone unit for a single feeder or a group of feeders, combine multiple DISOCONT units to form one system and even combine various systems (e.g. DISOCONT with MULTICONT MASTER). Combination of various systems via fieldbus and process management system is always possible. There are two different options to control your DISOCONT: n Use a VSE with fieldbus plug-in card and operate DISOCONT via process management system n Use a VSE together with an control unit VLB for parameter input, process control and visualization. System set-up is usually done using a PC equipped with EasyServe program. For connection to PC, the built-in RS232 interface is used. When DISOCONT is controlled via central plant control system, system unit VSE must be equipped with a fieldbus plug-in card. In all configurations, you can expand the system with a local control unit VLG for bypassing DISOCONT. This unit enables manual control (e.g. for service and maintenance). There are two VLG variants: one with manual control for variable speed drive (VLG 20100); a second, for systems with up to four manually controlled drives (VLG 20110).


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

5

Configurations Below you will find a short description of the different application-oriented variants.

Standalone Mode DISOCONT controls a single feeder. For control, you can use the above mentioned options, i.e. process management system (PLC), plant control via fieldbus, operator panel and PC for parameter input.

Fig. 1:

Group Mode

Fig. 2:

DISOCONT is so flexible that multiple feeders equipped with DISOCONT can be combined to form a bigger system. You are free to choose any of the commercial fieldbus systems described below. The DISOCONT units are connected to fieldbus using a single unit with a plug-in card, and internal communication takes place via local bus. The present configuration enables the system to operate in any mode.

6

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Configurations

Mixed Equipment with MULTICONT

Fig. 3:

Similar to group mode, you can use DISOCONT in an environment where other Schenck MULTICONT systems are available. In this case, system unit VSE must be equipped with a fieldbus module of the MULTICONT SE bus type.

Network Connections Communication with external systems, (e g. process management), is performed using plug-in fieldbus cards for different industrial networks. These cards are inserted into system unit VSE that handles the communication with sub-units (e.g. I/O unit VEA) via an internal network, the built-in local bus. Fieldbus cards for the most frequently used fieldbus systems are available: n SE-Bus, Modbus, J-Bus, 3964R n CAN-Bus (DeviceNet Protocol) n ETHERNET TCP/MODBUS n PROFIBUS-DP When using DISOCONT in conjunction with Schenck MULTICONT, select the SE-Bus card. Even though there are many differences among fieldbus systems, every bus system is a network connecting different devices. We have to consider cable types, topology and termination, if required. Most networks including the built-in local bus, use a simple line topology (Fig. 4) designed in daisy-chain technique. Another variant is the star topology (right diagram in Fig. 4). The individual extension modules, bus systems and standards are detailed below. The built-in local bus uses a line topology with drop lines enabling further branching using star topology. Please observe the following restrictions: n The maximum length of drop lines including branches is 6m. n Maximum number of drop lines is 12. n Branching is allowed with drop lines only.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

7

Configurations n The maximum distance between two points in the bus is 500m (Fig. 5).

Fig. 4: Line, ring and star topology for networks

Another important point is the termination at each end of a network. ”End” refers to the first and the last physical device on the bus. This has nothing to do with the addresses set on device. For local bus, jumper W500 is used for termination. For details, please see individual units’ local bus descriptions. For residual bus systems (e.g. SE-Bus or PROFIBUS), please read the “Plug-in Cards” item.

First

Last

Dev x

Dev x

Drop line with branching

Dev x

Drop line

Dev x Dev x

Dev x

Dev x Fig. 5: Structure of the local bus

With every bus system, the “controller” for DISOCONT system unit VSE can be located anywhere in the system. There is no need to have it at an end of the network. DEVICENET expects the bus interface module to be supplied via the bus cable. With the local bus, supply is via the VEA or VLB 20120 unit bus cable. If none of these units is connected to bus, module has to be supplied from the outside (24VDC, 40mA).

8

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Configurations In the DISOCONT system, the wires for incoming and outgoing bus lines are clipped onto the same terminal, so that the bus is uninterrupted also if the bus connector is withdrawn. In variable configurations where stations are to be removed from bus during operation, it is useful to locate the terminal resistors on an external connector and not on the p.c. board. Since the Profibus cable is connected via the supply line, the terminal resistor no longer operates properly if the connector is withdrawn. Therefore, install a permanently available station on cable end, for instance, a power unit. If two wires on one terminal are not desired, provide an external terminal box for the continuous bus line and guide a spur line from terminal box to feeder. For admissible spur line length, see specification of the particular bus.

Mounting Configurations There are various DISOCONT mounting configurations.

Local Mounting This configuration consists of system unit VSE, additional input/output unit VEA for input flow control, and a prefeeder. Both units are mounted on feeder in a small glass fiber reinforced housing protected to IP65. Depending on the type of feeder, the DISOCONT electronics can be integrated into the feeder mechanics. An operator unit mounted in fieldbox VLB can be used. Local mounting of DISOCONT offers the highest advantage with respect to installation expense.

Local / Cabinet Mounting System unit VSE is mounted on feeder; I/O unit VEA, in a cabinet clip-mounted on DIN rails in cabinet maximum 500m away from feeder. An operator unit VLB can be used, normally mounted at the cabinet door. This configuration, too, enables the system unit to be arranged flexibly, e.g. in glass fiber reinforced housing protected to IP65 or inside the support structure . A special housing for the cabinet mounted VEA and the VLB units ensures optimum handling control and wiring inside the cabinet.

Cabinet Mounting All components are mounted inside a cabinet. VSE, if necessary, and VEA are either rail- or wall-mounted. Both housing variants are designed to ease handling inside the cabinet. A panel-mounted operator unit VLB can be used as well. The maximum cable distance from cabinet to feeder is 500m.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

9

Configurations

Wiring Considerations Thanks to the small number of devices, DISOCONT is rather simple to realize. Nevertheless, thoroughly check to see which cables are required and whether number and size of the cables you want to use fit into the available cable glands (see table at item “Accessories/Recommended Cables”). When checking the technical details of the different units, you will find for each output (and input) the corresponding connector type indicated (e.g. Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm spacing.) The maximum wire cross section is indicated for every type. For Phoenix MSTB (5mm contact spacing), the maximum wire cross section is 2.5mm2; for MSTB (3.5mm spacing), 1.5mm2.

Basic Diagrams Below, the basic diagrams for two different configurations are shown. Figure 6 shows a small system configuration; figure 7, a more complex system.

Fig. 6: Small stand-alone system

10

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Configurations

Cable Fixation Fig. 8 depicts proper cable fixation. Under each cable duct you see several slots . When inserting cable clamps into these slots, clamps press cable shield against housing and thus ensure proper grounding. The M-shaped slots can also be used for pull relief of cable binders.

Fig. 7: Cable fixation


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

11

Configurations

DISOCONT Components Overview

Fig. 8:

12

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Fieldbox VFG 20100

Fieldbox VFG 20100 This glass fiber reinforced housing is used for field mounting of the DISOCONT units.

Fig. 9: Fieldbox

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced, polyester

Dimensions

260 x 160 x 90mm

Weight fully equipped /empty

3,1/2

Protection to IEC60 529

IP65, NEMA 4 type

240

110

6,5

Fig.: 10 Outlets and mounting holes

When using the fieldbox, the cable diameter is limited through the cable gland outlets. Watch the cable recommendations given in chapter “Accessories”.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

13

Fieldbox VFG 20100 Ordering Data Part no.

Ordering no.

VFG 20100

F217902.02

Retrofitting set VFG 20100-E22* w/o connector

V016872.B01

Retrofitting set VFG 20100-E22* with connector

V016872.B02

*

14

for use in potentially explosive atmospheres Observe “Use In Potentially Explosive Atmospheres” item.

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Cabinet Housing VEG 20100

Cabinet Housing VEG 20100 The stainless steel housings for system unit VSE and input/output unit VEA housing are used when the main DISOCONT units are mounted in a cabinet. Normally clipped to DIN top hat rails, the housing can also be screwed on.

Fig. 11: Cabinet housing Housing

Clipped to DIN rails or wall-mounted

Dimensions

250 x 146 x 98mm

Weight fully equipped / empty

2.4 / 1.3


IP20

Ordering Data Part no.

Ordering no.

VEG 20100

F217903.01


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

15

Cabinet Housing VEG 20100

45

TS35

Fig. 12: Cabinet housing with mounting holes

16

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


System Unit VSE 20100

System Unit VSE 20100 Designed to perform all measurement and control functions, the DISOCONT system unit can be expanded by a fieldbus adapter card. All parameters (configuration etc.) are stored on the VSM memory card. On power failure the dynamic values will be saved as well. The system unit must be mounted in a VFG or VEG housing in order to ensure that live parts are out of touch. For use as feeder control unit, a VSM memory card is required. For use as I/O system with VIO software, no memory card is necessary.

Fig. 13:

Setting Local Bus Address The circuit board is equipped with two rotary switches for selecting one of the 64 local bus addresses. Multiply setting of S2 switch by 10 (x10 indicated on cover plate), add setting of S1 switch (x1 indicated on cover plate), and calculate selected address. The first VSE on a DISOCONT local bus has address 01, the second 02 ,etc. third party units or extensions must have addresses over 30. The terminating resistor for the local bus is enabled via W500: W500: 1-2 terminated W500: 2-3 not terminated If local bus is not connected, W500 remains in position 2-3. The first and last device on local bus must have a bus termination. Set jumper W500 to 1-2 (default). The local bus must be supplied with energy. If a VEA 20100 or VLB 20120 is connected, this unit powers the bus via the bus terminals with no need for additional cabling. If only VSE units or a VLB 20105 is connected to local bus, the latter must be supplied from the outside. To do so, the voltage source on VSE connector X7 can be used, for instance. Scale Software The VSE 20100 hardware consists of neutral standard components programmed for the particular scale type by software. The software can be updated immediately after delivery using the EasyServe service software. The download procedure is detailed in the EasyServe documentation. During download, set jumper W100 to position 1-2. For normal operation, maintain jumper position 2-3.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

17


General Specifications Power supply DC

24V... 300V ±15%

Power supply AC

110V....230V /-20%, +10%, 47...63 Hz

Phoenix MSTB

5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5 mm2

Fuse

4 ATr

Recommended user fuse

16A, device fuses, type C to DIN 60898

Consumption

20W

Operating temperature (Ambient temperature outside of housing)

-25 °C ... 50 °C

Storage temperature

-25 °C ... 60 °C

Protection to IEC 60529

IP 00

Auxiliary voltage output

24VDC, 250mA (for VLG)

Load Cell Input Load cell field voltage

+/- 6V AC

Load cell sensitivity

1 ... 3 mV/V (bipolar with) MULTICOR software

Load cell connection

6-wire

Load cell monitoring interval

100ms

Load cell number

4 (350Ω)

Max. cable length

500m

Resolution

24bit

Temperature drift

<10ppm/°C

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5 mm2

Depending on load cell type and manufacturer, a different wiring scheme is used. See table below for details or contact Schenck Process. Table 2: Load cell connection

DISOCONT

Schenck RT 2.8mV/V

Schenck PWS 2mV/V

VBB and HBM Z6 2mV/V

black

black

OUT 1 REF 1

Schenck SF4/SB4 2mV/V

black

Tedea 1250

Terminal in terminal box DKK

black

82

brown

82.1

black blue

grey

IN 1

red

red

red

red

white

28

IN 2

white

white

white

white

red

27

orange

green

blue

81.1

green

81

REF 2 OUT 2

blue

green green

blue

Binary Input (NAMUR)

18

No of inputs, NAMUR (DIN 19234)

2

Monitoring

Short-circuit, broken cable

Frequency/Tachometer

0.03Hz ... 2.9 kHz

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm spacing, max. 1.5mm2

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


System Unit VSE 20100 Binary Input No. of inputs

2

Isolation

Optocouplers

Max. input voltage

20....30V 4-7mA

Input resistance

5k

Connector


Binary Output No. of outputs

4 relays

Isolation

Group of 3 safety isolated against 1; inside group, parallel use of 24V and 230V prohibited.

Function

Contact closes

Voltage

24V ... 250V =/~; to be supplied externally

Current

Max. 8A, resistive load Max. 1A, inductive load with spark suppressor

Switching power

DC: 50 ... 250 W depending on voltage, 240 W at 30V DC AC: 2000 VA max.

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, 5mm spacing, max. 2.5mm2

Analog Output No. of outputs

1

Output range

0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V)

Isolation

Optocouplers

Max. load

500 ohms

Resolution

12 bits

Refresh rate

100ms

Connector


Serial Port RS232 Isolation

No

Handshake

RTS, CTS

Baud rate, depending on software

300Bd ... 115kBd

Connector

D-Sub HD20

Local Bus For details on local bus, see chapter “Network Connections” Isolation

Optocouplers

Baud rate, software selected

125kBit/s

Cable

3x2x0.23 screened in pairs, 1)

Power load

Max. 40mA

Display

LED for Communication OK; for function, see table below.

Connector


1) DeviceNet thin cable recommended


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

19

System Unit VSE 20100 Control unit VLB connected and communication with VLB OK

No control unit VLB connected or communication with VLB faulty

Communicatio n OK

Permanently lit

Flashing

Communicatio n faulty

Lit but goes out for a very short time

Off

Permanently lit

Off

LED Local Bus OK Function

Hardware module (VSE or VEA) activated

No hardware module (VSE or VEA) activated

Status does not occur before data transmission has been built up (approx. 1 min. after power-up or changes to Local Bus). Input DI4 used for analog signals Number of inputs

1

Input range

0-10 V, with external resistance 0(4)-20 mA; see comments below

Input resistance

990 ohms

Potential separation

No

Resolution

10 bits

Read-in rate

100 ms

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, contact spacing 3.5, max. 1.5mm2

Input equivalent circuit diagram

Fig. 14:

Input is designed for NAMUR signals measurement. Measured is measuring voltage U. When connecting common signal sources, observe the following specifications: 1. If a voltage source U in accordance with connecting variant 1 is used to preset a voltage, make sure the latter does not exceed 10V. The source must be capable of taking the current delivered from internal supply. When designing supply cable, pay attention to resistance R. 2. Connecting variant 2 is not possible.

20

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



3. With connecting variant 3, current iv = 0-20 mA translates into internal measurement value 6.2 - 18 mA. This variant is given, e.g. if a DISOCONT analog output is used for presetting. 4. Resulting measuring voltage Um 0 - 9V is always resolved into 922 increments. With connecting variant 4, the maximum resolution of preset value 0-20 mA is reduced to 544 increments. 5. To adapt input to particular connecting variant, use the DISOCONT “Range” and “Evaluation” parameters.

To ensure protection from electrical shocks, never use system unit VSE without VFG or VEG housing. The internal cooling plate is a live part.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

21


Fig. 15: Wiring Diagram VSE 20100

22

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Memory Module VSM

Memory Module VSM Installed in DISOCONT system unit VSE, the memory module stores all system-specific settings and operating values. In the event of power failure, dynamic values will be saved as well. If a defective VSE system unit is to be repaired or replaced, the VSM module can be plugged into a replacement unit for parameter transfer. Note:

When plugging on module, ensure proper orientation (pin strip towards the VSE outside) and vertical introduction, for contacts to plug correctly.

Fig. 16: VSM 20100

No of erase/write cycles

>1,000,000

Data retention

>100 years

Variants Designation VSM 20110 for DISOCONT L, software VEC20150 VSM 20100 for measuring systems VSM 20101 for feeding systems VSM 20102 for extended systems No VSM required for VSE with software VIO


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

23

Memory Module VSM


24

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


I/O Unit VEA 20100

I/O Unit VEA 20100 Designed as additional input/output unit, VEA must be employed if the control panel version of control unit VLB (type 20100) is used. The VEA unit must be mounted in a VFG or VEG housing in order to ensure that live parts are out of touch.

Fig. 17:

Setting Local Bus Address The circuit board has two rotary switches for selecting one of the 64 local bus addresses. Multiply setting of S2 switch by 10 (x10 indicated on cover plate) and add setting of S1 switch (x1 indicated on cover plate) to calculate selected address. The first VEA on a DISOCONT local bus has address 11; the second, 12 etc. Jumper W500 terminates local bus (1-2 = terminated). Default = 2-3. VLP103V W100

Service

1 9 0 1

S2

8 7

x10

2 3

6 5 4 9 0 1

S1

8 7

x1

2 3

6 5 4

X8

W500 1

X4

Local bus

Fig. 18: Address switch, jumpers and bus connectors

Reserved for servicing, jumper W100 must be set to 2-3 (default) for normal operation.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

25

I/O Unit VEA 20100 General Specifications Power supply DC

24V...300V ±15%

Power supply AC

110...230V/ -20%, +10%, 47...63 Hz

Phoenix MSTB

5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5mm2

Fuse

4ATr

Recommended user fuse

16A, device fuses, type C to EN 60898

Power consumption

20W

Operating temperature -25 °C ... 50 °C (Ambient temperature outside of housing) Storage temperature

-25 °C ... 60 °C

Protection to IEC60529

IP00

Binary Input No. of inputs

1+3

Isolation

Optocouplers

Input voltage

20...30V 4..7mA

Input resistance

5k

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5mm2

Binary Output No. of outputs Isolation Function

5 relays Group of 4, 1 completely isolated Contact closes

Contact voltage

24V ... 250V =/~; to be supplied externally

Contact current

Max. 8A, resistive load Max. 1A, inductive load with spark suppressor

Switching power

DC: 50 ... 250 W depending on voltage 240 W at 30V DC AC: 2000 VA max.

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, 5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5mm2

Analog Input

26

No. of inputs

1

Current input

0/4mA ... 20mA / 50 ohms

Voltage input

0 ... 10V / 100 kilohms

Isolation

galv. isolated

Resolution

12 bits

Time constant

100ms

Filter

Suppression of 50/60Hz

Connector


BV-H2085 GB, 0825


I/O Unit VEA 20100 Analog Output No. of outputs

1

Output span

0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V) 0/4mA software depending

Isolation

Optocouplers

Max. load

500 ohms

Resolution

12 bits

Refresh rate

100ms

Connector

Phoenix MSTB 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5mm2

Serial Port RS232 (Printer) Isolation

No

Handshake

Software (Xon/Xoff)

Baud rate, software depending

300Bd ... 115kBd

Connector

D-Sub HD20

Local Bus Isolation

Optocouplers

Baud rate, software depending

125kBit/s

Cable

3x2x0.23 screened by pair, 1)

Max distance between any two points

500m

Max length of drop line

6m

Branching

On drop lines only

Termination

at each end of bus

Bus supply

24V DC, 250mA for supply of other bus stations

Natural current load

Max. 40mA

Display

LED for Communication OK

Connector


1) DeviceNet thin cable recommended Pulse Generator Isolation

Optocouplers

Frequency range, software depending

< 20 Hz for totalizing counter

Puls width, software depending

10 ms ... 10 s, in 5 ms steps

Output

Open collector, max. 24VDC

Output current

Max. 50mA

Connector



Ordering no.

VEA 20100

F217904.02


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

27

I/O Unit VEA 20100 To ensure protection from electrical shocks, never use system unit VEA without VFG or VEG housing. The interior cooling plate is a live part.

28

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


I/O Unit VEA 20100

Fig. 19: Wiring diagram VEA 20100


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

29

Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101

Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101 The VEA 20101 is plugged into the main VSE (local bus address 01) providing further inputs and outputs. If a VEA 20101 has been mounted, no further field bus card can be mounted. The mounting of the VEA 20101 card into the VSE 20100 assembly is described in Section Field Bus Interfaces, Mounting of the Field Bus Card. Replace the VSE 20100 cover plate by the cover plate supplied with the VEA 10101. For retrofitting it is recommended to fix a label for the software similar to that on the old cover plate. The funcions of the optional card are only available if they are supported by the scale software.

Fig. 20:

Position of connectors and jumpers on the VEA 20101 Technical Data General Data

30

Supply voltage

internal from VSE 20100

Operating temperature (ambient temperature outside the case)

-25 °C ... 50 °C

Storage temperature

-25 °C ... 60 °C

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101 Binary inputs Number of inputs

3 (DI5, DI6, DI7)


optocoupler

Input voltage

20 ... 30 V, 2 ... 7 mA

Input resistance

5 kOhm

Connector

Phoenix MSTB 3,5; max. 1,5mm2

Relay binary outputs Number of outputs

2 (DO5, DO6)


Relay

Function

contact closes

Contact load capacity DC

max. 2A, resistive load at 40 VDC max. 0.4 A resistive load at 230 VDC inductive load only with spark extinction

Contact load capacity AC

max. 250VRelay binary outputsAC; max. 62 VA inductive load only with spark extinction

Connector


Open Collector Binary Outputs Number of outputs

1 (DO7)


optocoupler

Voltage

max. 36 VDC, to be provided externally

Current

max. 50 mA

Connector


Analog input Number

1

Input current or input voltage

0/4 ... 20 mA, Ri = 200 Ohm 0 ... 10 VDC; Ri = 25 kOhm


optocoupler

Resolution

16 Bit

Input filter

5 ms

Updating rate

100 ms

Connector


Number

1

Ausgangsstrom

0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V)


optocoupler

Analog output


Maximale Last

500 Ohm

Resolution

12 Bit

Updating rate

100 ms

Connector


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

31

Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101 Isolation capacity of the potential separation The connectors have been combined to form the following three groups: Group

Connector

1

Analog output

2

Digital inputs Analog inputs

3

Relay outputs ulse output

Each group is separated from the other and from VSE 20100 by a basic isolation (test voltage 1 kV, no safe isolation). The isolation of the different potential islands within a group has been dimensioned for a differential voltage of 60 V. The serial interface is not isolated. When used for permanent process control or in case the host is not isolated against PE, an external isolation of the serial link is required. Setting of jumpers The position of the jumpers is only of interest if the serial interface is used. Not every scale software uses the serial interface. Selecting the type of serial interface Jumper

RS 232

RS 485

W590

1-2

2-3

W591

1-2

2-3

W592

1-2

2-3

Bus termination Jumper

No bus termination

Bus termination 120 Ohm

W540

1-2

2-3

W550

1-2

2-3

Ordering data

32

Designation

Order number

VEA 20101

V038841.B01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Fig.: 21


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

33



34

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version)

Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) Control unit VLB 20100 is used for direct operation of DISOCONT instead of, or in addition to, the use of a plant control system. The LC displays visualizes all measurement and control data. When using VLB 20100, a VEA unit must be present. VLB and VEA are interconnected using cable VSC 20100. This variant can be mounted in control panel or cabinet door. The distance between VEA and control unit must not exceed 2m.

Fig. 22: Operator panel for control panel mounting

Setting Contrast To adjust contrast, press decimal point and UP/DOWN arrow keys at the same time. The optimum setting depends on temperature.

Screen Saver Appoximately 15 min. after last operation, background lighting goes out and comes on again upon next key operation. Simultaneous operation of decimal point and RIGHT/LEFT arrows lets you change over between permanent lighting and screen saver.

Setting Local Bus Address The address is set by software. A VLB unit in a DISOCONT system always has address 21. The first and last physical unit on Local Bus must be equipped with bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2. Default is 2-3. Jumper W100 is reserved for servicing and must be in position 2-3 in normal mode.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

35


Fig. 23: Jumpers and bus connectors Dimensions

240 x 120 x 55

Mounting recess

231 x 111 -0...+0.5

Keyboard

Flexible membranes

Weight

0.8kg

Operating temperature

0 °C ... 50 °C

Storage temperature (Ambient temperature outside of housing)

-20 °C ... 60 °C


Front: IP54, NEMA 2 type Rear wall: IP20

Consumption

3W

Ordering Data

36

Part no.

Ordering no.

VLB 20100

F217906.01

VSC 20100

F217914.01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Fig. 24:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

37


Fig.25: Wiring diagram VLB 20100

38

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Control Unit VLB 20105 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) The control unit is used to control DISOCONT in place of or in addition to plant control. The LC display shows all data relevant for measurement and control. Equipped with own power supply unit, the present variant can be mounted in control panel or cubicle door.

Fig.26: Control unit for control panel mounting

Setting Contrast Set contrast by simultaneous operation of decimal point and UP/DOWN arrows. The optimal setting depends on temperature.

Screen Saver Appoximately 15 min. after last operation, background lighting goes out and comes on again upon next key operation. Simultaneous operation of decimal point and RIGHT/LEFT arrows lets you change over between permanent lighting and screen saver.

Setting Local Bus Address The address is set by software. A VLB unit in a DISOCONT system always has address 21. The first and last physical unit on Local Bus must be equipped with bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2. Default is 2-3. Jumper W100 is reserved for servicing and must be in position 2-3 in normal mode.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

39

Control Unit VLB 20105 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) General Technical Data Dimensions

240 x 120 x 74

Mounting recess

231 x 111 -0...+0.5

Keyboard

Flexible membranes

Weight

1 kg

Operating temperature (Ambient temperature outside of housing)

0 °C ... 50 °C

Storage temperature

-20 °C ... 60 °C

Protected to IEC60 529

Front to IP54, NEMA 4 type Rear to IP20

Power supply

85-264V /3W

Local Bus Connector X4 For details, see “Network Connections” item. Isolation

Optocouplers

Baud rate, software dependent

125kbit/s

Cable

3x2x0.23 screened by pair, 1)

Local Bus supply

24V DC, 80mA

Status

LED for Communication OK

Connector

Phoenix MSTB, contact spacing 3.5mm, max. 1.5mm2

1) DeviceNet thin cable recommended Ordering Data

40

Part number

Ordering number

VLB 20105

V00 3048.B01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Fig. 27:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

41


Fig.28: Wiring diagram VLB 20105

42

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Control Unit VLB 20120 (Fieldbox Variant)

Control Unit VLB 20120 (Fieldbox Variant) The control unit is used for direct operation of DISOCONT instead of, or in addition to, the use of a plant control. The LCD screen displays all necessary information for measurement and control. The VLB is connected to the VSE via local bus. This version is for use at the feeder site and is mounted in fieldbox.

Fig. 29: Operator panel in fieldbox

For contrast setting and screen saver, see VLB 20100.

Setting Local Bus Address The address is set via software. A VLB in a DISOCONT system always has address 21. The first and the last physical unit on local bus must be equipped with bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2. Default is 2-3. Provided for servicing, jumper W100 must be in position 2-3 in normal mode.

Address Setting After power-up, the welcome text “Schenck Process DISOCONT Operator Panel” is displayed for some seconds. Operate red ENTER key to display and change set address. When using VLB unit in DISOCONT system, always select address 21. Return to normal mode by operating ENTER once again.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

43


Fig. 30: Jumpers and bus connectors

General Specifications Housing

glass fiber reinforced, polyester

Dimensions

260 x 160 x 110mm

Fixation

same as VFG 20100

Keyboard

Flexible membranes

Power supply DC

24V....300V ±15%

Power supply AC

110V...230V, -20% +10%, 47...63 Hz

Fuse

4ATr

Power consumption

4W

Operating temperature (ambient temperature outside of housing)

-20 °C ... 50 °C

Storage temperature

-20 °C ... 60 °C


IP65, NEMA 4 type

Local Bus For details on local bus, see “Network Connections” item. Isolation

Optocouplers


125kBit/s ... 500kBit/s

Cable

3x2x0.23 screened by in pairs, 1)

Power supply

24V DC, 250mA for supply of other bus stations

Natural current load

Max 40mA

Display

LED for communication OK

Connector



44

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Components Type VLB 20120 VSC 20106 cable for mobile use VLB 20120-E22*

*

unit for use in explosive zone 22

In potentially explosive atmospheres, VLB 20120-E22 must be firmly attached (not plugged-in). A VLB 20120 (normal design) with VSC 20106 can also be used for service work on scales approved for explosive zones if it is safeguarded that there is no explosive atmosphere when it is used.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

45


Wiring Diagram

Fig. 31: Wiring diagram VLB 20120

46

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Fieldbus Interfaces

Fieldbus Interfaces General Information A process management system in platn control communicates with DISOCONT preferably via fieldbus. All field-bus interfaces are designed as plug-in cards for system unit VSE. Depending on the fieldbus system used there are some restrictions to observe: length of cables, bus termination etc. You will find details in the technical data section of the corresponding bus. To ensure optimal EMC interference protection, we recommend to use only cables specified for the single fieldbus systems. Please observe the hints given in chapter Configurations/Network Connections.

Mounting Fieldbus Card n n n n n n n

disconnect all VSE cables from power remove cover plate replace spacer bolts by bolts provided with the fieldbus card configure card; if necessary, jumper insert card so that the plug connects fasten card with spacer bolts remount cover plate.

ATTENTION! To protect the p.c. board from damage, tighten all pins using a 5.5 mm socket wrench.

Cover pl at e

Fig. 32: Mounting a fieldbus plug-in card

Each installation set comes with identification label. Please glue the into fieldbus frame of cover plate.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

47

Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100

Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100 The module can be plugged into system unit VSE to provide an interface to one of the following bus systems: n SE-Bus for connection to Schenck MULTICONT n Modbus/J-Bus n 3964R Due to the specifications for these bus systems, the connection with two or four wires as well as the communication speed is different. Although the hardware and software for all buses is on-board, only one bus at a time can be used. The selection is made via jumpers, see Fig. . The first and last device on all buses must have a bus termination (e.g. W500 and W501 set to 1-2). Addresses set on device are irrelevant. Pin assignment for fieldbus connector X20 Pin No.

SE-Bus

RS 422

RS 485

1

RX/TX

RX

RX/TX

2

RXinv./TXinv.

RXinv.

RXinv./TXinv.

3

GND 1)

GND 1)

GND 1)

4

-

TX

-

5

-

TXinv.

-

1) Normally, GND connectors are not connected externally. Ordering Data

48

Part No.

Ordering No.

VSB 20100

F217910.01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100

Fig. 33:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

49

DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100

DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100 The module can be plugged into the VSE to provide an interface to CAN-Bus with DeviceNet protocol. Attention: The poll rate of the host computer must be shorter than 200ms.

Fig. 34: Jumpers, switches and bus connectors; view on equipment side

The bus address is set via software (s. BV-H2103). Please observe that the first and last station on CAN bus must be equipped with a bus termination. To do so, set jumper W160 to position 1-2 on respective device, and maintain jumper position 2-3 on all other devices. Pin assignment Pin No.

X20 (only for internal use)

X2 (for optional use)

1

0V

-

2

CAN-

CAN-

3

Shielding 1)

0V

4

CAN+

-

5

+24V

-

6

n. a.

-

7

n. a.

CAN+

8

n. a.

-

9

n. a.

+24V

1) Normally, shielding terminal ist not connected externally

50

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100 Potential separation

Optocouplers



Cable

3x2x0.23 screened in pairs, 1)

Power supply

5V DC internal

Current supply

Max 175mA

Status


Connector

Phoenix MSTB 3.5, max. 1.5m2



BV-H2085 GB, 0825

51

DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20101

DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20101 The module can be plugged into the VSE to provide an interface to CAN-Bus with DeviceNet protocol. Poll rate of host computer is not limited.

VCB010

X20 XC3

W160 5

4

3

2

1

3 2 1

Fieldbus card connector

Fig. 35: Jumpers, switches and bus connectors; view on equipment side

The bus address is set via software (s. BV-H2103). Please observe that the first and last station on CAN bus must be equipped with a bus termination. To do so, set jumper W160 to position 1-2 on respective device, and maintain jumper position 2-3 on all other devices. Pin assignment Pin No.

X20/XC3 (only for internal use)

1

0V

2

CAN-

3

-

4

CAN+

5

+24V

6

n. a.

7

n. a.

8

n. a.

9

n. a.

Apply screen to cable pull relief.

52

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20101 Isolation

Optocouplers



Cable

3x2x0.23 screened in pairs 1)

Power supply

5V DC internal

Current supply

Max 175mA

Status


Connector

Phoenix MSTB 3.5, max. 1.5m2



BV-H2085 GB, 0825

53

PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100

PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100 The module can be plugged into VSE to provide an interface to PROFIBUS-DP. Designed and certified in accordance with DIN 19245 and EN 50170 Part 2, the module caters for automatic baud rate recognition of up to 12 Mbit/s (12Mbaud). When using cable type “A”, make sure the following cable lengths for the entire bus are not exceeded: Speed [kbit/s]

Max. cable length [m]

12000, 6000, 3000

100 (max. 24 bus stations admitted)

1500

200

500

400

187,5

1000

For further details, see Profibus specification (http://www.profibus.com) With baud rates smaller than 12Mbaud, number of bus stations is limited only by required cycle time and address. For 12Mbaud, the following physical restriction additionally applies: number of stations x cable length in m <2000. The circuit board has two plug-ins for bus connection. DISOCONT uses connector X20. Please keep in mind that the first and last device on a PROFIBUS-DP system must have a bus termination. To do so, set W500 and W501 to 1-2 to provide termination. Attention: both jumpers must be in same position. Note: If the last actively terminated slave is removed from bus, the entire bus may be disturbed, particularly in the case of alternating scales. This problem can be avoided with the use of a separate active terminal resistor, e.g. Siemens ordering number 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0. You can also order the terminal resistor from Schenck (ordering number V014298.B01).

54

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100

Fig. 36: Bus connector, view on equipment side

Pin assignment Pin No.

X20

X1 (for optional use)

1

RxD/TxD-P *

Shielding

2

RxD/TxD-N **

Reserved

3

DGND

RxD/TxD-P *

4

VP

CNTR-P

5

-

DGND

6

-

VP

7

-

Reserved

8

-

RxD/TxD-N **

9

-

Reserved

* Data line is additionally identified by letter B; core colour is red. ** Data line is additionally identified by letter A; core colour is green. Apply shield to cable pull relief, not to connector. For connection, use standard Profibus cable.

Ordering Data


Type

Ordering no.

VPB 20100

F217908.01

Profibus special connector for X1

V022274.B01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

55

Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V)

Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V) Plugged onto the DISOCONT fieldbus connector, this optional module provides an Ethernet interface 10Tbase to the TCP client. Place bridge W100 (determination of the voltage supply) always on 2-3. To configure the module, load down the MultiServer software from the Schenck Service page in the Internet.

Fig. 37:

Pin Assignment Pin

X20

RJ45 (only for internal use)

1

PE 1)

TX+

2

RX+

TX-

3

RX-

RX+

4

TX+

—

5

TX-

—

6

—

RX-

7

—

—

8

—

—

1) Normally, PE ist not connected externally Technical Data Isolation

Yes

Voltage supply

Internal

Connector (X20)

Phoenix spacing 3.5 max. 1.5mm²

Type

Ordering number

VET 20100

V030590.B01

Ordering Data

56

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V)

Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V) Plugged onto the DISOCONT fieldbus connector, this optional module provides an Ethernet interface (10/100 BaseT) to the TCP client.

Fig. 38:

Pin Assignment Pin

X20

RJ45 (only for internal use)

1

PE 1)

TX+

2

RX+

TX-

3

RX-

RX+

4

TX+

—

5

TX-

—

6

—

RX-

7

—

—

8

—

—

1) Normally, PE ist not connected externally Technical Data Isolation Voltage supply

yes Internal

Ethernet Topologie

10/100 BaseT

Connector (X20)

Phoenix MSTB, Raster 3,5 max., 1,5mm

Ordering Data Type VET 20101


2

Ordering number V048756.B01

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

57

Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V)


58

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled Drives

Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled Drives If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, control unit bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables manual control. A drive can be started or stopped, and a continuous value, e.g. belt speed, can be keyed in. MANUAL mode ignores the DISOCONT output signals. Switch S1 lets you select AUTO/MANUAL mode and start/stop drive in MANUAL mode. The R1 switch controls the drive speed.

Fig.39: Local control unit VLG 20100 Housing


Dimensions

160 x 160 x 90mm

Weight fully equipped

4.5kg

Limit values Load relay outputs

230V/3A

Limit values Relay outputs for control magnitude change

30V/1A

Limit values Open collector outputs

30V/10mA

Inputs

24V/5mA


IP65, NEMA 4 type


-25....50°C


Ordering no.

VLG 20100

F217920.02


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

59


Wiring Diagram

Fig. 40: Wiring diagramm: Load control units used with VSE and VEA

If VLG 20100 is used on a feeder as second VLG, jumper terminals X2-15 and -16.

60

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Fig. 41:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

61

Local Control Unit VLG 20105

Local Control Unit VLG 20105 For Position-controlled Drives

If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, control unit bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables manual control. Switch S2 lets you start/stop a position-controlled prefeeder, e.g. feed gate. MANUAL mode ignores the DISOCONT output signals. Switch S1 lets you select AUTO/MANUAL mode and triggers quick closing, if required.

Fig. 42: Housing


Dimensions

160 x 160 x 90mm

Weight completely equipped

4.5kg


230V/3A


30V/1A


30V/10mA

Inputs

24V/5mA


IP65, NEMA 4 type


-25...50°C

Part no.

Ordering no.

VLG 20105

F217923.02

Ordering Data

62

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Wiring Diagram

Fig. 43:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

63


Fig. 44:

64

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Local Control Unit VLG 20110 If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, local control unit bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables direct control. Main drive and up to three auxiliary drives can be started and stopped and a value (e.g. for belt speed) can be keyed in. Switch S1 lets you select Service mode. Service mode ignores the DISOCONT outputs signals. Switch R1 controls the drive speed. Switches S2...S4 let you control the auxiliary units. Local Control Unit VLG 20110 comes with all relays and motor protections required for the drives specified in your order.

Fig. 45: Local control unit VLG 20110

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced, wall-mounted

Dimensions

160 x 360 x 90mm

Weight fully equipped

4.5kg


230V/3A

Limit value Relay outputs for control magnitude change

30V/1A

Limit value Open collector outputs

30V/10mA

Inputs

24V/5mA


IP65, NEMA 4 type


-25...50°C


Ordering no.

VLG 20110 basic unit (without relays and motor protections)

F217921.02


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

65


Fig. 46:

66

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Wiring Diagram

Fig. 47: Wiring Diagram: Local control unit used with VSE (sample)/(Drive Control Variant 1)


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

67


Fig. 48: Wiring diagram: Local control unit used with VSE (sample) Drive Control Variant 2)

Refer to VLG 20100 for the logic diagram (F21756201)

68

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Local Control Unit VLG 20120 This unit comprises DISOCONT measuring and control electronics VSE 20100 for a continuous scale as well as the control elements for local control without using the DISOCONT electronics. The unit is designed for connection to scale. The control elements enable changeover to local mode, definition of volumetric feed rate, start of main feed drive and max. 3 auxiliary drives as a function of variant. S1 lets you select mode (Automatic/Local) and starts main drive. R1 controls speed of main drive. Optional switches S2 – S3 enable auxiliary drives to be started. In addition, the unit is equipped with sockets for connection of service connectors for EasyServe and/or VLB 20120.

Fig. 49: Local control unit VLG 20120


Housing

Glass fibre reinforced

Dimensions

582 x 190 x 125 mm


230 V / 3 A


30 V / 1 A


30 V / 10 mA

Inputs

24 V / 5 mA

Connector (integrated)

EasyServe Service-VLB 20120

Weight completely equipped

8 kg

Protected to IEC 60 529

IP 65, NEMA 4-typ

Ambient temperature

-25 ... 50 °C

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

69

Local Control Unit VLG 20120 Ordering Data VLG 20120 base unit without optional switches and integral motor starters

V015297.B01

Fig. 50: Dimension drawing VLG 20120

70

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Wiring Diagram

Fig. 51: Wiring diagram: Local control unit VLG 20120 Base variant and options (sample)


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

71


Fig. 52:

Refer to VLG 20100 for the logic diagram (F2175620)

72

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe VPC 20150 Designed as DISOCONT configuration and diagnosis tool, EasyServe operates under NT, 98, 2000, XP. All controlling and calibrating operations can be performed via control unit. The menu control allows flexible and easy adjustment, provides access to service data and enables to operate the scale for service purpose. It is also possible to customize the menu text on PC screen and all operator units. EasyServe ships on a CD-ROM which includes this manual and the program itself partitioned into folders.


Ordering no.

VPC20150 CD-ROM EasyServe

F217 940.01


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

73

EasyServe VPC 20150

Service Bus and Remote Diagnostics Service-Bus: Access to all feeders; no replugging. Remote Diagnostic: Access round the world or inside a bigger plant. The figure shows the interconnection of the devices. Converters RS232-RS485 must be mounted close to VSE, or PC (cable <12m). This might require additional fieldboxes in a mechatronic arrangement. For smaller installations, all converters could be mounted in one enclosure. The RS485 bus can be extended to max. 1200 m. With the help of standard telephone modems, remote access is possible. Converters RS232-RS485 are commercial standard components that include automatic detection of flow direction RS485 bus. We suggest to use SPECTRA, type SSW-520A.

System unit Fieldbus module

VSE

Power supply

RS 232

I/O

System unit

Local Bus

*

Fieldbus module

VAK 20230 Interface converter and power supply

VSE

Power supply

RS 232

I/O

OPTION

Local Bus

94-264VAC

System unit Fieldbus module

Next bus station VAK 20200

VSE

Power supply

RS 232

I/O

Interface converter

OPTION

Local Bus

Next bus station * -A3

VAK 20210 MODEM, Interface converter and power supply

94-264VAC OPTION

Service/configuration connector

-A1

VAK 20230 Interface converter and power supply

-A2

VAK 20200 Interface converter

94-264VAC

Next bus station * If a continuous cable is used, insert PG screwing.

BVM2125GB_3.cdr

Fig. 53:

74

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


EasyServe VPC 20150

Fig. 54: Bus Configuration VAK 20200


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

75

EasyServe VPC 20150

Fig.: 55 Bus Configuration VAK 20210

76

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


EasyServe VPC 20150

Fig. 56: Bus Configuration VAK 20230


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

77

EasyServe VPC 20150


78

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed pick-up


Fig. 57:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

79



80

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Accessories

Accessories Sealing of Control Boxes (Protection Type) Our control boxes are highly protected to ingress of water and dust. When used in areas with dust explosion hazard (dust Ex), the type of protection is essential for compliance with the Ex regulations. To ensure the high degree of protection, observe the following: n Observe the specified range for cable screwed connections. In the safe area, the sealing ring can be replaced; with “approved” screwed connections, the latter must be exchanged completely. n With non-used cable screwed connections, press sealing plug into screwing to completion. To do so, remove clamping nut and press in plug flush with the outer screwing edge . Replace clamping nut and tighten. n In critical locations, e.g. wet and dirty areas below a road weighbridge, apply pure silicone grease to seal in cover and to cable gland sealing rings.

Service hint: Sealing areas in fieldboxes When opening a connector box after several year of operation, check sealing areas in PG cable glands and cover joints. Apply silicone grease to cover joints. When replacing a cable in the PG screwed connection, replace sealing rubber.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

81

Accessories

Recommended Cables Loss-in-weight feeder VLW

Cable gland field housing

Weighfeeder VDB

Load cell

6*0.23, Sh

PWS=5mm RTN=6.5mm

Load cell

6*0.23, Sh

<6.5mm

M12 3,7-7 mm

Load cell

3*2*0.22, Sh

3849.306

Load cell

3*2*0.23, Sh

3849.306

M16 4,5-10 mm

Speed

2*0.23

3849.415

Speed

2*0.23

3849.415

M12 3,7-7 mm

Flap-sensor

2*0.23

BIC

2*0.23

3849.415

M12 3,7-7 mm

Drive unit (FAE) + feedback + supply

3*2*0.23, Sh

3849.306

VLG, Local control unit

14*0.25, Sh

3849073 or any other <10mm

M20 7-13 mm

Fill Flap

3*1.5 flex

3814.350

Aux Drv.

3*1.5 flex

3814.350

M16 4,5-10 mm

Local bus

2*0,33+2*0,22 Sh1)

3849.074

Local bus

2*0,33+2*0,22 Sh1)

3849.074

M16 4,5-10 mm

Power Aux

3*1.5 stiff or flex

3806.300

Power Aux

3*1.5 stiff or flex

3806.300

M16 4,5-10 mm

Blow

3*1.5 flex

3814.350

Reserve

-

-

M16 4,5-10 mm

Power

3*1.5 stiff or flex

3806.300 or 3814.350

Power

3*1.5 stiff or flex

3806.300 or 3814.350

M20 7-13 mm

Fieldbus Devicenet*

2*0,33+2*0,22 Sh1)

3849.306 3849.074*

Fieldbus

2*0,33+2*0,22 Sh1)

3849.306 3849074*

M16 4,5-10 mm

Fieldbus Profibus

1*2*0,64

3849.219

Fieldbus

1*2*0,64

3849.219

M16 4.5-10 mm

S tart Agitator + feedback

4*0.22

3849.415

Reserve

-

-

M12 3,7-7 mm

Service tool, Modem

3*2*0.23

3849.306

Service tool, Modem

3*2*0.23

3849.306

M16 4,5-10 mm

1) DeviceNet thin cable When using underground laying, a protective tube for the cables is required.

82

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Accessories

Drive Units Motor AC 3-Phase Converter The AC 3-phase converters used for drive control are either mounted locally (integrated compact drives) or in a control box. When mounting converters in a control box, consider EMC problems and motor cable maximum lengths. Normally, cables of up to 300m can be used. (Additional filters may be required.) With shielded motor cables, maximum length is reduced by approx. 50%. Vibro Feeder Controller Designed to control the amplitude of a vibro feeder, the FRS feeder controller is available in a fieldbox or as a panel mounting unit.

Fig. 58: FRS 52 in fieldbox


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

83

Accessories

Junction Box VAK 20100 Designed for cross-connection and voltage distribution, junction boxes VAK 20100 and VAK 20120 are used with certain types of scale and extended variants. 240

110

6,5

Fig. 59: Junction Box VAK

Ordering Data

84

Part no.

Ordering no.

VAK 20100

E 144 535.01

VAK 20120

F 217 763.03

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Accessories

Laptop Connecting Set (PC with Easyserve)

Fig. 60: Wiring Diagram

The laptop connecting set is installed in the VSE as standard component. The connecting set is used whenever local conditions do not permit the housing cover to be removed for VSE parametrization. With the use of the connecting set, a laptop with the EasyServe software can be plugged onto the closed VSE from the outside. Consisting of a prewired device socket, connecting set VSC20108 is inserted into the existing 10mm hole of a VFG/VSE combination or in Multifeed support in place of a cable screwed connection (PG 7) and connected on VSE terminal strip -X5. A protective cap is affixed to an adjacent PG screwing with the use of a captive nylon cord. The PC connecting cable VSC 20107 is plugged into the device socket from the outside and connected to the PC COM port via a 9-pin sub-D connector. Safety Hint: In Dust-Ex Zones, the device socket has to point downward in accordance with standard regulations. This means that the connecting set must not be used with Multifeed supports mounted in Dust-Ex zones. Ordering Data

Ordering No.

System cable VSC 20107, 2m PC cable for PC COM port

F217 739.01

System cable VSC 20108, device socket with protective cap, IP65

F217 740.01


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

85

Accessories

Connecting Set For Portable VLB The connecting set enables the scale to be parametrized via a portable control unit of the VLB 20120 type and can be used whenever local conditions do not allow a PC laptop with the much more convenient and versatile EasyServe software to be used. The portable VLB 20120 is plugged into the user*s terminal box VAK 20115. VAK 20115 is wired with local bus and the VSE system unit power supply.

Fig. 61: Dimension drawing

86

Ordering Data

Ordering No.

Terminal box VAK 20115 75*80*75, IP65, GFK-reinforced polyester incl. 5 m connecting cable

F 217 737.02

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Accessories

Fig. 62:


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

87

Use in the Hazardous Area

Use in the Hazardous Area General Safety Hints n

n n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

Exclusively use the equipment in the zone indicated on type plate, or in the safe area. Observe the safety data specified on the equipment. Operate the equipment as originally intended and in irreproachable condition. Exclusively use the equipment within the ambient temperature limits indicated on type plate. Conversion and modification of the equipment is not permitted. Make sure the specified operating voltage limit is not exceeded. Observe maximum line cross-section and current of terminals. Keep hands off plug-in connectors if a potentially explosive atmosphere is present. If replacement or repair is necessary, only use the genuine Schenck spare parts. Always have repair work performed by qualified explosion protection experts in accordance with local standards. When performing any kind of work on the equipment, pay heed to the local safety and accident prevention rules. Connect metal housings to the existing potential equalization line. Electrical equipment of type –E22 or –2D is provided only for use in areas where propagating brush discharges are unlikely.

Approvals and tests are performed in accordance with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX). The source standards are stated in the conformity declaration. Pay heed to the local safety and accident prevention rules.

Installation To erection and operation, the relevant European standards, the national regulations for device safety, and the generally accepted technical practices apply. n If necessary, replace cable inlets by the elements with reduced cross-section supplied with your equipment.. n Never use bushings. n To ensure the required type of protection, tighten screwings to 3.0Nm (M16), or 6.0Nm (M20) torque. n To ensure proper pull relief, exclusively connect fixed cables and lines. n Make sure the equipment is suitable for the existing Ex zone. n Warning signs in national language can be obtained from Schenckfor free. Connect potential equalization lines to protective ground or existing potential equalization system. n

88

BV-H2085 GB, 0825



Commissioning n

n

n

n

n

When putting the equipment into operation, ascertain that technical equipment data are met. Check to see that the equipment is undamaged and in perfect condition. Close any open holes in accordance with the requisite type of protection. Plug-in connectors on housings are equipped with dust-proof caps that must be secured by bracket and special lock. Check to see that the required explosion protective equipment properly operates.

Maintenance n

n

n

n n

n

n

If operated properly in accordance with installation instructions and ambient conditions, no regular maintenance is required. When servicing electrial equipment in potentially explosive atmospheres, comply with the European Standards (EN) and national regulations. Before opening a housing with non-instrinsically safe circuits, make sure it is de-energized. Never modify the equipment. Before restart, check to see if the explosion protective equipment properly operates. Before restart, watch out for the presence of dust inside the equipment and remove, if necessary. Always clean plastic parts using antistatic detergents.

With aluminium housing, never use spark-forming tools.

Disposal Observe the applicable local regulations.


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

89


Gas-Ex Area Zone 1 Not approved for use in Zone 1, the weighing electronics must be mounted in the safe area. The residual equipment, e.g. control boxes, drives, sensors and other types of transducer must be approved for use in Zone 1 (Category II 2G) and protected by suitable equipment (disconnectors). Controlled drives are designed with flameproof enclosure “d”. Mains-supplied drives are designed for increased safety “e”. Load cells and speed sensors are designed intrinsically safe “i”. List of disconnectors Designation / Type

Ordering no.

Switching amplifiers for speed and proximity sensors (e.g. gate feedback) to NAMUR with supply voltage 20-30V to type of protection EEx ib IIC.

3732055

Type GHG 1223121A2009 (CEAG) Load cell barriers Use

Type

Socket for barriers

GHG 1100000W9106

V000972.B01

Supply 1-4 4000-ohm load cells (e.g. RT)

SB-0016

V000958.B01

Supply 1-3 350-ohm load cells

SB-0015

V000956.B01

Signal; sense for 4000, or 350 ohms

SB-0014

V000957.B01

Disconnectors (e.g. Z barriers, switching amplifiers) must be tested by a notified authority and mounted in the safe area.

90

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Use in the Hazardous Area INSTALLATIONS HINT: Make sure barrier -A13(23) is mounted between -A12(22) and -A14(24). If multiple scales are available, ensure min. 4 cm space between individual groups.

Fig. 63: Mechanical Construction

Fig. 64: Sensor Connection to Weighing Electronics


BV-H2085 GB, 0825

91


Gas-Ex Area Zone 2 DISOCONT assemblies of special design are not suited for use in Zone 2 and must be mounted in the safe area. The compliance with the Ex regulations is confirmed by a manufacturer’s declaration. According to the Ex regulations, load cells and initiators are classified as simple equipment, so that appertaining equipment (Z-barriers and switching amplifiers) can be omitted.

Dust-Ex Area Zone 21 DISOCONT assemblies are not suited for use in Zone 21 and must be mounted in the safe area. Any other equipment, e.g. drives, initiators, must be suited for use in Zone 21 (Category II 2D). A corresponding type examination certificate or manufacturer’s declaration must be available.

Dust-Ex Area Zone 22 Specially designed DISOCONT assemblies are suited for use in Zone 22. The compliance with the Ex regulations is confirmed by a manufacturer’s declaration. The residual equipment, e.g. drives, initiators, must be suitaed for use in Zone 22 (Category II 3D). A corresponding type examination certificate or manufacturer’s declaration must be available.

92

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Fieldbus Accessories

Fieldbus Accessories The DISOCONT system is designed such that normally no additional assemblies for wiring the fieldbus are required. Fieldbus Cable f. Local bus, Profibus DP, FMS, SE-bus, Interbus, Modbus For universal use up to 500kb/s d=7.1mm 6-core f. Profibus DP, Bis 12 MB/s violet special cable d=7.7mm 2-core f. DeviceNet,


thin ylw special cable

Schenck ordering no.: 3849306 Schenck ordering no.: 3849219 Schenck ordering no.: 3849074d=6.9mm 4-core

BV-H2085 GB, 0825

93

Fieldbus Accessories


94

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


Attachment To Scale

Fig. 68: Schematic Diagram: MULTIDOS Weighfeeder

Fig. 67: Schematic Diagram: MULTIGRAV

96

BV-H2085 GB, 0825


EasyServe Installation Instructions

DE

Installationsanleitung

GB

Installation Instructions

FR

Instructions de service

IT

Instructions d’installation

ES

Instrucciones para la instalación

PT

Instruções de instalação

GR

Ïäçãßá åãêáôÜóôáóçò

PL

Wskazówki instalacyjne

CZ

Návod k instalaci

RU

Ðóêîâîäñòâî ïî ýêñïëóàòàöèè

BV-H2098AA

PASS – Ein Service, auf den Sie zählen können Schnell, umfassend, überall auf der Welt

PASS - Service you can rely on Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world

Qualität und Zuverlässigkeit sind die Grundsteine unserer Unternehmensphilosophie. Darum setzen wir ein umfassendes Servicekonzept einfach voraus, und zwar von der strengen Qualitätskontrolle, Installation und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur nahtlosen Unterstützung über den gesamten Produktlebenszyklus.

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire product life cycle.

Mit mehr als 30 Servicestandorten und über 180 Servicespezialisten können Sie jederzeit auf uns zählen, wo und wann immer Sie uns brauchen. Es ist völlig egal, wo Sie sind, unsere Spezilisten sind da, um Sie mit weltweit bestem, persönlichem und umfassendem Service zu beraten und zu unterstützen. Während der Geschäftszeiten stehen Servicespezialisten aller Geschäftsbereiche zur Analyse der Probleme und Ausfälle bereit. Auf unserer Website www.schenckprocess.com finden Sie den Schenck Process Standort in Ihrer Nähe.

With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever – you need us. It doesn’t matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures. Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.

Unser umfassendes Process Advanced Service System (PASS), das an Ihre Anforderungen angepasst ist, bietet Ihnen den besten Service. Sie suchen nach individuellen, maßgeschneiderten Servicelösungen? Dann ist unser modulares Servicesystem PASS genau das Richtige für Sie. Es umfasst das gesamte Servicespektrum, von einfachen Inspektionen bis hin zum vollständigen Serviceprogramm. Interessiert? Weitere Informationen zu den einzelnen Bestandteilen unseres Serviceangebots finden Sie auf unserer Website www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Kostenlose 24 h Notfall-Service-Hotline in Deutschland

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany

Haben Sie einen Ausfall oder Probleme außerhalb der normalen Geschäftszeiten? Unser Servicepersonal ist rund um die Uhr auf Abruf, um Ausfälle, Serviceterminplanung und andere Notfälle zu behandeln.

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

( +49 171 2 25 11 95 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment ( +49 172 6 50 17 00 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

© by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008 Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany ( +49 61 51-15 31 0 www.schenckprocess.com Alle Informationen sind unverbindlich. Spezifikationsänderungen All information is given without obligation. All specifications are vorbehalten. subject to change.


Note: This is a translation of the original document.

Contents Deutsch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Lieferumfang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Programmstart und Anschluss der Waage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Erforderliche PC-Ausstattung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Items Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Start Program and Connect Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Program EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Français . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Fourniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Démarrage du programme et raccordement du doseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Programme EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Equipement - PC nécessaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Italiano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Fornitura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Installazione. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Avvio programma e collegamento della bilancia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Programma EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Equipaggiamento PC necessario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Español . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Volumen de suministro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Instalación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Lanzar el programa y conectar la báscula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 El programa EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Equipo requerido del PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Português . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Volume de fornecimento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Instalação . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Iniciar o programa e conectar a balança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Programa EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Equipamento necessário . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

ÅëëçíéêÜ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Óýíïëï áðïóôïëÞò . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ÅãêáôÜóôáóç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ¸íáñîç ðñïãñÜììáôïò êáé óýíäåóç ôçò æõãáñéÜò . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ðñüãñáììá EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Áðáéôïýìåíïò åîïðëéóìüò H/Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

EasyServe  Schenck Process

BV-H2098AA, 0834

I1

Polski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zakres dostawy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Instrukcja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Startowanie programu i przy³¹czenie wagi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Program EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Wymagane PC-wyposa¿enie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Èesky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Rozsah dodávky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Instalace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Spuštení programu a pripojení váhy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Potrebné vybavení PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Ðóññêèé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Îáúåì ïîñòàâêè . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Óñòàíîâêà . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Ïóñê ïðîãðàììû è ïîäêëþ÷åíèå âåñîâ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Ïðîãðàììà·EasyServe·VPC·20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Íåîáõîäèìîå îñíàùåíèå êîìïüþòåðà. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

I2

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Deutsch

Deutsch

Lieferumfang – –

Installationsmedium CD-ROM Installationsanweisung

Installation EasyServe Legen Sie die CD VPC20150 in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk. Die Installation beginnt normalerweise automatisch. Wenn nicht, öffnen Sie den Windows-Explorer und wählen Ihr CD-ROM-Laufwerk aus. Starten Sie VPC20150.exe. Das automatische Installationsprogramm durchläuft eine Reihe von Dialogen, die zu bestätigen sind. Upgrade Falls bereits eine alte Version von EasyServe installiert ist, wird Setup diese zuerst entfernen. Jetzt kann die Installation wie oben beschrieben durchgeführt werden. Achtung Um das Programm EasyServe zu Installieren, muß man unter Windows 2000/XP/Vista als Benutzer in der Gruppe der Administratoren eingetragen sein. Um das Programm auszuführen ist die Berechtigung eines Hauptbenutzers notwendig.

Programmstart und Anschluss der Waage Wenn die Installation abgeschlossen ist, finden Sie unter Start – Programme – Schenck Process EasyServe ein Symbol zum Starten der Applikation. Die Verbindung zwischen Waage und dem PC kann auf eine der folgenden Arten erfolgen: a) b) c)

d)

Bei Einbau der VSE im Schaltschrank verbinden Sie die COM-Schnittstelle des PC mit der RS232-Schnittstelle (-X8) der DISOCONT- und der INTECONT PLUS Systemeinheit VSE über das mitgelieferte Kabel (HD20 9polig Stecker-Buchse 1:1). Ist die VSE vor Ort in ein Feldgehäuse eingebaut, verwenden Sie das mitgelieferte Spezialkabel und stecken dieses in den Rundstecker am Feldgehäuse und die COM-Schnittstelle des PCs (HD20 9-polig). Reicht die Länge der mitgelieferten Kabel nicht aus, so kann ein speziell angefertigtes Kabel verwendet werden. Die Länge dieses Kabels darf 12 m nicht überschreiten. Soll ein längeres Kabel Verwendung finden, so sind Wandler, z.B. Schenck VAK 202x0, zwischenzuschalten. Bei der ortsfesten Installation eines Kabels ist dieses am Stecker X5 anzuschließen. Der parallele Anschluss von mehr als einem PC an die selbe Waage ist nicht möglich. Sollen mehrere Waagen über ein Kabel von einem PC angesprochen werden, so sind Wandler VAK 202x0 zwischenzuschalten. Diese Wandler sind von Schenck im Feldgehäuse erhältlich. Ist die Waage mit einer Ethernet-Schnittstelle und Protokoll Modbus-TCP ausgestattet, z.B. über die Feldbuskarte VET 20100, so kann sich EasyServe auch über Ethernet mit der Waage verbinden. Ist die Waage dagegen mit Ethernet-IP Schnittstelle ausgerüstet, kann EasyServe sich nicht über Ethernet verbinden.

Die Bedienungsanleitung des Programms finden Sie in der EasyServe-Online-Hilfe. Rufen Sie dazu Hilfe zu EasyServe im Hilfe-Menü. Hilfe, die die Waage betreffen, erreichen Sie durch Betätigung der F1-Taste.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

1

Deutsch

Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe ist das PC-Programm für Inbetriebnahme und Service des DISOCONT und des INTECONT PLUS. Es sind alle Bedienungen und Justage, ohne Einschränkungen, möglich. EasyServe ist lauffähig unter dem Betriebssystem Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Die Menüsteuerung ermöglicht flexible und leichte Einstellung und bietet Zugang zu allen Instandhaltungsdaten. Mit dem EasyServe-Programm kann die Waage zu Servicezwecken betrieben werden. Die Menütexte auf dem PC-Bildschirm und allen eventuell vorhandenen Bedieneinheiten können kundenspezifisch angepaßt werden. EasyServe wird auf einer CD-ROM geliefert, die sowohl das Programm als auch die Handbücher enthält.

Erforderliche PC-Ausstattung – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Freier Festplattenspeicher 900MB Anzeige VGA, 32768-Farben Bildschirm empfohlen Betriebssystem Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista mit dem jeweils aktuellen ServicePack COM-Schnittstelle RS 232 oder Ethernet-Schnittstelle RJ45 Maus oder anderes Zeigegerät CD-ROM Laufwerk

Bestelldaten – VPC20150 CD-ROM

2

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


English

English Items Supplied – –

CD-ROM installation medium Instruction manual

Installation EasyServe Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open Windows explorer and select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double-click on file. The automatic installation program prompts you through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm. Upgrade If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC, Setup will remove it, and the installation can be performed as described above. Attention To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the group of administrators under Windows 2000/XP/Vista. To execute program, main user rights are required.

Start Program and Connect Scale When installation is complete, start application using the Start button available under Start – Programs – Schenck Process EasyServe. To connect scale and PC, there is no single solution:

a) b) c)

d)

If the VSE unit is mounted in control cubicle, connect PC COM interface with RS232 interface of (-X8) DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS system unit using cable supplied (HD20 9-pole socket 1:1). If the VSE is mounted in a fieldbox, use the special cable supplied and plug it into round plug on fieldbox and PC COM port (HD20 9-pole). If the cable supplied is not long enough, use special cable of 12m maximum length. If a longer cable is needed, employ converters, e.g. Schenck VAK 202x0. When firmly connecting a cable, use connector X5. Parallel connection of multiple PCs to the same scale is not possible. If multiple scales are to be addressed via PC cable, employ converters supplied by Schenck in a fieldbox. If the scales are equipped with an ethernet interface and accept the Modbus-TCP protocol, i.e. per VET 20100 fieldbus card, EasyServe can establish a connection with the scales via ethernet. If the scales are instead equipped with an Ethernet-IP interface EasyServe will not be able to establish a connection.

The EasyServe on-line help offers instructions for program operation. Go to Help menu and call EasyServe help. For instructions on scale, operate F1 button.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

3

English

Program EasyServe VPC 20150 Designed as PC program for DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS commissioning and servicing, EasyServe lets you perform any operating and calibrating operation. The program is operable under Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista operating systems. The control unit lets you perform all controlling and calibrating operations without any restrictions. The menu control permits flexible and easy adjustment, lets you access service data, operate the scale for servicing, and customize the menu texts on PC screen and all operator units. EasyServe comes on a CD-ROM including both program and manuals.

Minimum System Requirements – – – – – – –

Pentium or CPU-compatible 900MB free hard disk space VGA display, 32768 colour monitor recommended Operating systems Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista with latest service packs COM interface RS 232 or Ethernet interface RJ45 Mouse or other type of pointer CD-ROM drive

Ordering data – VPC20150 CD-ROM

4

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Français

Français Fourniture – –

Un CD-ROM d’installation Instruction pour l’installation

Installation EasyServe Placez le CD, VPC20150 dans le lecteur CD-ROM. Normalement l’installation débute automatiquement. Si cela n’est pas le cas, ouvrez le programme Windows-Explorer et sélectionnez votre lecteur de CD-ROM. Vous trouverez le fichier VPC20150.exe. Ouvrez le par un double clic. Le programme automatique d’installation se déroule avec une suite de dialogues qu’il faut confirmer. Upgrade S’il existe déjà une ancienne version installée de l’EasyServe, la commande Setup effacera d’abord celle-ci. Maintenant l’installation comme décrit ci-dessus peut commencer. Attention Pour pouvoir installer le programme EasyServe, il faut être enregistré sous Windows 2000/XP/Vista comme utilisateur dans le groupe des administrateurs. Pour pouvoir exécuter le programme il est nécessaire d’avoir l’autorisation d’un utilisateur principal.

Démarrage du programme et raccordement du doseur Quand l’installation est terminée, vous trouvez sous Démarrage – Programme – Schenck Process EasyServe un symbole pour démarrer l’application. Le raccordement entre le doseur et le PC peut être réalisé par l’une des manières suivantes: a) b) c)

d)

En implantant la carte VSE dans l’armoire d’appareillage reliez l’interface -COM du PC avec l’interface- RS232 (-X8) du DISOCONT- et l’unité système VSE de l’INTECONT PLUS grâce au câble livré avec l’installation (HD20 à 9 pôles, prise-fiche 1:1). Si la VSE est implanté en local dans un coffret correspondant, veuillez utiliser le câble spécial fourni et enfichez le dans la prise ronde sur le coffret local et dans la prise d’interface -COM du PC. (HD20 9-pôles) Si la longueur du câble fourni n’est pas suffisante, on peut utiliser un câble spécialement fabriqué pour votre cas particulier. Toutefois la longueur de ce câble ne doit pas dépasser 12 m. S’il s’avérait nécessaire d’utiliser un câble plus long, il faudrait prévoir le branchement intermédiaire de convertisseurs, par exemple le VAK 202x0 de Schenck. Lors de l’installation d’un câble inamovible celui-ci doit être raccordé sur la prise X5. Le raccordement en parallèle de plus de un PC sur le même doseur n’est pas possible. Si plusieurs doseurs doivent être consultés par l’intermédiaire d’un seul câble à partir d’un PC, alors il faut prévoir le raccordement complémentaire de convertisseurs VAK 202x0. Ces convertisseurs peuvent être approvisionnés chez Schenck déjà implantés en coffret local. Si le doseur est muni d’une interface Ethernet et du protocole Modbus-TCP, par exemple via la carte de bus de terrain VET 20100, alors EasyServe peut également se raccorder au doseur par l’intermédiaire de l’Ethernet. Cependant, si le doseur est équipé d’une interface Ethernet-IP, EasyServe ne pourra pas se relier à l’aide de l’Ethernet.

Vous trouverez l’instruction de service du programme dans l’aide - EasyServe-Online. Pour ce


BV-H2098AA, 0833

5

Français faire sélectionner aide à l’ EasyServe dans le menu -aide. Les aides, qui concernent le doseur, peuvent être obtenues par action sur la touche F1.

Programme EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe est le programme-PC pour la mise en service et l’entretien du DISOCONT et de l’ INTECONT PLUS. Toutes les commandes et ajustage, sans limitations sont possible. EasyServe peut fonctionner sous les systèmes d’utilisation Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. La commande du menu permet un accès flexible et facile au réglage et offre accès à toutes les données concernant l’entretien. Avec le programme EasyServe le doseur peut être utiliser pour des fins d’entretien. Les textes du menu sur l’écran du PC et toutes les unités de pilotage éventuellement existantes peuvent être adaptés spécifiquement aux besoins du client. EasyServe est livré sur un CD-ROM, qui contient aussi bien le programme que les manuels d’utilisation.

Equipement - PC nécessaire – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Mémoire libre sur le disque dur 900MB Indication VGA, écran avec 32768-couleurs recommandé Système d’exploitation Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista avec selon le cas le ServicePack actuel. Interface -COM RS 232 ou interface - Ethernet RJ45 Souris ou autre appareil de pointage Lecteur CD-ROM

Données pour une commande – VPC20150 CD-ROM

6

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Italiano

Italiano Fornitura – –

Mezzo di installazione CD-ROM Istruzioni di installazione

Installazione EasyServe Introdurre il CD VPC20150 nel drive del CD-ROM. L’installazione incomincia di solito automaticamente. In caso contrario aprire il Windows-Explorer e selezionare il drive CD-ROM. Nel sottoarchivio VPC20150 o Disk1 si trova il file VPC20150.exe. Richiamarlo cliccando due volte. Il programma di installazione automatico scorre con una serie di dialoghi che devono essere di volta in volta confermati. Upgrade Se è già installata una vecchia versione di EasyServe, il Setup prima la cancellerà. Ora l’installazione può essere eseguita nel modo descritto sopra. Attenzione Per installare il programma EasyServe, bisogna essere registrati nei sistemi operativi Windows 2000/XP/Vista come utenti nel gruppo degli amministratori. Per poter eseguire il programma è necessaria l’autorizzazione di un utente principale.

Avvio programma e collegamento della bilancia Quando l’installazione è conclusa, si trova sotto Avvio – Programmi – Schenck Process EasyServe un simbolo per l’avvio dell’applicazione. Il collegamento tra bilancia ed il PC può avvenire in uno dei seguenti modi: a)

b)

c)

d)

Durante il montaggio del VSE nell’armadio di comando collegare l’interfaccia COM del PC con l’interfaccia RS232- (-X8) del DISOCONT e dell’ INTECONT PLUS unità di sistema VSE mediante il cavo fornito (HD20 a 9 poli spina-connettore 1:1). SE il VSE è montato sul posto in una custodia industriale, utilizzare il cavo speciale fornito ed introdurre quest’ultimo nella spina circolare alla custodia industriale e nell’interfaccia COM del PC (HD20 a 9-poli). Se la lunghezza del cavo fornito non è sufficiente, si può utilizzare un cavo speciale. La lunghezza di questo cavo non deve superare i 12 metri. Se fosse necessario un cavo più lungo, bisogna interposizionare convertitori, per es. Schenck VAK 202x0. In caso di installazione fissa di un cavo, esso deve essere collegato alla spina X5. L’allacciamento parallelo di più di un PC alla stessa bilancia non è possibile. Se più bilance sono interpellate da un PC mediante un cavo, allora bisogna interposizionare convertitori VAK 202x0. Questi convertitori si trovano nella custodia industriale della Schenck. Se la bilancia è provvista di un interfaccia Ethernet e protocollo Modbus-TCP per es. attraverso la scheda del bus di campo VET 20100, l’ EasyServe si può collegare attraverso Ethernet con la bilancia. Se la bilancia invece è provvista con l’interfaccia Ethernet-IP, l’ EasyServe non si può collegare attraverso l’ Ethernet. Le istruzioni sull’uso del programma si trovano nell’aiuto Online EasyServe. Richiamare l’aiuto per EasyServe nel menu Help. Aiuti riguardo alla bilancia si possono raggiungere attivando il tasto F1.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

7

Italiano

Programma EasyServe VPC 20150 L’ EasyServe è il programma PC per la messa in funzione e l’assistenza tecnica del DISOCONT e dell’ INTECONT PLUS. Sono possibili tutte le operazioni e calibrazioni senza limitazioni. L’ EasyServe funziona con i sistemi operativi Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Il comando di menu rende possibile impostazioni flessibili e semplici ed offre accesso a tutti i dati di manutenzione. Con il programma EasyServe la bilancia può essere azionata a scopi di assistenza tecnica. I testi di menu sullo schermo del PC e tutte le unità di comando eventualmente presenti possono essere adattati in modo specifico per il cliente. L’ EasyServe viene fornito con un CD-ROM, che contiene sia il programma che i manuali per l’uso.

Equipaggiamento PC necessario – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Memoria libera sul disco fisso 900MB Visualizzazione VGA, consigliato schermo a 32768 colori Sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista con il relativo ServicePack attuale Interfaccia COM- RS 232 o interfaccia Ethernet- RJ45 Mouse o un altro apparecchio di indicazione Drive CD-ROM

Dati di ordinazione – VPC20150 CD-ROM

8

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Español

Español Volumen de suministro – –

Soporte de información para la instalación : CD-ROM Instrucciones de instalación

Instalación EasyServe Introducir el CD VPC20150 en la unidad de CD-ROM. Normalmente, la instalación empieza automáticamente. Si no es así, hay que abrir el Explorer de Windows y seleccionar la unidad de CD-ROM respectiva. En el subdirectorio VPC20150 ó Disk1 se halla el fichero VPC20150.exe. Hay que llamarlo mediante un clic doble. El programa automático de instalación recorre una serie de diálogos que hay que confirmar. Extensión (Upgrade) En caso de que ya exista una versión vieja de EasyServe, Setup va a borrarla ante todo. Ahora, la instalación puede realizarse como descrito más arriba. Atención Para instalar el programa EasyServe, uno debe ser inscrito como usuario en el grupo de los administradores bajo Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Para ejecutar el programa, es necesario tener la autorización de un usuario principal.

Lanzar el programa y conectar la báscula Una vez terminda la instalación, bajo Marcha – Programas – Schenck Process EasyServe se halla un símbolo para lanzar la aplicación. La conexión entre la báscula y el PC puede realizarse según uno de los siguientes modos : a)

b) c)

d)

Al instalar la unidad VSE en el armario de mando, conecte Vd. el interfaz COM del PC con el interfaz RS232 (-X8) de la unidad de sistema VSE del DISOCONT y del INTECONT PLUS por medio del cable suministrado (HD20 de 9 polos, enchufe casquillo 1:1). Si se ha instalado la unidad VSE localmente en una caja de campo, utilize Vd. el cable especial suministrado e introdúzcalo en el enchufe redondo de la caja de campo y en el interfaz COM del PC (HD20 de 9 polos). Si la longitud de los cables suministrados no es suficiente, se puede utilizar un cable fabricado especialmente. La longitud de este cable no debe sobrepasar 12 m. Si se debe utilizar un cable más largo, hay que interconectar convertidores, tal como VAK 202x0 de Schenck, por ejemplo. Instalando un cable de manera fija, éste debe conectarse al conector X5. No es posible realizar la conexión en paralelo de más de un PC a la misma báscula. Si deben ser activadas varias básculas por un PC vía un cable, hay que interconectar convertidores VAK 202x0. Estos convertidores se pueden obtener de Schenck en una caja de campo. Si la báscula está equipada con un interfaz Ethernet y el protocolo Modbus-TCP, por ejemplo via la tarjeta de bus de campo VET 20100, entonces EasyServe puede también conectarse con la báscula via Ethernet. Si, por lo contrario, la báscula está equipada con el interfaz Ethernet-IP, EasyServe no puede conectarse via Ethernet. Las instrucciones de uso del programa se hallan en la ayuda ‘on-line’ de EasyServe. Llamar ‘Ayuda acerca de EasyServe’ en el menú de ayuda. Para obtener ayuda con respecto a la báscula, hay que pulsar la tecla F1.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

9

Español

El programa EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe es el programa de PC para la puesta en servicio y el servicio del DISOCONT y del INTECONT PLUS. Son posibles todos los manejos y ajustes, sin restricción. EasyServe funciona bajo el sistema de explotación Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. La gestión de menús permite el ajuste de manera fácil y flexible y facilita el acceso a todos los datos de mantenimiento. Con el programa EasyServe, la báscula puede utilizarse para los fines del servicio. Los textos de menú en la pantalla del PC y en todas las unidades de manejo eventualmente existentes son adaptables al cliente. EasyServe se suministra en un CD-ROM que embarca tanto el programa como los manuales.

Equipo requerido del PC – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Memoria de disco duro libre 900 MByte Display VGA, pantalla con 32768 colores recomendable Sistema de explotación Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista con el actual ‘ServicePack’ respectivo Interfaz COM RS 232 ó interfaz Ethernet RJ45 ‘Ratón’ u otro dispositivo de indicación Unidad CD-ROM

Datos de pedido – CD-ROM VPC20150

10

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Português

Português Volume de fornecimento – –

Meio de instalação CD-ROM Instruções de instalação

Instalação EasyServe Introduza o CD VPC20150 na drive de CD-ROM. Normalmente a instalação inicia automaticamente. Se não for assim, abra o Windows-Explorer seleccionando a sua drive de CD-ROM. No sub-directório VPC20150 ou Disk1 encontrará o ficheiro VPC20150.exe. Chame-o fazendo um clique duplo. O programa automático de instalação percorre uma série de diálogos a ser confirmados. Upgrade Se estiver instalada uma versão antiga do EasyServe, esta será, em primeiro lugar, removida. Depois será possível efectuar a instalação como descrito atrás. Atenção Para instalar o programa EasyServe, é necessário estar registado, em Windows 2000/XP/Vista, como usuário no grupo de administradores. Para executar o programa é necessário ter a autorização de usuário principal.

Iniciar o programa e conectar a balança Uma vez terminada a instalação, encontrará um símbolo para iniciar a aplicação, seleccionando Iniciar – Programas – Schenck Process EasyServe. A conexão entre a balança e o computador PC pode ser efectuada por um dos seguintes modos: a) b) c)

d)

Ao instalar a unidade VSE no armário de distribuição, conecte o interface COM do PC com o interface RS232 (-X8) da unidade de sistema VSE do DISOCONT e INTECONT PLUS através do cabo fornecido (ficha-conector HD20 de 9 polos 1:1). Se a unidade VSE estiver instalada no local numa caixa de campo, utilize o cabo especial fornecido conectando-o à ficha redonda na caixa de campo e no interface COM do PC (HD20 de 9 polos). Se o comprimento dos cabos fornecidos não for suficiente, é possível utilizar um cabo especial cujo comprimento não deve exceder 12 m. No caso de se utilizar um cabo mais comprido, intercalar conversores, p.ex. Schenck VAK 202x0. No caso da instalação fixa do cabo, conectá-lo na ficha X5. A conexão paralela de mais de um PC à mesma balança não é possível. No caso de se desejar operar várias balanças através de um cabo de um PC, é necessário intercalar conversores VAK 202x0. Estes podem-se obter da Schenck em caixa de campo. Se a balança estiver provida dum interface Ethernet e protocolo Modbus-TCP, p.ex. através da placa de bus de campo VET 20100, o EasyServe pode-se conectar com a balança através do Ethernet. Se a balança, porém, for provida dum interface Ethernet-IP, não é possível que EasyServe conecte através do Ethernet.

As instruções sobre o uso do programa estão contidas na ajuda online do EasyServe. Chame a ajuda sobre EasyServe no menu de ajuda. Para obter ajuda sobre a balança carregue na tecla F1.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

11

Português

Programa EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe é o programa PC para a operação inicial e trabalhos de assistência e manutenção do DISOCONT e INTECONT PLUS. Permite todas as operações e ajustes sem restrições. EasyServe funciona com o sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. O comando baseado em menus permite um ajuste flexível e fácil dando acesso a todos os dados de manutenção. O programa EasyServe permite a operação da balança para fins de manutenção, os textos dos menus no ecrã do PC e das unidades de comando eventualmente existentes podendo ser adaptados às necessidades específicas do cliente. EasyServe é fornecido num CD-ROM contendo o programa e também os manuais.

Equipamento necessário – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Espaço disponível em disco rígido 900MB Ecrã VGA de 32768 cores recomendado Sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista com o respectivo Service Pack mais recente Interface COM RS 232 ou interface Ethernet RJ45 Rato ou outro indicador Drive de CD-ROM

Dados para pedidos – VPC20150 CD-ROM

12

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


ÅëëçíéêÜ

ÅëëçíéêÜ Óýíïëï áðïóôïëÞò – –

ÌÝóï åãêáôÜóôáóçò CD-ROM Ïäçãßá åãêáôÜóôáóçò

ÅãêáôÜóôáóç EasyServe ÔïðïèåôÞóôå ôï CD VPC20150 óôïí ïäçãü CD-ROM. ÊáíïíéêÜ ç åãêáôÜóôáóç îåêéíÜ áõôüìáôá. ÅÜí äåí óõìâåß áõôü, áíïßîôå ôïí Windows Explorer êáé åðéëÝîôå ôïí ïäçãü CD-ROM. Óôïí õðïêáôÜëïãï VPC20150 Þ óôï äßóêï 1 (Disk1) èá âñåßôå ôï áñ÷åßï VPC20150.exe. ÊáëÝóôå ôï ìå äéðëü êëéê. Ôï áõôüìáôï ðñüãñáììá åãêáôÜóôáóçò ðåñíÜ áðü ìéá óåéñÜ äéáëüãùí ôïõò ïðïßïõò ðñÝðåé íá åðéâåâáéþíåôå. ÁíáâÜèìéóç Óôçí ðåñßðôùóç ðïõ õðÜñ÷åé åãêáôåóôçìÝíç Þäç ìéá ðáëéÜ Ýêäïóç ôïõ EasyServe, ç ëåéôïõñãßá åãêáôÜóôáóçò èá ôçí áðïìáêñýíåé ðñþôá. Ôþñá ìðïñåß íá äéåîá÷èåß ç åãêáôÜóôáóç üðùò ðåñéãñÜöçêå áíùôÝñù. Ðñïóï÷Þ Ãéá íá åãêáôáóôÞóåôå ôï ðñüãñáììá EasyServe, ðñÝðåé óôá Windows 2000/XP/Vista íá Ý÷åôå äéêáéþìáôá äéá÷åéñéóôÞ ùò ÷ñÞóôçò. Ãéá íá äéåîÜãåôå ôï ðñüãñáììá åßíáé áðáñáßôçôç ç åîïõóéïäüôçóç åíüò âáóéêïý ÷ñÞóôç.

¸íáñîç ðñïãñÜììáôïò êáé óýíäåóç ôçò æõãáñéÜò ¼ôáí ç åãêáôÜóôáóç Ý÷åé ïëïêëçñùèåß, èá âñåßôå óôï Start - Programme - Schenck Process EasyServe (¸íáñîç - ÐñïãñÜììáôá - Schenck Process EasyServe) Ýíá óýìâïëï ãéá ôçí åêêßíçóç ôçò åöáñìïãÞò. Ç óýíäåóç ìåôáîý ôçò æõãáñéÜò êáé ôïõ Ç/Õ ìðïñåß íá ãßíåé ìå Ýíáí áðü ôïõò áêüëïõèïõò ôñüðïõò: á)

â)

ã)

ä)

ÊáôÜ ôçí ôïðïèÝôçóç ôïõ VSE óôï åñìÜñéï äéáêïðôþí óõíäÝåôå ôç äéáóýíäåóç COM ôïõ Ç/Õ ìå ôç äéáóýíäåóç RS232 (-X8) ôïõ DISOCONT êáé ôçò ìïíÜäáò óõóôÞìáôïò INTECONT PLUS VSE ìÝóù ôïõ áðåóôáëìÝíïõ êáëùäßïõ (HD20 9 ðüëïé âýóìá õðïäï÷Þ 1:1). ÅÜí ôï VSE Ý÷åé ôïðïèåôçèåß åðß ôüðïõ óå ðåñßâëçìá ðåäßïõ, ÷ñçóéìïðïéÞóôå ôï áðåóôáëìÝíï åéäéêü êáëþäéï êáé åéóÜãåôÝ ôï óôï óôñïããõëü âýóìá óôï ðåñßâëçìá ðåäßïõ êáé óôç äéáóýíäåóç COM ôïõ H/Y (HD20 9 ðüëïé). ÅÜí äåí åðáñêåß ôï ìÞêïò ôïõ áðåóôáëìÝíïõ êáëùäßïõ, ôüôå ìðïñåß íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß Ýíá åéäéêÜ êáôáóêåõáóìÝíï êáëþäéï. Ôï ìÞêïò áõôïý ôïõ êáëùäßïõ äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé íá õðåñâáßíåé ôá 12 ì. ÅÜí ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß Ýíá ìáêñýôåñï êáëþäéï, ôüôå ðñÝðåé íá äéáóõíäåèåß Ýíáò ìåôáôñïðÝáò, ð.÷. ï Schenck VAK 202x0. ÊáôÜ ôç ìüíéìç åãêáôÜóôáóç åíüò êáëùäßïõ, áõôü ðñÝðåé íá óõíäåèåß óôï âýóìá ×5. Ç ðáñÜëëçëç óýíäåóç ðåñéóóïôÝñùí ôïõ åíüò Ç/Õ óôçí ßäéá æõãáñéÜ äåí åßíáé äõíáôÞ. ÅÜí ðñÝðåé íá ëåéôïõñãïýí ðåñéóóüôåñåò æõãáñéÝò ìÝóù åíüò êáëùäßïõ åíüò Ç/Õ, ôüôå ðñÝðåé íá äéáóõíäåèïýí ìåôáôñïðåßò VAK 202x0. Áõôïß ïé ìåôáôñïðåßò äéáôßèåíôáé áðü ôçí Schenck óôï ðåñßâëçìá ðåäßïõ. ÅÜí ç æõãáñéÜ åßíáé åîïðëéóìÝíç ìå ìéá äéáóýíäåóç Ethernet êáé ðñùôüêïëëï Modbus-TCP, ð.÷. ìÝóù ôçò êÜñôáò åëÝã÷ïõ bus ðåäßïõ VET 20100, ôüôå ôï EasyServe ìðïñåß íá óõíäåèåß êáé ìÝóù Ethernet ìå ôç æõãáñéÜ. ÅÜí áíôßèåôá ç æõãáñéÜ åßíáé


BV-H2098AA, 0833

13

ÅëëçíéêÜ åîïðëéóìÝíç ìå äéáóýíäåóç Ethernet IP, ôï EasyServe äåí ìðïñåß íá óõíäåèåß ìÝóù ôïõ Ethernet. Èá âñåßôå ôï åã÷åéñßäéï ÷åéñéóìïý ôïõ ðñïãñÜììáôïò óôçí Online âïÞèåéá ôïõ EasyServe. Ãéá áõôü êáëÝóôå ôçí ÂïÞèåéá ãéá ôï EasyServe óôï ìåíïý âïÞèåéáò. ËáìâÜíåôå âïÞèåéá ðïõ áöïñÜ ôç æõãáñéÜ, ðáôþíôáò ôï ðëÞêôñï F1.

Ðñüãñáììá EasyServe VPC 20150 Ôï EasyServe åßíáé ôï ðñüãñáììá ôïõ Ç/Õ ãéá ôç èÝóç óå ëåéôïõñãßá êáé ôï óÝñâéò ôïõ DISOCONT êáé ôïõ INTECONT PLUS. Åßíáé äõíáôïß üëïé ïé ÷åéñéóìïß êáé ïé ñõèìßóåéò ÷ùñßò ðåñéïñéóìïýò. Ôï EasyServe åêôåëåßôáé óå Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Ôï óýóôçìá åëÝã÷ïõ ôùí ìåíïý äéåõêïëýíåé ôçí åõÝëéêôç êáé åýêïëç ñýèìéóç êáé ðñïóöÝñåé ðñüóâáóç óå üëá ôá äåäïìÝíá óõíôÞñçóçò. Ìå ôï ðñüãñáììá EasyServe ìðïñåß ç æõãáñéÜ íá ëåéôïõñãåß ãéá óêïðïýò óÝñâéò. Ôá êåßìåíá ìåíïý óôçí ïèüíç ôïõ H/Y êáé óå üëåò ôéò åíäå÷üìåíá õðÜñ÷ïõóåò ìïíÜäåò ÷åéñéóìïý, ìðïñïýí íá ðñïóáñìïóôïýí êáôüðéí åðéèõìßáò ôïõ ðåëÜôç. Ôï EasyServe áðïóôÝëëåôáé óå Ýíá CD-ROM ôï ïðïßï ðåñéÝ÷åé ôüóï ôï ðñüãñáììá üóï êáé ôá åã÷åéñßäéá ÷åéñéóìïý.

Áðáéôïýìåíïò åîïðëéóìüò H/Y – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium Åëåýèåñç ìíÞìç óêëçñïý äßóêïõ 900MB Ðñïôåßíåôáé ïèüíç ìå Ýíäåéîç VGA, 32768 ÷ñùìÜôùí Ëåéôïõñãéêü óýóôçìá Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista ìå ôï åêÜóôïôå ôñÝ÷ïí ServicePack Äéáóýíäåóç COM RS 232 Þ äéáóýíäåóç Ethernet RJ45 Ðïíôßêé Þ Üëëç óõóêåõÞ êáôÜäåéîçò Ïäçãüò CD-ROM

Ðëçñïöïñßåò ðáñáããåëßáò – VPC20150 CD-ROM

14

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Polski

Polski Zakres dostawy – –

Medium instalacji CD-ROM Instrukcja instalacji

Instrukcja EasyServe Proszê w³o¿yæ CD VPC20150 do CD-ROM-stacji dysków. Instalacja zaczyna siê normalnie automatycznie. Je¿eli nie, to proszê otworzyæ Windows-Explorer i wybraæ CD-ROM-stacjê dysków. W podkatalogu VPC20150 albo dysku1 znajd¹ Pañstwo plik VPC20150.exe. Proszê wywo³aæ ten program przez podwójny klik. Automatyczny program instalacji przebiega szereg dialogów które nale¿y potwierdziæ. Uaktualnienie Je¿eli jest ju¿ zainstalowana stara wersja EasyServe, to Setup j¹ usunie. Teraz mo¿e zostaæ przeprowadzona instalacja jak wy¿ej opisano. Uwaga Aby móc zainstalowaæ EasyServe, musi siê byæ wpisany jako u¿ytkownik w grupie administratorów w Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Aby móc pracowaæ z tym programem to konieczne s¹ uprawnienia g³ównego u¿ytkownika.

Startowanie programu i przy³¹czenie wagi Je¿eli instalacja zosta³a zakoñczona, to Pañstwo znajd¹ pod Start – Programy – Schenck Process EasyServe symbol do startu tej aplikacji. Po³¹czenie miêdzy wag¹ a PC mo¿e nast¹piæ na jeden z nastêpuj¹cych sposobów: a) b) c)

d)

Przy wmontowaniu VSE w szafie rozdzielczej proszê po³¹czyæ COM-interfejs PCta z RS232-interfejsem (-X8) DISOCONTa- i INTECONTa PLUS jednostk¹ systemu VSE za pomoc¹ dostarczonego kabla (HD20 9-cio biegunowa wtyczka-gniazdo 1:1). Je¿eli VSE jest wmontowy lokalnie w obudowie polowej, to proszê zastosowaæ dostarczony kabel specjalny i proszê go wetkn¹æ do okr¹g³ej wtyczki w obudowie polowej i do COM-interfejsa PCta (HD20 9-cio biegunowa). Je¿eli d³ugoœæ dostarczonego kabla nie wystarczy, to mo¿na zastosowaæ specjalnie do tego celu zrobiony kabel. D³ugoœæ tego kabla nie mo¿e przekroczyæ 12 m. Je¿eli zachodzi potrzeba zastosowania d³u¿szego kabla to nale¿y u¿yæ przetwornika np. Schencka VAK 202x0. Przy trwa³ej miejscowej instalacji kabla nale¿y go przy³¹czyæ do wtyczki X5. Równoleg³e przy³¹czenie wiêcej jak jednego PCta do tej samej wagi jest niemo¿liwe. Je¿eli powinne byæ odpytane wiêcej wag przez jeden kabel od jednego PCta to nale¿y pod³¹czyæ przetwornik VAK 202x0. Te przetworniki s¹ do nabycia w obudowie polowej od Schencka. Je¿eli waga jest wyposa¿ona w Ethernet-interfejs, np. przez modbus-TCP, przez kartê szynê polow¹ VET 20100, tak mo¿e EasyServe byæ po³¹czony równie¿ z wag¹ przez Ethernet. Przeciwnie, je¿eli waga jest wyposa¿ona w Ethernet-IP interfejsem, EasyServe nie mo¿e po³¹czyæ siê przez Ethrenet.

Instrukcjê obs³ugi programu znajd¹ Pañstwo w EasyServe-Online-pomoc. Proszê w tym celu wywo³aæ pomoc do EasyServe w Pomoc-Menu. Pomoc, która dotyczy wagi osi¹gniecie Pañstwo przez naciœniêcie F1- przycisku.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

15

Polski

Program EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe jest PC-Programem do uruchomienia i serwisu DISOCONTa i INTECONTa PLUS. S¹ mo¿liwe wszystkie obs³ugi i kalibracja, bez ograniczeñ. EasyServe pracuje z systemami operacyjnymi Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Sterowanie menu umo¿liwia ³atwe ustawienia i oferuje dostêp do wszystkich danych potrzebnych do utrzymania wagi w dobrym stanie. Przy pomocy EasyServe-Programu wagê mo¿na u¿ywaæ do celów serwisowych. Teksty menu na monitorze PCta i wszystkich ewentualnie istniej¹cych panelach obs³ugi mog¹ zostaæ dopasowane do potrzeb klienta. EasyServe jest dostarczony na CD-ROMie, który zawiera zarówno program jak rówie¿ podrêczniki obs³ugi.

Wymagane PC-wyposa¿enie – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium wolne miejsce na twardym dysku 900MB Wyœwietlacz VGA, 32768-kolorów monitor zalecany System operacyjny Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista z aktualnym ServicePack COM-interfejs RS 232 albo Ethernet- interfejs RJ45 Mysz albo inny aparat pokazuj¹cy CD-ROM stacja dysków

Dane zamówienia – VPC20150 CD-ROM

16

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Èesky

Èesky Rozsah dodávky – –

Instalacní médium CD-ROM Návod k instalaci

Instalace EasyServe Vlote CD do CD-ROM mechaniky. Instalace se za normálních okolností spustí automaticky. Pokud ne, otevrete Windows Explorer a zvolte Vaší CD-ROM mechaniku. V podadresári VPC20150 nebo Disk1 najdete soubor VPC20150.exe. Vyvolejte ho dvojitým kliknutím. Automatický instalacní program projde radu dialogu, které je nutno potvrdit. Upgrade Jestlie je ji nainstalovaná stará verze EasyServe, Setup ji nejprve odstraní. Nyní mue být provedena instalace, jak je uvedeno výše. Pozor Aby jste mohli program EasyServe nainstalovat, musíte být zaregistrováni pod Window 2000/XP/Vista jako uivatel skupiny administrátoru . Dále je potreba oprávnení hlavního uivatele.

Spuštení programu a pripojení váhy Jestlie byla provedena instalace, najdete pod Start – Programy – Schenck Process EasyServe symbol ke spuštení aplikace. Propojení váhy a PC se mue uskutecnit následovne: a) b) c)

d)

Pri montái VSE do ovládací skríne spojte COM rozhraní pocítace s rozhraním RS232 (-X8) systémové jednotky VSE DISOCONT- a INTECONT PLUS prostrednictvím dodaného kabelu (HD20 9-pólový konektor-zdírka 1:1). Je-li VSE v pouzdre, pouijte dodaný speciální kabel a strcte ho do kulatého konektoru na pouzdre a COM rozhraní pocítace (HD20 9-pólový). Jestlie délka dodaného kabelu nestací, je moné pouít speciálne zhotovený kabel. Délka kabelu nesmí prekrocit 12 m. Pokud by bylo potreba pouít delší kabel, pak je treba do zapojení pridat transformacní jednotku, napr. Schenck VAK 202x0. V prípade pevné instalace kabelu je treba jej zapojit do zásuvky X5. Paralelní zapojení více ne jednoho PC na jednu a tuté váhu není moné. Pokud by na jedno PC pres jeden kabel pristupovalo více vah, je treba do zapojení pridat transformacní jednotky VAK 202x0. Tyto transformacní jednotky jsou k dostání u firmy Schenck v pouzdre. Pokud je váha vybavena ethernetovým rozhraním a sbernicí pro protokol TCP, napr. pres prenosnou sbernicovou kartu VET 20100, mue se EasyServe pripojit k váze i pres ethernet. Jestlie je váha naopak vybavena ethernetovým IP rozhraním, nemue se EasyServe pres ethernet pripojit.

Návod k obsluze programu naleznete v online nápovede pro EasyServe. Nápovedu pro EasyServe vyvoláte pomocí menu Nápoveda. Nápovedu, která se týká váhy, vyvoláte stisknutím klávesy F1.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

17

Èesky

Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 EasyServe je pocítacový program pro servis a uvedení váhy DISCONT a INTECONT PLUS do provozu. Jsou moná všechna pouití a nastavení bez omezení EasyServe je funkcní v operacním systému Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Ovládání menu umonuje flexibilní a jednoduché nastavení a nabízí prístup ke všem servisním údajum. Pomocí programu EasyServe mue být váha provozována pro servisní úcely. Texty v menu na pocítacové obrazovce a ve všech prípadne disponibilních ovládacích jednotkách mohou být prizpusobeny dle poadavku zákazníka. EasyServe je dodán na CD-ROMu, který obsahuje program, jako i prírucky.

Potrebné vybavení PC – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium 400 MB volné pameti na pevném disku 900MB Doporucujeme displej VGA, 32768 barev Operacní systém Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista s aktuálním servisním balíckem COM rozhraní RS 232 nebo Ethernet rozhraní RJ45 Myš nebo jiné ukazovací zarízení CD-ROM mechanika

Objednací údaje – VPC20150 CD-ROM

18

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Ðóññêèé

Ðóññêèé Îáúåì ïîñòàâêè – –

Ñðåäñòâî óñòàíîâêè CD-ROM Ðóêîâîäñòâî ïî óñòàíîâêå

Óñòàíîâêà EasyServe Âñòàâüòå CD VPC20150 â ïðèâîä CD-ROM. Îáû÷íî óñòàíîâêà íà÷èíàåòñÿ â àâòîìàòè÷åñêîì ðåæèìå. Åñëè ýòî íå ïðîèñõîäèò, îòêðîéòå Windows-Explorer è âûáåðèòå ïðèâîä CD-ROM. Íàéäèòå âíèçó â îáîçíà÷åíèè VPC20150 èëè äèñê 1 äàííûå VPC20150.exe. Óñòàíîâèòå ýòó ññûëêó ñ ïîìîùüþ äâîéíîãî ùåë÷êà. Â ïðîãðàììå àâòîìàòè÷åñêîé óñòàíîâêè ïîÿâëÿåòñÿ ðÿä äèàëîãîâ, êîòîðûå íóæíî ïîäòâåðäèòü. Çàìåíà ïðîãðàììíîãî îáåñïå÷åíèÿ íà íîâóþ âåðñèþ Åñëè ñòàðàÿ âåðñèÿ EasyServe óæå óñòàíîâëåíà, òî Setup ñíà÷àëà å¸ óäàëèò. Òåïåðü óñòàíîâêà ìîæåò ïðîâîäèòüñÿ òàê, êàê îïèñàíî âûøå. Âíèìàíèå Äëÿ òîãî ÷òîáû óñòàíîâèòü ïðîãðàììó EasyServe, íóæíî áûòü çàðåãèñòðèðîâàííûì êàê ïîëüçîâàòåëü â ãðóïïå àäìèíèñòðàòîðîâ â Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Äëÿ òîãî ÷òîáû âûïîëíèòü ïðîãðàììó íåîáõîäèìî îáëàäàòü ïðàâîì îñíîâíîãî ïîëüçîâàòåëÿ.

Ïóñê ïðîãðàììû è ïîäêëþ÷åíèå âåñîâ Êîãäà óñòàíîâêà çàêîí÷åíà, íàéäèòå â ññûëêå ïóñê – ïðîãðàììû – ñèìâîë Schenck Process EasyServe äëÿ çàïóñêà ïðèêëàäíîé çàäà÷è. Ñâÿçü ìåæäó âåñàìè è ÏÊ ìîæíî íàñòðîèòü ñëåäóþùèì îáðàçîì: à)

á)

â)

d)

Ïðè óñòàíîâêå VSE íà êîìïëåêñíîì ðàñïðåäåëèòåëüíîì óñòðîéñòâå ñîåäèíèòå ÑÎÌ-ïîðò êîìïüþòåðà ñ ïîðòîì RS232 (-Õ8) DISOCONT – è INTECONT PLUS ñèñòåìíîé åäèíèöû VSE ñ ïîìîùüþ ïîñòàâëÿåìîãî â êîìïëåêòå êàáåëÿ (HD20 9-ïîëþñíîå ýëåêòðè÷åñêîå ãíåçäî 1:1). Åñëè VSE ïîñòàâëåí â çàùèùåííîì êîðïóñå, èñïîëüçóéòå ñïåöèàëüíûé ïîñòàâëÿåìûé â êîìïëåêòå êàáåëü è âñòàâüòå åãî â êðóãëûé øòåêåð íà íà çàùèùåííîì êîðïóñå è â ÑÎÌ-ïîðò êîìïüþòåðà(HD20 9-ïîëþñíîå ýëåêòðè÷åñêîå ãíåçäî). Åñëè äëèíû ïîñòàâëÿåìîãî â êîìïëåêòå êàáåëÿ íå äîñòàòî÷íî, òî ìîæíî èñïîëüçîâàòü ñïåöèàëüíî èçãîòîâëåííûé êàáåëü. Äëèíà ýòîãî êàáåëÿ íå äîëæíà ïðåâûøàòü 12 ì. Åñëè íåîáõîäèìî ïðèìåíèòü áîëåå äëèííûé êàáåëü, òî âêëþ÷àþòñÿ ïðîìåæóòî÷íî òðàíñôîðìàòîðû, íàïðèìåð Schenck VAK 202x0. Ïðè ñòàöèîíàðíîé óñòàíîâêå êàáåëÿ, åãî íóæíî ïîäêëþ÷èòü ê øòåêåðó õ5. Ïàðàëëåëüíîå ïîäêëþ÷åíèå áîëåå ÷åì ê îäíîìó êîìïüþòåðó ê òåì æå âåñàì åíü íåâîçìîæíî. Åñëè íåñêîëüêî âåñîâ àäðåñóþòñÿ ïî ÏÊ-êàáåëþ, òîãäà íóæíî èñïîëüçîâàòü ïîñòàâëÿåìûå Schenck òðàíñôîðìàòîðû â çàùèùåííîì êîðïóñå Åñëè âåñû îñàùåíû èíòåðôåéñîì òèïà «Ýçåðíåò» è øèíîé Modbus-TCP äëÿ ïðîòîêîëà, íàïðèìåð, ÷åðåç ïëàòó øèíû ïîëÿ VE 20100, òî ñâÿçü ïðîãðàììû Easy Serve c âåñàìè âîçìîæíà òàêæå ÷åðåç «Ýçåðíåò». Åñëè, îäíàêî, âåñû îñíàùåíû èíòåðôåéñîì IP òèïà «Ýçåðíåò», òî ñâÿçü ïðîãðàììû EasyServe ÷åðåç «Ýçåðíåò» íåâîçìîæíà.


BV-H2098AA, 0833

19

Ðóññêèé Ðóêîâîäñòâî ïî îáñëóæèâàíèþ ýòîé ïðîãðàììû Âû íàéäåòå ñ ïîìîùüþ EasyServe-Online. Âûçâàòü ñïðàâêó ïî EasyServe ìîæíî â ìåíþ ñïðàâêà. Ñïðàâêó, êîòîðàÿ îòíîñèòñÿ ê âåñàì, ìîæíî ïîëó÷èòü ñ ïîìîùüþ íàæàòèÿ êíîïêè F1.

Ïðîãðàììà·EasyServe·VPC·20150 EasyServe – ýòî êîìïüþòåðíàÿ ïðîãðàììà äëÿ ââåäåíèÿ â ýêñïëóàòàöèþ è îáñëóæèâàíèÿ DISOCONT è INTECONT PLUS. EasyServe ïîçâîëÿåò âûïîëíèòü ëþáûå ôóíêöèè óïðàâëåíèÿ è êàëèáðîâêè.EasyServe çàïóñêàåòñÿ â ñèñòåìå Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Íàñòðîéêà ìåíþ îáåñïå÷èâàåò ãèáêóþ è ëåãêóþ óñòàíîâêó è ïðåäëàãàåò äîñòóï êî âñåì äàííûì ïî òåõíè÷åñêîìó îáñëóæèâàíèþ. Ñ ïîìîùüþ ïðîãðàììû EasyServe ìîæíî âûïîëíÿòü îáñëóæèâàþùèå ôóíêöèè íà âåñàõ. Óïðàâëåíèå ñ ïîìîùüþ ìåíþ íà ýêðàíå êîìïüþòåðà, à òàêæå âñåâîçìîæíûå íàëè÷íûå îáñëóæèâàþùèå äåòàëè ìîãóò ïîäáèðàòüñÿ ïî æåëàíèþ êëèåíòà. EasyServe çàïóñêàåòñÿ ñ ïîìîùüþ CD – ROM, êîòîðûé ñîäåðæèò êàê ïðîãðàììó, òàê è ðóêîâîäñòâî ê íåé.

Íåîáõîäèìîå îñíàùåíèå êîìïüþòåðà – – – – – – –

CPU Pentium 900 Ìáò ñâîáîäíîãî ïðîñòðàíñòâà íà æåñòêîì äèñ Ìîíèòîð VGA, ðåêîìåíäóåòñÿ 32768– öâåòíûé ýêðàí Îïåðàöèîííàÿ ñèñòåìà Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista ñ äåéñòâóþùèì íà äàííîå âðåìÿ îáñëóæèâàþùèì ïàêåòîì ÑÑÎÌ-ïîðò RS 232 èëè Ethernet èíòåðôåéñ RJ45 Ìûøêà èëè äðóãîé óêàçàòåëüíûé ïðèáîð Ïðèâîä CD-ROM

Çàêàçíûå äàííûå – VPC20150 CD-ROM

20

F217 940.01

BV-H2098AA, 0834


Intecont Plus

Recommend Documents